Users Guide

Version 8
Version 8

Weibull++/ALTA 8 Users Guide
Part Identification: RPUGWA8
ReliaSoft Corporation
Worldwide Headquarters
1450 South Eastside Loop
Tucson, Arizona 85710-6703, USA
Tel: 1-520-886-0410
Fax: 1-520-886-0399
Sales and Information: 1-888-886-0410 (Toll-free in the U.S. and Canada)
[email protected]
http://www.ReliaSoft.com
1992-2012 ReliaSoft Corporation, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
Notice of Rights and Limited Rights to Print this Document
If you are a licensed user of the software you are hereby granted the right to print this document in whole
or in part, as needed for your exclusive use in conjunction with the use of the software. Except for the
limited print rights outlined above, no part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form
or by any means, for any purpose, without the express written permission of ReliaSoft Corporation,
Tucson, AZ, USA.
Disclaimer
Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on
the part of ReliaSoft Corporation.
Companies, names and data used herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted.
Use of the software and this document are subject to the terms and conditions set forth in the
accompanying license agreement.
This software and documentation were developed at private expense; no portion was developed with
government funds.
Trademarks
ReliaSoft, Weibull++, ALTA, BlockSim, Synthesis Elements, Synthesis Platform, Xfmea and RCM++ are
trademarks of ReliaSoft Corporation.
Other product names and services identified in this document are trademarks of their respective trademark
holders, and are used for illustration purposes. Their use in no way conveys endorsement or other
affiliation with ReliaSoft Corporation.
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Contents
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide i
Contents
1 Introduction................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 Technical Support ............................................................................................................................................ 1
1.1.1 When Requesting Support ..................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 ReliaSoft Consulting........................................................................................................................................ 2
1.3 Minimum System Requirements ..................................................................................................................... 3
1.3.1 A Note About Enterprise Database Servers........................................................................................... 4
1.4 License Registration and Activation................................................................................................................ 4
1.4.1 How to Activate Each Application on Your Computer ......................................................................... 5
1.4.1.1 Basic Instructions with Direct Communication to the License Server........................................ 5
1.4.1.2 Problems Communicating with the Server.................................................................................. 6
1.4.1.2.1 Possible Solutions: .............................................................................................................6
1.4.1.3 Multiple Ways to Activate........................................................................................................... 7
1.5 Internet Connectivity in Version 8................................................................................................................. 10
1.6 Introduction to the Synthesis Platform.......................................................................................................... 10
1.6.1 Centralized Data Storage and Flexible Permissions............................................................................ 10
1.6.2 Integration with Other Synthesis Elements ......................................................................................... 11
1.6.3 Messages and Action Tracking............................................................................................................ 11
1.6.4 Take Advantage of Internet Connectivity............................................................................................ 11
1.7 Weibull++ Features Overview....................................................................................................................... 12
1.7.1 Standard Life Data Analysis (LDA) .................................................................................................... 12
1.7.2 Degradation Data Analysis.................................................................................................................. 13
1.7.3 Non-Parametric Life Data Analysis..................................................................................................... 13
1.7.4 Warranty Data Analysis....................................................................................................................... 13
1.7.5 Convert Maintenance Event Logs to Failure and Repair Data............................................................ 14
1.7.6 Recurrent Event Data Analysis (RDA) for Repairable Systems ......................................................... 14
1.7.7 Reliability Test Design ........................................................................................................................ 14
1.7.8 Target Reliability Estimator................................................................................................................. 15
1.8 ALTA Features Overview.............................................................................................................................. 15
1.8.1 Accelerated Life Testing Data Analysis .............................................................................................. 15
1.8.2 Time-Varying Stress Profiles ............................................................................................................... 16
1.8.3 Accelerated Degradation Analysis ...................................................................................................... 17
1.8.4 Accelerated Life Test Planning............................................................................................................ 17
1.9 Features Common to Weibull++ and ALTA.................................................................................................. 17
1.9.1 Plots and Charts to Visualize Your Analysis Results .......................................................................... 17
1.9.2 Monte Carlo Simulation ...................................................................................................................... 17
1.9.3 Stress-Strength Calculator and Life Comparison Test......................................................................... 18
Contents
ii http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
1.9.4 Reliability Block Diagrams for Competing Failure Modes................................................................. 18
1.9.5 Workbooks and Reports for Custom Analysis..................................................................................... 18
1.9.6 Quick Parameter Estimator (QPE)....................................................................................................... 18
1.9.7 Quick Statistical Reference.................................................................................................................. 19
1.9.8 Non-Linear Equation Fit Solver and Root Finder ............................................................................... 19
1.10 What's New in Version 8?............................................................................................................................ 19
2 Working in Synthesis .............................................................................................. 21
2.1 Standard and Enterprise Databases................................................................................................................ 22
2.1.1 Note About Establishing a Database Server with Oracle or SQL Server............................................ 23
2.1.2 Creating a New Standard Database ..................................................................................................... 24
2.1.3 Opening an Existing Standard Database.............................................................................................. 24
2.1.4 Creating a New Enterprise Database ................................................................................................... 25
2.1.5 Connecting to an Existing Enterprise Database................................................................................... 27
2.2 Overview of Security Options ....................................................................................................................... 28
2.2.1 Private and Public Projects .................................................................................................................. 29
2.2.2 Project Owner ...................................................................................................................................... 30
2.2.3 Repository-Level vs. Project-Level Security....................................................................................... 31
2.2.3.1 Repository-Level Security........................................................................................................ 31
2.2.3.2 Project-Level Security............................................................................................................... 32
2.2.4 Manage Repository Security................................................................................................................ 34
2.2.4.1 Creating User Accounts............................................................................................................. 35
2.2.4.2 Creating Security Groups .......................................................................................................... 36
2.2.4.3 Table of Database Permissions.................................................................................................. 37
2.2.5 User Login and Contact Info ............................................................................................................... 40
2.2.6 Import Users from Active Directory.................................................................................................... 41
2.2.7 SQL Sever Logins or Using Impersonation......................................................................................... 42
2.2.7.1 Creating Individual SQL Server Logins.................................................................................... 42
2.2.7.2 Using a Group Login................................................................................................................. 43
2.2.7.3 Using Windows Impersonation for the Connection File........................................................... 43
2.2.8 Lock and Unlock Projects.................................................................................................................... 45
2.2.9 Check In or Check Out Projects .......................................................................................................... 45
2.2.10 Item Permissions................................................................................................................................ 47
2.3 Simultaneous Access by Multiple Users ....................................................................................................... 47
2.3.1 Status Indicators.................................................................................................................................. 48
2.3.2 Prior Logins ......................................................................................................................................... 49
2.3.3 Reset In Use Flags............................................................................................................................ 49
2.4 E-mail Settings............................................................................................................................................... 50
2.4.1 Notification Groups ............................................................................................................................. 51
2.5 Manage Units................................................................................................................................................. 51
2.6 Manage Warranty Units ................................................................................................................................. 52
2.7 Default Name Formats................................................................................................................................... 59
2.8 Task Types ..................................................................................................................................................... 60
2.9 Global Identifiers ........................................................................................................................................... 60
2.10 Project Categories ........................................................................................................................................ 61
2.11 Project Baselines.......................................................................................................................................... 62
2.11.1 Create/Restore Baselines for a Project............................................................................................... 63
2.11.2 Manage all Baselines that Exist for the Database.............................................................................. 63
2.12 Backups and Database Maintenance............................................................................................................ 64
2.13 Projects......................................................................................................................................................... 65
Contents
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide iii
2.13.1 Project Properties............................................................................................................................... 66
2.13.2 Project Item Wizard........................................................................................................................... 68
2.13.3 Manage Projects................................................................................................................................. 68
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI) ........................................................................................................... 69
2.14.1 Project Manager................................................................................................................................. 70
2.14.1.1 Project List............................................................................................................................... 73
2.14.1.2 Filter Properties Window ........................................................................................................ 74
2.14.1.3 Current Project Explorer.......................................................................................................... 75
2.14.2 My Portal ........................................................................................................................................... 76
2.14.2.1 Message Window.................................................................................................................... 78
2.14.3 Control Panels.................................................................................................................................... 78
2.14.3.1 Control Panel Identifiers Page................................................................................................. 81
2.14.3.2 Control Panel Publishing Page ................................................................................................ 82
2.14.3.3 Control Panel Notifications Page ............................................................................................ 84
2.14.4 Data Sheets ........................................................................................................................................ 85
2.14.4.1 General Spreadsheets............................................................................................................... 87
2.14.5 Select Existing Window..................................................................................................................... 88
2.14.5.1 Filtering and Inserting Existing Text Descriptions ................................................................. 88
2.14.5.2 Data Sources for Select Existing Window.............................................................................. 89
2.14.6 Change Units Window....................................................................................................................... 89
2.14.7 Ribbon ............................................................................................................................................... 90
2.14.7.1 Quick Access Toolbar ............................................................................................................. 91
2.14.7.2 Backstage View (File Tab)...................................................................................................... 92
2.14.7.3 ReliaSoft Online Pane ............................................................................................................. 94
2.14.7.4 Help Center.............................................................................................................................. 94
2.14.7.5 Home Tab................................................................................................................................ 95
2.14.7.6 My Portal Tab.......................................................................................................................... 97
2.14.7.7 Project Tab............................................................................................................................... 98
2.14.7.8 Insert Tab................................................................................................................................. 99
2.14.7.9 View Tab ............................................................................................................................... 101
2.14.7.10 ALTA Tab ........................................................................................................................... 102
2.14.7.11 Degradation Tab.................................................................................................................. 104
2.14.7.12 Diagram Tab........................................................................................................................ 105
2.14.7.13 Equation Fit Solver Tab....................................................................................................... 107
2.14.7.14 Event Log Tab..................................................................................................................... 107
2.14.7.15 Life Comparison Tab........................................................................................................... 108
2.14.7.16 Life Data Tab....................................................................................................................... 108
2.14.7.17 Non-Parametric LDA Tab ................................................................................................... 110
2.14.7.18 Plot Tab ............................................................................................................................... 111
2.14.7.19 Recurrent Event Data Tab ................................................................................................... 111
2.14.7.20 Sheet Options Tab ............................................................................................................... 112
2.14.7.21 SimuMatic (A) Tab.............................................................................................................. 114
2.14.7.22 SimuMatic (B) Tab.............................................................................................................. 114
2.14.7.23 Stress Profile Tab ................................................................................................................ 114
2.14.7.24 Stress-Strength Tab ............................................................................................................. 114
2.14.7.25 Test Design Tab................................................................................................................... 115
2.14.7.26 Test Plans Tab ..................................................................................................................... 115
2.14.7.27 Warranty Tab....................................................................................................................... 115
2.14.7.28 Workbook Tab..................................................................................................................... 117
2.15 Attachments ............................................................................................................................................... 117
2.15.1 Adding Attachments to Projects ...................................................................................................... 118
2.15.2 Adding Attachments to Resources................................................................................................... 119
Contents
iv http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
2.16 Importing and Exporting............................................................................................................................ 119
2.16.1 Import/Export Entire Projects.......................................................................................................... 119
2.16.2 Import/Export Items or Resources................................................................................................... 120
2.16.3 Import from Previous Versions........................................................................................................ 121
2.16.4 File Import and Conversion............................................................................................................. 122
2.16.4.1 Creating and Using Import Mappings in the File Import Wizard ......................................... 123
2.16.5 Import from Existing Repository..................................................................................................... 124
3 Resources............................................................................................................... 127
3.1 Types of Resources ...................................................................................................................................... 127
3.1.1 Resource Wizards .............................................................................................................................. 129
3.1.1.1 Selecting an Existing Resource ............................................................................................... 130
3.1.1.2 Creating a Resource................................................................................................................. 130
3.1.1.3 Editing a Resource................................................................................................................... 130
3.1.1.4 Removing a Resource.............................................................................................................. 131
3.2 Resource Manager ....................................................................................................................................... 131
3.2.1 Basic Operations................................................................................................................................ 131
3.2.2 Advanced Operations......................................................................................................................... 132
3.2.3 Exporting Information from the Resource Manager ......................................................................... 133
3.2.4 Resource Manager Display Characteristics....................................................................................... 133
3.2.5 Column Chooser ................................................................................................................................ 134
3.2.6 Advanced Filters................................................................................................................................ 135
3.3 Select Resource Window............................................................................................................................. 137
3.4 Dependency Viewer ..................................................................................................................................... 137
3.4.1 Graphical Dependency Viewer .......................................................................................................... 139
3.5 Universal Reliability Definitions (URDs) ................................................................................................... 142
3.6 Models ......................................................................................................................................................... 142
3.6.1 Model Window.................................................................................................................................. 146
3.6.2 Model Wizard .................................................................................................................................... 147
3.6.2.1 Selecting an Existing Model.................................................................................................... 148
3.6.2.2 Creating a Model ..................................................................................................................... 148
3.6.2.3 Editing a Model ....................................................................................................................... 150
3.6.2.4 Removing a Model .................................................................................................................. 150
3.7 Actions ......................................................................................................................................................... 150
3.7.1 Action Notifications Window............................................................................................................ 153
3.7.2 E-mail Action Window...................................................................................................................... 153
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios.................................................................................... 155
4.1 Weibull++ Standard Folio Setup.................................................................................................................. 156
4.1.1 Time Units ......................................................................................................................................... 156
4.2 Data Types ................................................................................................................................................... 157
4.2.1 A Note About Subset IDs .................................................................................................................. 157
4.2.2 Times-to-Failure Data........................................................................................................................ 157
4.2.3 Times-to-Failure with Suspensions (Right Censored Data) .............................................................. 158
4.2.4 Times-to-Failure with Interval and Left Censored Data.................................................................... 159
4.2.5 Times-to-Failure with All Types of Data........................................................................................... 160
4.2.6 Free-Form (Probit) Data .................................................................................................................... 160
4.3 Weibull++ Standard Folio Control Panel..................................................................................................... 160
4.3.1 Parts of the Standard Folio Control Panel ......................................................................................... 161
4.3.2 Selecting the Settings for the Analysis .............................................................................................. 163
Contents
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide v
4.3.3 Evaluating the Results ....................................................................................................................... 165
4.4 Weibull++ Standard Folio Analysis Settings............................................................................................... 167
4.5 Life Data Analysis Plots .............................................................................................................................. 169
4.6 Weibull++ Quick Calculation Pad ............................................................................................................... 172
4.6.1 How to Use the QCP.......................................................................................................................... 172
4.6.2 QCP Calculations .............................................................................................................................. 174
4.7 Life Data Analysis Example ........................................................................................................................ 176
4.8 Weibull++ Distribution Wizard ................................................................................................................... 178
4.8.1 Comparing Distributions ................................................................................................................... 178
4.8.2 Goodness of Fit Tests......................................................................................................................... 179
4.8.3 Setup Window.................................................................................................................................... 180
4.9 Batch Auto Run ........................................................................................................................................... 181
4.9.1 Batch Auto Run Setup ....................................................................................................................... 181
4.9.2 Processing Preferences ...................................................................................................................... 182
4.10 Goodness of Fit Results ............................................................................................................................. 184
4.11 Auto Group Data........................................................................................................................................ 184
4.12 Mixed Weibull Analysis ............................................................................................................................ 185
4.13 Bayesian-Weibull Analysis........................................................................................................................ 189
4.13.1 Example ........................................................................................................................................... 189
4.14 Competing Failure Modes (CFM) Analysis .............................................................................................. 192
4.14.1 Example of CFM Analysis .............................................................................................................. 193
4.14.2 Using Reliability Block Diagrams (RBDs) for Failure Modes Analysis ........................................ 196
4.14.2.1 Example of Using RBDs for Failure Modes Analysis .......................................................... 196
4.15 Alter Parameters Without Recalculation.................................................................................................... 198
4.16 Alter One Parameter and Recalculate........................................................................................................ 198
4.17 Specify Points ............................................................................................................................................ 198
4.18 Calculations with No Data Entered ........................................................................................................... 200
5 ALTA Standard Folios ........................................................................................... 203
5.1 ALTA Standard Folio Setup......................................................................................................................... 204
5.2 ALTA Standard Folio Control Panel............................................................................................................ 207
5.2.1 Parts of the Control Panel .................................................................................................................. 208
5.2.2 Analysis Settings ............................................................................................................................... 210
5.2.3 Calculating and Interpreting the Results............................................................................................ 211
5.2.4 Evaluating the Model Fit ................................................................................................................... 212
5.3 ALTA Plots................................................................................................................................................... 212
5.4 Select Stress Columns.................................................................................................................................. 215
5.5 Stress Transformation .................................................................................................................................. 215
5.6 Use Stress Level........................................................................................................................................... 216
5.7 ALTA Quick Calculation Pad ...................................................................................................................... 216
5.7.1 How to Use the QCP.......................................................................................................................... 216
5.7.2 QCP Calculations .............................................................................................................................. 218
5.8 ALTA Single-Stress Example ...................................................................................................................... 220
5.9 ALTA Two-Stress Example ......................................................................................................................... 222
5.10 Time-Dependent Stress Profiles................................................................................................................. 225
5.10.1 Creating Stress Profiles.................................................................................................................... 225
5.10.2 Using Stress Profiles in the ALTA Standard Folio .......................................................................... 227
5.10.3 Stress Profile Example..................................................................................................................... 229
Contents
vi http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
5.11 ALTA Distribution Wizard......................................................................................................................... 232
5.12 Add or Remove Columns .......................................................................................................................... 233
5.13 Likelihood Ratio Test................................................................................................................................. 234
5.14 Transfer Data to Weibull++ ....................................................................................................................... 235
5.15 Convert Stress Values ................................................................................................................................ 237
5.16 Alter Parameters Without Recalculation.................................................................................................... 238
5.17 Alter One Parameter and Recalculate........................................................................................................ 238
5.18 Calculations with Insufficient Data Entered.............................................................................................. 238
6 Weibull++ Degradation Analysis .......................................................................... 241
6.1 Weibull++ Degradation Analysis Folio ....................................................................................................... 241
6.2 Weibull++ Degradation Plot Sheet .............................................................................................................. 245
6.3 Weibull++ Degradation Analysis Example ................................................................................................. 246
6.4 Degradation Model Wizard.......................................................................................................................... 248
7 ALTA Degradation Analysis.................................................................................. 251
7.1 ALTA Degradation Analysis Folio .............................................................................................................. 251
7.2 ALTA Degradation Plot Sheet ..................................................................................................................... 255
7.3 ALTA Degradation Analysis Example......................................................................................................... 256
7.4 ALTA Degradation Model Wizard............................................................................................................... 258
8 Non-Parametric LDA Folio.................................................................................... 261
8.1 Non-Parametric LDA Folio Data Sheet ....................................................................................................... 261
8.2 Control Panel Settings ................................................................................................................................. 264
8.3 Transferring the Data to a Weibull++ Standard Folio.................................................................................. 266
8.4 Non-Parametric LDA Example ................................................................................................................... 266
8.4.1 Evaluating the Life Data Model ........................................................................................................ 270
8.4.2 Obtaining Results for Other Points in Time ...................................................................................... 271
9 Warranty Analysis.................................................................................................. 273
9.1 Warranty Analysis Folio Setup .................................................................................................................... 273
9.2 Nevada Chart Format ................................................................................................................................... 277
9.2.1 Setting Up the Chart and Entering Data ............................................................................................ 277
9.2.2 Zero-Time Failures ............................................................................................................................ 280
9.2.3 Statistical Process Control ................................................................................................................. 282
9.2.4 Example of a Nevada Chart Warranty Analysis ................................................................................ 284
9.3 Times-to-Failure Format .............................................................................................................................. 288
9.3.1 Entering Data..................................................................................................................................... 288
9.3.2 Example of a Times-to-Failure Warranty Analysis ........................................................................... 289
9.4 Dates of Failure Format ............................................................................................................................... 293
9.4.1 Entering Data..................................................................................................................................... 293
9.4.2 Example of a Dates of Failure Warranty Analysis ............................................................................ 295
9.5 Usage Format ............................................................................................................................................... 298
9.5.1 Entering Data..................................................................................................................................... 298
9.5.2 Estimating Usage............................................................................................................................... 301
9.5.3 Interval Width Estimator ................................................................................................................... 305
9.5.4 Example of a Usage Format Warranty Analysis................................................................................ 308
9.6 Forecasting Warranty Returns...................................................................................................................... 311
9.7 Warranty Analysis Plots............................................................................................................................... 312
Contents
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide vii
10 Event Log Folios.................................................................................................. 315
10.1 Setting Up the Event Log Folio ................................................................................................................. 315
10.2 Event Log Control Panel Settings.............................................................................................................. 317
10.3 Event Log Data Analysis Example............................................................................................................ 320
10.4 Set Shift Pattern ......................................................................................................................................... 324
10.5 Systems Setup............................................................................................................................................ 325
10.6 Transfer Life Data...................................................................................................................................... 326
11 Recurrent Event Data Analysis (RDA) Folios.................................................... 329
11.1 Non-Parametric RDA Folio ....................................................................................................................... 329
11.1.1 Setting Up the Folio and Evaluating Results ................................................................................... 330
11.1.2 Non-Parametric RDA Example ....................................................................................................... 333
11.2 Parametric RDA Folio ............................................................................................................................... 335
11.2.1 Setting up the Folio.......................................................................................................................... 336
11.2.2 Parametric RDA Folio Control Panel Setting.................................................................................. 337
11.2.3 Parametric RDA Folio Quick Calculation Pad................................................................................ 340
11.2.4 How to Use the QCP........................................................................................................................ 340
11.2.5 QCP Calculations............................................................................................................................. 341
11.2.6 Parametric RDA Folio Plots ............................................................................................................ 343
11.2.7 Parametric RDA Example ............................................................................................................... 344
12 Plots ...................................................................................................................... 347
12.1 Plot Sheet Control Panel ............................................................................................................................ 348
12.1.1 F/S Histogram Options .................................................................................................................... 351
12.2 Setting Confidence Bounds ....................................................................................................................... 352
12.3 Show/Hide Plot Items Window.................................................................................................................. 353
12.4 Contour Plots ............................................................................................................................................. 354
12.4.1 Comparing Data Sets ....................................................................................................................... 354
12.5 Specifying Life Lines................................................................................................................................. 355
12.6 Overlay Plots.............................................................................................................................................. 356
12.6.1 Plot Types ........................................................................................................................................ 357
12.6.2 Overlay Plot Control Panel .............................................................................................................. 358
12.7 Side-by-Side Plots...................................................................................................................................... 358
12.7.1 Side-by-Side Plots Control Panel .................................................................................................... 360
12.8 Tips on Working with Plots ....................................................................................................................... 362
12.9 Override Plot Color.................................................................................................................................... 363
12.10 3D Plot ..................................................................................................................................................... 364
12.10.1 3D Plot Control Panel .................................................................................................................... 365
12.10.2 Rotating the Chart.......................................................................................................................... 366
12.10.3 Alter Parameters - 3D Plot............................................................................................................. 367
12.10.4 Saving and Opening Saved 3D Plots............................................................................................. 367
12.10.5 3D Plot Ribbon .............................................................................................................................. 367
12.10.5.1 File....................................................................................................................................... 367
12.10.5.2 Edit ...................................................................................................................................... 368
12.10.5.3 Actions................................................................................................................................. 368
12.10.6 3D Plot Quick Access Toolbar ...................................................................................................... 369
13 Plot Setup............................................................................................................. 371
13.1 Plot Titles Page .......................................................................................................................................... 372
13.2 Axis Titles/Labels Page ............................................................................................................................. 373
Contents
viii http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
13.3 Plot Labels Page......................................................................................................................................... 374
13.4 Legend Page............................................................................................................................................... 375
13.5 Canvas Page............................................................................................................................................... 376
13.6 Grid Page ................................................................................................................................................... 377
13.7 Bars Page ................................................................................................................................................... 378
13.8 Slices Page ................................................................................................................................................. 379
13.9 Plot Items Page .......................................................................................................................................... 380
13.10 Offsets Page ............................................................................................................................................. 381
13.11 Plot Defaults Window.............................................................................................................................. 382
13.11.1 Plot Defaults: Titles Page............................................................................................................... 384
13.11.2 Plot Defaults: Plot Item Display Page ........................................................................................... 385
14 ReliaSoft Draw...................................................................................................... 387
14.1 Linking RS Draw....................................................................................................................................... 387
14.2 RS Draw Menu Bar.................................................................................................................................... 388
14.2.1 File Menu......................................................................................................................................... 388
14.2.2 Edit Menu ........................................................................................................................................ 388
14.2.2.1 Preferences Window.............................................................................................................. 388
14.2.3 Canvas Menu ................................................................................................................................... 389
14.2.4 Shape Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 389
14.2.5 Help Menu ....................................................................................................................................... 390
14.3 RS Draw Toolbars...................................................................................................................................... 390
14.3.1 Standard Toolbar.............................................................................................................................. 391
14.3.2 Edit Toolbar ..................................................................................................................................... 391
14.3.3 Zoom Toolbar .................................................................................................................................. 392
14.3.4 Draw Toolbar ................................................................................................................................... 392
14.3.5 Customizing Bars in the RS Draw Interface.................................................................................... 394
14.3.5.1 Moving Toolbars ................................................................................................................... 394
14.3.5.2 Hiding and Showing Toolbars............................................................................................... 394
14.4 Additional Tools......................................................................................................................................... 394
14.5 Object Properties The Tool Options Area............................................................................................. 394
14.5.1 Lines Properties ............................................................................................................................... 395
14.5.2 Fill Properties .................................................................................................................................. 395
14.5.3 Points Properties .............................................................................................................................. 395
14.5.4 Angles Properties............................................................................................................................. 396
14.5.5 Text Properties ................................................................................................................................. 396
14.5.6 Color Properties............................................................................................................................... 397
14.6 Working with Objects: Examples .............................................................................................................. 397
14.6.1 Drawing a Line ................................................................................................................................ 397
14.6.2 Editing an Object ............................................................................................................................. 397
14.6.2.1 Example: Editing a Line........................................................................................................ 398
14.6.2.2 Example: Resizing a Rectangle............................................................................................. 398
14.7 Saving an Image......................................................................................................................................... 398
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer....................................................................... 399
15.1 Chart Wizard.............................................................................................................................................. 399
15.1.1 Gallery Page..................................................................................................................................... 400
15.1.2 Style Page ........................................................................................................................................ 400
15.1.3 Layout Page ..................................................................................................................................... 401
15.1.4 Axes Page ........................................................................................................................................ 402
Contents
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide ix
15.1.5 Chart Types...................................................................................................................................... 402
15.1.5.1 Area Charts............................................................................................................................ 402
15.1.5.2 Bar Charts.............................................................................................................................. 402
15.1.5.3 Bubble Charts ........................................................................................................................ 402
15.1.5.4 Clustered Bars ....................................................................................................................... 403
15.1.5.5 Combination Charts............................................................................................................... 403
15.1.5.6 Elevation Charts: Surface and Contour ................................................................................. 403
15.1.5.7 Gantt Charts........................................................................................................................... 403
15.1.5.8 Hi-Lo Charts.......................................................................................................................... 403
15.1.5.9 Horizontal Bars...................................................................................................................... 404
15.1.5.10 Line Charts .......................................................................................................................... 404
15.1.5.11 Pie and Doughnut Charts..................................................................................................... 404
15.1.5.12 Polar Charts ......................................................................................................................... 404
15.1.5.13 Radar Charts ........................................................................................................................ 404
15.1.5.14 Step Charts........................................................................................................................... 404
15.1.5.15 3D Scatter Charts................................................................................................................. 404
15.1.5.16 3D XYZ Charts.................................................................................................................... 404
15.1.5.17 XY Charts............................................................................................................................ 404
15.1.6 Modifying Charts with the Chart Wizard ........................................................................................ 404
15.1.7 Format Chart Shortcut Menu........................................................................................................... 405
15.2 Chart Designer ........................................................................................................................................... 405
15.2.1 Command Buttons ........................................................................................................................... 406
15.2.2 Element Tree.................................................................................................................................... 406
15.2.3 Chart Designer Pages....................................................................................................................... 407
15.2.3.1 Appearance............................................................................................................................ 407
15.2.3.2 Backdrop................................................................................................................................ 408
15.2.3.3 Base ....................................................................................................................................... 409
15.2.3.4 Bubble.................................................................................................................................... 410
15.2.3.5 Category Scale....................................................................................................................... 411
15.2.3.6 Contour .................................................................................................................................. 412
15.2.3.7 Date Formats ......................................................................................................................... 413
15.2.3.8 Date Scale.............................................................................................................................. 414
15.2.3.9 Defaults.................................................................................................................................. 415
15.2.3.10 Display................................................................................................................................. 416
15.2.3.11 Elevation.............................................................................................................................. 416
15.2.3.12 Extra Intervals ..................................................................................................................... 418
15.2.3.13 Fill........................................................................................................................................ 419
15.2.3.14 Font...................................................................................................................................... 420
15.2.3.15 Format.................................................................................................................................. 421
15.2.3.16 Guidelines............................................................................................................................ 421
15.2.3.17 Layout.................................................................................................................................. 422
15.2.3.18 Lines .................................................................................................................................... 422
15.2.3.19 Location............................................................................................................................... 423
15.2.3.20 Markers................................................................................................................................ 424
15.2.3.21 Multiple Y ........................................................................................................................... 424
15.2.3.22 No Pages in Common.......................................................................................................... 425
15.2.3.23 Options ................................................................................................................................ 426
15.2.3.24 Order.................................................................................................................................... 427
15.2.3.25 Other .................................................................................................................................... 428
15.2.3.26 Pens...................................................................................................................................... 429
15.2.3.27 Percent Format..................................................................................................................... 430
15.2.3.28 Picture.................................................................................................................................. 430
15.2.3.29 Pie........................................................................................................................................ 431
Contents
x http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
15.2.3.30 Position................................................................................................................................ 433
15.2.3.31 Scale Type ........................................................................................................................... 433
15.2.3.32 Series Type .......................................................................................................................... 434
15.2.3.33 Statistics............................................................................................................................... 435
15.2.3.34 Style..................................................................................................................................... 436
15.2.3.35 Text...................................................................................................................................... 436
15.2.3.36 3D Lighting ......................................................................................................................... 437
15.2.3.37 3D View............................................................................................................................... 438
15.2.3.38 Type..................................................................................................................................... 439
15.2.3.39 Value Format ....................................................................................................................... 440
15.2.3.40 Value Scale.......................................................................................................................... 441
15.2.3.41 Walls.................................................................................................................................... 442
15.2.4 Editing Chart Data ........................................................................................................................... 443
15.2.4.1 Chart Data Grid ..................................................................................................................... 443
15.2.4.2 Edit Chart Data Window....................................................................................................... 444
15.2.4.3 Edit Chart Data Shortcut Menu ............................................................................................. 445
16 Monte Carlo and SimuMatic................................................................................ 447
16.1 Weibull++ Monte Carlo Utility.................................................................................................................. 448
16.1.1 User-Defined Equations................................................................................................................... 450
16.1.2 User-Defined Equation Example..................................................................................................... 451
16.2 ALTA Monte Carlo Utility......................................................................................................................... 454
16.3 SimuMatic.................................................................................................................................................. 456
16.3.1 Generating Data with Weibull++ SimuMatic.................................................................................. 457
16.3.2 Generating Data with ALTA SimuMatic ......................................................................................... 458
16.3.3 SimuMatic Folio.............................................................................................................................. 458
16.3.3.1 Simulation Sheet.................................................................................................................... 459
16.3.3.2 Sorted Sheet........................................................................................................................... 459
16.3.3.3 Control Panel ......................................................................................................................... 460
16.3.3.4 Plot Sheet............................................................................................................................... 461
16.3.4 Transferring Simulated Data to a Weibull++ Standard Folio.......................................................... 461
16.3.4.1 Transferring Data to a New Folio.......................................................................................... 462
16.3.4.2 Transferring Data to an Existing Folio.................................................................................. 462
16.3.5 Designing Reliability Tests with SimuMatic................................................................................... 463
16.3.6 Weibull++ SimuMatic Example ...................................................................................................... 465
16.3.7 ALTA SimuMatic Example ............................................................................................................. 467
17 Diagrams............................................................................................................... 469
17.1 Building a Diagram.................................................................................................................................... 470
17.1.1 Standard Blocks ............................................................................................................................... 470
17.1.2 Node Blocks..................................................................................................................................... 471
17.1.3 Junction Blocks................................................................................................................................ 473
17.1.4 Annotations...................................................................................................................................... 473
17.1.5 Connecting Blocks in Diagrams ...................................................................................................... 474
17.1.6 Diagram Analysis Constraints ......................................................................................................... 475
17.2 Diagram Control Panel .............................................................................................................................. 477
17.3 Equation Viewer......................................................................................................................................... 479
17.4 Diagram Plot Sheet and Control Panel ...................................................................................................... 481
17.5 Diagram Appearance ................................................................................................................................. 482
17.5.1 Arranging Blocks............................................................................................................................. 482
17.5.2 Diagram Style Window.................................................................................................................... 483
Contents
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide xi
17.5.3 Diagram Skins ................................................................................................................................. 486
17.5.4 Block Style Window........................................................................................................................ 487
17.5.5 Connector Style Window................................................................................................................. 488
17.5.6 Keyboard and Mouse Combinations ............................................................................................... 489
18 Design of Reliability Tests .................................................................................. 493
18.1 Reliability Demonstration Test Design...................................................................................................... 493
18.1.1 Using the RDT Tool......................................................................................................................... 494
18.1.2 Edit Bayesian Subsystems ............................................................................................................... 496
18.1.3 Reliability Demonstration Test Design Example ............................................................................ 497
18.1.4 Parametric Binomial Table and Plot ................................................................................................ 498
18.2 Expected Failure Time Plot........................................................................................................................ 499
18.2.1 Using the Expected Failure Time Plot ............................................................................................. 500
18.2.2 Expected Failure Time Plot Example .............................................................................................. 502
18.3 Difference Detection Matrix...................................................................................................................... 503
18.3.1 Using the Difference Detection Matrix ........................................................................................... 504
18.3.2 Difference Detection Matrix Example............................................................................................. 505
19 Target Reliability Tool ......................................................................................... 507
19.1 Generating a Plot ....................................................................................................................................... 508
19.2 The Control Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 509
20 Tests of Comparison........................................................................................... 511
20.1 Performing Tests of Comparison ............................................................................................................... 511
20.1.1 Folio Setup....................................................................................................................................... 511
20.1.2 Control Panel Settings ..................................................................................................................... 512
20.1.3 Probability Equation........................................................................................................................ 516
20.2 Life Comparison Example ......................................................................................................................... 517
20.3 Stress-Strength Test Example .................................................................................................................... 519
20.4 Target Reliability Parameter Estimator...................................................................................................... 525
21 Equation Fit Solver .............................................................................................. 527
21.1 Using the Equation Fit Solver.................................................................................................................... 527
21.2 Control Panel Settings ............................................................................................................................... 531
22 ALTA Test Plan Utility ......................................................................................... 533
22.1 Generating a Test Plan ............................................................................................................................... 533
22.2 Test Plan Types .......................................................................................................................................... 534
22.3 Test Plan Results Sheet .............................................................................................................................. 535
22.4 Test Plan Control Panel.............................................................................................................................. 536
22.5 Test Plan Utility Example .......................................................................................................................... 537
23 Results Window................................................................................................... 541
24 Non-Linear Equation Root Finder ...................................................................... 543
25 Quick Statistical Reference (QSR) ..................................................................... 545
25.1 QSR Function Option Page........................................................................................................................ 545
25.1.1 Median Ranks .................................................................................................................................. 546
25.1.2 Other Ranks ..................................................................................................................................... 546
25.1.3 Standard Nominal Values ................................................................................................................ 546
25.1.4 Inverse Standard Normal Values ..................................................................................................... 547
Contents
xii http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
25.1.5 Cumulative Poisson ......................................................................................................................... 547
25.1.6 Cumulative Binomial Probability.................................................................................................... 547
25.1.7 F-Distribution Values....................................................................................................................... 548
25.1.8 Inverse F-Distribution Values.......................................................................................................... 548
25.1.9 Chi-Squared Values ......................................................................................................................... 549
25.1.10 Incomplete Beta Function.............................................................................................................. 549
25.1.11 Gamma Function............................................................................................................................ 549
25.1.12 Student's t Values ........................................................................................................................... 549
25.2 QSR Interpolation Page ............................................................................................................................. 550
26 Quick Parameter Experimenter (QPE) ............................................................... 553
26.1 Weibull++ Version of the QPE .................................................................................................................. 553
26.1.1 Wizard View.................................................................................................................................... 554
26.1.2 Expert View..................................................................................................................................... 555
26.2 ALTA Version of the QPE.......................................................................................................................... 556
27 Reports ................................................................................................................. 559
27.1 Multiple Data Sources in One Report ........................................................................................................ 560
27.2 Analysis Workbooks .................................................................................................................................. 560
27.2.1 Analysis Workbook Wizard............................................................................................................. 560
27.2.2 Analysis Workbook Control Panel .................................................................................................. 561
27.3 Tools for Working with Spreadsheets ........................................................................................................ 563
27.3.1 Spreadsheet Components................................................................................................................. 563
27.3.2 Referencing Cells in the Spreadsheet .............................................................................................. 564
27.3.3 Check Spelling................................................................................................................................. 565
27.3.3.1 Spelling Options Window..................................................................................................... 566
27.3.4 Defining a Name.............................................................................................................................. 566
27.3.5 Goto ................................................................................................................................................. 567
27.3.6 Format Cells - Number Window ..................................................................................................... 568
27.3.7 Calculation Options ......................................................................................................................... 568
27.3.8 Sort................................................................................................................................................... 569
27.3.9 Find.................................................................................................................................................. 570
27.3.10 Sheet Options Window.................................................................................................................. 571
27.3.11 Protecting Cells.............................................................................................................................. 572
27.3.12 Exporting the Spreadsheet ............................................................................................................. 572
27.4 Word Report Templates ............................................................................................................................. 573
27.4.1 Report Templates Wizard ................................................................................................................ 573
27.4.2 Word Report Template Control Panel.............................................................................................. 574
27.4.3 Word Report Template Tools........................................................................................................... 575
27.4.3.1 Formatting Paragraphs........................................................................................................... 575
27.4.3.2 Find and Replace Window - Word Report Templates .......................................................... 576
27.4.3.3 Symbols ................................................................................................................................. 577
27.4.3.4 Bookmarks............................................................................................................................. 577
27.4.3.5 Hyperlinks ............................................................................................................................. 578
27.4.3.6 Tables .................................................................................................................................... 578
27.4.3.7 Table Properties - Word Report Templates........................................................................... 579
27.4.4 Word Report Template Ribbon........................................................................................................ 580
27.4.4.1 Home Tab.............................................................................................................................. 580
27.4.4.1.1 Report ...........................................................................................................................580
27.4.4.1.2 Clipboard......................................................................................................................581
27.4.4.1.3 Edit ...............................................................................................................................581
Contents
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide xiii
27.4.4.1.4 Font...............................................................................................................................581
27.4.4.1.5 Paragraph......................................................................................................................581
27.4.4.2 Document Tab ....................................................................................................................... 581
27.4.4.2.1 Template.......................................................................................................................581
27.4.4.2.2 Print ..............................................................................................................................581
27.4.4.2.3 Page Setup....................................................................................................................582
27.4.4.2.4 Protect...........................................................................................................................582
27.4.4.3 Insert Tab............................................................................................................................... 582
27.4.4.3.1 Items.............................................................................................................................582
27.4.4.3.2 Header/Footer...............................................................................................................583
27.4.4.4 View Tab ............................................................................................................................... 583
27.4.4.4.1 Document Views..........................................................................................................583
27.4.4.4.2 Zoom............................................................................................................................583
27.4.4.4.3 Show.............................................................................................................................583
27.4.4.4.4 Options .........................................................................................................................583
27.4.4.5 Table Tab............................................................................................................................... 583
27.4.4.5.1 Design...........................................................................................................................583
27.4.4.5.2 Borders .........................................................................................................................584
27.4.4.5.3 Alignment.....................................................................................................................584
27.4.4.5.4 Rows/Columns .............................................................................................................584
27.5 Using the Function Wizard in Any of the Reporting Tools ....................................................................... 584
27.5.1 Selecting a Function and Making the Other Required Inputs.......................................................... 585
27.5.1.1 Select the Function ................................................................................................................ 585
27.5.1.2 Select the Data Source........................................................................................................... 586
27.5.1.3 Make the Other Required Inputs ........................................................................................... 587
27.5.1.3.1 Setting the Stress Level with ALTA Data....................................................................587
27.5.1.4 Insert the Function................................................................................................................. 587
27.5.2 A Note About Confidence Bounds.................................................................................................. 588
27.6 Using the Plot Wizard in Word Report Templates..................................................................................... 588
27.7 An Example of Performing a Custom Analysis and Report ...................................................................... 589
28 Printing ................................................................................................................. 591
28.1 Page Setup.................................................................................................................................................. 591
28.1.1 Page Tab........................................................................................................................................... 591
28.1.2 Margins Tab..................................................................................................................................... 592
28.1.3 Header/Footer Tab ........................................................................................................................... 593
28.1.4 Header/Footer Format Codes........................................................................................................... 595
28.2 Print Preview.............................................................................................................................................. 595
28.3 Print Window............................................................................................................................................. 597
29 Application Setup ................................................................................................ 599
29.1 Synthesis Setup.......................................................................................................................................... 599
29.2 Application Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 601
29.2.1 User Page......................................................................................................................................... 602
29.2.2 Weibull++ Folios Page .................................................................................................................... 603
29.2.3 ALTA Folios Page............................................................................................................................ 604
29.2.4 Calculations Page............................................................................................................................. 605
29.2.5 Plot Page .......................................................................................................................................... 607
29.2.6 Display Page .................................................................................................................................... 610
29.2.7 Other Page ....................................................................................................................................... 611
29.2.8 Customize Folio Tools Page ............................................................................................................ 612
29.2.9 Reset Settings Page.......................................................................................................................... 613
Contents
xiv http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Appendix A: Function Wizard Functions................................................................ 615
A.1 Data Entry Tips for Functions..................................................................................................................... 615
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions ................................................................................................................................ 616
A.2.1 Spreadsheet Data Source Functions.................................................................................................. 617
A.2.1.1 Common Functions................................................................................................................. 617
A.2.1.2 Weibull++ Functions .............................................................................................................. 623
A.2.1.3 ALTA Functions..................................................................................................................... 635
A.2.2 Spreadsheet Mathematical Functions ............................................................................................... 645
A.3 Word Report Template Functions ............................................................................................................... 727
A.3.1 Word Report Template General Functions ....................................................................................... 727
A.3.2 Word Report Template Data Source Functions ................................................................................ 729
A.3.3 Word Report Template Confidence Bounds Functions .................................................................... 737
A.3.4 Word Report Template Table Functions ........................................................................................... 741
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 1
With the release of Version 8, the capabilities of ReliaSoft's Weibull++ and ALTA software tools have been
integrated into a single user interface with the ability to save both types of analyses together in the same project. This
help file provides detailed documentation for both products. The features that are available on your computer will
depend on the license that you have purchased from ReliaSoft. Within the user documentation:
This graphic indicates that a feature is available only for users with a Weibull++
license.
This graphic indicates that a feature is available only for users with an ALTA license.
Both products have also been integrated into the ground-breaking new Synthesis Platform, which offers reliability
practitioners the best of both worlds: analysis tools that are optimized to fully meet the individual user's needs for a
particular set of reliability engineering methodologies, plus integration into a shared repository that is accessible by
multiple users throughout the organization and facilitates integration between all Synthesis-enabled applications
(Synthesis Elements). This powerful new platform makes it feasible to more effectively leverage and integrate the
information from different types of reliability activities throughout the organization.
This chapter provides a wealth of information to help you learn how to use the software to its maximum potential.
Before starting we recommend reading the following sections:
Technical Support - Section 1.1 (p. 1)
ReliaSoft Consulting - Section 1.2 (p. 2)
Minimum System Requirements - Section 1.3 (p. 3)
License Registration and Activation - Section 1.4 (p. 4)
Internet Connectivity in Version 8 - Section 1.5 (p. 10)
Product Features
Introduction to the Synthesis Platform - Section 1.6 (p. 10)
Weibull++ Features Overview - Section 1.7 (p. 12)
ALTA Features Overview - Section 1.8 (p. 15)
Features Common to Weibull++ and ALTA - Section 1.9 (p. 17)
What's New in Version 8? - Section 1.10 (p. 19)
1.1 Technical Support
ReliaSoft's reliability software products are renowned for their ease of use and unparalleled after sale support. For all
standard shrink-wrap software, we provide free technical support for software-related issues via an established (and
Introduction
1
1 Introduction
2 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
growing) network of regional offices and partners/distributors throughout the world. You can request assistance
directly from within the software by choosing File > Help > E-mail Support. This option creates an e-mail message
that is pre-populated with information about your license and operating system, which the technical support
representative will need for troubleshooting the issue.
You can also contact us directly via phone, fax, e-mail, mail or live chat. To find the office that serves your region,
choose File > Help > Global Support Centers or visit http://www.ReliaSoft.com/help.htm. Note that regardless of
your region, you can always request assistance from ReliaSoft's Corporate Headquarters in Tucson, Arizona.
1.1.1 When Requesting Support
When you contact ReliaSoft to request technical support, please be prepared to provide the following information
(note that some of these details can be obtained automatically if you choose File > Help > E-mail Support or if you
select the option to notify support when an error occurs):
Your phone number and e-mail address.
The product name and the Compile Release Version number of your application.
1
Your product license key.
To determine the license for the application on your computer, you can choose File > Application Setup and
look on the User page of the Application Setup window.
The operating system (e.g., Windows 7), RAM and hard disk space on your computer.
Describe what you were doing when the problem occurred and exactly what happened. Please include the specific
wording of any message(s) that appeared.
1.2 ReliaSoft Consulting
If your organization does not have sufficient time, expertise or objectivity in-house to accomplish specific reliability
goals, turning to ReliaSoft's expert reliability consultants can prove to be the most effective and economical solution.
Whether you need a quick statistical analysis, a complete assessment of your reliability program plan or something in
between, ReliaSoft Consulting Services (RCS) is ready to help.
Our reliability consulting services team has combined expertise in almost all areas of reliability and quality
engineering with experience that spans a broad spectrum of product types, from micro-electronics and
appliances to advanced weapons systems and off-shore oil well drilling equipment.
Unlike engaging a consultant who works independently, RCS consultants have direct access to all of ReliaSoft's
global resources, expertise and contacts.
Our team-based approach to consulting, combined with ReliaSoft's global reliability engineering organization,
allows us to provide you with reliability consultants who understand your culture and speak your language while
ensuring that the appropriate reliability expertise can be applied to each and every project.
RCS is structured to accommodate requests of any size or complexity, from short telephone consultations to
multiple experts at a client's site for an extended time period.
1.
To determine the Compile Release Version (CRV) of the application on your computer, choose File > Help. The CRV is
displayed in the About area. Note that the CRV will also indicate whether you are running the 32-Bit version or the 64-Bit version
of the software
Note: ReliaSoft's technical support representatives are not reliability consultants, and their assistance is limited to
technical issues that you may encounter with the software tools. To get assistance with your analysis, please contact
ReliaSoft Consulting Services.
1.3 Minimum System Requirements
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 3
Please visit http://Consulting.ReliaSoft.com for a published list of commonly requested services, answers to
frequently asked questions, and other useful information about this service.
1.3 Minimum System Requirements
This section describes the minimum system requirements for all Synthesis Elements.
ReliaSoft provides a tool that can help you determine whether you should install the 32-bit or 64-bit version of
Synthesis. The tool will also tell you whether your computer and Internet connection meet the requirements for
running and activating Synthesis. To download the tool, refer to Technical Support Document RS40025.
System Hardware Requirements
CPU Speed 1.5 GHz or higher
Processor Intel Pentium or higher
Memory/RAM 2 GB or higher
Display Properties 24-bit color depth
Screen Resolution 1024 x 768 or higher at normal size (96 dpi)
Swap Space Determined by the operating system, 500 MB or higher
Disk Space 1 GB for installing the Synthesis Elements
Video/Graphics Adapter 64 MB RAM or higher
Internet Access Internet access is required for the License Manager and
optional for using the Internet-enabled features in the software
interface. See Section 1.5 on page 10.
Operating Systems Supported
Microsoft Windows
XP - 32-bit (Service Pack 3 or higher)
Vista - 32-bit and 64-bit (Service Pack 1 or higher)
Windows 7 - 32-bit and 64-bit
Microsoft Windows
Server
Requires a license that
specifically allows Server
installations/deployments.
2003 R2
2008 - 32-bit and 64-bit (Service Pack 2 or higher)
2008 RS
Microsoft Office Integration
Microsoft Office 2000 or higher (Excel, Word and Outlook) are required for automated
exports, report generation and e-mail/calendar integration. ReliaSoft recommends MS Office
2010.
Both 32-bit and 64-bit versions of Office are supported provided that you install the same
version (32-bit or 64-bit) of Synthesis, as explained in the following note.
1 Introduction
4 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
1.3.1 A Note About Enterprise Database Servers
Although the enterprise database platform (Microsoft SQL Server or Oracle) could be installed on the same computer
where the Synthesis-enabled applications reside, most organizations will choose to set up a separate server to host the
database. Both the 32-bit and 64-bit versions of the Synthesis-enabled applications will work with either the 32-bit or
64-bit versions of a back-end database/server. The minimum hardware/software requirements for each server hosting
the database should be obtained directly from the selected database vendor (i.e., Microsoft or Oracle). In general,
ReliaSoft recommends a minimum CPU speed of 2 GHz and 4 GB of RAM.
1.4 License Registration and Activation
The first time you run each Synthesis-enabled application, you will be prompted to register and activate the product
on your computer. The License Manager wizard will guide you through the steps to provide your registration details
and Product License Key. If you have an active Internet connection, you can complete the activation automatically
via the wizard. If you do not currently have an active Internet connection, you can choose to implement the free 7-day
trial or you can request an activation code from ReliaSoft and enter it manually when prompted by the wizard.
When the activation process is complete, you will receive a confirmation e-mail that includes your ReliaSoft ID and
password. Please store this information in a safe place. It will be required if you later need to update your registration
details or manage the products that are currently activated for your computer. If you are unable to locate this
information when you attempt to use the License Manager, you can request to have the information sent to the e-mail
address on file for your registration.
Some of the information from your registration (name, company, e-mail address and Product License Key) will be
displayed on the User page of the Application Setup window. This is for information purposes and cannot be edited
IMPORTANT NOTE: 32-bit and 64-bit Versions
All Synthesis Version 8 applications are available both in 32-bit and 64-bit versions. You
should install the version that corresponds to the version of Microsoft Office that is already
installed on your computer.
If you have a 32-bit version of Microsoft Office (and even if you have a 64-bit version of
Windows), ReliaSoft recommends installing the 32-bit version of Synthesis to avoid
introducing issues.
ReliaSoft recommends the 64-bit installation only if your computer is running a 64-bit
version of Windows Vista or Windows 7 and a 64-bit version of Microsoft Office 2010.
You cannot install the 64-bit version of Synthesis on Windows XP 64-bit.
Enterprise Database Platforms
Microsoft SQL Server 2005, 2008 and 2012 32-bit and 64-bit versions
Microsoft SQL Server
Express Edition
2005, 2008 and 2012 32-bit and 64-bit versions
Oracle 10g and 11g 32-bit and 64-bit versions
Oracle Express 11g 32-bit and 64-bit versions
1.4 License Registration and Activation
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 5
directly from within the Application Setup. If you need to update your registration details or manage the products that
are currently activated for your computer, choose File > Help > License Manager.
1.4.1 How to Activate Each Application on Your Computer
Activation is a required process that associates your ReliaSoft products with the computer(s) on which they're
installed. The process helps you maintain better control of your software assets (through activation and deactivation
on different computers that you may use over time). It also allows you to recover lost keys and licenses, prevents
unauthorized use and copying of the software, and protects you against the risks of counterfeit software. This is
usually a quick and simple automated process done through our secure server at https://Validate.ReliaSoft.org
(ReliaSoft License Server).
2
If the computer has an active Internet connection and your firewall allows the software to access the ReliaSoft
License Server, only a few simple steps are required. This document contains the following information:
Basic instructions when the activation wizard can communicate directly with the server - Section 1.4.1.1 (p. 5)
General tips to address problems communicating with the server - Section 1.4.1.2 (p. 6)
Other ways to activate the application if the wizard cannot communicate directly with the server - Section 1.4.1.3
(p. 7)
1.4.1.1 Basic Instructions with Direct Communication to the License Server
1. The first time you run the software after installation, the activation wizard will appear. At the What do you want
to do? prompt, select Activate a license.
2. On the next page, enter a valid e-mail address to serve as your ReliaSoft ID. This is the e-mail address where you
will receive confirmation e-mails from the ReliaSoft License Server. It will also identify all of the products
registered to you.
One-Time Registration: If this is the first time that you have registered a Synthesis application on this
computer with this e-mail address, the next page will request your name and basic contact information.
3. On the next page, enter the Product License Key provided by ReliaSoft.
For Unlimited User Licenses: If your organization has an Unlimited User License (e.g., a site-wide, division-
wide, corporate-wide or corporate partner license), the wizard must confirm that your ReliaSoft ID matches
one of the e-mail domains that have been authorized for the license (e.g., a corporate-wide license for
ReliaSoft might be configured to allow access by any user with an e-mail account on @ReliaSoft.com or
Whats Changed? In previous versions of the software, the user name and company from the User page of the Application
Setup window were displayed in plot legends and quick results reports. Now, this information comes from your user
account in the current repository. To modify this, choose My Portal > Users > My Profile. For more information, see
Chapter 2 on page 40.
2.
Specifically, the information transmitted to the ReliaSoft License Server is your ReliaSoft ID (e-mail address) and Product
License Key. If this is your first time registering, your name and the basic contact information will also be transmitted. The
information is encrypted by our software first and then transmitted using SSL to the secure server. We do not sell or provide your
information to any third parties. (Refer to http://www.ReliaSoft.com/privacy.htm for more information about ReliaSofts privacy
policy.) The information sent back is simply a code that tells the software that it is now authorized to run on that computer.
Tip: If you copy the key from the product delivery e-mail, you can click the Paste icon in the wizard to automatically
enter each section of the key into the appropriate field.
1 Introduction
6 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
@weibull.com, etc.). If your ReliaSoft ID meets the requirements for the license, the next page requires you to
copy/paste a code that you receive from ReliaSoft via e-mail.
4. When you see the Your product has been activated message, click Finish to close the window and start using
the software.
For Concurrent Network Licenses: If your organization has a Concurrent Network License, your access to the
application at any given time depends on how many other users who share the license are accessing the application at
the same time. After the initial activation (i.e., the steps described above), the software will automatically check the
server each time you try to access the application. Therefore, the computer must have an active Internet connection
and must be able to access the ReliaSoft License Server whenever you wish to use the software.
1.4.1.2 Problems Communicating with the Server
The software must communicate with the ReliaSoft License Server at https://Validate.ReliaSoft.org each time you
activate a particular application on a particular computer. For Concurrent Network Licenses, the software must also
connect each time you attempt to access and use the software. Personal or corporate firewalls can block this
communication.
1.4.1.2.1 Possible Solutions:
Personal firewalls (Norton Firewall, ZoneAlarm, BlackIce, Outpost, McAfee Firewall, etc.) need to be configured
to allow the software to communicate with the server. Generally, these products will ask for your authorization
when the software first tries to establish communication with the server (e.g., BlockSim.exe is attempting to
access the Internet. Do you wish to authorize it? or something similar). You should authorize this and also make
this authorization permanent if possible.
Some firewall configurations block all new programs without any warning. To activate the software, it will be
necessary to manually add the software name to the authorized list. Provide for unlimited access for the software.
If all of this still fails, try to deactivate the firewall temporarily until the software has been activated. The majority
of firewalls have an option to suspend their action. If not, you will have to terminate the firewall. Activate the
software and then reboot your machine to restore firewall action.
For network or corporate firewalls, you may need to ask the network manager to make the required settings to
allow the software to communicate with the ReliaSoft License Server and/or add this domain to a trusted list.
Tip: If the e-mail does not appear in your Inbox within a few minutes, check your Junk mail or SPAM folders.
1.4 License Registration and Activation
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 7
1.4.1.3 Multiple Ways to Activate
1. The software will first attempt to communicate with the ReliaSoft License Server directly. At this time, it checks
both your Internet connection and the ability to connect to our server. In the image below, the connection is
detected (green check mark) but it is unable to communicate with our server (red X).
2. In the case that the server connection fails but the software detects Internet access, the wizard will first prompt
you to indicate whether a proxy server is being used. If you choose to configure the software to communicate
through a proxy, the Proxy Settings window looks like the one shown next. Enter the information required (you
may need the assistance of your network administrator to complete this) and click Test Settings. The OK button
will become enabled if the test is successful.
Once a proxy is successfully set, you can continue with the automated process. If the proxy fails, you may want to
try again and confirm that the entries are valid. If the test is still not successful, you can exit the window using the
Cancel button and then try one of the two methods for requesting an Activation Code: from within the wizard or
from a web form. Both methods are described next.
1 Introduction
8 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
3. To request the Activation Code from within the wizard, choose Use an Activation Code and continue until you
reach the screen shown next.
If you click Request an Activation Code, the window shown next will appear.
Once you enter the required information, you have the following options:
A. Send an e-mail to our server (if you have an e-mail connection).
B. Print a form to fax or mail to us.
C. Copy the information to a text file so you can submit it to ReliaSoft at a later time via e-mail, mail or phone.
1.4 License Registration and Activation
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 9
If you have an e-mail connection, the best option is to click the E-mail button. This will activate your e-mail
client and automatically create an e-mail formatted so that it can be read by our server. Please do not alter any of
the text in this e-mail; simply send the message exactly as it is.
When this is received by our server, the server will automatically reply with a block of text that you need to copy
and paste in the Activation Code area of the wizard (i.e., below your Product License Key).
4. To request the Activation Code from the web form, go to http://validate.reliasoft.org/UserManagement/
ActivationCode.aspx, enter the required fields and click E-mail Activation Code.
1 Introduction
10 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
If your license is eligible for activation in this manner, the server will send an e-mail with a block of text that you
need to copy and paste in the Activation Code area of the wizard (i.e., below your Product License Key).
5. Lastly, if all else fails, you can contact ReliaSoft via, phone, e-mail and/or fax to obtain an Activation Code. In
cases where an automated activation is not possible, you can select the Continue and register later option on the
first page of the License Manager wizard to continue without activating during a seven-day grace period; this
allows you sufficient time to activate via alternative methods.
1.5 Internet Connectivity in Version 8
One of the many new enhancements in the Version 8 Synthesis Platform is the ability to take advantage of an active
Internet connection to obtain the most up-to-date announcements, documentation and examples. Internet access is not
required to use the Synthesis-enabled applications, but once you have registered and activated the software on your
computer, an active Internet connection will allow you to take advantage of several useful new features, including:
ReliaSoft Online: When you are using any page in the Backstage view (accessed by clicking the File tab on the
Ribbon), the ReliaSoft Online pane is displayed on the right side of the MDI. When you have an active Internet
connection, this panel provides a variety of useful information, updated in real time so you always have access to
the latest information. This includes quick tips for using the software, upcoming training seminars and other
recent announcements.
Reliability Web Notes: The Reliability Web Notes page of the My Portal window provides access to information
about the tool that you are currently working with. This usually includes a brief description of the item, as well as
links to examples and theory articles.
Help Center: When you are using the new Help Center in the Backstage view (accessed by clicking File > Help),
you will have quick access to a variety of support tools. Many of the tools require Internet access, such as the
ability to download software updates and the option to generate an e-mail with the technical details about your
computer that may be needed for support.
Latest Help File: We will always install a copy of this help file on your computer so you can access it any time,
even when you're working offline. But when you have an active Internet connection, the help topics that you see
when you press F1 or choose File > Help > Help File Contents will always be the most up-to-date versions
available. This allows us to keep updating the product documentation to provide the information that users are
looking for, and it ensures that you will always have access to the latest information about the software.
1.6 Introduction to the Synthesis Platform
This section provides a brief introduction to the Synthesis Platform as it relates to using Weibull++ and ALTA.
You can also review an overview of the main features in Weibull++, Section 1.7 on page 12, the main features in
ALTA, Section 1.8 on page 15, the features that are common to both Weibull++ and ALTA, Section 1.9 on page
17and a list of what's new in Version 8, Section 1.10 on page 19.
1.6.1 Centralized Data Storage and Flexible Permissions
All Synthesis-enabled applications offer centralized data storage that allows multiple users to work cooperatively on
analysis projects. As described in Chapter 2, you can choose which type of database will provide the back-end data
storage for each Synthesis repository.
A Standard Repository (*.rsrp) is easy to create and maintain without any special IT infrastructure or support,
but there are limitations to the amount of data it can store and the number of users who can access the database
simultaneously.
An Enterprise Repository requires implementation of Microsoft SQL Server or Oracle (which requires separate
licensing, support and maintenance), but it is a more robust platform that can store much more analysis
information in the same database and supports access by many more simultaneous users.
1.6 Introduction to the Synthesis Platform
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 11
For all enterprise databases, and when you have enabled login security for standard databases, authorized users will
be able to create and maintain user accounts that determine which analyses and capabilities each individual user has
permission to access. You can use the basic security groups that have been predefined in the software or customize
the access permissions to meet the specific needs of your organization. For more information, see Chapter 2 on page
37.
1.6.2 Integration with Other Synthesis Elements
The new Synthesis Platform offers a unique solution to the problem of integrating different types of reliability
information without sacrificing the power and flexibility of each individual analysis tool. From the individual users
perspective, your interaction with each application will be similar to your experience with previous versions a full-
featured tool that has been expertly designed to meet your needs for all aspects of the analysis methodology.
However, from the overall reliability program perspective, multiple users will now have the ability to access the same
centralized data repository from any Synthesis Element and thereby share commonly needed resources between
applications and analyses (such as the model that describes a components failure behavior, the description of a
particular maintenance strategy or the reliability-wise configuration of a system).
As described in Chapter 3, this integration is facilitated primarily through Synthesis resources that can be published
from one type of analysis and utilized in other analyses where they may be relevant. When a resource needs to be
updated in response to new information, the change can be reflected automatically in all analyses that rely upon it.
Specifically for Weibull++ and ALTA, the Synthesis Platform gives you the ability to:
Publish models that are based on data analyses performed in Weibull++ and ALTA folios. This serves to make this
information available to other analyses performed in BlockSim, Xfmea or RCM++. For more information about
models, refer to page 142 in Chapter 3.
1.6.3 Messages and Action Tracking
One of the many benefits of having multiple users working from the same centralized data repository is the
opportunity to use a common interface for posting announcements and tracking the completion of assigned actions.
All Synthesis Elements offer the My Portal interface, which facilitates the dissemination of messages directed either
to all system users or only to specific users/groups. For more information about the My Portal interface, see Chapter
2 on page 76. My Portal can also be used to display the Actions that you are involved with, either as the person
responsible for completing the assignment, the person who created the record or a person who simply needs to be
kept informed about the progress. For more information about Actions, see page 150 in Chapter 3.
If desired, the Synthesis repository can be configured to enable E-mail Notifications (see page 50 in Chapter 2)that
serve to alert members of the team when a message or action that theyre involved with is created or updated. Now in
Version 8, you also have the option to send actions to your calendar in Microsoft Outlook.
1.6.4 Take Advantage of Internet Connectivity
One of the many new enhancements in the Version 8 Synthesis Platform is the ability to take advantage of an active
Internet connection to obtain the most up-to-date announcements, documentation and examples. Once you have
registered and activated the application on your computer, Internet access is not required you can still perform all
Tip: Working with a database-driven, multi-user application such as Weibull++ and ALTA is a bit different from working
with other types of software that you may be familiar with (such as Microsoft Excel). For example, changes are saved
automatically while you are updating the analysis (e.g., whenever you click OK or navigate away from a cell in a table or
worksheet). In addition, you must be diligent about storing backups and performing adequate database maintenance to
guard against data loss or corruption. Specific recommendations are provided in Chapter 2 on page 64.
1 Introduction
12 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
of your analysis activities while working offline but an Internet connection allows you to take advantage of several
useful new features, including:
ReliaSoft Online for up-to-date tips and announcements.
Reliability Web Notes for context-sensitive access to theoretical background information for the feature youre
currently working with.
Help Center for access to a variety of support tools including the ability to download software updates and
generate an e-mail with the details needed for technical support.
Online Help File for access to all of the latest updates that provide new information users have been looking for. (Of
course we will always install a static version for the times when youre working offline.)
1.7 Weibull++ Features Overview
This topic provides a brief overview of the major analysis, data management and reporting capabilities provided by
Weibull++.
You can also review an introduction to the Synthesis Platform, Section 1.6 on page 10, and a list of what's new in
Weibull++ Version 8, Section 1.10 on page 19.
ReliaSoft's Weibull++ provides the most comprehensive toolset available for reliability life data analysis, calculated
results, plots and reporting. The software is also packed with tools for related analyses, such as warranty data
analysis, degradation data analysis, non-parametric data analysis, recurrent event data analysis (for repairable
systems) and reliability test planning.
1.7.1 Standard Life Data Analysis (LDA)
The Weibull++ standard folio supports all life data types and all major lifetime distributions. For more information,
see Chapter 4. You can analyze time-to-failure (complete), right censored (suspension), left censored, interval
censored or free-form data, entered individually or in groups. Available lifetime distributions and analysis methods
include:
1, 2 and 3 parameter Weibull
1 and 2 parameter Exponential
Normal and Lognormal
Gamma and Generalized Gamma
Logistic and Loglogistic
Gumbel
Bayesian-Weibull (which considers prior knowledge of the Weibull shape parameter)
2, 3 and 4 subpopulation Mixed Weibull (for situations when there are different trends in the data but you cannot
identify a distinct failure mode for each data point)
Competing Failure Modes (CFM) analysis (which analyzes failure modes separately and then assumes a series
reliability model in which each failure mode competes to cause the failure)
If you are not sure which model is appropriate for a given data set, the convenient Distribution Wizard automatically
performs several types of goodness-of-fit tests in order to rank the available distributions. For more information, see
Chapter 4 on page 178.
1.7 Weibull++ Features Overview
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 13
Parameter Estimation options for standard life data analysis include Maximum Likelihood Estimation (MLE),
Rank Regression on X (RRX) or Rank Regression on Y (RRY).
Weibull++ also provides Confidence Bounds for parameters, calculated results and plots. Depending on the specific
analysis method used, the confidence bounds may be calculated using the Fisher Matrix, Likelihood Ratio, Beta
Binomial or Bayesian approach.
The software provides a complete array of Calculated Results and Plots based on the analysis. See Chapter 12.For
life data analysis, this includes:
Reliability or probability of failure
Reliable life (i.e., time for a given reliability, also called warranty time)
BX% life (i.e., time for a given unreliability)
Mean life
Failure rate
Probability plots and pdf plots
Contour plots
Failure/suspension histograms, pie charts or timelines
1.7.2 Degradation Data Analysis
The Weibull++ degradation analysis folio allows you to extrapolate the expected failure times of a product based on
measurements that reflect how some performance measure (e.g., increase in crack propagation, decrease in tread
depth, increase in vibration, etc.) has degraded for sample units over a period of time. The software offers a choice of
the Linear, Exponential, Power, Logarithmic, Gompertz or Lloyd-Lipow models to analyze the degradation data, and
generates Degradation vs. Time plots on either a linear or logarithmic scale. See Chapter 6.
Now in Version 8, Weibull++ also automatically calculates the life data model based on the extrapolated failure times
and allows you to obtain calculated results and plots directly within the same folio no need to transfer or link to
another analysis folio!
1.7.3 Non-Parametric Life Data Analysis
Weibull++'s non-parametric LDA folio offers a choice of three methods for analyzing life data without assuming an
underlying life distribution: Kaplan-Meier, Simple Actuarial and Standard Actuarial. This folio may be useful when
dealing with unknown failure modes, when there is not enough data to assume a life distribution or when the data set
does not fit any life distribution in a satisfactory way. Now in Version 8, Weibull++ also performs a parametric
analysis directly within the same folio using the unreliability estimates that are generated by the non-parametric
analysis. See Chapter 8.
1.7.4 Warranty Data Analysis
Weibull++'s popular warranty analysis folio converts warranty claims data (sales and returns) that are readily
available in many organizations into failure/suspension data sets that can be analyzed with traditional life data
analysis methods. See Chapter 9. You can use this analysis to better understand the failure behavior of products in the
field and to generate forecasts of future returns that will be covered under warranty. The software provides a choice of
data entry formats to fit your particular needs: Nevada Chart, Times-to-Failure, Dates of Failure or Usage. The folio
provides all of the special options you need to analyze the data in a way thats appropriate for the available data and
your organizations warranty fulfillment practices. For example:
1 Introduction
14 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The Use Subsets option allows you to deal with non-homogeneous populations by analyzing data from different
design iterations simultaneously and performing forecasts based on mixed sales data.
The Suspend After option allows you to take into account the possibility that failure data were not collected
beyond the specified warranty period and/or to exclude predicted failures that will not be covered under warranty.
The Statistical Process Control feature (available for Nevada chart folios) can automatically detect abnormal
sales or return periods and color-code the results to highlight specific data points you may wish to investigate
further.
The Usage format allows you to enter returns data in terms of the amount of usage accumulated (e.g., mileage,
cycles, etc.) rather than time in service. In Version 8, we have enhanced this feature by providing additional tools
to help you configure the analysis to appropriately estimate the likely usage for units that are still operating in the
field (i.e., suspensions).
1.7.5 Convert Maintenance Event Logs to Failure and Repair Data
Weibull++ provides a specialized folio designed specifically to capture system failure and repair data in an event log
format like those commonly used in the machine tools and other industries. See Chapter 10. If you have a log that
records the date/time when a system downing event occurred and the date/time when the system was restored to
operation, the software converts this information to time-to-failure and time-to-repair data that can be analyzed with
life data analysis techniques. Some useful options in this folio include the ability to:
Define the shift pattern that describes the time periods when the systems are operating each day.
Analyze data for a single system or multiple systems simultaneously.
Categorize events as failures or events, and then specify whether non-failure events will be considered in the
life data analysis.
Specify which component/assembly is responsible for each event, and then perform the analysis for any level of
the system configuration.
1.7.6 Recurrent Event Data Analysis (RDA) for Repairable Systems
The failure behavior of repairable systems is dependent on the history of repairs, and therefore traditional life data
analysis methods (which treat failure data as independent and identically distributed) are usually not applicable. To
provide the appropriate analysis treatment for such data, Weibull++ offers two analysis folios that can be used to
analyze recurrent event data from repairable systems.
The Non-Parametric RDA folio uses the well-known Mean Cumulative Function (MCF) to plot the average
number of recurring failures over a given period of time. The plot can be used to evaluate whether the number of
failures is increasing or decreasing over time, to predict the future number of failures and to compare data sets
from different designs, operating conditions or production periods. See page 329 in Chapter 11.
The Parametric RDA folio uses the General Renewal Process (GRP) model, which takes into account the
effectiveness of repairs on the condition of the system and models the cumulative number of failures over time.
You can use the analysis to generate a variety of plots and calculated results, including the number of failures,
failure intensity, mean time between failures (MTBF) and conditional reliability. See page 335 in Chapter 11.
1.7.7 Reliability Test Design
Version 8 offers a new Test Design Assistant that helps you select which reliability test design tools will meet your
specific needs. See Chapter 18.
The Reliability Demonstration Test Design tool has been completely redesigned and expanded in Version 8.
You can use the Parametric Binomial, Non-Parametric Binomial, Exponential Chi-Squared or Non-Parametric
Bayesian methods to help choose the right test time/sample size for a reliability demonstration test. These
1.8 ALTA Features Overview
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 15
methods can be used for designing a zero-failure test (where the reliability target is demonstrated if you dont
observe any failures during the test) and for tests with other quantities of allowable failures (e.g., one-failure
test, two-failure test, etc.) See page 493 in Chapter 18.
The Expected Failure Times Plot provides a visual depiction of the failure times you can expect to observe when
you implement a particular test plan. If you perform the test and enter the actual failures as they are observed, you
can use the plot to monitor whether the test is proceeding as expected or receive an early warning that adjustments
may be needed. See page 499 in Chapter 18.
The Difference Detection Matrix calculates how much test time is required before it is possible to detect (and
demonstrate) a statistically significant difference in the life of two product designs. See page 503 in Chapter 18.
1.7.8 Target Reliability Estimator
Choosing an optimal reliability goal involves deciding on important trade-offs. For example, higher reliability
typically requires higher production costs, but higher reliability will typically also lead to lower warranty costs and
higher market share. The new Target Reliability Tool generates multiple plots that will help you select a target
reliability that will minimize cost, maximize profit and maximize the return on an investment that affects reliability.
See Chapter 19.
1.8 ALTA Features Overview
This topic provides a brief overview of the major analysis, data management and reporting capabilities provided by
ALTA.
You can also review an introduction to the Synthesis Platform, Section 1.6 on page 10, and a list of what's new in
ALTA Version 8, Section 1.10 on page 19.
Quantitative accelerated life testing techniques, used in conjunction with powerful accelerated life data analysis
methodologies, give design and reliability engineers the power to significantly reduce test times and produce more
robust designs. This can, in turn, provide faster time to market, lower product development costs, lower warranty
costs and a host of other tangible and intangible benefits. ReliaSoft's ALTA software provides a comprehensive
toolset for accelerated life test planning and quantitative accelerated life testing data analysis. ALTA is available in
two versions:
ALTA Standard provides the life-stress relationship models required to analyze accelerated life test data with 1
or 2 constant stresses.
ALTA PRO offers advanced capabilities for analyzing accelerated life test data with up to 8 simultaneous stress
types where stress is constant or varies with time.
1.8.1 Accelerated Life Testing Data Analysis
ALTA provides all the tools and options you will need for accelerated life testing data analysis. It is designed for use
with complete (time-to-failure), right censored (suspended), interval or left censored data. Data can be entered
individually or in groups. See Chapter 5.
ALTA Standard gives you a choice of the following life-stress relationships:
Arrhenius: a single stress model typically used when temperature is the accelerated stress.
Eyring: a single stress model typically used when temperature or humidity is the accelerated stress.
Inverse Power Law (IPL): a single stress model typically used with a non-thermal stress, such as vibration,
voltage or temperature cycling.
Temperature-Humidity: a double-Arrhenius model that is typically used when temperature and humidity are the
acceleration variables.
1 Introduction
16 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Temperature-Nonthermal: a combination of the Arrhenius and IPL relationships that is typically used when one
stress is temperature and the other is non-thermal (e.g., voltage).
In addition, ALTA PRO offers four other models for more advanced applications:
Generalized Eyring: a variation of the Eyring relationship that is typically used when both temperature and
humidity are accelerated.
Proportional Hazards: analyzes data with up to 8 stress types using the Exponential relationship for each stress.
It also allows the use of zero as a stress value, which enables the analysis of data with indicator variables (e.g., 0 =
on/off and 1 = continuous operation).
General Log-Linear: supports the analysis of data with up to 8 stress types and provides the flexibility of
specifying the life-stress relationship (Arrhenius, Inverse Power Law or Exponential) for each stress.
Cumulative Damage: analyzes data with up to 8 stress types and/or situations where the stress varies with time.
You can select to combine these life-stress relationships combined with an underlying Weibull, Exponential or
Lognormal life distribution. If you are not sure which is appropriate for a given data set, the convenient Distribution
Wizard automatically performs multiple goodness-of-fit tests in order to rank the available distributions. See page
232 in Chapter 5.
Maximum Likelihood Estimation (MLE) is used for all parameter calculations. ALTA also provides Fisher Matrix
confidence bounds for parameters, calculated results and plots.
The software provides a complete array of Calculated Results and Plots based on the analysis. See Chapter 12. For
accelerated life testing data analysis, this includes:
Reliability or probability of failure
Reliable life (i.e., time for a given reliability, also called warranty time)
BX% life (i.e., time for a given unreliability)
Mean life
Failure rate
Acceleration factor
Probability plots and pdf plots
Life vs. stress, acceleration factor vs. stress, and standard deviation vs. stress plots
Residuals plots
Three-dimensional surface plots such as reliability vs. time vs. stress
1.8.2 Time-Varying Stress Profiles
As described in Chapter 5 on page 225, the cumulative damage life-stress model (available only in ALTA PRO) can
handle data from tests where the stress varies with time (e.g., a step-stress or ramp-stress profile). You can define and
store any number of stress profiles, then easily assign the appropriate profile to each point in an ALTA data sheet.
Each segment in a profile can be associated with a specific stress value (e.g., temperature is 310 K from 0 to 100
hours and 320 K from 101 to 200 hours) or a time-dependent function (e.g., start from a temperature of 310 K and
then increase by 10 K with each hour of testing).
1.9 Features Common to Weibull++ and ALTA
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 17
1.8.3 Accelerated Degradation Analysis
The ALTA degradation analysis folio allows you to analyze degradation data obtained under accelerated stress levels
in order to estimate when failure would occur under the accelerated conditions. Now in Version 8, the software also
automatically performs accelerated life data analysis on the extrapolated failure times and allows you to obtain
calculated results and plots for the use stress conditions directly within the same folio no need to transfer or link to
another analysis folio! See Chapter 7.
1.8.4 Accelerated Life Test Planning
The ALTA Test Plan utility implements the complex mathematical models required to design an effective accelerated
life test plan. The tool offers a choice of one-stress or two-stress test planning methods. Based on your inputs about
the expected failure behavior and available test time, the software recommends the stress levels to be tested and the
most effective allocation of available test units to each level. See Chapter 22.
1.9 Features Common to Weibull++ and ALTA
Many of your favorite features are available for both Weibull++ and ALTA analyses. Some of these features include:
1.9.1 Plots and Charts to Visualize Your Analysis Results
Weibull++ and ALTA make it easy to create a complete array of plots and charts to present analysis information
graphically. The Plot Setup allows you to completely customize the look and feel of plot graphics while the RS
Draw metafile graphics editor provides the option to insert text, draw objects or mark particular points on plot
graphics. You can save your plots in a variety of graphic file formats (*.jpg, *.gif, *.png or *.wmf) for use in other
documents. For more information about the Plot Setup, see Chapter 13; for more information about RS Draw, see
Chapter 14.
Overlay Plots (formerly called MultiPlots) allow you to plot the results from multiple data sets together in the
same plot. This can be an effective visual tool for many different applications, such as comparing different data sets
or analysis methods (e.g., Design A vs. Design B or MLE vs. Rank Regression) or demonstrating the effects of a
design change (e.g., Before vs. After). For more information, see Chapter 12 on page 356.
The Side-by-Side Plots utility allows you to view (and print) multiple plots for a given data set side-by-side. For
example, you may want to show the probability, reliability, pdf and failure rate plots for a given analysis together in
the same window. Alternatively, you may wish to compare the probability or pdf plots for a given data set when
analyzed with different distributions/models. For more information, see Chapter 12 on page 358.
1.9.2 Monte Carlo Simulation
As described in Chapter 16, both Weibull++ and ALTA continue to use Monte Carlo simulation for generating data
sets that can be analyzed directly in a standard folio. You can also use the SimuMatic utilities to automatically
perform a large number of reliability analyses on data sets that have been created via simulation. These simulated
data sets and calculated results can be used to perform a wide variety of reliability tasks, such as:
Experimenting with the influence of sample sizes and censoring schemes on analysis methods.
Constructing simulation-based confidence bounds.
Experimenting with confidence intervals for analyses performed with different distributions.
Developing and evaluating test plans.
Utilizing user-defined equations for risk analysis and probabilistic design.
1 Introduction
18 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
1.9.3 Stress-Strength Calculator and Life Comparison Test
As described in Chapter 20, Weibull++ and ALTA provide two tools designed for statistical comparison of data sets.
The Life Comparison tool allows you to compare two data sets to determine whether items from the first set will
outlast those of the second. The Stress-Strength comparison tool uses the same statistical approach to determine the
probability of failure based on the probability of a specified stress data set exceeding a specified strength data set.
Both tools have been redesigned and enhanced in Version 8.
1.9.4 Reliability Block Diagrams for Competing Failure Modes
A simple Competing Failure Modes (CFM) analysis can be performed directly within the Weibull++ standard folio
by assuming a series reliability model and using only one type of distribution to analyze all the modes. When a more
complex analysis is required, you can use the reliability block diagram (RBD) feature that is directly integrated into
Weibull++ and ALTA projects. For more information, see Chapter 17. The blocks in the diagram are linked directly
to analyzed standard folios and you can use the RBD in any or all of the following situations:
The analysis involves more than four failure modes.
The failure modes are described by different life distributions.
The relationship between the failure modes does not follow a series configuration. For example, if more than one
failure mode must occur together in order for the component to fail, a parallel configuration must be used for the
analysis and this is referred to as complex failure modes analysis rather than competing failure modes
analysis.
1.9.5 Workbooks and Reports for Custom Analysis
As described in Chapter 27, all Synthesis-enabled applications offer several powerful tools for custom analysis and
reporting.
If you need a quick way to perform additional calculations that are associated with a particular analysis, you can
insert any number of General Spreadsheets into any Weibull++ or ALTA standard folio. For more information,
see Chapter 2 on page 87.
If you want to create a custom analysis or report that integrates results from different analysis folios, Version 8
provides a choice of using an Analysis Workbook (with functionality similar to Microsoft Excel) or a new
Word Report Template (with functionality similar to Microsoft Word). For more information about analysis
workbooks, see Chapter 27 on page 560; for more information about Word report templates, see Chapter 27 on
page 573.
All three tools allow you to use the Function Wizard to automatically insert calculated results based on selected data
sheets. For more information, see Chapter 27 on page 584. With the workbooks and report templates, you also have
the option to configure the functions to use generically numbered data sources instead of named data sheets. This
makes it easy to use the same template again for different data sets.
1.9.6 Quick Parameter Estimator (QPE)
The Quick Parameter Estimator (formerly called the Parameter Experimenter) allows you to estimate the
parameters of a statistical model based on what you know about the behavior over time. With the Weibull++ utility,
you can solve for one parameter of the distribution if you provide one data point and the other parameter(s), or solve
for all parameters if you provide two data points. The ALTA version allows you to incorporate information about the
life at the accelerated stress levels in order to estimate the missing parameters of the entire model (i.e., life-stress
relationship and use-level life distribution). See Chapter 26.
1.10 What's New in Version 8?
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 19
1.9.7 Quick Statistical Reference
The Quick Statistical Reference frees you from tedious lookups in tables by quickly returning results for commonly
used statistical functions. Results include Median Ranks, Chi-Squared Values, Cumulative Binomial Probability, and
many more. There is also a Polynomial Interpolation Function that allows you to enter known data points and then
calculate Y for any given X value. See Chapter 25.
1.9.8 Non-Linear Equation Fit Solver and Root Finder
Weibull++ and ALTA continue to offer two familiar statistical tools for working with non-linear equations.
The Non-Linear Equation Fit Solver allows you to estimate the parameters of any user-defined non-linear
equation. This gives you the flexibility to perform simple parameter estimation on statistical models other than the
life distributions and life-stress relationship models available in standard folios. After you have solved the
equation, the tool provides a plot to visualize how the data fit the function, and also makes it easy to calculate Y
for any given X value. See Chapter 21.
The Non-Linear Equation Root Finder allows you to quickly solve for the root of any user-defined non-linear
equation. This helps you eliminate some of the guesswork of solving for the value of the unknown variable that
makes the function be as close to zero as possible. See Chapter 24.
1.10 What's New in Version 8?
With the release of Version 8, Weibull++ and ALTA offer a completely updated user interface that has many new and
enhanced features. Some of the major additions and enhancements in Version 8 include:
New Synthesis Platform and Centralized Data Storage: With the release of Version 8, Weibull++ and ALTA
analyses are stored in a centralized database that supports simultaneous access by multiple users and shares
relevant reliability information between ReliaSofts Synthesis-enabled applications. To give just one simple
example of the many integration opportunities, you can now seamlessly use Weibull++ and/or ALTA analyses to
set the properties for a reliability block diagram or fault tree in BlockSim, and the software can automatically
update the diagram if the underlying data analysis changes.
New and Enhanced Test Design Tools: Weibull++s reliability demonstration test design tool has been
completely redesigned and expanded in Version 8. The new interface uses terminology that is more familiar to
real-world practice and stores the analysis in a folio for future reference. We have also added support for a fourth
test design method: Non-Parametric Bayesian.
Version 8 also offers two completely new tools that were inspired by feedback from Weibull++ users. The
Expected Failure Times Plot can help you to anticipate what will occur during a reliability test and also provide
an early warning if the test is not proceeding as expected. See page 499 in Chapter 18. The Difference Detection
Matrix helps to determine how much test time may be required before the captured data will make it possible to
detect a difference in the reliability of two competing designs. See page 503 in Chapter 18.]
New Target Reliability Estimator: The new Target Reliability Tool generates multiple plots designed to help
you select a target reliability that will minimize cost and maximize profit/ return on investment. See Chapter 19.
Improved Usability for the Stress-Strength and Life Comparison Tools: Both the Life Comparison and
Stress-Strength Calculator tools have been improved in Version 8. Now you can save individual analyses in the
project for future reference, and each folio automatically generates a pdf plot to visualize the comparison. The
new version also allows you to obtain the confidence bounds on the calculated probability. See Chapter 20.
Obtain the Reliability Model Directly Within Degradation and Non-Parametric LDA Folios: When you use
a degradation analysis or non-parametric LDA folio to extrapolate failure/suspension times, its no longer
necessary to transfer the data to a separate folio for life data analysis or ALTA analysis. Version 8 now
automatically calculates the LDA or ALTA model directly within the same folio and gives you immediate access
to the calculated results and plots.
1 Introduction
20 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Redesigned QCP: The Quick Calculation Pad (QCP) has been updated and redesigned in Version 8. The new
interface provides a Calculation Log that works like a paper roll in an adding machine, allowing you to record
the results from a series of different calculations and then copy/paste the results as needed.
Redesigned Quick Parameter Estimator: The Quick Parameter Estimator has proven to be a useful tool
whenever you need to define a model without being able to calculate the parameters of a data set. Both of the QPE
tools have been improved in Version 8.
In the Weibull++ utility (for life distributions such as Weibull or lognormal), we've added a new wizard view that
bypasses the statistical terminology and guides you through a series of questions that will translate what you
know from practical experience with the products behavior into the information required to estimate the
distribution and parameters.
In the ALTA version, you can now estimate the parameters of the entire model, including both the life-stress
relationship and the use-level life distribution (e.g., Arrhenius-Weibull or Eyring-Lognormal). We have also
added support for models with more than one accelerated stress type (e.g., Temperature-Humidity or General
Log-Linear).
New Interval Width Estimator for Warranty Folio Usage Format: The Usage format in Weibull++s warranty
analysis folios supports the analysis of warranty returns data in terms of usage (e.g., miles, cycles, etc.) rather than
time in service. This tool allows you to describe the typical usage (per day, month or year) in terms of either an
average rate or a statistical distribution. When you define the usage as a distribution, Version 8 now offers a new
tool to help you estimate appropriate usage rate intervals.
Reintroducing Word Report Templates: The software continues to offer built-in spreadsheets (similar to
Microsoft Excel) that can be used for custom analysis and reporting (called General Spreadsheets and Analysis
Workbooks). Now in Version 8 we have reintroduced the Word Report Template, a custom reporting utility
that has functionality similar to Microsoft Word. All three tools allow you to automatically insert calculated
results from selected data sheets. With the Word Report Templates, you can also insert tables and plots that are
built automatically based on your specifications and the currently selected data source. See page 573 in Chapter
27.
Automatic Conversion for Time Values Entered in Different Units: With the release of Version 8, all
Synthesis-enabled applications now allow you to define conversion factors for entering time values in different
units. To give just one simple example, you can now enter test data into a standard folio as hours but then use the
QCP to calculate the reliability for a year of operation the software performs the conversion automatically
based on the multipliers specified for the Synthesis repository.
Color-Coding to Facilitate Data Entry: With Version 8, we have introduced new color-coding aids to assist with
data entry and management. There is now an immediate color change if you enter data in an incorrect format. For
Weibull++ standard folios, you also have the option to color-code data points based on their data type (e.g., failure
time vs. suspension) or subset ID.
Take Advantage of Internet Connectivity: One of the many new enhancements in the Version 8 Synthesis
Platform is the ability to take advantage of an active Internet connection to obtain the most up-to-date
announcements, documentation and examples. Once you have registered and activated the application on your
computer, Internet access is not required you can still perform all of your analysis activities while working
offline but an Internet connection allows you to take advantage of several useful new features, including:
ReliaSoft Online (up-to-date tips and announcements), Reliability Web Notes (context-sensitive access to
theoretical background information for the feature youre currently working with), Help Center (a variety of
support tools including the ability to download software updates and generate an e-mail with the details needed
for technical support) and Online Help File (we will always install a static version for the times when youre
working offline, but the Internet version contains all of the latest updates to provide the information users have
been looking for). See Section 1.5 on page 10.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 21
In Synthesis-enabled applications, you will work with repositories, which are relational databases that can contain
one or many projects. Each project can contain one or more analyses; in addition, the project can contain resources,
which represent various types of information available for use throughout the project. The databases and all of their
projects can be accessed by any Synthesis-enabled application that is installed on your computer. In each application,
you will see only the analyses and resources that are applicable to the current application. Certain types of resources
are applicable in, and accessible from, multiple applications.
For example, lets imagine that you have a data set from testing a component called Component A. You use
Weibull++ 8 to perform life data analysis on that data set. You can then take the fitted distribution and its parameters
and publish that information as a resource called a model. Lets call this particular model Component A Failure.
Now imagine that you want to analyze the reliability and maintainability of a system that incorporates Component A.
In BlockSim 8, you can create a resource called a universal reliability definition (URD) that describes an items
failure rate and any activities performed to maintain that item. In this case, you create a URD called Component A
RAM that includes your failure model and some additional resources called tasks, which describe the maintenance
activities. You then assign that URD to the block that represents Component A in your reliability block diagram or
fault tree.
In this example, you have two types of analyses: the life data analysis, which is accessible only via Weibull++, and
the system reliability and maintainability analysis, which is accessible only via BlockSim. You also have three types
of resources: the model, the URD and the tasks. All of these are accessible from all applications via the Resource
Manager, but are used only in BlockSim in this case (although these types of resources are used in certain other
Synthesis-enabled applications). Additionally, because the model was created by publishing analysis results, it can be
changed only by returning to the life data analysis in Weibull++, changing the analysis and republishing.
The sections in this chapter address the following:
The differences between standard and enterprise databases (repositories), and how to create new databases and
open existing databases - Section 2.1 (p. 22).
Implementing security features in the repository - - Section 2.2 (p. 28).
Managing workflow in a multi-user environment - Section 2.3 (p. 47).
Using e-mail notifications and notification groups to keep users up to date on the progress made in completing
assigned actions - Section 2.4 (p. 50).
Settings that affect analyses in all projects throughout the database, including:
Database Time units - Section 2.5 (p. 51).
Warranty Analysis time units - Section 2.6 (p. 52).
Default naming conventions - Section 2.7 (p. 59).
Working in Synthesis
2
2 Working in Synthesis
22 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Tasks types- Section 2.8 (p. 60).
Global identifiers - Section 2.9 (p. 60).
Project categories - Section 2.10 (p. 61).
Project baselines - Section 2.11 (p. 62).
How to protect your data via backups and maintenance - Section 2.12 (p. 64).
Projects and their properties - Section 2.13 (p. 65).
The application interface and common interface conventions, including:
The Multiple Document Interface - Section 2.14 (p. 69).
The Project Manager - Section 2.14.1 (p. 70).
My Portal - Section 2.14.2 (p. 76).
Control panels - Section 2.14.3 (p. 78).
Data sheets - Section 2.14.4 (p. 85).
Select Existing window - Section 2.14.5 (p. 88).
The Ribbon, including the Backstage view - Section 2.14.7 (p. 90).
How to work with attachments - Section 2.15 (p. 117).
Importing and exporting information - Section 2.16 (p. 119).
2.1 Standard and Enterprise Databases
Synthesis-enabled applications offer the choice to store analysis data in a standard database (*.rsrp) or enterprise
database (Oracle or Microsoft SQL Server).
Standard databases are easy to create and maintain without any special IT infrastructure or support but there are
limitations to the amount of data they can store and the number of users who can access the database
simultaneously.
An enterprise database requires implementation and support of Oracle or Microsoft SQL Server but it is a more
robust platform that can store much more analysis information in the same database and supports access by many
more simultaneous users. Synthesis-enabled applications are compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2005 or later
and Oracle 10g or later (including the free Express editions of all of these). See Section 2.1.1 on page 23.
Working with a database-driven, multi-user application may be a bit different from working with other types of
software that you are familiar with (such as Microsoft Excel or earlier versions of Weibull++). For example:
No Save or Undo commands: Synthesis-enabled applications do not provide a Save command because your
changes are saved whenever you make them in an analysis, navigate away from a cell in a worksheet or table or
click OK to close a window. It is also important to note that, due to the multi-user, database-driven nature of the
software, these applications do not offer the ability to undo changes that have been saved in the database.
Whenever you initiate a significant change to the database that cannot be undone (e.g., deleting an analysis), you
will be prompted to confirm that you want to proceed. Note that the File > Save As command, which is available
when you are working with a standard database, exports a complete copy of the database file (*.rsrp) to the new
filename and location that you specify.
Note: For each instance of the application running on your computer, you can open only one database at a time. If a
database is currently open, it will be closed automatically when you create or open a different one.
2.1 Standard and Enterprise Databases
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 23
Simultaneous access by multiple users: One of the most useful features of ReliaSoft's Synthesis-enabled
applications is the ability to provide centralized data storage and allow multiple users to work cooperatively on
analysis projects.
The Simultaneous Access by Multiple Users section describes how the software handles situations when
multiple users are logged in to the same database simultaneously. See Section 2.3 on page 47.
In addition, the Manage Repository Security section describes the features available for managing user
account information and monitoring access to the database. See Section 2.2.4 on page 34.
Ability for authorized users to manage database-wide settings: Synthesis-enabled applications offer some
configurable settings that are applicable for all analyses in a particular database. This includes settings for
restricting the access to particular analysis projects (see Section 2.2 on page 28) and the ability to create and
manage baselines (i.e., backups) for selected analysis projects (see Section 2.11 on page 62).
You must take steps to guard against data loss or corruption: As with any resource that contains a large
amount of valuable information that would be difficult to re-create, it is essential to make sure that you are
diligent about storing adequate backups and employing the necessary maintenance activities to keep the database
operating smoothly. In addition, you can use the project baselines feature if you want to be able to easily roll back
an entire analysis project to the state that it was in at a particular point in time (e.g., to a point just before you
made a major revision to the analysis, such as moving from prototype to final design). See Section 2.11 on page
62 and Section 2.12 on page 64.
2.1.1 Note About Establishing a Database Server with Oracle or SQL Server
When using Oracle or SQL Server for data storage, most organizations will choose to establish a separate database
server with the appropriate IT maintenance and support. It also is necessary to purchase the appropriate license
package for the database platform. This is separate from the ReliaSoft license agreement and must be negotiated
directly with Oracle or Microsoft.
As an alternative, you may choose to use the free versions of Oracle or SQL Server if the expected load for the
database fits within the limited capabilities of the Express edition (as specified by Oracle/Microsoft). If you have a
reasonably powerful computer and administrative rights to install and configure software, you can establish a
functioning Enterprise database on your own. If your organization's needs grow beyond the capabilities of the
Express edition, you can upgrade to a more robust version with the appropriate IT infrastructure and support.
Although it is important to note that ReliaSoft cannot provide full documentation and support for the third-party
database platforms (Oracle and SQL Server) that provide back-end data storage for Synthesis-enabled applications,
we do provide a limited number of resources as a convenience for users who wish to explore the possibilities of an
enterprise database implementation without making a large investment of time and resources.
To access these resources, please visit:
SQL Server: http://Synthesis.ReliaSoft.com/sql_server.htm (includes instructions for how to configure SQL
Server Express for use with Synthesis-enabled application)
Oracle: http://Synthesis.ReliaSoft.com/oracle.htm
Note: For power users and/or more robust performance, SQL Server Express or Oracle Express can be installed on the
local computer, allowing the user to create enterprise repositories without the need for a database server.
2 Working in Synthesis
24 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
2.1.2 Creating a New Standard Database
To create a new standard database, choose File > New > Create a new standard repository.
In the Repository name field, specify the filename for the new *.rsrp file. The path where the file will be saved is
shown below this field; to change the location, click the browse icon in the field.
The following options are available when you create a new standard database:
Select the Restricted Access check box if you want the new database to be login secure (see Section 2.2 on page
28). You can then select the Immediately go to security window option if you want to add user accounts as part
of the database creation process. If you do not select this option, you will be the only authorized user until you add
more users. See Section 2.2.4 on page 34..
Select the Import from existing repository check box if you want to import entire projects and other data from
an existing repository. See Section 2.16.5 on page 124.
An additional option is also available:
Select the Always start by connecting with the last repository check box if you want the application to always
connect to the last database you used. The database will open automatically if the connection information is valid
and your user account is active
When you create a new repository, at least one project is automatically created as part of the process. Specifically:
If security is used, then two projects will be created: a private project and a public project. See Section 2.2.1 on
page 29.
If security is not used, then a single project will be created.
The Project Item Wizard will appear automatically, allowing you to add an analysis to the project. In the case of login
secure databases, you will automatically be working in the private project. If you want to leave the project empty, you
can click Cancel. For details on the Project Item Wizard, see Section 2.13.2 on page 68.
2.1.3 Opening an Existing Standard Database
To open an existing database, choose File > Recent and then select the *.rsrp file in the Recent Repositories list.
You can also choose File > Open Repository and browse for the *.rsrp file.
If the database has login security enabled, the software will get the domain and username that you used to log in to
your computer and check to see if they match an active user account in the database. If there is a match, the database
will open automatically with the permissions that have been defined for that user account.
Note: If you create a non-secure database, you can enable security later by choosing File > Manage Repository >
Authorized Users and then clicking the Apply Login Security button. You cannot automatically remove security from a
database once it has been enabled. However, you can create a new non-secure database and use the Import from
existing repository check box to automatically import all of the data from the secure database to the non-secure one.
Tip: The domain is part of your database login information. For this reason, if you anticipate that you will need to open a
standard database from a computer that is not on the same domain, you should make arrangements in advance to set up
an alternative login that you can use to access the database from other domains. This is required regardless of where the
database file is currently located. See Section 2.2.5 on page 40..
2.1 Standard and Enterprise Databases
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 25
Connection Issues
If you are unable to connect with an existing standard database, you may be encountering any of the following issues:
No access to the database. If you have not been granted access to the database, you will receive a message
stating that your account in the Synthesis repository is not active or not assigned to at least one security group. To
correct this problem, you will need assistance from a user with the Manage Users and logins permission to edit
your account settings. See Section 2.2.4 on page 34.
The database does not recognize your current Windows login. The Synthesis repository uses Windows
authentication to verify the user. If your current Windows login (domain/username) is different from what was
specified for your user account, then you will receive a message to connect using an alternative login. You will
need assistance from a user with the Manage Users and logins permission to enable the use of an alternative
login for your user account. See Section 2.2.5 on page 40.
2.1.4 Creating a New Enterprise Database
If your organization already has established a database server with Oracle or Microsoft SQL Server and you have the
permissions necessary to create a new database on the server, you can choose File > Manage Repository >
Repository Creation to open a wizard that will guide you through the steps to create a new database.
The first step in the wizard allows you to specify where you want to create the new database. If you choose SQL
Server from the Server Type drop-down list, the window will look like the one shown next.
In the Server Name field, type the name of the Microsoft SQL Server implementation where the new database will
be created.
In the Database Name field, type the name of the new enterprise database that will be created.
Note: If you are creating a local SQL Server Express repository (i.e., if SQL Server is implemented on your computer
rather than on a database server), the server name is usually your login for that computer followed by \SQLEXPRESS
(i.e., UserName\SQLEXPRESS).
2 Working in Synthesis
26 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
If you choose Oracle from the Server Type drop-down list, the window will look like the one shown next.
You will need the following information:
Port, Host and Service identifiers for the Oracle server where the new database will be created.
Schema of the new Enterprise database.
Password for the new enterprise database schema.
Admin Information, that is the administrative username and password for the Oracle server.
For either server type, select the Import from existing repository check box if you want to import entire projects
and other data from an existing repository. See Section 2.16.5 on page 124.
Click OK to create the database. The database will not open automatically; you must connect to it. See Section 2.1.5
on page 27.
When you are connected to an enterprise database, a connection speed indicator will be displayed in the MDI status
bar.
< 30 ms: Good (acceptable performance)
30 - 70 ms: OK (may exhibit some delays in operations, opening/closing windows, etc.)
70 - 110 ms: Slow (will exhibit some delays in operations, opening/closing windows, etc.)
110 - 150 ms: Very slow (will exhibit significant delays in operations, opening/closing windows, etc.)
> 150 ms: Extremely slow (will result in unacceptable performance and usability)
IMPORTANT for SQL Server Databases: To create a functioning user account in a SQL Server database, the username
must be associated with a SQL Server Login, which allows SQL Server to recognize the username via Windows
Authentication. There are three ways to ensure that a user account created via a Synthesis-enabled application will be
associated with a SQL Server Login. If you have not employed one of these three methods, then the user account will not
be able to log in to the SQL Server database. See Section 2.2.7 on page 42.
2.1 Standard and Enterprise Databases
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 27
2.1.5 Connecting to an Existing Enterprise Database
If your organization already has created an enterprise database on Oracle or Microsoft SQL Server and you have an
active user account for the database, you can connect to the database as explained in this section. To create an active
user account, see Section 2.2.4 on page 34.
When you are connected to an enterprise database, a connection speed indicator will be displayed in the MDI status
bar.
< 30 ms: Good (acceptable performance)
30 - 70 ms: OK (may exhibit some delays in operations, opening/closing windows, etc.)
70 - 110 ms: Slow (will exhibit some delays in operations, opening/closing windows, etc.)
110 - 150 ms: Very slow (will exhibit significant delays in operations, opening/closing windows, etc.)
> 150 ms: Extremely slow (will result in unacceptable performance and usability)
Connecting for the First Time
Choose File > New > Create a new enterprise repository connection file.
This command creates a Synthesis repository connection file (*.rserp) that is stored locally on your computer; the file
contains all of the necessary information for connecting to the enterprise repository. Once this file is created, it can be
used to connect to the database and to import from or export to the database.
Specify the name for the connection file, then choose the database type and version (i.e., Microsoft SQL Server 2005
or 2008, or Oracle 10 or 11).
For SQL Server databases, enter the server name and database name. Select the Use impersonation check box if
you want the new connection file to impersonate a Windows user account with a SQL Server login that can be
shared by multiple users. This connection file can then be distributed to any user who does not have his/her own
individual SQL Server login and is not part of an Active Directory group that has a login. See Section 2.2.7 on
page 42.
For Oracle databases, enter the port, host and service identifiers and the database schema. Your Windows login
credentials are used for access to the database; enter your Windows password.
Select the Always start by connecting with the last repository check box if you want to connect to the last database
you used the next time you launch the application. The database will open automatically if the connection
information is valid and your user account is active. If you are using an Oracle database and the current Windows
login credentials cannot be validated, the software will display a window that allows you to type a different domain,
username and password, if appropriate. You may need to use this option, for example, if you are logged in to your
personal home computer but you are trying to access a database on your companys network via VPN.
Once you have connected to the database, you can manage user accounts by choosing File > Database Setup >
Authorized Users.
2 Working in Synthesis
28 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Reconnecting
To connect to an enterprise repository that you have already connected to, choose File > Recent and in the Recent
Repositories list, choose the *.rserp file. You can also choose File > Open Repository and then browse for the
*.rserp file.
Connection Issues
If you are unable to connect with an existing enterprise database, you may be encountering any of the following
issues:
No access to the database. If you have not been granted access to the database, you will receive a message
stating that your account in the Synthesis repository is not active or not assigned to at least one security group. To
correct this problem, you will need assistance from a user with the Manage Users and logins permission to edit
your account settings. See Section 2.2.4 on page 34.
Cannot connect to the server or login failed. Server-related issues may occur for several reasons, and you may
receive various messages pertaining to the situation. Common issues are:
You do not have a network connection or you may have entered the incorrect database or server name in the
connection file. Check if you have a network connection and enter the correct name of the database or server.
The server may not be configured to allow remote connections, has certain firewall settings or is experiencing
other issues. In this case, you will need to contact the IT support group responsible for the server.
In SQL Server databases, a login issue may occur if your username is not associated with a SQL Server Login.
See Section 2.2.7 on page 42.
The database does not recognize your current Windows login. The Synthesis repository uses Windows
authentication to verify the user. If your current Windows login (domain/username) is different from what was
specified for your user account, then you will receive a message to connect using an alternative login. You will
need assistance from a user with the Manage users and logins permission to enable the use of an alternative
login for your user account. See Section 2.2.5 on page 40.
2.2 Overview of Security Options
All enterprise databases use login security (i.e., they are secure). A standard database can be configured with or
without login security (i.e., it may be secure or non-secure). For instructions on how to determine whether a standard
database will have security enabled, see Section 2.2.4 on page 34.
In a non-secure standard database, any user who has read/write access to the database file (*.rsrp) will have full
administrative and user permissions throughout the repository. Security-related features (such as the ability to create a
private project or to lock a project) will still be visible in the interface to help you prepare for the transition from a
non-secure to secure database, if desired. But the only factor that will prevent any user from performing any function
in the repository is whether another user who is simultaneously logged in to the same database has the record
currently in use.
In a secure database (both standard and enterprise), the actions that a user can perform in any given project within
the repository depend on multiple factors:
Whether the project is public or private - Section 2.2.1 (p. 29).
Whether the user is assigned as the project owner for the project - Section 2.2.2 (p. 30).
Tip: It is important to note that the domain is part of your database login information. For this reason, if you anticipate that
you will need to connect to an enterprise database from a computer that is not on the same domain, you should make
arrangements in advance to set up an alternative login that you can use to access the database from other domains.
2.2 Overview of Security Options
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 29
For a public project, whether the project uses repository-level or project-level security - Section 2.2.3 (p. 31).
In general, we recommend to:
Use repository-level security if you want all projects to be accessible to any user account that is assigned to
at least one security group.
Use project-level security if you want different users to have different levels of access for different projects.
The security group(s) that have been assigned to the user account, and the specific permissions associated with
each of those groups - Section 2.2.4 (p. 34).
Whether the project is locked - Section 2.2.8 (p. 45).
Whether the project has been checked out - Section 2.2.9 (p. 45).
Whether the project item (e.g., a diagram or allocation analysis in BlockSim, a folio or tool in Weibull++/ALTA,
or a system hierarchy item in Xfmea/RCM++) inherits its item permissions from the project, or can only be
edited by a specific subset of the user(s) who are able to edit the rest of the project - Section 2.2.10 (p. 47).
In both secure and non-secure databases, the centralized data storage allows multiple users to work collaboratively on
analysis projects. Therefore, access to a particular record at any given time will also depend on whether it is currently
in use by another user who is simultaneously logged in to the same repository. See Section 2.3 on page 47.
2.2.1 Private and Public Projects
In Synthesis repositories, there are two types of projects that you can create: a public or a private project. In a non-
secure database, both types of projects are accessible to any user who has access to the database. In a secure database,
a private project is accessible only to the project owner and to users with the Manage all projects permission. No
other user can view or edit the project. On the other hand, public projects may be accessible to any user who has
access to the database (depending on the security settings that have been implemented. See Section 2.2 on page 28.).
The following sections describe how to set the public or private status of a project.
New Projects
If you have the Create and own private projects permission, the Make Private check box will be available in the
Project Properties window whenever you create a new project, as shown next. If you select the option, the project will
be created under the Private heading of the project list. (See Section 2.14.1.1 on page 73.) If you clear the option, the
Note: In addition to the factors listed above, the security groups can also be used to assign certain permissions that apply
throughout the entire repository (such as the ability to manage user accounts or manage repository time units). If one of
these permissions is granted via any of the security groups assigned to the users account, he/she will have the capability
throughout the entire repository.
2 Working in Synthesis
30 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
project will be created under the Public heading.
Existing Projects
To change the private status of an existing project, select the project in the project list and choose Project > Security
> Make Public.
To change the public status of an existing project, select the project in the project list and choose Project > Security
> Make Private.
2.2.2 Project Owner
In a secure database, the user who is assigned as the project owner for a particular project has full permissions within
that project. This includes the Basic permissions at project level (e.g., creating and editing project items) and the
Advanced permissions at project level (e.g., deleting project items, setting project security, editing project
properties, etc.) even if the user does not have those permissions for any of the security groups assigned to his/her
account.
By default, the project owner will be the user who created the project, but users with the Manage all projects
permission can change the owner at any time. See Section 2.2.4.3 on page 37.
There are two ways to identify the current owner of a project:
You can use the filters in the project list to sort projects based on the project owner. Each project will be displayed
under the name of its corresponding owner. See Section 2.14.1.1 on page 73.
Tip: If you have the Manage all projects permission, you can select multiple projects and change their private/public
status all at the same time via the Manage Projects window. See Section 2.13.3 on page 68.
2.2 Overview of Security Options
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 31
If you have the Edit project properties or Manage all projects permission, you can identify the owner by
selecting the project in the project list and then choosing Project > Management > Edit Project Properties. This
opens the Project Properties window where the name of the current owner is displayed in the status bar at the
bottom of the window.
To assign a different database user to be the owner for a selected project, select the project in the project list and
choose Project > Security > Change Owner.
2.2.3 Repository-Level vs. Project-Level Security
For every project in a secure database, there is a choice of which type of security will control how users can access
the project. In general, we recommend to:
Use repository-level security if you want all projects to be accessible to any user account that is assigned to at
least one security group - Section 2.2.3.1 (p. 31).
Use project-level security if you want different users to have different levels of access for different projects -
Section 2.2.3.2 (p. 32).
Both security methods use security groups to determine the permissions that users will have within projects. A
security group is a set of permissions that can be granted to user accounts, with permissions ranging from read-only
access to full administrative authority. Users with the Manage users and logins permission can use the Manage
Repository Security window to set up security groups and users. See Section 2.2.4 on page 34.
To set or change a projects security, use the Security tab of the Project Properties window. (See Section 2.13.1 on
page 66.) You will need at least one of the following roles/permissions to access this tab:
You can configure the security settings of any project for which you are assigned as the project owner. See Section
2.2.2 on page 30.
You can configure the security settings of any project for which you have the Set project security permission.
See Section 2.2.4.3 on page 37.
If you have the Manage all projects permission, you can also use the Manage Projects window to view and edit
the properties of all projects in the database. See Section 2.13.3 on page 68.
2.2.3.1 Repository-Level Security
The following example shows the security groups that are created by default when you create a new database. The
Admin group, which provides full permissions for all features and all analyses in the repository, cannot be deleted and
Tip: If you have the Manage all projects permission, you can select multiple projects and assign one database user to be
owner of those projects via the Manage Projects window. See Section 2.13.3 on page 68.
Tip: Although it is possible for some projects in the database to use repository-level security and other projects to use
project-level security, it is generally recommended to configure all projects with one type or the other.
2 Working in Synthesis
32 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
the properties cannot be modified. For the other predefined groups, you can edit their permissions or replace them
with new groups that fit the specific way that the repository will be used.
If all projects in the database use only repository-level security, then all users will have the specified level of access
for all projects. For example, with the basic set of security groups that are created by default in a new database, user
accounts assigned to the View security group will have read-only access to all projects in the database, whereas
user accounts assigned to the User security group will have read and write permissions to all projects.
If you need the repository to provide users with different levels of access for different types of projects, then you will
need to implement project-level security, as described in the next section.
2.2.3.2 Project-Level Security
Project-level security allows you to control which security group(s) or individual user(s) can view or edit each
individual project.
For example, suppose you want to grant a user read/write access to all projects that belong to her own organizational
group (Department A), read-only access to all projects that belong to another group (Department B and Department
C), and no access at all to projects that have been classified as Confidential. In this case, you would create a
2.2 Overview of Security Options
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 33
security group for each type of access, and then assign the appropriate security groups to the user's account. The
settings for this scenario are shown next.
Next, you must limit access to each project in the repository based on specific security groups and/or users (i.e., select
Use specific security groups and users on the Security tab of the Project Properties window). The following picture
shows the security settings for one of the projects maintained by Department A. This configuration shows how access
may be limited by security group(s).
In this example, users assigned to the Department A security group will be able to access the project with the full
set of read/write permissions that have been granted to that group, while users from other departments who are also
assigned to the Read-Only security group will have the limited read-only permissions that have been granted to that
group.
2 Working in Synthesis
34 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Now assume that Department A is working with an outside consultant for one of their many different analysis
projects. To configure the database to allow this consultant to have individual access to only one specific project, you
assign her account to a new security group called Consultants. This new group defines the permissions that will be
available to a consultant for any particular project that he/she might be individually assigned to. Then you use the
Limit by Users option to give her these permissions for only one of the Department A projects, as shown next.
Note that if a particular user is assigned in the Limit by Users area and is also a member of one (or more) of the
groups assigned in the Limit by Groups area, the user will have the least restrictive set of permissions. For example,
suppose that Jane Consultant later becomes a member of the Department A group. Even if you clear the Create
project items check box under her name in the Limit by Users area, Jane will still have the permission for this
project because she belongs to the Department A group. Likewise, if the Department A group does not have the
Delete project items permission, but Jane is eligible for that permission from another security group that is not
assigned to the current project, then if you select the Delete project items check box under her name, Jane will have
an additional permission in this project that is not available to the other members of the Department A group.
2.2.4 Manage Repository Security
In order for a user to access a Synthesis database, he/she must have a valid user account in the database. This section
describes how users with the Manage users and logins permission can create and manage user accounts in the
database via the Manage Repository Security window.
2.2 Overview of Security Options
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 35
The Manage Repository Security window may be displayed when you create a new enterprise database, when you
enable login security for a standard database, or when you choose File > Manage Repository > Authorized Users.
The following sections describe how to use the Manage Repository Security window:
Creating user accounts - Section 2.2.4.1 (p. 35)
Creating security groups - Section 2.2.4.2 (p. 36)
Table of database permissions - Section 2.2.4.3 (p. 37)
2.2.4.1 Creating User Accounts
In the Manage Repository Security window, the Users tab displays a list of the user accounts that have been created in
the current database. Note that:
In non-secure databases, the software automatically creates an account for anyone who opens the database file.
All accounts have full administrative permissions in the database, and the accounts cannot be deactivated or
deleted. In addition, any user can create new accounts for users who have not yet accessed the database. This is
useful when you need to send action notification e-mails to those users from within the database. For complete
information on creating action notifications, see See page 150 in Chapter 3.
To enable the security settings for this type of repository, click the Apply Login Security button that will be
displayed in the lower left corner of the window.
In secure databases, you will need to create a user account for everyone who needs access to the database. Use the
Add, Edit or Delete buttons below the table to manage the user accounts. When you create or edit a user account,
the User Login and Contact Information window will appear, allowing you to enter/edit contact details, add the
user to security groups and activate/deactivate the account. See Section 2.2.5 on page 40.
To export the data currently displayed in the table to an Excel spreadsheet, click the Send to Excel button. You will
be prompted to specify the pathname/filename for a new Excel file.
You can also import user accounts from Microsoft Active Directory by clicking the Active Directory button. This
opens the Import Users from Active Directory window, which allows you to search for user accounts that have been
defined in the Active Directory and choose one or more to import as new user accounts in the Synthesis database. See
Section 2.2.6 on page 41.
User Account Requirements
In secure databases, the user account must meet the following requirements in order to have access to the database:
The user account must be in active status. An inactive user account cannot be used to access the database unless
an authorized user makes the account active again. To display only the user accounts that are currently active,
select the Show active users only check box, which is at the lower left side of the window. If the check box is
cleared, the table will include both active and inactive user accounts.
Note that if the account has been used to log in to the database at least once, deleting the account will make it
inactive and the same username cannot be used again in the database. This is because the username may be
associated with existing analysis information. Alternatively, if the user account has never been used, you can
delete the record from the database and you will be able to create another user account with the same username in
the future if desired.
The user account must be assigned to at least one security group. (The next section describes how to use security
groups.)
2 Working in Synthesis
36 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
For SQL Server databases: The username must be associated with a SQL Server Login that allows the database
platform to recognize the user and give access to the application database. If you create a user account that is not
recognized by SQL Server, the user will not be able to log in to the database. See Section 2.2.7 on page 42.
Synthesis applications use Windows authentication to identify the user; therefore, the user must be logged in to a
computer that uses the same domain/username that is defined in the user account. If the user needs to connect to a
database from a different domain, you can set up an alternative login that will allow the user to access the database
without Windows authentication.
2.2.4.2 Creating Security Groups
Throughout this help file, we use the phrase authorized users to indicate functionality that may be restricted based on
specific security permissions. Security permissions allow you to control how users access and use the database. In
Synthesis repositories, a set of permissions is known as a security group. Note that:
In non-secure databases, all users with access to the *.rsrp file have full permissions to the database; therefore, the
concept of security groups does not apply to this type of database.
In secure databases, each user may have different permissions based on the security group(s) that have been
assigned to the user account.
In the Manage Repository Security window, the Security Groups tab displays a list of all the security groups that have
been created in the database. The user who created the database automatically belongs to the Admin group, and has
full user and administrative permissions. The Admin group cannot be deleted or have its permissions modified;
therefore, its window cannot be opened from the Security Groups tab. To assign or remove a user account from this
group, open the User Login and Contact Information window and select or clear the Admin check box. See Section
2.2.5 on page 40.
By default, the software also includes three additional predefined security groups. Depending on your organizations
specific needs, you may choose to make adjustments to the default security groups or replace them with new groups.
For a more detailed discussion of how you might want to configure the security for the projects in your repository, see
Section 2.2 on page 28.
Use the Add, Edit or Delete buttons below the table to manage the security groups. When you add or edit a security
group, you can assign the permissions for the security group as well as select the database users that belong to each
group. In addition:
When you do not assign a user account to a security group, the account will have no access to the database;
however, users with access to the database can send action notification e-mails to that account from within the
database. See page 150 in Chapter 3.
You can assign a user account to more than one security group.
For permissions that apply throughout the repository (e.g., the ability to manage users and logins), if the
permission is granted in any of the security groups assigned to the users account, he/she will have that
permission throughout the repository.
For project-level permissions (e.g., the ability to create/edit project items), it depends on the type of security
assigned to the project.
If the project has repository-level security, the user will have all of the project-level permissions that have
been granted from any of the security groups that are assigned to the users account.
If the project has project-level security, the user will have only the project-level permissions that have been
granted via the security group(s) that are assigned to the project and also assigned to that user's account.
Note: To avoid unintended consequences, if you choose to implement different levels of access for different
projects, it is generally recommended to assign project-level security for all projects in the database.
2.2 Overview of Security Options
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 37
2.2.4.3 Table of Database Permissions
The following table provides a summary of the specific permissions that can be granted in the database. If the
permissions is application-specific, the affected application(s) are identified in the name.
You can edit the permissions of a security group even when a user associated with that security group is currently
logged in to the database; however, the changes will not take effect until the user closes the database and reconnects
to it.
Note: Project owners (see Section 2.2.2 on page 30) have certain permissions that are equivalent to having the Manage
all projects permission, but only for the projects that they own. For example, project owners can view private projects and
lock/unlock projects, but only if they own those particular projects.
Basic permissions throughout repository
Create and own private projects Allows you to create projects that, in a secure database, are
accessible only to you and to users with the Manage all
projects permission. In a non-secure database, the project will
be designated as private but it will still be accessible to all
database users.
Note that if you remove this permission from a security group,
the users in that group who own private projects in the repository
will no longer have owner permissions for the existing
projects. You can assign a new owner to each affected project
via the Manage Projects window. See Section 2.13.3 on page 68.
Create and own public projects Allows you to create projects that may be accessible to any
database user (depending on the project security setting).
Note that if you remove this permission from a security group,
the users in that group who own public projects in the repository
will no longer have owner permissions for the existing
projects. You can assign a new owner to each affected project
via the Manage Projects window. See Section 2.13.3 on page 68.
Create portal messages Allows you to create and send messages to other users via the
Messages page in My Portal. See Section 2.14.2 on page 76.
Basic permissions at project level
Read Allows you to view but not edit any of the projects in the
database. You can perform tasks that do not modify the data
(e.g., calculate metrics in the Quick Calculation Pad, export
data, etc.).
Create/edit project items Allows you to create and edit project items, such as folios in
Weibull++/ALTA, block diagrams in BlockSim, system
hierarchy items Xfmea/RCM++, and the like.
Create/edit/delete own resources Allows you to use the Resource Manager to manage the
resources (e.g., models, URDs, etc.) that you have created in a
given project. See page 131 in Chapter 3.
2 Working in Synthesis
38 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Advanced permissions at project level
Delete project items Allows you to delete any item in a given project (e.g., folios in Weibull++/
ALTA, diagrams in BlockSim, system hierarchy items in Xfmea/RCM++,
and the like).
Create/edit/delete all
resources
Allows you to use the Resource Manager to manage all resources available
in a given project. See page 131 in Chapter 3.
Set project security Allows you to control user access within a given project. This includes the
ability to access the Security page in the Project Properties window and to
set Item Permissions for any item in the project. See Section 2.13.1 on page
66 and Section 2.2.10 on page 47.
Edit project properties Allows you to use the Project Properties window to edit the project name,
description, category and other settings of a given project. See Section
2.13.1 on page 66.
Lock or check out project Allows you to:
Lock and unlock public projects. See Section 2.2.8 on page 45.
Check in and check out both public and private projects. See Section
2.2.9 on page 45.
Create project baselines Allows you to create or restore baselines for a given project, which are exact
replicas of the project at a particular point in time (i.e., backups). See Section
2.11 on page 62.
Delete project Allows you to delete a given project.
Manage change logs in
Xfmea/RCM++
Allows you to enable and manage change logs within a given project.
Change logs can be created for FMEAs and DVP&R analyses in Xfmea and
RCM++.
Approve change logs in
Xfmea/RCM++
Allows you to implement electronic approval tracking for change logs
within a given project. Change logs can be created for FMEAs and DVP&R
analyses in Xfmea and RCM++.
Administrative permissions throughout repository
Manage all projects Grants you all of the basic and advanced project-level permissions for all
public and private projects in the repository. It also allows you to use the
Manage Projects window to view and edit settings of all projects in the
database. See Section 2.13.3 on page 68.
Manage users and logins Allows you to:
Use the Manage Repository Security window to add user accounts to the
database, and define security groups. See Section 2.2.4 on page 34.
Use the Prior Logins window to view and export a history of database
logins. See Section 2.3.2 on page 49.
Use the Reset In Use Flags window to clear the in use status for
selected database users. See Section 2.3.3 on page 49.
2.2 Overview of Security Options
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 39
Manage e-mail
notifications
Allows you to:
Use the E-mail Notifications window to enable e-mail notifications sent
by the software and control when they are sent. See Section 2.4 on page
50.
Use the Notification Groups window to add and manage the distribution
groups for the e-mail notifications. See Section 2.4.1 on page 51.
Manage profiles and
templates in Xmfea/
RCM++
This permission is available only in enterprise databases. It allows you to:
Use the Profiles/Library Manager window in Xfmea/RCM++ to
configure the predefined settings stored in the active library of the
enterprise database.
Use the Templates Manager window in Xfmea/RCM++ to configure
report templates stored in the enterprise database.
Manage other repository
settings
Allows you to:
Use the Manage Units window to define the time units available for use
in any project within the database. See Section 2.5 on page 51.
Use the Manage Warranty Units window in Weibull++ to set
equivalencies between the time units used in the repository and the units
used in some warranty folios. See Section 2.6 on page 52.
Use the Define Default Names window to specify how default names for
resources and blocks are created. See Section 2.7 on page 59.
Use the Task Types window in RCM++ and BlockSim to map the task
types used in RCM++ to the task classes in the universal reliability
definition (URD). See Section 2.8 on page 60.
Use the Global Identifiers window to define the default names for
identifier fields that can be used to search for blocks or resources within
a given project. See Section 2.9 on page 60.
Use the Project Categories window to define the categories that can be
used for grouping and filtering the projects in the database. See Section
2.10 on page 61.
Use the Project Baselines window to manage project baselines, which
are exact replicas of the project at a particular point in time (i.e.,
backups) that can be restored when and if needed. See Section 2.11 on
page 62.
Approve actions Allows you to review and approve actions, which are Synthesis resources
that allow you to track progress made in a project. See page 150 in Chapter
3.
Manage all portal
messages
Allows you to edit or delete all messages you sent and messages addressed
to you via the Messages page in My Portal. See Section 2.14.2 on page 76.
2 Working in Synthesis
40 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
2.2.5 User Login and Contact Info
The User Login and Contact Information window displays the username, contact details and security group(s) for
each user account in a database. If you have an existing account in the database, you can display the information for
your own user account by choosing My Portal > Users > My Profile.
If you have the Manage users and logins permission, you can create new accounts or display the information for
any existing user account by clicking the Add or Edit button in the Manage Repository Security window.
User Info Tab
If you have the Manage users and logins permission, you can use the User Login and Contact Information window
to add new user accounts to the database. There are two ways to create a new account:
Directly enter the username, contact information and security group(s) for the new user account.
Use the Active Directory button to import user information stored in the Microsoft Active Directory for the
current domain.
For SQL Server databases, the Create SQL Server login check box will be displayed. Select the check box if you
want to create an individual SQL Server login when you create each new Synthesis user account. The SQL Server
login will be created if a login does not already exist for the username and if you have the appropriate authority in
SQL Server to create logins. If you clear this check box, the user can still be recognized by SQL Server if a) an
individual SQL Server login was created in advance in SQL Server, b) the user belongs to an Active Directory group
that has a SQL Server login shared by all members of the group or c) the user connects to the repository with an
enterprise connection file (*.rserp) that impersonates another Windows user account that has a SQL Server login. See
Section 2.2.7 on page 42.
Existing User Accounts
If you have an existing user account in the database, you can edit the contact details in your own user account;
however, only users with the Manage users and logins permission can edit the security group that has been assigned
to your account.
If the Active check box at the bottom of the window is selected, then the user account can be used to log in to the
current database. Users with the Manage users and logins permission can temporarily or permanently prevent the
user from accessing the database with that account by clearing the check box.
Click the Active Directory button if you wish to update the contact information based on information stored in the
Microsoft Active Directory for the current domain and username.
Alternative Login Tab
If you are using a secure database, the repository will not be able to authenticate your credentials if you attempt to log
in from a computer that is on a different domain from the one specified in your user account. Therefore, the
Alternative Login tab will be displayed in the User Login and Contact Information window for that database.
IMPORTANT: The domain and username fields provide the authentication that allows you to access the database. For
existing user accounts in Oracle and SQL Server databases, these two fields cannot be modified because the information
is associated with the login that allows the database to recognize the user. In standard databases with login security, you
have the option to edit the username, but you must have a user with the Manage users and logins permission inactivate
the old username that you used to access the database and then create the new one with the desired username;
otherwise, simply changing the username in the User Info tab may cause you to be inadvertently locked out of the
database.
2.2 Overview of Security Options
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 41
Users with the Manage users and logins permission can enable or disable the use of an alternative login for your
user account. When the setting is enabled, you can create a username and password combination that will allow you
to access the database when you are not using a computer on the specified domain. The combination of username and
password must be unique, and the password is CaSe SeNsiTiVe.
The alternative login must be set up in advance. If you know, for example, that you will need to make a copy of a
standard database and open it on a computer that is not on your company's network or that you will need to connect to
an enterprise database from a computer that is not on your company's network, you must have an authorized user set
up the alternative login beforehand.
2.2.6 Import Users from Active Directory
When you click the Active Directory button in the Manage Repository Security window, the Import Users from
Active Directory window will be displayed. This window allows you to search for user contact information from
Microsoft Active Directory and then use the selected records to create new user accounts in the database.
Use the Search Options on the right side of the window to select which user information will be displayed in the
table on the left side of the window. Click Search to update the table based on the criteria that you have specified.
While the query is in progress, the Search button changes to a Cancel button. Depending on the number of records
in the Active Directory, a full search may take some time. If you need to end the search before it is complete, click
Cancel. The utility will return the results of the search up to the point of cancellation.
The table will display records that:
Match your selections on the right side of the window.
Have the minimum information required to create a user account in a Synthesis repository (i.e., username, first
name, last name and e-mail address).
Do not already have a user account in the current database.
Use the check boxes to choose the rows that will be used to create new user accounts. If you select or clear the
check box in the table header, it will select or clear the check boxes for all rows in the table.
Use the Authentication domain field to identify the authentication source so that users can access the database
using their domain usernames and passwords.
Use the Import as Members of option to set the security group(s) that will be assigned to the selected user
accounts. Security groups control the permissions of each user in the database. See Section 2.2.4.2 on page 36.
For SQL Server databases, the Create SQL Server login check box will be displayed. Select the check box if you
want to create an individual SQL Server login when you create each new Synthesis user account. The SQL Server
login will be created if a login does not already exist for the username and if you have the appropriate authority in
SQL Server to create logins. If you clear this check box, the user can still be recognized by SQL Server if a) an
individual SQL Server login was created in advance in SQL Server, b) the user belongs to an Active Directory group
that has a SQL Server login shared by all members of the group or c) the user connects to the repository with an
enterprise connection file (*.rserp) that impersonates another Windows user account that has a SQL Server login. See
Section 2.2.7 on page 42.
Click Import to create a user account for each row that is currently selected. You will receive a message to
acknowledge that the accounts have been created but the window will remain open to allow you to continue
importing data, if desired.
Tip: You can click the table header to sort the data in ascending or descending order.
2 Working in Synthesis
42 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
2.2.7 SQL Sever Logins or Using Impersonation
Connecting with a SQL Server database via Windows Authentication requires a SQL Server login that allows the
database platform to recognize the user and gives access to the application database. There are three ways that a
Synthesis user account may be recognized by SQL Server:
Individual Login: The user has an individual SQL Server login that is associated directly with his/her Windows
username. See Section 2.2.7.1 on page 42.
Group Login: The user belongs to an Active Directory group that has a SQL Server login shared by all members
of the group. See Section 2.2.7.2 on page 43.
Use Impersonation for Connection File: The user does not have an individual or group login but he/she
connects to the repository with an enterprise connection file (*.rserp) that impersonates another Windows user
account that does have a SQL Server login. See Section 2.2.7.3 on page 43.
Your organization may choose to use any or all of these methods for your Synthesis implementation (e.g., some users
may have their own individual logins, while other users connect using Windows identity impersonation). This
document provides an overview of all three options.
2.2.7.1 Creating Individual SQL Server Logins
If you choose to create individual SQL Server logins for some or all of the Synthesis user accounts, you have two
options:
1. A database administrator for SQL Server can create SQL Server logins in advance for every potential user and
give the logins access to the application database (at least the db_datareader and db_datawriter roles are required).
This would be performed directly in SQL Server (not via one of the Synthesis applications).
2. A database administrator for SQL Server can grant the appropriate level of database authority for creating SQL
Server logins and database roles (e.g., securityadmin or sysadmin) to any user who has the ability to create user
accounts in the Synthesis repository. The additional authority would be added directly in SQL Server. Then, when
any of these administrative users creates a new user account via the Synthesis application, the required SQL
Server login can be created and the application database roles can be assigned automatically at the same time.
The web page at http://www.ReliaSoft.com/synthesis/sql_server.htm provides links to instructions for performing
certain tasks in SQL Server. This includes a link to an FAQ that discusses these two options in more detail and
provides specific instructions for the actions that must be performed in the SQL Server Management Studio.
2.2 Overview of Security Options
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 43
If you are using the first approach, you can clear the Create SQL Server login check box that is displayed when you
are adding or importing a user account. If you are using the second approach, you must select this check box.
2.2.7.2 Using a Group Login
If the user belongs to an Active Directory group that has a SQL Server login shared by all members of the group and
that group has access to the application database, you can clear the Create SQL Server login check box that is
displayed when you are adding or importing a user account.
For example, base installations of Microsoft SQL Server Express 2005 and 2008 include the Builtin\Users Active
Directory group as a SQL Server login by default. This means all users with a Windows account for that domain will
be able to log in to the enterprise database with no need to create individual SQL Server logins in SQL Server
Express. However, it will still be necessary to grant access for this group login to the application database (at least the
db_datareader and db_datawriter roles are required).
2.2.7.3 Using Windows Impersonation for the Connection File
If you choose to have some (or all) users connect to the SQL Server repository with a connection file that
impersonates a shared Windows user account that has a SQL Server login, you must do the following:
A Windows network administrator must establish the shared user account on Windows.
Tip: If the user already has a SQL Server login and access to the application database, it does not matter whether you
select or clear the Create SQL Server login check box because the application attempts to create the login only if one
does not already exist. Furthermore, if the user who is creating the user account does not have the necessary level of
database authority in SQL Server, the login will not be created even if the check box is selected.
2 Working in Synthesis
44 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
A database administrator for SQL Server must create a SQL Server login for the shared Windows user account
and grant this login access to the application database (at least the db_datareader and db_datawriter roles are
required).
A Synthesis user must create an enterprise repository connection file that impersonates the shared Windows user
account:
1. Choose File > New then click Create a new enterprise repository connection file.
2. Under Repository Connection Settings, select Microsoft SQL Server (2005, 2008) from the drop-down list
and then select the Use impersonation check box.
3. Enter the server and database name for the SQL Server repository, then enter the domain, username and
password for the shared Windows account that users will need to impersonate.
4. Click OK to create the connection file (*.rserp). It will be stored in the location specified under Connection
File Name. Note that the default filename will be SQL_(Server Name)_(Database Name), but you can
assign any name that fits the process your organization will use for distributing the file to users.
Once you have created a connection file that impersonates the shared Windows user account, you can distribute the
file to any Synthesis user who needs it. To connect to the repository using this file, the user can:
1. Choose File > Open Repository and browse for the connection file.
2. Click Open to connect with the repository.
2.2 Overview of Security Options
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 45
After the first connection, this *.rserp file will be saved in the list of recent repositories, which can be accessed by
choosing File > Recent.
If the user is going to connect to the repository with a connection file that uses Windows impersonation, you can clear
the Create SQL Server login check box that is displayed when you are adding or importing the account.
2.2.8 Lock and Unlock Projects
The Lock and Unlock Project commands are available in all types of Synthesis databases, and they provide an
additional layer of control on how users access projects. Locked projects are displayed under the Locked heading of
the project list, while unlocked projects are displayed under the Public heading.
In a secure database, a user can lock or unlock a project if he/she a) is the project owner, b) has the Lock or check out
project permission for the project or c) has the Manage all projects permission. In a non-secure database, any user
can lock or unlock a project, and the commands may be useful only when preparing to convert the non-secure
database into a secure one.
Locking a Project
If you want to temporarily (or permanently) prevent all users from editing a public project, you can lock the project
by selecting the project in the project list and choosing Project > Security > Lock Project.
When a project is locked, all database users (including the user who locked the project) will have read-only access to
the project. In addition, a locked project cannot be deleted or have its properties and public/private status edited.
Unlocking a Project
To unlock a project, select the project in the project list and choose Project > Security > Unlock Project.
2.2.9 Check In or Check Out Projects
Synthesis applications allow multiple users to simultaneously access the database and cooperatively work on an
analysis. However, on some occasions, you may need to exclusively work on one of the projects for an extended
period of time, or work on the project on a computer that is not connected to the database network. In these cases, it is
recommended that you use the Check In/Out feature.
When you check out a project, only you can modify the project while all other users will have read-only access to a
copy of the project that shows the state of the project at the time it was checked out. The project cannot be edited by
any other user unless you check in the project or undo the check out.
Note: For the purpose of being recognized by SQL Server and accessing the application database, the user will be
impersonating the shared Windows login. For the purpose of performing actions via the Synthesis applications, the users
actions will be governed by his/her own user account in Synthesis. In other words, multiple users can connect with the
repository using the same enterprise connection file, but their activities within the Synthesis applications will be governed
by the permissions established in their own individual Synthesis user accounts, and any changes made to the analysis
data will be recorded in Synthesis under their own usernames.
Tip: If you have the Manage all projects permission, you can select multiple projects and lock/unlock them all at the
same time via the Manage Projects window. See Section 2.13.3 on page 68.
2 Working in Synthesis
46 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Check Out a Project
In a non-secure database, any user can check out a project. In a secure database, a user can check out a project if he/
she a) is the project owner, b) has the Lock or check out project permission for the project or c) has the Manage all
projects permission.
To check out a project, select the project in the project list then choose Project > Management > Check In/Out >
Check Out.
A copy of the project will be displayed in the project list under the Checked Out heading. All users will have read-
only access to that copy, which shows the state of the project at the time it was checked out. The purpose of this copy
is to make other users aware that the project is checked out and give them limited access to the project information
(e.g., to query, copy data, etc.) while you are editing the project offline. At the same time, an editable copy of the
project will be saved in a Checked Out folder in your local drive.
To identify the user who currently has the project checked out, open the Project Properties window by choosing
Project > Management > Edit Project Properties. The lower right side of the window will display a Locked by
status, with the name of the user who has the project checked out.
Working with Checked Out Projects
A checked out project is saved in the designated Checked Out folder as a standard database file (*.rsrp) that has the
same name as the project. To work on a file, open it by choosing File > Recent and then selecting the *.rsrp file on
the list. You can also choose File > Open Repository and browse for the *.rsrp file.
If you want to open the file on a different computer, make a copy of the file and save it on the computer that you will
be working on. When you are ready to check in the file from the original computer, overwrite the file in the Checked
Out folder with the more recent version of the file. This will ensure that any changes you made to the project will be
reflected in the repository when you check in the project.
Check In a Project
To check in a project, select the project under the Checked Out heading in the project list and choose Project >
Management > Check In/Out > Check In.
Note that when you check in a project, the software creates a project baseline, which is an exact replica (i.e., a
backup) of the project before it was checked out. This allows you to restore the project to its prior state when and if
needed. The baseline will include a description of the user who checked out the project, as well as the date and time
of the check out. See Section 2.11 on page 62.
If you rename, move or delete the file in the Checked Out folder, you will no longer be able to check in the project.
You can, however, undo the check out.
Undo Check Out
To undo a check out, select the project under the Checked Out heading in the project list and choose Project >
Management > Check In/Out > Undo Check Out.
Tip: You can edit the save location of the Checked Out folder via the Synthesis Setup window (see page 599 in Chapter
29). Keep in mind that anyone who has access to the folder will have full access to the checked out project; however, only
the user who has the project checked out will have the ability to check in the project.
2.3 Simultaneous Access by Multiple Users
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 47
When you undo a check out, all changes made to the project will be discarded, and the copy of the project before it
was checked out will be restored. In a non-secure database, any user can undo a check-out. In a secure database, a
user can undo a check-out if he/she a) is the user who checked out the project, b) is the project owner or c) has the
Manage all projects permission.
2.2.10 Item Permissions
For public projects in a secure database, any user who has read/write permissions for the project will have read/write
permissions for all of the items within the project by default. However, if you desire, each item in the project can have
its own security settings. To set the permissions for an item, you must a) have the Set project security permission
for the project, b) be the project owner or c) have the Manage all projects permission. Select the item in the current
project explorer and choose Project > Current Item > Item Permissions.
In the Item Permissions window, there are two ways the item's permissions can be set:
It can have its own permissions defined at the item level. To do this, select Restrict editing to selected project
users. The Select Users area will become enabled and will display a list of all users who have edit permissions for
the project. Only the specific users that are selected from the list will be able to edit this particular item. Other
project users will have read-only access.
It can inherit permissions from the project. If you select Inherit from project, any user who has edit permissions
for the project will have edit permission for this item.
2.3 Simultaneous Access by Multiple Users
For any type of database (standard or enterprise), multiple users can log in to the same database simultaneously. The
following is a general summary of the actions that are limited when multiple users are logged in to the same database
or project. These rules apply to all Synthesis-enabled applications.
A standard database cannot be deleted if another user is currently logged in to that database. Check the Users page
of the My Portal window to see if you are the only user logged in. See Section 2.14.2 on page 76.
A project cannot be deleted or have its properties and public/private status edited when another user has the same
project open. The same rule applies when the project is open in more than one Synthesis-enabled application (e.g.,
the project is open in both Weibull++ and BlockSim), even if it is the same user who has the project open.
Projects contain items (e.g., folios in Weibull++/ALTA, diagrams in BlockSim, system hierarchy items in Xfmea/
RCM++, and the like).
In Weibull++/ALTA and BlockSim, users can open multiple copies of the same item; however, only one user
can edit the item at any given time. The item is automatically flagged as In Use to the first user who opens
it. It will not be available for editing by other users until the first user closes the item.
In Xfmea/RCM++, a user does not open an item but rather selects it on the System Hierarchy tab. Multiple
users can view the same item simultaneously. The item will be automatically flagged as In Use to the first
user who selects it; however its sub-items will remain available for editing by other users. The selected item
and all the analyses related to that particular item will not be available for editing until the first user selects a
different item or closes the project.
To check the status of a project or its items, see Section 2.3.1 on page 48.
In Weibull++/ALTA and BlockSim, an item cannot be deleted when that particular item is in use by another user.
In Xfmea/RCM++, none of the items can be deleted when another user has the project open.
Items may use project resources (see Chapter 3). When you edit a resource, the change will be reflected in all
items that use that particular resource. For example, you could use a particular model to define the reliability for
blocks in several different BlockSim diagrams. When you edit the model, the change will be reflected
2 Working in Synthesis
48 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
automatically in all blocks that rely upon that model. To check all the items that may be dependent on a particular
resource, use the Dependency Viewer. See page 137 in Chapter 3.
Standard databases with login security and enterprise databases have additional rules:
You can edit the permissions of a security group even when a user associated with that security group is currently
logged in to the database; however, the changes will not take effect until the user closes the database and
reconnects to it.
Projects and items cannot be locked or have their security permissions modified when the project or item is in use.
2.3.1 Status Indicators
When you encounter a project or item that is read-only (e.g., if the OK button is disabled in the properties window or
if you are unable to type in the cells of a worksheet or table), you can check the status of the project or item to see if it
is locked, checked-out, restricted to selected users or currently in use. There are two places in the software interface
that display the status:
In the project list, projects that displayed under the Locked and Checked Out headings are read-only. See Section
2.2.8 on page 45 and Section 2.2.9 on page 45.
Within a project, items may be read-only if access to it is restricted to selected users or if the item is currently in
use by another user. An item that is restricted to selected users will not be available for editing until you are
granted the appropriate item permissions (see Section 2.2.10 on page 47) An item that is in-use will not be
available for editing until the other user closes the item or selects a different item. The statuses are indicated by
the Restricted Access icon and the In-Use icon, respectively.
The location of these icons varies depending on the software you are using:
In BlockSim and Weibull++/ALTA, the status icons are displayed next to the items name in the current
project explorer. If access to an item is restricted to selected users, a read-only status will be displayed in the
caption bar of the item window, as in the example shown next.
Restricted Access In-Use
2.3 Simultaneous Access by Multiple Users
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 49
If an item is in-use, the caption bar of the item window will display a Locked by status, with the name of the
user who is editing that item, as in the example shown next.
In Xfmea/RCM++, the status icons are displayed in the system hierarchy, if the User Access column has been
selected for display on your computer. (To hide or display columns, right-click the column headers in the
System panel, then click Customize Columns to select which columns you want to display. These settings are
stored per computer/username on the System Hierarchy page of the Application Setup, so any project that you
open on this computer will have the same columns displayed.)
To display the username of the account that is editing the item, point your mouse cursor over the In-Use icon.
2.3.2 Prior Logins
The Repository Logins window displays a record of the date and time the users in the database logged in. You will
need to have the Manage users and logins permission in order to access the record.
To open the Repository Logins window, choose File > Manage Repository > Prior Logins.
The following options are available:
Use the Most Recent filter to display in the table the last 10; 100; 10,00 or 10,000 users who logged in to the
database.
Use the User filter to specify whether the table will display the logs for all users or display only the logs for a
selected database user.
Click the Send to Excel button to export the data currently displayed in the table to an Excel spreadsheet. You
will be prompted to specify the pathname/filename for a new Excel file
Click the Clear Logins button to clear the entire history of users who logged in to the database. Since this action
cannot be undone, you will be prompted to confirm that you want to proceed before the records are erased.
Users currently logged into the database can be viewed on the Users page of My Portal. See Section 2.14.2 on page
76.
2.3.3 Reset In Use Flags
Because Synthesis repositories allow simultaneous access by multiple users, it is necessary to store in use flags
within the database to indicate when a particular portion of the analysis is currently being edited by a particular user.
There are some circumstances when these flags might not be reset correctly when a user stops editing an analysis
(e.g., if there is a network interruption or if the software closes unexpectedly). If that occurs, then the analysis will be
locked for editing because the software receives an erroneous indication that it is still in use by another user.
Note: The database refreshes automatically whenever you make a change (e.g., close a project, create a resource, select
a different item, etc.). If your computer will not let you edit an item that is in fact not currently being edited by another user,
it could be because your computer has not been recently refreshed with the latest changes made by other database users.
You can initiate the refresh manually by choosing View > Refresh.
In addition, the software employs in use flags within the database to record when an analysis is currently being edited by
a particular user. If the refresh still does not show that the item has been released, then something might have occurred to
prevent the flags from being reset correctly (e.g., a network interruption or if the software closes unexpectedly). To reset
the flags throughout the database, see Section 2.3.3 on page 49.
2 Working in Synthesis
50 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
To correct the problem, it is necessary to reset some or all of the in use flags within the database. To do this, you
will need to have the Manage users and logins permission.
To reset the flags, choose File > Manage Repository > Reset In Use Flags.
This opens the Reset 'In Use' Flags window, which shows all users who have an account in the database. (If you are
working in a non-secure database, any user who has ever opened the database will have an account created
automatically and will be shown in this list.) A status light is displayed for each user; if it is lit up (i.e., green), the
user is currently logged in to the database. In addition, the Connections column shows the Synthesis-enabled
application(s) that the user currently has connected to the database. You can select the check box for each user for
whom you want to reset in use flags, then click OK to reset the flags.
2.4 E-mail Settings
Users with the Manage e-mail notifications permission can enable notifications e-mails to be sent throughout the
database via the E-mail Settings window, which is accessed by choosing File > Manage Repository > E-mail
Settings.
Select the Enable Notification E-mails check box to specify the settings for all e-mails sent by the software. If the
check box is not selected, the software will not send automated e-mails for any actions defined throughout the
database.
At the top of the window, you must specify the SMTP port and SMTP server that will be used to send the e-mails. To
determine the appropriate information for this setting, you may need to consult with the IT professionals who have
configured the e-mail server used within your organization.
Once this information has been defined, it is recommended to test the SMTP settings by entering an e-mail address in
the Recipient address for test e-mail field and then clicking Send Test E-mail. If the test e-mail is received, then
the settings are valid. If the settings are not valid, an error message will appear that says the test e-mail has failed.
The next step is to specify the conditions under which the software will send automated e-mail notifications. The
following action notification settings are available:
Send notification automatically upon action creation
Send notification automatically upon action modification (via Action Properties window)
Send notifications upon completion (to assigned reviewer)
Action creators receive notifications
The Introduction to each action notification e-mail field gives you the option to edit the default text that will be
used at the beginning of each e-mail that is generated by the software. This can be up to 1,000 characters and the text
will be the same for all actions in the current database. The rest of the e-mail will include all of the details that have
been defined for the particular action record.
IMPORTANT: It is important to make sure that no selected user is currently logged in to the database when you use this
command.
2.5 Manage Units
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 51
Clicking Set As Default will save the settings that are currently displayed in the window as the default for all new
standard databases that you create from the current computer/username. This button is not available if you are
working with an enterprise database.
2.4.1 Notification Groups
Notification groups provide an easy way to make sure that all users in a certain group receive information. E-mail
notifications for actions can be directed to notification groups. In addition, messages in My Portal can be directed to
notification groups. See Section 2.14.2 on page 76.
Users with the Manage e-mail notifications permission can manage notification groups by choosing File > Manage
Repository > Notification Groups.
The table displays a list of the notification groups that have been defined in the current database. To add a new group,
click Add. To edit an existing group, select a row and click Edit or double-click the row. To delete an existing group,
select a row and click Delete. There is no undo for delete.
When you choose to add or edit a notification group, the Notification Group window will be displayed.
A unique name is required and a short description of the intended purpose for the group is optional. In addition, you
must specify at least one user account for each notification group. The Available Users area displays a list of all user
accounts that have been defined in the current database and have not yet been added to the current notification group.
The Selected Users area displays a list of all user accounts that have been added to the current notification group. If
you double-click an account in one list, it will be moved to the other list automatically. In addition, you can use the
>> and << buttons to move all user accounts from one list to the other or use the > and < buttons to move only
selected user accounts.
2.5 Manage Units
Users with the Manage other repository settings permission can define the time units that will be available for use
in any project within the database. This allows users to work with time-based inputs and results in the time units that
are appropriate for the situation. For example, you might have a data set where times to failure were recorded in
hours, but you want to predict the item's reliability after a year of operation. Having a set of units defined for the
database allows you to enter the data into the Weibull++ standard folio data sheet in hours and then obtain results
from the QCP in terms of years. Similarly, you could accommodate a situation in RCM++ or BlockSim where you
need to define the duration of a maintenance task in terms of hours and to specify the total operating time of the
system in terms of months.
Note: Upon deletion, the notification group will no longer be available for future notifications. Any existing actions/
messages assigned to the group's members will remain in the Message page of each member's My Portal window but the
name of the group will no longer be visible.
Tip: To quickly add multiple user accounts to the current notification group, press the CTRL key and click the user
accounts in the Available Users list, then click the > button to move them to the Selected Users list.
IMPORTANT: In previous versions, time units were not specified, but were assumed to be consistent throughout the
analysis. In Version 8, units are now defined for the entire database and can be modified. It is important to realize that
making changes to the existing units can have implications for all analyses throughout the database; therefore, it is best to
set up units once, upon creation of the database.
2 Working in Synthesis
52 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
To define time units, choose File > Manage Repository > Manage Units to open the Define Units window.
The units are defined in relation to a common, or base, unit so that the software can convert data from one unit to
another. For example, the units defined by default assign a conversion factor of 1 to the Hour unit, which indicates
that an hour is equal to 1 System Base Unit (SBU); the Year unit has a conversion factor of 8760, which indicates that
a year is equal to 8,760 SBUs (i.e., 8.760 hours). Note, however, that the SBU does not have to be hours. You could
consider days to be your base unit and define all other units in relation to a day (e.g., an hour would be 1/24th of a
base unit, with a conversion factor of 0.04167).
Each unit must have a name, an abbreviation of up to three characters and a conversion factor. In addition, each unit
must be assigned to any one of the two available categories: Time or Usage.
You can set any unit as the default by selecting it in the Default column; the default unit will be used automatically
each time the software requires a unit.
To edit an existing unit, click inside the cell and edit the text.
To add a new unit to the bottom of the list, click inside the last row and type the text.
To delete a unit, select the row and click the Delete icon. There is no undo for delete.
To insert a new unit above an existing one, select the existing unit and click Insert.
To move an existing unit up or down in the list, select the row and click the Move Up or Move Down icon.
2.6 Manage Warranty Units
The Manage Warranty Units window allows users with the Manage other repository settings permission to specify
which of the configurable repository time units are equivalent to the built-in (not-configurable) warranty time
units used in some warranty folio formats.
To open the Manage Warranty Units window, choose File > Manage Repository > Manage Warranty Units.
To view/modify the current repository time units choose File > Manage Repository > Manage Units.
The affected warranty folio formats include:
The Nevada chart format when the periods are labeled in terms of days, months or years.
Note: Units that are assigned to either the Time or Usage category will be available for use in all project items except in
the usage format of the Weibull++ warranty analysis folios, where only the units in the Usage category will be available for
use. In addition, any changes to the existing conversion factors of the usage units, and the conversion factors for the Day,
Month and Year units will affect the warranty folios. For a detailed discussion on how the conversion factors affect the
warranty folios, see Section 2.6 on page 52.
2.6 Manage Warranty Units
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 53
The dates of failure format where the software calculates the number of days between the specified calendar
dates.
The usage format where the software can calculate the amount of usage typically accumulated per day, month or
year in order to estimate the usage for units still operating in the field.
It is not applicable for the Nevada chart format when the periods are labeled with numbers or the times-to-failure
format. In those cases, you will be prompted to select one of the repository time units for all time inputs and
calculated results in the folio.
What does this mean?
For each Synthesis repository, users can configure which time units will be available for time-related inputs and
results, and they can define conversion factors that allow the software to automatically convert data from one time
unit to another See Section 2.5 on page 51.
However, it is important to be aware that some warranty folio formats use built-in (not configurable) warranty time
units for entering sales/returns data and calculating the failure/suspension times. For example, in the dates of failure
format, if 100 units were shipped on January 1st and 2 units from that shipment were returned on January 15th, the
failure times for those returns will be recorded as 14 calendar days. Likewise in the Nevada chart format, if you
label the periods in terms of months and report that 10 of the 1,000 units shipped in January were returned in July, the
failure times will be recorded as 6 calendar months. (Note that the usage format is affected differently because the
failure/suspension values represent usage rather than time. See below for specific details.)
When you calculate the life data model for the Nevada/dates of failure folios (or when you transfer the data to a
Weibull++ standard folio), the software must apply the equivalent repository time units so that a) the results will be
consistent with other analyses in the Synthesis repository and b) any tools that utilize time unit conversions (such as
the QCP) will be able to perform the conversions properly.
For example, in the following picture, the failure/suspension data in the Results window (which is displayed if you
click the Analysis Summary table in the control panel) has been calculated in terms of the warranty time units that
are appropriate for the sales/returns data entered into the folio (calendar months), while the life data model
2 Working in Synthesis
54 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
parameters and QCP results are reported in the equivalent repository time units (abbreviated as Mon under the
default settings).
2.6 Manage Warranty Units
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 55
By default, each new Synthesis repository is created with repository time units and conversion factors that are
equivalent to the built-in warranty time units (where a day = 24 hours, a month = 730 hours and a year = 8760
hours), as shown below.
If you choose to modify the configurable time units for any repository (and you expect that database users will utilize
any of the affected warranty folio formats), you must take this equivalency into account. For example, if you want to
give repository users the choice of working with time inputs/results in terms of a full 24-hour day or an 8-hour work
day, you must decide which type of day is appropriate to describe the operating times for warranty returns. Will you
assume that a unit shipped on January 1st and returned on January 15th will have accumulated 336 hours of operation
(14 days x 24 hours) or 112 hours of operation (14 days x 8 hours)? If the former, then you could simply add the new
2 Working in Synthesis
56 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
8-hour Work Day time unit to the repository but keep the warranty time unit mapped to the original 24-hour
Day. If the latter, then you could change the warranty time unit mapping as shown next.
Remember that the failure/suspension data generated by the Nevada chart and dates of failure warranty folios do not
get converted based on this mapping. The software simply assigns an appropriate repository time unit to the times
that were calculated in warranty time units.
How are usage format folios affected?
In a usage format warranty folio, you enter the amount of usage (rather than operating time) for the failed units and
the software must estimate the amount of usage accumulated by the units that have not failed (suspensions).
2.6 Manage Warranty Units
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 57
On the Main page of the usage format warranty folio's control panel, you can use the Change Units icon to select
which of the repository time units the usage data will be entered in. The options include any of the units that
have been assigned to the Usage category in the Manage Units window. The default settings are shown next.
On the Suspensions page of the control panel, you must specify the amount of usage that units typically
accumulate per Day, Month or Year. This refers to the built-in (not configurable) warranty time units. If
you have selected to specify the Average Usage (rather than a Usage Distribution), you can enter the value
directly (e.g., 1000 miles per month) or click the Set Usage icon to have the software automatically calculate the
value based on the conversion factors that have been defined for the equivalent repository time units.
2 Working in Synthesis
58 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
For example, suppose that the warranty data has been entered in miles and the Manage Units window indicates
that typical usage is 1 Mile = 0.73 Hour.
If you choose Days from the drop-down list on the Suspensions page of the control panel, and then click the Set
Usage icon (circled in the picture below), the software will use the Manage Warranty Units window to determine
which of the repository time units is equivalent to Days in a warranty folio and then it will use the specified
conversion factors to calculate the number of miles. For this example, the calculation would be as follows:
24 Hours / 0.73 Hour per Mile = 32.8767 'Miles
Another way to think about this is:
1 Mile / 0.73 Hour = 1.3699 Miles per Hour
24 Hours x 1.3699 Miles per Hour = 32.8767 Miles
2.7 Default Name Formats
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 59
For Months, the calculation would be:
730 Hours / 0.73 Hours per Mile = 1000 Miles
For Years, the calculation would be:
8760 Hours / 0.73 Hours per Mile = 12000 Miles
2.7 Default Name Formats
When you add a resource to a project, it is given a default name unless you specify a different name. Users with the
Manage other repository settings permission can specify how these default names are created in the current
database via the Define Default Name Formats window, which is accessed by choosing File > Manage Repository >
Define Default Names.
The Define Default Name Formats window consists of four tabs. The settings in the last three tabs will be used only
for diagrams in BlockSim but they're visible when you open this window from any of the Synthesis-enabled
applications.
The Resources tab allows you to specify the default name formats for the resources that can be used throughout
the project.
The RBD tab allows you to specify the default name format for each type of block that you can add to a reliability
block diagram in BlockSim. Note that this feature is not applicable for the blocks you create in a Weibull++ or
ALTA diagram because those blocks are always named based on the calculated standard folio data sheet that they
represent.
The Fault Tree tab allows you to specify the default name format for each type of block (i.e., each type of gate or
event) that you can add to a fault tree in BlockSim.
The Phase tab allows you to specify the default name format for each type of block that you can add to a phase
diagram in BlockSim.
All tabs work in the same way. Each row of the tab's table represents a type of resource or type of block. For each
row:
The Resource Type column displays the type of resource or block. This column cannot be edited.
The Resource Name column displays the default name used for that type of resource or block (e.g., Model or
Block). This will be the name represented by the \N code in the Name Format column described below. For
example, if the Name Format for a model is set to \N \S (which is the default), then the default name for the first
new model you create in the repository will be Model 1. If you change the Name Format to \T \N \D, then
default name for a model that you create in BlockSim at a particular time will be BKS Model 9/15/2011 2:29:23
PM. Click in the cell to edit the name; click outside the cell to accept your changes.
The Name Format column allows you to specify the total default name format used for that type of resource or
block, using the following elements:
\N returns the default name for the resource or block type, as specified in the Resource Name column.
\U returns the name of the user who created the resource or block.
\D returns the date when the resource or block was last modified.
\S adds a sequential number, or increment. For example, if the last URD created was URD 1, the next URD
created will use 2 as the sequential number (i.e., URD 2).
\T returns the software tool used to create the resource or block.
2 Working in Synthesis
60 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
\F returns the contents of each of the five identifier fields (i.e., all global identifiers except the comments
field). See Section 2.9 on page 60.
\G returns a summary of the properties of the resource or block.
\I inherits the name of the selected block when a resource is created from the Block Properties window. The
default name for the resource type (i.e., \N) is also included. For example, if you create a new URD for Block
1 using the Block Properties window, the URD's name will be Block 1 URD. When a resource is not created
from the Block Properties window, \I returns the same format as \N (e.g., URD, URD_2, etc.).
2.8 Task Types
RCM++ allows users to define a variety of task types for scheduled maintenance, so that the available task types
match their organization's terminology. In order for simulation and cost calculation results in RCM++ to be accurate,
it is necessary to map these task types to the three scheduled task classes used in URDs (i.e., preventive, inspection or
on condition). Users with the Manage other repository settings permission can use the Define Task Types window
to define the available task types, including their task class association, by choosing File > Manage Repository >
Task Types.
The table in the window displays a list of the existing task types defined for the database. For each task type, you
must specify a name, an abbreviation of up to three characters, and a task class that it corresponds to. Click the cell in
the Task Class column to choose one of the three scheduled task classes from the drop-down list. You can have
multiple task types that use the same task class. This can be helpful in indicating to users which properties should be
defined for a given task. For example, a service task and a failure finding task could both be classified as inspection
tasks for the purposes of the simulation; however, for the service task, a user will want to define a restoration factor,
whereas for the failure finding task, no restoration occurs.
To edit an existing task type, click inside the cell and either edit the text (in the Name and Abbreviation columns)
or choose a new option from the drop-down list (in the Task Class column).
To add a new task type to the bottom of the list, click inside the last row and enter the data.
To delete a task type, select the row and click the Delete icon. There is no undo for delete.
To insert a new task type above an existing one, select the existing row and click Insert.
To move an existing option up or down in the list, select the row and click the Move Up or Move Down icon.
2.9 Global Identifiers
Identifiers are user-defined fields that can be used to search for certain types of records within the current project. The
names of the identifiers are defined at the database level; these identifiers will be used in all projects throughout the
database unless different settings are specified at the project level. See Section 2.13.1 on page 66..
2.10 Project Categories
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 61
The Global Identifiers window, accessed by choosing File > Manage Repository > Global Identifiers, is used to
define the identifiers at the database level.
For each type of record, six identifiers are available: five user-defined fields (UDFs) and one comments field.
Outside of this window (e.g., in properties windows, the Resource Manager, filters, etc.), these fields are known by
the display names defined within this window. By default, the fields have the following display names:
UDF 1: Name
UDF 2: Number
UDF 3: Version
UDF 4: Applies To
UDF 5: Keywords
Comments: Comments
Not all of the identifier sets are applicable for all Synthesis-enabled applications. For example, blocks are used only
in BlockSim and tasks are used only in BlockSim and RCM++. The affected applications are listed in parentheses for
each identifier set.
To change the display name for a field, click the relevant cell in the Property Display Name column. When you are
finished making changes to the cell, click outside the cell to accept the changes. Display names can be up to 60
characters long. The identifier fields themselves can contain up to 1,000 characters.
The changes that you make here will apply to all new projects added to the database. If the database already contains
projects, your changes will not affect the existing projects unless you select the Apply to existing projects option at
the bottom of the window.
Selecting Set as default for new databases at the bottom of the window will save the settings that are currently
displayed in the window as the default for all new standard databases that you create on your computer. If this check
box is not selected, the default names given above (Name, Number, Version, etc.) will be used for new databases.
This option is not applicable if you are working with an enterprise database.
2.10 Project Categories
Project Categories can be used to filter the projects displayed in the project list. Users with the Manage other
repository settings permission can define the options for the Project Categories property that can be assigned to any
project in the database by choosing File > Manage Repository > Project Categories.
Defining Project Categories
Project categories are enabled by default in a new database. The table in the Define Project Categories window
displays a list of the existing project categories. These categories are listed in the order in which they will appear
throughout the application (i.e., in the Project Category drop-down list in the Project Properties window and in the
Based on Category drop-down list in the Filter Options area of the project list). Each category can have
subcategories; you can add as many levels of indenture as needed.
To edit an existing category, click inside the cell and edit the text.
Tip: You can change identifiers at the project level on the Global Identifiers tab of the Project Properties window, which is
accessed by choosing Project > Management > Edit Project Properties.
2 Working in Synthesis
62 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
To add a new category select an existing category at the level that you want to add the category to and click Add.
The new category will be added to the same parent category as the currently selected category. If the selected
category is at the top level, a new top level category will be added.
To add a subcategory to an existing category, select the existing category and click Add Below.
To move an existing category up or down within its level, select the row and click Move Up or Move Down.
To move an existing category to the next level up or the next level down, click Promote or Demote.
To delete a category, select the row and click Delete. There is no undo for delete.
To delete all categories, click Clear All. There is no undo for delete.
Applying Project Categories
You can assign a category to a project via the Project Category drop-down list on the General tab of the Project
Properties window. This window is displayed when you add a new project to an existing database. For existing
projects, select the project in the project list and choose Project > Management > Edit Project Properties. You can
choose this command at any time while working with the project.
Filtering Projects by Category
You can filter the projects displayed in the project list using the Filter area at the top of the project list. In addition to
filtering by project category, you can also filter by project owner and by the type(s) of analyses included in the
projects. See Section 2.14.1.1 on page 73.
2.11 Project Baselines
One of the many data management capabilities offered by Synthesis is the option to create and manage baselines for
any analysis project. Within the context of Synthesis, the word baseline refers to an exact replica of the project at a
particular point in time (i.e., a backup) that can be restored when and if it is needed.
There are a variety of ways that this functionality could be used, depending on your particular analysis process and
data management requirements. For example, if you are about to begin a major revision to an existing project, you
could choose to archive the original version as a baseline and then proceed with updating the project. This would
ensure that the active projects in the database contain only the most recent information but also provide easy access to
a fully editable copy of the previous version of the analysis if it is ever needed. A baseline will include all the data
2.11 Project Baselines
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 63
that the project contained at the time the baseline was created, including information about the project properties,
security settings and project owner.
The following sections describe how you can manage project baselines.
2.11.1 Create/Restore Baselines for a Project
If you are currently working in a project and you have any of the following permissions in the database:
Project owner
Create project baselines permission
Administrative permissions
then you can create a baseline for the project at any time by choosing Project > Management > Project Baselines >
Create Baseline or by right-clicking the name of the project in the project list and choosing the command on the
shortcut menu.
To restore all data from an existing baseline, use the Restore Baseline command. This opens the Restore Baseline
window, which displays a list of all existing baselines for the project, if any. You have two options for restoring a
baseline:
Overwrite existing project allows you to roll back the current project to an earlier state. The restore process will
complete as long as the project is not currently in use by another user. There is no undo for project overwrites.
Therefore, it would be prudent to create a new baseline for the project before you overwrite it with one of the
older baselines.
Create new project allows you to restore the baseline as a new project. When the restore process completes, the
new project will be accessible from the project list.
2.11.2 Manage all Baselines that Exist for the Database
If you have administrative permissions in the database, you can manage all the project baselines that have been
created in the database by choosing File > Manage Repository > Project Baselines.
This opens the Project Baselines window, which displays the details for each of the baselines. This includes the date
when the baseline was created, the name of the baseline creator, the project name and any additional notes that the
baseline creator may have added to help identify the purpose or context of the baseline. In Xfmea/RCM++, the
project profile that was used to set the configurable project settings is also displayed.
To create a new baseline, click the Create button. The Create Baseline window will appear, which displays a list
of all projects in the current database. Choose a project from the list, enter any notes that are appropriate to
describe the purpose or the circumstances of the baseline and click OK.
To delete an existing baseline, select the row and click the Delete button or press DELETE. There is no undo for
delete.
To create a new project that restores all of the data from an existing baseline, select the row and click the Create
Project from Baseline button. You will be prompted to specify a unique name for the new project. When the process
completes, you can close the Project Baselines window and see that the new project is now accessible from the
project list.
2 Working in Synthesis
64 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
2.12 Backups and Database Maintenance
Since each database may contain a large amount of valuable information that would be difficult to re-create, it is
essential to make sure that you are diligent about storing adequate backups and performing the necessary
maintenance activities to keep the database operating smoothly. The necessary procedures vary depending on the type
of database.
Enterprise Database Maintenance
When you choose to store analysis information in an enterprise database, a database administrator must perform
backups and database maintenance activities using the data management tools that are packaged with and/or designed
for the database platform (e.g., SQL Server Enterprise Manager for SQL Server). Each individual organization
typically establishes its own procedures for protecting the data stored in the Oracle or SQL Server databases. As a
convenience for users who wish to explore the possibilities of an enterprise database implementation without making
a large investment of time and resources, instructions on how to perform ReliaSofts minimum database maintenance
recommendations are posted on the ReliaSoft website:
See http://Synthesis.ReliaSoft.com/sql_server.htm for SQL Server.
See http://Synthesis.ReliaSoft.com/oracle.htm for Oracle.
Standard Database Maintenance
When you choose to store analysis information in a standard database, it will be subject to the same limitations and
vulnerabilities as any other file that uses the Microsoft Access database file format. For example, the limitations (in
terms of maximum file size and simultaneous users) are publicized by Microsoft at http://office.microsoft.com/en-us/
access/HP051868081033.aspx and some of the database vulnerabilities are discussed in another Microsoft
publication at http://support.microsoft.com/kb/283849/EN-US/. As this second publication states:
Microsoft Jet, the database engine that is used in Microsoft Access, is a file sharing database system. When
Microsoft Jet is used in a multi-user environment, multiple client processes are using file read, write, and locking
operations on a shared database. Because multiple client processes are reading and writing to the same database
and because Jet does not use a transaction log (as do the more advanced database systems, such as SQL Server), it
is not possible to reliably prevent any and all database corruption. [emphasis added]
Although ReliaSoft's developers have made every effort to reduce or eliminate the possibility that the software will
induce a database error, there is no way to absolutely prevent corruption that might be caused by other factors, such as
faulty network hardware, an unexpected crash on your PC or a network interruption. Therefore, this section
provides some recommendations for standard precautions that all users can take to protect the data in their standard
databases from this type of corruption and reduce the impact of the data loss if corruption is unavoidable.
1. Create backups regularly. As with any resource that contains a large amount of valuable information that would
be difficult to re-create, it is essential to make sure that you are diligent about creating and storing backup files.
There are a number of ways this can be accomplished:
If you select Automatically back up database upon closing from the Synthesis Setup (see page 599 in
Chapter 29), any Synthesis-enabled application that you use to open the repository will back up the database
every time you close the file.
If you have a database open and choose File > Save As, the application will create a copy of the database to a
pathname/filename of your choosing.
If you browse to the database file (*.rsrp) in one of the Windows file management tools (such as My
Computer or Windows Explorer), you can copy and paste the database file as needed.
2. Compact and repair regularly. Using the Compact and Repair feature will help to reduce the size of the
database file and help to protect against problems with the operation of the database.
2.13 Projects
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 65
If you have the database open and it is not currently in use by another user, you can initiate the process by
choosing File > Manage Repository > Compact and Repair.
If you select Automatically compact and repair database upon closing from the Synthesis Setup (see
Section 29.1 on page 599), any Synthesis-enabled application that you use to open this repository will initiate
this process automatically every time you close the file (as long as the database is not currently in use by
another user).
3. Do not store the database in a shared network location if you suspect that your network connection and/or
hardware may be unreliable. According to Microsoft, faulty network hardware is one of the main reasons why a
file that uses the Microsoft Access database file format may become corrupted. As the Microsoft publication at
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/283849/EN-US/ states:
The cause can be one or more links in the hardware chain between the computer that the database resides on
and the computer that has the database open. This list includes, but is not limited to, network interface cards,
network cabling, routers, and hubs.
Hardware-based corruption is typically indicated by .mdb files that cannot be restored through the use of
compacting, repairing, or Jetcomp. Hardware corruption will typically recur until the responsible
hardware is repaired or replaced. [emphasis added]
If you have experienced this type of corruption for a standard database file, it is recommended that you take steps
to correct the network problem or refrain from accessing database files over the network. In such cases, you may
choose to use an enterprise database instead (i.e., Oracle or SQL Server), which would be less vulnerable to
network interruptions. Alternatively, you could keep multiple analysis projects together in a single shared
standard database file but ask users to export the analysis to a separate working database on their own
computers when there is a need to make substantial modifications. Users could then import the data back into the
shared repository after the modifications have been completed.
4. Do not allow the file size of the database to grow too large. Performance will be affected by the size of the
database and the number of simultaneous users. Therefore, it is important for users to monitor the sizes of their
database files and take steps to export the data into several smaller and more manageable files if they become too
large. Please be aware of the following factors, which can lead to very large database files:
Failure to compact and repair the database on a regular basis.
Using a very large number of attached documents. In some cases, using a link instead of an attachment may
provide equivalent functionality with a much smaller impact on the size of the database file.
If you try to open a standard database via the software and receive a message that says Unable to open the database,
this is an indication that the database file may have become corrupted. Please contact ReliaSoft's Technical Support
via phone, fax or e-mail and provide as much information as possible about exactly what you were doing when the
corruption occurred. Whenever possible, please provide a copy of the corrupted file. In some cases, ReliaSoft may be
able to provide assistance with salvaging some or all of the affected data. However, in many cases, the best recourse
may be to restore the latest backup from before the corruption occurred.
2.13 Projects
Synthesis repositories can contain one or many projects. Projects serve as a way to keep related analyses together;
each project can contain one or more analyses, as well as resources, which represent various types of information
available for use throughout the project. These items are unique to the project; resources in one project will not be
available in any other project in the database. For details on using resources, see See Chapter 3.
Any project can be opened in any Synthesis-enabled application. Shared items in the project, which include resources
and attachments, are available in all applications. Application-specific analyses (e.g., folios in Weibull++, diagrams
in BlockSim, etc.) are visible only in the application that can edit them.
2 Working in Synthesis
66 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
In secure databases, projects can share the security settings of the database or can have their own security settings,
which are defined on the Security tab of the Project Properties window. See Section 2.13.1 on page 66.
To create a new project:
When you create a new repository, at least one project is automatically created as part of the process. Specifically:
For standard databases:
If security is used, then two projects will be created: a private project and a public project. See Section
2.2.1 on page 29.
If security is not used, then a single project will be created.
For enterprise databases, a single private project will be created.
In this case, the Project Properties window is not displayed. You will immediately see the Project Item Wizard
(see Section 2.13.2 on page 68). You can edit the project properties at a later time by choosing Project >
Management > Edit Project Properties.
To add a project to an existing database, you can:
Choose Project > Management > Create Project.
The Project Properties window will appear. Set the desired project properties and click OK to create the
project. The Project Item Wizard will then appear, allowing you to add an analysis to the project.
Select an existing project in the project list and choose Project > Management > Duplicate Project.
This will create an exact duplicate of the original project with a name that contains an increment number
added to the end (e.g. Project_1, Project_2, etc.). Note that duplicate projects do not retain the security settings
of the original project. For more information on project security settings, see Section 2.2 on page 28.
To delete a project from the current database, select the project in the project list and press DELETE or choose
Project > Management > Delete Project. There is no undo for delete.
To edit the properties of an existing project, select the project in the project list and choose Project > Management >
Edit Project Properties. The Project Properties window will appear.
2.13.1 Project Properties
The Project Properties window will be displayed when you add a new project to an existing database or when you
choose Project > Management > Edit Project Properties.
The status bar at the bottom of the window displays the user who has been identified as the project owner. In an
enterprise database or a standard database without login security enabled, all users are able to edit the properties for
any project. However, in a standard database with login security enabled, the ability to edit the project properties is
restricted to the project owner and to users with the Manage all projects permission.
2.13 Projects
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 67
The Project Properties window for all projects will include at least three tabs: General, Global Identifiers and
Configurable Settings. In addition, for projects in an enterprise database or standard database with login security
enabled, the Project Properties window will include a third tab called Security. These tabs are described next.
General Tab
Name is the identifier for the project that will appear in the current project explorer, Project Properties and many
other windows and reports throughout the software. This field is required and cannot contain any of the following
characters: \ / : " * ? < > |.
Description is an additional identifier for the project that appears only in the Project Properties window.
Remarks contains additional remarks about the project that appear only in the Project Properties window.
Proprietary Label allows you to enter a statement regarding the proprietary nature of the project.
Project Category displays a list of the categories that have been defined in the current database. These categories
are configurable to meet your particular needs and they can be used to filter the projects displayed in the project
list.
Global Identifiers Tab
Identifiers are user-defined fields that can be used to search for certain types of records within the current project. The
names of the identifiers are defined at the database level via the Global Identifiers window; these identifiers will be
used in all projects throughout the database unless different settings are specified at the project level. This tab works
in the same way as the Global Identifiers window. See Section 2.9 on page 60.
Configurable Settings Tab
The Configurable Settings tab of the Project Properties window provides access to all of the configurable settings that
have been defined for the current project. This tab is shown only in RCM++ and Xfmea.
Security Tab
The Security tab will be displayed in the Project Properties window if you are working with a public project in a
secure database. It allows you to specify the users and groups that can access the project. The ability to access this tab
is restricted to a) the project owner, b) users with the Edit project security permission for this project and c) users
with the Manage all projects permission.
The Use repository-level security option is the default setting for all projects created in the database. The project
will be accessible to any user who has an active user account that is assigned to at least one security group. The
user will have all of the permissions within this project that have been granted via any of the security groups that
are assigned to his/her user account.
The Use specific security groups and users option allows you to implement project-level security limiting
access to the project only to selected security group(s) and/or user(s).
In the Limit by Groups area, select the check box for each security group you want to give access to the
project.
In the Limit by Users area, you can grant access to individual users by clicking the Add button. This opens a
list of users who currently have access to the database. Select the check box for each user you want to give
access to the project and click OK. You can then click the + beside each individual user account to view a list
of permissions that have been granted to the user via any of the security groups assigned to his/her account.
Note: In any given Synthesis-enabled application, only those tabs that are relevant to the application will be displayed.
2 Working in Synthesis
68 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Use the check boxes to select which of those permissions will be in effect for that user in this particular
project.
For a more detailed discussion of how you might want to configure the security for the projects in your repository, see
Section 2.2 on page 28.
2.13.2 Project Item Wizard
The Project Item Wizard provides information about all the analyses that you could add to the project from the
Synthesis-enabled application that you are currently working with, and guides you through any steps required to
configure the analysis that you have selected. It appears automatically upon creation of a new project. You can also
open it by choosing Insert > Wizard > Project Item Wizard.
In the Project Item Wizard for Weibull++ and ALTA, the navigation panel on the left side of the window displays the
available categories of folios (i.e., standard folios, specialized folios and tools). Select a category to view the types of
folios that you can add (i.e., standard folio, degradation analysis folio, etc.) in the area on the right side of the
window. Click a specific folio type to view a description of it. When you are satisfied with your selection, click OK
to create the folio.
2.13.3 Manage Projects
If you have the Manage all projects permission, then you can use the Manage Projects window to view and edit the
properties and security settings of all the projects in the database. To do this, choose Project > Management >
Manage Projects.
This displays a list of all the projects that currently exist for the database. Note that in this window, you can edit the
properties of a project or delete a project even when the project is open or in use. The user who has the project open
will see the changes you have made when the database refreshes (the refresh happens automatically whenever the
user makes a change, such as closing a window, selecting a different item, etc.).
For a detailed discussion of how to configure the security setting for the projects in your repository, see Section 2.2
on page 28.
Note: For quick access to the Security tab of the Project Properties window, select the project in the project list and
choose Project > Security > Project Security.
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 69
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
The main window used in the software is the Multiple Document Interface (MDI). The appearance of the MDI will
vary depending on your configuration settings and your current task. The default configuration of the Weibull++/
ALTA MDI is shown next.
The Ribbon, located at the top of the MDI, is a toolbar that is divided into tabs, each of which presents a set of tools
and commands for performing a logically related set of tasks. The first of these tabs is the File tab, which provides
access to the Backstage view. For details about the Ribbon, see Section 2.14.7 on page 90.
The Backstage view, which is the first view you will see when you start the application, allows you to work with
databases and application-level settings. In other words, the Backstage view allows you to do things to a database,
while the commands on the other tabs of the Ribbon allow you to do things within the database. For details about the
Backstage view, see Section 2.14.7.2 on page 92.
You can click any Ribbon tab to exit the Backstage view and return to the MDI workspace.
The status bar is located at the bottom of the MDI and displays the following:
The software name and version.
The path and filename (if applicable) of the database that you are currently using.
The currently active project.
If you are connected to an enterprise database, a connection speed indicator, as follows:
< 30 ms: Good (acceptable performance)
30 - 70 ms: OK (may exhibit some delays in operations, opening/closing windows, etc.)
2 Working in Synthesis
70 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
70 - 110 ms: Slow (will exhibit some delays in operations, opening/closing windows, etc.)
110 - 150 ms: Very slow (will exhibit significant delays in operations, opening/closing windows, etc.)
> 150 ms: Extremely slow (will result in unacceptable performance and usability)
If you are connected to an enterprise database or a standard database with login security, your login information.
The Project Manager is docked on the left side of the MDI by default. The Project Manager consists of the project
list, which allows you to manage the projects within the current database, and the current project explorer, which
allows you to manage all of the analysis and reporting components of the current project as well as project-level
attachments. For details on the project list, see Section 2.14.1.1 on page 73; on the current project explorer, see
Section 2.14.1.3 on page 75.
My Portal is docked on the right side of the MDI and unpinned by default. This panel provides access to messages
between users, actions that need to be performed, and more. See Section 2.14.2 on page 76.
If desired, you can change the overall color scheme used in the MDI by choosing a different skin in the Skins field of
the Synthesis Setup window. See page 599 in Chapter 29.
2.14.1 Project Manager
The Project Manager consists of the project list, which allows you to manage the projects within the current database,
and the current project explorer, which allows you to manage all of the analysis and reporting components of the
current project as well as project-level attachments. These tools appear within a single panel or window, and are
moved and positioned together. By default, they are shown as pages within the same space, accessible by large
buttons at the bottom of the panel or window, but you can choose View > Project Manager > Tile Project Manager
to toggle to a view that shows them as vertically stacked areas.
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 71
When you first activate the software, the Project Manager will be docked and will appear as a panel on the left side
of the MDI, as shown next.
To increase or decrease the width of the docked panel, drag the right edge into the desired position.
You can change the location in the MDI where the Project Manager is docked by choosing View > Project Manager
> Dock Project Manager and then choosing the desired docking option.
2 Working in Synthesis
72 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Choosing Floating Project Manager will cause it to be displayed in an undocked window. You can also change the
location by clicking the panels title bar and dragging the window. Location icons will appear in the MDI, as shown
next.
Drag the window onto one of the location icons to dock it in that location; blue shading within the MDI will show the
projected docking location. Dragging it to any other location in the MDI will undock the window. Double-clicking
the windows title bar toggles the display between undocked and docked in the last selected position.
When docked, the Project Manager can also be toggled between pinned and unpinned states by clicking the
pushpin icon in the panels title bar. When the pushpin in the icon is vertical, the panel is pinned and will be displayed
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 73
at all times. When the pushpin is horizontal, the panel is unpinned. A tab representing the Project Manager will be
displayed at the docking location, as shown next.
The panel will be hidden until you do one of the following:
Point to or click the tab.
Choose View > Project Manager > Show Project Manager.
Pointing to the tab displays the Project Manager but does not change the window that is currently in focus; as soon as
you point to anything other than the Project Manager, it will be hidden again. All other options mentioned, including
clicking the tab (or pointing to the tab and then clicking within the Project Manager), bring the Project Manager into
focus and it will be displayed until you click outside of it.
When the Project Manager is unpinned, it cannot be undocked or moved.
2.14.1.1 Project List
The project list displays the projects that exist in the current database and provides the tools you need to manage these
projects.
There may be up to four nodes in the project list, indicating the sharing status of the projects: There may be up to four
nodes in the project list, indicating the sharing status of the projects: Private and Public projects (Section 2.2.1 on
page 29), Locked projects (Section 2.2.8 on page 45) and Checked Out projects (Section 2.2.9 on page 45).
2 Working in Synthesis
74 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Each node may be further broken down by project category and/or by project owner. This ensures that projects will be
listed in a logical, manageable way within the project list.
To open an existing project in the current database, double-click the project name. The project will appear in the
current project explorer. See Section 2.14.1.3 on page 75.
The Filter area at the top of the project list allows you to refine which projects are displayed in the list. This feature
might be particularly useful for an enterprise database that may have the capacity to store analysis projects for the
entire organization in a single centralized database. In such cases, the number of projects displayed in the project list
could become overwhelming and these filters provide the ability to display only those projects that are of interest to
you at any given time.
You can choose an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new one. To create a new filter click the Create
New Filter icon. To edit the filter that is currently being used, click the Edit Current Filter icon. To delete the filter
that is currently being used, click the Delete Current Filter icon. This will delete the filter entirely; there is no undo
for delete. If you want to keep the filter for future use and simply stop using it right now, choose a different filter from
the drop-down list. The Default Filter option shows all project in the database.
You can also search for projects by entering text in the Find field. The project list updates dynamically to show only
the projects with names that contain the text that you have entered.
2.14.1.2 Filter Properties Window
The Filter Properties window is used to create new filters or edit existing filters. These filters can be used to limit the
projects displayed in the project list or in the lists shown when importing or exporting entire projects or items/
resources.
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 75
Specify a unique name for your filter and then use the following properties to define how the filter will limit the
projects shown in the filtered list:
Filtering Options
Filter by owner filters the projects by the name of the project owner. The available names are based on the
user accounts defined in the current database.
Filter by category filters the projects by the selected project category. The available categories are based on
the project categories that have been defined in the current database. See Section 2.10 on page 61.
Filter by analysis filters the projects by the types of analyses (i.e., Xfmea/RCM++, Weibull++, ALTA and/or
BlockSim analyses) they contain.
Other Options
If Show locked projects is selected, the Locked node will be displayed in the project list and any locked
projects will be displayed under it. If this check box is cleared, the Locked node and all locked projects will be
hidden.
If Group by category is selected, the Public, Private and (if Show locked projects is selected) Locked nodes
will each be subdivided into nodes for each project category. Only those categories that are currently in use by
at least one project will be shown. If this check box is cleared, projects will not be divided by category.
If Group by owner is selected, the projects will be grouped according to project owner. If the Group by category
check box is also selected, each project category will be grouped by category and then by owner.
2.14.1.3 Current Project Explorer
Once you have opened a project, you can use the current project explorer to manage the items (e.g., folios and
multiplots in Weibull++ and ALTA, block diagrams and analyses in BlockSim, and the like) within the current
project. The current project explorer presents all of the project items in a hierarchical tree structure. The project name
(e.g., Project1) is displayed at the top of the tree structure. The folders that contain the analysis and reporting
components of the current project as well as project-level attachments are displayed below the project name. Click
the plus (+) button to open a folder and display the items within that folder. Click the minus (-) button to close a
folder. Double-click an item to open that item in the MDI or to bring that item to the front of the MDI if it is already
open. If you double-click an attachment that appears in the current project explorer, it will open in its corresponding
application, as long as that application is installed on your computer.
You can add items to the project by choosing the relevant command on the Insert tab of the Ribbon (see Section
2.14.7.8 on page 99). You can also right-click the relevant folder in the current project explorer and choose the Add
command on the shortcut menu that appears. To manage existing items within the project, select the analysis, report
or attachment and use the commands in the Current Item group on the Project tab of the Ribbon (i.e., Edit Item,
Rename Item, Duplicate Item and Delete Item) or on the shortcut menu that appears when you right-click the item.
You can create additional levels of folders within the folder for each type of project item by right-clicking the folder
and choosing Add Folder on the shortcut menu. Add as many folders, in as many levels, as you need to keep your
work organized.
Note: In Synthesis-enabled applications, projects can be shared by multiple users and the current project explorer may
display an in-use icon to indicate the status of an item that can't be edited because it is currently locked or being edited
by another user. See Section 2.3.1 on page 48.
2 Working in Synthesis
76 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Arrange folders and project items by dragging them to the desired location. Dragging an item (folder or project item)
onto a folder will place the dragged item into the folder. Dragging an item onto a project item will place the dragged
item above the target project item. For example, consider the following steps:
In Step 1, Folio4 is being dragged onto Folder_1. Step 2 shows that Folio4 is then located within Folder_1. In Step 3,
Folder_1 is being dragged onto Folio1. Step 4 shows that Folder_1 is then positioned above Folio1. To move an item
to the bottom of the list, drag it onto the category folder (e.g., in this case, you could drag Folder_1 onto the
Weibull++ Folios folder to return it to its original location at the end of the group).
You can use the Filter based on creator drop-down list to filter the items that are currently displayed in the current
project explorer by the name of the user who created them. The available names are based on the user accounts
defined in the current database.
2.14.2 My Portal
My Portal provides additional information relevant to your work within the database. Four pages are available within
My Portal:
The Messages page
The Actions page
The Users page
The Reliability Web Notes page
When you first activate the software, My Portal will be docked as a panel on the right side of the MDI and will be
in an unpinned state. My Portal can be manipulated in a way similar to the Project Manager. See Section 2.14.1 on
page 70.
Messages
The Messages page allows you to communicate with other users who have access to the database. Note that all users
have the ability to manage the messages sent to their user accounts, but the ability to create messages is based on the
permissions assigned to the user accounts. See Section 2.2.4.3 on page 37.
The messages displayed on this page depend on your selection in the Show field at the top. If you select All my
messages, you will see all messages that you created and all messages that are directed to you, either individually or
as part of the All Users group. You can also choose to view only messages that you created or only messages directed
to you individually.
Note: The current project explorer shows the project content that is applicable for the current application; however, all
Synthesis-enabled applications will be able to access the project's resources and attachments. For details on using project
resources, see Chapter 3; on attachments, see Section 2.15 on page 117.
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 77
The messages will appear in the order in which they were created, and an icon will appear next to each message to
indicate its specify priority level (blue = Low, pink = Medium and red = High).
To create a message, choose My Portal > Messages > Create Message. The Message window will appear. See
Section 2.14.2.1 on page 78.
To edit a message, double-click the message or select the message and choose My Portal > Messages > Edit
Message.
To delete a message, select the message and choose My Portal > Messages > Delete Message.
To refresh the list of messages, choose View > Refresh > Refresh.
Actions
The Actions page allows you to view the actions that you are involved with. Actions are resources that are available
for use throughout the project and allow you to ensure that appropriate progress is being made. See page 150 in
Chapter 3.
The actions displayed on this page depend on your selections in the filter options fields, which are accessible by
opening the drop-down list at the top of the page. The following filters are available:
The Project field allows you to specify the project for which you want to view actions. Select All Projects to
view actions for all projects in the database.
The Show field allows you to specify which actions are displayed based on your type of involvement with the
actions. You can choose to view only the actions that you are assigned to review, only the actions that you created,
only the actions that you are monitoring via notifications or only the actions that are approved by you.
The Status field allows you to specify which actions are displayed based on the action status. You can choose to
view only actions that are reviewed and approved, complete, overdue or due. To view all actions regardless of
their status, select All Statuses.
The Priority field allows you to specify which actions are displayed based on the action priority. To view all
actions regardless of priority, select All.
The displayed actions will be categorized according to their status (i.e., Overdue, Not Started, In Progress, Completed
and Approved). Within each category, they will be arranged in the order in which they were created. A due date will
appear next to each action.
You can create, edit and delete actions in the same basic way that you work with messages, using the commands in
the Actions group of the My Portal Ribbon tab. Note that you must have a project selected in the Project filter field in
order to create an action.
If Microsoft Outlook is installed on your computer, you can choose My Portal > Actions > Add Action to Outlook
to create a calendar event based on the action on your own Outlook calendar. By default, the event will be scheduled
for the action's due date, but you can make modifications to the event in the properties window that appears.
Users
The Users page displays a list of all users who have an account in the database. (If you are working in a standard
database without login security, any user who has ever opened the database will have an account created
automatically and will be shown in this list.) A status light is displayed for each user; if it is lit up (i.e., green), the
user is currently logged in to the database. In addition, the Connections column shows the Synthesis-enabled
2 Working in Synthesis
78 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
application(s) that the user currently has connected to the database. Clicking a column header in the list of users sorts
the list by that column; click again to reverse the direction of the sort.
Choose My Portal > Users > My Profile to open the User Login and Contact Information window, which allows
you to edit the contact information associated with your user account. See Section 2.2.5 on page 40..
To refresh the list of users, choose View > Refresh > Refresh.
Reliability Web Notes
The Reliability Web Notes page provides access to further information on the interface that you are currently
working with. Choose My Portal > Reliability Web Notes > Get Notes for Active Item or click the button at the
bottom of the page to see basic theoretical information that may be of use in your current task, as well as links to
further information and examples.
You can also select the Automatically retrieve notes check box to have the software automatically update the
displayed notes depending on what item is currently active.
2.14.2.1 Message Window
The Message window allows you to add or edit messages that are displayed on the Messages page of My Portal. This
window is accessed by clicking Create Message or Edit Message on the My Portal tab of the Ribbon (see Section
2.14.7.6 on page 97), or by double-clicking a message.
To specify the user(s) who will see the message, click the arrow in the Address To field.
Select All Users to address the message to all users associated with the project.
To address specific members or notification groups:
Select the Selected Groups/Users option to enable the remaining address options.
Then select the check box for each desired notification group and/or individual user. (Note that you can click
the + beside each notification group to view the members of the group.) For details on creating notification
groups, see Section 2.4.1 on page 51.
When you are done specifying who will see the message, click inside the Address To field again.
Enter a subject and the message details, then specify the priority level of the message. Messages marked as low
priority will be displayed in My Portal with a blue indicator, medium priority messages with a pink indicator and high
priority messages with a red indicator.
Finally, specify the date range during which the message will be displayed. If e-mail notifications are enabled for the
database, you can select the Also send this via e-mail option to send an e-mail copy of the message to the
recipient(s). For details on enabling e-mail notifications, see Section 2.4 on page 50.
2.14.3 Control Panels
All of the analysis and reporting components of a project open in windows with similar characteristics. In general,
such windows consist of a sheet that contains information (diagrams, plots, etc.) and a control panel.
Many control panels and navigation panels (e.g., the navigation panel on the left side of the Resource Manager)
contain multiple pages that can be accessed with either large buttons or small icons at the bottom of the control panel.
The large buttons are displayed in a vertical column; the small icons are displayed in a horizontal row. To change
between the button types, point to the horizontal splitter bar above the buttons and drag it up or down. If you drag the
horizontal splitter bar to the bottom of the control panel, all of the pages will be accessed by small icons. If you drag
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 79
it as far up as it will go, all of the pages will be accessed by large buttons. Positions in between allow you to use some
large buttons and some small icons.
The control panel can be toggled between hidden and displayed states by clicking the Hide or Show icon in its title
bar.
When the control panel is in its displayed state, it will be displayed at all times, as shown next.
2 Working in Synthesis
80 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
When the control panel is in its hidden state, a bar representing the control panel will be displayed on the right side of
the window and the control panel will be hidden until you click this control panel bar. Clicking the bar pops out a
window that shows the options on the control panel page that is currently selected; this window will be displayed
until you click outside of it.
Note that if you are using small icons for any of the control panels pages, those icons will not be displayed when the
control panel is unpinned. The horizontal splitter bar is available in the control panel bar; you can drag the splitter bar
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 81
up to display an icon representing each large button. You can then click the icon to choose which page you want to
see when the control panel is displayed.
The pages in the control panel will vary depending on the type of analysis. The following pages are available for most
analyses:
Identifiers page - Section 2.14.3.1 (p. 81)
Publishing page - Section 2.14.3.2 (p. 82)
Notifications page - Section 2.14.3.3 (p. 84)
2.14.3.1 Control Panel Identifiers Page
As described in the Control Panel Publishing Page section (see Section 2.14.3.2 on page 82), certain analyses
performed in Weibull++ and ALTA (i.e., Weibull++ standard folios, ALTA standard folios, Weibull++ degradation
analysis folios, ALTA degradation analysis folios, non-parametric LDA folios and parametric RDA folios), as well as
analyses in BlockSim can be published as models that become resources available for other analyses. For example,
you could perform a life data analysis in Weibull++, publish the results as a model, and then use that model to
describe the reliability of an item in RCM++. The Identifiers page of the control panel allows you to enter specific
information (e.g., name, part number, etc.) that will be associated with the model when it is published. This will help
you to search for the model when you need to use it in another analysis.
To edit the labels for these user-defined identifier fields at the database level, choose File > Manage Repository >
Global Identifiers. See Section 2.9 on page 60.
To edit the labels at the project level, choose Project > Management > Edit Project Properties and go to the Global
Identifiers tab.
2 Working in Synthesis
82 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
You can enter up to 1,000 characters of text in these fields; if the text is too long to be displayed in the field, you can
click the arrow at the bottom of the field to show the remaining text. See Section 2.9 on page 60..
2.14.3.2 Control Panel Publishing Page
For certain analysis types, once a data sheet has been analyzed and a life data model has been fitted to the results, you
can publish the results as a model for use throughout the project. This functionality is available for Weibull++
standard folios, ALTA standard folios, Weibull++ degradation analysis folios, ALTA degradation analysis folios, non-
parametric LDA folios and parametric RDA folios.
Activities associated with publishing a model are performed on the Publishing page of the diagrams control panel.
The following picture shows the Publishing page of the control panel.
The Tools area on the Publishing page gives you quick access to the tools you will need to publish models. These are:
Publish to New Model
Publishes the analysis to a new model, making it accessible to all Synthesis-enabled applications. The Publish
Model window will appear, allowing you to choose a model type, review the properties of the model and then
click OK to publish it. You can also use this icon to republish a model after changing the associated analysis.
Publish to Existing Model
Publishes the analysis to an existing model, replacing the previous properties of the existing model.
Note: If you are working in a secure database, the ability to edit the labels of the user-defined fields is typically restricted to
users with the Manage other repository settings permission. See Section 2.2.4.3 on page 37.
IMPORTANT: Republishing a model changes the resource, which is available for use throughout the project. This will
cause the model to be changed everywhere that it is used.
IMPORTANT: This will cause the model to be changed everywhere that it is used.
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 83
Trace Usage
Opens the Dependency Viewer, which allows you to see where the model is used. See page 137 in Chapter 3.
Synthesis Viewer
Displays the model information in the Synthesis Viewer window.
Remove Association
Removes the association between the current analysis and the published model. The model will continue to be
a resource in the repository but it can no longer be synchronized with this analysis.
Refresh
Refreshes the Publishing page of the control panel with the most recent information from the database.
Publishing a Model
To publish a model, click the Publish to New Model icon.
In the Publish Model window that appears, specify the model name and the model category. The window shows a
summary of the model properties, including:
Model Basis & Status
The source of the model (i.e. the analysis that it is based on)
The Synthesis-enabled application that was used to create the model
The analysis type of the source (e.g. an analytical diagram in BlockSim, a standard folio in Weibull++)
The synchronization status of the model
Model Definition shows details about the model. If the model is based on an analytical solution, this area will
display Diagram Analysis. If it is based on a fitted model, the distribution type and the parameters will be
displayed.
Identifiers displays the contents of the identifier fields that apply to the model, as defined on the Identifiers page
of the control panel. See Section 2.14.3.1 on page 81.
Click OK to publish the model. You can also click the Attachment icon to add attachments to the model.
Note that you can click the Publish to Existing Model icon to publish the solution to a model that already exists,
thereby replacing all previous properties of that model.
The publication status of the model is displayed in the Status field. If the model has been published, you can click the
Published status link to view the model in the Synthesis Viewer window, which allows you to view all properties of
IMPORTANT: This will cause the model to be changed everywhere that it is used.
2 Working in Synthesis
84 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
a published model but cannot be used to change the properties. In addition, the following information will also be
available in the Publishing area:
Linked? indicates whether the published model has been used within the project. If the model is in use, you can
click the link in this field to open the Dependency Viewer, which allows you to see where the model is used. See
page 137 in Chapter 3.
Synchronized? indicates whether the model is synchronized with the current fitted model for the diagram. If it is,
then the model's name will appear as a link on the Main page of the data sheet's control panel, under the Analysis
Summary area, as shown in the following example for Weibull++.
You can click the link to view the properties of the published model. If the model is not synchronized, then the
link will not be displayed. You will then need to republish the model to bring it up to date.
The user who created the model and the user who last modified the model are displayed. You can click the user
name in the Created By or Modified By field to view information about the date and time of creation and last
modification.
2.14.3.3 Control Panel Notifications Page
The Notifications page is available in the control panel for analysis types that can be used to publish models for use as
resources throughout the project (i.e., Weibull++ standard Folios, ALTA standard folios, Weibull++ degradation
analysis folios, ALTA degradation analysis folios, non-parametric LDA folios and parametric RDA folios).
The Current Status field on this page provides information on the analysis status of the folio. This information will
match the color of the icon used for the Notifications page; a green light indicates that the folio has been analyzed,
and a red light indicates that the folio has not been analyzed since changes were last made to it.
The final page in each diagrams control panel is the Notifications page.
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 85
The Latest Notifications area of the page can display warnings and errors generated during analysis.
The contents of the Latest Notifications area will be cleared the next time you perform analysis or simulation. To
clear the Latest Notifications area manually, click the Clear icon.
You can copy a warning to the Clipboard by clicking the warning and then clicking the Copy icon. The text will then
be available to be pasted into other windows or other applications.
You can also export the contents of the Latest Notifications area to an Excel file by clicking the Export to Excel
icon. You will be prompted for a filename and then the Excel file will open automatically if you have Excel installed.
2.14.4 Data Sheets
Data sheets in most folio types share the same general components. The following figure shows the components of a
Weibull++ standard folio data sheet. Note, however, that the data sheet will look different depending on the type of
2 Working in Synthesis
86 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
data you selected during setup. The figure shows just one of the many formats. Regardless of the data type, the items
discussed in this section, such as the Caption and the Name Box, are identical for all formats.
Caption displays the name of the folio and the name of the sheet that is currently displayed.
Name Box displays the location of the currently selected cell by listing the column letter and row number that
intersect at the cells location. Note that the column letter represents the order of the column as it appears in the
data sheet.
Data Entry Bar displays the contents of the selected cell, which may be text, a numerical value or a formula. For
text or numerical values, you can enter, or edit, the information directly inside the cell or inside the data entry bar.
For a formula, you must use the data entry bar for editing; the cell will display only the calculated value.
Row Headings identify the row numbers. You can change the name or number of a row by double-clicking its
heading. The row will still retain its order number in the data sheet.
Column Headings indicate the title for the entries in each column. These titles depend on the type of data you are
entering. You can change the name of a column by double-clicking its heading.
Sheet Tabs represent the different sheets within the folio. To switch between sheets, click the appropriate tab.
You can change the name of a sheet by double-clicking its tab.
Each standard folio can contain up to 256 data sheets with up to 65,536 data rows per sheet. However, the
applications speed of execution is inversely proportional to the number of data rows in the current data set. In
addition, the number of folios that can be opened at once is dependent upon the amount of memory of your system.
Resizing Columns and Rows
To resize the columns, there are four ways:
To resize a single column, point the mouse pointer on the line that borders the column in the column header. The
mouse pointer will change to a double-headed arrow. Click and then drag the double-headed arrow to the left or
right to resize the column. To save the changes, choose Home > Edit > Format Selection > Column Width
Style > Keep as Set by User.
To resize several columns all at once, select a cell in each of the columns to be resized and then choose Home >
Edit > Format Selection > Column Width. This opens the Column Width window, which allows you to set the
column width of the selected cells and specify a unit of measurement for the width.
To span the columns across the spreadsheet with equal widths, choose Home > Edit > Format Selection >
Column Width Style > Span Evenly. To keep the ratio of the column widths to span across the spreadsheet after
they have been resized, choose Span Proportionally.
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 87
To resize the rows, there are two ways:
To resize a single row, point the mouse pointer on the line that borders the row in the row header. The mouse
pointer will change to a double-headed arrow. Click and then drag the double-headed arrow up or down to resize
the row.
To resize several rows all at once, select a cell in each of the rows to be resized and then choose Home > Edit >
Format Selection > Row Height. This opens the opens the Row Height window, which allows you to set the row
height of the selected cells and specify a unit of measurement for the height.
Entering Formulas in the Data Sheet
Data sheets allow you to enter formulas in columns that do not require entries to be dates, times or text (e.g., you
cannot use formulas in the State F or S column in a Weibull++ standard folio or in the Date Occurred column in an
event log folio). For example, if you have a data set where the units were inspected every 24 hours, you can speed up
data entry by creating a formula to add 24 hours to the previous inspection time, as shown next.
There are two types of cell references (locations) when inputting a formula: absolute and relative. By default, the cell
reference is relative, meaning that as a formula is copied and pasted to other cells, the cell references in the formula
will be adjusted to reflect the new relative location. In the previous figure, the formula in cell C2 is copied and pasted
into cell C4. This changes the cell reference in the formula from =C1+24 to =C3+24; therefore, the time value in
C4 is 72+24 = 96.
In contrast, an absolute reference does not change when the formula is copied to other cells. Absolute references are
designated by placing a dollar sign ($) in front of the row and/or column to be made absolute. If the formula in the
example were rewritten to =$C$1+24, then copying the formula to cell C4 would retain the cell reference to C1 and
the time value in C4 would result to 24+24 = 48.
2.14.4.1 General Spreadsheets
To add a general spreadsheet to a folio in:
Weibull++: Choose Life Data > Folio Sheets > Insert General Spreadsheet.
ALTA: Choose ALTA > Folio Sheets > Insert General Spreadsheet.
Unless explicitly stated as being restricted to an analysis workbook, all components and tools that are available in an
analysis workbook are also available in a general spreadsheet.
2 Working in Synthesis
88 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
2.14.5 Select Existing Window
The Select Existing window provides a list of existing descriptions that might apply to the current field.
Whenever the Select Existing window is available for a data field, the icon will be displayed.
When the Select Existing window is accessed from a text field in the Project Properties window (described in Section
2.13.1 on page 66), it displays a list existing text descriptions for the current data field that exist in any project in the
database. For example, if you click the Select Existing icon for the Description field of the Project Properties
window, the list will contain text that has been entered in the Description field for other projects within the database.
When the Select Existing window is accessed from other text fields, it consists of two tabs. The Select tab of the
window displays a list existing text descriptions for the current data field that exist in the data sources that are
selected on the Projects tab.
2.14.5.1 Filtering and Inserting Existing Text Descriptions
To insert one of the descriptions into the current field, double-click the row or select the row and click OK. If the
Replace option is selected, the description will replace the current contents of the field. If the Append option is
selected, the description will be added to the end of the current contents of the field.
The descriptions are sorted alphabetically. When the list (table) has focus, you can type a letter to move to the first
description in the list that begins with the letter. You can also filter these descriptions by entering one or more
keywords into the input box in the filtering area at the top of the window. You can specify how to match the specified
keywords using the drop-down list.
Contains returns descriptions that contain the exact string entered. For example, if you type provides adequate
structural in the input box, then all instances that contain that phrase will be found. This includes descriptions
such as Provides adequate structural support, but does not include descriptions such as Provides structural
reinforcement, Allows adequate air flow, etc.
Contains Any returns descriptions that contain any of the keywords entered. Keywords should be entered as a
comma-delimited list. For example, if you type provides, adequate, structural in the input box, then all instances
that contain any of those words anywhere within the field will be found. This includes descriptions such as
Provides structural reinforcement, Allows adequate air flow, Provides adequate structural support, etc.
Contains All returns descriptions that contain all of the keywords entered. Keywords should be entered as a
comma-delimited list. For example, if you type provides, adequate, structural in the input box, then all instances
that contain all of those words anywhere within the field will be found. This includes descriptions such as
Provides adequate structural support and Reinforces structural elements to provide adequate stability, but
does not include descriptions such as Provides structural reinforcement, Allows adequate air flow, etc.
Begins With returns descriptions where the keyword(s) appear at the start of the field. For example, if you type
provides adequate in the input box, then only the instances in which that phrase appears at the start of the field
will be found. This includes descriptions such as Provides adequate structural support, but does not include
descriptions such as Provides support adequate for load of 500 kg, Fan provides adequate air flow, etc.
is returns descriptions that are identical to the exact string entered. matches the whole field. For example, if you
type provides adequate support in the input box, then any description that contains that phrase, and only that
phrase, will be found. The description Provides adequate support would be returned. Descriptions such as
Provides adequate structural support and Provides adequate support for load of 500 kg, would not be
included.
As you type in the Find field, the list is updated based on the filter criteria that you specified.
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 89
2.14.5.2 Data Sources for Select Existing Window
To select the project sources for the descriptions that will be displayed in the Select Existing window, click the
Projects tab.
Select Project(s) to search: Select one of the following options:
Current displays the relevant descriptions from the current project only.
All displays the relevant descriptions from all projects in the current database.
Selected displays the relevant descriptions from the selected projects in the current database. When this option is
selected, a list of the projects in the current database will become enabled. If the check box for a project is selected,
the relevant descriptions from that project will be displayed.
2.14.6 Change Units Window
When you are working with data sheets in standard folios, degradation folios and non-parametric LDA folios, you
will enter time values in terms of specific time units, as defined at the database level. These units are displayed in the
header of the relevant column in the data sheet. If you wish to change the time units of an existing data sheet, click the
Change Units icon on the Main page of the control panel.
The Change Units window will appear.
The units that are currently being used in the data sheet will be displayed at the top of the window. In the Change
Units To field, you can choose any other defined time unit to be used in the data sheet. In the Conversion Options
area, specify what will happen when the units are changed:
You can convert the existing data to the new units. For example, if you had a time of 10 in a data sheet that was
using hours, that time would become 600 if you converted the data to minutes (10 hours x 60 minutes per hour =
600 minutes). For standard folios, when this option is selected, you can select whether you want to copy the data
to a new sheet in the folio and then perform the conversion, leaving the original data sheet unchanged, or convert
the data in the current sheet.
You can leave the data unchanged and just apply the new units. This would be appropriate if, for example, you
had entered all of your data and then realized that the data sheet was using different units from the original units in
which the times were measured.
2 Working in Synthesis
90 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
2.14.7 Ribbon
Weibull++ and ALTA have a new user-interface called the Ribbon, which replaces the toolbars and menus of
previous versions of the software. The new interface is designed to improve efficiency by displaying only the
commands you need to complete a specific task. The Ribbon is divided into tabs that relate to a task or activity, such
as managing the diagrams in a project or performing a specific analysis. Each tab contains the related commands,
which are intuitively organized into groups. Depending on the activity you are in, some commands may appear
dimmed or will not appear at all.
This section is intended to serve as a comprehensive reference to the commands found on the Ribbon. Note that many
features in the application also have a shortcut menu (accessed by right-clicking) that gives access to commands that
are commonly used for that feature. All commands available in the shortcut menus are also available on the Ribbon.
In addition, the Ribbon includes a customizable Quick Access Toolbar that allows you to display frequently used
commands. See Section 2.14.7.1 on page 91.
The Wiebull++ and ALTA Ribbons include the following tabs:
The File tab, also known as the Backstage View, contains commands that allow you to manage the database,
application and user settings - Section 2.14.7.2 (p. 92)
The Home tab contains commands related to using the Clipboard and generating reports, queries and plots -
Section 2.14.7.5 (p. 95)
The My Portal tab contains commands related to using the My Portal feature - Section 2.14.7.6 (p. 97)
The Project tab contains commands related to creating projects and working with the project properties - Section
2.14.7.7 (p. 98)
The Insert tab contains commands related to adding items (e.g., folios, mulitplots, diagrams, tools, reports and
attachments) to a project - Section 2.14.7.8 (p. 99)
The View tab contains commands related to configuring the layout of the application's interface, such displaying
the Project Manager, My Portal, tabbed windows and other features - Section 2.14.7.9 (p. 101)
Active (contextual) tabs contain commands related to a type of folio or analysis. These tabs are displayed only
when the related item is active. For example, the contextual tabs for a warranty folio will contain commands
related to performing a warranty analysis, while the contextual tab for a general spreadsheet will contain
commands related to sheet formatting and creating charts.
The following reference is an alphabetical listing of all the contextual tabs available in Weibull++ and ALTA:
The ALTA tab is visible when you view an ALTA standard folio data sheet for accelerated life testing analysis -
Section 2.14.7.10 (p. 102)
Tip: To maximize your workspace, you can choose to automatically minimize the Ribbon and display only the tab names.
To do this, click the arrow on the right-side of the Ribbon, as shown in the figure. The Ribbon will be expanded when you
click a tab and then minimized after you click a command.
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 91
The Degradation tab is visible when you view either a Weibull++ or ALTA degradation folio data sheet for
degradation analysis - Section 2.14.7.11 (p. 104)
The Diagram tab is visible when you view a reliability block diagram (RBD) - Section 2.14.7.12 (p. 105)
The Equation Fit Solver tab is visible when you view the Equation Fit Solver utility - Section 2.14.7.13 (p. 107)
The Event Log tab is visible when you view an event log data folio data sheet - Section 2.14.7.14 (p. 107)
The Life Comparison tab is visible when you view the Life Comparison tool - Section 2.14.7.15 (p. 108)
The Life Data tab is visible when you view a Weibull++ standard folio data sheet for life data analysis - Section
2.14.7.16 (p. 108)
The Non-Parametric LDA tab is visible when you view a non-parametric life data analysis (LDA) folio data
sheet - Section 2.14.7.17 (p. 110)
The Plot tab is visible when you view a plot sheet or the Target Reliability tool - Section 2.14.7.18 (p. 111)
The Recurrent Event Data tab is visible when you view either a parametric or a non-parametric recurrent event
data analysis (RDA) folio data sheet - Section 2.14.7.19 (p. 111)
The Sheet Options tab is visible when you view either a Weibull++ or ALTA standard folio - Section 2.14.7.20
(p. 112)
The SimuMatic(A) tab is visible when you view the ALTA SimuMatic results folio - Section 2.14.7.21 (p. 114)
The SimuMatic(W) tab is visible when you view the Weibull++ SimuMatic results folio - Section 2.14.7.22 (p.
114)
The Stress Profile tab is visible when you view an ALTA stress profile data sheet - Section 2.14.7.23 (p. 114)
The Stress-Strength tab is visible when you view the Stress-Strength tool - Section 2.14.7.24 (p. 114)
The Test Design tab is visible when you view any of the Test Design tools - Section 2.14.7.25 (p. 115)
The Test Plans tab is visible when you view the ALTA Test Plans tool - Section 2.14.7.26 (p. 115)
The Warranty tab is visible when you view a warranty analysis folio data sheet - Section 2.14.7.27 (p. 115)
The Workbook tab is visible when you view an analysis workbook - Section 2.14.7.28 (p. 117)
2.14.7.1 Quick Access Toolbar
The Quick Access Toolbar is a customizable feature of the Ribbon that allows you to access frequently used
commands without changing the tabs.
To add your favorite commands to the Quick Access Toolbar, right-click the command on the Ribbon and select
Add to Quick Access Toolbar.
To remove a command from the toolbar, right-click the command on the Ribbon or on the Quick Access Toolbar
and select Remove from Quick Access Toolbar.
Right-clicking anywhere within the Quick Access Toolbar also gives you the following commands:
Show Quick Access Toolbar Below the Ribbon or Show Quick Access Toolbar Above the Ribbon. The
command that appears depends on where the toolbar is currently displayed on the Ribbon.
Minimize the Ribbon maximizes your workspace by allowing you to display only the tab names on the
Ribbon. The Ribbon will be expanded when you click a tab and then minimized after you click a command.
To keep the Ribbon always expanded, clear the check box.
2 Working in Synthesis
92 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
2.14.7.2 Backstage View (File Tab)
The Backstage view (File tab) is the first view you will see when you start the application. It allows you to work with
databases and application-level settings. In other words, the Backstage view allows you to do things to a database,
while the commands on the other tabs of the Ribbon allow you to do things within the database.
To access the Backstage view from within the application, click the File tab on the Ribbon. You can click any Ribbon
tab to exit the Backstage view and return to the MDI workspace.
The area on the left side of the Backstage view is called the Tab Pane. It contains commands for working with the
database and access to the tabs of the Backstage view.
The following commands are available in the Tab Pane:
Save As saves a copy of the standard database (*.rsrp) to another pathname/filename and/or file type. You can
save a copy of the database as a new standard database (*.rsrp) or a compressed standard database (*.rsgz). Note
that Synthesis-enabled applications do not provide a Save command because your changes are saved whenever
you make them in an analysis, navigate away from a cell in a worksheet or table or click OK to close a window. It
is also important to note that, due to the multi-user, database-driven nature of the software, these applications do
not offer the ability to undo changes that have been saved in the database. Whenever you initiate a significant
change to the database that cannot be undone (e.g., deleting a folio), you will be prompted to confirm that you
want to proceed.
Pack and E-mail compresses a copy of the current standard database to a *.rsgz file and attaches it to a new e-
mail message. If no e-mail program is installed or no default e-mail program is defined on the computer, a
message notifying you of this will be shown. This command is not available if you are working with an enterprise
database.
When you open the compressed file, a new repository will be created from that file and saved in your local drive
(e.g., C:\Documents and Settings\Username\My Documents\ReliaSoft\Files). Any changes made to the new
repository will not affect the original copy.
Open Repository opens an existing standard database (*.rsrp) or enterprise database (*.rserp), or a compressed
standard database (*.rsgz). You also can select a database file in the Windows Explorer and double-click or drag
it into the MDI to open it. If you want to convert a standard database that was created with earlier versions of
Weibull++ or ALTA, choose the appropriate option from the drop-down list in the Open Database window.
Close Repository closes the database. You also can close the database by opening another database or by exiting
the application.
Recent shows a list of recently opened database files (*.rsrp and *.rserp) and a list of recently accessed locations.
Clicking a database will open it, and clicking a location will allow you to browse for databases in that location.
The number of items in these lists is set in the Recent Repository List area of the Synthesis Setup. See page 599
in Chapter 29. You can pin items to a list by clicking the pushpin icon associated with the item; when the pin is
vertical, the item will not roll off the list.
New allows you to create a new standard database (see Section 2.1.2 on page 24) or a new connection file for
access to an enterprise database (see Section 2.1.4 on page 25).
Launch Application provides quick launch icons for other Synthesis-enabled applications that are installed on
your computer. If you are currently connected to a repository when you click one of these icons, the same
repository will automatically be opened in the new application.
Manage Repository contains tools that control various database-level settings. These include:
Note: If you are working in a secure database, some tools may not appear at all. Your access to these tools is based
on the permissions assigned to your user account. See Section 2.2.4.3 on page 37.
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 93
Security
Authorized Users controls the users who can access a standard database with login security enabled or an
enterprise database. See Section 2.2.4 on page 34.
Prior Logins displays a list of prior logins to the current database and allows you to export this
information to Excel. See Section 2.3.2 on page 49.
Reset In Use Flags allows you to reset the flags that indicate the in use status of projects or items
within a project. See Section 2.3.3 on page 49.
Notifications
E-mail Settings controls whether e-mail notifications are enabled and when they are sent. See Section 2.4
on page 50.
Notification Groups allows you to define distribution groups to receive e-mail notifications. See Section
2.4.1 on page 51.
Repository Settings
Manage Units allows you to define the time units available for use in any project within the database. See
Section 2.5 on page 51.
Manage Warranty Units allows you to set equivalencies between the time units used in the repository
and the units used in the warranty calculations.See Section 2.6 on page 52.
Define Default Names allows you to specify how default names for resources and blocks are created. See
Section 2.7 on page 59.
Task Types maps the task types used in RCM++ only to the task classes in the universal reliability
definition (URD) so that simulation and cost calculation results in RCM++ are accurate. See Section 2.8 on
page 60.
Global Identifiers allows you to define the names of the identifiers, which are fields that can be used to
search for blocks or resources within the current project. See Section 2.9 on page 60.
Project Categories allows you to define the categories that can be used to filter the projects displayed in
the project list. See Section 2.10 on page 61.
Project Baselines allows you to manage project baselines, which are exact replicas of the project at a
particular point in time (i.e., backups) that can be restored when and if needed. See Section 2.11 on page
62.
Compact and Repair helps to reduce the size of the current database to protect against data loss or file
corruption. For more details on protecting your data, see Section 2.12 on page 64.
Enterprise
Repository Creation opens a wizard that leads you through the steps to create a new enterprise repository
(SQL Server or Oracle database). To use this option, you must have access to a server with a supported
version of SQL Server or Oracle and you must have the appropriate permissions to create a new database
on the server. This command will be available only if you have purchased a Weibull++ Enterprise license.
Note that if no repository is currently open, the Repository Creation wizard is the only option available.
The Help Center provides a variety of resources to help you use the application more effectively. In addition, the
Help Center displays information about the application, including the Compile Release Version (CRV) and
License information. See Section 2.14.7.4 on page 94.
Application Setup opens the Application Setup, which allows you to set your preferences for working with
analyses, such as the math precision, default plot settings and the like. The settings apply only to the current
computer/username, and they do not affect the results of the analyses. See page 601 in Chapter 29.
Synthesis Setup opens the Synthesis Setup, which allows you to set your preferences for the repository, such as
when to backup the database, the color-scheme of the interface and the like. The settings apply only to the current
computer/username, and they do not affect the results of the analyses. See page 599 in Chapter 29.
2 Working in Synthesis
94 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
ReliaSoft Online Pane
The area on the right side of the Backstage view is called the ReliaSoft Online Pane. See Section 2.14.7.3 on page 94.
2.14.7.3 ReliaSoft Online Pane
On the Backstage view, the area on the right side is called the ReliaSoft Online Pane. There are three pages available
in this pane, accessed by the icons at the top of the pane:
The ReliaSoft Online Home page displays software tips, announcements and upcoming training seminars
for this application.
The Latest News page displays recent announcements about ReliaSoft's reliability software and services.
The Synthesis Portal page displays tips and announcements related to the entire Synthesis Platform.
Note that an active Internet connection is required to see this information.
2.14.7.4 Help Center
The Help Center, which is part of the Backstage view, is intended to help you use the application more effectively by
providing quick access to a variety of support tools. You can view the options by clicking File > Help. Note that
many of the tools require Internet access.
The following commands are available in the Help Center:
Using This Application
Help File Contents opens the application's help file. If you have an active Internet connection, the help topics
that you see will always be the most up-to-date versions available. If you do not have an active Internet
connection, the help topics that you see will be the local copy that was installed on your machine.
User Guide opens the application's User's Guide (in PDF format). You can work with the online version or
download a copy for your use.
Reliability Theory and Applications
ReliaWiki.org opens the ReliaWiki website, which is both a resource portal and a wiki for professionals in
reliability engineering and related fields. (http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/Main_Page)
Weibull.com opens the Weibull.com website, which is devoted entirely to the topic of reliability engineering,
reliability theory and reliability data analysis and modeling. (http://www.Weibull.com/)
Reliability Discussion Forum opens the Reliability Discussion Forum website, which is designed to facilitate
communication within the reliability engineering field. These forums are open to everyone and no password is
required. ReliaSoft personnel monitor and participate in the discussions. (http://www.ReliaSoftforums.com/)
ReliaSoft on the Web opens the main page of the ReliaSoft.com website. (http://www.ReliaSoft.com/)
Examples
Open Examples Folder provides access to a set of example projects that are designed to help you explore
various software features.
Quick Start Guide opens the application's Quick Start Guide (in PDF format) which contains step-by-step
examples designed to assist you in learning to use the application software. You can work with the online
version or download a copy for your use.
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 95
Support
Technical Support provides the contact information you will need to obtain technical support.
Global Support Centers helps you find your localized ReliaSoft support center.
E-mail Support generates an e-mail to request technical support. The e-mail is pre-populated with
information about your license and operating system, which the technical support representative will need for
troubleshooting the issue.
Check for Update allows you to download the latest free service release for the software.
Licensing displays your license and registration details (see page 4 in Chapter 1). To see additional information,
click License Manger. The ReliaSoft Product License Manager window displays additional information about
which products you have currently registered and your contact information on file with ReliaSoft. To change the
information, open the window and enter your password. You can then update your registration details or manage
the products that are currently activated for your computer. If you forgot your password, you can request to have
the information sent to the e-mail address on file for your registration by clicking E-mail my password to me.
About displays the application's Compile Release Version (CRV) (sometimes called a build number), which
allows you to determine whether you have the latest version of the software.
2.14.7.5 Home Tab
The Home tab contains commands related to using the Clipboard and printing data sheets. It also contains statistical
tools such as the Monte Carlo data simulation tool and the Quick Parameter Estimator.
Clipboard
Paste
Paste All pastes the formats, formulas and values of the contents of the Clipboard to the current folio or
spreadsheet.
Paste Values pastes only the values from the Clipboard to the current folio or spreadsheet.
Paste Formats pastes only the formats from the Clipboard to the current folio or spreadsheet.
Paste Formulas pastes only the formulas from the Clipboard to the current folio or spreadsheet.
Cut cuts the selected text to the Clipboard. Data stored in the Clipboard can be pasted into any data sheet within
the application or in other applications.
Copy copies the selected text to the Clipboard. Data stored in the Clipboard can be pasted into any data sheet
within the application or in other documents.
Format Painter allows you to copy the format properties of text in a sheet and apply it to other text. To use the
Format Painter, select the text with the format properties that are to be copied and then choose Format Painter.
Next, click the text to which the format properties are to be applied.
Edit
Redo reapplies the previously canceled action. You can redo multiple actions by choosing Redo again.
Undo cancels the last editing change you made to the sheet.
Delete deletes the selected text.
Clear
Clear All deletes the contents and format of the selected cell(s), but does not delete the actual cell(s).
Clear Values deletes only the contents of the selected cell(s). The format will be retained.
Clear Formats deletes only the format of the selected cell(s). The contents will be retained.
2 Working in Synthesis
96 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Format Selection opens the Format submenu, which contains the following commands.
Alignment allows you to set the alignment properties of the selected text.
Borders allows you to customize the borders of selected cells.
Font Color opens the Color window, which allows you to set the color of the selected text.
Fill Color opens the Color window, which allows you to set the color used to fill the selected cell(s).
Pattern opens the Cells Patterns window, which allows you to set the fill color, pattern color and fill pattern
properties of the selected cell(s).
Select Font opens the Font window, which allows you to set the font, style and size of the selected text.
Custom Number opens the Format Cells-Number window, which allows you to set the format for how
numbers in the selected cell(s) will displayed.
Column Width Style allows you to set the column width of the selected cells.
Span Evenly spans the columns across the spreadsheet with equal width.
Span Proportionally keeps the ratio of the column widths to span across the spreadsheet after they have
been resized.
Keep As Set By User keeps the column width settings defined by the user.
Column Width opens the Column Width window, which allows you to set the column width of the selected
cells. Enter the desired width in the input box. You can select the units of measurement (characters, inches or
centimeters) from the Units drop-down list. To use the default column width, click Use Default. Click OK to
accept the column width selections and apply them to the current Spreadsheet. Click Cancel to cancel any
changes made in the Column Width window. You can change the default column width by clicking Change
Default. This will open the Default Column Width window, which allows you to set a default column width.
This window has the same options as the Column Width window.
Row Height opens the Row Height window, which allows you to set the row height of the selected cells. The
Row Height window works the same way the Column Width window works, with the additional option of
automatically setting the row height based on contents.
Freeze Panes allows you to lock a specific row on the spreadsheet so that the contents of the selected row will
always be visible on screen no matter how far you scroll to the right or down. Changes cannot be made to a
frozen row.
Merge Cells combines selected cells to form one cell.
Unmerge Cells separates merged cells into the original individual cells.
Select All selects all of the cells in the currently active sheet.
Find opens the Find window, which allows you to search through the active sheet for text and/or numbers in
values or formulas and, if desired, replace the found material. See page 570 in Chapter 27.
Spelling activates the Spell Check utility, which allows you to check the spelling within the current sheet. See
page 565 in Chapter 27.
Print
Print sends the current data sheet or spreadsheet to the printer.
Print Preview opens the Print Preview window, which allows you to view how the current data sheet or
spreadhsheet will appear on the printed page. See page 595 in Chapter 28.
Page Setup opens the Page Setup window, which allows you to specify printing options. See page 591 in Chapter
28.
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 97
Print Layout displays the page boundary lines on the reliability block diagram (RBD). Everything within the
boundary lines will appear on the printed page and this view allows you to make any necessary adjustments to the
final look of the diagram before sending it to the printer.
Tools
Weibull++ Monte Carlo opens the Weibull++ Monte Carlo utility, which allows you to generate a data set that
fits a specified life distribution or user-defined model. The generated data set can then be analyzed like any other
data set and used in a variety of applications such as in the analysis of probabilistic design models or to compare
the data generated from simulation with actual field data. See page 448 in Chapter 16.
ALTA Monte Carlo opens the ALTA Monte Carlo utility, which allows you to generate a data set that fits a
specified life distribution and life-stress relationship at specified stress conditions. The generated data set can then
be analyzed like any other data set and used in a variety of applications such as in the analysis of probabilistic
design models or to compare the data generated from simulation with actual field data. See page 454 in Chapter
16.
Non-Linear Equation Root Finder opens the Non-Linear Equation Root Finder utility, which allows you to
solve for the root of any user-defined non-linear equation. This helps you eliminate some of the guesswork of
solving for the value of the unknown variable that brings the function as close to zero as possible. See Chapter 24.
Quick Statistical Reference opens the Quick Statistical Reference utility, which allows you to calculate common
statistical values such as median ranks, chi-squared values and student's t values. It also includes a polynomial
interpolation/extrapolation function, which allows you to obtain new data points from a set of known data points
that you provide. See Chapter 25.
Quick Parameter Estimator (W++) opens the Weibull++ version of the QPE, which allows you to estimate the
parameters of a distribution based on information you have about the reliability of a product, the probability of an
event occurring or the typical duration of a task. See page 553 in Chapter 26.
Quick Parameter Estimator (ALTA) opens the ALTA version of the QPE, which allows you to estimate the
parameters of a model based on information you have about the reliability of a product at normal and accelerated
stress levels. See page 556 in Chapter 26.
2.14.7.6 My Portal Tab
The My Portal tab contains commands related to using the My Portal feature.
Messages
Create Message opens the Message window and adds a message to the database. See Section 2.14.2.1 on page 78.
Edit Message opens the Message window, which allows you to view and edit all of the properties of the message.
Delete Message deletes the current message.
Actions
Create Action opens the Action window, which allows you to add an action to the project. See page 150 in
Chapter 3.
Edit Action opens the Action window, which allows you to view and edit all of the properties of the action
record.
Delete Action deletes the current action record.
Add Action to Outlook adds an event, on the Action's due date, to the person responsible's Outlook calendar.
Users
2 Working in Synthesis
98 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
My Profile opens the User Login and Contact Information window where you change your user name and contact
details for your user account in the current database. See Section 2.2.5 on page 40.
Reliability Web Notes
Get Notes For Active Item allows you update the Reliability Web Notes page of the My Portal window with
information related to the item that you currently have open. The information includes a brief description of the
item, as well as links to examples and theory articles. See Section 2.14.2 on page 76.
2.14.7.7 Project Tab
The Project tab contains commands related to creating projects and working with the project properties. Unless
otherwise indicated, these commands apply to the project that is currently selected in the Project Manager. There are
three ways to select a project and apply a command:
By right-clicking the project in the Project Manager and choosing the command from the shortcut menu.
By selecting the project in the Project Manager and then clicking the command on the Ribbon.
By clicking anywhere inside the project that is currently open/visible and then clicking the command on the
Ribbon.
Management
Create Project adds a new project to the current database. At a minimum, you must specify the project name.
Open Project opens the selected project.
Close Project closes the project that is currently open/visible and all of the analyses it contains.
Edit Project Properties allows you to view and edit the properties of the selected project. See Section 2.13.1 on
page 66.
Duplicate Project creates a copy of the selected project. The new project will have the same name as the original
with an increment number added to the end (e.g., Project_1, Project_2, etc.).
Delete Project deletes the selected project. There is no undo for delete.
Manage Projects opens the Manage Projects Window, which allows you to edit security settings and properties
of all projects in the database in one location. See Section 2.13.3 on page 68.
Import/Export gives you the option to open either the Import or Export wizard. The Import wizard allows you to
import projects, resources or items from an existing database into the current database, while the Export wizard
allows you to export to a new or existing database. See Section 2.16 on page 119.
Project Baselines gives you the option to create or restore project baselines, which are exact replicas of the
project at a particular point in time (i.e., backups). To create a baseline for the selected project, use the Create
Baseline command. To restore all data from an existing baseline, use the Restore Baseline command. For
complete information on project baselines, see Section 2.11 on page 62.
Check In/Out allows you to check out the selected project and make it available for editing only to you, while all
other users in the database have read-only access to the project. No other user can edit the project unless you
check in the project or undo the check out. See Section 2.2.9 on page 45.
E-mail Project
Note: For secure databases, access to the commands on this tab may be restricted based on the permissions assigned to
the user account.
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 99
Pack and E-mail compresses a copy of the selected project to a *.rsgz file and attaches it to a new e-mail
message. If no e-mail program is installed or no default e-mail program is defined on the computer, a message
notifying you of this will be shown.
Security
Lock Project allows other users to view, but not modify the project or any records associated with it. See Section
2.2.8 on page 45.
Make Private moves the project into the Private heading of the Project Manager. To move a private project to
the Public heading, choose Project > Project Security > Make Public. See Section 2.2.1 on page 29.
Change Owner allows you to assign a different database user to be the owner for the selected project. See Section
2.2.2 on page 30.
Project Security opens the Project Properties window with the Security tab active, where you can specify the
user accounts that can view/modify the selected project. This command is available only for public projects in
secure databases. See Section 2.13.1 on page 66.
Current Item
The following commands are available when you select a specific item (a folio, analysis workbook, Word report
template or overlay plot sheet) in the current project explorer. See Section 2.14.1.3 on page 75.
Edit brings the selected item to the front of the windows and activates it as the current control. If an attachment is
selected, the command opens the attachment in the appropriate application, if that application is installed on your
computer.
Rename allows you to rename the selected item.
Duplicate creates a copy of the selected item within the project. The duplicate will have the same name as the
original with an increment number added to the end (e.g., Folio1_1, Folio1_2, etc.).
Delete deletes the selected item. There is no undo for delete.
Item Permissions opens the Item Permissions window and allows you to specify the user accounts that can view
or modify the item. This command is available only for secure databases. See Section 2.2.10 on page 47.
Synthesis
Resource Manager opens the Resource Manager window, which allows you to view and edit all of the resources
(URDs, models, tasks, etc.) available to the selected project. See page 131 in Chapter 3.
2.14.7.8 Insert Tab
The Insert tab contains commands related to adding items to a project.
Wizard
Project Item Wizard opens the Project Item Wizard which provides information about all the analyses that you
could add to the project and guides you through any steps required to configure the analysis that you have
selected. See Section 2.13.2 on page 68.
Folios
Weibull++ Standard Folio adds a Weibull++ standard folio to the project for life data analysis. The folio allows
you to capture life data (e.g., failure times) from a sample of units and analyze the data based on an underlying life
distribution. From the analysis, you can measure the reliability performance of a product over time or make
projections about future behavior. See Chapter 4.
ALTA Standard Folio adds an ALTA standard folio to the project for accelerated life testing data analysis. The
folio allows you to capture life data (e.g., failure times) from a sample of units that are subjected to elevated stress
2 Working in Synthesis
100 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
conditions (the elevated stress conditions cause the units to fail more quickly, reducing the test time required to
obtain data for a product). You can then analyze the data based on a life-stress relationship model in order to
extrapolate a use level pdf, which allows you to obtain reliability predictions about the product at normal
operating conditions. See Chapter 5.
Warranty adds a warranty data analysis folio to the project. The folio allows you to capture and analyze failure
data from fielded products in order to predict future warranty returns (product failures) and plan for warranty
fulfillment needs, such as the number of spares to stock. See Chapter 9.
Weibull++ Degradation adds a Weibull++ degradation analysis folio to the project. The folio allows you to
record the amount or level of degradation of a product over time in order to estimate the point at which the
product is expected to fail. The folio uses basic mathematical models to extrapolate failure times from the
measurements. The software then analyzes the extrapolated failure times using standard life data analysis in order
to obtain reliability predictions about the product. See Chapter 6.
ALTA Degradation adds an ALTA degradation analysis folio to the project for accelerated degradation analysis.
The folio allows you to record the amount or level of degradation over time for a product that is subjected to
elevated stress conditions in order to estimate the point at which the product is expected to fail (the elevated stress
conditions accelerate the degradation of the product, reducing the test time required to obtain the measurements).
The folio uses basic mathematical models to extrapolate failure times from the measurements. The software then
analyzes the extrapolated failure times using accelerated life testing data analysis in order to obtain reliability
predictions about the product at normal operating conditions. See Chapter 7.
Non-Parametric LDA adds a non-parametric life data analysis (LDA) folio to the project. The folio allows you
to capture the life data from a sample of units and analyze the data without assuming an underlying life
distribution. This analysis is useful when dealing with unknown failure modes, when there is not enough data to
assume a life distribution or when the data set does not fit any life distribution in a satisfactory way. The folio also
allows you to perform a standard (parametric) life data analysis on the data set in order to compare the results
obtained from both methods and perform further analysis. See Chapter 8.
Event Log adds an event log folio to the project. The folio allows you to capture data in an event log format
(commonly used in the Machine Tools and other industries) and analyze the information in order to create a
reliability model for a piece of equipment. The reliability model can be used to help you understand the
performance of the equipment, such as the total system uptime/downtime, or obtain reliability predictions about
its future behavior. See Chapter 10.
Parametric RDA adds a parametric recurrent event data analysis (RDA) folio to the project. The folio allows you
to capture and analyze data obtained from recurring events, as in the case of a repairable system that may fail or
be repaired multiple times during its operation life. The folio uses the General Renewal Process (GRP) model to
describe the failure behavior of a system over time and obtain estimates such as the cumulative number of
failures, mean time between failures (MTBF) and failure intensity. See page 335 in Chapter 11.
Non-Parametric RDA adds a non-parametric recurrent event data analysis (RDA) folio to the project. The folio
allows you to capture and analyze data obtained from recurring events, as in the case of a repairable system that
may fail or be repaired multiple times during its operation life. The folio uses the mean cumulative function
(MCF) to model the reliability performance of a system over time and obtain estimates such as the cumulative
number of failures. See page 329 in Chapter 11.
Tools
Diagram adds a reliability block diagram (RBD) to the project. In Weibull++ and ALTA, RBD diagrams are used
to graphically represent the failure modes of a product and analyze how each mode contributes to the overall
reliability performance of the product. See Chapter 17.
Weibull++ SimuMatic opens the Weibull++ SimuMatic Setup window, which allows you to generate several
data sets all at once (via the Weibull++ Monte Carlo utility) and automatically perform basic life data analysis on
each of the generated data sets. The simulated data could be used in a number of applications such as in the
analysis of probabilistic models, risk analysis and in designing reliability tests. See page 456 in Chapter 16.
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 101
ALTA SimuMatic opens the ALTA SimuMatic Setup window, which allows you to generate several data sets all
at once (via the ALTA Monte Carlo utility) and automatically perform accelerated life testing data analysis on
each of the generated data sets. The simulated data could be used in a number of applications such as in the
analysis of probabilistic models, risk analysis and in designing reliability tests. See page 456 in Chapter 16.
Test Design opens the Test Design Assistant, which provides tools that help you design, evaluate and compare
reliability demonstration tests based on the number of failures (pass/fail tests) or the time of failure. See Chapter
18.
Target Reliability Estimator adds a target reliability estimator folio to the project. The folio generates plots to
help you select a reliability goal that will minimize cost, maximize profit and maximize the return on an
investment. See Chapter 19.
Life Comparison adds a life comparison folio to the project. The folio allows you to compare two data sets to
determine whether the lives of the units in the first data set will outlast the lives of the units in the second. See
Chapter 20.
Stress-Strength adds a stress-strength comparison folio to the project. The folio allows you to compare two data
sets to determine the probability of failure based on the probability of stress exceeding strength. See Chapter 20.
Equation Fit Solver adds a non-linear equation fit solver folio to the project. The folio allows you to estimate the
parameters of any user-defined non-linear equation. This gives you the flexibility to perform simple parameter
estimation on statistical models other than the life distributions and life-stress relationship models available in
Weibull++ and ALTA. See Chapter 21.
ALTA Test Plan adds an ALTA test plan folio to the project. The folio helps you design a test plan for
accelerated life data testing analysis. Based on information you provide, the test plan will include
recommendations for stress levels and the number of units to be tested at each stress level. See Chapter 22.
ALTA Stress Profile adds an ALTA stress profile folio to the project. Stress profiles describe how stress levels
will vary with time and can be used to describe the stress conditions during testing when you analyze the data
using the cumulative damage model in the ALTA standard folio. See page 225 in Chapter 5.
Reports and Plots
Analysis Workbook opens the Analysis Workbook Wizard, which allows you to create customized plots and
graphs to display the results of your analyses. This reporting tool is useful for creating spreadsheet-type reports
that include absolute references to specific analyses. See page 560 in Chapter 27.
Word Report Template opens a Word report template, which allows you to create customized plots and graphs
that use functionality that is similar to a Microsoft Word document. You may prefer to use this reporting tool if
you want to have a more polished, professional looking report that can easily be reused just by changing the
referenced data sources. See page 573 in Chapter 27.
Overlay Plot adds an overlay plot to the project allowing you to display in a single plot results from multiple data
sheets. This provides an easy visual method to compare analyses. For example, you may wish to show the
reliability plots of two product designs in the same plot or compare a simulation-based data set with actual data
obtained from fielded products. See page 356 in Chapter 12.
Side-By-Side Plot adds a side-by-side plot to the project allowing you to display different plots of a single data
set all in a single window for easy comparison. In Weibull++, you can select to plot the data set using multiple
distributions or plot types. In ALTA, you get a third option to plot the data set using multiple life-stress
relationship models. See page 358 in Chapter 12.
Attachment
Attachment adds linked or attached files to the project. See Section 2.15 on page 117.
2.14.7.9 View Tab
The View tab contains commands related to configuring the layout of the application's interface.
2 Working in Synthesis
102 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Refresh
Refresh refreshes the display in the Project window. If multiple users are accessing the same project
simultaneously, this command will refresh your screen with any changes made by other users. When you make a
change to the project, your window will be refreshed automatically.
Project Manager
Show Project Manager brings the Project Manager into focus (see Section 2.14.1 on page 70). If the Project
Manager is unpinned and hidden, choosing this command will display it.
Tile Project Manager tiles the project list and current project explorer so they are both displayed simultaneously
in the Project Manager panel.
Dock Project Manager opens a submenu that allows you to choose the desired position for the Project Manager:
Dock Left, Dock Right, Dock Top, Dock Bottom or Floating.
My Portal
Show My Portal opens the My Portal window, which provides information relevant to your work within the
database, such as messages from other users, recommended actions for a particular project item, status of other
users logged in to the database and other information. See Section 2.14.2 on page 76.
Tile My Portal tiles the Messages, Actions, Users, and Reliability Web Notes pages so they are all displayed
simultaneously within the My Portal panel.
Dock My Portal opens a submenu that allows you to choose the desired position for the Portal: Dock Left, Dock
Right, Dock Top, Dock Bottom or Floating.
Zoom
Normal Zoom sets the degree of magnification to 100%.
Zoom In increases the degree of magnification.
Zoom Out decreases the degree of magnification.
Custom Zoom allows you to specify the degree of magnification.
Window
Use Tabbed MDI maximizes the windows to fill the full space available in the MDI and shows a tab for each
open window. If you clear this command, the open windows will be displayed as separate windows that can be
resized and moved around within the MDI. See Section 2.14 on page 69.
The Window drop-down list displays a list of all windows currently open inside the MDI. You can make any of
the open windows active by clicking its name in this menu. When the Use Tabbed MDI command is cleared,
additional commands for displaying the windows will become available: Cascade, Tile Horizontally and Tile
Vertically.
2.14.7.10 ALTA Tab
The ALTA tab is visible when you view an ALTA standard folio data sheet for accelerated life testing analysis. See
Chapter 5.
Analysis
Calculate estimates the parameters of the chosen model, based on the current data set and the specified analysis
settings.
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 103
Plot creates a new sheet in the folio that provides a choice of applicable plot types. For standard folios, this
includes plots such as use level probability, reliability vs. time, life vs. stress, etc. See page 212 in Chapter 5.
Quick Calculation Pad opens the Quick Calculation Pad, which allows you to calculate results, such as the mean
life and the probability of failure, based on the currently active data sheet. See page 216 in Chapter 5.
Distribution Wizard opens the Distribution Wizard, which helps you select the life distribution that will best fit
your data. See page 232 in Chapter 5.
3D Plot creates a 3D graph of the surface plot of the likelihood function. It plots the likelihood values (LK values)
with respect to the estimated parameters of a distribution. The shape of the plot may help you to evaluate the
amount of variability in the parameter estimates. A small surface (tall, tower-like peak) suggests that there is less
uncertainty in the parameter estimates at the maximum LK value, while a large surface suggests that there is a
large uncertainty in the parameter estimates. See page 364 in Chapter 12.
In addition, the graph provides a choice of several functions that you can plot with respect to time and stress. This
includes the pdf, failure rate, reliability and unreliability functions. The shape of the plot may help you to evaluate
how the function is influenced by time and stress.
Folio Sheets
Insert Data Sheet inserts a new blank data sheet into the currently active folio and opens the ALTA Folio Data
Sheet Setup window, which allows you to select what types of data to include in the new data sheet. See page 204
in Chapter 5.
Insert Additional Plot inserts an overlay plot in the currently active folio. This allows you to display in a single
plot results from multiple data sheets within the folio. This provides an easy visual method to compare analyses.
For example, you may wish to show the reliability plots of two product designs in the same plot.
Insert General Spreadsheet inserts a new blank general spreadsheet into the currently active folio.
Select Sheet opens the Select Sheet window, which allows you to select which sheet in the current folio you want
to be active.
Move or Copy Sheet opens the Move/Copy window, which allows you to move or copy any of the sheets within
the currently active folio. Select the sheet that you wish to move and then click (move to end) to move the
selected sheet to the end of all the sheets in the folio. Select Create a Copy to create a copy of the selected sheet.
Delete Sheet deletes the current sheet within the folio.
Options
Set Use Stress opens the Use Stress Level window, which allows you to define the use stress values for the
selected stress type(s) in the current folio. See page 216 in Chapter 5.
Select Stress Columns opens the Select Stress Columns window, which allows you to select which stress type(s)
in the current folio to consider when calculating the parameters of the model (i.e, the life-stress relationship and
distribution combination). See page 215 in Chapter 5.
Alter Parameters
Alter Parameters (w/o) Recalculation allows you to alter the values of the calculated parameters, assuming
that the ranks, the likelihood function and the Fisher Matrix (evaluated at the original parameter estimates)
remain the same. In plots, the position of the data points remain the same but the solution line and all
subsequent analysis made via the QCP and other tools are based on the modified parameter values. Therefore,
the analysis may be appropriate only within the context of your specific scenario.
Alter One Parameter (and Recalculate) allows you to manually alter one of the parameter values and then
have the software estimate the other parameter values that would result in a good fit for the distribution. The
ranks and the likelihood function are assumed to remain the same; however, unlike the Alter Parameters (w/o)
2 Working in Synthesis
104 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Recalculation method, the Fisher Matrix is evaluated at the altered parameter values. Therefore, the analysis
may be appropriate only within the context of your specific scenario.
Stress Transformation opens the Stress Transformation window, which allows you to specify one
transformation equation for each stress that will be used in the analysis. See page 215 in Chapter 5.
Likelihood Ratio Test opens the Likelihood Ratio Test window, which allows you evaluate the discrepancy
between the estimates of the shape parameter at the various accelerated stress levels. The test helps you to
determine whether the units in the sample will fail in the same manner across different stress levels. See page 234
in Chapter 5.
Convert Stress Values allows you to convert all the values entered in one of the stress columns to another value
or to another stress unit (e.g., Celsius to Kelvin).
Format and View
Alter Data Type opens the ALTA Folio Data Sheet Setup window, which allows you to change the data entry
columns in the current data sheet. Note that when you change the setup, you may lose information already entered
in the data sheet. For example, switching the data sheet from one that supports interval data to one that supports
only right censored data will remove all the inspection times. See page 204 in Chapter 5.
Override Plot Color opens the Override Plot Color window, which allows you to ignore the default colors of the
plotted line and points, and apply a color that you specify. This setting is activated in the source data sheet of the
plot. This means that when you enable the setting for a particular data sheet, it applies only to the plots that you
create for that data sheet and not the plots for all other data sheets that may be within the same folio. Note that
only the colors of the lines and points are affected. Other settings such as the line style and thickness, or the point
size and shape are based on the settings that you have specified in the Plot Items page of the Plot Setup window.
See page 380 in Chapter 13.
Add/Remove Columns allows you to add or remove stress columns or subset ID columns in the currently active
data sheet.
Auto Group Data opens the Auto Group Data window, which allows you to group together data points with the
same failure/suspension times. Grouping data significantly speeds up calculations when you have a very large
data set. See page 184 in Chapter 4.
Hide Control Panel allows you to hide the control panel in the current window.
Synthesis
Publish Model allows you to use the results of analysis (life-stress relationship and parameters) as a resource
object and make it available for unlimited use anywhere within the project, in any Synthesis-enabled application
that has a need for that type of object. For more information on resource objects, see Chapter 3.
2.14.7.11 Degradation Tab
The Degradation tab is visible when you view either a Weibull++ or ALTA degradation folio data sheet for
degradation analysis. See Chapter 6 and Chapter 7.
Analysis
Calculate extrapolates the times at which the degradation will reach the critical degradation leveli.e., the times
at which the degradation is serious enough that the unit is considered to be failed.
In a Weibull++ degradation folio, the software performs life data analysis on the extrapolated times.
In an ALTA degradation folio, the software performs accelerated life testing analysis on the extrapolated times
at the accelerated stress level to extrapolate failure times to normal use conditions.
Plot creates a new sheet in the folio that provides a choice of applicable plot types. This includes the degradation
vs. time plot, which displays the degradation of each unit over time.
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 105
In a Weibull++ degradation folio, the plot sheet includes the life data analysis plots.
In an ALTA degradation folio, the plot sheet includes accelerated life data analysis plots that are based on the
failure times at normal use conditions.
Quick Calculation Pad opens the Quick Calculation Pad, which allows you to calculate results identical to the
calculations you can perform in a Weibull++ standard folio QCP or an ALTA standard folio QCP.
Model Wizard opens the Degradation Model Wizard, which helps you select the degradation model that best fits
your data.
Distribution Wizard opens the Distribution Wizard, which helps you select the distribution that best fits the data
set based on the chosen parameter estimation method (i.e., RRX or RRY). In the degradation folio, the ranking in
the Distribution Wizard is based on the life data model.
Transfer Life Data
Transfer Life Data to New Folio allows you to transfer the extrapolated failure and suspension times to a new
standard folio.
Transfer Life Data to Selected Folio allows you to transfer the extrapolated failure and suspension times to an
existing standard folio.
Synthesis
Publish Model allows you to use the results of the degradation analysis as a resource object and make it available
for unlimited use anywhere within the project, in any Synthesis-enabled application that has a need for that type
of object. For more information on resource objects, see Chapter 3.
Format and View
Override Plot Color opens the Override Plot Color window, which allows you to ignore the default colors of the
plotted line and points, and apply a color that you specify. This setting is activated in the source data sheet of the
plot. This means that when you enable the setting for a particular data sheet, it applies only to the plots that you
create for that data sheet and not the plots for all other data sheets that may be within the same folio. Note that
only the colors of the lines and points are affected. Other settings such as the line style and thickness, or the point
size and shape are based on the settings that you have specified in the Plot Items page of the Plot Setup window.
See page 380 in Chapter 13.
2.14.7.12 Diagram Tab
The Diagram tab is visible when you view a reliability block diagram (RBD). See Chapter 17.
Analysis
Analyze analyzes the relationships of the components in the diagram and puts the reliability-wise configuration
into a mathematical formula.
Plot creates a plot based on the analysis results. Clicking the Plot icon before the diagram has been analyzed will
automatically perform the analysis and then plot the data.
QCP opens the Quick Calculation Pad (QCP), which allows you to obtain reliability results based on the
algebraic solution for the diagram. Clicking the QCP icon before the diagram has been analyzed will
automatically perform the analysis and then open the QCP.
Diagram Tools
Add Block adds a new block representing a data sheet in a Weibull++ or ALTA standard folio to the current
diagram.
2 Working in Synthesis
106 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Connect Blocks allows you to create connectors between blocks in the current diagram. When this command is
selected, click the source block, hold down the left mouse button and drag a line from the source block to the
destination block. When the crosshairs are located above the destination block, release the mouse button to create
a connector. To stop adding connectors and return to the normal mode, right-click the diagram or clear the
Connect Blocks option (i.e., by choosing the command again).
Add Node adds a new node (k-out-of-n switch) to the current diagram. See page 471 in Chapter 17.
Add Junction adds a non-failing block to the diagram. Because diagrams must flow from a single starting point
to a single ending point, you may need to use junction blocks as starting and/or ending blocks (see page 482 in
Chapter 17). They can also be used anywhere within the diagram that you need a block that does not fail (i.e.,
does not affect the system reliability). This type of block does not have properties.
Add Annotation adds a new annotation to the current diagram. You can edit the text that appears in the
annotation by double-clicking it to open the Edit Annotation window.
Format and Style
Export Graphic saves the diagram as a graphic in one of the following formats: *.wmf, *.png, *.gif or *.jpg. You
will be able to use the exported graphic in any application, provided that the application supports the file format.
Auto Arrange automatically arranges the blocks in the diagram so that all blocks are evenly spaced and centered.
Make Same Size allows you to specify how you want the blocks to the resized.
Height resizes the selected blocks to be the same height as the first selected block.
Width resizes the selected blocks to be the same width as the first selected block.
Both resizes the selected blocks to be the same width and height as the first selected block.
Make Spacing Equal allows you to specify how you want the blocks to be equally spaced.
Horizontal equally spaces the selected blocks according to the horizontal spacing of the first two selected
blocks.
Vertical equally spaces the selected blocks according to the vertical spacing of the first two selected blocks.
Both equally spaces the selected blocks according to the horizontal and vertical spacing of the first two
selected blocks.
Align Blocks allows you to specify how you want the selected blocks to be aligned.
Align Tops aligns the selected blocks to the top of the first selected block.
Align Middles aligns the selected blocks to the vertical center of the first selected block.
Align Bottoms aligns the selected blocks to the bottom of the first selected block.
Align Lefts aligns the selected blocks to the left of the first selected block.
Align Centers aligns the selected blocks to the horizontal center of the first selected block.
Align Rights aligns the selected blocks to the right of the first selected block.
Align to Grid aligns the selected blocks to the grid.
Edit Diagram allows you to open the Diagram Style window, which allows you to customize the appearance of
the current diagram and set the default properties for connectors and new blocks that are added to the diagram.
See page 483 in Chapter 17.
Edit Block
Block Properties opens the data sheet that is associated with the block.
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 107
Block Style opens the Block Style window, which allows you to customize the appearance of the selected
block. See page 487 in Chapter 17.
Bring Block to Front moves the currently select blocks in front of other objects on the diagram.
Send Block to Back moves the currently select blocks behind other objects on the diagram.
Edit Connector
Connector Style opens the Connector Style window where you can customize the appearance of the selected
connectors. See page 488 in Chapter 17.
Line Bend allows you to create a bend in the line.
Bring to Front moves the currently select line in front of other objects on the diagram.
Send to Back moves the currently select line behind other objects on the diagram.
2.14.7.13 Equation Fit Solver Tab
The Equation Fit Solver tab is visible when you view the Non-Linear Equation Fit Solver. See Chapter 21.
Analysis
Calculate estimates the parameters of the user-defined equation and calculates other results you could use to
evaluate how well the function fits the data.
Plot creates a plot demonstrating the function fit for each known data point that you have defined. The scaling,
setup, exporting and other features of the plot are similar to the options available for other Weibull++ plot sheets.
Features that are not applicable to this plot will be hidden or disabled.
Initialize Parameters automatically copies all the unknown variables in your equation (except the random
variable x) to the Function Parameters area. This also resets the minimum, maximum and initial guess values to
their default values.
Solver Templates
Select from Templates allows you to use a saved template for use in the analysis.
Add to Templates allows you to use user-defined equations as templates for future use.
2.14.7.14 Event Log Tab
The Event Log tab is visible when you view an event log data folio data sheet. See Chapter 10.
Analysis
Calculate converts the log entries into failure/repair times and then fits distributions to the converted data. In
addition, it calculates the total uptime and downtime of the components.
Actions and Settings
Set Shift Pattern opens the Shift Pattern window, which allows you specify the days and times when the system
is operating. See page 324 in Chapter 10.
Sort Entries allows you to sort the entries in the data sheet by Level ID or by Date/Time. Sorting the data does
not affect the analysis.
Transfer Life Data
Transfer Life Data to New Folio allows you to transfer the time-to-failure and time-to-repair data to a new
Weibull++ standard folio in order to perform life data analysis.
2 Working in Synthesis
108 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Transfer Life Data to Selected Folio opens the Transfer Life Data window, which allows you transfer the time-
to-failure and time-to-repair data to an existing Weibull++ standard folio in order to perform life data analysis.
See page 326 in Chapter 10.
2.14.7.15 Life Comparison Tab
The Life Comparison tab is visible when you view the Life Comparison tool. See Chapter 20.
Analysis
Calculate estimates the probability that the times-to-failure of the first population will be better or worse than the
times-to-failure of the second population.
Select Data Sheets opens the Select Data Sheets window, which allows you to select the data sheets to compare.
Parameter Estimator opens the Target Reliability Parameter Estimator window, which allows you to explore
how you could attempt to change one of the distribution parameters in order to meet a specified target reliability.
The plot and reliability estimate will be based on the altered distributions and therefore may be appropriate only
within the context of your specific scenario. See page 525 in Chapter 20.
2.14.7.16 Life Data Tab
The Life Data tab is visible when you view a Weibull++ standard folio data sheet for life data analysis. See Chapter 4.
Analysis
Calculate estimates the parameters of the chosen distribution, based on the current data set and the specified
analysis settings.
Plot creates a new sheet in the folio that provides a choice of applicable plot types. For standard folios, this
includes plots such as reliability vs. time, failure rate vs. time, probability plot, etc. See page 169 in Chapter 4.
Quick Calculation Pad opens the Quick Calculation Pad, which allows you to calculate results, such as the mean
life and the probability of failure, based on the analyzed data sheet. See page 172 in Chapter 4.
Distribution Wizard opens the Distribution Wizard, which helps you select the distribution that best fits your
data based on the selected parameter estimation method (i.e., RRX, RRY or MLE). See page 178 in Chapter 4.
3D Plot creates a 3D graph of the surface plot of the likelihood function. It plots the likelihood values (LK values)
with respect to the estimated parameters of a distribution. The shape of the plot may help you to evaluate the
amount of variability in the parameter estimates. A small surface (tall, tower-like peak) suggests that there is less
uncertainty in the parameter estimates at the maximum LK value, while a large surface suggests that there is a
large uncertainty in the parameter estimates. You can create a 3D plot of the likelihood function for any of the
available distributions in Weibull++ except for 1-parameter Weibull, mixed Weibull, Bayesian-Weibull or
Weibull using competing failure modes distribution. See page 364 in Chapter 12.
Options
Batch Auto Run opens the Batch Auto Run window, which allows you to quickly extract data from an existing
data set based on the subset ID. See page 178 in Chapter 4.
Specify Points opens the Specify Points window, which allows you to adjust the way that the line is fitted to the
points for a rank regression analysis. The ranks will be calculated based on all of the data points but the regression
line will be fitted only to the points you have specified. See page 198 in Chapter 4.
Alter Parameters
Alter Parameters (w/o) Recalculation allows you to alter the values of the calculated parameters, assuming
that the ranks, the likelihood function and the Fisher Matrix (evaluated at the original parameter estimates)
remain the same. In plots, the position of the data points remain the same but the solution line and all
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 109
subsequent analysis made via the QCP and other tools are based on the modified parameter values. Therefore,
the analysis may be appropriate only within the context of your specific scenario.
Alter One Parameter (and Recalculate) allows you to manually alter one of the parameter values and then
have the software estimate the other parameter values that would result in a good fit for the distribution. The
ranks and the likelihood function are assumed to remain the same; however, unlike the Alter Parameters (w/o)
Recalculation method, the Fisher Matrix is evaluated at the altered parameter values. Therefore, the analysis
may be appropriate only within the context of your specific scenario.
Fill Median Ranks allows you to experiment with median ranks and see how they affect the solution of the
analysis. This option is available only if the data type is free-form (see page 160 in Chapter 4). Enter the time-to-
failure values in the X-Axis value column, then choose this command. The Y-Axis value column will be
filled with the corresponding median ranks.
Auto Group Data opens the Auto Group Data window, which allows you to group together data points with the
same failure/suspension times. Grouping data significantly speeds up calculations when you have a very large
data set. See page 184 in Chapter 4.
Goodness of Fit Results opens the Goodness of Fit Results utility, which uses different tests to determine how
well the parameters of the distribution fit the data. See page 184 in Chapter 4.
Folio Sheets
Insert Data Sheet inserts a new blank data sheet into the currently active folio and opens the Weibull++ Folio
Data Sheet Setup window, which allows you to select what types of data to include in the new data sheet. See page
156 in Chapter 4.
Insert Additional Plot inserts an overlay plot in the currently active folio. This allows you to display in a single
plot results from multiple data sheets within the folio. This provides an easy visual method to compare analyses.
For example, you may wish to show the reliability plots of two product designs in the same plot.
Insert General Spreadsheet inserts a new blank general spreadsheet into the currently active folio.
Select Sheet opens the Select Sheet window, which allows you to select which sheet in the current folio you want
to be active.
Move or Copy Sheet opens the Move/Copy window, which allows you to move or copy any of the sheets within
the currently active folio. Select the sheet that you wish to move and then click (move to end) to move the
selected sheet to the end of all the sheets in the folio. Select Create a Copy to create a copy of the selected sheet.
Delete Sheet deletes the current sheet within the folio.
Format and View
Alter Data Type opens the Weibull++ Folio Data Sheet Setup window, which allows you to change the data
entry columns in the current data sheet. Note that when you change the setup, you may lose information already
entered in the data sheet. For example, switching the data sheet from one that supports interval data to one that
supports only right censored data will remove all the inspection times. See page 156 in Chapter 4.
Override Plot Color opens the Override Plot Color window, which allows you to ignore the default colors of the
plotted line and points, and apply a color that you specify. This setting is activated in the source data sheet of the
plot. This means that when you enable the setting for a particular data sheet, it applies only to the plots that you
create for that data sheet and not the plots for all other data sheets that may be within the same folio. Note that
only the colors of the lines and points are affected. Other settings such as the line style and thickness, or the point
size and shape are based on the settings that you have specified in the Plot Items page of the Plot Setup window.
See page 380 in Chapter 13.
Add/Remove Columns allows you to add or remove subset ID columns in the currently active data sheet.
Color Data Values allows you to apply different font colors to the entries in the data sheet for easy visualization.
The following commands are available:
2 Working in Synthesis
110 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Default Color applies a black font color to all the entries in the data sheet
Based on Data Type applies different font colors based on the type of censoring. The colors are: red for
failure data (no censoring), green for suspension data, magenta for left-censored data and blue for interval
data.
Based on Subset ID 1 applies different font colors based on unique subset IDs in the Subset ID 1 column. If a
data point has no entry in the Subset ID 1 column, then the font color is black.
Based on Subset ID 2 applies different font colors based on unique subset IDs in the Subset ID 2 column. If a
data point has no entry in the Subset ID 2 column, then the font color is black.
Based on Subset ID Combination applies font colors based on unique combinations of subset IDs in the
Subset ID 1 and Subset ID 2 columns. If a data point has no subset IDs, the font color is black, but if a data
point has at least one subset ID, then it is treated as having a unique combination of subset IDs.
Note that whenever you edit or add new data to the data sheet, you must choose one of the Color Data Values
commands again in order to apply the correct font colors.
Hide Control Panel allows you to hide the control panel in the current window.
Synthesis
Publish Model allows you to use the results of the life data analysis (life distribution and parameters) as a
resource object and make it available for unlimited use anywhere within the project, in any Synthesis-enabled
application that has a need for that type of object. For more information on resource objects, see Chapter 3.
2.14.7.17 Non-Parametric LDA Tab
The Non-Parametric LDA tab is visible when you view a non-parametric life data analysis (LDA) folio data sheet.
See Chapter 8.
Analysis
Calculate obtains the reliability estimates based on the chosen non-parametric method. It then converts the results
to free-form data and performs a parametric analysis based on the chosen life distribution
Plot creates a Reliability vs. Time plot of the non-parametric analysis. The scaling, setup, exporting and other
features are similar to the options available for other Weibull++ plot sheets. Features that are not applicable to this
plot will be hidden or disabled.
Quick Calculation Pad opens the Quick Calculation Pad, which allows you to calculate results such as mean life
and probability of failure based on the results of the standard life data analysis. It uses the same calculations that
you can perform in a Weibull++ standard folio QCP. See page 172 in Chapter 4.
Distribution Wizard opens the Distribution Wizard, which helps you select the distribution that best fits the data
set based on the chosen parameter estimation method (i.e., RRX or RRY). In the non-parametric LDA folio, the
ranking in the Distribution Wizard is based on the life data model. See page 178 in Chapter 4.
Transfer Life Data
Transfer Life Data to New Folio allows you to transfer the values from the Life Data Model area of the control
panel to a fee-form data sheet in a new Weibull++ standard folio. The selected failure time values (start time, end
time or average time) will be copied to the X-Axis value column, and the reliability values will be converted to
their inverse values (i.e., unreliability) and then transferred to the Y-Axis value column.
Transfer Life Data to Selected Folio allows you to transfer the values from the Life Data Model area of the
control panel to a free-form data sheet in an existing Weibull++ standard folio.
Synthesis
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 111
Publish Model allows you to use the life data model (i.e., life distribution and parameter estimates) as a resource
object and make it available for unlimited use anywhere within the project, in any Synthesis-enabled application
that has a need for that type of object. For more information on resource objects, see Chapter 3.
2.14.7.18 Plot Tab
The Plot tab is visible when you view a plot sheet or the Target Reliability tool (see Chapter 19).
Plot
Redraw Plot updates the plot to reflect the changes that have been made.
Quick Calculation Pad opens the Quick Calculation Pad (QCP), which allows you to obtain reliability results
based on the currently active folio.
Plot Actions
Plot Setup opens the Plot Setup window, which allows you to customize most aspects of the plot including the
titles, line styles and point styles. See Chapter 13.
RS Draw launches ReliaSoft Draw, which is a graphics editor that allows you to annotate your plot and view your
plot in greater detail. With RS Draw, you can insert text, draw an object, mark the coordinates of a particular point
or paste another picture into your plot. You can also re-arrange the objects in your plot by selecting and moving
them to the positions you desire. In addition, you can save the annotated plot in any of the following formats:
draw canvas (*.rdc), Windows metafile (*.wmf), portable network graphics (*.png), GIF or JPG. See ReliaSoft
Draw Help for information on the features available in ReliaSoft Draw. See Chapter 14.
Export Plot Graphic saves the plot as a graphic in one of the following formats: *.wmf, *.png, *.gif or *.jpg.
You will be able to use the exported graphic in any application, provided that the application supports the file
format.
Show/Hide Plot Items opens the Show/Hide Plot Items window, which allows you to select the data you want to
display in the plot.
Confidence Bounds
Confidence Bounds opens the Confidence Bounds Setup window, which allows you to define the properties of
the confidence bounds lines to be displayed on the plot. See page 352 in Chapter 12.
Hide Confidence Bounds removes the line(s) depicting the confidence bounds from the current plot.
2.14.7.19 Recurrent Event Data Tab
The Recurrent Event Data tab is visible when you view either a parametric or a non-parametric recurrent event data
analysis (RDA) folio data sheet. See Chapter 11.
Analysis
Calculate estimates the cumulative number of failures (in non-parametric RDA folios) or the parameters of the
GRP model (in parametric RDA folios) based on the current data set.
Plot creates a new plot sheet in the folio. In non-parametric RDA folios, there is only one type of plot: the mean
cumulative function (MCF). In parametric RDA folios, it provides a choice of applicable plot types such the
cumulative failures vs. time, failure intensity vs. time, etc. See page 343 in Chapter 11.
Quick Calculation Pad opens the Parametric RDA Quick Calculation Pad, which allows you to calculate results
based on the analyzed data sheet, such as the number of failures and mean time between failures (MTBF). This
command does not apply to non-parametric RDA folios. See page 340 in Chapter 11.
2 Working in Synthesis
112 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
2.14.7.20 Sheet Options Tab
The Sheet Options tab is visible when you view folios, general spreadsheets or analysis workbooks (see page 560 in
Chapter 27).
Format and View
Select Font opens the Font window, which allows you to set the font, style and size of the selected text.
Font Color opens the Colors window, which allows you to set the color of the selected text.
Fill Color opens the Colors window, which allows you to set the color used to fill the selected cell(s).
Fill Pattern opens the Cells Patterns window, which allows you to set the fill color, pattern color and fill pattern
properties of the selected cell(s).
Alignment allows you to select the alignment properties of the selected text.
Borders allows you to customize the borders of selected cells.
Column Width opens the Column Width window, which allows you to specify the width of the selected column.
Enter the desired width in the input box. You can select the units of measurement (characters, inches or
centimeters) from the Units drop-down list. To use the default column width, click Use Default. You can change
the default column width by clicking Change Default. This will open the Default Column Width window, which
allows you to set a default column width.
Custom Number opens the Format Cells-Number window, which allows you to set the format for how numbers
in the selected cell(s) will displayed.
Merge Cells combines selected cells to form one cell.
Unmerge Cells separates merged cells into the original individual cells.
More Settings
Goto opens the Goto window, which allows you to automatically move the cursor to a particular cell location.
Uppercase or lowercase may be used.
Freeze Panes allows you to lock a specific row on the spreadsheet so that the contents of the selected row will
always be visible on screen no matter how far you scroll to the right or down. Changes cannot be made to a
frozen row. This feature only applies to general spreadsheets and analysis workbooks.
You can also freeze several consecutive rows at once by highlighting a cell on each row to be locked and then
clicking Freeze Panes.
Sheet Options opens the Sheet Options window, which allows you to specify what elements you want to be
displayed on the spreadsheet, such as gridlines and row/column headings, and what editing actions can be
performed on the spreadsheet, such as the ability to resize rows/columns and select individual cells. See page
571 in Chapter 27.
Calculation Options opens the Calculation Options window, which allows you to change formula
recalculation, iteration or precision. See page 568 in Chapter 27.
Recalculate Formulas forces a recalculation of all formulas in the spreadsheet.
Cell Protection opens the Format Cells window, which allows you to select whether the selected cell(s) will
be locked or hidden when you select the Enable Protection command. Cells that are locked cannot be edited
when the sheet protection command is enabled. See page 572 in Chapter 27.
The Cell Protection setting is especially useful when your spreadsheet or report contains a mix of data and
formula cells where a user may inadvertently overwrite a cell containing a formula.
Enable Protection see Cell Protection.
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 113
Define Name opens the Define Name window, which allows you to specify a name for a particular cell, data
sheet or function. Names can help make formulas in the spreadsheet easier to understand and maintain. See
page 566 in Chapter 27.
Sheet Actions
Function Wizard opens the Function Wizard, which helps you build functions in spreadsheets. The functions can
return results from mathematical values (e.g., sine, pi or averages) or reliability values based on data sheets in the
project. See page 584 in Chapter 27.
Chart Wizard allows you to create new plots and charts based on the current spreadsheet. To use, select a range
of spreadsheet cells for which you would like to create a chart for, then click Chart Wizard and select the area
you want to place the chart on. See page 399 in Chapter 15.
AutoSum allows you to compute the sum of the values in a range of selected cells. If a cell range is not selected,
the command computes the sum of the values in the cells directly above the current cursor location.
Sort allows you to reorder the selected data either in ascending or descending order. Note that you may need to be
careful when sorting certain types of data. Note the following:
If your analysis takes into account the order of occurrence of a data point (1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc.), then sorting may
result to an inaccurate analysis. In Weibull++, analyses that are based on the order of occurrence of failure are:
recurrent event data analysis, degradation analysis and non-parametric LDA analysis.
If the range of cells that you wish to sort contain blank cells, the blank cells may be put in the first position
(ascending order) or the last position (descending order).
If the values in two or more columns are related, sorting only one column may result to errors. In that
situation, use the Custom Sort command.
Rows/Columns
Delete deletes the selected cells. Note that when the cells are deleted, the information inside the cells is also
deleted.
Shift Cells Left shifts the cells to the left to accommodate the deleted cells.
Shift Cells Up shifts the cells up to accommodate the deleted cells.
Entire Row deletes the row(s) containing the selected cell(s). All subsequent rows are shifted up to
accommodate the deleted cells.
Entire Column deletes the column(s) containing the selected cell(s). All subsequent columns are shifted left
to accommodate the deleted cells.
Insert allows you to insert cells into the currently active sheet at the current cursor location. If a range of cells is
selected in the sheet, then the same number of cells will be inserted.
Shift Cells Right shifts the cells to the right to accommodate the inserted cells.
Shift Cells Down shifts the cells down to accommodate the inserted cells.
Entire Row inserts a row of empty cells for each row containing a selected cell. All subsequent rows are
shifted down to accommodate the inserted cells.
Entire Column inserts a column of empty cells for each column containing a selected cell. All subsequent
columns are shifted right to accommodate the inserted cells.
Transfer Data
Send to Excel exports all sheets to an Excel file. The Save As window will appear. Provide a name for the export
file, then click Save.
2 Working in Synthesis
114 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Send to Word exports the current sheet to a Word file. A Word document opens with the data from the current
sheet displayed as a Word table.
2.14.7.21 SimuMatic (A) Tab
The SimuMatic(A) tab is visible when you view an ALTA SimuMatic results folio. See page 456 in Chapter 16.
Simumatic
ALTA SimuMatic opens the ALTA SimuMatic Setup window, which allows you to change your simulation
settings and replace your current simulated data sets with new ones.
Plot creates a new sheet in the folio that generates a probability plot of all the data sets. See page 461 in Chapter
16.
2.14.7.22 SimuMatic (B) Tab
The SimuMatic(W) tab is visible when you view a Weibull++ SimuMatic results folio. See page 456 in Chapter 16.
Simumatic
Weibull++ SimuMatic opens the Weibull++ SimuMatic Setup window, which allows you to change your
simulation settings and replace your current simulated data sets with new ones.
Plot creates a new sheet in the folio that generates a probability plot of all the data sets. See page 461 in Chapter
16.
Transfer Life Data to Selected Folio allows you to transfer the calculated parameter values for each simulated
data set to an existing Weibull++ standard folio, with one data sheet for each parameter of the model that was
used to generate the data. See page 462 in Chapter 16.
Transfer Life Data to New Folio creates a new Weibull++ standard folio and then transfers the calculated
parameter values for each simulated data set to that folio, with one data sheet for each parameter of the model that
was used to generate the data. See page 462 in Chapter 16.
2.14.7.23 Stress Profile Tab
The Stress Profile tab is visible when you view an ALTA stress profile data sheet. See page 225 in Chapter 5.
Analysis
Validate Stress Profile validates and then saves any changes you made to the stress profile.
Plot Stress Profile creates a new sheet in the folio that shows a stress vs. time plot. The plot provides a graphical
representation of how the stress values vary with time.
2.14.7.24 Stress-Strength Tab
The Stress-Strength tab is visible when you view the Stress-Strength tool. See Chapter 20.
Analysis
Calculate estimates the probability of stress exceeding the strength of a given product.
Select Data Sheets opens the Select Data Sheets window, which allows you to select the data sheets to compare.
Parameter Estimator opens the Target Reliability Parameter Estimator window, which allows you to explore
how you could attempt to change one of the distribution parameters in order to meet a specified target reliability.
The plot and reliability estimate will be based on the altered distributions and therefore may be appropriate only
within the context of your specific scenario.See page 525 in Chapter 20.
2.14 Multiple Document Interface (MDI)
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 115
2.14.7.25 Test Design Tab
The Test Design tab is visible when you view any of the Test Design tools. Depending on which utility you view, the
following commands may be available. See Chapter 18.
Reliability Demonstration Test
Calculate implements the selected test design method based on the inputs you provided.
Select Data Sheets allows you to update the shape parameter and demonstrated time in the RDT sheet based on
data from an existing Weibull++ standard folio in the current project.
Show RDT Table is available only for the Parametric Binomial test design method. This command creates a
parametric binomial table and plot based on the target metric and life distribution that you specified on the RDT
sheet. See page 498 in Chapter 18.
Show Bayesian Systems is available when you choose the Non-Parametric Bayesian test design method and the
source of prior information is from Prior tests at the subsystem level. This command opens the Edit Bayesian
Subsystems window, which allows you to edit the number of units and number of failures for each subsystem for
which you have prior information. See page 496 in Chapter 18.
RDT Table
Calculate generates the RDT table based on the sample size and number of failures that you specify on the
control panel.
Plot creates a plot in the folio that depicts how the allowed number of failures influences the test time and the
required sample size.
Expected Failure Time
Select Data Sheets allows you to update the expected failure model (i.e., parameters and time) based on data
from an existing Weibull++ standard folio in the current project.
Detection Matrix
Calculate validates your inputs and generates the matrix.
Send to Excel exports the matrix to a new Excel spreadsheet.
Change Matrix Color allows you to choose a new base color for the matrix. The selected color will be used
to indicate the shortest test time and darker values of the color will be used to indicate longer test times.
2.14.7.26 Test Plans Tab
The Test Plans tab is visible when you view the ALTA Test Plans tool. See Chapter 22.
Analysis
Calculate generates a test plan recommendations for what stress levels should be used in the test and how many
units should be tested at each stress level.
2.14.7.27 Warranty Tab
The Warranty tab is visible when you view a warranty folio data sheet for warranty analysis. See Chapter 9.
Analysis
Calculate converts the warranty claims data to failure/suspension times and then estimates the parameters of the
chosen life distribution based on the converted data. If you select the Use Subsets option on the Main page of the
control panel, the parameters of the distribution of each subset ID will be separately calculated.
2 Working in Synthesis
116 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Plot creates a new sheet in the folio that provides a choice of applicable plot types. In warranty analysis folios,
this includes plots such as expected failures vs. period, reliability vs. time, probability plot, etc. You can plot the
data in the warranty analysis folio either with or without generating a forecast. See page 312 in Chapter 9.
Quick Calculation Pad opens the Quick Calculation Pad, which allows you to calculate life data analysis
metrics. It uses the same calculations that you can perform in a Weibull++ standard folio QCP. See page 172 in
Chapter 4.
Distribution Wizard opens the Distribution Wizard, which helps you select the distribution that best fits your
data based on the selected parameter estimation method (i.e., RRX, RRY or MLE). In warranty analysis folios, the
ranking in the Distribution Wizard is based on the converted failure/suspension times. See page 178 in Chapter 4.
Tools
Generate Forecast opens the Forecast Setup window, which allows you to specify the time periods at which you
wish to estimate the number of expected warranty returns. Clicking Generate Forecast before the parameters have
been calculated will automatically calculate the parameters and open the Forecast Setup window. See page 311 in
Chapter 9.
Restore Guide Colors restores the colors of the cells in the data sheet to the default guide colors. This command
applies only if you have altered the cell colors of the Returns sheet in a Nevada chart format warranty folio. (The
colors can be altered by select the desired cells or row/column header and then choosing Home > Edit > Format
Selection > Fill Color). Guide colors are used in the Statistical Process Control feature of the Nevada chart
format (see page 282 in Chapter 9). The default guide colors are:
Green for the number of product returns that are within the expected range.
Yellow for the number of product returns that are between the caution and critical levels.
Red for the number of product returns that are above the critical range.
Data Sheet Setup opens the Warranty Setup window, which allows you to change the time periods of the
warranty claims data in the current data sheet. This command is available only when working with the Nevada
chart format. See page 273 in Chapter 9.
Convert Data converts the format of the currently active warranty analysis folio to a new format. Converting
formats creates a new folio and does not overwrite the contents of the existing folio. It is an automatic process,
except when converting from the Dates of Failure format to Nevada chart format. In that case, you will be
prompted to define the time unit of each period (e.g., dates, month or years) in order to proceed with the
conversion. The following table shows the data conversion options.
Transfer Life Data
Transfer Life Data to New Folio allows you to transfer the failure/suspension times to a new Weibull++
standard folio in order to perform life data analysis.
From Convert To
Nevada Chart Format Times-to-Failure Format
Dates of Failure Format
Usage Format Times-to-Failure Format
Dates of Failure Format Times-to-Failure Format
Nevada Chart Format
Times-to-Failure Format N/A
2.15 Attachments
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 117
Transfer Life Data to Selected Folio allows you to transfer the failure/suspension times to an existing
Weibull++ standard folio in order to perform life data analysis.
2.14.7.28 Workbook Tab
The Workbook tab is visible when you are working with an analysis workbook. See page 560 in Chapter 27.
Worksheet
Insert Sheet adds a new sheet to the workbook.
Delete Sheet deletes the current sheet. There is no undo for delete.
Select Sheet opens the Select Sheet window where you can select which sheet to work with.
Move/Copy Sheet opens the Move or Copy Sheet window, which allows you to move or copy any of the sheets
within the current workbook. Select the sheet that you want to move the current sheet in front of or select (move
to end) to move the current sheet to the end of all the sheets in the workbook. Select Create a copy to create a
copy of the current sheet.
Save Workbook as Template allows you to save the current report as a template so that you can reuse its
settings.
2.15 Attachments
All Synthesis-enabled applications allow you to attach URLs and/or files that were created in other applications. This
helps you to keep supporting documentation all together in the same place with your analysis. You can attach URLs
and/or files to:
The project
Most types of resources, including:
URDs
Models
Tasks
Crews
Spare part pools
Switches
There are two types of attachments: linked and embedded.
Linked attachments may be URLs or files. For these attachments, the software stores the path to the URL or file.
This allows you to open the attachment directly from the current project explorer, block or resource, provided that
the necessary software is installed on your computer and the link is valid. The files themselves are not stored
inside the project.
Embedded attachments are always files (i.e., you cannot embed a URL). For these attachments, the software
stores a complete copy of the attached file inside the database. Please note that embedded attachments will
increase the file size of the database.
2 Working in Synthesis
118 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
2.15.1 Adding Attachments to Projects
To add an attachment to a project, choose Insert > Attachments > Attachment or right-click the project or the
attachments folder in the current project explorer and choose Attachment on the shortcut menu.
The Add Attachment window will appear, as shown next.
Specify what you are attaching by selecting either Embedded File, File Link or URL in the Attachment Type area.
If you are attaching a file, click the Browse icon in the Address field to browse for and select the file to be attached.
If you are attaching a URL, enter the URL in the Address field. The Name field will be populated automatically
based on the Address field. If desired, you can change the name and/or enter a Description for the attachment.
Click OK to create the attachment.
Right-clicking an attachment in the current project explorer and choosing Edit Item opens the Edit Attachment
window, which allows you to edit the name and description of the attachment and, in the case of attached URLs, the
address.
Note: You can also add attachments to a project by clicking the Attachments icon in the Project Properties window (see
Section 2.13.1 on page 66). This works like adding attachments to blocks or resources, explained below, in that you will go
through the Attachments window.
2.16 Importing and Exporting
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 119
2.15.2 Adding Attachments to Resources
To add an attachment to a resource, click the Attachments icon in the properties window for the resource. The
Attachments window will appear, as shown next.
This window allows you to manage the attachments for the resource. Existing attachments are shown in the table.
Click a column header to sort the attachments by that column; click the column header again to reverse the direction
of the sort.
At the bottom of the window are commands that allow you to add, edit, delete, open or save a copy of the attachment.
Note that deleting embedded files deletes the actual file from the project. For linked files or URLs, deleting the
attachment removes the link to the file, leaving the original file untouched.
2.16 Importing and Exporting
There are several different ways to move data among projects and databases in Synthesis-enabled applications. All of
these types of import/export are accessed via the Import/Export Wizard. To open the Import wizard, choose Project >
Management > Import/Export > Import.
To open the Export wizard, choose Project > Management > Import/Export > Export.
Select the option for the type of import or export you want to perform and click OK to open the appropriate import/
export tool. The available types of import/export include:
Importing entire projects into the current database from another database, or exporting entire projects from the
current database to another database. See Section 2.16.1 on page 119.
Importing or exporting specific project items (e.g., a diagram or allocation analysis in BlockSim, or a folio or tool
in Weibull++/ALTA) and resources between existing projects. See Section 2.16.2 on page 120.
Importing data from previous versions of Weibull++ and ALTA. See Section 2.16.3 on page 121.
Importing data from other file formats, including Excel and delimited text files. See Section 2.16.4 on page 122.
If you need to import data from an existing repository to a new repository, see Section 2.16.5 on page 124.
2.16.1 Import/Export Entire Projects
The Import Projects window allows you to import an entire project into the current database.
To access the Import Projects window, choose the Projects option in the Import/Export Wizard.
In the Select Repository to Import From area, specify the Synthesis database that you want to import from; the
drop-down list shows recently used databases, or you can click the Browse icon (...) to browse for a database. This
2 Working in Synthesis
120 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
can be a standard database (*.rsrp), a compressed standard database (*.rsgz) or an enterprise database connection file
(*.rserp).
The projects in the selected database will be displayed in the list. You can use the filter area above the table to refine
which projects are displayed.
You can choose an existing filter from the drop-down list. To create a new filter click the Create New Filter icon. To
edit the filter that is currently being used, click the Edit Current Filter icon. To delete the filter that is currently
being used, click the Delete Current Filter icon. This will delete the filter entirely; there is no undo for delete. If
you want to keep the filter for future use and simply stop using it right now, choose a different filter from the drop-
down list. The Default Filter option shows all project in the database.
You can also search for projects by entering text in the Find field. The list updates dynamically to show only the
projects with names that contain the text that you have entered.
Select the check box for each project that you would like to import into the current database. You can also select or
clear the check box in the header to select or clear all of the check boxes for the individual projects.
Click OK to import the selected project(s).
If you select to import a project that has the same name as a project that already exists in the current database, the
imported project will be renamed as (name of project)_[increment]. For example, if your current database contains
a project named Project 1 and you select to import a project named Project 1 from another database, then the
imported Project 1 will be renamed to Project 1_1.
Exporting works similarly to importing.
2.16.2 Import/Export Items or Resources
The Import window allows you to share specific project items (i.e., analyses, multiplots, reports and project-level
attachments) or resources between existing projects.
To access the Import window for importing project items, choose the Items option in the Import/Export Wizard. To
import resources, choose the Resources option in the Import/Export Wizard. These options are available only if you
have a project open.
You can import items or resources to the current project from:
Another project in the current database.
A project in another existing database.
In the Select Repository to Import From area, specify the Synthesis database that you want to import from; the
drop-down list shows recently used databases, or you can click the Browse icon (...) to browse for a database. This
can be a standard database (*.rsrp), a compressed standard database (*.rsgz) or an enterprise database connection file
(*.rserp).
2.16 Importing and Exporting
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 121
The projects in the selected database will be displayed in the Source Project area. You can use the filter area above
the list to refine which projects are displayed.
You can choose an existing filter from the drop-down list. To create a new filter click the Create New Filter icon. To
edit the filter that is currently being used, click the Edit Current Filter icon. To delete the filter that is currently
being used, click the Delete Current Filter icon. This will delete the filter entirely; there is no undo for delete. If
you want to keep the filter for future use and simply stop using it right now, choose a different filter from the drop-
down list. The Default Filter option shows all project in the database.
You can also search for projects by entering text in the Find field. The list updates dynamically to show only the
projects with names that contain the text that you have entered.
When you select the project that you are importing from in the Source Project area, the contents of the source project
will appear in the Select Items to Import area, under the project name within the corresponding folder (e.g. overlay
plots will appear under the Multiplots folder). Select the check box next to each item you want to import. If you select
the box next to the folder, all the items within that folder will automatically be selected to be imported. You can also
select the box next to the name of the project to import all items within that project.
Click Import to import the selected item(s) or resource(s).
If you select to import an item or resource that has the same name as an item/resource that already exists in the
current project, the imported item will be renamed as (name of item)_[increment]. For example, if your current
project contains a diagram named System A and you select to import a diagram named System A from another
database, then the imported System A will be renamed to System A_1.
If you selected to import an item that refers to other items in the project (e.g. if you selected to import an overlay plot
that refers to several analyses) and you did not select to import the item(s) it refers to, then when you click OK in the
Import window, a window will appear asking if you also want to import the referenced items. Click Yes to import the
items that are displayed in the window. Click No if you do not want to import the items displayed in the window. The
items you selected in the Import window will be imported into the current project. Any analyses, plots or reports that
refer to unimported items will be imported in their current state, but if you refresh or change settings these items, their
contents will be lost. Click Cancel to cancel importing any items and return to the Import window.
Exporting works similarly to importing. You can export items from the current project to:
Another project in the current database.
A project in another existing database.
A new database, thereby creating a project in that database in the process.
2.16.3 Import from Previous Versions
There are two ways you can use data from previous versions of Weibull++ or ALTA: you can convert the original file
into a new standard database, or you can import its contents into the current database and project.
The following file types can be converted or imported:
ReliaSoft Office 7 projects (*.rso7)
2 Working in Synthesis
122 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Weibull++ 7 projects (*.rwp)
ALTA 7 projects (*.ralp)
Weibull++ 6 projects (*.rw6)
ALTA 6 projects (*.ra6)
You can convert these files by choosing File > Open Repository. If you prefer to import items from the older version
ReliaSoft file types mentioned above into the current database and project instead of creating a new database, you can
select the Other file option in the Import Wizard.
In both cases, in the Open window that appears, choose the desired file type in the Files of type field, then browse for
the desired project and click Open.
2.16.4 File Import and Conversion
The File Import Wizard allows you to import data from files saved by other applications and convert them to the
format required for analysis in Weibull++ 8 or ALTA 8. This includes:
Excel files (*.xls)
Tab, Comma, Space and Semicolon delimited files (*.txt, *.csv, *.prn, *.smc)
To import data from any of these file types, select the Other file option in the Import Wizard. In the Open window
that appears, choose the desired file type in the Files of type field, then browse for the file you want to import from.
The import/conversion process will vary depending on the type of file that you have selected to import. For older
version ReliaSoft files (i.e., Weibull++ 6 and 7, ALTA 6 and 7 and Office 7), all folios from the original project will
be added to the current database and project. For delimited and Excel files, the File Import Wizard will be displayed.
This utility displays the data from the selected file and allows you to specify how it will be converted and imported
into a new standard folio.
The spreadsheet(s) on the left side of the utility display the data from the original file. To use the utility:
2.16 Importing and Exporting
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 123
If the file you are importing from has multiple pages (e.g., an Excel spreadsheet with multiple worksheets), all
pages are displayed in the File Import Wizard. For each page, use the Import area in the control panel to specify
whether or not the data from the sheet will be imported. You will need to create column definitions for each page
that you import from.
In the Data Type field, specify whether you are importing to a new Weibull++ standard folio or to a new ALTA
standard folio. This can be different for each page that you import from.
Use the Columns buttons to match each column of data from the original file to a column available in the new
standard folio by selecting the column in the spreadsheet and then clicking a button. At least one column must be
identified as a Time value. Columns containing data that you do not want to import should be left unmarked.
Time indicates that the column contains time values that will be imported into the time column in the new
standard folio. Depending on the type of data sheet, this could represent the time to failure, the time to
suspension or the state end time for interval censored data.
Number in State indicates that the column contains quantities that will be imported into the Number in State
column for grouped data in the new standard folio.
State F or S indicates that the column contains F or S entries that will be imported into the State F or S
column to identify each data point as a failure or suspension in the new standard folio.
Last Inspected indicates that the column contains time values that will be imported into the Last Inspected
column for interval censored data in the new standard folio.
Stress indicates that the column contains stress values that will be imported into a Stress column in the new
standard folio. You can mark up to eight columns as stress columns. This option is available only when you
are importing to an ALTA standard folio.
Subset ID indicates that the column contains data that will be imported into the Subset ID column in the new
standard folio.
For most column types, you cannot have duplicate headings. For example, you can have only one Time column.
The exception to this is Stress columns for ALTA standard folios (you can import up to 8).
If you are importing to an ALTA standard folio, specify the Number of Stresses. This reflects the number of
stress columns, from 1 to 8, that you want to appear in the new folio. These columns will be created regardless of
whether you assign that many Stress columns in the File Import Wizard.
If desired, you can enter a row number in the Start from Row field. The import will start at the specified row. This
can be useful in cases where the original file has column headings, for example.
Click Import to import the data into a new standard folio based on your specifications.
If you have other data type files that are not listed in this section, you may still be able to import them in the
application using a few work-arounds. One such work-around would be to open the non-compatible files in another
application that accepts that format and then save them in one of the accepted formats. Another way is to use the
Clipboard to copy and paste the data into the standard folio.
2.16.4.1 Creating and Using Import Mappings in the File Import Wizard
Once you have defined all of the columns that you wish to add, you can click the Save Import Mapping icon in the
Import Mapping area of the control panel.
This allows you to save the current definitions as an import mapping that can be used in the future. You can choose a
saved import mapping from the drop-down list in the Import Mapping area to use it for the current import.
2 Working in Synthesis
124 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
By default, import mappings are saved in the default import mappings directory, which is located at C:\Documents
and Settings\[user name]\Application Data\ReliaSoft\[Weibull 8 or ALTA 8]\Import Mappings. You can change the
directory where the import mappings are saved by clicking the Import Mapping Directory button and specifying the
desired path in the Browse for Folder window that appears. The directory you specify here will be used to populate
the drop-down list of import mappings, and for saving import mappings unless you specify a different location while
you are saving the import mapping.
2.16.5 Import from Existing Repository
The Import Data from Existing Repository window allows you to import information to a new database. You can
import data from any non-secure database; however, to import data from a secure database, you need to have a valid
user account in that database. See Section 2.2.4 on page 34.
The Import data from existing repository check box is available only when you are in the process of creating a new
standard database or a new enterprise database. If you have an existing database, you can use the Import/Export
Wizard to move data; however, the type of information you can import is limited to projects, project resources and
project items. See Section 2.16 on page 119.
When you select to import an existing repository, you will be asked to specify the name of repository that you wish to
import from or you can browse for a repository. All available data in the selected database will be displayed in a list,
and you will select the check box for each type of data that you wish to import into the new database. In addition, a +
sign will be displayed next to each data type that has items that can be individually imported, as shown next.
For SQL Server databases, the Create SQL Server login check box will be displayed at the bottom of the window.
Select the check box if you want to create an individual SQL Server login when you create each new Synthesis user
account. The SQL Server login will be created if a login does not already exist for the username and if you have the
appropriate authority in SQL Server to create logins. If you clear this check box, the user can still be recognized by
SQL Server if a) an individual SQL Server login was created in advance in SQL Server, b) the user belongs to an
2.16 Importing and Exporting
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 125
Active Directory group that has a SQL Server login shared by all members of the group or c) the user connects to the
repository with an enterprise connection file (*.rserp) that impersonates another Windows user account that has a
SQL Server login. See Section 2.2.7 on page 42.
Weibull 8 Users Guide 127
Synthesis resources represent various types of information that can be shared between analyses. They may be created
in one type of application and then shared with other Synthesis-enabled applications where they may be relevant.
When the resource is updated with new information, the change is reflected automatically in all analyses that rely
upon it. An example of a Synthesis resource is a reliability model that represents a products probability of operating
successfully over a given period of time. The model may be published from Weibull++/ALTA, and then used in
BlockSim to define the reliability characteristics of a block or used in Xfmea/RCM++ for failure modes analysis.
This chapter provides information about resources in Synthesis projects, including:
A description of all available Synthesis resources - Section 3.1 (p. 127)
How to work with the Resource Manager - Section 3.2 (p. 131)
How to use the Dependency Viewer to track the use of Synthesis resources - Section 3.4 (p. 137)
A description of the Synthesis resources that can be used in multiple locations, including:
Universal Reliability Definitions (URDs) - Section 3.5 (p. 142)
Models - Section 3.6 (p. 142)
Actions - Section 3.7 (p. 150)
3.1 Types of Resources
There are twelve basic types of resources that can be used in Synthesis projects. Although most resource types can be
created and edited via the Resource Manager in any Synthesis-enabled application, not all resources can be used in all
applications. For example, you can create or edit a universal reliability definition (URD) when you open the Resource
Manager from Weibull++, but this resource is not used in any of the Weibull++ analyses. Resources can also be
created on the fly in applications where they are used. Each resource can be used unlimited times anywhere within the
project. The table shown next defines the resource types and shows which applications can create and use each type.
Resources
3
Resource Used In
Universal reliability definitions (URDs) are used to describe a set of
reliability and maintenance characteristics. See Section 3.5 on page 142.
BlockSim, RCM++, Xfmea
3 Resources
128 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Models can represent probabilities, durations or costs, either fixed or
time-dependent. These resources are used by other resources (e.g., to
represent reliability in a URD, to represent the duration of a task, etc.).
See Section 3.6 on page 142.
Can be published from
analyses in Weibull++,
ALTA and BlockSim or
created manually. Used in
BlockSim, RCM++ and
Xfmea. (For details on how
to publish models, see page
82 in Chapter 2.)
Tasks represent maintenance activities that can be assigned to URDs.
There are two basic kinds of tasks: Corrective tasks are unplanned
maintenance activities that are performed when a failure occurs.
Scheduled tasks include preventive maintenance activities, inspections
and on condition maintenance activities.
BlockSim, RCM++
Task packages represent groups of tasks that are performed together at
scheduled intervals.
BlockSim, RCM++
Crews are assigned to tasks. They represent the labor personnel who will
perform the maintenance activity.
BlockSim, RCM++
Spare part pools are assigned to tasks. They are used to describe the
conditions that determine whether a spare part will be available when
needed and to specify the time and costs associated with obtaining the
spare part.
BlockSim, RCM++
Maintenance groups are sets of blocks where some event within the
group can trigger either maintenance or state changes for one or more
blocks, either within the group or outside of it.
BlockSim, RCM++
Switches are assigned to standby containers in RBDs and standby gates
in fault trees. They describe the behavior of the switch that transfers the
activity from the active block to a standby block (and possibly back to the
original active block, depending on the configuration). Switches are
shown only in the BlockSim Resource Manager.
BlockSim
Mirror groups are used to represent the same event/component in
different locations within your analysis. In Xfmea/RCM++, cause records
in a mirror group are treated as one and the same event, allowing you to
place the same cause in more than one location in the FMRA hierarchy. In
BlockSim, blocks in a mirror group all represent a single component,
allowing you to represent a single component more than once in a
diagram or in multiple diagrams within a project. With BlockSims
FMRA diagrams, blocks that represent causes can also be mirrored.
BlockSim, RCM++, Xfmea
Maintenance templates allow you to specify the order in which blocks
in a diagram will be maintained when that diagram is used as a
maintenance phase in a phase diagram. Maintenance templates are shown
only in the BlockSim Resource Manager.
BlockSim
Resource Used In
3.1 Types of Resources
Weibull 8 Users Guide 129
3.1.1 Resource Wizards
Where resources are shown in properties windows (e.g., models shown in the Universal Reliability Definition
window, spare part pools shown in the Maintenance Task window, etc.), you can use a resource wizard to work with
them. The arrow that provides access to the wizard is shown only for the resource field that is currently selected in the
properties window. For all other resource fields, the availability of the tools is indicated by an ellipsis (...) in the field.
All of these wizards work in a similar manner except for the Model Wizard, which provides additional functionality
that allows you to create the model directly within the wizard (see Section 3.6.2 on page 147). The following images
of the Task Wizard serve as the example for how to use all other wizards.
The Main page provides access to all available functions within the wizard. If a resource has not been assigned in the
field, you can select an existing resource or create a new one.
If a resource has already been assigned, you can:
Select another existing resource to replace the current resource.
Create a duplicate of the current resource and assign the new copy in the field (e.g., if you want to use the same/
similar properties but remove the association with the original resource that may be used in a different way
elsewhere in the project).
View/edit the current resource.
Remove the resource from the current location (it will still be available for other records within the current
project).
Actions allow you to define and track actions that need to be performed.
See Section 3.7 on page 150.
All applications via My
Portal; RCM++ and Xfmea
for analyses (For a
description of the My Portal
feature, see page 76 in
Chapter 2.)
Controls are used in RCM++ or Xfmea to represent methods that are
planned or currently in place to reduce or eliminate the risk associated
with potential failures. The Controls node will be available in the
Resource Manager if the Enable Controls for Causes option is selected
for the current interface style in Xfmea/RCM++. The Controls node is
available by default in projects that have never been opened in Xfmea/
RCM++.
RCM++, Xfmea
Resource Used In
3 Resources
130 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
3.1.1.1 Selecting an Existing Resource
The Select page provides a list of the resources of the specified type that currently exist in the project. This is the
default view for all resource wizards except the Model wizard, and can also be accessed by clicking the Select
Existing button or icon.
You can filter the resources that are displayed in the list by entering text in the Filter field (marked with a magnifying
glass); clear the filter by clicking the Clear Filter icon in the field (red x). Select a resource and click OK (or double-
click it) to assign the resource to the current location. If a resource was already assigned, the newly selected resource
will replace it.
You can click the Select Resource icon to open the Select Resource window, which allows you to select an existing
resource of the appropriate type. The Select Resource window can display more resources (a maximum of 1,000 are
shown in the wizard) and more information about each resource; in addition, it offers a wider range of filtering tools.
3.1.1.2 Creating a Resource
To create a new resource from the wizard, click the Create New button or icon.
This will open the resource properties window of the appropriate type (e.g., the Maintenance Task window, the Crew
window, the Spare Part Pool window, etc.). Once you have specified the properties for the new resource, click OK to
create the resource and assign it to the current location.
If a resource has already been assigned and you wish to remove the association with the original resource but use the
same (or similar) properties for the current location, you can click the Duplicate button on the Main page of the
wizard. The new copy will then be assigned in place of the original.
3.1.1.3 Editing a Resource
If a resource has already been assigned, you can view and/or edit its properties by clicking the View/Edit button or
icon.
IMPORTANT: Any changes you make to the resource will apply everywhere that the resource is used throughout the
project. This includes analyses in other Synthesis-enabled applications.
3.2 Resource Manager
Weibull 8 Users Guide 131
3.1.1.4 Removing a Resource
If a resource has already been assigned, you can remove the resource from the current location (e.g., remove the task
from the URD) by clicking the Remove button or icon.
The resource will still be available to be assigned to other records in the current project. If a resource is not assigned
to any other locations within the project and you want to completely remove it from the database, choose Project >
Synthesis > Resource Manager.
3.2 Resource Manager
The Resource Manager allows you to create, view, edit and delete resources in the project. The types of resources
available in the Resource Manager depend on which Synthesis-enabled application you are using. For a list of all
available resource types, see Section 3.1 on page 127.
To open the Resource Manager, choose Project > Synthesis > Resource Manager.
To use the Resource Manager, choose the type of resource that you want to work with in the navigation panel on the
left side of the window. A table that displays the resources of the selected type will be shown on the right side of the
window. You can limit the number of resources shown in the table using the Home > Filter > Maximum Display
field. The limit can be adjusted in increments of 100.
You can change the columns that appear in the table for a resource type via the Column Chooser, which is accessed
by choosing Home > Columns > Column Chooser. For details about the Column Chooser, see Section 3.2.5 on
page 134.
You also can click the Columns icon (identical to the Column Chooser icon) at the bottom of the navigation panel to
display a list of available columns in the navigation panel.
For complete information on configuring the Resource Manager, see Section 3.2.4 on page 133.
3.2.1 Basic Operations
You can:
Create a new resource of the selected type by choosing Home > Edit > New.
Open an existing resource for viewing and/or editing by double-clicking the resource row in the table or by
selecting the resource row in the table and choosing Home > Edit > View.
Duplicate an existing resource by selecting the resource row in the table and choosing Home > Edit > Duplicate.
3 Resources
132 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Delete an existing resource by selecting the resource row in the table and choosing Home > Edit > Delete.
With a single resource selected, you can choose Home > Actions > Trace Usage to open the Dependency Viewer,
which provides information on where the resource is used and any additional resources that the currently selected
resource itself uses. See Section 3.4 on page 137.
3.2.2 Advanced Operations
The Resource Manager provides several tools to make it easier to deal with large numbers of resources.
To find unused resources of the selected type, choose Administration > Selection > Show Only Unused.
You can clear this selection by choosing Administration > Selection > Show All.
To find duplicate resources, choose Administration > Selection > Show Only Duplicates.
In the Select Comparison Criteria window that appears, select the properties that must match in order for the
resources to be considered duplicates. For example, if you are looking for duplicate URDs, you might select to
compare the model, corrective task and scheduled tasks, but not the URD name. Once you have selected the
columns to compare, click OK to show the duplicate resources. You can clear this selection by choosing
Administration > Selection > Show All.
You can merge multiple resources of the same type into one resource. This can be helpful when you have, for
example, several models that all represent the identical distribution or constant value, or several tasks that are
identical. This might happen if, for example, you have imported diagrams that all reference the same model, but
the imports happened at separate times; the model would be imported each time a diagram that referenced it was
imported. There are two ways to merge resources:
To merge resources manually, select the resources and choose Administration > Actions > Merge and
Delete.
The number of resources that can be selected at once is limited by the value in the Administration >
Selection > Max Selection field.
Note: A model cannot be edited or deleted when it is still linked to its data source. You can remove the association
between the model and its data source via the control panel Publishing page. See page 82 in Chapter 2.
IMPORTANT: For both methods, you should be certain that the resources that you are merging are identical before
proceeding. Merging cannot be undone, and only the information from the target resource (i.e., the resource that you
merge the others into) will be retained.
3.2 Resource Manager
Weibull 8 Users Guide 133
In the window that appears, select the resource to merge the other resources into (i.e., the resource name that
will be retained). This resource will be used in all places where the other selected resources were previously
used.
To find duplicate resources and merge them into a single resource, choose Administration > Actions >
Merge All Duplicates.
You will be asked to confirm that you want to merge all duplicate instances of each resource of the selected
type into the first occurrence of the resource. In the Select Columns window that then appears, select the
properties that must match in order for the resources to be considered duplicates. Once you have selected the
columns to compare, click OK to merge the duplicate resources.
3.2.3 Exporting Information from the Resource Manager
To print the contents of the Resource Manager, choose Home > Edit > Print.
You can send the contents of the Resource Manager to an analysis workbook or to Excel by choosing
Administration > Actions > Transfer Report. For details on analysis workbooks, see page 560 in Chapter 27.
In the Transfer Report window that appears, you can select to export either the current item (i.e., the table for the
currently displayed page) or the full report (i.e., the tables for all pages in the Resource Manager) to an analysis
workbook or to Excel. If you transfer the full report, each table will appear on a new tab in the analysis workbook or
the Excel file. If you send data to Excel, you will be prompted for a filename and location. The Excel file will open
automatically if the software is installed on your computer.
3.2.4 Resource Manager Display Characteristics
To rearrange columns in a Resource Manager table, select a column header and drag it to the place in the grid where
you want the column to appear. The column positions that you specify will be remembered and used each time you
use the application.
You can resize the columns by dragging the edge of the column header to the desired position. To automatically
resize the column to fit the data, double-click the edge of the column header or right-click the column header and
choose Best Fit on the shortcut menu. Choosing Best Fit (all columns) resizes all columns in the table to fit the data
that they contain.
To sort the table by a given column, click the column header. You can reverse the direction of the sort by clicking the
column header again. You can also right-click the column header and choose Sort Ascending or Sort Descending on
the shortcut menu, or choose Clear Sorting to stop sorting by the selected column.
You can change the columns that appear in the table for a resource type via the Column Chooser, which is accessed
by choosing Home > Columns > Column Chooser. For details about the Column Chooser, see Section 3.2.5 on
page 134.
Note: If you are merging models, they must be of the same category in order to be merged. You cannot merge models
that were created via publication.
3 Resources
134 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
You also can click the Columns icon at the bottom of the navigation panel to display a list of available columns in the
navigation panel.
There are several ways to filter the resources that appear in the table.
The Auto Filter row appears by default immediately below the column headers. Enter text in any cell in this row
to display only those resources that contain matching text in that field. You can hide or show the Auto Filter row
by choosing Home > Filter > Display Auto Filter Row or by right-clicking any column header and choosing
[Hide/Show] Auto Filter Row.
The Find panel, which is hidden by default, allows you to search for text within the resources that are currently
displayed in the table. Right-click any column header and choose Show Find Panel to display the panel. Enter
text in the field and click Find to filter the resources displayed in the table. You can click Clear to remove the
filter. To close the panel, click the X or right-click any column header and choose Hide Find Panel.
Choose Home > Filter > Enable Advanced Filters to gain access to more detailed filtering functionality. See
Section 3.2.6 on page 135.
The number of resources displayed in the table is determined by the value in the Home > Filter > Maximum Display
field.
3.2.5 Column Chooser
The Column Chooser allows to you specify which columns will appear in the Resource Manager for the type of item
you are currently working with. To access the Column Chooser, click Column Chooser or right-click any column
header and choose Column Chooser.
3.2 Resource Manager
Weibull 8 Users Guide 135
The columns that are available in this window will vary depending on the type of item you are working with. The
Column Chooser for models is shown next.
You can sort the available columns by category, as shown here, or you can select the Display alphabetically option
to sort the columns alphabetically; this may be helpful if you are looking for a particular column. The order that you
sort by in this window does not affect the column positions in the Resource Manager.
You can select or clear an individual columns check box to display or hide that column. You can also select or clear
the check box in the Available Columns header to select or clear all check boxes. If you have sorted the available
columns by category, you can select or clear the check box for the category to select or clear all of the check boxes for
the columns that make up that category.
3.2.6 Advanced Filters
In the Resource Manager, you can click Enable Advanced Filters to gain access to more detailed filtering
functionality.
When advanced filters are enabled, a Filter icon will appear when you point to any column header in the table.
Click this icon to see a drop-down list of criteria that you can apply for the currently selected column. Only those
resources that use the selected criterion will be displayed in the table.
If no predefined criteria are available or if you want to specify more than one possible value, you can choose
(Custom) to open the Custom AutoFilter window, which allows you to specify two filter criteria for the property, in
3 Resources
136 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
either an and or an or relationship. For instance, the window shown next will filter the available models to show
only the cost and cost per unit time models.
You can apply multiple filters in this way to narrow the resources in the table as needed. Each column that has a filter
applied will continue to display the Filter icon in the column header. The filters that you create will appear at the
bottom of the table, as shown next.
Click the check box to apply or remove the set of filters. Click the X to delete the set of filters entirely. To delete a
single filter from the set, right-click the relevant column header and choose Clear Filter.
3.3 Select Resource Window
Weibull 8 Users Guide 137
You can edit the filters by clicking the Edit Filter button in the filter display or by right-clicking any column header
and choosing Filter Editor. The Filter Editor window allows you to modify your filter(s) as needed.
Click any colored element in the window to view a drop-down list of available values. Each group is headed by a
logical operator (And, Or, Not And, Not Or), which is shown in red, and expresses the connection between the
conditions below it. Each condition is made up of a property that you can filter by (e.g., Model Name, Model
Category, Created By, etc.), which is shown in blue, and a relational operator (e.g., equals, is greater than, is between,
is any of), which is shown in green. The filter shown here will show only cost per unit time models equal to either
$120 per hour or $2 per minute.
To add a condition to a group, click the plus sign beside the groups logical operator, click the logical operator and
choose Add Condition or, with some element of the group in focus, press the PLUS or INSERT key. To remove a
condition from a group, click the X beside the condition or, with some element of the condition in focus, press the
MINUS or DELETE key.
To add a subgroup to a group, click the main groups logical operator and choose Add Group. To remove a subgroup
from a group, click the X beside the subgroups logical operator, click the subgroups logical operator and choose
Remove Group or, with the subgroups logical operator in focus, press the MINUS or DELETE key.
3.3 Select Resource Window
The Select Resource window allows you to choose an existing resource to use at your current location. You can
access it by clicking the Select Existing icon.
The Select Resource window is similar to the Resource Manager, with the following differences:
Only the resource type that you are currently working with appears in the Resources area.
Each row in the table contains a radio button that allows you to select the resource for use.
The window contains OK and Cancel buttons that allow you to apply the selected resource or close the window
without applying a resource.
3.4 Dependency Viewer
Because resources can be used multiple times throughout the project, it is important to know where a given resource
is used before making changes to it. The Dependency Viewer, accessible by clicking the Trace Usage icon in each
3 Resources
138 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
resource properties window or in the Resource Manager, provides information on where the resource is used and any
additional resources that the currently selected resource itself uses.
The currently selected resource is shown in the Current Selection area in the middle of the Dependency Viewer.
If the selected resource uses any resources, those resources (i.e., its dependents) will be displayed in the This
[resource] uses area on the right. For example, if the selected resource is a URD, the model and any tasks it uses will
be displayed, as shown next.
You can drill down by double-clicking a resource in the This [resource] uses area or by right-clicking and choosing
Trace Item on the shortcut menu. This resource will then become the new selected resource, and any resources it
uses will then be displayed. For example, you could double-click a task used by the URD to see the model(s), crew(s)
and/or spare part pool(s) that the task uses. The items selected will be shown in order in the field at the top of the
window; click Back to go back through the path to the previously selected items.
If the selected resource is used anywhere, the items that use it (i.e., its precedents) will be displayed in the This
[resource] is used by area on the left. For example, you can see in the image above that URD 1 is used by Block 1 in
a BlockSim diagram and SubSystem 1 in an FMEA analysis. The This [resource] is used by area works similarly to
the This [resource] uses area; you can double-click an item to make it the current selection in the window.
You can use the options in the Current Selection area to control what is shown in the area on the left. For example,
imagine that the currently selected item is the Reliability Mode from the image above. This model is used by URD
1, which is used by Block 1 in RBD 1 and by SubSystem 1.
If Show All Levels is selected, URD 1 (the immediate precedent) will be shown in the This [resource] is used by
area. Double-clicking this will select the URD, and Block 1 and SubSystem 1 will be shown as its precedents. You
can then double-click the block to select it, showing RBD 1 as its precedent. You could double-click SubSystem 1
instead of the block, showing that it has no precedents.
If Skip Blocks is selected, URD 1 (the immediate precedent) will be shown in the This [resource] is used by
area. Double-clicking this will select the URD, and RBD 1 and SubSystem 1 will be shown as its precedents,
leaving out the block between the URD and the RBD.
If Skip URDs is selected, Block 1 and SubSystem 1 will be shown as the precedents, skipping the URD between
the model and the block. Double-click the block to select it, and to show RBD 1 as its precedent.
3.4 Dependency Viewer
Weibull 8 Users Guide 139
If Skip Blocks and URDs is selected, RBD 1 and SubSystem 1 will be shown as the precedents for the model.
You can click the Diagram View button to open the Graphical Dependency Viewer (The next section describes how
to use the Graphical Dependency Viewer). The currently selected item will be the main block in the diagram that is
created.
Note that you can edit any resource shown in the Dependency Viewer by right-clicking it and choosing Edit Item on
the shortcut menu. The resource's properties window will open.
3.4.1 Graphical Dependency Viewer
The Graphical Dependency Viewer, accessed by clicking the Diagram View button in the Dependency Viewer, offers
a diagram-based alternative to help you understand the connections among resources in your project.
To understand how to use the Graphical Dependency Viewer, consider the example shown in the Dependency Viewer
section:
3 Resources
140 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Clicking the Diagram View button in the window shown here will yield a diagram view that shows only the main
item (in this case, the URD), which is marked with a flag:
To view a graphical representation of the information shown in the Dependency Viewer (i.e., one level of precedents
and one level of dependents), choose Home > Precedents > Add One Level Precedents and Home > Dependents >
Add One Level Dependents:
3.4 Dependency Viewer
Weibull 8 Users Guide 141
Further, assume that you want to see all levels of precedents and dependents for the URD. Choose Home >
Precedents > Add All Precedents and Home > Dependents > Add All Dependents:
We can now see that Block 1 is used in RBD 1, and that Corrective Task 1 uses a model, a spare part pool and a crew.
You can select any item shown in the diagram and use the Add and Delete commands for precedents and dependents
to expand or refine which dependencies are shown. To set a different item as the main item in the diagram, select the
item and choose Home > Diagram > Set Block as Main.
Use the commands in the Options group of the Ribbon's Home tab to specify how the diagram will be constructed:
Select Reuse Items to show each item only once in the diagram. For example, if you are viewing a URD that is
used by two blocks in the same diagram and you choose Home > Precedents > Add All Precedents, the Reuse
Items command will affect the display as shown next:
This command must be selected before the diagram is created, or you must clear the current diagram to apply it.
Use the Show Blocks and Show URDs commands to determine whether blocks and/or URDs are shown as
intermediate steps between diagrams and models.
Select Show Item ID to display the internal ID assigned to each resource, block and/or diagram.
3 Resources
142 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The Home tab of the Ribbon has additional commands that allow you to configure the diagram. See page 95 in
Chapter 2. In addition, the Diagram tab of the Ribbon offers zoom options and printing options, as well as the ability
to copy the diagram or to export it as a graphics file. See page 105 in Chapter 2.
3.5 Universal Reliability Definitions (URDs)
Universal Reliability Definitions (URDs) are used to represent a set of properties that can include failure behavior
and maintenance tasks. URDs are resources that are available for use throughout the project in BlockSim 8, RCM++
8 and Xfmea 8, and they can be managed via the Resource Manager. See Section 3.2 on page 131.
The Universal Reliability Definition window allows you to create, view and edit URDs. It can be accessed from the
URDs page of the Resource Manager by choosing Home > Edit > New, by selecting a URD and choosing Home >
Edit > View or by double-clicking a URD.
At the top of the window, you can specify the URD name. By default, URDs are named URD [increment] (i.e., the
first URD created is URD 1, the next is URD 2 and so on). You can replace this with your own name of up to 150
characters, if desired. See page 59 in Chapter 2.
The table contains the following settings to configure the URD:
Model allows you to choose or create a model to describe the behavior associated with the URD. This can be a
reliability model, a probability of failure model or an event occurrence model; once you have specified the model,
its category will be displayed as part of the field name. See Section 3.6 on page 142.
Corrective Task allows you to choose or create a corrective task for the URD. Corrective maintenance consists
of the action(s) taken to restore a failed component to operational status. For more information on tasks, interested
readers can consult the documentation on RCM++ 8 or BlockSim 8.
Scheduled Tasks allows you to choose or create multiple scheduled tasks for the URD. These tasks may be
preventive maintenance, inspections and/or on condition tasks. The tasks are displayed in their priority order,
which is the order in which they will be performed; you can use the up and down arrows in the cells in this
column to move the task up and down the priority list. For more information on tasks, interested readers can
consult the documentation on RCM++ 8 or BlockSim 8.
Identifiers allows you to enter additional identifying information that can be used to search for this resource.
Information about the creation and last modification of the URD is displayed at the bottom of the window.
3.6 Models
Models are resources that are available for use throughout the project and can be managed via the Resource Manager.
Models can be defined manually or they can be created by publishing results from an analysis in a Synthesis-enabled
application. For example, you could publish results from a BlockSim diagram or from a Weibull++ life data analysis
as a model for use anywhere within the project. See page 82 in Chapter 2.
A model that was created by publishing results from an analysis can be viewed in the Synthesis Viewer window,
which displays the information about the model but does not allow you to edit it. The Synthesis Viewer window
appears when you double-click the models name in any location where it is used (e.g., in a URD, in a spare part pool,
etc.). It can also be accessed from the Models page of the Resource Manager by selecting the model and choosing
Home > Edit > View or by double-clicking the model.
Note: Two views are available for the URD Properties area. The Hierarchical tab displays information about the URD in a
standard hierarchical format. Each resource directly assigned to the URD is shown, along with a subset of its properties.
This view allows you to specify properties. The Filtered tab displays all resources of a specified type that are associated
with the URD, either by being assigned to it directly or by being assigned to a resource that is assigned to the URD. You
cannot change which resources are assigned on this tab.
3.6 Models
Weibull 8 Users Guide 143
To edit a model that was published from an analysis, you must return to the original data source, make the necessary
changes, recalculate and republish the model so it is once again synchronized with the original analysis.
You can also manually define a model via the Model window, which can be accessed from the Models page of the
Resource Manager by choosing Home > Edit > New, by selecting a model that was manually defined and choosing
Home > Edit > View or by double-clicking a model that was manually defined.
There are six categories of models, each serving a specific purpose:
Probability models represent a likelihood of occurrence. They can take three forms:
Reliability models
Probability of failure models
Event occurrence models
These models are used by URDs and by switches in BlockSim.
Duration models represent a length of time. These models are used for task durations and for logistic delays
associated with crews and spare part pools.
Cost models can take two forms:
Cost per unit time models are used by tasks, crews and spare part pools for costs that accrue over time.
Cost models are used by tasks, crews and spare part pools for costs that arise on a per incident basis.
In addition, each model can be one of two types:
A constant model represents a fixed probability, duration or cost. For duration models and cost per unit time
models, you will also need to enter the time units that the model uses.
Applying a model that uses a fixed probability to a block causes the block to be considered static. A static block
can be interpreted either as a block with a reliability value that is known only at a given time (but the block's
entire failure distribution is unknown) or as a block with a fixed reliability (i.e, a reliability that is constant over
time). Systems can contain static blocks, time-dependent blocks or a mixture of the two.
A distribution model represents behavior that varies based on factors such as time and/or applied stress. To
define a model that uses a distribution:
You can select a distribution from the drop-down list and then enter the required parameter(s), which will vary
depending on the selected distribution.
You can use the Quick Parameter Estimator (QPE), which allows you to estimate the parameters of a
distribution based on information you have about the reliability of a product, the probability of an event
occurring or the typical duration of a task. See Chapter 26.
The available distributions and their required inputs are as follows:
Distributions:
Weibull: You can select a 2-parameter or 3-parameter Weibull distribution.
Beta is the shape parameter.
Eta is the scale parameter.
IMPORTANT: Re-publishing a model changes the resource, which is available for use throughout the project. This will
cause the model to be changed everywhere that it is used.
3 Resources
144 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Gamma is the location parameter. This field is available only if you have selected a 3-parameter
Weibull distribution.
Mixed: You can select to use a mixed Weibull distribution with 2, 3 or 4 subpopulations. Mixed Weibull
distributions are used in cases where multiple subpopulations or failure modes exist within a data set; each
subpopulation is represented using a distinct Weibull distribution and the different Weibull distributions
are then pieced together to form a continuous function called the mixed Weibull distribution (also known as
multimodal Weibull). For these distributions, you will need to specify parameters for each subpopulation.
To do this, select the subpopulation in the Subpopulation field, then enter the following values:
Beta is the shape parameter for the selected subpopulation.
Eta is the scale parameter for the selected subpopulation.
Portion is the portion (or percentage) of the total population represented by the selected subpopulation.
The sum of the portion values for all subpopulations must be equal to 1.
Notice that the number of the selected subpopulation appears next to each parameter name to indicate the
subpopulation the parameter applies to.
Normal
Mean is the location parameter.
Std (standard deviation) is the scale parameter.
Lognormal
Mean is the location parameter.
Std (standard deviation) is the scale parameter.
Exponential: You can select a 1-parameter or 2-parameter exponential distribution. You have the option of
defining the exponential parameter as lambda (i.e., failure rate) or mean time (i.e., MTBF). This option can
be set on the Calculations page of the Application Setup. See page 601 in Chapter 29.
Mean Time is a location parameter.
Lambda is the scale parameter.
Gamma is a location parameter. This field is available only if you have selected a 2-parameter
exponential distribution.
G-Gamma
Mu (exp(mu)) is the scale parameter.
Sigma is a shape parameter.
Lambda is a shape parameter. Please note that for any fixed value of lambda, the generalized-gamma
distribution is a log-location-scale distribution.
Gamma
Mu is the scale parameter.
K is the shape parameter.
Logistic
Mean is the location parameter.
Std (standard deviation) is the scale parameter.
Loglogistic
Mean is the location parameter.
Std (standard deviation) is the scale parameter.
Gumbel
Mean is the location parameter.
3.6 Models
Weibull 8 Users Guide 145
Std (standard deviation) is the scale parameter.
Life-Stress Relationships with Distributions: These models describe behavior based on three variables:
reliability, stress and time. They can be used for contained load sharing blocks to describe how the life
distribution changes as the load changes. Such models can also be used for standard blocks. For simulation
purposes, the use stress serves as an additional block-specific parameter on the model; the block is considered
to use only that stress level all the way through the simulation.
Arrhenius-Weibull sets the life-stress relationship to Arrhenius and the distribution to Weibull.
Beta is the Weibull distribution shape parameter.
B is the first Arrhenius parameter.
C is the second Arrhenius parameter.
Use Stress is the stress level at which the model will be used and evaluated.
Arrhenius-Lognormal sets the life-stress relationship to Arrhenius and the distribution to lognormal.
Log-Std is the lognormal distribution scale parameter.
B is the first Arrhenius parameter.
C is the second Arrhenius parameter.
Use Stress is the stress level at which the model will be used and evaluated.
Arrhenius-Exponential sets the life-stress relationship to Arrhenius and the distribution to exponential.
B is the first Arrhenius parameter.
C is the second Arrhenius parameter.
Use Stress is the stress level at which the model will be used and evaluated.
Eyring-Weibull sets the life-stress relationship to Eyring and the distribution to Weibull.
Beta is the Weibull distribution shape parameter.
A is the first Eyring parameter.
B is the second Eyring parameter.
Use Stress is the stress level at which the model will be used and evaluated.
Eyring-Lognormal sets the life-stress relationship to Eyring and the distribution to lognormal.
Log-Std is the lognormal distribution scale parameter.
A is the first Eyring parameter.
B is the second Eyring parameter.
Use Stress is the stress level at which the model will be used and evaluated.
Eyring-Exponential sets the life-stress relationship to Eyring and the distribution to exponential.
A is the first Eyring parameter.
B is the second Eyring parameter.
Use Stress is the stress level at which the model will be used and evaluated.
IPL-Weibull sets the life-stress relationship to the inverse power law and the distribution to Weibull.
Beta is the Weibull distribution shape parameter.
K is the first IPL parameter.
n is the second IPL parameter.
Use Stress is the stress level at which the model will be used and evaluated.
IPL-Lognormal sets the life-stress relationship to the inverse power law and the distribution to
lognormal.
Log-Std is the lognormal distribution scale parameter.
3 Resources
146 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
K is the first IPL parameter.
n is the second IPL parameter.
Use Stress is the stress level at which the model will be used and evaluated.
IPL-Exponential sets the life-stress relationship to the inverse power law and the distribution to
exponential.
K is the first IPL parameter.
n is the second IPL parameter.
Use Stress is the stress level at which the model will be used and evaluated.
3.6.1 Model Window
The Model window consists of two tabs:
The Main tab allows you to configure the main properties of the model. See Section 3.6 on page 142.
The Identifiers tab allows you to enter additional identifying information that can be used to search for this
resource.
The following settings are available on the Main tab to configure the model:
The Model Name field allows you to specify a name for the model. You can replace the default name with your
own name of up to 150 characters, if desired. See page 59 in Chapter 2.
In the Model Category field, you must specify what category of behavior the model represents (i.e., reliability,
probability of failure, event occurrence, duration, cost or cost per unit time), thereby restricting where and how it
can be used. Once a model has been created, you cannot change its category.
In the Model Type field, specify whether the model is constant or varies with time (i.e., a distribution).
For constant models, enter the fixed probability, duration or cost value. The type of value that you enter is
dependent upon the model category. For duration models and cost per unit time models, you will also need to
enter the time units that the model uses.
For distribution models, select the distribution and specify its parameters. You can:
Select a distribution from the drop-down list and then enter the required parameters, which will vary
depending on the selected distribution. For a list of the available distributions and their required inputs, see
Section 3.6 on page 142.
Click the QPE icon to use the Quick Parameter Estimator (QPE), which helps you to estimate the parameters
of a distribution based on information you have about the reliability of a product, the probability of an event
occurring or the typical duration of a task. See Chapter 26.
Information about the creation and last modification of the model is displayed at the bottom of the tab.
3.6 Models
Weibull 8 Users Guide 147
3.6.2 Model Wizard
When you need to assign a model within a resource properties window, you can click the field that requires the model
as input and click the arrow that appears in the field, as shown next.
This opens the Model Wizard, which allows you to select an existing model or create a model on the fly; it retains
your most recent settings so that you do not have to re-enter commonly used settings.
You do not have to specify the model category when you create a model using the Model Wizard; it is determined by
where the model is used, as follows:
Models assigned to URDs are reliability models.
Models used for task durations and for logistic delays associated with crews and spare part pools are duration
models.
Models used by tasks, crews and spare part pools for costs that accrue over time are cost per unit time models.
Models used by tasks, crews and spare part pools for costs that arise on a per incident basis are cost models.
If you need to create a model of a different category, you must create the model via the Model window. See Section
3.6.1 on page 146.
The Main page provides access to all available functions within the wizard. If a model has not been assigned in the
field, you can select an existing model or create a new one.
If a resource has already been assigned, you can:
Select another existing model to replace the current model.
Create a duplicate of the current model and assign the new copy in the field (e.g., if you want to use the same/
similar properties but remove the association with the original model that may be used in a different way
elsewhere in the project).
View/edit the current model.
3 Resources
148 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Remove the model from the current location (it will still be available for other records within the current project).
3.6.2.1 Selecting an Existing Model
The Select page provides a list of the models of the specified type that currently exist in the project. This is the default
view once a model has been assigned, and can also be accessed by clicking the Select Existing button or icon.
You can filter the models that are displayed in the list by entering text in the Filter field (marked with a magnifying
glass); clear the filter by clicking the Clear Filter icon in the field (red x). Select a model and click OK (or double-
click it) to assign the model to the current location. If a model was already assigned, the newly selected model will
replace it.
You can click the Select Resource icon to open the Select Resource window, allowing you to select an existing
model. The Select Resource window can display more resources (a maximum of 1,000 are shown in the wizard) and
more information about each resource; in addition, it offers a wider range of filtering tools.
3.6.2.2 Creating a Model
To create a new model from the wizard, click the New Constant or New Distribution button or icon.
3.6 Models
Weibull 8 Users Guide 149
The New Constant page allows you to enter a fixed probability, duration or cost value for a constant model. The type
of value that you enter is dependent upon the model category. For duration models and cost per unit time models, you
will also need to enter the time units that the model uses.
The New Distribution page allows you to select the distribution and specify its parameters.
You can:
Select a distribution from the drop-down list and then enter the required parameters, which will vary depending
on the selected distribution. For a list of the available distributions and their required inputs, see Section 3.6 on
page 142.
Click the QPE icon to use the Quick Parameter Estimator (QPE), which helps you to estimate the parameters of a
distribution based on information you have about the reliability of a product, the probability of an event occurring
or the typical duration of a task. See Chapter 26.
Once you have specified the properties for the new model, click OK to create the model and assign it to the current
location.
Once you have created a given category of model via the Model Wizard, your settings for that kind of model will be
retained and shown the next time you create that same kind of model. For example, the first time you create a
reliability model, you will choose whether to create a constant model or a distribution model. If you create a
distribution model, then the next time you create a reliability model, you will automatically see the options for a
distribution model.
3 Resources
150 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
If a model has already been assigned and you wish to remove the association with the original model but use the same
(or similar) properties for the current location, you can click the Duplicate button on the Main page of the wizard.
The new copy will then be assigned in place of the original.
3.6.2.3 Editing a Model
If a model has already been assigned, you can view and/or edit its properties in the Model window by clicking the
View/Edit button or icon.
3.6.2.4 Removing a Model
If a model has already been assigned, you can remove the model from the current location by clicking the Remove
button or icon.
The model will still be available to be assigned to other records in the current project. If a model is not assigned to
any other locations within the project and you want to completely remove it from the database, choose Project >
Synthesis > Resource Manager.
3.7 Actions
Synthesis-enabled applications allow you to create and track actions to ensure that appropriate progress is being
made. Actions are resources that are available for use throughout the project and can be managed via the Resource
Manager or via the Actions page of My Portal. See Section 3.2 on page 131 and page 76 in Chapter 2.
The Action window allows you to create, view and edit actions. It can be accessed from the Actions page of the
Resource Manager by choosing Home > Edit > New, by selecting an action and choosing Home > Edit > View or by
double-clicking an action.
IMPORTANT: Any changes you make to the model will apply everywhere that the model is used throughout the project.
This includes analyses in other Synthesis-enabled applications.
3.7 Actions
Weibull 8 Users Guide 151
To create an action via My Portal, you must first specify the project that it applies to. To do this, open the filtering
drop-down list at the top of the page and then select the project from the Project drop-down list. You can then choose
My Portal > Actions > Create Action. The Action window will appear, as shown next.
You must enter, at minimum, a description of the recommended action. Other fields can be filled out immediately or
at a later time.
To edit an existing action, double-click the action in My Portal or select the action and choose My Portal > Actions
> Edit Action.
The Action Status is displayed at the top of the window. The status of the action is determined automatically based on
the dates defined for the action. The following statuses may apply:
Overdue: An action is overdue if its Due Date is prior to todays date.
Not Started: An action is not started if its Start Date is later than today's date.
In Progress: An action is in progress if its Start Date is today's date or earlier and its Due Date is today's date or
later.
Completed: An action is completed if a Completion Date has been entered and no approver has been assigned.
Pending Approval: An action is pending approval if a Completion Date has been entered and an approver has
been assigned.
Approved: An action is approved if an Approval Date has been entered.
Note: The fields that are enabled in the interface and the options available in configurable drop-down lists will depend on
the interface style settings that have been defined for the current project in Xfmea/RCM++; you must have one of those
applications installed in order to change the settings.
3 Resources
152 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The Action properties consist of six sections:
Action: This area comprises the basic action properties. Note the following:
Recommended Action: The actions that could be taken to reduce the risk associated with the issue, usually by
reducing the likelihood that the problem will occur or increasing the likelihood that the problem will be
detected before it reaches the end user.
Short Description: A shortened (50 character maximum) version of the action description. You are not
required to enter any text in this field; if you do not, the system automatically uses text based on the
Recommended Action field.
Person Responsible: The person (or department) responsible for completing each action. You can either type
a user name or you can select a user from the drop-down list. The list displays a list of users who have access
to the database (if you are working in a non-secure database, any user who has ever opened the database will
have an account created automatically and will be shown in this list). You must assign the action to a database
user if you want the software to put action records into the portal and to generate e-mails to the person.
Action Taken: The actions taken (or result) for each action.
Estimated Cost: The estimated cost to perform the recommended action.
Actual Cost: The actual cost to perform the recommended action.
Action Category: The category that the action belongs to.
Action Priority: The priority for the action.
Timeline allows you to specify when the action should start and end.
Planned Start Date: The date when the action was originally planned to be started. You can type a date or you
can click the calendar icon to select a date. This date is not used in determining status, but is present for
bookkeeping purposes.
Planned Due Date: The date when the action was originally planned to be due. This date is not used in
determining status, but is present for bookkeeping purposes.
Start Date: The date when the action started.
Duration: The amount of time that the action will take.
Due Date: The date when the action must be completed.
Completion Date: The date when the action was completed. This will change the action's status from due/
overdue to complete.
Approval allows you to enter information about when the action was completed or reviewed and approved, and
by whom.
Approver: The person who will review and approve the action after it is complete. You can type in a user
name or you can click the Assign to Database User icon to open the Select User window. This window
displays a list of users who have accessed the database or, if you are working with a secure database, users
who have access to the database.
Approval Date: The date when the action was approved. This will change the action's status to approved. This
date is entered automatically when the approver clicks the Approve button at the bottom of the Action
window.
Review/Approval Comments: Comments related to the approval of the action. This field becomes available
when the approver clicks the Approve button at the bottom of the window.
Action Status Updates allows users to post information on the progress of the action. You can add as many or as
few updates as desired (including none).
3.7 Actions
Weibull 8 Users Guide 153
E-mail Notifications allows you to specify if and when e-mails will be sent about the action, and to whom.
History displays information about the creation and last modification of the action.
If Microsoft Outlook is installed on your computer, you can click the Outlook button to create a calendar event based
on the action on your own Outlook calendar. By default, the event will be scheduled for the action's due date, but you
can make modifications to the event in the properties window that appears.
E-Mail
When working with actions, you can send e-mails to users both automatically and manually. Use the E-mail Settings
window to enable e-mail notifications for actions in the database (see page 50 in Chapter 2). Once these notifications
are enabled, you can:
Use the remaining settings in the E-mail Settings window to specify that automated e-mail notifications will be
sent for certain types of action activities (i.e., upon action creation, action modification and/or action completion).
Use the E-mail Notifications area of the Action window to specify any users, in addition to the action creator,
person responsible and assigned reviewer, to whom e-mails will be sent about the action. Click the View/Edit
icon to open the Action Notifications window.
Click the E-mail button at the bottom of the window to manually send an e-mail about the action.
3.7.1 Action Notifications Window
The Action Notifications window allows you to specify if and when e-mails will be sent about the action, and to
whom. It is accessed by clicking the View/Edit icon that appears when E-mail Notifications is selected in the Action
window. See Section 3.7 on page 150.
The Action Creator, Person Responsible and Assigned Reviewer fields are automatically populated based on the
user who created the action and the information supplied in the Person Responsible and the Reviewed and
Approved By fields of the action record. In addition, you can select notification groups to receive e-mails about the
action (see page 51 in Chapter 2). The Other Users area displays a list of all users who have an account in the
database; you can select these users as recipients for e-mails as well. If you are working in non-secure database, any
user who has ever opened the database will have an account created automatically and will be shown in this list.
The E-mails will be sent area displays when e-mails will be sent automatically. Click the View/Edit icon to open the
E-mail Settings window, which allows users with the Manage e-mail notifications permission to specify the
settings that are used for notification e-mails for actions throughout the database.
3.7.2 E-mail Action Window
The E-mail Action window allows you to send a notification e-mail for a particular action whenever you want to
(which is different from the feature that sends notification e-mails automatically when the action is created, modified
or completed, see Section 3.7.1 on page 153). This window can be accessed by clicking the E-mail button in the
Action window (See Section 3.7 on page 150.). This option will be enabled only if the Enable Notification E-mails
option is selected in the E-mail Settings window for the repository (see page 50 in Chapter 2). These settings are the
same for all users who access the database and, in a non-secure database, can be set by any user. In a secure database,
the ability to edit the e-mail notification settings is restricted to users with the Manage e-mail notifications
permission. For the complete list of database permissions, see page 37 in Chapter 2.
Enter the e-mail address of the person you want to e-mail the action notification to in the To input box.
Enter the e-mail addresses of all recipients that you want to be carbon copied on the action notification e-mail in
the CC input box. Each address must be separated with a semi-colon (;).
Enter a subject in the Subject input box or accept the default subject.
3 Resources
154 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The details of the action will appear in the middle of the window. All of the text shown in this window will appear
in the body of the notification e-mail that is sent. You can make any necessary modifications to the text in this
window.
Click Send to send the notification e-mail to the specified recipients and close the window.
You can use the E-mail Settings window to configure the SMTP server through which the e-mails will be sent and the
e-mail address from which the e-mails will be sent. You can also use the window to set the default text preceding the
action information.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 155
The objective of life data analysis is to fit a statistical distribution to failure time data in
order to understand the reliability performance of a product over time or to make
projections about future behavior. From the analysis, you can estimate several life characteristics, such as probability
of failure, reliability, mean life or failure rate.
The Weibull++ standard folio for life data analysis is the most basic folio in the application. This chapter describes
how to use the folio for performing an analysis, including:
Setting up a Weibull++ standard folio - Section 4.1 (p. 156).
Entering different types of life data - Section 4.2 (p. 157).
Analyzing life data, including:
Using the control panel - Section 4.3 (p. 160).
Details about each analysis setting - Section 4.4 (p. 167).
Generating life data analysis plots - Section 4.5 (p. 169).
Performing reliability calculations via the Quick Calculation Pad (QCP) - Section 4.6 (p. 172).
Example of a simple life data analysis - Section 4.7 (p. 176).
Additional analysis tools, including:
Choosing a life distribution via the Distribution Wizard - Section 4.8 (p. 178).
Extracting subsets of data via the batch auto run process - Section 4.9 (p. 181).
Evaluating the fit of a distribution with the Goodness of Fit Results tool - Section 4.10 (p. 184).
Grouping together data points via the Auto Group Data tool - Section 4.11 (p. 184).
Special analysis methods, including:
Mixed Weibull analysis - Section 4.12 (p. 185).
Bayesian-Weibull analysis - Section 4.13 (p. 189).
Competing Failure Modes (CFM) analysis - Section 4.14 (p. 192).
What-if analysis, including:
Altering parameters without recalculating - Section 4.15 (p. 198).
Altering one parameter and recalculating - Section 4.16 (p. 198).
Using the Specify Points feature to adjust a rank regression analysis - Section 4.17 (p. 198).
Performing calculations with no data - Section 4.18 (p. 200).
Weibull++ Standard Folios
4
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios
156 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
4.1 Weibull++ Standard Folio Setup
To add a Weibull++ standard folio to a project, choose Insert > Folios > Weibull++ Standard Folio or right-click
the Weibull++ Folios folder in the project explorer and choose Add Weibull++ Standard Folio on the shortcut
menu.
A setup window for configuring your folio will be displayed, as shown next:
The first step is to specify the type of data you will be working with. There are two types: times-to-failure data or
free-form data. In addition, times-to-failure data may contain three forms of censoring: suspensions (right censored),
interval censored or left censored data. Any of the times-to-failure data types can also be entered as grouped data. See
Section 4.2 on page 157.
The data type you select determines the data entry columns that appear in the data sheet. Notice that when you select
a data option, the preview area at the bottom of the setup window shows you the names of the data entry columns that
will appear in the data sheet.
4.1.1 Time Units
The next step is to specify the time units appropriate for your data. Time units may be measured in mileage, distance,
weight, etc. The appropriate columns in the data sheet will be automatically configured for the time units you select.
If you later wish to change the time units of an existing data sheet, click the Change Units icon on the Main page of
the control panel of the data sheet.
4.2 Data Types
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 157
This opens the Change Units window, which gives you several options for converting the time units of the existing
data. See page 89 in Chapter 2.
4.2 Data Types
This section describes the different types of data you can use in a life data analysis. In Weibull++, there are two types
of life data: times-to-failure data and free-form data. In addition, times-to-failure data may contain three forms of
censoring: suspensions, interval censored or left censored data. The following sections describe each data type and
show you how to enter them in a Weibull++ standard folio data sheet.
4.2.1 A Note About Subset IDs
By default, Weibull++ standard folio data sheets include a Subset ID column for logging any pertinent information or
comments about the data. You can choose to add a second subset ID column (labeled Subset ID 2 by default) by
choosing Life Data > Format and View > Add/Remove Columns.
The information in the subset ID columns do not affect the calculations in the folio unless you select to use analysis
methods that categorize data based on their subset IDs. The following is a list of the affected analysis methods in
Weibull++. Note that in these cases, only the information in the first subset ID column (labeled Subset ID 1 by
default) affects the analysis.
Competing failure modes (CFM) analysis. See Section 4.14 on page 192.
Extracting subsets of data via the batch auto run process. See Section 4.9 on page 181.
Grouping together data points via the Auto Group Data tool. Section 4.11 on page 184.
Using the Specify Points feature to adjust a rank regression analysis. See Section 4.17 on page 198.
In the following sections, the subset ID column in the examples is used for explanatory purposes, and is not intended
to demonstrate how the column would normally be used.
4.2.2 Times-to-Failure Data
Times-to-failure data sets, also known as complete data, are obtained by recording the exact times when the units
failed. For example, if we tested five units and they all failed, and we recorded the time when each failure occurred,
we would then have complete information as to the time of each failure in the sample.
Note: In Version 8, you now have the ability to define the time units used for the data set and calculations. For example, if
your data set contains failure times in hours, you now have the option to perform calculations using different time units
such as years, months, days, etc. The software performs the unit conversion automatically.
Authorized users can define the time units that will be available for use in any project within the database and set up the
conversion factors.
Tip: In a Weibull++ standard folio, the data type you select determines the data entry columns that appear in the data
sheet. You can change the data entry columns for an existing data sheet anytime by choosing Life Data > Format and
View > Alter Data Type.
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios
158 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
To use this data type, select the Times-to-Failure data option on the setup window. Your data sheet will have a Time
Failed column for recording the times-to-failure. The example shown next displays a standard folio data sheet where
all the units in the sample failed. The exact time of each failure is recorded.
If multiple units failed at the same time, you can choose to enter the data in groups. To do this, select the I want to
enter data in groups option on the setup window. This adds a third column to the data sheet, as shown next. In this
example, the units that failed at the same time are grouped together. The Number in State column indicates the
number of failed units in that group and the State End Time column indicates the exact time the units in each group
failed.
4.2.3 Times-to-Failure with Suspensions (Right Censored Data)
The term suspension describes the units did not fail during the observation period. Such units are also known as right
censored data. For example, if we tested five units and only three had failed by the end of the test, the observed
operating time of the two units that did not fail would be referred to as right censored data. The term right censored
means that the event of interest (i.e., the time-to-failure) is to the right of our data point on the time scale.
To use this data type, select the Times-to-Failure data option and the My data contains suspensions (right
censored data) option on the setup window. Your data sheet will have a State F or S column for recording whether
the data point is a failure (F) or suspension (S). In the example shown next, a test was conducted and the first five
units in the sample failed but the sixth unit was still operational when the test terminated at 190 hours.
Tip: If you enter the time as a negative number (e.g., -190), Weibull++ will automatically assign it as a suspension. This
time-saving feature applies only to data sheets that have been configured to support right censored data.
4.2 Data Types
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 159
When entering this type of data in groups, units that have the same state (i.e., failed or suspended) and have the same
value in the State End Time column can be grouped together, as shown next.
4.2.4 Times-to-Failure with Interval and Left Censored Data
The term interval censored data describes the uncertainty as to the exact time the unit failed within an interval. This
type of data frequently comes from tests or situations where the units are not constantly monitored. For example, if
we are running a test on five units and inspecting them every 100 hours, we only know that a unit failed or did not fail
between inspections. Specifically, if we inspect a certain unit at 100 hours and find it operating, and then perform
another inspection at 200 hours to find that the unit is no longer operating, ten the only information we have is that the
unit failed at some point in the interval between 100 and 200 hours.
Left censored data is a special case of interval censored data. In left censored data, the interval is between time = 0
and some inspection time.
To use this data type, select the Times-to-Failure data option and the My data set contains interval and/or left
censored data option on the setup window. In the example shown next, the first unit was observed at 150 hours and
found to be failed. The second unit was still operating at 150 hours but failed at some point prior to the next
observation at 300 hours, and so on.
When entering this type of data in groups, all units that failed within the same interval are considered to be part of the
same group.
Note: Although this example shows a scenario in which the inspections occur at regularly scheduled intervals, Weibull++
does not require the start time of the interval to be equal to the end time of the previous interval.
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios
160 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
4.2.5 Times-to-Failure with All Types of Data
Times-to-failure data with different types of censoring can be added to a single data sheet. The data may be entered in
groups or ungrouped. The following is an example of a grouped data set with complete, suspended, interval and left
censored data.
The next illustration summarizes the differences between complete data and the different types of censored data.
4.2.6 Free-Form (Probit) Data
The free-form data type is used to analyze the relationship between an independent variable (x-axis data) and the
percentage of failures (y-axis data) in response to the variable. The y-axis data are treated as probability units, or
probits, and they show how the percentage of failures increase in response to a variable (e.g., time, distance, stress
level, etc.). For example, you could use the free-form data type to record the Y percentage of automobiles that will
need repair after X number of miles, or record the Y percentage of product decomposition at X degrees of
temperature.
To use this data type, select the Free-form (Probit) data option on the setup window. In the data sheet, enter the
values for the independent variable in the X-Axis value column and enter the cumulative percentage of failures in the
Y-Axis value column. The following is an example of a data set that shows the effect of time (x-axis data) on the
probability of failure (y-axis data) of a product.
4.3 Weibull++ Standard Folio Control Panel
This section describes how to use the Weibull++ standard folio control panel to perform life data analysis, including:
4.3 Weibull++ Standard Folio Control Panel
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 161
Parts of the standard folio control panel - Section 4.3.1 (p. 161).
Selecting the settings for the analysis - Section 4.3.2 (p. 163).
Evaluating the results - Section 4.3.3 (p. 165).
4.3.1 Parts of the Standard Folio Control Panel
Life data analysis involves careful planning and requires many tasks. To make things easy to find, the standard folio
control panel is arranged into groups of related tasks. Each group has its own page on the control panel. The Main
page is shown next.
The Main page is probably where you will spend most of your time because it contains most of the tools you would
need to analyze a data set. This includes:
The Distribution drop-down list, which is used to select the statistical distribution that will be used to model the
data set.
The Analysis Settings area, which contain the options for estimating the parameters that best fit the distribution
and the given data set.
The Analysis Summary area, which displays the values of the parameters and other results you could use to
evaluate how well the distribution fits the data.
Tip: There is a horizontal splitter bar directly above the Main button. If you drag it as far up as it will go, all of the pages of
the panel will be accessed by large buttons. If you drag it all the way down, all of the pages will be accessed by small
icons. Positions in between allow you to use some large buttons and some small icons. See page 78 in Chapter 2.
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios
162 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The folio tools are arranged on the left side of the panel. Use these tools to manage data and experiment with the
results of your analysis. Each tool is described in detail below.
Calculate
Estimates the parameters of the chosen distribution, based on the current data set and the specified analysis
settings. This tool is also available by choosing Life Data > Analysis > Calculate.
Plot
Creates a new sheet in the folio that provides a choice of applicable plot types. For standard folios, this
includes plots such as reliability vs. time, failure rate vs. time, probability plot, etc. This tool is also available
by choosing Life Data > Analysis > Plot. See Section 4.5 on page 169.
QCP
Opens the Quick Calculation Pad, which allows you to calculate results based on the analyzed data sheet,
such as the probability of failure, mean life, etc. This tool is also available by choosing Life Data > Analysis
> Quick Calculation Pad. See Section 4.6 on page 172.
Distribution Wizard
Opens the Distribution Wizard, which helps you select the distribution that best fits your data based on the
selected parameter estimation method (i.e., RRX, RRY or MLE). This tool is also available by choosing Life
Data > Analysis > Distribution Wizard. See Section 4.8 on page 178.
Alter Data Type
Opens the Weibull++ Folio Data Sheet Setup window, which allows you to change the data entry columns in
the current data sheet. Note that when you change the setup, you may lose information already entered in the
data sheet. For example, switching the data sheet from one that supports interval data to one that supports
only right censored data will remove all the inspection times. This tool is also available by choosing Life Data >
Format and View > Alter Data Type. See Section 4.1 on page 156.
Change Units
Opens the Change Units window, which allows you to change the time units of an existing data sheet. See
page 89 in Chapter 2.
Auto Group Data
Opens the Auto Group Data window, which allows you to group together data points with the same failure/
suspension times. Grouping data significantly speeds up calculations when you have a very large data set.
This tool is also available by choosing Life Data > Options > Auto Group Data. See Section 4.11 on page
184.
Alter Parameters
Allows you to alter the values of the calculated parameters, assuming that the ranks, the likelihood function
and the Fisher Matrix (evaluated at the original parameter estimates) remain the same. In plots, the position of
the data points remain the same but the solution line and all subsequent analysis made via the QCP and other
tools are based on the modified parameter values. Therefore, the analysis may be appropriate only within the context
of your specific scenario. This tool is also available by choosing Life Data > Options > Alter Parameters. See
Section 4.15 on page 198.
4.3 Weibull++ Standard Folio Control Panel
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 163
Specify Points
Opens the Specify Points window, which allows you to adjust the way that the line is fitted to the points for a
rank regression analysis. The ranks will be calculated based on all of the data points but the regression line
will be fitted only to the points you have specified. This tool is also available by choosing Life Data >
Options > Specify Points. See Section 4.17 on page 198.
Color Data Values
Allows you to apply different font colors to the entries in the data sheet for easy visualization. The following
commands are available:
Default Color applies a black font color to all the entries in the data sheet
Based on Data Type applies different font colors based on the type of censoring. The colors are: red for failure
data (no censoring), green for suspension data, magenta for left-censored data and blue for interval data.
Based on Subset ID 1 applies different font colors based on unique subset IDs in the Subset ID 1 column. If a
data point has no entry in the Subset ID 1 column, then the font color is black.
Based on Subset ID 2 applies different font colors based on unique subset IDs in the Subset ID 2 column. If a
data point has no entry in the Subset ID 2 column, then the font color is black.
Based on Subset ID Combination applies font colors based on unique combinations of subset IDs in the Subset
ID 1 and Subset ID 2 columns. If a data point has no subset IDs, the font color is black, but if a data point has at
least one subset ID, then it is treated as having a unique combination of subset IDs.
Note that whenever you edit or add new data to the data sheet, you must choose one of the Color Data Values
commands again in order to apply the correct font colors.
Batch Auto Run
Opens the Batch Auto Run window, which allows you to quickly extract data from an existing data set based
on the subset ID. This tool is also available by choosing Life Data > Options > Batch Auto Run. See
Section 4.9 on page 181.
4.3.2 Selecting the Settings for the Analysis
The first step is to select a life distribution. In life data analysis, distributions are used to model the failure behavior of
a product. Any distribution can be used to analyze a data set; however, if the distribution does not match the expected
failure rate behavior of the product, the accuracy of the predictions will be compromised.
On the Main page of the control panel, select a distribution from the drop-down list. There are nine distributions and
three special analysis methods to choose from:
The nine distributions are Weibull, exponential, lognormal, normal, generalized gamma, gamma, logistic, loglogistic
and Gumbel.
1
The special analysis methods are:
Tip: If you are not certain which distribution would provide the best fit for your data, you can use the Distribution Wizard to
guide you through the selection process.
1.
The ReliaWiki resource portal has information on the statistical characteristics of each distribution at:
http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/Life_Distributions.
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios
164 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Mixed Weibull analysis is used for analyzing data sets that reflect different trends in the failure behavior. This
method may be useful when dealing with failure modes that cannot be assumed to be independent (i.e., the
occurrence of one failure mode affects the probability of occurrence of the other mode) and/or when it is not
possible to identify the failure mode responsible for each individual data point. To use mixed Weibull analysis,
you will need to specify how many subpopulations exist in the data set (2, 3 or 4) and the software will fit a
single distribution with Weibull parameters and portion values for each subpopulation. See Section 4.12 on
page 185.
Bayesian-Weibull analysis is based on the concepts of Bayesian statistics. It is typically used in situations
when you have a small sample size and a strong prior knowledge of what the failure behavior is likely to be.
See Section 4.13 on page 189.
Competing Failure Modes (CFM) analysis is used for analyzing data sets that contain failures due to
different types of failure modes. The occurrence of one failure mode results in a failure for the product; hence,
the failure modes are said to compete to cause the failure. This analysis can be used when the failure modes
are assumed to be statistically independent (i.e., the occurrence of one failure mode does not affect the
probability of occurrence of the other mode). To use CFM analysis, you will need to categorize the times in
the data set according to failure modes and then choose one type of life distribution to model the failure
behavior of each mode separately. The overall reliability is computed by obtaining the reliability due to each
failure mode and then multiplying together the reliability values. See Section 4.14 on page 192
The next step is to select the analysis settings. The Analysis Settings area on the Main page of the control panel
provides a quick summary of the settings that will be used to fit the distribution. Click the options displayed in blue
text on the control panel to toggle between the available options. The following table serves as a guide to the
abbreviations. Note that the options available will vary depending on the data type, distribution and analysis method
you have selected.
These settings are also available on the Analysis page of the control panel. See Section 4.4 on page 167.
Finally, calculate the parameters of the chosen life distribution by choosing Life Data > Analysis > Calculate or by
clicking the Calculate icon on the Main page of the control panel.
Analysis Method
Regression
Method
Confidence
Bound Method
Rank Method
Rank Regression
on X (RRX)
Standard
Regression
Method (SRM)
Fisher Matrix
Confidence
Bounds (FM)
Median Ranks
(MED)
Rank Regression
on Y (RRY)
ReliaSofts Rank
Method (RRM)
Likelihood Ratio
Confidence
Bounds (LRB)
Kaplan-Meier
Estimator (K-M)
Non-Linear Rank
Regression
(NLRR)
Bayesian
Confidence
Bounds (BSN)
Maximum
Likelihood
Estimation (MLE)
Beta-Binomial
Confidence
Bounds (BB)
4.3 Weibull++ Standard Folio Control Panel
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 165
4.3.3 Evaluating the Results
The control panel will display the calculated results in the Analysis Summary area of the control panel. The
following example shows the calculated parameters of a Weibull distribution for a particular data set.
Click anywhere within the Analysis Summary area to open the Results window, which displays the calculated
results in a worksheet. From the Results window, you can edit, copy or print the results.
Because the calculated parameters are estimates based on observed data points from a limited sample size, there is
uncertainty in the results. Therefore, in addition to displaying the calculated parameters, the control panel also returns
other results that may be used to evaluate how well the chosen distribution or analysis method fits the data set.
Depending on your application settings, the following information may be displayed:
The Rho value (correlation coefficient) is automatically calculated and displayed in the results if the parameters
were estimated using rank regression. Rho is a measure of how well the regression line fits the data points. The
closer the value of rho is to +/-1, the better the linear fit. A value of zero would indicate that the data points are
randomly scattered and have no pattern or correlation to the regression line model.
The LK Value (likelihood function value) is automatically calculated and displayed in the results regardless of
the chosen analysis method. The LK value is the peak value of the likelihood function, at the estimated parameter
values. It is influenced by the sample size and the variability of the data set. This means that the LK value varies
across different data sets and cannot be used by itself to make a judgment about the fit of the distribution.
However, this value becomes useful when it is used to compare how different distributions fit a particular data set.
For a given set of data, the distribution with the highest LK value is considered to have the best fit statistically. To
view a plot of the likelihood surface, you can use a 3D plot. See page 364 in Chapter 12.
If the data set contains failures at time = 0, the calculation for the Pnz (percent non-zero) will be automatically
displayed in the results. Pnz represents the proportion of the population with non-zero failure times. For example,
an automotive manufacturer may be interested in how customers use their vehicles' engines with respect to engine
speed. To measure this, they capture the amount of time the engines spend in certain RPM bands (0 to 500 RPM,
500 to 100 RPM, etc.). A problem occurs when measuring the higher RPM bands because some drivers might
never spend time in higher RPM speed bands. This results to a data set that contains a certain number of zero data
points, as shown next. For this example, the value of Pnz would be approximately 67% (i.e., 1 - (2/6) = 0.66).
Note: If the distribution and parameters are associated with a published model, then the model's name will appear as a
link at the bottom of the Analysis Summary area. Click the link to view the model's properties. For details on how to
publish the results as a model, see page 82 in Chapter 2.
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios
166 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The software calculates the parameters of the distribution without the failures at time = 0; however, the reliability,
unreliability and probability density calculations of the entire data set are influenced by the value of Pnz.
Conditional reliability and failure rate functions are not affected.
If you use the 3-parameter Weibull distribution, you have the option to display the theta parameter, which is the
sum of the values of the eta and gamma parameters. To include the theta parameter in the results, select the Show
Theta check box on the Weibull++ Folios page of the Application Setup. Note that for the 1-parameter and 2-
parameter Weibull distributions, the value of gamma is zero; therefore, if you select to display theta for these
distributions, the value of theta will be identical to the value of eta.
As an alternative, you can select to always display the theta parameter instead of eta. To do this, click the
Calculations page of the Application Setup and select the Use Theta parameter scheme on Weibull check box.
See page 605 in Chapter 29.
Additional Tools
The following tools may also be used in conjunction with your own engineering knowledge about the model in order
to evaluate the fit of the distribution to the data set.
For a rank regression analysis, the Probability Plot shows you how well the solution line tracks the plotted data
points. This allows you to visually assess the fit of a distribution. This method can only be used when the
parameters have been calculated using rank regression.
Confidence Bounds allow you to quantify the amount of uncertainty in the parameter estimates and in the
reliability predictions due to sampling error. The narrower the confidence bounds, the closer the estimates are to
the true value of the parameters and the better the precision on the reliability predictions.
You can visualize the confidence bounds by using plots or obtain point calculations on the confidence bounds by
using the Quick Calculation Pad.
The Goodness of Fit Results is a utility that uses three different tests to determine how well the parameters of the
distribution fit the data. Note that this utility can only be used to evaluate data sets that do not contain censored
data.
4.4 Weibull++ Standard Folio Analysis Settings
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 167
4.4 Weibull++ Standard Folio Analysis Settings
The Analysis page of the Weibull++ standard folio control panel includes the settings that are also displayed on the
Main page, along with any additional settings that may be applicable for the current data sheet. This topic provides a
brief description of all the settings.
2
The Analysis page includes the following settings:
The Analysis Method setting allows you to choose the method for estimating the parameters of your chosen
distribution. There are four options to choose from: rank regression on X (RRX), rank regression on Y (RRY),
non-linear rank regression (NLRR) and maximum likelihood estimation (MLE).
Note the following:
For free-form data, the only analysis methods available are RRX and RRY.
The NLRR method is available only when you choose the 3-parameter Weibull distribution.
As a rule of thumb, data sets with small sample sizes and mostly complete data may be best analyzed with rank
regression, while MLE may be more appropriate for data sets with a high proportion of suspensions, interval data
or many observed failures. This is because the MLE method is based on the likelihood function, which considers
each time-to-suspension in the estimate of the parameters, unlike in rank regression where the solution is based on
the plotting positions of the times-to-failure data. However, the MLE solution tends to be badly biased
(statistically distorted) when performed on small sample sizes. As the sample size gets larger, the difference
between the two methods become less important. To determine whether your sample size is large enough for
MLE, you will need to take into account factors such as the amount of variability in your data set and the
acceptable level of risk or margin of error in your calculations.
2.
The ReliaWiki resource portal provides more information on the background theory of each analysis method at:
http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/Parameter Estimation.
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios
168 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
When choosing between rank regression on X (RRX) and rank regression on Y (RRY), note that data are best
analyzed when regressed in the direction of uncertainty. For example, in reliability tests, the times-to-failure (x-
axis) vary from test to test but the probabilities of failure (y-axis) remain consistent. Therefore, if the uncertainty
is on the times-to-failure data, RRX may be the preferred analysis method.
On the other hand, in situations where the time value (x-axis) is known but the probability of failure (y-axis)
varies for each time value, the RRY method may be the appropriate choice because the uncertainty is on the
unreliability estimates.
The Rank Method setting allows you to choose the method for calculating the unreliability estimates of the
times-to-failure data. There are two options available: median ranks and the Kaplan-Meier estimator.
The median ranks method assigns unreliability estimates based on the failure order number and the cumulative
binomial distribution. Alternatively, the Kaplan-Meier estimator uses the product of the surviving fractions,
producing a modified empirical distribution. In general, the median ranks method is preferable and more widely
used for unreliability estimation. Thus, it is a good idea to use the median ranks method unless one has a specific
reason to use the Kaplan-Meier methodology.
The Use RRM for interval data check box is for the ReliaSoft ranking method (RRM). This option is
automatically selected when you have interval censored data in the data sheet; otherwise, the software will use
the default standard ranking method (SRM). The RRM method provides a more accurate estimate of the time
the failure occurred in the interval by iteratively recomputing the failure times and the ranks until the
parameter values converge. For non-interval data (exact times-to-failure data) there is no difference in the
results between the SRM and RRM methods.
3
The Confidence Bounds Method setting allows you to choose the method for calculating the confidence
bounds. The methods available depend on your chosen distribution method or analysis method. Note that
confidence bounds calculations are not available for free-form data.
4
The Fisher Matrix method is the standard way of calculating confidence bounds, and it is the default
method in the software. For data sets with a large number of data points, there is no significant difference
in the results between the Fisher Matrix method and the likelihood ratio method; however, when working
with very small sample sizes, the Likelihood Ratio method may be more accurate.
The Bayesian method calculates the confidence bounds by analyzing prior information about the assumed
distributions parameters along with sample data in order to evaluate the amount of uncertainty in the
estimated values. This method is available only when you choose the MLE analysis method or the
Bayesian-Weibull distribution.
The Beta-Binomial method is a non-parametric approach to confidence bounds calculations, meaning that
no underlying distribution is assumed. This method can be used only with the mixed Weibull distribution.
The Sort before calculation option allows you to sort the failure/suspension times in the data sheet in ascending
order. This will not affect the results of the calculation because, in the standard folio, all data points are assumed
to be independent and identically distributed (i.i.d.).
The Grouped Data Settings affect how the unreliability estimates (median ranks or Kaplan-Meier estimates) are
plotted on the probability plot. These settings are available only when working with grouped data.
When using rank regression with grouped data, the software will plot only the data points that correspond to the
highest median rank position in each group. For example, for 2 groups of data with 10 units each, the software
will plot only 2 data points: the 10th rank position out of 20, and the 20th rank position out of 20. The regression
line is then fitted to these 2 points. When you select the Ungroup on regression option, the software will plot each
individual data point in the group. The regression line is then fitted to all the data points. In general, grouped data
3.
The ReliaWiki resource portal provides more information on the RRM method at: http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/
ReliaSoft's Alternate Ranking Method.
4.
The ReliaWiki resource portal provides more information on the background theory of confidence bounds at:
http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/Confidence Bounds.
4.5 Life Data Analysis Plots
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 169
analysis provides parameter estimates that have wider confidence bounds, while ungrouped data analysis provides
parameter estimates with much narrower confidence bounds.
5
When using MLE analysis, the plotted line is independent of whether data points are treated as grouped or
ungrouped data. The option to Ungroup on MLE plot is only for adjusting the way the grouped data points are
displayed on the MLE probability plot.
The Biasing option is available when you select the 2-parameter Weibull distribution with MLE analysis, and
only if the Bayesian confidence bounds method is not selected. The MLE method is known to obtain biased
(statistically distorted) estimates when performed on small sample sizes. The Unbias parameters option corrects
the biased estimate of the Weibull beta parameter due to the MLE sampling error. The correction factor proposed
by Ross and Hirose is used in Weibull++ to unbias both censored and non-censored data.
6
4.5 Life Data Analysis Plots
Weibull++ includes multiple plot types you can use to visualize the results of your life data analysis. You can create
plots by choosing Life Data > Analysis > Plot or by clicking the icon on the Main page of the control panel.
The scaling, setup, exporting and confidence bounds settings are similar to the options available for all other
Weibull++ plot sheets. To learn how to customize a plot, see Chapter 13.
The following is a description of the different types of plots that can be created in a Weibull++ standard folio:
The Probability plot shows the trend in the probability of failure over time. The plotting positions of the data
points are determined by the failure/suspension times in the data set (x-axis) and their corresponding unreliability
estimates (y-axis).
When the parameters have been calculated using rank regression analysis, the regression line is fitted to the data
points on the plot in order to obtain the distribution parameters. Therefore, the plot can also be used to compare
5.
The ReliaWiki resource portal provides more information about using rank regression with grouped data at:
http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/Grouped_Data_Parameter_Estimation.
Note: When working with grouped interval censored data, you have to be cautious about ungrouping the data. In
interval censored data, it is assumed that the failures occur at some time in the interval between the previous and the
current time-to-failure. For example, a group of 10 units may be interval censored between zero and 100 hours. If you
select the Ungroup on Regression option, the software will treat the 10 units as failures that occur at exactly 100
hours.
6.
R. Ross, Bias and Standard Deviation due to Weibull Parameter Estimation for Small Data Sets, IEEE Transactions on
Dielectrics and Electrical Insulation, vol. 3, no. 1, pp. 2842, Feb. 1996.
H. Hirose, Bias Correction for the Maximum Likelihood Estimates in the Two Parameter Weibull Distribution, IEEE
Transactions on Dielectrics and Electrical Insulation, vol. 6, no. 1, pp. 6668, Feb. 1999.
Tip: Weibull++ includes two additional plots you could use across all types of data folios: the overlay plot, which allows
you to compare different data sets or distributions; and the side-by-side plot, which allows you to display different plots of a
single data set all in a single window for easy comparison. See Chapter 12.
Note: Unlike the probability plots for other distributions, the y-axis in an exponential probability plot always indicates
the reliability instead of the unreliability. This tradition arose from the time when probability plotting was performed by
hand. The exponential reliability model starts with R = 1 at T = 0 (or gamma). Thus, if the unreliability were plotted,
the axis would start at Q = 1 - R = 0, which is not possible, given that the y-axis scale is logarithmic.
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios
170 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
how different distributions fit a particular data set. The closer the regression line tracks the points on the plots, the
better the fit.
In contrast, the maximum likelihood estimation (MLE) method obtains the solution of the line from the likelihood
function, not by the plotting positions of the data points. Therefore, the line is not expected to track the points on
the plot, and the plot should not be used to evaluate the fit of a distribution when using MLE.
The next figures show the rank regression analysis of single data set using a Weibull distribution and a lognormal
distribution. As you can see, the probability plot shows that the Weibull distribution presents the better fit to this
particular data set.
The Reliability vs. Time plot shows the reliability values over time, capturing trends in the products failure
behavior.
4.5 Life Data Analysis Plots
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 171
The Unreliability vs. Time plot shows the probability of failure of the product over time.
The pdf plot shows the probability density function of the data over time, allowing you to visualize the
distribution of the data set.
The Failure Rate vs. Time plot shows the failure rate function of the product over time.
The Contour Plot allows you to display a 3D surface on a 2D plot. The plot represents the 3D surface by plotting
constant z slices, called contours, on a 2D format. Think of it as looking down at the 3D plot from above and the
lines connecting the (x,y) coordinates are plotted at the position where a given z value occurs.
In Weibull++, contour plots are typically used to compare data sets. You can use the overlay plot feature to
superimpose two contour plots from two different data sets at the same confidence level in order to determine the
level at which the two data sets are statistically different. To set up the plot, see page 354 in Chapter 12. The data
sets must be analyzed using the same distribution. In the example shown next, the two contour plots overlap at the
95% confidence level (outer rings). This means that the two data sets do not show a statistically significant
difference at the 95% confidence level.
The Failures/Suspensions Histogram shows the frequency distribution of the failures and suspensions in the
data set. The data set is separated into time intervals, and the number of failures/suspensions that fall into each
time interval are plotted in a bar chart. This chart has two display options:
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios
172 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Probability Density Values displays a chart where the height of each bar is proportional to the frequency of
occurrence of failures in each interval. Select the Superimpose pdf check box to display the pdf line on the
same chart.
Failures displays a chart where the height of each bar is proportional to the number of failures in each
interval. Select the Show suspensions check box to display a bar chart of the number of suspensions in each
interval.
You have the option to adjust the time intervals to get a good indication of how the data points are distributed.
Note that if the histogram has intervals that are, in theory, infinitesimally small, the chart will result in a plot of the
probability density function (pdf). The following charts show some examples of the different frequency
distributions that may appear in a histogram.
A small variability in the distribution suggests that most of the units are probably operating within the design
limits, while a large variability suggests that the units may be operating outside of their design limits. A multi-
modal (multiple peaks) distribution suggests that multiple failure modes or mixed subpopulations may exist in the
data set.
The Failures/Suspensions Pie chart displays the ratio and proportion of failures and suspensions to the whole
data set.
The Failures/Suspensions Timeline plots are similar to horizontal bar charts. The values of the failures and
suspensions are plotted on the y-axis and the time periods are on the x-axis. All the lines are anchored to the y-
axis, giving a common point of measurement. This allows you to visualize trends in your data.
4.6 Weibull++ Quick Calculation Pad
The Quick Calculation Pad (QCP) provides a quick and accurate way of calculating a variety of useful life data
analysis metrics. To access the tool, click the QCP icon on the Main page of the control panel.
4.6.1 How to Use the QCP
To use the QCP, do the following:
Choose a metric in the Calculate area.
If applicable, use the Units drop-down list to specify the units for time values that are entered as inputs and/or
displayed as results. The units in the QCP can be different from the units that were used for the data sheet. For
4.6 Weibull++ Quick Calculation Pad
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 173
example, in a standard folio, you could enter the failure/suspension times in hours but then calculate the reliability
for 1 year of operationthe application will convert the times automatically based on the conversion factors
specified for the database.
If applicable, use the Bounds drop-down list to specify what type of confidence bounds to calculate. The
following graphics illustrate the types.
7
If you select Both One-Sided, the QCP will calculate both the lower one-sided bound and the upper one-sided
bound.
Make any required inputs in the Input area.
Click Calculate. The calculated value(s) will always be displayed in the results area at the top of the window, and
clicking the Report button displays a summary of the current calculation input/output in the Results window.
8
You
can also use the Options drop-down list to configure other settings, including:
Precision sets the number of decimal places displayed in the results.
Scientific Notation sets the point at which numbers will be converted to normalized scientific notation. For
example, setting this to 3 means that all numbers with a value of 1,000 or more will be converted to
normalized scientific notation (e.g., 1.0E+3).
Set Display Font allows to change the font style and size that is used to display the calculated value(s) in the
results.
Select Captions (indicated by a green light on the button) if you want notations to be displayed in the results
area along with the values. For example, if you have selected to calculate the reliability for a given time with
2-sided confidence bounds at the 90% confidence level, the first picture shows the display with captions and
the second picture shows without.
Figure 1: QCP window with Captions on.
7.
The ReliaWiki resource portal provides more information on confidence bounds at: http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/
Confidence Bounds.
Note: Confidence bounds calculation options are disabled when the underlying data type is free-form data.
8.
There is one exception. If you choose Parameter Bounds, the information for all parameters will not fit in the results area at the
top of the window. For this calculation, you must select a type from the Bounds drop-down list and enter the confidence level
under Inputs. When you click Calculate, the information will be displayed directly in the Results window.
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios
174 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Figure 2: QCP window with Captions off.
Select Show Calculation Log (indicated by a green light on the button) if you want to display a log on the right
side of the window that records some or all of the calculations performed during this QCP session.
If Auto Print Results is selected under Options, all results will be automatically printed to the log each time
you perform a calculation.
Otherwise, you can choose which results to add to the log by using the Print button at the bottom of the log
display.
Under the log display, you can also click Feed to advance the tape or Clear to delete all data from the current
log. If you click inside the log, you can copy some or all of the text to the clipboard.
Select Non-Modal QCP to lock the QCP in a top window position so it can remain open while you have access to
all folios and data sheets. The calculations performed in the QCP will be based on the currently active data sheet.
Note that if the currently active data sheet is in a parametric RDA folio, the QCP will change to show the
calculations available for parametric RDAs. If this option is not selected, you will need to close the QCP to access
any data sheet or folio. This setting can also be changed using the While QCP is open, have access to all folios
option on the Other page of the Application Setup. See page 611 in Chapter 29.
4.6.2 QCP Calculations
There are several types of calculations you can perform in the standard folio QCP. The calculations are based on the
estimated parameters and other information from the current data sheet. Each type of calculation may require
additional user inputs in order to solve for the metric of interest.
Probability
Reliability
Calculates the probability that a new product will operate without failure for a given period of time. Enter the time
at which you wish to calculate the reliability in the Mission End Time field. The mission is assumed to start at
time = 0.
For example, a reliability of 90% for a mission end time of 3 years means that if 100 identical units are fielded,
then 90 of them will still be operating at the end of 3 years.
Probability of Failure
Calculates the probability that a new product will be failed in a given period of time. Enter the time at which you
wish to calculate the probability of failure in the Mission End Time field. The mission is assumed to start at time
= 0.
Probability of failure is also known as unreliability, and it is the inverse of the reliability. For example, a
probability of failure of 10% for a mission end time of 3 years is equivalent to a 90% reliability.
Conditional Reliability
4.6 Weibull++ Quick Calculation Pad
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 175
Calculates the probability that a product will successfully operate at a specific time interval given that it has
operated successfully up to a specified time. Enter the start time of the interval in the Mission Start Time field
and enter the length of the interval in the Mission Additional Time field.
For example, a product may have a reliability of 90% for 3 years. If the product has operated for 2 years without
failure, the conditional reliability for an additional year (for a total of 3 years of operation) may be 95%.
Conditional Probability of Failure
Calculates the probability that a product will be failed at a specific time interval given that it has not failed up to a
specified time. Enter the start time of the interval in the Mission Start Time field and enter the length of the
interval in the Mission Additional Time field.
For example, a product may have a 10% probability of failure for 3 years. If the product has operated for 2 years
without failure, the conditional probability of failure for an additional year (for a total of 3 years of operation)
may be 5%.
Life
Reliable Life
Calculates the estimated time at which a specified reliability value will be achieved. Enter the reliability goal in
the Required Reliability field. For example, a goal of 90% reliability with a reliable life of 4 years means that if
100 identical units are fielded, then 90 of them will be still be operating at the end of 4 years.
BX% Life
Calculates the estimated time at which a specified probability of failure will be achieved. Enter the probability of
failure in the BX% Life At field. For example, a B10 life of 4 years means 10% of the fielded units are expected
to be failed at the end of 4 years of operation (note that this is equivalent to a 90% reliability with a reliable life of
4 years).
Mean Life
Calculates the average time at which a product is expected to operate before failure. In the Weibull++ standard
folio, the mean life is the mean time to failure (MTTF). For example, assume you tested three identical units
starting from time = 0 until all of the units have failed. The first unit failed at 10 hours, the second failed at 12
hours and the third failed at 13 hours. The MTTF is the average of the three failure times, which is 11.67 hours.
For more complex repairable system analyses, see ReliaSofts BlockSim and RGA++.
Whats Changed? In previous versions of Weibull++, this calculation was called Warranty Time.
Note: In the early days of reliability engineering, bearing manufacturers used the term "B10 life" to refer to the time by
which 10% of the components would fail. Keeping with tradition, ReliaSoft retained this nomenclature but replaced
10 with X since the software allows you to get this information at any percentage point and not just at 10% (e.g.,
B1, B5, etc.).
Note: The term mean time to failure (MTTF) is used as a metric for the analysis of non-repairable components. In the
Weibull++ standard folio, all data are assumed to come from non-repairable components that are independent and
identically distributed (i.i.d.). On the other hand, the term mean time between failures (MTBF) is used as a metric in
repairable systems analysis, where the same system may fail and be repaired multiple times. To analyze simple
repairable system data in Weibull++, use the recurrent event data analysis (RDA) folio.
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios
176 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Rate
Failure Rate
Calculates the instantaneous number of failures per unit time that can be expected at a certain time given that a
unit survives to that age. Enter the time at which you wish to calculate the failure rate in the Mission End Time
field.
For example, a failure rate of 0.01 at 100 hours means that each unit that survives to 100 hours has approximately
a 1% probability of failure in the next hour.
Bounds
Parameter Bounds
Calculates the upper and lower 1- or 2-sided confidence bounds on the parameter estimates. The result allows you
quantify the amount of uncertainty in the estimates. Click Calculate to open the Results window, which displays
the confidence bounds on the parameters.
4.7 Life Data Analysis Example
Ten identical units of a prototype device were reliability tested at the same application and operation stress levels. Six
of the units failed during testing after operating for the following times: 16, 34, 53, 75, 93, 120 hours. Four other units
were still operating after 120 hours.
The objective is to obtain the reliability of the prototype device at 60 hours, at the lower 1-sided 90% confidence
bound.
The first step is to add a new Weibull++ standard folio by choosing Insert > Folios > Weibull++ Standard Folio.
In the Weibull++ Folio Data Sheet Setup window, select Times-to-Failure data for the data type and then select
My data sheet contains suspensions (right censored data). For the time units, select Hour. Click OK to create
the folio.
Enter the data in the folio. On the Main page of the control panel, choose the 2P-Weibull distribution and the
MLE parameter estimation method, as shown next. (You may also choose the parameter estimation method on the
Analysis page of the control panel.)
4.7 Life Data Analysis Example
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 177
Next, choose Life Data > Analysis > Calculate or click the icon on the Main page of the control panel.
The parameters of the distribution will be automatically computed and displayed in the Analysis Summary area
of the control panel. The parameters are beta = 1.5070 and eta = 128.6414.
To estimate the reliability of the device, open the QCP by choosing Life Data > Analysis > Quick Calculation
Pad or by clicking the icon on the Main page of the control panel.
In the QCP, choose to calculate the Reliability with Lower One-Sided confidence bounds. Select Hour for the
time units and then make the following inputs:
Mission End Time = 60
Confidence Level = 0.9
Click Calculate to obtain the results, as shown next.
The results show that the reliability of the prototype device at 60 hours is 72.84%. The lower one-sided 90%
confidence bound is estimated to be 54.32%. This means that there is 90% probability that the reliability of the
device will be at least 54.32% after 60 hours of operation.
To visualize the reliability of the device over time, close the QCP and then create a plot by choosing Life Data >
Analysis > Plot, or by clicking the icon on the Main page of the control panel.
Next, display the confidence bounds in the plot by choosing Plots > Confidence Bounds > Confidence Bounds
or by right-clicking the plot sheet and then choosing Confidence Bounds on the shortcut menu. In the Confidence
Bounds Setup window, make the following selections:
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios
178 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Sides: One-Sided; Show Bottom
Type: Reliability (Type II)
Confidence Level: 90%
Click OK. On the control panel of the plot sheet, choose the Reliability vs. Time plot type. As you can see, the
line representing the confidence bound is fairly far from the reliability line, indicating a significant amount of
uncertainty in the results. Based on this result, you may choose to perform further analysis on the data, such as
testing those 4 suspended units to failure to see whether the uncertainty is due to the small number of failures in
the data set or due to the variability inherent in the device itself.
4.8 Weibull++ Distribution Wizard
The Distribution Wizard performs multiple goodness of fit tests to determine the best distribution for a data set based
on the chosen parameter estimation method. Note that the Distribution Wizard only serves as a guide. You should
compare its suggestion with your own engineering knowledge about the product being modeled before making the
final decision on which distribution to use for your data set.
4.8.1 Comparing Distributions
To use the Distribution Wizard, you must have at least two failure data points in the current data sheet.
The first step is to choose a parameter estimation method from the control panel. Next, open the Distribution Wizard
by choosing Life Data > Analysis > Distribution Wizard or by clicking the icon on the Main page of the control
panel.
On the Main tab of the Distribution Wizard, select the distributions you would like to consider and then click Analyze
to start the evaluation. The distributions will be ranked according to how well they fit the data, with rank 1 being the
best fit. In the figure shown next, the 2P-Weibull distribution is the suggested distribution for the data set. The
4.8 Weibull++ Distribution Wizard
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 179
parameter estimation method selected in the data sheet (in this case, MLE) is displayed at the bottom of the window.
To calculate the parameters of the distribution in the rank 1 position, click the Implement button. This closes the
Distribution Wizard, and the results will appear in the Analysis Summary area of the control panel.
4.8.2 Goodness of Fit Tests
You can view the calculations behind the ranking on the Analysis Details tab. The Distribution Wizard performs 3
goodness of fit tests to determine the rank of the distributions:
The Kolmogorov-Smirnov (GOF) test, which tests for statistical difference (the difference between the
expected and obtained results).
The correlation coefficient (PLOT) test, which measures how well the plotted points fit a straight line.
The Likelihood Value (LKV) test, which computes the value of the log-likelihood function given the parameters
of the distribution.
Note: You may find that the Distribution Wizard often recommends either the 3-parameter Weibull distribution or the
generalized gamma (G-Gamma) distribution. This is because these distributions have the ability to mimic the attributes of
other distributions based on the values of the distribution's parameters. In such cases, if you have reason to believe that
the recommended distribution is not applicable, you may prefer to select the distribution with the next highest ranking.
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios
180 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
On the Analysis Details tab, the Initial sheet contains the values computed from the 3 tests. The AVGOF column
contains the average values from the GOF test, the AVPLOT column contains the average values from the PLOT test
and the LKV column contains the average values from the LKV test, as shown next.
The Intermediate sheet displays the ranking of the distributions based on the values from the Initial sheet. The
RAVGOF column contains the ranking of the GOF test, the RAVPLOT column contains the ranking of the PLOT
test and the RLKV column contains the ranking of the LKV test.
The values from the Initial sheet are first weighted (e.g., AVGOF * weight) and then summed into one overall DESV
value (i.e., weighted decision variable). The distribution with the lowest DESV value is considered to be the best fit
for the data. The weights assigned to each test are based on the parameter estimation method. For example, by
default, a higher weight is given to the LKV test if the parameter estimation is MLE; whereas in rank regression,
higher weights are given to the K-S and Rho tests. The weights can be adjusted in the Setup window of the
Distribution Wizard.
The Final Report sheet displays all the distributions in their final ranking order and the calculated parameters for
each distribution.
4.8.3 Setup Window
You have the option to change the weighs that are used to determine the ranking of the distributions. Click the Setup
button at the lower right corner of the Distribution Wizard to view the settings, as shown next.
4.9 Batch Auto Run
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 181
You can use different weights for the rank regression method and the MLE method. The sum of the three weights for
each parameter estimation method must equal 100%. The weights are:
Goodness of Fit represents the weight percentage for the GOF test.
Plot Fit represents the weight percentage for the PLOT test.
Likelihood Ratio represents the weight percentage for the LKV test.
The settings in the Other Options area specifically affect the Weibull and the exponential distributions:
Discard if location parameter is less than zero will exclude the Weibull and exponential distributions from the
ranking if their location parameters are negative. A negative location parameter indicates that failures occurred
before time = 0, or before a product operated for the first time.
Discard 3-parameter Weibull if location parameter is less than (_)% of min. time will exclude the Weibull
distribution from the ranking if the value of the location parameter is smaller than the first time-to-failure. The
default setting is for a value that is less than 1% of the first time-to-failure, which is a value close to zero.
Discard Weibull if shape parameter is greater than (_) will exclude the Weibull distribution from the ranking
if the shape (beta) parameter is greater than a specified value. The default setting is to discard the distribution if
the beta value is greater than 15.
4.9 Batch Auto Run
The Batch Auto Run utility allows you to extract data subsets from an existing data set. For example, consider a data
sheet that contains the failure times for a product manufactured in two different plants. By using Batch Auto Run, you
can filter the data by manufacturing plant and then analyze the failures from each plant separately.
4.9.1 Batch Auto Run Setup
To use the tool, you must first define a subset ID for each data point you want to extract, making sure that the data
points you wish to group together all have the same subset ID.
Next, open the utility by choosing Life Data > Options > Batch Auto Run or by clicking the icon on the Main page
of the control panel.
Note: The subset ID can be any text up to 30 characters, including spaces. For example, A _ _ X is not the same as A _
X where _ is used to designate a space.
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios
182 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
You will be presented with a list of all the subset IDs in your data sheet, similar to the inset shown next.
Double-click an available subset ID to include it in the batch auto run process or drag the subset ID to the Selected
Subset IDs column. You can also click the Select All Available button to automatically include all subset IDs in the
batch auto run process. Each selected subset ID will be extracted to its own separate data sheet at the end of the batch
auto run process.
4.9.2 Processing Preferences
You can set your preferences for how the data will be processed on the Processing Preferences tab. When you change
the settings and click OK, your preferences will be saved as the default settings for the next time you apply the batch
auto run process for any Weibull++ standard folio.
4.9 Batch Auto Run
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 183
The following options are available:
Extraction Options allow you to specify how you want the data of the selected subset IDs to be extracted. The
first option simply extracts the data points for each subset ID into separate data sheets so that you can analyze the
data separately.
The second option allows you to extract the data sets that are required to perform a competing failure modes
(CFM) analysis. For example, consider a device that has three competing failure modes A, B and C. When you
extract the data points of mode A, the Batch Auto Run utility will retain all the data points due to mode A but
mark all other data points due to modes B and C as suspensions. In CFM analysis, the data points of modes B and
C are considered to be suspensions because if they did not exist, all the units will have failed at some point in the
future due to mode A.
Calculation Options allow you select whether to automatically analyze the extracted data sheets and create a
probability plot. The parameters of the extracted data sheet will be calculated using the same analysis settings
specified for the original data sheet.
Sheet Names Options allow you specify where you wish to put the extracted data. The first time you run the
batch auto run process, the utility will extract the data points into new data sheets with the same names as the
subset IDs. If you run the process again for the same subset IDs, you will have the option to either replace the data
in the existing sheets or to always extract the data to new sheets.
If you select the Always place data in a new sheet option, the data will be extracted to another new data sheet
with the same name as the subset ID plus an increment to reflect the number of additional data sheets that have
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios
184 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
been created for the same subset ID. The increments can be separated by a parenthesis, dash or space. The
following example shows the increment number separated by a parenthesis.
4.10 Goodness of Fit Results
The Goodness of Fit Results is a utility that uses statistical tests and the correlation coefficient to determine how well
the parameters of the distribution fit the data. Note that this utility can only be used to evaluate data sets that do not
contain censored data.
To use the utility, calculate the parameters of the distribution of your data set first and then choose Life Data >
Options > Goodness of Fit Results.
The Goodness of Fit Results window automatically displays the computed values of the following:
Both the Modified Kolmogorov-Smirnov (K-S) test and the Chi-Squared test return the probability that the
respective critical value (D_Crit for K-S and X^2_Crit for chi-squared) is less than the calculated statistic value
(D statistic for K-S and X^2 statistic for chi-squared). The calculated statistic value is the difference between the
observed probability and the predicted probability. High probability values, close to 1, indicate that there is a
significant difference between the theoretical distribution and the data set. In other words, it is an indication that
the model may not be a good fit for the data. Note that the Chi-Squared test may not produce valid results for
smaller sample sizes (e.g., minimum of 35).
The P-Value shows the probability that the calculated statistic value is greater than a random variable. If the p-
value is smaller than your specified level of significance, then the model may not be a good fit for the data.
The Correlation Coefficient test determines how well the plotted points fit a straight line. This test is only
available if the parameters were estimated using rank regression. The closer the value of rho () is to 1, the better
the linear fit. A value closer to zero would indicate that the data points are randomly scattered and have no pattern
or correlation to the regression line model.
4.11 Auto Group Data
The Auto Group Data tool is available for both Weibull++ and ALTA standard folios. It automatically groups together
data points with the same failure/suspension times. Grouping data significantly speeds up calculations when you have
a very large data set.
To group your data, click the Auto Group Data icon on the Main page of the control panel.
In addition to grouping exactly identical values, you also have the option to round the values in the data sheet (e.g., to
the nearest whole number or to the nearest multiple of 10) and then group them. This can be useful when you need to
set the accuracy of your computations. For example, a recorded observation of 509.71 cycles may be known to be
accurate only when rounded to the nearest whole number.
4.12 Mixed Weibull Analysis
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 185
In Weibull++, the utility considers the values (or rounded values) to be identical only if they have identical subset
IDs, as shown in the figure below. In ALTA, the values are considered to be identical only if they have identical Use
Stress levels and identical subset IDs.
Note that if you have a second subset ID column in the data sheet, the information in that column is not taken into
account and you may lose any information entered in that column.
Figure 1: Example of the Auto Group Data tool in a Weibull++ standard folio.
4.12 Mixed Weibull Analysis
Mixed Weibull analysis is a method that can be used in situations when there are multiple failure behaviors, or trends,
that exist in a single data set. The mixed Weibull method fits a single distribution with Weibull parameters and
portion values for each subpopulation in the data set. The mixed Weibull distribution is also known as multi-modal
Weibull.
Tip: If the failure modes are assumed to be statistically independent and the data set can be directly categorized into
distinct subpopulations, competing failure modes (CFM) analysis may be more appropriate. See Section 4.14 on page
192.
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios
186 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Data sets with mixed populations are often recognized by the dogleg or S-shaped curve pattern of the data points on
a probability plot. For example, consider the following data set.
When the data set is analyzed with a 2-parameter Weibull distribution and plotted on a probability plot, as shown
next, the pattern of the data points looks as if it could be modeled by two straight lines of different slopes. This
indicates the possible existence of subpopulations in the data set.
Based on the pattern observed on the probability plot, let us assume that there are two subpopulations in the data set.
To use the mixed Weibull distribution, follow the steps below:
Enter the data from the table into a Weibull++ standard folio.
Next, on the Main page of the control panel, click the Distribution drop-down list. Choose Mixed Weibull and
then choose the number of subpopulations to consider (for this example, choose 2 Subpop-Mixed Weibull).
Click Calculate.
Weibull++ will automatically fit a 2 subpopulation mixture model with Weibull parameters and portion values. In
the results shown next, the Subpop 1 area displays the parameters that were calculated for the first subpopulation.
The result showing Portion = 0.6245 means that Subpop 1 comprises 62.45% of the data points. To see the
Failure Times (in Hours)
for 20 Test Units
5.2 55.7 140.1 191.3
11.3 71.8 150.5 198.8
16.6 72 166 206.7
35.9 116.4 186.7 234.3
38.2 135.8 188.8 249.8
4.12 Mixed Weibull Analysis
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 187
parameters calculated for the other 37.55% of the data points, click the arrow on the control panel and choose
Subpop 2, as shown next.
To view a worksheet containing a summary of all the subpopulations and their corresponding parameters, click
anywhere within the parameter results area of the control panel. This opens the Results window, which displays
the calculated results in a worksheet. From the Results window, you can edit, copy or print the results.
To view the probability plot of the data set, click the Plot icon on the control panel, as shown next. As you can
see, the 2-subpopulation mixed Weibull distribution provides a better fit to the pattern of the data points compared
to the 2P Weibull distribution. You can use the Quick Calculation Pad (QCP) to make reliability predictions
Note: The subpopulation numbers are ordered based on the value of the scale parameter (eta). The order is used
only to identify the subpopulation and does not affect the analysis.
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios
188 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
within the range of the observations; however, care must be taken when making projections outside the range of
the observed failure times (i.e., extrapolation).
To visualize the mixed Weibull distribution, choose the pdf Plot in the Plot Type drop-down list, as shown next.
From time = 0 to approximately time = 100, the pdf exhibits the decreasing with time trend characteristic of a
Weibull distribution with a beta value less than or equal to 1. This region characterizes the contribution of
subpopulation 1. From time = 100 onward, the pdf exhibits the bell-shaped curve typical of a Weibull distribution
with a beta value in the vicinity of 5. This region characterizes the contribution of subpopulation 2.
Note that the mixed Weibull analysis method does not specify which data point belongs to which subpopulation. If
reliability predictions are needed at the subpopulation level, you will need to gather additional information in order to
4.13 Bayesian-Weibull Analysis
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 189
identify which data point belongs to which subpopulation and then perform a competing failure modes (CFM)
analysis on the data.
4.13 Bayesian-Weibull Analysis
Bayesian analysis methods are based on the concept that the probability of an event or behavior can be predicted from
previous pieces of evidence related to the occurrence of that event or behavior. A simple example is a sports
tournament, where the probability of a particular team winning could be based on the teams previous wins and
losses. However, recent changes could also affect the teams chances of winning, such as whether a team added new
players this year, or other conditions that might tend to favor one team or the other. Bayesian analysis uses evidence
based on both the teams prior track record and recent developments in order to predict the outcome of the
tournament.
In Weibull++, the Bayesian-Weibull analysis method combines the concept of Bayesian statistics with the properties
of the Weibull distribution. Similar to the example described above, the Bayesian-Weibull method combines prior
information about the failure behavior of a product, along with current observations, in order to make predictions
about the life characteristics of the product. This type of analysis is particularly useful when there is limited life data
for a given product or failure mode but there is a strong prior understanding of the failure rate behavior.
The prior information in the analysis is in the form of a distribution fitted to a range of likely beta values. In the
context of life data analysis, the beta parameter is used to define the shape of the Weibull distribution, which reflects
the failure behavior of a product (i.e., whether the failure rate increases, decreases or remains constant over time).
The range of beta values could be obtained from data for a similar product design or from engineering knowledge.
When a distribution is fitted to the range of beta values, the distribution is called the prior distribution of beta and it
serves to model the most likely failure behavior of the product.
4.13.1 Example
Take for example a device that was redesigned for improved reliability. A test performed on the new design produced
only a few failures; however, the same failure modes as the original design were observed. To use the Bayesian-
Weibull approach, you will first need to obtain the prior distribution of beta in order to describe the failure behavior
observed for the original design. In Weibull++, there are four distributions available: normal, lognormal, exponential
and uniform.
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios
190 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The following example shows a range of known beta values obtained from prior analyses of the original design. The
prior distribution of beta is determined to be a lognormal distribution with a log-mean of 0.9064 and a log-standard
deviation of 0.3325, as shown next.
Next, collect the current times-to-failure data of the new design and enter the information in a new data sheet, as
shown next. On the Main page of the control panel, click the Distribution drop-down list and choose Bayesian-
Weibull > B-W Lognormal Prior. Click Calculate. A window similar to the one shown in the inset will be
displayed.
Enter the parameter values of the prior distribution of beta: LogMean = 0.9064 and LogStd = 0.3325. Click OK.
4.13 Bayesian-Weibull Analysis
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 191
The following figure shows the results of the analysis.
Note that instead of a single calculated value for each of the parameters, the parameters of the Bayesian-Weibull
distribution are distributed. This result is known as a posterior distribution. In the figure, the result showing that Beta
(Median) = 2.361279 means that the median value of the posterior distribution of the beta parameter is 2.361279. For
convenience, this is used as the single point estimate for the beta parameter.
By default, Weibull++ calculates the point estimates from the median value of the posterior distribution. This is
because the median value always corresponds to the 50th percentile of a distribution. You have the option to change
this setting and calculate the mean value of the posterior distribution instead; however, note that the mean is not a
fixed percentile and this could cause issues when comparing results across different data sets. The option to change
this setting is available on the Analysis page of the control panel when you choose the Bayesian-Weibull analysis, as
shown next.
To obtain point estimates of a metric such as the probability of failure or the reliability at a given point in time, use the
Quick Calculation Pad (QCP). The QCP will automatically compute the metric of interest using the median value of
the posterior distribution (or the mean, if you switch the setting on the Analysis page of the control panel).
The following plots show the confidence bounds for the Bayesian-Weibull analysis that incorporates the prior
information compared to the confidence bounds of a 2-parameter Weibull analysis of the new design data only. As
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios
192 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
you can see, the confidence bounds of the Bayesian-Weibull analysis are tighter, leading to a more precise analysis of
whether the redesign improved the life of the device.
Figure 1: Confidence bounds of the Bayesian-Weibull analysis
Figure 2: Confidence bounds of the 2-parameter Weibull analysis
4.14 Competing Failure Modes (CFM) Analysis
Often, a product could fail due to any of several possible causes of failure. For a non-repairable component, each unit
can only fail once, hence, if the occurrence of any one failure mode results in a failure of the component, the failure
modes can be considered to compete to cause the failure. Competing failure modes (CFM) analysis assumes a
4.14 Competing Failure Modes (CFM) Analysis
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 193
series reliability model, where the overall reliability is equal to the product of the reliability equations for all of the
failure modes, or:
where n is the number of failure modes considered. Note that CFM analysis can be performed only when the product
is non-repairable and when it can be assumed that the failure modes are statistically independent (i.e., the occurrence
of one failure mode does not affect the probability of occurrence for the other failure modes). Furthermore, the
Competing Failure Modes option that is built-in to the Weibull++ standard folio supports the analysis of up to four
competing failure modes and applies the same distribution to analyze all of the modes. If your analysis does not fit
these conditions, it may be more appropriate to use a reliability block diagram (RBD) analysis approach.
4.14.1 Example of CFM Analysis
Consider a water pump that is considered failed when either its gasket or its valve fails. To use CFM analysis in a
Weibull++ standard folio, you must categorize each failure time into distinct subset IDs. The following data sheet
shows the categorized failure times.
On the Main page of the control panel, choose Competing Failure Modes and then choose a distribution that is
appropriate to analyze the data for each failure mode (for this example, choose CFM-Weibull). Next, select MLE as
(1)
Tip: When it is not possible to categorize your data set into distinct modes, the mixed Weibull analysis may be more
appropriate.
Note: The subset ID can be any text up to 30 characters, including spaces. For example, A _ _ X is not the same as A _
X where _ is used to designate a space.
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios
194 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
the parameter estimation method, and click Calculate. You will be presented with a list of all the subset IDs in your
data sheet, as in the figure shown next.
You can define up to four modes to include in the CFM analysis, and each mode can be associated with one or more
subset IDs.
9
First, select the subset ID(s) in the Available Subsets column. Next, select a mode from the Modes
column and then click the arrow buttons to assign the selected subset ID(s) to the selected mode. You can also double-
click or drag a subset ID to assign it to a mode.
9.
For example, consider a product with components A, B and C, where components B and C are identical, used in two places in
the product and subjected to identical stresses. In this case, components B and C are expected to exhibit identical failure modes;
therefore, they can be analyzed together and grouped under a single mode for CFM analysis.
4.14 Competing Failure Modes (CFM) Analysis
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 195
After you assign Gasket failure to Mode 1 and Valve failure to Mode 2, click OK. Weibull++ will
automatically calculate the parameters for each mode separately. You can view the parameters of a mode by clicking
the arrow in the control panel and then choosing the mode from the drop-down list, as shown next.
To view a list of all the modes and their corresponding parameters, click anywhere within the parameter results area
of the control panel. This opens the Results window, which displays the calculated results in a worksheet. From the
Results window, you can edit, copy or print the results.
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios
196 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
To visualize how each failure mode contributes to the water pumps overall probability of failure, click the Plot icon
on the control panel. The solution of the probability line is based on Eqn. (1). All other plots and the calculations you
perform via the Quick Calculation Pad (QCP) are also based on the same equation.
4.14.2 Using Reliability Block Diagrams (RBDs) for Failure Modes Analysis
As mentioned above, the competing failure modes (CFM) analysis options that are built into the Weibull++ standard
folio (e.g., CFM-Weibull, CFM-lognormal, etc.) assume a simple series reliability model and use only one type of
distribution to analyze all the modes. When your analysis is more complicated, Weibull++ offers a different method
for failure modes analysis. The method described next applies in any or all of the following circumstances:
The analysis involves more than four failure modes.
The failure modes are described by different life distributions.
The relationship between the failure modes does not follow a series configuration. For example, if more than one
failure mode must occur together in order for the component to fail, a parallel configuration must be used for the
analysis and this is referred to as complex failure modes analysis rather than competing failure modes
analysis.
4.14.2.1 Example of Using RBDs for Failure Modes Analysis
Using the same water pump system in the previous example, create an RBD that illustrates the relationship between
the failure modes.
The first step is to separately analyze the data set of each failure mode. When you analyze the data set of a particular
mode, the failure times for all other unrelated modes are considered to be suspensions. This captures the fact that
those units operated for a period of time without experiencing the failure mode of interest before they were removed
from observation when they failed due to another mode. You can easily perform this step via the Batch Auto Run
utility. To do this, follow the steps below:
In the data sheet that contains the failure times for the gasket and valve, open the Batch Auto Run utility by
choosing Life Data > Options > Batch Auto Run or by clicking the icon on the Main page of the control panel.
4.14 Competing Failure Modes (CFM) Analysis
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 197
In the Batch Auto Run window, click the Select All Available button at the bottom of the window to
automatically include all the modes in the batch auto run process. Click the Processing Preferences tab and select
the option shown next.
Click OK. The data set for each mode will be extracted to separate data sheets in the folio. Select an appropriate
distribution for each failure mode and estimate the parameters for each separate data sheet. (For this example, use
the 2P-Weibull distribution and the MLE parameter estimation method for all the data sheets).
The next step is to describe the relationships between the failure modes. To do this, add an RBD to the project by
choosing Insert > Tools > Diagram.
This creates a reliability block diagram (RBD) folio, which gives you the ability to create blocks that represent the
failure modes. You can use arrows to connect the blocks in an appropriate configuration to describe the relationship
between the failure modes and show how each mode can result in a failure for the product. The following RBD shows
that the water pump will fail if either the gasket or valve fails.
The following is a brief description on how to build the diagram shown here. For complete instructions, see page 470
in Chapter 17.
Add a junction block by choosing Diagram > Diagram Tools > Add Junction. The junction block serves as a
unique starting point for the diagram and has no properties associated with it.
Add blocks by choosing Diagram > Diagram Tools > Add Block. You will be asked to select the data sheet of
the failure mode that the block will represent.
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios
198 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Add nodes by choosing Diagram > Diagram Tools > Add Node. The nodes act as switches that the diagram
paths move through.
Add arrows by choosing Diagram > Diagram Tools > Connect Blocks.
To simultaneously analyze the diagram and calculate the components overall reliability, choose Diagram > Analysis
> Analyze or click the icon on the control panel of the RBD folio.
All reliability calculations performed via the QCP tool of the RBD folio will be based on the resulting reliability
equation of the diagram.
4.15 Alter Parameters Without Recalculation
The Alter Parameters Without Recalculation feature enables you to experiment with possible alternative scenarios by
allowing you to alter the values of the calculated parameters, assuming that the ranks, the likelihood function and the
Fisher Matrix (evaluated at the original parameter estimates) remain the same.
In plots, the position of the data points remain the same but the solution line and all subsequent analysis made via the
Quick Calculation Pad and other tools are based on the modified parameter values. Therefore, the analysis may be
appropriate only within the context of your specific what-if analysis.
To use this tool, choose Life Data > Options > Alter Parameters > Alter Parameters (w/o) Recalculation or click
the icon on the control panel.
4.16 Alter One Parameter and Recalculate
The Alter One Parameter and Recalculate feature enables you to experiment with possible alternative scenarios by
allowing you to manually alter one of the parameter values and then have the software estimate the other parameter
values that would result in a good fit for the distribution. The ranks and the likelihood function are assumed to remain
the same; however, unlike the Alter Parameters without Recalculation method, the Fisher Matrix is evaluated at the
altered parameter values. The solution line in the plots and the results in the QCP will be based on the new values of
the parameters; therefore, the analysis may be appropriate only within the context of your specific "what-if" analysis.
You can select this option by choosing Life Data > Options > Alter Parameters > Alter One Parameter (And
Recalculate).
Note that this feature can only be used with the 2-parameter and the 3-parameter Weibull distributions using MLE.
For the 3-parameter Weibull distribution, in order to modify the value of the gamma parameter, and have the software
estimate the new values of the other parameters, all three parameters must be estimated using MLE. To enable the
setting, select the Use True 3-P MLE on Weibull option in the Calculations page of the Application Setup. Note that
the pure MLE solution is not always stable, and may fail for some data sets.
4.17 Specify Points
The Specify Points feature enables you to experiment with possible alternative scenarios by allowing you to adjust
the way that the line is fitted to the points for a rank regression analysis. The ranks will be calculated based on all of
the data points but the regression line (which determines the parameter estimates) will be fitted only to the points you
Tip: ReliaSoft's advanced reliability block diagram software, BlockSim, can handle advanced configurations and analyses,
such as dependent failure modes (i.e., the occurrence of one failure mode affects the probability of occurrence of the other
modes).
4.17 Specify Points
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 199
have specified. Any plots or QCP results will be based on the adjusted line, and therefore may be appropriate only
within the context of your specific what-if analysis.
To use the Specify Points feature, you will first need to identify the data points that you wish to include in the
regression line/parameter estimation. In a Weibull++ standard folio data sheet, assign the selected data points to a
specific subset ID, as shown in the following example.
Next, choose Life Data > Options > Specify Points or click the icon on the Main page of the control panel.
You will be presented with a list of all the subset IDs in your data sheet as shown next.
Double-click the subset ID of the data points you wish to include in the analysis (in this case, it is subset ID
Include). You can also drag the subset ID to the Selected Subset ID column. Click OK.
Next, choose an appropriate distribution for the data set and calculate the parameters. The control panel will display
the parameters of the regression model, and also display a status to indicate that the standard analysis method has
been altered and the parameters were calculated based on a regression line fitted only through the specified data
points.
4 Weibull++ Standard Folios
200 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The overlay plot shown next illustrates the changes to the estimates of the parameters between the cases where the
three data points are either included or excluded from the regression analysis.
4.18 Calculations with No Data Entered
When you calculate a Weibull++ standard folio that does not contain any data, the software will prompt you to
specify parameters and then allows you to use the plots and QCP in the same way that you would for a calculated data
set.
To do this, create a Weibull++ standard folio data sheet but do not enter any data. On the control panel, choose a
distribution for the what-if analysis and then choose Life Data > Analysis > Calculate or click the icon on the Main
page of the control panel.
With no data specified, this opens an input window containing two tabs:
The Parameters tab allows you to perform an analysis based on a set of parameters you specify. Enter your
desired parameters and click OK to use those values in the analysis. You can use the plots and the QCP to obtain
plots and calculations based on the specified parameters. The parameters may or may not be based on an actual
data set, therefore the analysis is appropriate only within the context of your specific scenario.
4.18 Calculations with No Data Entered
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 201
The Options tab allows you to generate a data set based on a sample size, number of failures, probability and the
parameters you have entered in the Parameters tab. Select the Add data and recompute option to enable this
feature, as shown next.
In the example shown, 6 out of the 10 units in the sample are failures and the probability estimate is set to 50%.
When you click OK, the software will obtain the rank of each failure based on the cumulative binomial equation
and the specified probability.
When you click OK, the software will obtain the corresponding failure times of each rank based on the
distribution and specified parameters, and then automatically recompute the parameters of the selected
distribution based on the obtained failure times. The new parameters are displayed in the Analysis Summary area
of the control panel.
Note: The ranks can be found for any probability greater than zero and less than 1, but when probability = 50%, the
software computes the median ranks. The ReliaWiki resource portal has more information on median ranks at:
http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/Parameter_Estimation.
Tip: If you wish to experiment with the median ranks and see how they affect the solution of the analysis, you can use
the Fill Median Ranks tool. To use this tool, first create a data sheet for free-form data, and then enter your times-to-
failure data in the X-Axis value column. Next, choose Life Data > Options > Fill Median Ranks. For each time-to-
failure value in the 'X-Axis value column, the Y-Axis value column is filled with the corresponding median ranks
value.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 203
In basic life data analysis, units are tested under normal use conditions in order to obtain
information about a products failure behavior. In some cases, however, it is desirable to
obtain this information more quickly than is possible with use level testing. For example, products with long lifetimes
or short periods between design and release, as well as products that are operated continuously, may produce results
too slowly with basic life data analysis.
The ALTA standard folio is used to perform quantitative accelerated life testing data analysis. In this analysis, the
engineer extrapolates a products failure behavior at normal conditions from life data obtained at accelerated stress
levels. Since products fail more quickly at accelerated stress levels, this sort of analysis allows the engineer to obtain
reliability information about a product (e.g., mean life, probability of failure at a specific time, etc.) in a shorter time.
1

This chapter describes how to use the ALTA standard folio, including:
Setting up an ALTA standard folio - Section 5.1 (p. 204).
How to analyze life data, including:
Using the control panel - Section 5.2 (p. 207).
Generating ALTA plots - Section 5.3 (p. 212).
Selecting stresses to use in the analysis - Section 5.4 (p. 215).
Selecting stress transformations - Section 5.5 (p. 215).
Defining the use stress level - Section 5.6 (p. 216).
Performing reliability calculations via the Quick Calculation Pad (QCP) - Section 5.7 (p. 216).
Example of a single-stress accelerated life testing data analysis - Section 5.8 (p. 220).
Example of a two-stress accelerated life testing data analysis - Section 5.9 (p. 222).
Working with time-varying stresses - Section 5.10 (p. 225).
Additional analysis tools, including:
Choosing a life distribution using the Distribution Wizard - Section 5.11 (p. 232).
Adding and removing stress and subset ID columns - Section 5.12 (p. 233).
Performing a likelihood ratio test - Section 5.13 (p. 234).
Transferring data to a Weibull++ standard folio - Section 5.14 (p. 235).
Converting stress values from one unit of measurement to another - Section 5.15 (p. 237).
ALTA Standard Folios
5
1.
The ReliaWiki resource portal has more information on the basics of accelerated life testing at: http://www.ReliaWiki.org/
index.php/Introduction_to_Accelerated_Life_Testing.
5 ALTA Standard Folios
204 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
What-if analysis methods, including:
Altering all the parameters of a model - Section 5.16 (p. 238).
Altering one parameter of a model and recalculating the remaining parameters - Section 5.17 (p. 238).
Performing calculations with insufficient test data - Section 5.18 (p. 238).
5.1 ALTA Standard Folio Setup
The ALTA standard folio contains the tools for performing an accelerated life testing data analysis. A setup window
for configuring your folio will be displayed when you:
Add an ALTA standard folio to an existing project by choosing Insert > Folios > ALTA Standard Folio. You can
also right-click the ALTA Folios folder in the current project explorer and choose Add Standard Folio on the
shortcut menu.
Change the types of data that are included in your data sheet by clicking the Alter Data Type icon on the control
panel, or by choosing ALTA > Format and View > Alter Data Type.
The first page of the Data Sheet Setup window is shown next.
This page of the window is used to select what types of data can be included in the data sheet. The available options
are described next. For a more detailed description of data types, see page 157 in Chapter 4.
5.1 ALTA Standard Folio Setup
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 205
The My data set contains suspensions option allows you to record data for units that did not fail during the
observation period. These data points are known as suspensions. The suspension time is the last time the unit was
observed as not failed. In the example shown next, a test was conducted and five units in the sample failed, but
one unit (marked with an S in the first column) was still operational when the test terminated at 7,500 hours.
The My data set contains interval and/or left censored data option allows you to record data when there is
uncertainty as to the exact time when a unit fails. This type of data frequently comes from situations where the
units are not constantly monitored. For example, if you are running a test on five units and inspecting them every
100 hours, you only know that a unit failed or did not fail between inspections. (If you select to enter both
suspensions and interval data, you can enter suspensions as intervals.) Left censored data is a special case of
interval censored data. With left censored data, the interval is between time = 0 and some inspection time.
In the example shown next, the first unit was operational at the start of the test but found failed at 150 hours (thus,
it is a left censored data point). The second unit was still operating at 150 hours, but it failed at some point prior to
the next observation at 300 hours, and so on.
The I want to enter data in groups option allows you to group multiple data points together. The following is an
example of a grouped data set with complete, suspended, interval and left censored data. (Grouping in this way
significantly speeds up calculations when you have a very large data set.)
The first row represents 2 left censored data points (2 units were observed at 24 hours and found to be failed). The
fourth row contains an exact failure time (failure at 100 hours) for 1 unit. The sixth row represents an interval
suspension for 5 units that were found operational at 120 hours and then also at 150 hours. The remaining rows
represent interval data for units that failed during the test.
Note that when you select a data type, the preview table at the bottom of the setup window will show you the name of
the data entry columns that will appear in the data sheet.
If you are creating a new folio, you will also need to specify the time units appropriate for your data. Units may be
measured in time, distance, weight, etc. The appropriate columns in the data sheet will be automatically configured
for the units you select. If you later wish to change the time units of an existing data sheet, click the Change Units
5 ALTA Standard Folios
206 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
icon on the Main page of the control panel of the data sheet. See page 89 in Chapter 2.
If you wish to use the same stress column and stress level settings that were used when you last set up an ALTA
standard folioor if you are only changing the data type of an existing folioclick OK to close the window and
view your folio. Otherwise, click Next> to display the second page of the window.
You can use this page to do the following:
Adjust the number of stress columns to be used in your folio by selecting the appropriate check boxes.
Every stress column represents a stress type. So, for example, a data sheet with two stress columns would be
used for data obtained from a two-stress test. In this case, each row would contain a failure/suspension time
and the two stress values that define the stress level at which the data point was obtained (e.g., a unit might
have failed at 100 hours while tested at 343 K and 80% relative humidity).
If you would like to change the number of stress columns in a folio you have already created, click the Add or
Remove Columns icon on the Main page of the folio's control panel.
Note: In Version 8, you now have the ability to define the time units used for the data set and calculations. For example, if
your data set contains failure times in hours, you now have the option to perform calculations using different time units
such as years, months, days, etc. The software performs the unit conversion automatically.
Authorized users can define the time units that will be available for use in any project within the database and set up the
conversion factors.
5.2 ALTA Standard Folio Control Panel
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 207
Change the labels of each stress column by changing the text under Stress Name or Stress Units.
The Stress Name and Stress Units fields are merely for adding text to the headers of the stress columns, so
you can keep track of which stress type is associated with each stress column. This information is not relevant
to the softwares calculations.
Define the product's normal stress level by entering values under the Use Level heading for each stress type (e.g.,
the product that was tested under accelerated temperature and humidity might normally operate at 323 K and 50%
humidity). See Section 5.6 on page 216.
Like the first page of the setup window, there is a preview at the bottom of the page that shows you how the names of
the associated columns will appear in the data sheet.
5.2 ALTA Standard Folio Control Panel
This section describes how to use the ALTA standard folio control panel to perform accelerated life testing data
analysis, including:
Parts of the control panel - Section 5.2.1 (p. 208).
Analysis settings - Section 5.2.2 (p. 210).
Calculating and interpreting the results - Section 5.2.3 (p. 211).
Evaluating the model fit - Section 5.2.4 (p. 212).
IMPORTANT: Temperature values must always be entered in absolute units (e.g., kelvin or degrees Rankine). To convert
temperature values in the data sheet that were entered in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit to absolute units, choose ALTA >
Options > Convert Stress Values.
5 ALTA Standard Folios
208 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
5.2.1 Parts of the Control Panel
Accelerated life testing analysis involves careful planning and requires many tasks. To make things easy to find, the
ALTA standard folio control panel is arranged into groups of related tasks. Each group has its own page on the control
panel. The Main page is shown next.
The Main page is the most frequently used page because it contains most of the tools you would need to analyze a
data set.
The Model drop-down list is used to select the life-stress relationship and life distribution that will be used in your
analysis.
Directly underneath the drop-down list are options for selecting the stress columns and (when applicable) the
stress transformations that will be used in the analysis.
The Analysis Settings area displays MLE and FM to indicate that the maximum likelihood estimation (MLE)
method will be used to estimate your models parameters and the Fisher matrix (FM) method will be used to solve
for the confidence bounds. In ALTA, these settings cannot be changed. This area also displays the number of
failures and suspensions in your data set (e.g., F=17/S=23 means there are 17 failures and 23 suspensions).
Tip: There is a horizontal splitter bar directly above the Main button. If you drag it as far up as it will go, all of the pages of
the panel will be accessed by large buttons. If you drag it all the way down, all of the pages will be accessed by small
icons. Positions in between allow you to use some large buttons and some small icons. See page 78 in Chapter 2.
5.2 ALTA Standard Folio Control Panel
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 209
Click Set Use Stress directly underneath the Analysis Settings area to define the normal stress level for every
stress that is selected to be used in the analysis.
The Analysis Summary area displays the calculated parameter values and other values for your selected model.
The folio tools are arranged on the left side of the panel. Use these tools to manage data and experiment with the
results of your analysis. Each tool is described below.
Calculate
Estimates the parameters of the chosen model, based on the current data set and the specified analysis
settings. This option is also available by choosing ALTA > Analysis > Calculate.
Plot
Creates a new sheet in the folio that provides a choice of applicable plot types. For standard folios, this
includes plots such as Use Level Probability, Reliability vs. Time, Life vs. Stress, etc. You can also create a
Plot sheet by choosing ALTA > Analysis > Plot. See Section 5.3 on page 212.
QCP
Opens the Quick Calculation Pad, which allows you to calculate results, such as the mean life and the
probability of failure, based on the currently active data sheet. This tool is also available by choosing ALTA
> Analysis > Quick Calculation Pad. See Section 5.7 on page 216.
Distribution Wizard
Opens the Distribution Wizard, which helps you select the life distribution that will best fit your data. This
tool is also available by choosing ALTA > Analysis > Distribution Wizard. See Section 5.11 on page 232
Alter Data Type
Opens the ALTA Folio Data Sheet Setup window, which allows you to change the data entry columns in the
current data sheet. Note that when you change the setup, you may lose information already entered in the data
sheet. For example, switching the data sheet from one that supports interval data to one that supports only
right censored data will remove all the inspection times. This tool is also available by choosing ALTA > Format and
View > Alter Data Type. See Section 5.1 on page 204.
Change Units
Opens the Change Units window, which allows you to change the time units of an existing data sheet. See
page 89 in Chapter 2.
Auto Group Data
Opens the Auto Group Data window, which allows you to group together data points with the same failure/
suspension times. Grouping data significantly speeds up calculations when you have a very large data set.
This tool is also available by choosing Life Data > Options > Auto Group Data. See page 184 in Chapter 4.
Alter Parameters
Allows you to alter the values of the calculated parameters, assuming that the ranks, the likelihood function
and the Fisher Matrix (evaluated at the original parameter estimates) remain the same. In plots, the position of
the data points remain the same but the solution line and all subsequent analysis made via the QCP and other
tools are based on the modified parameter values. Therefore, the analysis may be appropriate only within the context
of your specific scenario. This tool is also available by choosing Life Data > Options > Alter Parameters. See
Section 5.16 on page 238.
5 ALTA Standard Folios
210 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Likelihood Ratio Test
Opens the Specify Points window, which allows you to adjust the way that the line is fitted to the points for a
rank regression analysis. The ranks will be calculated based on all of the data points but the regression line
will be fitted only to the points you have specified. This tool is also available by choosing ALTA > Options >
Specify Points. See Section 5.13 on page 234.
Transfer Data to Weibull++
Allows you to transfer data from the ALTA standard folio to a Weibull++ standard folio. See Section 5.14 on
page 235.
5.2.2 Analysis Settings
Accelerated life testing data analysis makes use of life distributions and life-stress relationships to extrapolate failure
behavior at normal operating conditions from data obtained at accelerated stress levels. The selected life distribution
is fitted to the data obtained at each accelerated stress level used in the test. The selected life-stress relationship is
then used to extrapolate the probability density function (pdf) at the use stress level from the pdfs at the accelerated
levels.
While any distribution can be used to analyze a data set, if the distribution does not fit the data well, your results may
contain too much uncertainty. Moreover, each of the available life-stress relationships is designed to work with
specific stress types (e.g., the Arrhenius relationship is designed for data obtained from accelerated temperatures).
Therefore, to ensure accurate predictions for the product's use level reliability, the appropriate life distribution and
life-stress relationship must be selected.
The first step is to select a life-stress relationship. Click the Model drop-down list on the Main page of the control
panel. There are five life-stress relationships to select from in ALTA Standard, and there are four additional
relationships in ALTA PRO:
2
The five life-stress relationships in ALTA Standard are:
Arrhenius: a single-stress model typically used when temperature is the accelerated stress.
Eyring: a single-stress model typically used when temperature or humidity is the accelerated stress.
Inverse power law (IPL): a single-stress model typically used with a non-thermal stress, such as vibration,
voltage or temperature cycling.
Temperature-humidity (TH): a double-Arrhenius model that is typically used when temperature and humidity
are the acceleration variables.
Temperature-nonthermal (TNT): a combination of the Arrhenius and IPL relationships that is typically used
when one stress is temperature and the other is non-thermal (e.g., voltage).
In addition, ALTA PRO offers four other models for more advanced applications:
Generalized Eyring (GER): a variation of the Eyring relationship that is typically used when both temperature
and humidity are accelerated.
Whats Changed? In previous versions of ALTA, the life-stress relationship and life distribution were selected separately, in
two different drop-down lists. Now, a single drop-down list is used to select a single model that combines both.
2.
The ReliaWiki resource portal has more information on these relationships at: http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/
Accelerated_Life_Testing_Data_Analysis_Reference.
5.2 ALTA Standard Folio Control Panel
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 211
Proportional hazards (PPH): analyzes data with up to 8 simultaneous stress types using the exponential
relationship for each stress. It also allows the use of zero as a stress value, which enables the analysis of data with
indicator variables (e.g., 0 = on/off and 1 = continuous operation).
General log-linear (GLL): supports the analysis of data with up to 8 simultaneous stress types and provides the
flexibility of specifying the life-stress relationship (Arrhenius, IPL or exponential) for each stress. Like the PPH
model, this model also allows for the analysis of data with indicator variables.
Cumulative damage (CD): analyzes data with up to 8 stress types and/or situations where the stress varies with
time.
After choosing a life-stress relationship, choose a life distribution in the submenu. For example, if you select
Arrhenius-Weibull from the submenu, your analysis will use a combination of the Arrhenius life-stress relationship
and the Weibull life distribution.
The three available life distributions are 2-parameter Weibull, lognormal (not available with the proportional hazards
relationship) and 1-parameter exponential.
3
The next step is to estimate the parameters of your chosen model, as described in the next section.
5.2.3 Calculating and Interpreting the Results
You can calculate the parameters by choosing ALTA > Analysis > Calculate or by clicking the icon on the Main
page of the control panel.
The control panel will display the calculated values of the parameters in the Analysis Summary area, as shown next.
Depending on your settings, the following information may also be displayed:
The Ea (activation energy) value represents the magnitude of the effect that the applied stress will have on the
product. A large activation energy indicates that the applied stress has a large effect on the life of the product.
Tip: If you are not certain which life distribution would provide the best fit for your data, you can use the Distribution Wizard
to guide you through the selection process. The choice of the life-stress relationship depends on various factors, including
the types and number of stresses used in the test.
3.
The ReliaWiki resources portal has more information on these distributions at: http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/
Distributions_Used_in_Accelerated_Testing.
Note: If the model and parameters are associated with a published model, then the published model's name will appear as
a link at the bottom of the Analysis Summary area. Click the link to view the model's properties. For details on how to
publish the results as a model, see page 82 in Chapter 2.
5 ALTA Standard Folios
212 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The Scale Parameter value represents the product's characteristic life.
For the Weibull distribution, the characteristic life is equal to the value of the eta parameter (i.e., the time at
which unreliability = 63.2%).
For the lognormal distribution, it is equal to Exp(Log-mean) (i.e., the time at which unreliability = 50%).
For the exponential distribution, it is equal to the mean life.
The LK Value (likelihood function value) is the peak value of the likelihood function, at the estimated parameter
values.
Click anywhere within the Analysis Summary area to open the Results window, which displays the calculated
results in a worksheet. From the Results window, you can edit, copy or print the results.
5.2.4 Evaluating the Model Fit
Accelerated life testing results are estimates based on observed data points from a limited sample size and obtained at
increased stress levels. For this reason, there is always some uncertainty in the results. It is therefore important to
evaluate how well the chosen model fits the data set. There are several ways to evaluate the models fit and compare
it to other models. To make a sound assessment, the following tools may be used in conjunction with your own
engineering knowledge about the model:
The Use Level Probability and Standardized Residuals plots show you how well the solution line tracks the
plotted data points. This allows you to visually assess the fit of the selected model. See Section 5.3 on page 212.
The Likelihood Ratio Test is used to confirm the assumption of a common shape parameter among the data
obtained at the various accelerated stress levels. This assumption underlies the use of any model that includes the
Weibull or lognormal life distribution. See Section 5.13 on page 234.
Confidence Bounds allow you to quantify the amount of uncertainty in the parameter estimates and other
functions, such as reliability predictions, due to sampling error. The narrower the confidence bounds at a given
confidence level, the closer the estimates are to the true value of the parameters and the better the precision on the
reliability predictions.
You can visualize the confidence bounds by using plots, or you can view the calculated values of the confidence
bounds by using the Quick Calculation Pad.
The LK Value (likelihood function value) is the peak value of the likelihood function, at the estimated parameter
values. It is influenced by the sample size and the variability of the data set. This means that the LK value varies
across different data sets and cannot be used by itself to make a judgment about the fit of the model. However, this
value becomes useful when it is used to compare how different models fit a particular data set. For a given set of
data, the model with the highest LK value is considered to have the best fit statistically.
The LK value for the selected model is automatically displayed on the Main page of the control panel.
To view a 3D plot of the likelihood surface, choose ALTA > Analysis > 3D Plot, and then choose Likelihood
Function from the Plot Type drop-down list. See page 364 in Chapter 12.
ALTA's Distribution Wizard uses LK values to automatically compare life distributions. The Wizard assumes
the life-stress relationship selected on the control panel. See Section 5.11 on page 232.
5.3 ALTA Plots
ALTA includes multiple plot types you can use to visualize the results of your accelerated life testing data analysis.
You can create plots by choosing ALTA > Analysis > Plot or by clicking the icon on the Main page of the control
panel.
5.3 ALTA Plots
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 213
Note that clicking the Plot icon before the parameters have been calculated will automatically calculate the
parameters and then plot the data. The scaling, setup, exporting and confidence bounds settings are similar to the
options available for all other plot sheets. To learn how to customize a plot, see Chapter 13.
The following is a description of the different types of plots that can be created in an ALTA standard folio. Note that
the use stress level for plots is by default the level you entered on the Main page of the control panel. However, you
may adjust the level for plots by clicking Set Use Stress directly underneath the Analysis Summary area of the Plot
page. This will not change the use stress level specified on the Main page.
The Use Level Probability plot shows the trend in the probability of failure over time at the specified use stress
level. The plot also shows data points from the test that are transformed from the accelerated stress levels to the
use stress level. The relationship between unreliability and time is linearized wherever possible, which results in
non-linear axis scales. Like the standardized residuals plot, this plot is useful for comparing models that use the
same life-stress relationship.
The Probability plot shows the probability of failure (i.e., unreliability) as a function of time at every stress level
used in the test. The plot also displays the extrapolated line for unreliability at the specified use stress level.
The Reliability vs. Time plot shows the reliability values over time at the specified use stress level, capturing
trends in the products failure behavior. The plot also shows data points from the test that are transformed from the
accelerated stress level to the use stress level.
The Unreliability vs. Time plot shows the probability of failure of the product over time at the specified use
stress level. Unlike the Use Level Probability plot, the axis scales are linear.
The pdf Plot shows the probability density function of data over time at the specified use stress level. This allows
you to visualize the distribution of the data set.
The Failure Rate vs. Time plot shows the failure rate of the product over time at the specified use stress level.
The following plots show the relationship between stress level and another reliability metric. In multi-stress
situations, one stress is varied and the remaining stresses are fixed. Click Set Use Stress on the Plot page of the
control panel to select the varied stress.
The Life vs. Stress plot shows the effect of a stress on the life of the product. Multiple pdfs, each at a different
stress level used in the test, are displayed on the plot. The failure times obtained at each stress level are shown
at the base of the associated pdf. Note that the lines and pdfs are mapped to the use stress level, but the failure
times are plotted at the tested conditions.
If a model that uses the Weibull distribution is selected, an eta line will be displayed as well. The eta line
estimates the time by which 63.2% of units in the population are expected to fail. The plot may also include
other life lines that show the relationship between stress level and the time by which other specified
percentages of a population are expected to fail. See See page 355 in Chapter 12. The life-stress relationship is
Tip: ALTA includes two additional plots you could use across all types of data folios: the overlay plot, which allows you to
compare different data sets; and the side-by-side plot, which allows you to simultaneously view multiple plots of one data
set in a single window.
Note: Unlike the probability plots for other distributions, the y-axis in an exponential probability plot always indicates
the reliability instead of the unreliability. This tradition arose from the time when probability plotting was performed by
hand. The exponential reliability model starts with R = 1 at T = 0 (or gamma). Thus, if the unreliability were plotted,
the axis would start at Q = 1 - R = 0, which is not possible, given that the y-axis scale is logarithmic.
5 ALTA Standard Folios
214 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
linearized whenever possible.
The Std vs. Stress plot shows the standard deviation of failure time as a function of stress level, thus providing
information about the spread of data at every given stress level on the x-axis.
The AF vs. Stress plot shows the acceleration factor as a function of stress level. The acceleration factor is
determined by dividing the products life under normal operating conditions by its life at an accelerated stress
level. For example, if the acceleration factor is 2 at an accelerated stress level of 350 K, then the products life
at 350 K is expected to be half of its life at the specified use stress level.
The following plots are residual plots. In these plots, a residual value for each data point is displayed. As a result,
these plots are useful for assessing model assumptions, revealing inadequacies in the model and revealing any
extreme observations.
4
The Standardized Residuals plot is useful for determining the adequacy of the selected model for the data.
The appropriate probability transformation is given on the y-axis and the values of the residuals are given on
the x-axis. The residual values for each data point are color-coded to indicate which accelerated stress level
the associated data point was obtained from. If the model adequately fits the data, the points should track the
plot line.
4.
The ReliaWiki resource portal has more information on residual plots at: http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/
Accelerated_Life_Testing_and_ALTA#Residual_Plots.
5.4 Select Stress Columns
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 215
For example, the next figures show the results of an Arrhenius-Weibull model and an Arrhenius-lognormal
model using the same data set. As you can see, the plot shows that the lognormal distribution presents the
better fit to this particular data set.
The Cox-Snell Residuals plot is similar to the standardized residuals plot, except the line is plotted on an
exponential probability plotting paper and is on the positive domain.
The Standard vs. Fitted Value plot helps to detect behavior that isnt modeled in the underlying relationship.
It plots the standardized residuals versus the scale parameter of the underlying life distribution (which is a
function of stress) on log-linear paper (linear on the y-axis). Note that when heavy censoring is present, the
plot is more difficult to interpret.
5.4 Select Stress Columns
The Select Stress Columns window is used to select which of the stress columns in your data sheet will be used in the
analysis. When applicable, this window also includes drop-down lists that allow you to categorize the selected
stresses. To access the window, click Select Stress Columns directly underneath the Model area of the control panel.
All of the stress columns in your data sheet are listed in the Available Stress Columns area. To use a column in the
analysis, select the corresponding check box. Note that the text directly above the Available Stress Columns area
provides information on how many stresses are required and how many can be used with the selected model.
If you chose a temperature-nonthermal (T-H) or generalized Eyring (GER) model on the control panel, you will be
required to categorize each stress as thermal or nonthermal. To use either of these models, you must select exactly
two stress columns: one for a thermal stress and one for a nonthermal stress.
5.5 Stress Transformation
When you select a general log-linear (GLL) or cumulative damage (CD) model, you must use the Stress
Transformation window to choose one transformation for each stress that will be used in the analysis. To access this
window, click Stress Transformation immediately above the Analysis Settings area of the control panel.
The Transformation drop-down list provides the following three options for how the stress will be transformed
within the model.
Tip: You can also choose which stress columns to include in the analysis by selecting the check boxes in the column
headers of the data sheet.
5 ALTA Standard Folios
216 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Use the None X=V transformation for stress types associated with the exponential life-stress relationship (LSR).
This transformation is commonly used for indicator variables (e.g., 0 = on/off and 1 = continuous operation).
Use the Reciprocal X=1/V transformation for stress types associated with the Arrhenius LSR. This
transformation is commonly used for thermal stresses.
Use the Logarithmic X=ln[V] transformation for stress types associated with the inverse power law LSR. This
transformation is commonly used for non-thermal stresses.
5.6 Use Stress Level
The Use Stress Level window is used to define the normal stress levels for every stress that is selected to be used in
the analysis. To access the window, click Set Use Stress directly underneath the Analysis Settings area of the control
panel.
The Stress area of the window lists every stress that will be used in the calculation. In the Use Stress Level area, enter
the stress level that the product will experience under normal conditions. For example, to specify that the normal
operating temperature for a product is 328 K and the normal operating voltage is 2 V, you would enter the following
into the window:
If you selected a cumulative damage (CD) model on the control panel, you will also be able to use stress profiles to
describe time-varying stress conditions that the product will experience during normal use. See Section 5.10 on page
225.
5.7 ALTA Quick Calculation Pad
The Quick Calculation Pad (QCP) provides a quick and accurate way of calculating a variety of useful reliability
metrics. To access the tool, choose ALTA > Analysis > Quick Calculation Pad or click the icon on the Main page of
the control panel.
5.7.1 How to Use the QCP
To use the QCP, do the following:
Choose a metric in the Calculate area.
If applicable, use the Units drop-down list to specify the units for time values that are entered as inputs and/or
displayed as results. The units in the QCP can be different from the units that were used for the data sheet. For
example, in a standard folio, you could enter the failure/suspension times in hours but then calculate the reliability
for 1 year of operationthe application will convert the times automatically based on the conversion factors
specified for the database.
5.7 ALTA Quick Calculation Pad
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 217
If applicable, use the Bounds drop-down list to specify what type of confidence bounds to calculate. The
following graphics illustrate the types.
5
If you select Both One-Sided, the QCP will calculate both the lower one-sided bound and the upper one-sided
bound.
Make any required inputs in the Input area.
Click Calculate. The calculated value(s) will always be displayed in the results area at the top of the window, and
clicking the Report button displays a summary of the current calculation input/output in the Results window.
6
You can also use the Options drop-down list to configure other settings, including:
Precision sets the number of decimal places displayed in the results.
Scientific Notation sets the point at which numbers will be converted to normalized scientific notation.
For example, setting this to 3 means that all numbers with a value of 1,000 or more will be converted to
normalized scientific notation (e.g., 1,000 = 1.0E+03).
Set Display Font allows to change the font style and size that is used to display the calculated value(s) in
the results.
Select Captions (indicated by a green light on the button) if you want notations to be displayed in the
results area along with the values. For example, if you have selected to calculate the reliability at time = 30
hours with 2-sided confidence bounds at the 90% confidence level, the first picture shows the display with
captions and the second picture shows without.
Figure 1: QCP window with Captions on.
5.
The ReliaWiki resource portal provides more information on confidence bounds at: http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/
Confidence Bounds.
6.
There is one exception. If you choose Parameter Bounds, the information for all parameters will not fit in the results area at the
top of the window. For this calculation, you must select a type from the Bounds drop-down list and enter the confidence level
under Inputs. When you click Calculate, the information will be displayed directly in the Results window.
5 ALTA Standard Folios
218 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Figure 2: QCP window with Captions off.
Select Show Calculation Log (indicated by a green light on the button) if you want to display a log on the right
side of the window that records some or all of the calculations performed during this QCP session.
If Auto Print Results is selected under Options, all results will be automatically printed to the log each time
you perform a calculation.
Otherwise, you can choose which results to add to the log by using the Print button at the bottom of the log
display.
Under the log display, you can also click Feed to advance the tape or Clear to delete all data from the current
log. If you click inside the log, you can copy some or all of the text to the clipboard.
Select Non-Modal QCP to lock the QCP in a top window position so it can remain open while you have access to
all folios and data sheets. The calculations performed in the QCP will be based on the currently active data sheet.
Note that if the currently active data sheet is in a parametric RDA folio, the QCP will change to show the
calculations available for parametric RDAs. If this option is not selected, you will need to close the QCP to access
any data sheet or folio. This setting can also be changed using the While QCP is open, have access to all folios
option on the Other page of the Application Setup. See page 611 in Chapter 29.
5.7.2 QCP Calculations
There are several types of calculations you can perform in the standard folio QCP. The calculations are based on the
estimated parameters and other information from the current data sheet. Each type of calculation may require
additional user inputs in order to solve for the metric of interest.
Probability
Reliability
Calculates the probability that a new product will operate without failure for a given period of time at the stress
level specified in the Stress field. Enter the time at which you wish to calculate the reliability in the Mission End
Time field. The mission is assumed to start at time = 0.
For example, a reliability of 90% for a mission end time of 3 years means that if 100 identical units are fielded,
then 90 of them will still be operating at the end of 3 years.
Probability of Failure
Calculates the probability that a new product will be failed in a given period of time at the stress level specified in
the Stress field. Enter the time at which you wish to calculate the probability of failure in the Mission End Time
field. The mission is assumed to start at time = 0.
Probability of failure is also known as unreliability, and it is the inverse of the reliability. For example, a
probability of failure of 10% for a mission end time of 3 years is equivalent to a 90% reliability.
Conditional Reliability
Calculates the probability that a product will successfully operate at a specific time interval given that it has
operated successfully up to a specified time and at the stress level specified in the Stress field. Enter the start time
5.7 ALTA Quick Calculation Pad
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 219
of the interval in the Mission Start Time field and enter the length of the interval in the Mission Additional
Time field.
For example, a product may have a reliability of 90% for 3 years if it operates at a stress level of 10 volts. If the
product has operated for 2 years without failure, the conditional reliability for an additional year (for a total of 3
years of operation) may be 95%.
Conditional Probability of Failure
Calculates the probability that a product will be failed at a specific time interval given that it has not failed up to a
specified time and at the stress level specified in the Stress field. Enter the start time of the interval in the Mission
Start Time field and enter the length of the interval in the Mission Additional Time field.
For example, a product may have a 10% probability of failure for 3 years if it operates at a stress level of 10 volts.
If the product has operated for 2 years without failure, the conditional probability of failure for an additional year
(for a total of 3 years of operation) may be 5%.
Life
Reliable Life
Calculates the estimated time at which a specified reliability value will be achieved at the stress level specified in
the Stress field. Enter the reliability goal in the Required Reliability field. For example, a goal of 90% reliability
with a reliable life of 4 years means that if 100 identical units are fielded, then 90 of them will be still be operating
at the end of 4 years.
BX% Life
Calculates the estimated time at which a specified probability of failure will be achieved at the stress level
specified in the Stress field. Enter the probability of failure in the BX% Life At field. For example, a B10 life of
4 years means 10% of the fielded units are expected to be failed at the end of 4 years of operation (note that this is
equivalent to a 90% reliability with a reliable life of 4 years).
Mean Life
Calculates the average time at which a product is expected to operate before failure at the stress level specified in
the Stress field. In the standard folio, the mean life is the mean time to failure (MTTF). For example, assume you
tested three identical units starting from time = 0 until all of the units have failed. The first unit failed at 10 hours,
the second failed at 12 hours and the third failed at 13 hours. The MTTF is the average of the three failure times,
which is 11.67 hours.
Whats Changed? In previous versions of ALTA, this calculation was called Warranty Time.
Note: In the early days of reliability engineering, bearing manufacturers used the term B10 life to refer to the time by
which 10% of the components would fail. Keeping with tradition, ReliaSoft retained this nomenclature but replaced
10 with X%, since the software allows you to get this information at any percentage point and not just at 10% (e.g.,
B1 life, B5 life, etc.).
Note: The term mean time to failure (MTTF) is used as a metric for the analysis of non-repairable components. In the
ALTA standard folio, all data are assumed to come from non-repairable components that are independent and
identically distributed (i.i.d.). On the other hand, the term mean time between failures (MTBF) is used as a metric in
repairable systems analysis, where the same system may fail and be repaired multiple times. Simple repairable
system data can be analyzed in Weibull++ using the Recurrent Event Data Analysis (RDA) folio.
For more complex repairable system analyses, see ReliaSofts BlockSim and RGA.
5 ALTA Standard Folios
220 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Rate
Failure Rate
Calculates the instantaneous number of failures per unit time that can be expected at a certain time and at the
stress level specified in the Stress field, given that a unit survives to that age. Enter the time at which you wish to
calculate the failure rate in the Mission End Time field.
For example, a failure rate of 0.01 at 100 hours and at a stress level of 10 volts means that each unit that survives
to 100 hours has approximately a 1% probability of failure in the next hour.
Acceleration
Acceleration Factor
Calculates the ratio of the product's use level life to its life at an accelerated stress level. For example, if the
product has a life of 100 hours at the use stress level, and it has a life of 50 hours at an accelerated level, then the
acceleration factor at the specified stress levels would be 2. Click the arrow in the Stress field to enter the use
level stress values for every stress that was used to calculate the data sheet. Click the arrow in the Acceleration
Stress field to enter the accelerated stress values.
Bounds
Parameter Bounds
Calculates the upper and lower 1-sided confidence bounds on the parameter estimates. The result allows you
quantify the amount of uncertainty in the estimates. Click Calculate to open the Results Window, which displays
the confidence bounds on the parameters.
5.8 ALTA Single-Stress Example
A manufacturer asks a team of engineers to determine, with a confidence level of 90%, whether a prototype device
has a reliability of at least 90% at 6,000 hours. Since the life of the product under normal operating conditions is
expected to be more than 15,000 hours, it is not feasible to test under these conditions and obtain results in an
acceptable timeframe. So the engineers decide to run an accelerated test with a duration of 7,500 hours, by which
time they expect that the majority of units will have failed. The normal operating temperature for this product is 323
K (50C), and temperature is the only acceleration variable.
5.8 ALTA Single-Stress Example
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 221
The data collected from the test for three different accelerated stress levels are shown next.
Add a new ALTA standard folio by choosing Insert > Folios > ALTA Standard Folio. On the first page of the
setup window, make sure only the My data set contains suspensions check box is selected. Then, select Hour
(Hr) from the Units drop-down list and click Next>.
On the second page of the setup window, select Temperature as the stress type. Set the use level temperature to
323 with K as the unit.
Click OK to close the setup window and view your new ALTA standard folio. Enter the failure/suspension data
into the folios data sheet. The first fifteen rows of the data sheet are shown next.
On the Main page of the folios control panel, select the Arrhenius-Weibull model and click Calculate. The
parameters of the model will be automatically computed and displayed in the Analysis Summary area.
To estimate the reliability of the device at 6,000 hours, choose ALTA > Analysis > Quick Calculation Pad or
click the icon on the control panel.
Stress Level (K) 393 408 423
Failure Time
(Hr)
3850 3300 2750
4340 3720 3100
4760 4080 3400
5320 4560 3800
5740 4920 4100
6160 5280 4400
6580 5640 4700
7140 6120 5100
Did not fail 6840 5700
Did not fail Did not fail 6400
5 ALTA Standard Folios
222 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
In the QCP, choose to calculate the Reliability with Lower One-Sided confidence bounds. Select Hour for the
time units and then make the following inputs:
Stress = 323
Mission End Time = 6000
Confidence Level = 0.90
Click Calculate to display the results, as shown next.
The results show that the devices estimated reliability at 6,000 hours is 99.09%. The lower one-sided 90%
confidence bound is shown to be 90.61%. In other words, the test shows with 90% confidence that the devices
reliability a 6,000 hours is at least 90.61%, thus meeting the demands of the manufacturer.
5.9 ALTA Two-Stress Example
A team of reliability engineers is instructed to perform an accelerated life test and use the accelerated test data to
extrapolate a product's use level failure behavior. They are asked to estimate, with 90% confidence, the time at which
the product will have an unreliability of 10% (i.e., the B10 life).
5.9 ALTA Two-Stress Example
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 223
The normal operating temperature for this product is 328 K, and the normal operating voltage is 2 V. It was decided to
accelerate both stresses in the test. The following table shows the data from the test.
Add a new ALTA standard folio by choosing Insert > Folios > ALTA Standard Folio. Since the data set contains
only exact failure times, do not select any of the check boxes in the Options for the Times-to-Failure Data Type
area. Then, select Hour (Hr) from the Units drop-down list and click Next>.
On the second page of the setup window, select Temperature and Voltage as the stress types. Set the use level
temperature to 328 with K as the unit, and set the use level voltage to 2 with V as the unit.
Click OK to close the setup window and view your new standard folio. In the data sheet of your new folio, select
the check boxes inside the Temperature and Voltage column headers. Both stresses will now be used in the
calculation for the selected model.
On the Main page of the folios control panel, select the TNT-Weibull model (i.e., the temperature-nonthermal
life-stress relationship combined with the Weibull life distribution).
Enter the above data into the data sheet, then click Calculate. The parameters of the model will be automatically
computed and displayed in the Analysis Summary area, as shown next.
To obtain the two-sided 90% confidence bounds on the product's B10 life, choose ALTA > Analysis > Quick
Calculation Pad or click the icon on the control panel.
In the QCP, choose to calculate the BX% Life with Two-Sided Bounds. Select Hour for the time units and then
make the following inputs:
Stress = 328; 2
BX% Life At = 10
Confidence Level = 0.9
Time Failed (Hr) Temperature (K) Voltage (V)
620 348 3
632 348 3
658 348 3
822 348 3
216 378 3
246 378 3
332 378 3
400 378 3
380 378 5
416 378 5
460 378 5
596 378 5
5 ALTA Standard Folios
224 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Click Calculate to display the results, as shown next.
The results show, with 90% confidence, that the time at which the product will have an unreliability of 10% is
between 459.7681 and 853.1253 hours.
To view a plot of the unreliability vs. time at the use stress level, go to the Plot page of the control panel and select
Unreliability vs. Time from the Plot Type drop-down list. The plot is shown next..
5.10 Time-Dependent Stress Profiles
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 225
5.10 Time-Dependent Stress Profiles
Stress levels under test conditions and/or during normal use may vary with time. For example, an engineer may
decide that each unit in a sample will be tested at 310 K for the first 10 hours of a test, 320 K for the next 10 hours,
and 330 K for the remainder of the test. ALTA PRO allows you to define and save stress profiles that describe how
stress levels will vary with time. When you select a cumulative damage model in the ALTA standard folio, all of the
stress profiles validated in your project become available to describe use level stress conditions and stress conditions
during testing.
This section describes how to use time-dependent stress profiles, including:
Creating stress profiles - Section 5.10.1 (p. 225).
Using stress profiles in an analysis - Section 5.10.2 (p. 227).
An example involving a time-varying stress - Section 5.10.3 (p. 229).
5.10.1 Creating Stress Profiles
A stress profile is a representation of how stress levels will vary with time. It consists of a basic pattern that either
repeats as a cycle or occurs once and then continues from its last defined stress setting. To create and save a stress
profile, follow the steps below.
To add a new stress profile to your project, choose Insert > Tools > ALTA Stress Profile. A stress profile icon
will appear under the Tools heading of the current project explorer, and the Stress Profile folio will open, as
shown next. (Stress profiles can also be added from ALTA's SimuMatic Setup window and the ALTA Monte
Carlo utility.)
To rename the stress profile, right-click the profile's icon in the current project explorer and choose Rename.
Next, you must define a pattern for how stress levels will change over a specified period of time. The pattern you
will define consists of a series of segments, where each segment has a specified duration and either:
a constant stress value, or
Tip: The stress profile functionality is available only in ALTA PRO. If you are an ALTA Standard user who needs to use
time-dependent stress profiles in your analysis, please contact ReliaSoft for information about upgrading to ALTA PRO.
5 ALTA Standard Folios
226 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
a function that takes a time value and returns a stress value.
These segments are defined in the data sheet, as shown next.
Segment Start is calculated automatically by the software and cannot be entered manually. The first segment's
start time is always 0. For every subsequent segment, the start time is identical to the prior segment's end time.
Segment End allows you to enter the end time for each segment, which must be smaller than the end time of the
next segment.
Stress S(t) is the stress value or function for the segment. If the stress level will stay constant during a segment,
enter a constant stress value (e.g., 30). If the stress level will change during a segment, enter the stress as a
function of time (e.g., at time = 20, the function t + 20 will return a stress value of 40). When entering a function,
you must use t or T as the time variable.
For example, suppose the stress unit is psi and the time unit is seconds. Now suppose you wanted to define the
following 120-second pattern: a stress value of 30 psi for 60 seconds, followed by a stress value of 50 psi for 30
seconds, followed by a stress function that begins at 50 psi and gradually decreases at a rate of 1 psi per second for
the remainder of the pattern. For this pattern, you could fill out the data sheet as follows:
Notice that the last segment of this profile uses a stress function. Since t is the test time (or, if the profile is
cyclical, the time since the pattern was last restarted), t = 90 when the last segment begins. So the last segments
stress level starts at 50 - (90 - 90) = 50. Then, at 91 seconds, the stress level will have dropped to 50 - (91 - 90) =
49. After another second it will have dropped to 50 - (92 - 90) = 48, and so on.
Next, choose the appropriate option in the After Last Segment area of the control panel. Your selection here will
determine what happens after the end time of the profiles last segment (in the above example, after time = 120).
If you select Continue from last stress, all times after the last segment will use the stress value/function defined
in the last segment.
If you select Repeat cycle, the entire pattern of segments will be treated as a repeating cycle.
For example, suppose you defined a pattern that is made up of five segments, each an hour long and increasing
stepwise from the segment before. The graphs below illustrate the difference between continuing from the last
Tip: Because stress units (e.g., volts) and time units (e.g., hours) are not defined in the stress profile, it is important to
apply stress profiles only to folios that are intended to use the same stress and time units. In the Stress Profile
window, you may want to rename column headers (by double-clicking inside the header) or use the Comments page
as a reminder of which units are applicable to that profile. You can also create sub-folders under the Tools heading in
the current project explorer to organize your profiles in a way that will make them easier to manage for future use.
5.10 Time-Dependent Stress Profiles
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 227
stress (left) and selecting to repeat (right). In this example, the test has a duration of 20 hours, and the graphs
explain what would happen through the entire duration of the test.
Before you can use the new stress profile in your analysis, you must save any changes you have made and validate
the current profile settings. To do this, click the Validate Stress Profile icon.
After you save the changes in your profile, the Profile Summary area will appear. Click the area to view a report
of the current stress profile in the tool's Results window.
You may also wish to view a graphical representation of your profile. To do this, click the Plot icon to save any
profile changes and view a stress vs. time plot. For general information on plots, see Chapter 12.
If desired, you can use the Comments page of the control panel to enter notes or other text that will be saved with
the stress profile.
5.10.2 Using Stress Profiles in the ALTA Standard Folio
There are two ways stress profiles can be used in the ALTA standard folio. First, they can be used to describe the
time-varying stress conditions that sample units will experience during testing (as shown in the data sheet below).
Note: Clicking the Validate Stress Profile icon will not automatically update your stress vs. time plot. To make sure
your plot reflects the most recent profile information, click the Plot icon.
5 ALTA Standard Folios
228 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Second, they can be used to describe the time-varying stress conditions that the product will experience during
normal use (as shown in the Use Stress Level window below).
To describe the tests stress conditions:
In the ALTA standard folio data sheet, each row represents a tested unit (or group of units). To choose the
profile that describes the test conditions for a unit or group, first make sure a cumulative damage life-stress
model is selected on the control panel. Then select the cell in the appropriate stress column for the unit or
group. A drop-down list will appear in the cell. The list displays all the validated stress profiles in the currently
active project.
To describe the products use level stress conditions:
To choose a stress profile that represents the product's normal operating conditions, first make sure a
cumulative damage life-stress model is selected on the control panel. Then click the Set Use Stress link to
open the Use Stress Level window. Select the Profile check box for all applicable stresses. The Use Stress
Level drop-down list displays all the validated stress profiles in the currently active project.
Note: Some plots (e.g., the use level probability plot) are not available when you use a stress profile to describe the
product's use level conditions.
Note: If you update a stress profile that is associated with an ALTA standard folio, the calculations will not be
updated automatically. To update the ALTA standard folio calculations, click the Calculate icon on the control
panel.
5.10 Time-Dependent Stress Profiles
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 229
5.10.3 Stress Profile Example
A reliability engineer is asked to determine, with a confidence level of 90%, whether an electronic component has a
B10 life of at least 350 hours under ordinary conditions.
To simplify the analysis, the engineer will assume the ordinary stress conditions for the component consist of a
constant stress level of 2 V. However, because the ordinary stress conditions are known to involve escalating stress
values, the component will be subjected to a time-varying voltage stress during testing. The following table describes
the stress values will be applied during the test.
Starting
Time (Hr)
Ending
Time (Hr)
Stress
Level (V)
0 250 2
250 350 3
350 370 4
370 380 5
380 390 6
390 400 7
5 ALTA Standard Folios
230 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
All eleven units were tested to failure using the same stress profile. The following failure times were observed in the
test.
Add a new ALTA standard folio by choosing Insert > Folios > ALTA Standard Folio. Since all the data are
exact failure times, clear all of the check boxes in the Options for the Times-to-Failure Data Type area. Then,
select Hour (Hr) from the Units drop-down list and click Next>.
On the second page of the setup window, select Voltage as the stress types. Set the use stress level to 2 with V as
the unit.
Click OK to close the setup window and view your new standard folio. Next, create a stress profile for voltage by
choosing Insert > Project Items > Add ALTA Stress.
A new stress profile icon will appear in the current project explorer. Rename the new stress profile to Voltage
Step by right-clicking the new stress profile icon and choosing Rename Item from the shortcut menu. Enter
segment end times and stress values into the data sheet, as shown next.
Failure Time (Hr) Stress Level
280 Time-varying
310 Time-varying
330 Time-varying
352 Time-varying
360 Time-varying
366 Time-varying
371 Time-varying
374 Time-varying
378 Time-varying
381 Time-varying
385 Time-varying
5.10 Time-Dependent Stress Profiles
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 231
Select Continue from last stress on the control panel. Click the Validate Stress Profile icon to save and validate
the information in your new profile. Finally, click the Plot icon to view a stress vs. time plot for your profile. It
should appear as shown next.
After creating the stress profile, return to your ALTA standard folio. Select CD-Weibull (i.e., the cumulative
damage life-stress relationship combined with the Weibull life distribution) from the Model drop-down list. Click
Stress Transformation and apply the Logarithmic transformation to the stress. Then, in the data sheet of the
folio, enter the failure times. To assign the stress profile to a failure time, click the corresponding cell in the
Voltage column of the data sheet. Click the arrow in the cell and choose Voltage Step from the drop-down list.
After you have filled out the data sheet, it should appear as shown next.
Click the Calculate icon. The parameters of the model will be automatically computed and displayed in the
Analysis Summary area.
To estimate the B10 life of the device, choose ALTA > Analysis > Quick Calculation Pad or click the icon on
the control panel.
In the QCP, choose to calculate the BX% Life with Lower One-Sided confidence bounds. Select Hour for the
time units and then make the following inputs:
5 ALTA Standard Folios
232 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Stress = 2
BX% Life At = 10
Confidence Level = 0.9
Click Calculate to display the results, as shown next.
The results show that the component's estimated B10 life is 507.9438 hours. The lower one-sided 90% confidence
bound is shown to be 300.4821 hours. Thus, the test's results do not show with 90% confidence that the component's
B10 life is at least 350 hours.
5.11 ALTA Distribution Wizard
The Distribution Wizard for ALTA standard folios performs a Likelihood Value (LKV) test. The test computes the
value of the log-likelihood function given the calculated parameters of the distribution in order to determine the best
distribution for a data set. Note that the Distribution Wizard only serves as a guide for you to decide which
distribution to use in your selected model, and it assumes the life-stress relationship you selected on the control panel.
You should compare its suggestion with your own engineering knowledge about the product being modeled before
making the final decision.
Open the Distribution Wizard by choosing ALTA > Analysis > Distribution Wizard or by clicking its icon in the
Main page of the control panel.
5.12 Add or Remove Columns
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 233
On the Main tab of the Distribution Wizard, select the distributions you would like to consider and then click Analyze
to compare them. The distributions will be ranked according to how well they fit the data, with rank 1 being the best
fit. The highest ranked distribution will also be highlighted with blue text.
Click the Implement button to close the Distribution Wizard and automatically calculate the parameters for the
highest ranked distribution.
The data sheet on the Analysis Details tab summarizes the ranking results and displays the value of the log-likelihood
function for each distribution given the calculated parameters. The calculated parameters for each considered
distribution are also shown.
5.12 Add or Remove Columns
The Add or Remove Columns window allows you to change the number of stress columns in your data sheet. You can
also add/remove a second subset ID column by selecting/clearing the Subset ID 2 check box.
To add a stress column:
Open the window by choosing ALTA > Format and View > Add or Remove Columns or clicking its icon on
the control panel.
In the window that appears, click the Add Column icon in the bottom-left corner. The Define New Stress window
will appear.
Enter the name, units of measurement and normal stress level for the new stress. Click OK to return to the Add or
Remove Columns window.
5 ALTA Standard Folios
234 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The new stress will appear in the window with a selected check box and Add displayed in the Status column.
Click OK to add the stress to your data sheet and close the window.
To remove a column, clear the check box for that column. Remove will be displayed in the Status column. Click
OK.
5.13 Likelihood Ratio Test
The Likelihood Ratio Test tool is used to assess the assumption of a common shape parameter among the data
obtained at the various accelerated stress levels. This assumption underlies the use of any model that includes a life
distribution with a shape parameter. By confirming this assumption, you confirm that units will fail in the same
manner across different stress levels. The tool is available for all models in ALTA that include the Weibull or
lognormal distribution, except the cumulative damage models in ALTA PRO.
To use the Likelihood Ratio Test tool, first calculate the parameters in your ALTA standard folio. After the shape
parameter is calculated in the folio, open the tool by choosing ALTA > Options > Likelihood Ratio Test or clicking
its icon on the main page of the ALTA standard folio's control panel.
Next, enter a significance level in the Input area. The tool uses your specified significance level to determine whether
there is a statistically significant difference in the shape parameter estimates at each stress level. For example, if you
enter 0.1, then the tool will determine whether the estimated shape parameters differ significantly at a level of 10%.
Finally, click Calculate to view the results of the test. The Results area of the window displays the calculated
likelihood ratio test statistic, T, and chi-squared value. If T is not greater than the chi-squared value, then the
Tip: If you wish to later change the heading of any stress or subset ID column, you can do so by double-clicking the
column heading in the data sheet.
5.14 Transfer Data to Weibull++
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 235
estimated shape parameters do not differ significantly at the specified level. A written report of the results also
appears in this area, as shown next.
The Likelihood Values tab (shown next) of the window displays the likelihood values obtained by two methods.
The values in the Accelerated Stress Levels area are calculated by fitting a separate distribution to the data from each
of the test stress levels (with two or more exact failure times). The likelihood value in the Use Stress Level area is
calculated by fitting a single model with a common shape parameter and a separate scale parameter for each of the
stress levels, where the stress levels are represented by indicator variables.
5.14 Transfer Data to Weibull++
The Transfer Data to Weibull++ window is used to transfer the data in an ALTA standard folio data sheet to a
Weibull++ standard folio. This allows you to perform life data analysis on your accelerated test data. For example,
5 ALTA Standard Folios
236 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
you could use this window to separately analyze the data obtained from each stress level from the accelerated testing.
To access the window, click the Transfer Data to Weibull++ icon on the control panel.
After you click the icon, you will have the option to either transfer the data to a single Weibull++ data sheet or
transfer it to multiple sheets.
If you select the Transfer all data to a single sheet check box, the subset ID column of that sheet will display the
stress level at which each data point was obtained. (If desired, you can then use the Batch Auto Run tool to extract
data subsets from the data sheet.)
If you select the Transfer data for each stress to a separate data sheet check box, the data will be grouped
according to stress level (where, in multiple-stress situations, a stress level is a combination of stress values), and
then each group will be placed into its own data sheet.
If you select to transfer the data to multiple sheets, the Calculate parameters after transfer check box will
appear. Select this check box if you wish to have the software automatically calculate each data sheet using the
life distribution from your selected model. If you select this check box, you will also have the option to
automatically add a Contour plot that will compare the calculated parameters for each data sheet. For example,
you could use this plot to help you determine whether the shape parameter estimates for the data obtained at
different stress levels differ significantly at a specified confidence level.
This window also includes a check box labeled Create and transfer a stress distribution data set. If you select this
option, the tool will calculate the product's unreliability at the specified time and at eleven different stress levels. The
different stress levels will range from the use stress level to the maximum stress level used in the test, with equal
increments in between. This information will then be exported to a free-form data sheet in a new Weibull++ standard
folio, like the data sheet shown next.
In this example, the product's use stress level is 356 K, and the maximum stress level used in the test is 426 K. Thus,
the X-axis values range from 356 to 426. The Y-axis values represent the unreliability (as a percentage) for each
stress level. So, if the time specified in the Transfer Data to Weibull++ window was 1,000 hours, then, according to
the first row of this data sheet, the product has a probability of failure of 31.57% at 1,000 hours at a stress level of 356
K. If you wish, you can calculate this data to further analyze the relationship between stress level and unreliability.
5.15 Convert Stress Values
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 237
In multi-stress situations, the Select Stress to Vary icon will be enabled in the window, as shown next.
If you click this icon, a window will appear that allows you to select which stress type will be varied in the software's
unreliability calculations. The remaining stress types will be fixed at their specified use stress values.
5.15 Convert Stress Values
The Convert Stress Values window (shown next) is used to convert all the values entered in one of the stress columns
of an ALTA standard folio data sheet.
You can have the stress values multiplied or divided by a specified value, or you can convert temperature values that
were entered in Celsius or Fahrenheit to one of the absolute scales supported by the software (i.e., Kelvin or
Rankine).
Follow the steps outlined below:
Select the stress column that contains the values you want to convert by clicking the header of that column or
selecting any cell in that column.
Choose ALTA > Options > Convert Stress Values to open the window.
In the Convert Each Value area, select the conversion option you wish to use.
Note: The software will always convert all of the values in a column. For example, if you select one cell and convert
the contained value, all the other values in that column will be converted as well.
5 ALTA Standard Folios
238 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
If you select the Multiply By or Divide By option, you will enable an input field. In this field, enter the value
that you wish to have each stress value multiplied or divided by.
Select the Put current values in Subset ID check box if you want the software to move the original, unconverted
values into the first subset ID column in the data sheet for future reference. If there is already information in the
first subset ID column, the software will overwrite that information.
Click OK to convert all the values in the selected stress column.
5.16 Alter Parameters Without Recalculation
The Alter Parameters window allows you to alter the values of the calculated parameters, assuming that the ranks, the
likelihood function and the Fisher Matrix (evaluated at the original parameter estimates) remain the same. In plots,
the position of the data points remain the same but the solution line and all subsequent analysis made via the QCP and
other tools are based on the modified parameter values.
After you calculate the parameters, you can select this option by choosing ALTA > Options > Alter Parameters >
Alter Parameters (w/o) Recalculation or by clicking the icon on the control panel.
This option is intended to enable you to experiment with possible alternative scenarios by altering the estimated
parameters of the data set. Any plots or QCP results will be based on the altered parameters, and therefore may be
appropriate only within the context of your specific what-if analysis.
5.17 Alter One Parameter and Recalculate
The Alter One Parameter (and Recalculate) feature allows you to manually alter one of the parameter values and then
have the software estimate the other parameter values that would result in a good fit for the distribution. The ranks
and the likelihood function are assumed to remain the same; however, unlike the Alter Parameters without
Recalculation method, the Fisher Matrix is evaluated at the altered parameter values. The solution line in the plots
and all other subsequent analysis will be based on the new values of the parameters.
To access this feature, choose ALTA > Options > Alter Parameters > Alter One Parameter (and Recalculate).
After you choose which parameter to alter, a window will appear where you can enter a new value for the parameter.
After you enter the new value and click OK, the window will close and the software will folio will automatically
calculate the remaining parameters.
This option is intended to enable you to experiment with possible alternative scenarios by altering the estimated
parameters of the data set. Any plots or QCP results will be based on the altered parameters, and therefore may be
appropriate only within the context of your specific what-if analysis.
5.18 Calculations with Insufficient Data Entered
The Parameter Input window will appear when you attempt to calculate an ALTA data sheet that does contain enough
data to fit a model.
If you attempt to calculate a data sheet in an ALTA standard folio with no data entered, the Parameter Input window
will appear as shown next and allow you to either enter the parameters for the selected ALTA model directly or use
Tip: If you only have one subset ID column, and you want to move its information to a column that will not be
overwritten when you select the Put current values in Subset ID check box, first use the Add or Remove Columns
window to add a second subset ID column. See Section 5.12 on page 233. Then paste the information from the first
subset ID column to the new column. The software will only overwrite values in the first ID column.
5.18 Calculations with Insufficient Data Entered
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 239
the Quick Parameter Estimator (QPE) to estimate the model's parameters based on information you have about the
reliability of the product at normal and accelerated stress levels.
After you enter the parameters and click OK, the data sheet will be updated automatically with the specified model.
Any plots or QCP results you produce from this data sheet will be based on this model.
Note: If you have more than one stress column selected to be used in the analysis and you attempt to calculate an
empty data sheet using a proportional hazards or general log-linear model, the Columns drop-down list will be
enabled in the Parameter Input window. With this drop-down list, you can select how many stresses to include in the
model. You cannot choose to use more stresses than are selected to be used in the analysis.
To perform an accelerated life testing data analysis, you need information about how the product behaves at more
than one stress level. If you select to use an Arrhenius, Eyring or inverse power law (IPL) model and attempt to
calculate the data sheet with data for only one stress level, the Parameter Input will appear as shown next and ask you
to specify an acceleration factor that allows the software to calculate how the product behaves at other stress levels.
The acceleration factor is obtained by dividing the products life at the use stress level by its life at the accelerated
stress level used in the test. For example, if the product has a life of 100 hours at the use stress level, and it was tested
at an accelerated stress level which reduces its life to 50 hours, then you would enter 2 in the Acceleration Factor
field.
Note: This method of calculating the data sheet does not support the calculation of confidence bounds.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 241
Degradation analysis is a technique that uses the performance measurements
(degradation measurements) of a product over time to predict the point at which each
unit in the sample is expected to fail. This analysis is useful for tests performed on products with very high reliability,
where it is not possible to test the products to failure under normal operating conditions.
The Weibull++ degradation analysis folio extrapolates the times at which the amount or level of degradation is
serious enough that the unit is considered to be failed. In addition, the folio automatically performs life data analysis
on the extrapolated failure times. This allows you to obtain the life characteristics of the product.
1
This chapter describes how to use the Weibull++ degradation analysis folio, including:
Setting up the data sheet and using the control panel - Section 6.1 (p. 241).
Viewing a Degradation vs. Time plot - Section 6.2 (p. 245).
A degradation analysis example - Section 6.3 (p. 246).
Using the Degradation Model Wizard - Section 6.4 (p. 248).
6.1 Weibull++ Degradation Analysis Folio
To add a Weibull++ degradation analysis folio to a project, choose Insert > Folios > Weibull++ Degradation or
right-click the Specialized Folios folder in the current project explorer and choose Add Weibull++ Degradation on
the shortcut menu.
The following example shows a degradation analysis of two automobile tires, A and B.
Weibull++ Degradation
Analysis
6
1.
The ReliaWiki resources portal has more information on degradation analysis at: http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/
Degradation_Data_Analysis.
6 Weibull++ Degradation Analysis
242 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The data sheet contains the following information:
The Inspection Time column indicates the time at which the degradation of the unit was measured. Time may
also be measured as the amount of usage the unit accumulates or as the factor that degrades the unit. For example,
in the data sheet, the inspection time is in mileage because of its direct relation to the wear on the tires. The level
of degradation may be measured either continuously or at predetermined intervals of time.
The Degradation column indicates the degradation measurement of a unit. In this example, the degradation is
obtained by directly measuring the depth of the tire tread.
Note that in some cases, measuring the level of degradation is not possible without invasive techniques or
destroying the specimen. In those situations, the degradation may be measured through a performance indicator,
such as the luminosity of a bulb or resistance of a dielectric.
The Unit ID column indicates the unit being measured. The software extrapolates the point of failure for each
unique unit based on its degradation measurements.
After you have entered the degradation data in the data sheet, the next step is to go to the control panel to select the
settings for the analysis.
6.1 Weibull++ Degradation Analysis Folio
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 243
Control Panel Settings
The degradation analysis folio control panel is arranged into sections of related tasks. Each group has its own page on
the control panel. The Main page of the control panel is shown next.
The Main page is probably where you will spend most of your time because it contains most of the tools you would
need to analyze a data set:
The Degradation Model area allows you select the mathematical model to use for extrapolating the times at
which the critical degradation level would be reached for each unique unit ID in the data sheet. The following is a
list of all available models and their corresponding equations. The variable x represents the failure time, y
represents the critical degradation, and variables a, b and c are the model parameters to be solved for in the
extrapolation.
Linear: y = a*x+b
Exponential: y = b*exp(a*x)
Power: y = b*(x^a)
Logarithmic: y = a*ln(x)+b
Gompertz: y = a*b^(c^x)
Tip: There is a horizontal splitter bar directly above the small icons at the bottom of the control panel. If you drag it as far
up as it will go, all of the pages of the panel will be accessed by large buttons. If you drag it all the way down, all of the
pages will be accessed by small icons. Positions in between allow you to use some large buttons and some small icons.
See page 78 in Chapter 2.
6 Weibull++ Degradation Analysis
244 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Lloyd-Lipow: y = a-b/x
The Critical Degradation field is for defining the level of degradation that is considered a failure. For example,
you might wish to define failure as the time when the depth of the tire tread is less than 2 millimeters.
The Suspend After option allows you to define a censoring time past which no failure times are extrapolated. In
practice, there is usually a rather narrow band in which the censoring time has any practical meaning. If the
censoring time is relatively low, no failure times will be extrapolated, which defeats the purpose of the
degradation analysis. On the other hand, a relatively high censoring time would occur after all of the theoretical
failure times, thus rendering the censored data meaningless. Nevertheless, certain situations may arise in which it
is beneficial to censor the degradation data. For example, if your product has a maximum warranty life of 10,000
hours, then you may want to treat all failures beyond that time as suspensions.
The Life Data Model area contains the settings for performing life data analysis on the failure times that were
extrapolated via the degradation analysis. These settings have no effect on the degradation analysis calculations;
they affect only the life data analysis calculations. The settings in this area are identical to the settings on the
control panel of a Weibull++ standard folio, except for the following option:
The Use extrapolated intervals option allows you to extrapolate the failure/suspension times as interval
censored data. The intervals are calculated as bounds around the extrapolated data points.
When you click the Calculate icon on the control panel, the software extrapolates the points at which the
degradation measurements will reach the point of critical degradation. It then performs a separate life data
analysis on the extrapolated points based on the settings you have specified in the Life Data Model area.
The Degradation Results area allows you to display the parameters of the chosen degradation model and the
extrapolated failure/suspension times. Click the Degradation Results (...) button to open the Results window,
which allows you to view, edit and print the calculations.
The Life Data Results area allows you to display the parameters of the life data model. Click the Life Data
Results (...) button to open the Results window.
The folio tools are arranged on the left side of the panel. Use these tools to manage data and experiment with the
results of your analysis. Each tool is described in detail below.
Calculate
Extrapolates the points at which the degradation measurements will reach the point of critical degradation
(i.e., the times at which the degradation is serious enough that the unit is considered to be failed). The
software then performs life data analysis calculations on the extrapolated data points. This tool is also
available by choosing Degradation > Analysis > Calculate.
Tip: If you are not certain which degradation model would provide the best fit for your data, you can use the
Degradation Model Wizard to guide you through the selection process. See Section 6.4 on page 248.
Whats Changed? In previous versions of Weibull++, you used the Associate Specialized Folio tool to transfer the
extrapolated data points to a standard folio data sheet in order to perform life data analysis. In version 8, you can
conveniently perform life data analysis calculations within the degradation analysis folio.
Note: If the distribution and parameters are associated with a published model, then the model's name will appear as
a link at the bottom of the Analysis Summary area. Click the link to view the model's properties. For details on how
to publish the results as a model, see page 82 in Chapter 2.
6.2 Weibull++ Degradation Plot Sheet
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 245
Plot
Creates a new sheet in the folio that provides a choice of applicable plot types. This includes the degradation
vs. time plot in addition to the life data analysis plots. This tool is also available by choosing Degradation >
Analysis > Plot. See Section 6.2 on page 245.
QCP
Opens the Quick Calculation Pad, which allows you to calculate life data analysis metrics, identical to the
calculations you can perform in a Weibull++ standard folio. This tool is also available by choosing
Degradation > Analysis > QCP. See page 172 in Chapter 4..
Degradation Model Wizard
Opens the Degradation Model Wizard, which helps you select the degradation model that best fits your data.
This tool is also available by choosing Degradation > Analysis > Model Wizard. See Section 6.4 on page
248.
Distribution Wizard
Opens the Distribution Wizard, which helps you select the distribution that best fits the data set based on the
chosen parameter estimation method (i.e., RRX or RRY). In the degradation folio, the ranking in the
Distribution Wizard is based on the life data model. This tool is also available by choosing Degradation >
Analysis > Distribution Wizard. See page 178 in Chapter 4..
Change Units
Opens the Change Units window, which allows you to change the time units of an existing data sheet. See
page 89 in Chapter 2.
6.2 Weibull++ Degradation Plot Sheet
After you analyze the degradation data in the Weibull++ degradation analysis folio, you can click create plots of your
results by choosing Degradation > Analysis > Plot or by clicking the Plot icon on the Main page of the control
panel.
The Plot Type area on the plot sheet of the control panel allows you to select the type of plot you wish to view and the
units of measurement you want the x-axis of the plot to be displayed in. The plot types available include all of the life
data analysis plots. See page 169 in Chapter 4. These are generated by analyzing the extrapolated failure times for
each unit under test.
In addition to the life data analysis plots, you can view the following plots, which pertain specifically to the
extrapolation of failure times from the degradation measurements.
Degradation vs. Time (Linear) plots the degradation of each test unit over time, using a linear scale for time and
degradation. A thick horizontal line marks the critical degradation level (i.e., the level at which a unit is
considered failed) that was specified on the Main page of the control panel. You can use this plot to visualize how
failure times were extrapolated for each unit.
Degradation vs. Time (Log) plots the same information as the Degradation vs. Time (Linear) plot, but using
logarithmic axes for time and degradation.
The Unit IDs area of the control panel will display the unit IDs you entered in the data sheet of the folio. To remove a
test unit from the plot, clear the associated check box.
6 Weibull++ Degradation Analysis
246 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
6.3 Weibull++ Degradation Analysis Example
An analyst needs to determine the time when 10% of the turbine blades in a sample are expected to fail (i.e., B10
life). To determine performance, the blades are tested for crack propagation. The units are cyclically stressed and
inspected every 100,000 cycles for crack length. Failure is defined as a crack length of 30mm or greater. The
following table shows the results.
Using degradation analysis, project the failure times for the blades using an exponential model for the extrapolation,
and then calculate the reliability of the blades at a 90% confidence level.
The first step is set up the data sheet for the analysis. Click the Change Units icon on the Main page of the control
panel.
In the Change Units window, select to change the time units to Cycles.
Next, enter the information from the table in the degradation analysis folio.
On the control panel, select the Exponential degradation model and enter a value of 30 for the Critical
Degradation.
For the life data model, select the 2-P Weibull distribution and the MLE analysis method. Use the default settings
for all other options, as shown next.
Cycle
(x1,000)
Unit A Unit B Unit B
100 15 mm 17 mm 12 mm
200 20 mm 25 mm 16 mm
300 22 mm 26 mm 17 mm
400 26 mm 27 mm 20 mm
500 29 mm 33 mm 26 mm
6.3 Weibull++ Degradation Analysis Example
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 247
Click Calculate. To view a plot of the results, click the Plot icon on the Main page of the control panel.
The Degradation vs. Time (Linear) plot shows that unit B is expected to reach the critical degradation level first,
compared to the other units.
To view the times when the units will reach the critical degradation level, return to the data sheet of the folio. On
the control panel, click the Degradation Results (...) button. The parameters of the degradation model for each
unit ID are displayed in the first data sheet of the Results window while the extrapolated failure times for all units
are displayed in the second sheet, as shown next.
To view the results of the life data analysis, close the Results window and click the Life Data Results (...) button
on the control panel. The parameters are estimated to be beta = 8.0722 and eta = 541.4229.
The next step is to estimate the time when 10% of the blades in the sample are expected to fail. Close the Results
window and click the QCP icon on the control panel. In the QCP, choose to calculate the BX% Life. Select
6 Weibull++ Degradation Analysis
248 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Cycles for the units and enter a value of 10 in the BX% Life At field. Click Calculate to obtain the results, as
shown next:
The results indicate that 10% of the turbine blades will have failed (i.e., B10 life) at approximately 409,698 cycles of
operation.
6.4 Degradation Model Wizard
The Degradation Model Wizard performs a goodness of fit test to determine the best degradation model for your data.
Note that the degradation model wizard only serves as a guide. You should compare its suggestion with information
about the product being modeled before making the final decision.
To use the degradation model wizard, you must first have at least two data points for each unique unit ID in the
current data sheet. Access the wizard by choosing Degradation > Analysis > Model Wizard or by clicking its icon
on the Main page of the control panel.
6.4 Degradation Model Wizard
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 249
On the Main tab of the Degradation Model wizard, select the models you would like to consider. Click Analyze to
start the evaluation. The results of the evaluation will be presented as in the figure shown next.
The models will be ranked according to how well they fit the data, with rank 1 being the best fit. In the figure shown
above, the exponential model is the suggested model for the data set. Click Implement to automatically extrapolate
failure times using the suggested model.
The calculations behind the ranking can be viewed on the Analysis Details tab. The wizard uses the Sum of Square
Error (SSE) to evaluate the fit of the data. The Analysis Details tab includes two data sheets:
The Ranks sheet displays the overall ranking as well as the ranking for each model and unit ID based on the SSE
evaluation. Due to the randomness of materials, a model that is good for one unit may not be the best for the other
units. In the example shown next, the exponential model is the best model for analyzing the data collected for
Device A and B, while the logarithmic model is a better fit for Device C.
The SSE sheet shows the sum of square error for each model and unit ID. The values are obtained by first
calculating the distance (the error) vertically from each data point to its corresponding value on the fitted model.
6 Weibull++ Degradation Analysis
250 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The error value is squared, and then all the squared values are added up. The SSE column shows the calculated
sum of squared errors for each model. The highest rank is given to the model with the lowest SSE value.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 251
Degradation analysis is a technique that uses the performance (degradation) measurements of
a product over time to predict the point at which each unit in the sample is expected to fail.
This analysis is useful for tests performed on products with very high reliability, where it is not possible to test the
units to failure under normal conditions. ALTA degradation analysis uses accelerated stress levels during testing to
further reduce the test time required to obtain the predicted failure times. The predicted failure times are failures that
would occur under these accelerated stress levels.
After the failure times under accelerated stresses are extrapolated, the ALTA degradation analysis folio will
automatically perform an accelerated life testing data analysis on those failure times. This allows you to obtain the
life characteristics of the product at normal operating conditions.
This chapter describes how to use the ALTA degradation analysis folio, including:
Setting up the data sheet and using the control panel - Section 7.1 (p. 251).
Viewing a Degradation vs. Time plot - Section 7.2 (p. 255).
A degradation analysis example - Section 7.3 (p. 256).
Using the Degradation Model Wizard - Section 7.4 (p. 258).
7.1 ALTA Degradation Analysis Folio
To add an ALTA degradation analysis folio to an existing project choose Insert > Folios > ALTA Degradation
Folio or right-click the Specialized Folios folder in the current project explorer and choose Add ALTA Degradation
on the shortcut menu.
The setup window is used to do the following:
Determine the number of stress columns to be used in your degradation folio's data sheet by selecting or clearing
the various check boxes.
Every stress column represents a stress type. So, for example, a data sheet with two stress columns would be
used for data obtained from a two-stress test.
Change the labels for each stress column by changing the text under the Stress Name and Stress Units headings.
There is a preview table at the bottom of the window that shows you how the names of the associated columns
that will appear in the data sheet.
ALTA Degradation Analysis
7
Note: The Stress Name and Stress Units fields are merely for adding text to the headers of the stress columns, so
you can keep track of which stress type is associated with each stress column. This information is not relevant to the
softwares calculations.
7 ALTA Degradation Analysis
252 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Define the stress level of each stress that is expected for normal use conditions by entering values under the Use
Level heading.
After you configure your folio, click OK in the setup window to create and view it.
Each row in the ALTA degradation analysis data sheet is a degradation measurement for a specified test unit at a
given stress level. For example, the following shows data for two LED units, A1 and A2, whose light intensity was
inspected every 50 hours.
The Inspection Time column indicates the time at which the degradation of the unit was measured. Time may
also be measured as the amount of usage the sample accumulates or as the factor that degrades the unit. The level
of degradation may be measured either continuously or at predetermined intervals of time.
The Degradation column indicates the degradation measurement of a unit (in this case, measured in mcd).
Note that in some cases, measuring the level of degradation is not possible without invasive techniques or
destroying the specimen. In those situations, the degradation may be measured through a performance indicator,
such as the luminosity of a bulb (as in this example) or resistance of a dielectric.
The Amps column indicates the stress type and level (in this case, measured in mA) of the unit being tested.
The Unit ID column indicates the unit being measured. The software extrapolates the failure time for each unique
unit based on its degradation measurements.
7.1 ALTA Degradation Analysis Folio
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 253
Control Panel Settings
The degradation analysis folio control panel is arranged into sections of related tasks. Each group has its own page on
the control panel. The Main page of the control panel is shown next..
The Degradation Model area includes a drop-down list you must use to select a mathematical model. This model
will be used to extrapolate the times at which the critical degradation level would be reached for each unique unit
ID in the data sheet. The following is a list of all available models and their corresponding equations. The variable
x represents the failure time, y represents the critical degradation, and variables a, b and c are the model
parameters to be solved for in the extrapolation.
Linear: y = a*x+b
Exponential: y = b*exp(a*x)
Power: y = b*(x^a)
Logarithmic: y = a*ln(x)+b
Tip: There is a horizontal splitter bar directly above the small icons at the bottom of the control panel. If you drag it as far
up as it will go, all of the pages of the panel will be accessed by large buttons. If you drag it all the way down, all of the
pages will be accessed by small icons. Positions in between allow you to use some large buttons and some small icons.
See page 78 in Chapter 2.
7 ALTA Degradation Analysis
254 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Gompertz: y = a*b^(c^x)
The Critical Degradation field allows you to define the level of degradation that is considered a failure. For
example, you might wish to define failure as the time when the depth of a tire tread is less than 2 millimeters.
Suspend After allows you to define a censoring time past which no failure times are extrapolated. In practice,
there is usually a rather narrow band in which the censoring time has any practical meaning. If the censoring time
is relatively low, no failure times will be extrapolated, which defeats the purpose of the degradation analysis. On
the other hand, a relatively high censoring time would occur after all of the theoretical failure times, thus
rendering the censored data meaningless. Nevertheless, certain situations may arise in which it is beneficial to
censor the degradation data. For example, if your product has a maximum warranty life of 10,000 hours, then you
may want to treat all failures beyond that time as suspensions.
The ALTA Model area contains the settings for performing accelerated life testing data analysis on the failure
times that were extrapolated via the degradation analysis. These settings have no effect on the degradation
analysis calculations; they only affect the accelerated life testing analysis calculations. The settings in this area are
identical to the settings on the control panel of an ALTA standard folio, except for the following option.
The Use extrapolated intervals option extrapolates the failure/suspensions times as interval censored data.
The intervals are calculated as bounds around the extrapolated data points.
When you click the Calculate icon on the control panel, the software extrapolates the points at which the
degradation measurements will reach the point of critical degradation. It then performs a separate accelerated life
testing data analysis on the extrapolated points based on the settings you have specified in the ALTA Model area.
The Degradation Results area allows you to display the parameters of the chosen degradation model and the
extrapolated failure/suspension times. Click the Degradation Results (...) button to open the Results window,
which allows you to view, edit and print the calculations.
The ALTA Results area allows you to display the parameters of the model that combines your selected life
distribution and life-stress relationship. Click the ALTA Results (...) button to open the Results window.
The folio tools are arranged on the left side of the panel. Use these tools to manage data and experiment with the
results of your analysis. Each tool is described in detail below.
Calculate
Extrapolates the times at which the degradation will reach the critical degradation level (i.e., the times at
which the degradation is serious enough that the unit is considered to be failed). The software then performs
accelerated life testing analysis calculations on the extrapolated data points. This tool is also available by
choosing Degradation > Analysis > Calculate.
Tip: If you are not certain which degradation model would provide the best fit for your data, you can use the
Degradation Model Wizard to guide you through the selection process. See Section 7.4 on page 258.
Whats Changed? In previous versions of ALTA, you used the Associate Specialized Folio tool to transfer the
extrapolated data points to an ALTA standard folio data sheet in order to perform accelerated life testing data
analysis. In version 8, you can conveniently perform this analysis within the ALTA degradation analysis folio.
Note: If the model and parameters are associated with a published model, then the published model's name will
appear as a link at the bottom of the Analysis Summary area. Click the link to view the model's properties. For
details on how to publish the results as a model, see page 82 in Chapter 2.
7.2 ALTA Degradation Plot Sheet
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 255
Plot
Creates a new sheet in the folio that provides a choice of applicable plot types. This includes the degradation
vs. time plot in addition to the ALTA plots. This tool is also available by choosing Degradation > Analysis >
Plot. See Section 7.2 on page 255.
QCP
Opens the Quick Calculation Pad, which allows you to calculate accelerated life testing analysis metrics,
identical to the calculations you can perform in an ALTA standard folio. This tool is also available by
choosing Degradation > Analysis > QCP. See page 216 in Chapter 5.
Degradation Model Wizard
Opens the Degradation Model Wizard, which helps you select the degradation model that best fits your data.
This tool is also available by choosing Degradation > Analysis > Model Wizard. See Section 7.4 on page
258.
Distribution Wizard
Opens the Distribution Wizard, which helps you select the life distribution that best fits the data set. In the
degradation folio, the ranking in the Distribution Wizard is based on the life distribution included in the
selected ALTA model. This tool is also available by choosing Degradation > Analysis > Distribution
Wizard. See page 232 in Chapter 5.
Change Units
Opens the Change Units window, which allows you to change the time units of an existing data sheet. See
page 89 in Chapter 2.
7.2 ALTA Degradation Plot Sheet
After you analyze the degradation data in the ALTA degradation analysis folio, you can click create plots of your
results by choosing Degradation > Analysis > Plot or by clicking the Plot icon on the Main page of the control
panel.
The Plot Type area on the plot sheet of the control panel allows you to select the type of plot you wish to view and the
units of measurement you want the x-axis of the plot to be displayed in. The plot types available include all of the
ALTA plots. See page 212 in Chapter 5. These are generated by analyzing the extrapolated failure times at the
accelerated stress levels.
In addition to the ALTA plots, you can view the following plots, which pertain specifically to the extrapolation of
failure times from the degradation measurements.
Degradation vs. Time (Linear) plots the degradation of each test unit over time, using a linear scale for time and
degradation. A thick horizontal line marks the critical degradation level (i.e., the level at which a unit is
considered failed) that was specified on the Main page of the control panel. You can use this plot to visualize how
failure times were extrapolated for each unit.
Degradation vs. Time (Log) plots the same information as the Degradation vs. Time (Linear) plot, but using
logarithmic axes for time and degradation.
The Unit IDs area of the control panel will display the unit IDs you entered in the data sheet of the folio. To remove a
test unit from the plot, clear the associated check box.
7 ALTA Degradation Analysis
256 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
7.3 ALTA Degradation Analysis Example
A manufacturer of LEDs wants to determine, with 90% confidence, whether the B10 life of the LED is at least 700
hours. During operation, the light intensity of the LED diminishes over time, and for present purposes the level at
which an LED can be considered failed (i.e., the critical degradation level) is 50 mcd. The LEDs normally operate at
a stress level of 28 mA, but it would take too long for units tested at this stress level to decrease to a light intensity of
50 mcd. So it is decided to perform an ALTA degradation analysis.
5 units were tested at 35 mA, and 5 were tested at 40 mA. The light intensity of each unit was recorded five times, at
50 hour intervals, as shown next.
Light Intensity (mcd) of Units Tested at 35 mA
Light Intensity (mcd) of Units Tested at 40 mA
Open an ALTA degradation analysis folio by choosing Insert > Folios > ALTA Degradation Folio. In the Define
Stress Columns and Use Stress Levels area of the setup window, select the check box next to the row with
Voltage in the Stress Name column. Then enter mA in the Stress Units column and 28 in the Use Level column.
Inspection
Time (Hr)
Unit A1 Unit A2 Unit A3 Unit A4 Unit A5
50 95.1 93.3 98.3 96.6 95.8
100 86.0 87.1 92.4 88.2 89.0
150 77.6 79.7 89.0 85.1 84.0
200 70.0 74.3 84.3 81.4 81.0
250 66.7 73.0 83.0 78.6 80.0
Inspection
Time (Hr)
Unit B1 Unit B2 Unit B3 Unit B4 Unit B5
50 86.6 82.1 82.7 79.8 75.1
100 78.7 71.4 70.3 68.3 66.7
150 76.0 65.4 64.0 62.3 62.8
200 71.6 61.7 61.3 60.0 59.0
250 68.0 58.0 59.3 59.0 54.0
7.3 ALTA Degradation Analysis Example
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 257
Click OK to view your new ALTA degradation folio. Then enter the data for all units into the data sheet. As an
example, some of the data for units A1 and A2 are entered as shown next.
Next, in the Degradation Model area, select Exponential from the drop-down list and enter 50 in the Critical
Degradation area. In the Model area, select the IPL-Weibull model (i.e., the inverse power law life-stress
relationship combined with the Weibull life distribution) from the drop-down list.
Click the Calculate icon. The software will predict the failure time for each unit under the specified accelerated
stress conditions, and it will perform an accelerated life testing data analysis on those failure times in order to
extrapolate to normal use conditions. To view a plot of the results click the Plot icon.
The Degradation vs. Time plot shows how the performance of each unit ID degrades over time. You can select to
plot the data points on a linear or logarithmic scale. The following example shows the linear scale plot. The pink
line at the bottom of the plot marks the critical degradation level that was specified on the control panel.
To view the parameters of the chosen degradation model and the extrapolated failure/suspension times, return to
the data sheet. On the control panel, click Degradation Results (...). The parameters of the degradation model for
each unit ID are displayed in the first data sheet of the Results window while the extrapolated failure times for all
units are displayed in the second sheet, as shown next.
To view the results of the accelerated life testing data analysis, close the Results window and click ALTA Results
(...) on the control panel.
7 ALTA Degradation Analysis
258 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
To estimate the time at which 10% of units are expected to fail under normal conditions, open the QCP by
choosing ALTA > Analysis > Quick Calculation Pad or by clicking the icon on the Main page of the control
panel.
In the QCP, choose to calculate the BX% Life with Lower One-Sided confidence bounds. Select Hour for the
time units and then make the following inputs:
BX% Life At = 10
Confidence Level = 0.9
Click Calculate to obtain the results, as shown next.
The results show that the B10 life of the LED at estimated to be 1109.9328 hours. The lower one-sided 90%
confidence bound is estimated to be 737.7939 hours. Thus, the LED meets the manufacturer's requirement.
7.4 ALTA Degradation Model Wizard
The ALTA Degradation Model Wizard performs a goodness of fit test to determine the best degradation model for
your data. Note that the degradation model wizard only serves as a guide. You should compare its suggestion with
information about the product being modeled before making the final decision.
To use the degradation model wizard, make sure at least two data points for each unique unit ID have been entered in
the current data sheet. Access the wizard by choosing Degradation > Analysis > Model Wizard or by clicking its
icon on the Main page of the control panel.
7.4 ALTA Degradation Model Wizard
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 259
Evaluating and Using Degradation Models
On the Main tab of the Degradation Model wizard, select the models you would like to consider. Click Analyze to
start the evaluation. The results of the evaluation will be presented as in the figure shown next.
The models will be ranked according to how well they fit the data, with rank 1 being the best fit. In the figure shown
above, the Gompertz model is the suggested model for the data set. Click the Implement button to automatically
extrapolate failure times using top-ranked model.
Viewing the Analysis Details
The calculations behind the degradation model ranking can be viewed on the Analysis Details tab. The wizard uses
the Sum of Square Error (SSE) to evaluate the fit of the data. The Analysis Details tab includes two data sheets:
The Ranks sheet displays the overall ranking as well as the ranking for each model and unit ID based on the SSE
evaluation. Due to the randomness of materials, a model that is good for one unit may not be the best for the other
units. In the example shown next, the exponential model is the best model for analyzing the data collected for
Device A, while the linear model is a better fit for Device B.
The SSE sheet shows the sum of square error for each model and unit ID. The values are obtained by first
calculating the distance (the error) vertically from each data point to its corresponding value on the fitted model.
7 ALTA Degradation Analysis
260 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The error value is squared, and then all the squared values are added up. The SSE column shows the calculated
sum of squared errors for each model. The highest rank is given to the model with the lowest SSE value.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 261
Non-parametric life data analysis (LDA) allows you to analyze data sets without
assuming an underlying life distribution. This technique is useful when dealing with
unknown failure modes, when there is not enough data to assume a life distribution or when the data set does not fit
any life distribution in a satisfactory way. Non-parametric methods can give the big picture of how products are
behaving without the level of technical detail that standard (parametric) life data analysis provides, and without the
risk of errors brought about by making incorrect assumptions about the distribution; however, the non-parametric
analysis does not provide reliability predictions outside of the points of observation (e.g., if failures occurred at 100
and 200 hours, the analysis will calculate the reliability at those two times, but it cannot be used to calculate the
reliability at 150 hours).
In cases where you might want to estimate (i.e., interpolate) the reliability of a product between the points of
observation, the folio gives you the ability to create a parametric model that is based on the analysis. This means that
you convert the reliability values obtained by the non-parametric analysis into unreliability values, and then fit a
distribution to the free-form data set (x = time and y = unreliability). The parametric analysis allows you to
interpolate (and to some extent, extrapolate) the life characteristics of the product using the Quick Calculation Pad
and a wider variety of plots.
This chapter describes how to use the non-parametric LDA folio, including:
Setting up a non-parametric folio data sheet - Section 8.1 (p. 261).
Using the control panel settings - Section 8.2 (p. 264).
Transferring the data to a Weibull++ standard folio - Section 8.3 (p. 266).
Example of a non-parametric life data analysis - Section 8.4 (p. 266).
8.1 Non-Parametric LDA Folio Data Sheet
To create a non-parametric LDA folio, choose Insert > Folios > Non-Parametric LDA or right-click the
Specialized Folios folder in the current project explorer and choose Add Non-Parametric LDA on the shortcut
menu.
Once the folio is created, select a non-parametric analysis method from the Data Type area of the control panel. The
method you select will determine the columns that appear in the data sheet.
There are three non-parametric analysis methods available: Kaplan-Meier, Actuarial-Simple and Actuarial-Standard.
In general, the Kaplan-Meier method is recommended for data sets with few suspensions, while the Actuarial-
Standard and Actuarial-Simple methods are best for cases where the data set is mostly suspensions or when working
with interval data, provided that none of the intervals are overlapping. There are no significant differences in the
Non-Parametric LDA Folio
8
8 Non-Parametric LDA Folio
262 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
results between the two actuarial methods; however, in some cases, the approximation method of the Actuarial-
Simple analysis may provide more conservative estimates.
1
Kaplan-Meier Analysis
The following example shows the data sheet for the Kaplan-Meier analysis.
The Number in State column indicates the number of units in a group, the State F or S column indicates whether the
units in the group are failures (F) or suspensions (S) and the State End Time column records the end time of the
interval.
Actuarial-Simple Analysis
The following example shows the data sheet for the Actuarial-Simple analysis.
The data sheet contains information about the start time and end time of each interval, as well as the number of units
in each interval that are either failures or suspensions. The Available Units column shows the number of units at the
start of each interval. The information in this column is automatically calculated by the software based on all of the
entries in the Number Failed and Number Suspended columns.
1.
The ReliaWiki resource portal has more information on the analysis methods at: http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/Non-
Parametric Life Data Analysis.
8.1 Non-Parametric LDA Folio Data Sheet
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 263
Actuarial-Standard Analysis
The following example shows the data sheet for the Actuarial-Standard analysis.
For the Actuarial-Standard analysis, the calculations are similar to the Actuarial-Simple analysis except that the
number of units at the start of an interval is reduced by half of the number of suspensions in that interval. This results
in reliability estimates that may be lower (i.e., more conservative) when compared to the results obtained by the
Actuarial-Simple method. The data sheet contains information about the start time and end time of each interval, as
well as the number of units in each interval that are either failures or suspensions. The Available Units column shows
the number of units at the start of the interval and the Adjusted Units column shows the value reduced by half of the
number of suspensions. The data in these two columns are automatically calculated by the software based on all of
the entries in the Number Failed and Number Suspended columns.
8 Non-Parametric LDA Folio
264 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
8.2 Control Panel Settings
The non-parametric LDA folio control panel is arranged into sections of related tasks. Each group has its own page
on the control panel. The Main page is shown next.
The Main page contains the tools you would need to analyze the data set:
The Data Type area allows you to select the non-parametric method for approximating the reliability. The method
you select will determine the columns that appear in the data sheet.
The Calculate Confidence check box allows you to calculate the lower and the upper one-sided confidence
bounds of the reliability estimates at a specified confidence level. Specify the desired confidence level in the
Level field. Selecting this option also allows you to automatically include the confidence bounds in the plot of the
analysis.
The Life Data Model area contains the settings for creating a parametric model that is based on the data set
obtained from the non-parametric analysis. These settings have no effect on the non-parametric analysis. The
Tip: There is a horizontal splitter bar directly above the Main button. If you drag it as far up as it will go, all of the pages of
the panel will be accessed by large buttons. If you drag it all the way down, all of the pages will be accessed by small
icons. Positions in between allow you to use some large buttons and some small icons. See page 78 in Chapter 2.
8.2 Control Panel Settings
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 265
options in this area are identical to the ones on the control panel of a Weibull++ standard folio, except for the two
drop-down lists shown next:
The two options allow you to choose which values the chosen life distribution will be fitted to. The options are:
Failure time: If you use the Kaplan-Meier analysis, the failure times are the end times of the intervals. If you
use either the Actuarial-Simple or Actuarial-Standard analysis, each failure time may be the start time of the
interval, end time of the interval, or the average between the start time and end time.
Unreliability value: If you select to include confidence bounds for the non-parametric analysis, you will have
the option to select either the unreliability estimates calculated by the non-parametric analysis, or the upper
confidence bounds or lower confidence bounds of the unreliability estimate.
When you click the Calculate icon on the control panel, the software analyzes the data set based on the chosen
non-parametric method. It then automatically performs a separate standard life data analysis based on the settings
you have specified in the Life Data Model area on the control panel.
The Non-Parametric Results area allows you to view the reliability estimates calculated by the non-parametric
analysis and the free-form data set that will be used for parametric analysis. Click the Non-Parametric Results
(...) button to open the Results window, which allows you to view, edit and print the report.
The Life Data Results area allows you to view the parameters of the life data model. Click the Life Data Results
(...) button to open the Results window. You can also use the Quick Calculation Pad (QCP) to obtain results based
on the life data model, such as the probability of failure or mean life. See page 172 in Chapter 4.
The folio tools are arranged on the left side of the panel. Use these tools to manage data and experiment with the
results of your analysis. Each tool is described in detail below.
Calculate
Calculates the reliability estimates based on the chosen non-parametric method (i.e., Kaplan-Meier, Actuarial-
Simple or Actuarial-Standard). It then performs a separate standard (parametric) life data analysis based on
the settings in the Life Data Model area of the control panel. This tool is also available by choosing Non-
Parametric LDA > Analysis > Calculate.
Plot
Creates a Reliability vs. Time plot of the non-parametric analysis. The scaling, setup, exporting and other
features are similar to the options available for other Weibull++ plot sheets. Features that are not applicable to
this plot will be hidden or disabled. Clicking the Plot icon before the folio has been calculated will
automatically calculate the folio and then plot the data. This tool is also available by choosing Non-Parametric LDA
> Analysis > Plot.
QCP
Opens the Quick Calculation Pad, which allows you to calculate results such as mean life and probability of
failure based on the results of the standard life data analysis. It uses the same calculations that you can
perform in a Weibull++ standard folio QCP. This tool is also available by choosing Non-Parametric LDA >
Analysis > Quick Calculation Pad. See page 172 in Chapter 4.
8 Non-Parametric LDA Folio
266 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Distribution Wizard
Opens the Distribution Wizard, which helps you select the distribution that best fits the data set based on the
chosen parameter estimation method (i.e., RRX or RRY). In the non-parametric LDA folio, the ranking in the
Distribution Wizard is based on the life data model. This tool is also available by choosing Non-Parametric
LDA > Analysis > Distribution Wizard. See page 178 in Chapter 4.
Change Units
Opens the Change Units window, which allows you to change the time units of an existing data sheet. See
page 89 in Chapter 2.
8.3 Transferring the Data to a Weibull++ Standard Folio
The Life Data Model area of the non-parametric LDA control panel gives you the ability to create a parametric model
that is based on the analysis. In order to assess whether the parametric model provides a good fit to the results of the
analysis, you can transfer the data to a Weibull++ standard folio. To do this, choose Non-Parametric LDA >
Transfer Life Data > Transfer Life Data to a New Folio.
The data will be transferred to a free-form data sheet, where the failure time values will be copied to the X-Axis
value column, and the unreliability values will be copied to the Y-Axis value column. In the standard folio, you
could use the plots and other results to evaluate the fit of the distribution to the values from the non-parametric
analysis. If the distribution does not provide a good fit, you could experiment with other distributions to see which
one would provide a better fit. Once you have selected an appropriate parametric model, you can use it to obtain
calculations from the standard folios QCP, or to generate other graphical plots in the standard folios plot sheet. If
you use the same analysis settings in both the standard folio and non-parametric LDA folio, then you will obtain the
same results from the QCPs in both folios.
8.4 Non-Parametric LDA Example
An analyst is performing a field test for a prototype product. A group of 21 participants agreed to test the product and
all participants are to return after appointed periods of time to report their experience with the product.
8.4 Non-Parametric LDA Example
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 267
Units that are reported to have malfunctioned during the test period are marked as failed (F), while units that did not
exhibit any problems are marked as suspensions (S). At the end of the 35 week test, the analysts log shows the
following information.
The objective is to create a Reliability vs. Time plot in order to predict the failure rate behavior of the product.
The first step is to create a non-parametric LDA folio. Choose Insert > Folios > Non-Parametric LDA.
On the Main page of the control panel, choose the Kaplan-Meier analysis. This will format the data sheet
correctly for the non-parametric analysis. Select the Calculate Confidence check box and enter 0.95 for the
confidence level.
Click the Change Units icon.
In the Change Units window, change the time unit to Week. Click OK.
Next, enter the information from the table in the data sheet.
The non-parametric LDA folio will obtain the reliability estimates only for the failure times that were entered in
the data sheet (in this example, it is for weeks 9, 11, 13, 17, 21, 28 and 30). In order to estimate (i.e., interpolate)
the reliability of the product at other times, you will need to create a parametric model. To do this, make the
following selections in the Life Data Model area of the control panel:
Number of
Units
State (F or S)
Test Period
(Weeks)
3 F 9
1 S 9
1 F 11
1 S 12
1 F 13
1 S 13
1 S 15
1 F 17
1 F 21
1 S 22
1 S 24
1 S 26
1 F 28
1 F 30
5 S 35
8 Non-Parametric LDA Folio
268 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
2P-Weibull.
RRY (Rank Regression on Y).
Use Unreliability. This means that the free-form data set will be based on the unreliability estimates
calculated from the non-parametric analysis, rather than the upper or lower confidence bound.
The following picture shows the completed setup.
Choose Non-Parametric LDA > Analysis > Calculate or click the icon on the control panel.
The software will perform a non-parametric analysis on the data set, and then automatically perform a separate
standard life data analysis based on the settings specified in the Life Data Model area.
To create the Reliability vs. Time plot, choose Non-Parametric LDA > Analysis > Plot or click the icon on the
control panel.
In the following example, the dots on the plot show the reliability estimates at each point of failure, the triangles
show the lower 1-sided confidence bounds of the estimates, and the inverted triangles show the upper 1-sided
8.4 Non-Parametric LDA Example
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 269
confidence bounds. The pattern of the data points shows that the product exhibits a sharp decline in reliability
over the course of a few weeks.
To view the calculated reliability values, click the Non-Parametric Results (...) button on the control panel to
open the Results window, as shown next.
The results show that the reliability of the product at 9 weeks of operation is estimated to be 85.71%; however, by
30 weeks, the reliability estimate is 44.81% and may be as low as 24.91%.
8 Non-Parametric LDA Folio
270 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
8.4.1 Evaluating the Life Data Model
To assess whether the assumed distribution (that was chosen in the Life Data Model area of the control panel)
provides a good fit, you can transfer the results of the non-parametric analysis to a Weibull++ standard folio. To do
this, choose Non-Parametric LDA > Transfer Life Data > Transfer Life Data to a New Folio.
The data will be transferred to a free-form data sheet, where the failure time values will be copied to the X-Axis
value column, and the unreliability values will be copied to the Y-Axis value column.
In the standard folio, select the same analysis settings that you chose in the non-parametric LDA folio (i.e., 2P-
Weibull and RRY), and then click the Calculate icon on the control panel. The following picture shows the
completed analysis.
8.4 Non-Parametric LDA Example
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 271
Next, click the Plot icon on the control panel. The following probability plot shows the probability line with respect
to the values obtained from the non-parametric analysis. As you can see, the 2P-Weibull provides a good fit to the
values.
If the distribution did not provide a good fit, you could experiment with other distributions to see which one would
provide a better fit. Once you have selected an appropriate parametric model, you can use it to obtain calculations
from the Quick Calculation Pad (QCP).
8.4.2 Obtaining Results for Other Points in Time
To obtain a reliability estimate at a time that was not calculated in the non-parametric analysis, say, 25 weeks, use the
Quick Calculation Pad (QCP). You can use the QCP either from the standard folio with the transferred data or from
the non-parametric LDA folio. If you use the same analysis settings (i.e., distribution, parameter estimation method)
in both the standard folio and non-parametric LDA folio, then you will obtain the same results from the QCPs in both
folios.
Click the QCP icon on the control panel.
8 Non-Parametric LDA Folio
272 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
In the QCP, choose to calculate the Reliability. Select Week for the time units and then enter 25 for the mission end
time. Click Calculate to display the results. The reliability is 55.24%, as shown next.
Note: Confidence bounds calculations are not available for free-form data.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 273
Despite best efforts to design and produce products that will last the expected lifetime,
field failures are a reality. In order to anticipate customer needs and ensure customer
satisfaction, there must be a process for studying field failures and correcting existing, as well as potential, reliability
problems of fielded products. The analysis of warranty claims data is one such method.
Warranty claims data typically consist of quantities of units sold and quantities returned within a specified warranty
period. Performing reliability calculations on this type of raw data can be tedious and time-consuming. To speed up
your calculations, the Weibull++ warranty analysis folio is designed to convert your existing warranty claims data
sets into failure/suspension data sets so that they can be easily analyzed with traditional life data analysis methods. In
addition, the folio gives you the ability to predict future warranty returns so you can detect and correct potential
product quality problems in the field and plan for warranty fulfillment needs, such as repair costs and the number of
spares to stock.
1
The chapter describes how to use warranty analysis folios, including:
Creating a warranty analysis folio and set up the control panel - Section 9.1 (p. 273).
Using the different warranty analysis folio formats, including:
Nevada chart format - Section 9.2 (p. 277).
Times-to-failure format - Section 9.3 (p. 288).
Dates of failure format - Section 9.4 (p. 293).
Usage format - Section 9.5 (p. 298).
Forecasting warranty returns - Section 9.6 (p. 311).
Using the warranty analysis plot settings - Section 9.7 (p. 312).
9.1 Warranty Analysis Folio Setup
To add a warranty analysis folio, choose Insert > Folios > Warranty or right-click the Specialized Folios folder in
the current project explorer and choose Add Warranty on the shortcut menu.
A setup window will prompt you to select a format to use with the folio. Select the format that is appropriate for the
type of warranty claims data you have available. If you select the Nevada chart format, click Next to go to the next
step to configure your analysis; otherwise, click OK to immediately create the folio.
Warranty Analysis
9
1.
The ReliaWiki resources portal has more information on warranty analysis at: http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/
Warranty_Data_Analysis.
9 Warranty Analysis
274 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Converting Formats
You have the option to convert the format of an existing warranty analysis folio to a new format. To do so, open the
existing folio and choose Warranty > Tools > Convert Data, and then choose the format to convert to.
Converting formats creates a new folio and does not overwrite the contents of the existing folio. It is an automatic
process, except when converting from the dates of failure format to the Nevada chart format, and vice versa. In that
case, you will be prompted to define the time unit of each period (e.g., dates, month or years) in order to proceed with
the conversion.
The following table shows a summary of the data conversion options:
From Convert To
Nevada Chart Format
Dates of Failure Format
Times-to-Failure Format
Dates of Failure Format
Nevada Chart Format
Times-to-Failure Format
Times-to-Failure Format N/A
Usage Format Times-to-Failure Format
9.1 Warranty Analysis Folio Setup
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 275
Warranty Analysis Folio Control Panel
The following picture shows the control panels of the Nevada chart format and usage format, respectively. The
control panel is arranged into groups of related tasks and each group has its own page on the control panel. The main
page is shown next.
On the Main page of the control panel, the following settings are available for all formats:
The Life Data Model area contains the options for performing life data analysis. When you click Calculate,
Weibull++ converts the warranty claims data into failure/suspension data and then performs a life data analysis
based on the settings you specified in this area.
Use Subsets gives you the option to analyze multi-population data sets. To use this setting, you must first
assign each subpopulation group in your data sheet to a specific subset ID. Select the Use Subsets check box,
and then use the drop-down list to switch between the subset IDs and alter the analysis settings (i.e.,
distribution and parameter estimation method) for each one. When you click Calculate, the software will
separately analyze each subset of data. You can view the parameters of each subset ID by choosing the subset
ID from the drop-down list or by clicking anywhere within the Analysis Summary area.
Tip: There is a horizontal splitter bar directly above the Main button. If you drag it as far up as it will go, all of the pages of
the panel will be accessed by large buttons. If you drag it all the way down, all of the pages will be accessed by small
icons. Positions in between allow you to use some large buttons and some small icons. See page 78 in Chapter 2.
9 Warranty Analysis
276 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The Suspend After check box allows you to specify a period beyond which, all additional data will be treated as
suspensions. Most product warranties are of a certain duration, and in many cases, data after the warranty period
are incomplete or unreliable. This setting allows you ignore any failure times after the specified period, and treat
them as suspensions. This option is not available for the times-to-failure format.
In the Nevada chart format, the warranty period uses the same time units used in the Nevada chart data sheets.
In the Dates of Failure format, you can specify the warranty period to be in days, months or years.
In the Usage format, you have two options: you can specify the warranty period to be in days, month or years,
or you can consider a warranty period based on usage (e.g., 100K miles or 10 years, whichever comes first).
The Analysis Summary area displays the results of the life data analysis. Click anywhere within the area to open
the Results window, which shows the converted failure/suspension data and the parameters of the life distribution
model. From the Results window, you can edit, copy or print the results.
The following setting is available only in the dates of failure format and usage format:
The End of Observation Period setting is used to determine the time in service for each unit that had not yet
been returned by the end of the observation period (i.e., the suspensions). The date is typically set to the last day
the warranty data was collected.
The following setting is available only in the usage format.
The Suspensions Estimation Method area displays information about how the product usage is defined.
Clicking the link will take you to the Suspensions page, which contains the options for estimating the amount of
usage accumulated by suspensions.
The folio tools are arranged on the left side of the panel. Use these tools to manage data and experiment with the
results of your analysis. Each tool is described in detail below.
Calculate
Converts the warranty claims data to failure/suspension times and then estimates the parameters of the chosen
life distribution based on the converted data. If you select the Use Subsets option on the Main page of the
control panel, the parameters of the distribution of each subset ID will be separately calculated. This tool is
also available by choosing Warranty > Analysis > Calculate.
Plot
Creates a new sheet in the folio that provides a choice of applicable plot types. In warranty analysis folios, this
includes plots such as expected failures vs. period, reliability vs. time, probability plot, etc. You can plot the
data in the warranty analysis folio either with or without generating a forecast. This tool is also available by
choosing Warranty > Analysis > Plot.
Distribution Wizard
Opens the Distribution Wizard, which helps you select the distribution that best fits your data based on the
selected parameter estimation method (i.e., RRX, RRY or MLE). In warranty analysis folios, the ranking in
the Distribution Wizard is based on the converted failure/suspension times. This tool is also available by
choosing Warranty > Analysis > Distribution Wizard. See page 178 in Chapter 4.
QCP
Opens the Quick Calculation Pad, which allows you to calculate life data analysis metrics. It uses the same
calculations that you can perform in a Weibull++ standard folio QCP. This tool is also available by choosing
Warranty > Analysis > Quick Calculation Pad. See page 172 in Chapter 4.
9.2 Nevada Chart Format
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 277
Generate Forecase
Opens the Forecast Setup window, which allows you to specify the time periods at which you wish to
estimate the number of expected warranty returns. Clicking Generate Forecast before the parameters have
been calculated will automatically calculate the parameters and open the Forecast Setup window. This tool is
also available by choosing Warranty > Tools > Generate Forecast. See Section 9.6 on page 311.
Change Units
Opens the Change Units window, which allows you to select the units to use in the data sheet. This tool is not
available in the dates of failure format. The units that are available in the drop-down list are defined at the
database level. See page 51 in Chapter 2.
9.2 Nevada Chart Format
If you keep track of the period in which each returned unit was sold and the period in which it was returned, you can
use the Nevada chart format to convert your warranty claims data into failure/suspension data.
The following subsections describe how to work with this format, including:
How to set up a Nevada chart and enter sales and return data.
Including zero-failure times in the analysis.
Using the statistical process control (SPC) feature of the control panel.
An example of warranty analysis involving SPC.
9.2.1 Setting Up the Chart and Entering Data
The setup window of the Nevada chart format allows you to define the time periods of interest. The value in the
Increment field indicates the length of the time period. In the following example, the time unit is in terms of months;
Note: In the Nevada chart format, the Change Units tool is available only when you choose to label the sales and returns
periods in terms of numbers during the setup process. In the usage format, only the units that are related to usage (e.g.,
cycles, miles, etc.) are available in the drop-down list. In the times-to-failure format, all the time units that were defined at
the database level are available in the drop-down list.
9 Warranty Analysis
278 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
therefore, an increment of 1 would mean that 1 period is equivalent to 1 month. In contrast, an increment of 2 would
mean that 1 period is equivalent to 2 months.
The setup window also includes the following optional settings:
The Future Sales area allows you to define the number of future sales periods. This setting will include additional
rows in the Sales data sheet for entering the projected sales figures. Information regarding future sales is used
only in the forecast analysis.
Allow Returns at Time = 0 allows you to include zero-time failures in the analysis, which are failures that
occurred before the units made it to the field. These failures may be due to manufacturing defects, insufficient
quality control or shipping damages.
Time Units
There are two ways you could edit the time periods in an existing Nevada chart data sheet:
If the periods are labeled in terms of days, months or years, then you can change the time units and periods
anytime by choosing Warranty > Tools > Data Sheet Setup or by clicking the icon on the control panel.
This opens the Warranty Folio Setup window, which allows you to edit the time periods. Note that when you
change the existing setup, you may lose information already entered in the data sheet.
If the periods are labeled in terms of numbers, then you can use any time units appropriate for your data. To select
a time unit, click the Change Units icon on the Main page of the control panel of the data sheet.
This opens the Change Units window, which gives you a selection of time units to use. The units that are available
in the drop-down list are defined at the database level. See page 51 in Chapter 2.
9.2 Nevada Chart Format
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 279
Note that in the Nevada chart format, selecting a new unit only changes the name of the unit. The data set is not
converted to the new unit. The appropriate columns in the data sheet will be automatically configured for the time
units you selected, and the new unit will be displayed next to the results in the control panel.
Sales and Return Data
The Nevada chart folio consists of two data sheets: Sales and Returns. The figure shown next is an example of the
Sales data sheet.
The Sales data sheet contains the following information:
The Period column shows the time periods that were defined during setup.
The Quantity In-Service column indicates the number of units that are assumed to have started operating during
each period.
The Subset ID column is for logging any pertinent information or comments about the data. You can also use the
Subset ID column to categorize subpopulations in your data set. You will be able to choose a distribution
appropriate for each subset of data by selecting the Use Subsets option on the Main page of the control panel.
If you entered future sales periods during setup, yellow rows will be added in the data sheet to identify the future
sales data. The projected sales figures will be used in the forecast analysis. See Section 9.6 on page 311.
The figure shown next is an example of the Returns data sheet. The column headers represent the warranty periods
and the row headers represent the sales periods.
In the example shown here, there were 3 returns in February from the batch that was in-service in January. In March,
5 more units from the batch that was in-service in January were returned and 2 units from the batch that was in-
service in February were also returned. The rest of the chart can be read in a similar manner.
To perform the warranty analysis, go to the Main page of the warranty folio control panel and choose a failure
distribution for the data set and a parameter estimation method (you can also choose the parameter estimation settings
from the Analysis page of the control panel). Click Calculate. Weibull++ automatically converts the warranty data
into failure/suspension times and also estimates the parameters of the chosen distribution.
Note: For the column headings in this sheet, the general term in-service represents the closest estimate of the time at
which each unit started operating in the field. For example, if you have access to both the manufacturing date and the
shipping date for a group of parts, you may choose to perform the analysis based on the shipping date because it is a
closer indicator of the time the product started operating in the field.
Note: The subset ID can be any text up to 30 characters, including spaces. For example, A _ _ X is not the same as
A _ X where _ is used to designate a space.
9 Warranty Analysis
280 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
To view the failures/suspension data, click anywhere within the Analysis Summary area of the control panel to open
the Results window, which shows the converted failure/suspension data and the parameters of the life distribution
model. From the Results window, you can edit, copy or print the results.
9.2.2 Zero-Time Failures
In many cases, it is possible for failures to occur immediately at the beginning of the life of the unit. These types of
failures are known as out-of-the-box failures, or zero-time failures, and they apply to products that failed quality
inspections prior to shipping or were damaged during shipping and then returned within the same period they were
sold.
To include zero-time failures in the Nevada chart warranty analysis, select the check box during setup and set the
return start date to be the same as the sales start date, as shown in the next example.
When you enable this setting and click OK, the Returns sheet will allow you to enter returns for the same month in
which the units were in-service, as shown next.
In this example, 5 units from the January sales were damaged during shipping and so were returned within the
January sales period. These 5 failures will be treated as zero-time failures. In February, 3 units were also returned
within the February sales period. These 3 failures are also zero-time failures. The rest of the chart can be read in a
similar manner.
When you calculate the parameters and view the results in the Results window, the converted data set will contain a
certain number data points with failures at time = 0, as shown next. Pnz represents the proportion of the population
9.2 Nevada Chart Format
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 281
with non-zero failure times. In this sample report, the percentage of the population with non-zero failure times is
approximately 96.30%.
The distribution parameters are calculated without the zero-time failures but any subsequent reliability calculations
for the full data set will be multiplied by the Pnz value, such that:
where R(t) is the reliability function for the entire data set and R(t) is the reliability function for the data set without
the zero-time failures. Therefore, when Pnz is equal to 1, all the failures are assumed to occur after time = 0.
9 Warranty Analysis
282 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The following overlay plot illustrates the effect of the Pnz value on the reliability function. The straight line is the
unreliability function for the set of non-zero failure and suspension times. The inclusion of the zero-time failures
causes the unreliability function to curve towards the value of unreliability at time = 0, which is 1-Pnz.
When you use the Quick Calculation Pad (QCP), the reliability, unreliability and probability density calculations of
the entire data set are influenced by the value of Pnz, while the conditional reliability and failure rate functions are not
affected.
9.2.3 Statistical Process Control
The Nevada chart format includes a statistical process control (SPC) method for analyzing warranty returns data. The
method uses a chi-squared test to help you detect unusually high or low return rates for any given period, alerting you
to any possible deviations in manufacturing, quality control or any other factors that may adversely affect the
reliability of the product in the field. This enables you to intervene immediately and avoid increased warranty costs or
more serious repercussions. The SPC application is available only in the Nevada chart format.
This section describes how to use the settings on the SPC page of the control panel. See the next section for an
example of a warranty analysis involving SPC.
The SPC method determines the data abnormality by using chi-squared values. These values evaluate the discrepancy
between the actual number of failures and the number of failures predicted by the distribution parameters. To use the
tool, click the SPC page icon on the control panel.
Select the Calculate chi-squared values check box. The fields for the Critical and Caution control values will
become available. The control values are the upper probability levels of the chi-squared distribution below which the
sales or return periods will be flagged as outliers. Enter the desired critical and caution levels in decimal form. The
Note: The SPC feature applies only to homogeneous data sets and is therefore unavailable when you select the Use
Subsets option on the Main page of the control panel.
9.2 Nevada Chart Format
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 283
values must be greater than zero and less than one. By default, the critical value is 1% and the caution value is 10%,
as shown next.
Calculate the chi-squared values by choosing Warranty > Analysis > Calculate or by clicking the icon on the Main
page of the control panel.
To provide an easy visualization of the results, select the Color-code Returns sheet check box. You can select to
evaluate the results in two ways: By sales period (results are color-coded by rows) or By returns period (results are
color-coded by columns). The default colors are:
Green indicates that the number of product returns is within the expected range.
Yellow indicates that the number of product returns is between the caution and critical levels.
Red indicates that the number of product returns is outside the expected range.
You can change the colors in the Returns sheet by selecting the desired cells or row/column header and then choosing
Sheet Options > Format and View > Fill Color.
To reset the colors back to their default settings, choose Warranty > Tools > Restore Guide Colors or click the
Restore Guide Colors button on the SPC page of the control panel.
To view the table of chi-squared values, click the Show Results (...) button.
Tip: If you wish to perform a manual evaluation of the table of chi-squared values, you can use Weibull++s Quick
Statistical Reference (QSR) tool to look up chi-squared values for different control values and degrees of freedom. You
can access the QSR by choosing Home > Tools > Quick Statistical Reference. See Chapter 25.
9 Warranty Analysis
284 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
9.2.4 Example of a Nevada Chart Warranty Analysis
An electronics manufacturer wants to study the expected number of returns for a product they created using materials
obtained from two suppliers. The sales and returns data for the product are collected and entered into a Nevada chart
warranty analysis folio, as shown next.
On the Main page of the control panel, choose the 2P-Weibull distribution and the MLE parameter estimation
method.
On the SPC page of the control panel, select the Calculate chi-squared values check box. Enter 0.01 for the
critical value and enter 0.10 for the caution value.
Select the Color-code Returns sheet check box and select the By sales period option.
9.2 Nevada Chart Format
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 285
Return to the Main page of the control panel and click the Calculate icon. The parameters are estimated to be:
beta = 2.3181 and eta = 25.0719. Notice that in the Returns sheet, the March and July sales periods are in yellow.
This means that the number of returns for those sales periods is between the caution and critical levels.
On the control panel, click the Plot icon. From the Plot Type drop-down list, choose Chi-Squared - Sales. As you
can see, the data points for March and July are between the caution and critical levels.
This implies that the population is not homogeneous and that different subpopulations may exist in the data. One
suspected reason for the deviation may be the type of material used by the suppliers. The manufacturer concludes
that the data set needs to be analyzed based on their material supplier.
To do so, return to the Sales or Returns data sheet. On the Main page of the control panel, select the Use Subsets
option. Note that selecting this option will make the SPC feature unavailable. For each subset ID, select the 2P-
Weibull distribution and the MLE parameter estimation method.
Click the Calculate icon to recalculate the parameters. The results show that for Supplier 1, the parameters are:
beta = 2.3819 and eta = 25.3976; for Supplier 2, the parameters are: beta = 2.3207 and eta = 21.2829.
9 Warranty Analysis
286 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
On the control panel, click the Plot icon. The following plot shows the probability of failure of the two subsets.
As you can see, the material from Supplier 2 tends to have a higher probability of failure compared to the material
from Supplier 1.
To determine the statistical difference between the two data sets, create a contour plot. To do this, click the Plot
Type drop-down list on the control panel and choose Contour Plot. In the Contour Setup window, select to plot
the contours at the 90% confidence level and click OK.
The resulting plot is shown next. As you can see, the two subsets do not overlap at the 90% confidence level. This
confirms that the two data sets are significantly different at the 90% confidence level.
The next step in the analysis is to generate a warranty forecast. This will help the manufacturer determine the
expected number of product returns within a specified warranty period.
9.2 Nevada Chart Format
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 287
Return to the Sales or Returns data sheet. Choose Warranty > Tools > Generate Forecast or click the icon on
the control panel.
In the Forecast Setup window, set the forecast range to start in October and end after 4 forecast periods, as shown
next. Set the Increment to 1 and click OK.
The following figure shows the Forecast sheet with the warranty period starting in October 2011 and ending in
January 2012. Looking at the number of expected product returns, the highest number of returns is expected to
come from the batch in-service in March.
9 Warranty Analysis
288 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Click the Plot icon on the control panel of the Forecast sheet. On the Plot Type drop-down list, choose Expected
Failures. The following plot shows the expected number of returned units over the warranty period.
Earlier, we found out that the material from Supplier 2 tends to have a higher probability of failure when compared to
the material from Supplier 1. However, the current plot shows that Supplier 1 is expected to have a higher number of
total returns within the specified warranty period. Looking back at the Sales sheet, we can see that the manufacturer
sold three times more units made with materials from Supplier 1 compared to the number of sold units using
materials from Supplier 2. Therefore, more units made with the materials from Supplier 1 will be returned each
month due to the high sales volume of those units. This forecast analysis can help the manufacturer plan for warranty
costs and service, as well as plan for the number of units to produce using materials from each supplier and decide
whether it would be worthwhile to have Supplier 2 increase the reliability of its materials.
9.3 Times-to-Failure Format
If your warranty claims data is already in terms of failure/suspension times, you can use the times-to-failure format to
forecast future warranty returns. This section describes how to enter data in the times-to-failure format and includes
an example of a warranty analysis using this format.
9.3.1 Entering Data
Time Units
In the times-to-failure format, you can use any time units appropriate for your data by clicking the Change Units icon
on the Main page of the folio's control panel.
This opens the Change Units window, which gives you a selection of time units to use. The units that are available in
the drop-down list are defined at the database level. When you select new units, the appropriate columns in the data
sheet will be automatically configured for the time units you selected, and the new unit will be displayed next to the
results in the control panel.
Data Sheet Setup
9.3 Times-to-Failure Format
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 289
The times-to-failure format consists of two data sheets: Data and Future Sales. Data entry is similar to entering data in
a Weibull++ standard folio. The following picture shows an example of the data sheet. In this example, the values in
the State End Time column are measured in days.
The Subset ID column is for logging any pertinent information or comments about the data. You can also use the
Subset ID column to categorize subpopulations in your data set. You will be able to choose a distribution appropriate
for each subset of data by selecting the Use Subsets option on the Main page of the control panel.
The Future Sales sheet, shown next, gives you the option to enter projected sales figures. The information in this
sheet is used in the forecast analysis. Enter the number of units to be sold in the Quantity In-Service column and
enter the anticipated manufacturing/sales/shipment period in the Time column.
To perform the warranty analysis, go to the Main page of the warranty folio control panel and choose a failure
distribution for the data set and a parameter estimation method (you can also choose the parameter estimation settings
from the Analysis page of the control panel). Click Calculate.
Click anywhere within the Analysis Summary area of the control panel to open the Results window, which shows
the failure/suspension data and the parameters of the life distribution model. From the Results window, you can edit,
copy or print the results.
Because the data set is already in terms of failures and suspensions, you can immediately proceed to generating
warranty forecasts. See Section 9.6 on page 311.
9.3.2 Example of a Times-to-Failure Warranty Analysis
A manufacturer sold two versions of a product. In addition, they plan to sell more of the product in the new few
months. The objective is to analyze the data for both product versions and provide a return forecast for the next 10
months.
Note: The subset ID can be any text up to 30 characters, including spaces. For example, A _ _ X is not the same as A _
X where _ is used to designate a space.
Note: For the column heading in this sheet, the general term in-service represents the closest estimate of the time at
which each unit started operating in the field. For example, if you have access to both the manufacturing period and the
shipping period for a group of parts, you may choose to perform the analysis based on the shipping period because it is a
closer indicator of the time the product started operating in the field.
9 Warranty Analysis
290 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The following data sheet shows the sales data of the product. The warranty return period (State End Time) is
measured in months. The manufacturer logs the failure and suspension times for each product version at the end of
each month.
In the Future Sales data sheet, they enter the number of units they plan to ship to stores in the next 9th and 10th
months, as shown next.
To analyze each product version, select the Use Subsets option on the Main page of the control panel. Next, for
both subset IDs, choose the 2P-Weibull distribution and the MLE analysis method. Click Calculate. The
parameters for V1 are estimated to be: beta = 2.3819 and eta = 25.3976; for V2, the parameters are estimated to
be: beta = 2.3207 and eta = 21.2829.
9.3 Times-to-Failure Format
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 291
On the control panel, click the Plot icon. The following plot shows the probability of failure of the two product
versions. As you can see, V2 has a higher probability of failure compared to V1.
Next, generate a warranty forecast to predict the expected number of product returns. To do this, return to the data
sheet and then choose Warranty > Tools > Generate Forecast or click the icon on the control panel.
In the Forecast Setup window, enter a Start time of 1 and a forecast length of 10 periods, as shown next. Set the
Increment to 1 and click OK.
9 Warranty Analysis
292 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
On the control panel of the Forecast sheet, select the Show Subset ID check box. The following figure shows the
results (showing only the first 8 columns).
The intervals in the warranty period are indicated by the Current Age plus the increment that was specified in the
Forecast Setup window. In the sheet shown above, the first row in the data sheet tells us that 1108 (Number in State)
units were operating in the field when the warranty period started and that these unit will have survived at least 1
month (Current Age) of operation. In the 2nd month of operation (Current Age+1), 2 units from that batch are
expected to fail. After 4 months of operation (Current Age+3), 7 more units from the batch are expected to fail, and so
on. Note that the last 4 rows of the Forecast sheet will show the expected number of returns from the future sales (the
returns are expected to start at Current Age+10).
Next, click the Plot icon on the control panel of the Forecast sheet. In the Plot Type drop-down field, choose
Expected Failures. The following plot shows the trend in the expected number of failures over the next 10 periods.
Earlier, we found out that V2 tends to have a higher probability of failure when compared to V1. However, the
current plot shows that V1 is expected to have a higher number of total returns within the specified warranty period.
Looking back at the Data sheet, we can see that the manufacturer sold three times more V1 units compared to the
number of V2 units that were sold. Therefore, more V1 units will be returned each month due to the high sales
volume of those units. This forecast analysis can help the manufacturer predict the failure behavior of each product
version in the field, as well as plan for the warranty costs and service for each product version.
9.4 Dates of Failure Format
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 293
9.4 Dates of Failure Format
If you keep track of the exact calendar dates for sales and returns, you can use the Dates of Failure format to convert
your warranty claims data into failure/suspension data.
This section describes how to enter data in the dates of failure format and includes an example of a warranty analysis
using this format.
9.4.1 Entering Data
Time Units
In the dates of failure format, the inputs and results are in terms of days, where 1 day = 24 hours; however, you have
the option to obtain the results based on a different ratio, such as 1 day = 8 hours. The new ratio for the day unit will
need to be defined at the database level.
Data Sheet Setup
The dates of failure format consists of three data sheets: Sales, Returns and Future Sales. The figure shown next is an
example of the Sales sheet.
The Sales sheet contains the following information:
The Quantity In-Service column indicates the number of units that are assumed to have started operating during
each period.
The Date In-Service column is for entering the calendar date on which the units are assumed to have started
operating.
The Subset ID column is for logging any pertinent information or comments about the data. You can also use the
Subset ID column to categorize subpopulations in your data sets. You will be able to choose a distribution
appropriate for each subset of data by selecting the Use Subsets option on the Main page of the control panel.
The following is an example of the Returns sheet. You will need to enter the Quantity Returned and the Date of
Return. You will also need to enter the Date In-Service so the application can calculate how long each unit was in
Note: For the column headings in this sheet, the general term in-service represents the closest estimate of the time at
which each unit started operating in the field. For example, if you have access to both the manufacturing date and the
shipping date for a group of parts, you may choose to perform the analysis based on the shipping date because it is a
closer indicator of the time the product started operating in the field.
Note: The subset ID can be any text up to 30 characters, including spaces. For example, A _ _ X is not the same as
A _ X where _ is used to designate a space.
9 Warranty Analysis
294 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
service before it was returned. Each entry in the Date In-Service column in the Returns sheet must have a matching
entry in the Date In-Service column in the Sales sheet.
The Future Sales sheet, shown next, gives you the option to enter projected sales figures. The information in this
sheet is used in the forecast analysis. Enter the number of units to be sold in the Quantity In-Service column and
enter the anticipated manufacturing/sales/shipment date in the Date In-Service column.
For this type of warranty analysis folio, an additional input is required in order for Weibull++ to convert the sales/
return data to failures/suspensions. On the Main page of the control panel, specify the End of Observation Period.
This date is typically set to the last day the warranty data was collected. It is used to determine the time in service for
each unit that had not yet been returned by the end of the observation period. The time in service for particular a
suspension unit is equal to the End of Observation Period date minus the Date In-Service of the unit.
To automatically set the end date to the last day the warranty data were collected, click Auto Set, as shown next. This
may be the latest date that appears on the Sales sheet or the latest date that appears on the Returns sheet, whichever is
more recent.
9.4 Dates of Failure Format
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 295
To perform the warranty analysis, go to the Main page of the warranty folio control panel and choose a failure
distribution for the data set and a parameter estimation method (you can also choose the parameter estimation settings
from the Analysis page of the control panel). Click Calculate. Weibull++ automatically converts the warranty data
into failure/suspension times and also estimates the parameters of the chosen distribution.
To view the failures/suspension data, click anywhere within the Analysis Summary area of the control panel to open
the Results window, which shows converted failure/suspension data and the parameters of the life distribution model.
From the Results window, you can edit, copy or print the results.
9.4.2 Example of a Dates of Failure Warranty Analysis
A manufacturer sold two versions of a product. In addition, a new version is planned for future release. The objective
is to analyze the data for all versions and provide a return forecast for the next 20 months.
The following data sheet shows the sales data.
The following data sheet shows the returns data.
9 Warranty Analysis
296 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The future shipments are expected to be as follows.
The information in the Returns sheet is current as of January 31, 2011. Therefore, on the Main page of the control
panel, set the End of Observation Period date to 1/31/2011 to indicate that the warranty data collection period
ended on that date.
To analyze each product, select the Use Subsets option on the Main page of the control panel. Next, for all subset
IDs, choose the Lognormal distribution and the MLE analysis method.
Click Calculate. You will be prompted to enter the parameters of Design C. Because Design C is a future product
and no returns have been experienced yet, you will need to define its failure behavior. Information from the
companys pilot tests indicate that Design C follows a lognormal distribution with a mean = 11 and std = 2.2.
Enter these values in the input window, as shown next.
Click OK. The results show that for Design A, the parameters are: mean = 8.4243 and std = 2.2987; for Design B,
the parameters are: mean = 10.0772 and std = 2.2973.
Now that all the parameters of the subsets are available, you can proceed to obtaining a forecast of the expected
number of failures. Choose Warranty > Tools > Generate Forecast or click the icon on the control panel.
Note: Because the unit of time in the dates of failure format is in days, the parameters that are assigned to a data set
must also be in terms of days.
9.4 Dates of Failure Format
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 297
In the Forecast Setup window, enter a Start date of 3/1/2011 and obtain forecasts for 20 periods, as shown next.
Set the increment to once per month, and then click OK.
On the control panel of the Forecast sheet, select the Show Subset ID check box. The following figure shows the
Forecast sheet with the first 4 months of expected product returns. The first row of the Forecast sheet tells us that
200 units of Design A were sold on 1/1/2010 and that 1 of those sold units is expected to fail between February 1,
2011 (the day after the End of Observation Period date) and March 1, 2011.
9 Warranty Analysis
298 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
On the control panel of the Forecast sheet, click the Plot icon. In the Plot Type field, choose Expected Failures.
The following plot shows the total expected number of failures from each design version over the next 20 months.
This forecast analysis can help the manufacturer predict the failure behavior of each product version in the field, as
well as plan for the warranty costs and service for each product version.
9.5 Usage Format
In the usage format, the analysis is based on the amount of usage the unit accumulated rather than the amount of time
the unit was in the field. There are many applications where usage, not time, affects a products reliability. In the
automotive industry, for example, the majority of failure behavior is based on mileage rather than product age. This
approach could also be used in other situations, such as the number of pages for a printer, number of cycles for a
washing machine, etc.
This section describes how to work with this format, including:
Entering data in the usage format.
Estimating usage.
Using the Interval Width Estimator.
An example of a usage format warranty analysis.
9.5.1 Entering Data
Time Units
In the usage format, you can use any usage units (e.g., miles, cycles, etc.) appropriate for your data by clicking the
Change Units icon on the Main page of the folio's control panel.
This opens the Change Units window, which gives you a selection of units to use. The units that are available in the
drop-down list are defined at the database level. See page 51 in Chapter 2. Note that in the usage format, selecting a
new unit only changes the name of the unit. The data set is not converted to the new unit. The appropriate columns in
9.5 Usage Format
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 299
the data sheet will be automatically configured for the time units you selected, and the new unit will be displayed next
to the results in the control panel.
Data Sheet Setup
The usage format consists of three data sheets: Sales, Returns and Future Sales. The figure shown next is an example
of the Sales sheet.
The Sales sheet contains the following information:
The Quantity In-Service column is for entering the number of units that are assumed to have started operating
during each period.
The Date In-Service column is for entering the calendar date on which the units are assumed to have started
operating.
The Subset ID column is for logging any pertinent information or comments about the data. You can also use the
Subset ID column to categorize subpopulations in your data sets. You will be able to choose a distribution
appropriate for each subset of data by selecting the Use Subsets option on the Main page of the control panel.
The following is an example of the Returns sheet. You will need to enter the Quantity Returned and the Usage at
Return Date. You will also need to enter the Date-In-Service so the application can calculate how long each unit was
in service before it was returned. Each entry in the Date In-Service column in the Returns sheet must have a matching
entry in the Date In-Service column in the Sales sheet.
Note: For the column headings in this sheet, the general term in-service represents the closest estimate of the time at
which each unit started operating in the field. For example, if you have access to both the manufacturing date and the
shipping date for a group of parts, you may choose to perform the analysis based on the shipping date because it is a
closer indicator of the time the product started operating in the field.
Note: The subset ID can be any text up to 30 characters, including spaces. For example, A _ _ X is not the same as A _
X where _ is used to designate a space.
9 Warranty Analysis
300 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The Future Sales sheet, shown next, gives you the option to enter projected sales figures. The information in this
sheet is used in the forecast analysis. Enter the number of units to be sold in the Quantity In-Service column and
enter the anticipated manufacturing/sales/shipment date in the Date In-Service column.
For this type of warranty analysis folio, two additional inputs are required in order for Weibull++ to convert the sales/
returns data to failures/suspensions:
On the Main page of the control panel, specify the End of Observation Period date. This date is typically set to the
last day the warranty data was collected. It is used to determine the time in service for each unit that had not yet
been returned by the end of the observation period (i.e., the suspensions). Click Today if you wish to set the end
date to the current date, as shown next.
The next step is to specify how Weibull++ will estimate the amount of usage for units still in the field
(suspensions). To view or change the settings, click the link in the Suspension Estimation Method area of the
Main page or click the Suspensions page icon at the bottom of the control panel.
The following section explains how to specify the suspension estimation method.
9.5 Usage Format
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 301
After you have entered the warranty data and specified the suspension estimation method, perform the warranty
analysis by going to the Main page of the warranty folio control panel and choosing a failure distribution for the data
set and a parameter estimation method (you can also choose the parameter estimation settings from the Analysis page
of the control panel). Click Calculate. Weibull++ automatically converts the warranty data into failure/suspension
times and also estimates the parameters of the chosen distribution.
To view the failures/suspension data, click anywhere within the Analysis Summary area of the control panel to open
the Results window, which shows the converted failure/suspension data and the parameters of the life distribution
model. From the Results window, you can edit, copy or print the results.
9.5.2 Estimating Usage
Like any other warranty analysis folio in Weibull++, the usage format must convert the sales/returns data to failures/
suspensions that can be analyzed with life data analysis techniques. Since the returns information is entered in terms
of accumulated usage (e.g., miles, cycles, etc.) rather than time, the failure times will be the usage values recorded
when the units were returned. However, an additional step is required to estimate the amount of usage accumulated
by the units still operating in the field at the end of the observation period (i.e., the suspensions). Two methods are
available for you to provide the information required for these calculations:
1. You can define the average amount of usage that any given unit will typically accumulate over a specified period
of time (e.g., 500 miles per month, 1,000 cycles per year, etc.).
2. You can define a statistical distribution that reflects the variation in usage patterns among different customers.
The information for the usage distribution could come from customer surveys, repair records, built-in devices that
record usage data, etc.
To select a method, click the link in the Suspension Estimation Method area of the Main page or click the
Suspensions page icon at the bottom of the control panel, as shown next.
9 Warranty Analysis
302 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Both methods are described next.
To perform the estimates based on average usage
When you choose Average Usage on the Suspensions page of the control panel, you will be required to enter the
average amount of usage that any given unit typically accumulates over a specified period of time (in days,
months or years). As an alternative, you could have the software calculate the average usage based on the time
unit conversion factors. For example, the settings shown in the following picture might indicate that the average
amount of usage typically accumulated by a washing machine during 1 year of operation is 100 cycles.
When you click the Calculate icon on the Main page of the control panel, Weibull++ will perform the following
calculations for each group of units that have the same date in-service:
1. Calculate the number of units from the sales group that were still operating at the end of the observation
period:
Number of Units Sold Number of Units Returned = Number of Suspensions
2. Calculate the amount of time (in days) that those units had been in service by the end of the observation
period:
End of Observation Period date Date In-Service = Days in Service
3. If necessary, convert the average usage to the daily rate for calculation purposes (e.g., if the average usage is
10,000 miles per year then the daily rate would be approximately 27.3973 miles per day).
4. Estimate the amount of usage the suspension units may have accumulated by the end of the observation
period:
Days in Service * Average Usage per Day = Estimated Usage at Time of Suspension
For example, suppose that the Sales sheet records that 50 cars entered service on January 1st while the Returns sheet
records the mileage for the 20 units from this sales group that have been returned. If you enter July 1st for the End of
Observation Period date and 1000 miles/per year for the Average Usage, the software will calculate the suspensions
from the January 1st sales group as follows (where the daily rate has been rounded to 4 decimal places for the sake of
simplicity, and therefore the estimated usage will not exactly match the value calculated by the software):
50 Units Sold 20 Units Returned = 30 Suspensions
July 1 January 1 = 181 Days in Service
181 Days in Service * 2.7397 Miles per Day = 495.8857 Miles approximately
9.5 Usage Format
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 303
When you click the Show Analysis Summary button on the Main page of the control panel, the life data analysis
data set will include one row with 30 suspensions at End Time = 495.8857.
To perform the estimates based on a usage distribution
If you have more specific information about variations in usage patterns between different customers, you may prefer
to describe the estimated usage in terms of a statistical distribution instead of an average. There are several different
ways that you could obtain a usage distribution. For example, if you have information about the amount of usage
accumulated by many different users over a specified period of time, you could analyze the data in a Weibull++
standard folio with a time-to-failure data sheet. Alternatively, if you can define typical usage patterns and estimate the
percentage of users who are likely to belong to each group (e.g., 18% of sold washing machines are infrequently used,
25% are moderately used, and so on), you could analyze the data in a Weibull++ standard folio with a free-form
(probit) data sheet, as shown next.
When you choose Usage Distribution on the Suspensions page of the control panel, you will be required to
define a distribution that reflects the usage amounts that different customers may accumulate during a specified
period of time (called the Usage Distribution Period).
If you choose Weibull, Normal, Lognormal, Exponential, Generalized Gamma, Gamma, Logistic, Loglogistic
or Gumbel from the drop-down list, you can simply enter the appropriate parameter(s) for the selected
distribution.
If you choose Mixed Weibull, you can use the Subpopulation drop-down list to define parameters and the
portion (percentage of the population) represented by each subpopulation.
9 Warranty Analysis
304 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
If you choose the User-Defined distribution, you can manually enter any equation that describes how
customers use your product. You will need to use the variable t to represent time or usage, as in the example
shown next.
You can also use distributions calculated in standard folios from your current project as data sources for your
equation. To insert a data source, click the Insert Data Source button and select a calculated standard folio. The
software will enter that source into the Equation area. You can insert multiple data sources and combine them
(with operators such as + and *) to form new distributions.
To save the equation, click the Set as Default button. To automatically re-enter the saved equation in the
Equations area, click Load Default.
You will also be required to enter the Interval Width. This value is used to divide the usage distribution pdf into
segments so the software can obtain the probability that any given unit will have accumulated usage at the rate
represented by that segment. For example, if the usage distribution represents the number of pages printed per
year and you enter 500 for the interval, the software will break the distribution into segments of 0 to 500 pages per
year, 501 to 1000 pages per year, 1001 to 1500 pages per year, and so on.
The appropriate value for this field will depend upon your knowledge of typical product usage levels. The interval
width should be selected such that when the warranty data are converted into failure/suspension times, the
resulting times-to-suspension will neither be too close together (too few suspension units per interval) or too far
apart (too many suspension units per interval). If you find that the failure/suspension data set is not acceptable,
you can adjust the interval width and perform the calculation again. To help eliminate some of the guesswork, you
can also use the Interval Width Estimator, which provides an approximation of the interval width based on the
number of intervals and suspensions you specify. You can access the tool by clicking the icon in the Interval
Width area of the control panel.
9.5 Usage Format
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 305
When you click the Calculate icon on the Main page of the control panel, Weibull++ will perform the following
calculations for each group of units that have the same date in-service:
1. Calculate the number of units from the sales group that were still operating at the end of the observation
period:
Number of Units Sold Number of Units Returned = Number of Suspensions
2. Calculate the amount of time (in days) that those units had been in service by the end of the observation
period:
End of Observation Period date Date In-Service = Days in Service
3. Use the Interval Width to split the usage distribution into segments and calculate the probability that any given
unit will fall into each segment:
where Q( ) is the cumulative density function (cdf) of the usage distribution and x represents the intervals used
in apportioning the suspensions.
4. For each segment, calculate the number of suspensions that are expected to have accumulated usage at the rate
represented by that segment. (Note that the software applies a correction factor in order to get a whole number
of units for each interval.)
Number of Suspensions x Percentage for the Segment
5. If necessary, convert the usage value from the end of each segment to the daily rate for calculation purposes
(e.g., if the segment represents users who typically print 201 - 400 pages per month, then the daily rate would
be 400/30 or approximately 13.333 pages per day).
6. For each segment, estimate the amount of usage the suspensions may have accumulated by the end of the
observation period:
Days in Service * Usage per Day = Estimated Usage at Time of Suspension
For example, suppose that the Sales sheet records that 100 printers entered service on January 1st while the Returns
sheet records the number of pages printed for the 20 units from this sales group that have been returned. If you enter
December 31st for the End of Observation Period date and the usage distribution indicates that 25% of users are
likely to print 50 -100 pages per month, the software will calculate the usage for this segment of the January 1st sales
group as follows:
100 Units Sold 20 Units Returned = 80 Suspensions
December 31st January 1st = 365 Days in Service
80 Suspensions x 25% = 20 Units printing 50 - 100 pages per month (or ~3.33 pages per day)
365 Days in Service * 3.33 Pages per Day = 1215.45 Pages approximately
When you click the Show Analysis Summary button on the Main page of the control panel, the life data analysis
data set will include one row with 20 suspensions at End Time = 1215.45. There will be additional rows for the
remaining 60 suspensions from the January 1st sales group, which will reflect the different usage amounts calculated
based on the other segments of the usage distribution.
9.5.3 Interval Width Estimator
The usage format of the warranty analysis folio converts the amount of usage accumulated by a product in the field to
failures/suspensions data so you can perform life data analysis and/or forecast future warranty returns. When you use
a statistical distribution to take into account the variations in the amount of product usage, the conversion process
becomes more involved. In order to convert the usage data to failures/suspensions data, the software must have a way
9 Warranty Analysis
306 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
to estimate the amount of usage accumulated by the suspensions (i.e., units still operating in the field at the end of the
observation period).
The software uses the concept of interval width in order to estimate the amount of usage accumulated by the
suspensions. The interval width is a value that is used to divide the usage distribution into usage rate intervals. For
example, if the usage distribution represents the number of pages printed per year, and you specify 500 for the
interval width, the software will break the distribution into usage rate intervals of 0 to 500 pages per year, 501 to 1000
pages per year, 1001 to 1500 pages per year, and so on. The software uses the intervals to obtain from the distribution
the percentage of customers who use the product at each of the usage rates. The percentages are then used to obtain
the probability that any given suspended unit will have accumulated usage at the rate represented by those intervals.
The Interval Width Estimator is a tool that helps you to determine an appropriate interval width by providing a pdf
graph of the usage distribution and showing you how well the usage values assigned to the suspended units track the
pdf. Note that this tool only serves as a guide and that the appropriate interval width value will depend upon your own
knowledge of typical product usage levels.
Estimating the Interval Width
To use the Interval Width Estimator, you must first define the usage distribution on the Suspensions page of the
control panel. Next, open the tool by clicking the icon in the Interval Width area on the Suspensions page (note that
this area will be displayed only when the warranty analysis folio has been configured for the usage format and only if
you have selected to define the usage with a distribution).
The interval width is estimated based on the following inputs:
In the End Usage field, enter the length of the observation period. This also sets the maximum value for the x-
axis.
In the Number of Intervals field, set the maximum number of intervals you want to divide the usage distribution
into.
In the Number of Suspensions field, set the total number of suspensions that are expected to continue operating
in the field at the end of the observation period.
Click the Calculate icon to estimate the interval width.
The resulting rate intervals will be plotted and superimposed on the pdf of the usage distribution. To show the
estimated number of suspensions that accumulate usage at each rate represented by each interval, move the cursor
over the bars depicting the intervals.
9.5 Usage Format
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 307
You can adjust the number of intervals and perform the calculation again to obtain an interval width value that
provides a good number of intervals for the usage distribution. The following plots show some examples of how
different interval widths may fit the same usage distribution.
Figure 1: Interval width = 500.
Figure 1 shows a plot with a narrow interval width, resulting in a pdf that is divided into several small segments. This
causes the allocated suspensions to track the pdf poorly. When the warranty data are converted to failures/suspension
data, there may be insufficient accuracy of the usage values of the suspensions (i.e., several intervals with few
suspended units in each interval).
Figure 2: Interval width = 1,000.
9 Warranty Analysis
308 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Figure 2 shows a plot with a wider interval width, resulting in a pdf that is divided into larger segments. The allocated
suspensions track the usage pdf well. Therefore, this interval width would be appropriate for the data set.
Figure 3: Interval width = 3,750.
Figure 3 shows a plot with a very wide interval width. Again, this causes the allocated suspensions to track the pdf
poorly. When the warranty data are converted to failures/suspension data, there may be insufficient granularity of the
suspensions (i.e., few intervals with a high number of suspended units in each interval).
9.5.4 Example of a Usage Format Warranty Analysis
An automotive manufacturer collected warranty returns and sales data for a vehicle part. The objective is to obtain the
percentage of sold vehicles that will need repair under warranty if this particular part has a warranty coverage of
36,000 miles.
The manufacturer has been documenting the mileage accumulation per year for this type of product across the
customer base in comparable regions for many years. Based on the data, it was determined that the yearly usage
follows a lognormal distribution with a mean = 9.38 and a standard deviation = 0.085. For the interval width, the
manufacturer decided to specify an interval of 1,000 miles.
9.5 Usage Format
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 309
The following is a table of the warranty information for a single year. The information is current as of December 1,
2010.
The first step is to enter the sales and return data in the usage warranty analysis folio, as follows.
Sales Month Units Sold
Quantity
Returned
Usage at Time
of Return
12/1/2009 9 1 9072
1/1/2010 13 1 9743
2/1/2010 15 1 6857
3/1/2010 20 1 7651
4/1/010 15 1 not available
5/1/2010 25
1
1
1
1
5083
5990
7432
8739
6/1/2010 19 1 3158
7/1/2010 16 1 1136
8/1/2010 20 1 4646
9/1/2010 19 1 3965
10/1/2010 25 1 3117
11/12010 30 1 3250
9 Warranty Analysis
310 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Next, on the Main page of the control panel, set the End of Observation Period date to 12/1/2010.
The next step is to set up the usage distribution. On the Suspensions page of the control panel, make the following
input/selections:
Suspension Estimation Method: Usage Distribution
Usage Distribution Period: 1 year
Distribution: Lognormal
Parameters: Log-Mean = 9.38, Log-Std = 0.085
Interval Width: 1000
Next, choose a failure distribution for the vehicle part. On the Main page of the control panel, choose the
Lognormal distribution and then select MLE for the parameter estimation method.
Calculate the parameters by choosing Warranty > Analysis > Calculate or click the icon on the Main page of the
control panel.
The parameters of the failure distribution are estimated to be Log-Mean = 10.5281 and Log-Std = 1.1352.
Calculate the probability that the vehicle part will fail under warranty. Click the QCP icon on the control panel. In
the QCP window, choose to calculate the Probability of Failure. Select Miles for the time units and enter 36,000
for the mission end time.
Click Calculate to obtain the result, as shown next.
The probability of failure when under warranty is estimated to be 48.71%. In other words, an estimated 48.71% of
sold vehicles will return for repair under the current warranty policy. Based on this information, the manufacturer
may wish to modify the warranty policy and/or work on improving the reliability of the part.
9.6 Forecasting Warranty Returns
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 311
9.6 Forecasting Warranty Returns
Once the warranty data set has been converted to failure/suspension times, the information can be used to predict the
number of failures, or warranty returns, in subsequent time periods. Accurate predictions about the quantity of
products that will be returned under warranty can provide huge benefits to manufacturing organizations, such as the
ability to anticipate customer support needs and correct serious product quality problems in the field before other
problems occur.
To generate a forecast, choose Warranty > Tools > Generate Forecast or click the icon on the control panel.
The following picture shows the Forecast Setup window.
In the Forecast Range area, specify the Start date for the forecast and the Number of Periods (number of forecasts).
You can also specify the length of the forecast period in the Increment field. For example, in the figure shown above,
the time units is in terms of years; therefore, an increment of 1 would mean that 1 period is equivalent to 1 year. In
contrast, an increment of 2 would mean that 1 period is equivalent to 2 years. Note the following:
In the Nevada chart format, the forecast period uses the same time units used in the data sheets.
In the times-to-failure format, the unit of time is not defined; however, it is consistent with the unit of time used in
the data sheet.
In the dates of failure format and the usage format, you can specify the forecast period to be in days, months or
years.
You can select whether you want the forecast sheet to display the Forecast (i.e., projected returns) or the Upper
Bounds or Lower Bounds of the forecast. You can set the Confidence Level for the forecast calculation and specify
whether you want to calculate One-Sided or Two-Sided confidence bounds.
9 Warranty Analysis
312 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Once you have entered the settings for the forecast, click OK to generate a Forecast sheet. The example shown next is
a Forecast sheet for the Nevada chart format. The column headers represent the warranty periods and the row headers
represent the sales periods. Forecasts for the future sales periods are in the yellow cells.
The Forecast sheet includes a control panel that contains the following settings:
In the Show area, you can select to view the results as the Forecast, as the Upper Bounds of the forecast or as the
Lower Bounds of the forecast.
Round Results rounds the estimates to the nearest integer. Note that the column totals are calculated based on the
non-rounded results.
Show Subset ID adds a column in the Forecast sheet that displays the corresponding subset ID of the data in the
Forecast sheet.
The Use Warranty Length check box allows you to limit the length of the warranty period. By default, the
software assumes an infinite warranty period. Limiting the warranty period allows you to disregard the number of
returns that are outside the warranty period. For example, a warranty length of 12 months would mean that any
units that fail after 12 months of operation are out of warranty, and are therefore not counted in the total number of
returns. This is useful when planning for warranty costs, spare parts and other fulfillment needs that fall within a
specified period.
Enter the length of the warranty period in the Length field and click Update. This option uses the same units you
selected for the period increments in the Forecast Setup window.
9.7 Warranty Analysis Plots
You can plot the data in the warranty analysis folio either with or without generating a forecast. The features on the
plot sheet are similar to the options available for all other Weibull++ plots. Features that are not applicable to
warranty analysis will be hidden or disabled.
In addition to the standard plots in Weibull++, the following plot types are available for warranty analysis:
9.7 Warranty Analysis Plots
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 313
Expected Failures plot shows the expected number of failures over a period of time. This plot is available for all
warranty data formats. Four additional options in the control panel are associated with this plot:
Cumulative Failures shows the cumulative percentage of the failures for each time period. For example,
consider 10 units that had failed within a period of 6 months. If 2 units failed during the 1st month, then the %
of failure is 2/10 = 20%. If 3 more units failed during the 2nd month, then the cumulative % of failures is
(2+3)/10 = 50%, and so on.
Failures in Percents shows the failures as percentages of the total number of units originally in-service.
Otherwise, the failures will be plotted as raw numbers.
Show Confidence Bounds shows the upper and lower confidence bounds on the plot.
Include Total Data shows a plot of the entire data set, along with the selected subsets. This allows you to
view the overall trend of the entire data set in addition to the trends exhibited by each subset of data. This
option is available only when the Use Subsets check box was selected on the Main page of the control panel.
Chi-Squared Sales and Chi-Squared Returns plot types are available only when using the statistical process
control (SPC) feature of the Nevada chart format. These plots give a visual indication of whether the expected
number of warranty returns for a certain period is within or outside the expected range.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 315
Event logs, or maintenance logs, store information about a piece of equipment's failures
and repairs. They provide useful information that can help companies achieve their
productivity goals by giving insight about the failure modes, frequency of outages, repair duration, uptime/downtime
and availability of the equipment.
Some event logs contain more information than others, but essentially event logs capture data in a format that
includes the type of event, the date/time when the event occurred and the date/time when the system was restored to
operation. The volume of this type of data can become very large and the task of extracting useful and concise
information can also be cumbersome. To facilitate the processing of the data, the Weibull++ event log folio is
designed to convert your log entries into failure/repair data and perform basic life data analysis. In addition, the folio
calculates additional information such as the total uptime/downtime of the equipment and the total number of repair
actions performed.
This chapter describes how to use the event log folio, including:
Setting up the folio and entering data - Section 10.1 (p. 315).
Using the control panel - Section 10.2 (p. 317).
An example of event log data analysis - Section 10.3 (p. 320).
Additional analysis tools, including:
Creating a shift pattern - Section 10.4 (p. 324).
The Systems Setup window - Section 10.5 (p. 325).
Transferring data to a Weibull++ standard folio - Section 10.6 (p. 326).
10.1 Setting Up the Event Log Folio
To create an event log folio, choose Insert > Folios > Event Log or right-click the Specialized Folios folder in the
current project explorer and choose Add Event Log on the shortcut menu.
Event Log Folios
10
10 Event Log Folios
316 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The following is an example of an event log folio data sheet. In this example, the events are from two cutting machine
systems in two parallel production lines.
Every event log data sheet contains some or all of the following information:
The System column identifies the system that experienced an event. In the sample data sheet, the machines are
identified by the labels M-1 and M-2.
The System column is optional, and it can be displayed by selecting the Use System column check box on the
Other page of the folios control panel. If the System column is not used, all events are assumed to have occurred
for the same system.
All occurrence dates in the log must be within the defined observation period for the system. You will enter the
start/end dates of the observation period for the system in the System area of the control panel.
The F=Failure/E=Event column indicates whether the occurrence was a failure event (F) or a general event (E).
A general event represents an activity that brings the system down but is not directly relevant to the reliability of
the equipment, such as preventive maintenance, routine inspections and the like.
If you choose to include general events (E) in the analysis, you will have the option on the control panel to select
whether you want to calculate the failure/repair distributions of the F and E occurrences separately or combined.
Date Occurred and Time Occurred indicate the exact date and time of the event.
Date Restored and Time Restored indicate the exact date and time the system was restored to operating mode.
Levels 1, 2, 3 and 4 indicate the subsystem or component that was responsible for the event. This gives you the
flexibility to analyze the failure and repair data by certain levels within the system. For example, in row 1 of the
sample data sheet, the failure event was caused by the motor of the electric saw of machine M-1. By entering this
level of information in the data sheet, you will have the option to obtain individual failure and repair distributions
for the motor (2nd level) and the electric saw (1st level). Note that in order to perform an analysis, you must at
least specify a 1st level component for every entry in the log.
OTSF (Operates Through System Failures) allows you to specify whether the component will continue to
accumulate age when any failures other than the components own failure occur. Enter a Y in this column to
indicate that the component continues to operate through other failures or enter an N to indicate that the
component is assumed to be failed when the system is failed.
Note that the entry in this column for a particular component must be consistent with all other events in the data
set associated with the component. For example, there are two rows in the sample data sheet with events
associated with the electric saw blade (rows 4 and 10), both of those rows must contain the same value (Y or N) in
the OTSF column because the blade either does or does not continue to operate when the system fails due to
another type of event.
The OTSF column is optional, and it can be displayed by selecting the Use OTSF column check box on the Other
page of the folios control panel. If this column is not used, all components are assumed to be failed when the
system is failed.
The Description column is for logging any other pertinent information or comments about the event. The
information has no effect on the analysis.
10.2 Event Log Control Panel Settings
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 317
After you have entered the data for your system in the data sheet, the next step is to select the settings for the analysis.
If your system does not operate on a 24/7 basis, you may also want to define the shift schedule of the system so that
you obtain accurate calculations for the failure and repair times. See Section 10.4 on page 324.
10.2 Event Log Control Panel Settings
The event log folio control panel is arranged into groups of related tasks. Each group has its own page on the control
panel. The Main page is shown next.
The Main page includes the following settings:
The Levels to Analyze area allows you to specify the component level to include in the analysis. At least one
level must be selected in order to perform an analysis. For instance, suppose you have a cutting system with an
electric saw as the level 1 component and the saw blade as the level 2 component. If you select to analyze both
levels 1 and 2, then the software will compute for the total uptime and downtime at each level. In addition:
The software will obtain the failure and repair distributions of the electric saw. The analysis of the level 1
component considers the events that affect the electric saw and any other components of the electric saw
assembly, including the saw blade.
Tip: There is a horizontal splitter bar directly above the small icons at the bottom of the control panel. If you drag it as far
up as it will go, all of the pages of the panel will be accessed by large buttons. If you drag it all the way down, all of the
pages will be accessed by small icons. Positions in between allow you to use some large buttons and some small icons.
See page 78 in Chapter 2.
10 Event Log Folios
318 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The software will also obtain separate failure and repair distributions for the saw blade. The analysis of the
level 2 component considers the events that affect the saw blade and events for any other components of the
saw blade (level 3 and 4 components of the saw blade, if any).
Note that when you select the Use OTSF column check box on the Other page of the control panel, the software
can analyze only one level at a time.
The Analyze Failures and Events area allows you to select whether you want to obtain the failure/repair
distributions of the F and E occurrences jointly or separately. When you select a joint analysis, all general events
in the data set will be treated as failures. This affects the calculation for the total uptime/downtime of the
component, as well as the failure/repair distributions.
The System area is for specifying the dates/times when you started and stopped collecting the event log data.
Note that if you select the Use System column check box on the Other page of the control panel, the drop-down
list will be enabled. This allows you to select the system name from the drop-down list and enter the start date/
time and the end date/time of the observation period of that system. If the Use System column check box is not
selected, the software assumes that all events are assumed to have occurred for the same system and the drop-
down list will be disabled.
The System is new on start date check box indicates that the system has never been used before and that the start
date you entered is also the same calendar date that the system started operating. This setting affects how the
software classifies data when it converts the log entries to failure/suspension data. If the system is new, then the
times to first occurrence of every event are considered to be completed data (F) because the exact time-to-event is
known. If the system is not new, then the times to first occurrence of every event are considered to be right
censored data (S) because the amount of time that the system operated before the observation period began is not
known.
If your system does not operate on a 24/7 basis, you may also want to define the shift schedule of the system so
that you obtain accurate calculations for the failure and repair times. See Set Shift Pattern.
The Results area gives you the option to display the following results:
To view the failure/repair distributions of each component, click the Show Analysis Summary (...) button.
The resulting failure/repair distributions are based on the settings you have defined on the Analysis page of the
control panel and on the log data in your data sheet.
To view a report on the number of repair actions performed, the OTSF settings of each component and other
results, click the Show Report (...) button.
The folio tools are arranged on the left side of the panel. Use these tools to manage data and experiment with the
results of your analysis. Each tool is described in detail below.
Calculate
Converts the log entries into failure/repair times and then fits distributions to the converted data. In addition,
it calculates the total uptime and downtime of the components. This tool is also available by choosing Event
Log > Analysis > Calculate.
Set Shift Pattern
Opens the Shift Pattern window, which allows you specify the days and times when the system is operating.
This tool is also available by choosing Event Log > Actions and Settings > Set Shift Pattern. See Section
10.4 on page 324.
Tip: As an alternative, you can enter the start date/time and end date/time of the observation period for each system
in a separate window by clicking the Systems Setup icon on the Main page of the control panel. The larger window
makes it easier to enter information for several systems all at once. This option is available only if you have selected
the Use System column check box on the Other page of the folios control panel.
10.2 Event Log Control Panel Settings
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 319
System Setup
Opens the System Setup window, which allows you to enter the period you started and stopped collecting the
event log data for each unique system identified in the data sheet. This option is available only if you have
selected the Use System column check box on the Other page of the folios control panel. See Section 10.5 on
page 325.
Transfer to Selected Folio
Opens the Transfer Life Data window, which allows you transfer the time-to-failure and time-to-repair data to
an existing Weibull++ standard folio. This tool is also available by choosing Event Log > Transfer Life
Data > Transfer Life Data to Selected Folio. See Section 10.6 on page 326.
Transfer to New Folio
Creates a Weibull++ standard folio and transfers all the time-to-failure and time-to-repair data to the new
folio. This tool is also available by choosing Event Log > Transfer Life Data > Transfer Life Data to New
Folio.
Analysis Page
The Analysis page allows you to specify how the software will fit a distribution to the failure and repair data:
If you select the Use quick defaults check box, all the other options will be unavailable and one of the following
actions will be applied:
When the failure/repair data set contains at least two unique failure times, the software uses the 2-parameter
Weibull distribution and the MLE parameter estimation method to analyze the data.
When the failure/repair data set contains one failure time, the software uses the 1-parameter exponential
distribution and the MLE parameter estimation method to analyze the data.
If you select the Prefer RRX if sufficient data option, the software uses the RRX parameter estimation method
when the failure/repair data set has at least two unique failure times; otherwise, the MLE method is used.
If you select the Always use MLE option, the software always uses the MLE parameter estimation method.
The Distributions to Consider area allows you to select one or more of the listed distributions to be considered
for the data. The software evaluates the fit of each selected distribution to the data set and displays in the results
the one that provides the best fit.
Other Page
The Other page includes optional settings that allow you to format the event log data sheet.
The Times to Failure/Repair In area allows you to select the unit of time to be used when the software converts
the log entries to failure/repair data.
The Time Format and Date Format areas allows you to select the formatting options for displaying the date and
time information in the data sheet and in the results.
The Other area allows you to include either an OTSF (Operates Through System Failures) column or a System
column in the data sheet, or both.
If the Use OTSF column check box is selected, you will have the option to specify in the data sheet whether a
component continues to accumulate age when any failures other than that components own failure occurs. If
the check box is not selected, all components are assumed to be failed when the system is failed.
10 Event Log Folios
320 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
If the Use System column check box is selected, you will have the option to enter events for multiple systems
in the data sheet. If the check box is not selected, all events are assumed to have occurred for the same system.
The Comments area allows you to enter notes or other text that will be saved with the folio.
To save your current settings for all new event log folios, click the Set as Default button. To automatically apply the
saved settings to any existing event log folio, click Load Default.
10.3 Event Log Data Analysis Example
Consider a simple system comprising two components of interest for analysis purposes: a motor and a pump. When
the motor fails, the pump also stops operating and the entire system is shut down for repairs. However, when the
pump fails, the motor continues to run. The system operates from 8 AM to 5 PM seven days a week.
The following table shows the maintenance log. System monitoring started on January 1, 2010 at 12 PM and stopped
on March 18, 2010 at 1 PM. The system had been in operation for some time before the log began but information for
events prior to January 1 is not available.
The objective is to analyze each component and obtain the failure and repair distributions for all recorded events.
The first step is to set up the event log folio for data entry. On the Other page of the control panel, select the Use
OTSF column check box. Clear the check box for the Use System column and then select your preferred format
for the date and time.
On the Analysis page of the control panel, select the Prefer RRX if sufficient data option and select all three
distributions for consideration. Do this for both the failure and repair distributions.
Event Type
System Failed System Restored
Component
Date Time Date Time
1 Failure Jan-02-10 4:00 PM Jan-02-10 7:49 PM Pump
2 Maintenance Jan-09-10 8:30 AM Jan-09-10 10:43 AM Motor
3 Failure Jan-10-10 9:13 AM Jan-10-10 7:48 PM Motor
4 Inspection Jan-12-10 3:26 PM Jan-12-10 6:46 PM Pump
5 Failure Jan-13-10 4:56 PM Jan-13-10 5:21 PM Pump
6 Maintenance Jan-15-10 1:16 PM Jan-15-10 4:39 PM Motor
7 Failure Jan-20-10 1:38 PM Jan-21-10 7:15 PM Pump
8 Failure Jan-25-10 10:32 AM Jan-27-10 10:47 PM Motor
9 Cleaning Jan-28-10 11:31 AM Jan-28-10 12:00 PM Pump
10 Failure Feb-02-10 2:38 PM Feb-02-10 7:11 PM Motor
11 Inspection Feb-08-10 3:51 PM Feb-08-10 8:22 PM Pump
12 Failure Feb-12-10 4:42 PM Feb-13-10 9:59 AM Pump
13 Cleaning Feb-17-10 2:47 PM Feb-17-10 7:13 PM Motor
14 Maintenance Feb-25-10 4:31 PM Feb-25-10 5:00 PM Pump
15 Failure Feb-28-10 9:00 AM Feb-28-10 3:10 PM Motor
16 Failure Mar-01-10 10:16 AM Mar-01-10 10:43 AM Pump
17 Inspection Mar-02-10 3:41 PM Mar-02-10 9:11 PM Pump
18 Failure Mar-12-10 8:46 AM Mar-12-10 9:20 PM Motor
19 Failure Mar-13-10 4:45 PM Mar-13-10 5:13 PM Pump
20 Maintenance Mar-15-10 9:36 AM Mar-15-10 10:02 PM Motor
10.3 Event Log Data Analysis Example
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 321
Next, fill out the data sheet with the event log data.
In the F=Failure/E=Event column, mark all the events that are not considered to be actual failures (i.e.,
maintenance, cleaning and inspections) with an E. Use F for the failures.
In the OTSF column, mark all the events attributed to the motor component with a Y because it continues to
operate despite a failed pump. The pump, however, will stop accumulating age if the motor fails. In this case,
mark all the events attributed to the pump with an N.
Once data entry is complete, go to the Main page of the control panel and make the following selections/inputs:
In the Levels to Analyze area, select Level 1.
In the Failures and Events area, select the Analyze Separately option so that we get separate results for the
failures and the general events.
In the System area, enter the date and time the system monitoring started, as well as the date and time the
system monitoring ended. Clear the check box for System is new on start date.
Next, enter the shift schedule of the system by choosing Event Log > Actions and Settings > Set Shift Pattern
or by clicking the icon on the control panel.
In the Shift Pattern window, specify 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM shifts seven days a week, as shown next. Click OK.
The following figure shows the completed data sheet and control panel setup.
Next, calculate the results by choosing Event Log > Analysis > Calculate or by clicking the icon on the control
panel.
10 Event Log Folios
322 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
To view the failure and repair distributions, click the Show Analysis Summary (...) button on the control panel.
The following report shows the results.
In this example, rows 11 to 14 display the failure and repair distributions for each component due to each type of
event. Rows 18 to 21 display the total uptime and downtime for each component due to each type of event.
10.3 Event Log Data Analysis Example
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 323
Close the Results window. To view a report on the number of repair actions performed and other results, click the
Show Report (...) button on the control panel as shown next.
Close the Results window. You can perform further analysis by transferring the failure/repair data from the event
log folio to a Weibull++ standard folio. To do this, choose Event Log > Transfer Life Data > Transfer Life
Data to New Folio or click the icon on the control panel.
10 Event Log Folios
324 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
This automatically creates a new Weibull++ standard folio within the project. The folio will contain separate data
sheets for the failure and repair data. The following data sheet shows the failure data for the motor component.
The [F] indicates an analysis of the failures, while [E] is an analysis of the general events (note that a combined
analysis would display [C]). The [FD] indicates that the data set is for the failure distribution, while [RD] is the
data set for the repair distribution.
If you were to fit a 2-parameter Weibull distribution to the failure data of the motor and the pump, and then
generate an overlay plot, you would be able to visually compare the reliability of the components, as shown next.
10.4 Set Shift Pattern
One of the functions of the Weibull++ event log folio is to convert your log entries into failure/repair times. The
failure times are obtained by calculating the date/time between the last repair and the date/time the new failure
occurred. The repair times are obtained by calculating the difference between the date/time of occurrence and the
date/time of restoration. In the case of equipment that does not run on a 24/7 basis, the Shift Pattern feature allows the
analysis to take into consideration the periods when your system is not in use. This ensures accurate calculations for
the failure and repair times.
To create a shift pattern, choose Event Log > Action and Settings > Set Shift Pattern or click the icon on the Main
page of the control panel.
10.5 Systems Setup
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 325
The shift schedule you create applies to all of the systems you have identified in your data sheet. In other words, all
the systems follow the same shift schedule. The following figure shows an example.
The buttons at the lower left side of the window allow you to add or remove shifts. To save the current shift pattern as
the default for new event log folios, click Save as Default. To load the default shift pattern settings for any existing
event log folio, click Load Defaults.
10.5 Systems Setup
The Systems Setup window is available only if you have selected the Use System column check box on the Other
page of the folios control panel. This window allows you to enter the period you started and stopped collecting the
event log data for each unique system identified in the data sheet. The information you provide is used by the
software to obtain the time to first occurrence of the failure (F) and general (E) events of every unique system.
Open the System Setup window by clicking the icon on the Main page of the control panel.
The following figure shows an example of a setup for two machines, M-1 and M-2.
The System is New column indicates that the system has never been used before and that the start date you entered is
also the same calendar date that the system started operating. If the system is new, then the times to first occurrence of
10 Event Log Folios
326 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
every event are considered to be complete data (failures) because the exact time-to-event is known. If the system is
not new, then the times to first occurrence of every event are considered to be right censored data because the amount
of time that the system operated before the observation period began is not known.
Note that the information you provide in the Systems Setup window will be automatically copied to the System area
on the Main page of the control panel and vice versa.
10.6 Transfer Life Data
The Transfer Life Data window of the event log folio allows you transfer the time-to-failure and time-to-repair data to
an existing Weibull++ standard folio.
To access this tool, choose Event Log > Transfer Life Data > Transfer Life Data to Selected Folio or click the
icon on the Main page of the control panel.
10.6 Transfer Life Data
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 327
The following example shows the Transfer Life Data window for a system with three 1st level components.
The [C] indicates a combined analysis of the failure/repair distributions (a separate analysis would display [F] for the
analysis of the failures and an [E] for the analysis of the general events). The [FD] indicates that the data set is for the
failure distribution, while [RD] is the data set for the repair distribution.
From the Level IDs column, select the data set you wish to transfer. From the Folios/Sheets column, select the data
sheet of the folio you wish to transfer the data to. To transfer all the data at once, select the Transfer all level IDs
check box.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 329
In life data analysis, it is assumed that the components being analyzed are non-
repairable; that is, they are either discarded or replaced upon failure. When analyzing
the failure behavior of non-repairable components, the data points are typically either times-to-failure or times-to-
suspension. For a group of non-repairable units coming from a single population, the time-to-failure of one unit in the
sample does not affect the time-to-failure of other units in the sample. Therefore, the lifetimes of non-repairable
systems are considered to be independent and identically distributed (i.i.d).
On the other hand, for complex systems such as automobiles, computers, aircraft, etc., it is likely that the system will
be repaired (not discarded) upon failure. Failures are recurring events in the life of a repairable system, and data from
such a system are obtained by recording the age of the system at the time when each failure occurred. This type of
data is known as recurrent event data.
The failure behavior of a repairable system is dependent on that systems history of repairs; therefore, traditional life
data analysis methods such as the Weibull distribution are not appropriate because those methods treat every failure
event as identical and independent from the previous one. In order to analyze recurrent event data, Weibull++
includes a choice of two methods: non-parametric and parametric analysis.
This chapter describes how to use the RDA folios, including:
How to perform a non-parametric RDA, including:
Setting up a non-parametric RDA folio and evaluating the results - Section 11.1.1 (p. 330).
Example of a non-parametric RDA - Section 11.1.2 (p. 333).
How to perform a parametric RDA, including:
Setting up a parametric RDA folio - Section 11.2.1 (p. 336).
How to use the parametric RDA folio control panel and select the settings for the analysis - Section 11.2.2 (p.
337).
Perform reliability calculations via the RDA Quick Calculation Pad (QCP) - Section 11.2.3 (p. 340).
Generate RDA plots - Section 11.2.6 (p. 343).
Example of a parametric RDA - Section 11.2.7 (p. 344).
11.1 Non-Parametric RDA Folio
The non-parametric RDA folio is based on the mean cumulative function (MCF). This analysis provides a plot of the
MCF to illustrate the average number of recurring failures of a system, or a group of systems, over a given period of
time (or distance, cycles, etc.). The MCF can be used to evaluate whether the number of failures increases or
decreases over time, to predict the future number of failures or to compare different data sets from different designs,
operating conditions, production periods, etc.
1
Recurrent Event Data
Analysis (RDA) Folios
11
11 Recurrent Event Data Analysis (RDA) Folios
330 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
11.1.1 Setting Up the Folio and Evaluating Results
Setting Up the Folio
To create a non-parametric RDA folio, choose Insert > Folios > Non-Parametric RDA or right-click the
Specialized Folios folder in the current project explorer and choose Add Non-Parametric RDA on the shortcut
menu.
The following figure shows an example of the non-parametric RDA folio data sheet.
The data sheet contains the following information:
The System ID column identifies the system that experienced an event. In the sample data sheet, two units of the
same type of motor are being tracked. These two systems will be treated as one group and the resulting mean
cumulative function (MCF) will depict the average behavior of the group.
The Event column describes the type of event. An F indicates a failure and an E indicates that the observation
period for the unit has ended. Each unique system in the data sheet must have a single end event. If you do not
enter an end event for a system, then the end event is assumed to be equal to the last failure time for that system.
The Time to Event column indicates the age of the system when the event occurred. For each unique system, the
time of the end event (E) must be equal to or greater than the last failure time of that system. The time of the end
event is also known as the censoring age, because the products failure or repair history beyond that time is
unknown.
The Calculate Confidence option on the control panel calculates the upper 1-sided and lower 1-sided confidence
bounds of the MCF at a specified confidence level. Specify the desired confidence level in the Level input field.
Selecting this option also automatically includes the confidence bounds in the plot of the analysis.
2
1.
The ReliaWiki resource portal has more information on the MCF at: http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/
Non-Parametric Recurrent Events Data Analysis.
2.
The ReliaWiki resource portal provides more information on confidence bounds at: http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/
Confidence Bounds.
11.1 Non-Parametric RDA Folio
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 331
To analyze the data set, choose Recurrent Event Data > Analysis > Calculate or click the icon on the control panel.
Note that this will also sort the data set by system ID and then by time to event.
Evaluating Results
To view the results, click the Show Results (...) button to open the Results window, as shown next.
The Time column displays the system ages, sorted in chronological order, that were entered for the failure events.
The Sample MCF column shows the average number of failures of the group at each particular age.
The Variance column indicates the amount of uncertainty in the MCF value. This is also used to obtain the 1-sided
confidence bounds that are displayed in the Lower Limit and Upper Limit columns. These 3 columns are available
only if you have selected the Calculate Confidence check box in the control panel and specified a confidence level.
The MCF values and the confidence bounds can also be displayed in an MCF plot in order to visualize the behavior
of the recurring failures. To view the MCF plot, choose Recurrent Event Data > Analysis > Plot, or click the icon
on the control panel.
11 Recurrent Event Data Analysis (RDA) Folios
332 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The following plots are some examples of the different MCF shapes.
Constant Recurrence Rate indicates that the units are exhibiting what is usually referred to as useful life, which
is a stable period during which the failures occur at a rate that is neither increasing or decreasing with time.
Increasing Recurrence Rate is a curve that is concave up and the recurrence rate of the failures increases (the
data points are becoming horizontally closer) as the population ages. This is typical of units with wearout
problems. It could also indicate that the system maintenance is degrading with time.
Decreasing Recurrence Rate is a curve that is concave down and the recurrence rate of the failures decreases
(the data points are becoming horizontally farther apart) as the population ages. This is typical of units exhibiting
a period of infant mortality problems. It could also indicate that the system maintenance is improving with time.
Bathtub Recurrence Rate is a curve that starts as concave down, and then becomes concave up. This behavior is
typical of units that first experience infant mortality problems and then exhibit a useful life period. As the age
increases, the units start to enter the wearout stage.
11.1 Non-Parametric RDA Folio
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 333
11.1.2 Non-Parametric RDA Example
A car manufacturer wants to make projections about the expected cumulative number of transmission repairs by
24,000 miles for 100 cars of the same model. The manufacturer conducted a preproduction road test and tracked the
transmission repairs in a sample of 14 cars. The following table shows the data.
3
Car ID 1st Repair 2nd Repair Current Mileage
1 - - 27099
2 - - 21999
3 11891 - 27583
4 - - 19966
5 - - 26146
6 3648 13957 23193
7 - - 19823
8 2890 - 22707
9 2714 - 19275
10 - - 19803
11 - - 19630
12 - - 22056
13 - - 22940
14 3240 7690 18965
3.
Adapted from the example that appears on page 4 in Recurrent Events Data Analysis for Products Repairs, Disease
Recurrences, and Other Applications, by Wayne B. Nelson, 2003.
11 Recurrent Event Data Analysis (RDA) Folios
334 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The first step is to enter the data into a non-parametric RDA folio data sheet, as shown next.
Select to calculate the confidence bounds, enter a confidence level of 0.95 and click Calculate.
Next, click the Show Results (...) button to open the Results window, as shown next.
11.2 Parametric RDA Folio
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 335
The results indicate that for the period between 2,714 and 2,890 miles, the estimated mean cumulative number of
repairs per car is 0.0714. For the period between 2,890 and 3,240 miles, the estimate is 0.1429, and so on.
To view a plot of the MCF results, close the Results window and click the Plot icon on the control panel. The
following plot shows the MCF and the confidence bounds. The system ages are on the x-axis and the values for
the mean cumulative number of repairs per car are on the y-axis.
The xs in the plot represent the system ages that were entered for the failure events. As you can see, the MCF
value of 0.5 applies to the period that is between 13,957 to 27,583 miles (the latest system age entered for failure
event F and the latest observed censoring age entered for end event E). Therefore, for a fleet of 100 cars, the
expected number of transmission repairs by 24,000 miles is 50 (i.e., 0.5 x 100). This estimation can be useful for
predicting the future number of failures, estimating repair cost and planning for spare parts.
Notice that the MCF data points on the plot grow horizontally farther apart as the population ages. If a smooth
curve were drawn through the x's on the plot, the curve would be concave down. The MCF exhibits a decreasing
recurrence rate, meaning that the rate of repairs decreases as the cars accumulate more miles. This could mean
that the cars have a manufacturing defect and the recurrence rate will continue to decrease until all defects have
been repaired.
11.2 Parametric RDA Folio
The parametric RDA folio uses the General Renewal Process (GRP) model to analyze the failure behavior of a
repairable system. The GRP analysis method takes into account the effectiveness of repairs on the condition of the
system. For example, a repair may bring the system either to an as-good-as-new condition, an as-bad-as-old condition
or in some stage in between. If the system is only partially rejuvenated after the repair, then this may affect how the
system fails in the future. Over time, the recurrence rate of failures may remain constant, increase or decrease. The
GRP model allows you to analyze the failure behavior of a partially restored system over time so you can obtain
estimates such as the cumulative number of failures, mean time between failures (MTBF) and failure intensity.
4
11 Recurrent Event Data Analysis (RDA) Folios
336 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
11.2.1 Setting up the Folio
To create a parametric RDA folio, choose Insert > Folios > Parametric RDA or right-click the Specialized Folios
folder in the current project explorer and choose Add Parametric RDA on the shortcut menu.
The following picture shows an example of a parametric RDA folio data sheet.
The data sheet contains the following information:
The System ID column identifies the system that experienced an event. In the sample data sheet, two units of the
same type of motor are being tracked. These two systems will be treated as one group and results such as the mean
time between failures (MTBF) and failure intensity will depict the average behavior of the group.
The Event column describes the type of event. An F indicates a failure event and an E indicates that the
observation period for the unit has ended. Each unique system in the data sheet must have a single end event. If
you do not enter an end event for a system, then the end event is assumed to be equal to the last failure time for
that system. In addition, the data set must have at least three failures in order for the software to perform the
calculations.
Notice that the repair times of the motors are not recorded in the data sheet. This is because the GRP model
assumes that the repair times are negligible and only the effects of the repairs on the condition of the system are of
concern. Therefore, each data point in the data sheet can be treated as a single fail-and-repair process.
The Time to Event column indicates the age of the system when the event occurred. For each unique system, the
time of the end event (E) must be equal to or greater than the last failure time of that system. The time of the end
event is also known as the censoring age, because the products failure or repair history beyond that time is
unknown.
After you have entered the data for your system(s) in the data sheet, the next step is to select the settings for the
analysis.
4.
The ReliaWiki resource portal has more information on the GRP model at: http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/
Parametric_Recurrent_Events_Data_Analysis.
11.2 Parametric RDA Folio
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 337
11.2.2 Parametric RDA Folio Control Panel Setting
Parts of a Parametric RDA Control Panel
The parametric RDA folio control panel is arranged into groups of related tasks. Each group has its own page on the
control panel. The following picture shows the Main page, which contains the settings for selecting the number of
parameters to calculate and the virtual age model. The folio tools are arranged on the left side of the panel.
The Analysis Summary area of the control panel displays the calculated values of the parameters and the
likelihood (LK) value of the GRP model. Click anywhere within the area to open the Results window, which
displays the calculated results in a worksheet. From the Results window, you can edit, copy or print the results.
The folio tools are arranged on the left side of the panel. Use these tools to manage data and experiment with the
results of your analysis. Each tool is described in detail below.
Calculate
Estimates the parameters of the GRP model, based on the current data set. This tool is also available by
choosing Recurrent Event Data > Analysis > Calculate.
Plot
Creates a new sheet in the folio that provides a choice of applicable plot types. In parametric RDA folios, this
includes cumulative failures vs. time, failure intensity vs. time, etc. See Section 11.2.6 on page 343. This tool
is also available by choosing Recurrent Event Data > Analysis > Plot.
Tip: There is a horizontal splitter bar directly above the Main button. If you drag it as far up as it will go, all of the pages of
the panel will be accessed by large buttons. If you drag it all the way down, all of the pages will be accessed by small
icons. Positions in between allow you to use some large buttons and some small icons. See page 78 in Chapter 2.
11 Recurrent Event Data Analysis (RDA) Folios
338 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
QCP
Opens the RDA Quick Calculation Pad, which allows you to calculate results based on the analyzed data
sheet, such as the number of failures and mean time between failures (MTBF). See Section 11.2.3 on page
340. This tool is also available by choosing Recurrent Event Data > Analysis > Quick Calculation Pad.
Change Units
Opens the Change Units window, which allows you to change the time units of an existing data sheet. See
page 89 in Chapter 2.
Selecting the Settings for the Analysis
The GRP model uses the concept of virtual age to mathematically capture the effect of the repairs on the subsequent
rate of occurrence of failure (i.e., failure intensity). The rate of occurrence of failure over time is modeled by the
power law function. This means that the GRP analysis method has three parameters, two of which are used to
describe the power law function and a third for estimating the virtual age of a system.
The following settings are available on the Analysis page of the control panel:
The Virtual Age Model setting allows you to select one of two ways that the GRP model can calculate the virtual
age after each repair:
The Type I model assumes that the repairs will remove some portion of the damage that has accumulated
since the last repair. The virtual age v of a system after a Type I repair is obtained by:
where vi is the virtual age of the system right after the last repair, q is the virtual age parameter and xi is the
time between failures.
The Type II model assumes that the repairs will remove a portion of all the damage that has accumulated since
the system was new. The virtual age of the system after a Type II repair is obtained by:
Since it may not be feasible to classify real-world repair situations into one of these two abstract categories, the
virtual age type is usually selected based on what provides a better statistical fit for the data. The model fit can be
assessed by using the likelihood (LK) value that is displayed in the Analysis Summary area on the control panel,
where the higher value indicates the better fit.
The Simulation Settings are for the Monte Carlo simulation. In general, the application uses the failure times
supplied by the data set in order to calculate virtual age. However, when extrapolating for results that are outside
of the range of observations, the failure times are unknown. Therefore, unless parameter q = 1, there are no
analytical solutions available for metrics such as total failure number and failure intensity. In this case, the
solution can only be obtained through Monte Carlo simulation.
In the Number of Simulations field, specify the number of data points to generate in the simulation.
The Use a Fixed Seed option is an optional setting that allows you to specify a starting point from which
random numbers are generated in the simulation. The same random numbers and, therefore, the same
simulation results will be generated when the same seed value and number of data points are used.
11.2 Parametric RDA Folio
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 339
The Parameterization option allows you to select which parameters to calculate. By default, the software
computes for the beta, lambda and q parameters. If the parameterization option is selected, as shown next, the
software computes for the beta, eta and RF (restoration factor) parameters.
The GRP model assumes that the failure intensity follows a power law model and that the first times to failure of
the systems are described by a Weibull distribution. The relationship between the Weibull parameter, eta (q), and
the power law parameter, lambda (), can be described as:
The RF parameter (or the q parameter, if you use the default setting) is the parameter used for estimating the
virtual age of a system after each repair. Note that the relationship between the RF and the q parameters can be
expressed as:
The RF parameter indicates the degree to which the condition of a system will be restored after each repair.
Parameter q indicates the opposite. A value between 0 and 1 indicates the extent of the repair, where:
An RF = 1 indicates that the system will be as good as new after the repair. This is also called perfect repair.
An RF value between 0 and 1 indicates that the system will be better than old but worse than new after the
repair. This is also called imperfect repair.
An RF = 0 indicates that the system will be as bad as old (i.e., no improvement) after the repair. This is also
called minimal repair.
If you select the 2-parameter GRP on the Main page of the control panel, you will be prompted to specify a value
for the RF parameter (or the q parameter, if you use the default setting) based on your own knowledge about the
effectiveness of the repairs. If you select the 3-parameter GRP, the software will calculate the RF parameter based
on the data, giving you an indication of the effectiveness of the repairs as reflected by the data set.
11 Recurrent Event Data Analysis (RDA) Folios
340 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
11.2.3 Parametric RDA Folio Quick Calculation Pad
The Quick Calculation Pad (QCP) provides a quick and accurate way of calculating a variety of useful metrics related
to recurrent event data analysis. To access the tool, choose Recurrent Event Data > Analysis > Quick Calculation
Pad or click the icon on the Main page of the control panel.
11.2.4 How to Use the QCP
To use the QCP, do the following:
Choose a metric from the Calculations area.
If applicable, use the Units drop-down list to specify the units for time values that are entered as inputs and/or
displayed as results. The units in the QCP can be different from the units that were used for the data sheet. For
example, you could enter the event times in hours but then calculate the cumulative number of failures per days
the application will convert the times automatically based on the conversion factors specified for the repository.
If applicable, use the Bounds drop-down list to specify what type of confidence bounds to calculate. The
following graphics illustrate the types.
5
If you select Both One-Sided, the QCP will calculate both the lower one-sided bound and the upper one-sided
bound.
Make any required inputs in the Inputs area.
Click Calculate. The calculated value(s) will always be displayed in the results area at the top of the window, and
clicking the Report button displays a summary of the current calculation input/output in the Results window. You
can also use the Options drop-down list to configure other settings, including:
Precision sets the number of decimal places displayed in the results.
Scientific Notation sets the point at which numbers will be converted to normalized scientific notation. For
example, setting this to 3 means that all numbers with a value of 1000 or more will be converted to normalized
scientific notation (e.g., 1.0E+3).
Set Display Font allows to change the font style and size that is used to display the calculated value(s) in the
results.
Select Show Captions if you want notations to be displayed in the results area along with the values. For
example, if you have selected to calculate the instantaneous failure intensity for a given time with 2-sided
5.
The ReliaWiki resource portal provides more information on the background theory of confidence bounds at:
http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/Confidence Bounds.
11.2 Parametric RDA Folio
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 341
confidence bounds at the 90% confidence level, the first picture shows the display with captions and the
second picture shows without.
Figure 1: QCP window with Captions on.
Figure 2: QCP window with Captions off.
Select Show Calculation Log if you want to display a log on the right side of the window that records some
or all of the calculations performed during this QCP session.
If Auto Print Results is selected under Options, all results will be automatically printed to the log each
time you perform a calculation.
Otherwise, you can choose which results to add to the log by using the Print button at the bottom of the
log display.
Under the log display, you can also click Feed to advance the tape or Clear to delete all data from the
current log. If you click inside the log, you can copy some or all of the text to the clipboard.
Select Non-Modal QCP to lock the QCP in a top window position so it can remain open while you have
access to all folios and data sheets. The calculations performed in the QCP will be based on the currently
active data sheet. Note that if the currently active data sheet is in a folio other than the parametric RDA folio,
the QCP will change to show the calculations available for a standard life data analysis. If this option is not
selected, you will need to close the QCP to access any data sheet or folio. This setting can also be changed
using the While QCP is open, have access to all folios option on the Other page of the Application Setup.
11.2.5 QCP Calculations
Each type of calculation may require additional user inputs in order to solve for the metric of interest.
Failure Intensity
Cumulative Failure Intensity
Calculates the average rate of occurrence of failures from time = 0 up to a specified period of time. Enter the time
period in the Time field. For example, a cumulative failure intensity of 0.15 for a time period of 100 hours means
that the average rate of occurrence of failures is 0.15 failures per hour over a period of 100 hours.
Instantaneous Failure Intensity
Calculates the rate of occurrence of failures that can be expected at a given instant of time. Enter the time in the
Time field. For example, an instantaneous failure intensity of 0.15 for a time of 100 hours means that the rate of
occurrence of failures is 0.15 failures per hour when observed at the 100th hour.
11 Recurrent Event Data Analysis (RDA) Folios
342 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures)
Cumulative MTBF
Calculates the average time between consecutive failures. It is obtained by dividing the total operating time by the
number of observed failures. Enter the total operating time in the Time field. For example, assume a product has 3
failures in the first 50 hours and 2 failures in the next 50 hours, for a total of 5 failures in 100 operating hours. The
cumulative MTBF would be: 100/5 = 20 hours.
Instantaneous MTBF
Calculates the average time between consecutive failures at a given interval of time. Enter the operating time in
the Time field. For example, assume a product has 3 failures in the first 50 hours and 2 failures in the next 50
hours. The instantaneous MTBF at 100 hours would be the average time between failures over that interval, or
(100-50)/2 = 25 hours.
Failures
Cumulative Number of Failures
Calculates the cumulative number of failures to be expected for a specified interval of time. Enter the start time of
the interval in the Mission Start Time field and enter the duration of the interval in the Mission Additional Time
field. For example, a system may be estimated to fail 10 times between 100 and 500 operating hours.
Failures by System
Calculates the cumulative number of failures to be expected for each system for a specified interval. The start
time of the interval is equivalent to the time when the observation period for the system ended (indicated by an E
in the folio data sheet). If you did not enter an end time for a system, then the start time of the interval is assumed
to be equal to the last failure time for that system. Enter the duration of the interval in the Mission Additional
Time field and then click Calculate to open the Results window, which shows the cumulative number of failures
for each system, as well as the overall number of failures.
Probability
Conditional Reliability
Calculates the probability of the system successfully completing a mission, given that it may or may not have
successfully completed a previous mission. Enter the start time of the new mission in the Mission Start Time
field and enter the duration of the new mission in the Mission Additional Time field.
For example, a system failed 3 times during its first three years of operation. The probability that the system will
operate for an additional six months without failure, or the conditional reliability for one half of a year given that
the system is three years old, may be 30%.
Conditional Probability of Failure
Calculates the probability that the system will fail a mission, given that it may or may not have successfully
completed a previous mission. Enter the start time of the new mission in the Mission Start Time field and enter
the duration of the new mission in the Mission Additional Time field.
For example, a system failed three times during its first three years of operation. The probability that the system
will fail in the next six months, or the conditional probability of failure for one half of a year given that the system
is three years old, may be 70%.
Note: MTBF is used as a metric for the analysis of repairable components. On the other hand, the term mean time to
failure (MTTF) is used as a metric for non-repairable systems, where components are discarded or replaced upon
failure. To analyze non-repairable system data in Weibull++, use the Weibull++ standard folio.
11.2 Parametric RDA Folio
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 343
11.2.6 Parametric RDA Folio Plots
Weibull++ includes several plot types you can use to visualize the results of your parametric RDA analysis. You can
create plots by choosing Recurrent Event Data > Analysis > Plots or by clicking the icon on the Main page of the
control panel.
The features on the plot sheet are similar to the options available for all other Weibull++ plots. Features that are not
applicable to parametric RDA analysis will be hidden or disabled. To learn how to customize a plot, see Chapter 13.
The following is a description of the plots types that can be created in a parametric RDA folio:
Cumulative Number of Failures plots the failure times in the x-axis and the cumulative number of failures in the
y-axis. The points represent the actual failure times in the data set and the line represents the expected cumulative
number of failures based on a simulation using the calculated model parameters. This gives you an indication of
how the number of failures is increasing over time.
Cumulative Failure Intensity vs. Time plots the average rate of occurrence of failures over a period of time. The
points represent the cumulative failure intensity calculated at each failure time in the data set and the line
represents the cumulative failure intensity based on a simulation using the calculated model parameters. This
shows how the rate of occurrence of failures increases, decreases or remains constant for that period of time.
Instantaneous Failure Intensity vs. Time plots the rate of occurrence of failures over several instances of time.
The line represents the instantaneous failure intensity based on a simulation using the calculated model
parameters. This plot may be used to show how the rate of occurrence of failures has changed at a particular point
in time.
Conditional Reliability vs. Time and Conditional Unreliability vs. Time shows the reliability or probability of
failure over intervals of time. There are two options:
Vary Mission Time shows how the reliability or probability of failure would vary over different mission
times if the system operated at a specific Start Time. The start time is an assumed value for the system age at
the beginning of the mission. For example, a start time = 100 hours means that the origin of the plot
corresponds to a system with a total age of 100 hours after a mission of 0 hours. Therefore, an x-axis value of
500 mission hours on that plot would correspond to a system with a total age of 600 hours after a mission of
500 hours.
Vary Start Time shows how the reliability or probability of failure would vary over different start times if the
system operated within a specific Mission Time. The mission time is an assumed value for additional age a
system will accumulate during the mission. For example, a mission time = 100 hours means that the origin of
the plot corresponds to a system with a total age of 100 hours after a mission of 100 hours. Therefore, an x-
axis value of 500 hours on that plot would correspond to a system with a total age of 600 hours after a mission
of 100 hours.
11 Recurrent Event Data Analysis (RDA) Folios
344 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
11.2.7 Parametric RDA Example
An analyst recorded the successive failures of the air-condition unit of an aircraft. The objective is to obtain the
expected number of failures that may occur by 1,800 hours. The following data sheet shows the failure logs of the
unit between 0 to 1,539 hours of observation. The observation period ended at the time of the last failure.
The first step is to determine which virtual age model provides the best statistical fit for the given data. On the
Main page of the control panel, select 3 for the parameters settings and then calculate the results for each of the
virtual age models. Use the default settings for the simulation.
The LK value for the Type I model is -123.6347 while the LK value for the Type II model is -123.5964.
Therefore, for this data set, the Type II model may provide the best fit (i.e., closer to positive infinity). The
parameters of the Type II GRP model are estimated to be beta = 0.8276, lambda = 0.0389 and q = 0.2758.
11.2 Parametric RDA Folio
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 345
Click the Plot icon to visualize how the number of failures increases over time, as shown next.
Next, predict the number of failures expected to occur by 1,800 hours. Click the QCP icon on the control panel. In
the QCP, choose to calculate the Cumulative Number of Failures with two-sided confidence bounds. Select
Hour for the time units and then make the following inputs:
Mission Start Time: 0
Mission Additional Time: 1800
Confidence Level: 0.9
11 Recurrent Event Data Analysis (RDA) Folios
346 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Click Calculate. The cumulative number of failures in 1,800 hours is 28.4710 or about 28 failures, and the
number may be as high as about 39 failures, as shown next.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 347
Plots are available in standard folios and all specialized folios except the Weibull++ Event Log folio, as well as in
diagrams, in the Non-Linear Equation Fit Solver and in SimuMatic. In all cases, these plots can be viewed by clicking
the Plot icon located on the main page of the control panel. You can also choose Life Data > Analysis > Plot (in the
case of Weibull++ folios), ALTA > Analysis > Plot (in the case of ALTA folios) or Diagrams > Analysis > Plot (in
the case of diagrams).
If you click the Plot icon before the data sheet or diagram has been calculated or analyzed, it will automatically be
calculated or analyzed and then the data will be plotted in the plot sheet. (Note that the Plot icon on the plot tab
control panel refreshes the plot. If the data set has been changed since the data sheet or diagram was last calculated or
analyzed, you must recalculate the data before refreshing the plot.) The status light on the control panel indicates
when the plot is out of sync with the data sheet. You can control which items (lines, points, etc.) are displayed on the
plot via the Show/Hide Plot Items window, which is accessed by choosing Plot > Plot Actions > Show/Hide Plot
Items, except in the case of SimuMatic plots, which have display options on the plot sheet control panel. See Section
12.3 on page 353.
Plots
12
12 Plots
348 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
12.1 Plot Sheet Control Panel
The control panel in the plot sheet allows you to control the options that go along with the plot. The options available
in the control panel vary depending on the type of folio or tool that the plot is associated with. The control panels
shown below are from a Weibull++ standard folio and an ALTA degradation analysis folio, and illustrate most of the
available options, all of which are presented next. A table showing the available options for each folio or tool follows.
Redraw Plot
Updates the plot to reflect the changes that have been made.
Plot Setup
Opens the Plot Setup window, which allows you to customize most aspects of the plot including the titles, line
styles and point styles. See Chapter 13.
Edit Plot with RS Draw
Launches ReliaSoft Draw, which allows you to annotate your plot and view your plot in greater detail. See
Chapter 14.
Side-by-Side Plots
Adds a side-by-side plot to the project, which allows you to view different plots in a single window, and
associates the current folio and data sheet with the side-by-side plot. If no side-by-side plots exist in the
project, selecting this option creates one. Otherwise, a window will appear which allows you to select an
existing side-by-side plot to associate the data sheet with or to create a new one. See Section 12.7 on page 358.
Note: Unless otherwise stated, all options apply to both Weibull++ and ALTA.
12.1 Plot Sheet Control Panel
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 349
QCP
Opens the Quick Calculation Pad (QCP), which allows you to obtain reliability results based on the currently
active folio. For more information about the available QCP options, refer to the specific topic covering the
data sheet type or diagram.
Plot Type allows you to choose the plot type you want to view in the plot sheet from the drop-down menu. This
field also contains an indicator light that displays the status of the plot sheet to the data sheet it is associated with.
If the light is green, then the data sheet has been analyzed. If the light is red, then changes have been made since
the analysis. In these cases, you must first recalculate the associated data sheet, then refresh the plot. For more
information about the available plot types, refer to the specific topic covering the data sheet type or diagram.
Units allows you to choose which units you want the plot to show from the drop-down menu.
Auto Refresh automatically refreshes the plot if any changes are made to the plot.
Keep Aspect Ratio: the proportion of horizontal size to vertical size will remain constant when you resize the
plot. Note that changing this option will also change it in the Page Setup window for the plot. For more
information, see Chapter 28 on page 591.
Logarithmic Axes plots the function on a log-log paper.
Confidence Bounds opens the Confidence Bounds Setup window, which allows you to specify the type of
confidence bounds you would like to show on your plot. See Section 12.2 on page 352.
Target Reliability opens the Set Target Reliability window, as shown below. This window allows you to specify
whether and how the target reliability will be shown on the plot.
Target Reliability Value, % allows you to enter a reliability value in percent for the target point. If the check
box is selected, this value will be displayed on the plot as a horizontal line.
Target time value allows you to enter a time value for the target point. If the check box is selected, this value
will be displayed on the plot as a vertical line.
Marker at the target time/reliability location if selected, the target point (the intersection of the target
reliability value and the target time value) will be circled on the plot.
Life Lines
Opens the Specify Life Lines window, which allows you to enter up to 10 unreliability values for each additional
life line you would like to see plotted on life vs. stress plots. See Section 12.5 on page 355.
Contours Setup
Opens the Contours Setup window, which allows you to select the contour lines to be shown, the confidence
levels represented by the lines and resolution. This option is available only for Contour plots. If an error in
calculating the selected contour lines is encountered, this button will turn red. Use the Contours Setup window to
adjust the settings. See Section 12.4 on page 354.
12 Plots
350 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Adjust MLE points on plot line
This option is available only if the data sheet uses the MLE analysis method. If selected, it adjusts the y-axis
plotting positions so that the data points are plotted directly on the MLE line (i.e., at the position where the failure
time intersects the MLE line). The solution of the MLE line is obtained from the likelihood function and not from
the plotting positions of the points; therefore, this plot setting does not affect the parameter estimates.
Analysis Summary displays calculated results in the Results window. The location of this option varies
depending on the folio you are working with. See Chapter 23.
Set Use Stress
Opens the Use Stress Level window, which allows you to enter a use stress value for the selected stress type. See
page 216 in Chapter 5.
Scaling
X and Y Scaling Boxes shows the minimum and maximum values for the x- and y-axes. You can change
these values if the check box beside the value range is not selected. If it is selected, the application will
automatically choose appropriate values for the range.
Unit IDs allows you to select the Unit ID(s) to be shown on the plot. To refresh the plot to show the currently
selected ID(s), click the Redraw Plot icon. This option is available only for Degradation vs. Time plots in
degradation folios.
Select All selects all the Unit ID(s) to be placed on the plot.
Clear All clears all selected Unit ID(s).
The following table displays the available Weibull++ plot sheet control panel options for each folio or tool.
12.1 Plot Sheet Control Panel
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 351
The following table displays the available ALTA plot sheet control panel options for each folio or tool.
12.1.1 F/S Histogram Options
When you are working with a failures/suspensions histogram plot in Weibull++, the following additional options are
available in the Plot Sheet control panel.
Time Interval allows you to specify the length of the intervals used on the plot.
Select one of the following options:
Probability Density Values to display the probability density of the failures. In addition, the following
additional option will become available.
Select Superimpose pdf to superimpose the probability density function line on the bars.
Failures to plot the failures as raw numbers. In addition, the following additional option will become
available.
Select Show suspensions to display the suspensions on the plot.
12 Plots
352 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
12.2 Setting Confidence Bounds
You can include and specify the confidence bounds on plots associated with standard folios, degradation folios,
warranty analysis folios and parametric RDA folios by choosing Plot > Confidence Bounds > Confidence Bounds.
The Confidence Bounds Setup window will appear, allowing you to define the properties of the confidence bounds
lines to be displayed on the plot.
Sides allows you to specify which lines will be displayed on the plot.
None if selected, confidence bounds will not be displayed on the plot.
Note that you can also remove confidence bounds from your plot by choosing Plot > Confidence Bounds >
Hide Confidence Bounds.
Two-Sided displays two-sided confidence bounds on the plot.
One-Sided displays one-sided confidence bounds on the plot. You can select one type or both types.
Show Top displays the top line for one-sided confidence bounds on the plot.
Show Bottom displays the bottom line for one-sided confidence bounds on the plot.
Type allows you to specify which types of confidence bounds you want displayed on the plot. You can select one
type or both types. Note that not all options are available with every plot.
Time (Type I) displays the confidence bounds on time.
Reliability (Type II) displays the confidence bounds on:
Reliability for Reliability vs. Time plots
Unreliability for Probability plots and Unreliability vs. Time plots
Both displays both types.
Note: Confidence bounds are not available if the data type is free-form data.
12.3 Show/Hide Plot Items Window
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 353
Bounds On
Allows you to select to display confidence bounds on the scale parameter, mean line or both. This option is
available only for the life vs. stress plot type.
Confidence Level % allows you to set the percentage for the confidence bounds.
Resolution allows you to specify the resolution of the confidence bounds lines on the plot by dragging the slider
or, for fine adjustments, clicking the slider and then using the arrow keys. The number of points plotted to create
the lines is displayed beside the field name.
12.3 Show/Hide Plot Items Window
For all plot sheets except those associated with SimuMatic, the Show/Hide Plot Items window allows you to select
the data you want displayed on the plot. The appearance of this window will vary depending on the plot type and the
data type used, but it will function in the same way regardless.
Subset displays the available data sheets and/or plot items.
Name displays each item (e.g., data points, function line, contour, etc.) available for display on the plot.
Points/Line/Bars/Slices allows you to select how the values for the item are displayed (e.g., remove certain slices
from a pie chart, choose to display intervals using points, lines or both, etc.). Clicking the header of this column
will toggle between selecting all options in the column and clearing all options in the column.
Other
Target Reliability if the target reliability option is available for the plot, the following options allow you to
choose how it will be displayed.
H-Line displays the horizontal line through the target reliability value.
V-Line displays the vertical line through the target reliability value.
Point displays the target reliability value as a point.
Probability Scales displays the probability scales on the plot.
Bars encloses the probability scales in bars.
Legends, Header and Footer
Legends displays all legends on the plot.
Titles displays the Header and Footer titles on the plot.
12 Plots
354 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
12.4 Contour Plots
Contour Plots are available only for the 2 and 3-parameter Weibull, normal and lognormal distributions in
Weibull++. The first time you select Contour Plot in a plot sheet from the Plot Type drop-down list, the Contour
Setup window will appear. This window allows you to select the contour lines to be shown, the confidence levels
represented by the lines and the resolution used to draw the lines.
To select which contour lines you want to appear on the plot, select the box next to the corresponding level. Enter the
percent level in the associated field. To change the level of detail at which the contours are plotted (and the
smoothness of the lines), adjust the Resolution slider. You can click and drag the slider or, for fine adjustments, click
the slider and then use the arrow keys. The number of points plotted to create the lines is displayed beside the field
name. Note that higher resolutions will take longer to plot.
When using an overlay plot with only two data sheets selected, you can select the Plot Critical Level option, which
will display the contour line at the exact level where the two plots intersect.
If an error in calculating the selected contour lines is encountered, the Contour Setup window will expand to include
an error notification at the bottom of the window. In addition, the Contours Setup link on the plot sheet control panel
will turn red.
12.4.1 Comparing Data Sets
In Weibull++, contour plots are typically used to compare data sets. For two contour plots that are superimposed in an
overlay plot, the Plot Critical Level check box will be available. This allows you to calculate and display the
minimum confidence level at which the two contour plots intersect. At any confidence level below the critical level,
the contour plots will not overlap and there will be a statistically significant difference between the data sets at those
levels.
The following example shows two contour plots in an overlay plot. The solid contour lines represent the 90%
confidence level while the dashed contour lines represent the critical confidence level, which is calculated to be
12.5 Specifying Life Lines
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 355
94.243%. (The appearance of the lines at the critical level were modified via the Plot Setup to make the plot easier to
interpret.) Note that due to the calculation resolution and plot precision, the contour lines at the calculated critical
level may appear to overlap or have a gap.
12.5 Specifying Life Lines
You can specify additional life lines to be plotted on life vs. stress plots in ALTA by clicking the Life Lines link on
the plot sheet control panel. The Specify Life Lines window will open.
This window allows you to define up to ten additional life lines to be shown on life vs. stress plots. For each life line,
enter the unreliability value. You can enter values manually or use the up and down arrows beside each field to
increase/decrease the value. You can keep previously entered values without plotting them by simply clearing the
appropriate check boxes. You can select to show or hide confidence bounds for each life line.
12 Plots
356 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
To use your current settings by default on life vs. stress plots, click the Set As Default button. You can reset these
settings by clicking Reset Application Settings on the Reset Settings page of the Application Setup. See page 613 in
Chapter 29.
12.6 Overlay Plots
The software gives you the ability to place more than one data sheet on a plot using an overlay plot. Data may come
from standard folios, warranty analysis folios or degradation folios. (Note that you can include parametric RDA
folios in an overlay plot but only with other parametric RDA folios.) To add an overlay plot to a project, choose
Insert > Reports and Plots > Overlay Plot.
When you add a new, blank overlay plot to a project, you must first select the data sheets in the Select Data Sheets
window and select which plots you want to include. Many of the functions in an overlay plot are similar to those in a
standard plot. The Overlay Plot is shown below and presented next.
Whats Changed? In previous versions of the software, overlay plots were known as MultiPlots.
12.6 Overlay Plots
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 357
12.6.1 Plot Types
The following plot types are available in an Overlay Plot.
You can include Weibull++ data sheets and ALTA data sheets in the same overlay plot. This can useful, for example,
if you have created a prediction data sheet in ALTA and you have the real data in a Weibull++ data sheet and you
want to compare how the predicted values match up to the real life data.
Weibull++ Data Sheets Only ALTA Data Sheets Only Weibull++ and ALTA Data Sheets
Standard folios, Warranty Analysis
folios or degradation folios
Probability plot*
Reliability vs. Time
Unreliability vs. Time
Pdf plot
Failure Rate vs. Time
Contour plot*
Use Level Probability*
Probability*
Reliability vs. Time
Unreliability vs. Time
Pdf Plot
Failure Rate vs. Time
Life vs. Stress*
Std vs. Stress*
AF vs. Stress*
Standardized Residuals*
Cox-Snell Residuals
Standard vs. Fitted Value*
Use Level Probability*
Probability*
Reliability vs. Time
Unreliability vs. Time
Pdf Plot
Failure Rate vs. Time
Parametric RDA folios
Cumulative Number of Failures
Cumulative Failure Intensity vs.
time
Instantaneous Failure Intensity
vs. Time
Conditional Reliability vs. Time
Conditional Unreliability vs.
Time
* All data sets must be calculated using the same distribution for these plots to be available; otherwise these plots
are not available.
12 Plots
358 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
12.6.2 Overlay Plot Control Panel
The control panel in the overlay plot is similar to the control panel in standard plots. See Section 12.1 on page 348.
However, the control panel in the overlay plot allows you to select multiple data sets to be displayed in a single plot.
Select Data Sheets opens a window that allows you to select calculated data sets from any standard folio or any
warranty analysis folio in the project for inclusion in the overlay plot. Data from warranty analysis folios can be
broken down by subset. The data sets selected for inclusion will be displayed in the area below. To remove a data
set from the plot, click Select Data Sheets and clear the data sheet's check box.
12.7 Side-by-Side Plots
Side-by-side plots allow you to view different plots at a time in a single window. To add a side-by-side plot to a
project, choose Insert > Reports and Plots > Side-by-Side Plot or click the Side-by-Side Plot icon on the control
panel of the folio plot sheet.
When you add a new, blank side-by-side plot to a project, you will use the Select Data Sheets window to select the
specific data sheet.
When you add a side-by-side plot from any standard folio, warranty folio or degradation folio plot sheet, it uses the
data from the current data sheet. All plot properties are set to the default settings.
For Weibull++, with side-by-side plots, you can select up to eleven different distributions
or nine different plot types to view at once. To view a single plot in greater detail, double-
click the plot to display only that plot in the window. Double-click the plot again to return the window to the side-by-
12.7 Side-by-Side Plots
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 359
side view. Any changes you make in the Plot Setup window, except for changes to titles, will apply to all plots in the
side-by-side plot. The Side-by-Side Plot window and its components are presented next.
For ALTA, with side-by-side plots, you can choose to view multiple plot types, multiple
distributions or multiple life-stress models. There are twelve different plot types and three
different distributions from which to choose in both ALTA Standard and ALTA PRO. There are five different models
from which to choose in ALTA Standard and nine different models in ALTA PRO. To view a single plot in greater
detail, double-click the plot to display only that plot in the window. Double-click the plot again to return the window
to the side-by-side view. Any changes you make in the Plot Setup window, except for changes to titles, will apply to
all plots in the side-by-side plot. The Side-by-Side Plot window and its components are presented next.
12 Plots
360 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
12.7.1 Side-by-Side Plots Control Panel
The control panel in a side-by-side plot shares several options with the control panel in standard plots. In addition, the
control panel in the side-by-side plot allows you to select multiple plots to be displayed in a single window.
The appearance of the side-by-side plot control panel with a Weibull++ folio varies depending on whether you
choose to vary plot types or distributions. The options available in each case are presented next.
12.7 Side-by-Side Plots
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 361
The appearance of the side-by-side plot control panel with an ALTA folio varies depending on whether you choose to
vary plot types, distributions or models. The options available in each case are presented next.
Associate Data Sheet opens the Select Data Sheets window, which allows you to select the data set to be
associated with the side-by-side plot.
Weibull++ options:
Vary allows you to select whether to display multiple plot types or multiple distributions. The options
available below depend on your selection for this option. (Note that for degradation and warranty folios, the
plots are based on the standard data set created from the folio.)
If you select to vary plot types, the Plot Types area allows you to select up to nine plot types to be
displayed in the side-by-side plot. All will be plotted using the distribution currently used in the data sheet.
If you select to vary distributions, the Plot Type area allows you to select one plot type to be displayed in
the side-by-side plot. The Distributions area allows you to select up to eleven distributions to be displayed
in the side-by-side plot, in the selected plot type. Note that regardless of your choices, the side-by-side plot
will display only those distributions that can be successfully calculated and you will receive error
messages for any unsuccessful calculations.
ALTA options:
Vary allows you to select whether to display multiple plot types, multiple distributions or multiple models.
The options available below depend on your selection for this option. (Note that for degradation folios, the
plots are based on the standard data set created from the folio.)
If you select to vary plot types, the Plot Types area allows you to select up to twelve plot types to be
displayed in the side-by-side plot. All will be plotted using the distribution and model currently used in the
data sheet.
If you select to vary distributions, the Plot Type area allows you to select one plot type to be displayed in
the side-by-side plot. The Distributions area allows you to select up to three distributions to be displayed
in the side-by-side plot, in the selected plot type. Note that regardless of your choices, the side-by-side plot
will display only those distributions that can be successfully calculated and you will receive error
12 Plots
362 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
messages for any unsuccessful calculations. All will be plotted using the model currently used in the data
sheet.
If you select to vary models, the Plot Type area allows you to select one plot type to be displayed in the
side-by-side plot. The Models area allows you to select up to five models (or, in ALTA PRO, nine models)
to be displayed in the side-by-side plot, in the selected plot type. Note that regardless of your choices, the
side-by-side plot will display only those models that can be successfully calculated and you will receive
error messages for any unsuccessful calculations. All will be plotted using the distribution currently used
in the data sheet.
Associated Data Sheet displays the folio and, for standard folios, the data sheet that is associated with the side-
by-side plot. Click the folio name to open it.
12.8 Tips on Working with Plots
There are several additional commands that you can use when you are working with plots.
To show the coordinates of any location on the plot, press SHIFT and click in the plot. A box displaying the
coordinates of the selected location will appear, as shown next.
You can release the SHIFT key once the coordinates are displayed. The coordinates will continue to be displayed
as long as you hold down the mouse button. You can move the cursor around in the plot and the coordinates will
change to reflect its current location.
If the cursor is on a plot line (e.g., the probability line, confidence bounds, etc.), pressing SHIFT and clicking the
line will track the line when you move the cursor. A crosshair will be displayed showing the current location on
the line. As you move the cursor left or right, the crosshair will mirror the movement but will stay on the line and
the current coordinates on the line will be displayed (i.e., Y is calculated based on X), as shown next.
Pressing CTRL+SHIFT and clicking the line does the same thing, but X is calculated based on Y.
To add a custom label to the plot, press CTRL and click in the plot. A new label will appear in the plot, as shown
next.
The yellow box at the upper left corner of the label indicates that the label is selected. When the label is selected,
you can edit the label text directly in the plot and can also click the box and drag it to a new location, if desired.
12.9 Override Plot Color
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 363
Clicking elsewhere in the plot will de-select the label. Double-click the label to open the Edit Label window, as
shown next.
In the Edit Label window, you can specify the text for the label. Clicking Set Font opens the Font window, which
allows you to specify the font, size, style, color and orientation used for the label.
Custom labels, including the coordinate labels presented next, are not available in side-by-side plots.
To add a label that displays coordinates to the plot, position the cursor at the location you want labeled then press
CTRL+ALT and click the location. A coordinate label will be added to the plot, as shown next.
Note that a coordinates label includes a < sign pointing to the location that the coordinates refer to.
Pressing ALT and clicking a plotted line or point will open a window like the one shown next.
You can choose to bring the line to the front or send it to the back. If you have clicked a point, this window will
enable you to bring the group of points to the front or send them to the back. This feature is useful in cases where
lines or points are obscuring one another.
You can click any plot element (i.e., point, line, etc.) to open the Plot Setup window. The cursor will change from
an arrow to a pointing hand when you hover over an element for which this is possible. Note that the element you
clicked is automatically selected on the Plot Items page of the Plot Setup. See page 380 in Chapter 13.
12.9 Override Plot Color
The Override Plot Color setting allows you to ignore the default colors of the plotted line and points, and apply a
color that you specify. This setting is activated in the source data sheet of the plot. This means that when you enable
the setting for a particular data sheet, it applies only to the plots that you create for that data sheet and not the plots for
all other data sheets that may be within the same folio.
To enable the setting, choose [Data/ALTA/Degradation] > Format and View > Override Plot Color.
12 Plots
364 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
This opens the Override Plot Color window, as shown next.
When you select the override setting, only the colors of the lines and points are affected. Other settings such as the
line style and thickness, or the point size and shape are based on the settings that you have specified in the Plot Items
page of the Plot Setup window. See page 380 in Chapter 13.
12.10 3D Plot
For standard folios, ReliaSofts 3D Plot utility allows you to visualize 3-dimensional functions, such as a surface plot
of the likelihood function. You can rotate the plot both vertically and horizontally to examine it from any angle.
In Weibull++, the 3D plot is a surface plot of the likelihood function. It plots the likelihood values (LK values)
with respect to the estimated parameters of a distribution. The shape of the plot may help you to evaluate the
amount of variability in the parameter estimates. A small surface (tall, tower-like peak) suggests that there is less
uncertainty in the parameter estimates at the maximum LK value, while a large surface suggests that there is a
large uncertainty in the parameter estimates. You can create a 3D plot of the likelihood function for any of the
available distributions in Weibull++ except for 1-parameter Weibull, mixed Weibull, Bayesian-Weibull or
Weibull using competing failure modes distribution.
To create a 3D Plot for a Weibull++ folio, choose Life Data > Analysis > 3D Plot.
In ALTA, the 3D plot provides a choice of several functions that you can plot with respect to time and stress, in
addition to the likelihood function plot. This includes the pdf, failure rate, reliability and unreliability functions.
The shape of the plot may help you to evaluate how the function is influenced by time and stress.
To create a 3D Plot for an ALTA folio, choose ALTA > Analysis > 3D Plot.
12.10 3D Plot
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 365
The ALTA version of the 3D Plot window is shown below and its components are explained next.
12.10.1 3D Plot Control Panel
The 3D Plot window contains a contains a control panel, which allows you to customize the axes of the plot. The
Weibull++ control panel is shown below to the left and the ALTA control panel is shown below to the right. The
respective components are explained next.
12 Plots
366 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Plot Type
Select which plot type you want to view in the 3D plot sheet from the drop-down list. The available 3D plots
include the likelihood function plot, the pdf plot, the failure rate plot, the reliability plot and the unreliability plot.
Chart Information allows you to customize the resolution, elevation and rotation of the plot.
Number of points sets the resolution for the plot. You must have at least 10 points; however, 40 or more
points will result in a slow re-draw.
Elevation measures the rotation in degrees (0-90) about the vertical plane.
Rotation measures the rotation in degrees (0-360) about the horizontal plane.
Axis Parameters
Allows you to select the parameters that you want the x-axis and the z-axis to represent and to modify the starting
and ending values of the axes. The parameters available in the drop-down box will depend on the distribution
used to calculate the parameters in the current data sheet.
Start shows the low (starting) value on the axis.
End shows the high (ending) value on the axis.
Axes
Allows you to modify the starting and ending values of the plot. The starting and ending values of the axes that
appear here will depend on the distribution used to calculate the parameters.
Start shows the low (starting) value on the axis.
End shows the high (ending) value on the axis.
For Weibull++ folios, the following table shows the possible values for each of the distributions.
12.10.2 Rotating the Chart
The software provides two methods for rotating the chart picture. You can:
Enter exact values in the Elevation and/or Rotation fields on the control panel.
or
Distribution Values
Weibull Beta, Eta
Normal Mean, Std
Lognormal Log-Mean, Log-Std
Exponential Lambda, Gamma
G-Gamma Mean, Std
Gamma Log-Mean, Log-Std
Logistic Log-Mean, Log-Std
Loglogistic Log-Mean, Log-Std
Gumbel Log-Mean, Log-Std
12.10 3D Plot
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 367
Hold down the CTRL key and point to the plot area will change the pointer to a four-headed arrow, . When
the pointer looks like this, clicking in the plot area will cause a transparent outline of the plot area to be displayed.
You can drag this outline to change the rotation (i.e., the horizontal viewing angle) and/or the elevation (i.e., the
vertical viewing angle) of the plot. The Elevation and/or Rotation fields on the control panel will be updated
with the new values when you release the pointer.
12.10.3 Alter Parameters - 3D Plot
While working on a 3D Plot, you can choose Alter Parameters to open the Alter Parameters window and change the
settings. This allows you to experiment or visualize different solutions on the current data set. The altered
parameter(s) are not saved in the folio when you close the 3D Plot window.
12.10.4 Saving and Opening Saved 3D Plots
Saving an image
You can save an image by choosing Save As and saving the file in one of four formats: as a 3D Graphic file
(*.rlg), as a Windows metafile (*.wmf), as a JPEG file (*.jpeg) or as a bitmap file (*.bmp). If you save the file a
*.wmf, *.jpeg or *.bmp you can then use the file in other applications. If you save the file as a *.rlg you can open
it in the 3D Plot Viewer window at a later time.
Opening an image
You can open an image by choosing Open and selecting an existing *.rlg file.
Changing the chart settings
You can change the chart settings in two ways. The chart settings include the placement of the titles and legends,
the appearance of the axes and data used to create the chart.
Choose Show Chart Designer to open the Chart Designer window and change the charts properties. See
Chapter 15.
Choose Edit Chart Data to open the Edit Chart Data window in the Chart Designer window, which allows
you to modify the data, rows, columns and labels in the data grid of the chart.
12.10.5 3D Plot Ribbon
12.10.5.1 File
Open
Opens a previously saved 3D Graphic file (*.rlg).
Save As
Saves the current plot with a new filename. The plot can be saved as a 3D Graphic file (*.rlg), as a Windows
metafile (*.wmf), as a JPEG file (*.jpeg) or as a bitmap file (*.bmp).
Save Default View Style sets the current plot settings as the default settings. Each time 3D Plot is opened, the
plot will be viewed in this setting.
Note: While you can open an *.rlg file that was created in another folio, you should only change the Elevation and
Rotation values either manually or by using the pointer. If you change any other value the plot will refresh and show
the values based on the current data sheet, not the saved plots values.
12 Plots
368 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Restore RS Default View Style restores the plot settings back to the original settings when the application
was installed.
12.10.5.2 Edit
Copy
Copies the current plot to the Clipboard as a Windows metafile (*.wmf). How the plot is copied depends on
your selection of one of the following options:
Paste
Takes a graphic in Windows bitmap (*.bmp) or Windows metafile (*.wmf) format from the Clipboard and
places it in the selected elements backdrop or fill.
Page Setup
Allows you to specify printing options. See page 591 in Chapter 28.
Print Preview
Allows you to preview the plot before it is sent to the printer. See page 595 in Chapter 28.
Print Plot
Opens the Graphic Print window, which allows you to send current plot to the printer.
12.10.5.3 Actions
Redraw Plot
Re-draws the plot to reflect the current display specifications.
Alter Parameters
Opens the Alter Parameters window and change the settings. This allows you to experiment or visualize
different solutions on the current data set. The altered parameters are not saved in the folio when you close the
3D Plot window.
Show Chart Designer
Opens open the Chart Designer window, which allows you to modify various elements of the plot. See
Chapter 15.
Edit Chart Data
Opens the Edit Chart Data window in the Chart Designer window, which allows you to modify the data, rows,
columns and labels in the data grid of the selected chart.
12.10 3D Plot
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 369
12.10.6 3D Plot Quick Access Toolbar
Open
Opens a previously saved 3D Graphic file (*.rlg).
Save As - 3D Plot
Saves the current plot as a 3D Graphic file (*.rlg), as a Windows metafile (*.wmf), as a JPEG file (*.jpeg) or
as a bitmap file (*.bmp). You can also click the drop-down arrow to either save the current view as the default
view style or restore the plot settings back to the original settings when the application was installed.
Print
Sends the current document to the printer.
Redraw Plot - 3D Plot
Redraws the plot to reflect the current display specifications.
Alter Parameters - 3D Plot Toolbar
Opens the Alter Parameters window and change the settings. This allows you to experiment or visualize
different solutions on the current data set. The altered parameter(s) are not saved in the folio when you close
the 3D Plot window
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 371
The software allows you to customize plots to meet your needs. Depending on the size and resolution of your
monitor, you may find that different setups work better for you or you may simply prefer settings other than those
shipped with the application. The Plot Setup window gives you full control over the settings used both for individual
plots and the default settings for all new plots.
Open the Plot Setup window by clicking the Plot Setup icon on the Plot control panel.
In addition, clicking an element (e.g., point, line, etc.) in the plot will open the Plot Setup window.
Each time you open the Plot Setup window, the changes that you make will apply only to the current plot unless you
specify otherwise. To specify settings to be used as defaults for all subsequent plots or to re-apply default settings to
the current plot, click the Defaults button to open the Plot Defaults window.
For your reference, the following shows a plot with its components labeled.
You can change these settings on the pages of the Plot Setup window.
Plot Setup
13
13 Plot Setup
372 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The available pages and the options on those pages will vary slightly depending on the plot style that you are working
with.
Specifying Plot Titles - Section 13.1 (p. 372)
Specifying Axis Titles/Labels - Section 13.2 (p. 373)
Customizing Plot Labels - Section 13.3 (p. 374)
Customizing the Plot Legend - Section 13.4 (p. 375)
Customizing the Canvas - Section 13.5 (p. 376)
Defining the Grid settings - Section 13.6 (p. 377)
Defining the Bars settings - Section 13.7 (p. 378)
Defining the Slice settings - Section 13.8 (p. 379)
Customizing Plot items - Section 13.9 (p. 380)
Setting the Canvas Offsets - Section 13.10 (p. 381)
13.1 Plot Titles Page
The Plot Titles page, as shown next, allows you to define the main, header and footer titles used in the plot and to
change the text font and color.
Select or clear the Show check box to determine whether the title will be shown on the plot. Click the Set Font button
next to the corresponding input box to open the Font window, which allows you to set the font type, style, size, color
and text orientation.
Each asterisk (*) represents the default title text. For the main title, this is defined on the Titles Text page of the Plot
Defaults window. See Section 13.11.1 on page 384. If you type new text in an input box, either alone or in addition to
the asterisk, the text you type will be displayed on the plot. For example, if you add (Helicopter) to the Main Title
field, the default main title will be displayed, followed by (Helicopter). The changes you make will be applied
regardless of plot type, so the main title of a Reliability vs Time plot would then be Reliability vs Time (Helicopter)
and the main title of a Contour plot would be Contour Plot (Helicopter). (This assumes that you have not changed
the default main titles from the ones shipped with the application.)
13.2 Axis Titles/Labels Page
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 373
You can use the ENTER key to add additional lines to the header title and the footer title.
To add an image file to the header title or footer title, click Select Image then browse for the file you want to include.
Click Open. (You can select an image that uses one of the following formats: *.bmp, *.gif, *.jpg, *.jpeg, or *.ico.)
The selected image appears next to the Select Image button. The image will also appear at the left side of the header
or footer text. To remove the image, click Clear Image.
13.2 Axis Titles/Labels Page
The Axis Titles/Labels page allows you to define the information used with the x-axis and y-axis, including the titles,
axis labels and the numbers displayed in the axis labels. This page is not available when you are working with a pie
chart.
The options on this page will vary depending on the plot style you are working with.
Axis Titles
Select or clear the Show check box to determine whether the title will be shown on the plot. Click the Set
Font button next to the corresponding input box to open the Font window, which allows you to set the font
type, style, size, color and orientation of the text.
Each asterisk (*) represents the default title text. If you type new text in an input box, either alone or in addition to
the asterisk, the text you type will be displayed on the plot. For example, if you add (Hours) to the Y-Axis Title
field, the default y-axis title will be displayed, followed by (Hours). The changes you make will be applied
regardless of plot type, so the y-axis title of a Reliability vs. Time plot would then be Reliability, R(t) = F(t)
(Hours) and the y-axis title of a Pdf plot would be f(t) (Hours). (This assumes that you have not changed the
default axis titles from the ones shipped with the application.)
Axis Labels
Axis Labels options, when selected, displays the numerical labels for the x-axis and/or the y-axis in the plot.
Click the Set Font button next to the corresponding option to open the Font window, which allows you to set the
font type, style, size, color and orientation of the text.
Numbers in Axis Labels allows you to set the mathematical precision (number of decimal places) and scientific
tolerance (the order of magnitude [base 10] at which numbers will be converted to normalized scientific notation).
13 Plot Setup
374 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
For example, a scientific tolerance of 3 means that all numbers with a value of 1,000 or more will be converted to
normalized scientific notation (e.g., 1.0E +3).
13.3 Plot Labels Page
The Plot Labels page allows you to customize the labels for items (e.g., bars. slices, points) shown in the plot as well
as for custom labels used in the plot.
The options on this page will vary depending on the plot style you are working with. The image above shows the
options for a bar chart. All available options are presented below.
Bar Labels (available only for bar charts)
To display the y-axis value of each bar with the bar, select the Show Bar Labels check box. (You can set the
bar style using the Bar Orientation field on the Bars page of the Plot Setup. See Section 13.7 on page 378.)
Show Bar Labels Even if Zero if selected, a label of 0, conforming to the Y-axis math precision value
specified on the Axis Titles/Labels page, will be displayed for intervals with a y-axis value of zero.
Point Labels (available only for line plots)
To display the coordinates for each point at the lower right of the point, select the Show Point Coordinates
check box. If this option is not selected, you can still display the coordinates for each point in a pop-up box by
pointing to the point.
To display the point label in the same color as the border of the point itself, select the Use Point Border Color
check box.
Slice Labels (available only for pie charts)
To label the slices of the pie chart according to the components they represent, select the Show Slice Labels
check box.
Note: When you are working with a bar chart, the Numbers in Axis Labels area will contain settings for only the axis
representing the dependent variable. This is affected by the orientation of your bar chart; if you are using vertical bars,
this area will contain settings for the y-axis, and if you are using horizontal bars, it will contain settings for the x-axis. It
is important to be aware that the settings for one axis will not transfer to the other axis when you change the bar
orientation. You will need to return to this page and re-enter the settings.
13.4 Legend Page
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 375
To label the slices of the pie chart with the percentage of the whole that they represent, select the Show Slice
Size check box.
Custom Plot Labels allows you to control the appearance of custom plot labels. You can add custom labels to
your plot by pressing CTRL and clicking the plot. See page 362 in Chapter 12.
Delete Labels deletes all custom labels on the plot.
Reset Labels immediately resets all custom labels on the plot to use the settings specified via the Set Font
button. This allows you to apply the settings to existing custom labels rather than just new labels created after
changing the settings.
Bar Label Position (available only for bar charts) allows you to specify whether you want the bar labels located
within the bars or outside of the bars.
For all labels, you can click the Set Font button in the section to open the Font window, which allows you to set the
font type, style, size and color for labels of that type.
13.4 Legend Page
The Legend page allows you to customize the display of the legend on the current plot.
The options on this page will vary depending on the plot style you are working with. The image above shows the
options for a pie chart. All available options are presented below.
To display the legend on the plot, select the Show Legend check box.
To include on the legend a color definition for each point/line/bar/slice shown in the plot, select the Show Plot
Items check box.
To include lines above and below the legend and the user information, select the Show Legend Border check
box. Use the options to the right to modify the appearance of the border. To change the color of the border,
click the Color box to the left of the Thickness box. Adjust the thickness of the border by entering a positive
integer in the input box. Change the style of the line (e.g., solid, dashed, etc.) by clicking the Line Style box to
the right of the Color box.
To display the text of the legend in the same color as the lines, points, bars and/or slices on the plot, select the
Use Item Color check box. If not selected, the text will be red.
13 Plot Setup
376 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Show Analysis Information if selected, the legend will display information about the analysis shown on the
plot, including the data source and/or the settings used in the calculation, if applicable.
To display the plot description (including the plot type) on the plot, select the Show Plot Description check
box.
To show the user display name, company and the date and time the plot was generated on the plot, select the
Show User Information check box. (You set the display name and company using the User Login and
Contact Information Window. See page 40 in Chapter 2.)
The legend area allows you to specify the amount of space used for the legend.
Fixed Legend Width if selected, the legend will remain the same size regardless of the information it
contains. You can set the percentage of the canvas width that the legend will occupy.
Maximum Legend Width if selected, the legend will automatically recalculate its width based on the
information it contains. You can set the maximum percentage of the canvas area that the legend will occupy.
Click the Set Font button next to the corresponding option to open the Font window, which allows you to set the font
type, style, size and color of the text.
13.5 Canvas Page
The Canvas page allows you to customize the color, style and thickness of the plot borders and title lines, along with
the appearance of the rest of the plot sheet.
Plot Canvas and Area
Canvas Back Color allows you to choose the color for the area outside the plot (i.e., the area containing the
titles, labels, legend, etc.).
Canvas Border allows you to determine if the border around the plot field will be displayed and, if so, to set
the color.
Plot Area Back Color allows you to choose the color for the plot background.
Plot Area Border Lines allows you to hide or show each of the specified lines, as well as to choose a color, a
thickness and a style for each. The borders referred to in this area are the borders of the plot area itself (i.e., the
bottom border is the x-axis, etc.).
13.6 Grid Page
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 377
To show or hide a line, select or clear the associated check box.
To change the color of any of the lines, click the Color field. The drop-down list that appears allows you to
choose from custom colors, web-safe colors or the colors used in the current Windows system settings. You
can add colors to the Custom page by right-clicking one of the color boxes in the bottom two rows.
You can adjust the thickness of a line by entering a positive integer in the input box. A value of 1 will draw the
thinnest possible line and other values such as 2, 3, etc. will draw thicker lines. Note that the size of the
thinnest possible line is dependent upon your screen resolution.
In addition, you can change the style of each line by clicking the Line Style box to the right of the Thickness
box. A list providing line style options (e.g., solid, dashed, etc.) will appear. Choose the line style you want
and it will appear in the Line Style box.
To highlight each object (i.e., point, line, bar or slice) on the plot as you point to it, select the Highlight Selected
Plot Item check box. When an object is active, you can click it to open the Plot Setup window and edit the
properties specific to that object. The remaining options in this area are available only if this option is selected.
Fill Color allows you to specify a foreground color to be used on the highlighted active object.
Back Color allows you to specify a background color to be used on the highlighted active object. This color is
not used if the selected fill style does not use a background color (i.e., solid or transparent fill style).
Fill Style allows you to select a style of hatching to be used on the highlighted active object.
13.6 Grid Page
The Grid page allows you to customize the color, style and thickness of the grid lines and to set the number of axis
divisions used. This page is not available when you are working with a pie chart.
The options on this page will vary depending on the plot style you are working with. The image above shows the
options for a line plot. All available options are presented below.
Axis Divisions Lines allows you to hide or show each of the axis division lines, as well as to choose a color, a
thickness and a style for each.
To show or hide a line, select or clear the associated check box.
13 Plot Setup
378 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
To change the color of any of the grid lines, click the Color box. The drop-down that appears allows you to
choose from custom colors, web-safe colors or the colors used in the current Windows system settings. You
can add colors to the Custom page by right-clicking one of the color boxes in the bottom two rows.
You can adjust the thickness of a grid line by entering a positive integer in the input box. A value of 1 will
draw the thinnest possible line and other values such as 2, 3, etc. will draw thicker lines. Note that the size of
the thinnest possible line is dependent upon your screen resolution.
In addition, you can change the style of each line by clicking the Line Style box to the right of the thickness
box. A list providing line style options (e.g., solid, dashed, etc.) will appear. Choose the line style you want
and it will appear in the Line Style box.
Number of Axis Divisions allows you to set the number of major and minor divisions for each axis.
13.7 Bars Page
The Bars page allows you to customize the appearance of the bars in the plot. This page is available only when you
are working with a bar chart.
Bar Border Lines allows you to hide or show the border line for the bars, as well as to select a color, a thickness
and a style for the border.
Bar Orientation allows you to select how you want the plot laid out. You can choose to use vertical bars or
horizontal bars.
Note: When you are working with a bar chart, the Grid page will contain settings for only the axis representing the
dependent variable. This is affected by the orientation of your bar chart; if you are using vertical bars, this area will
contain settings for the y-axis, and if you are using horizontal bars, it will contain settings for the x-axis. It is important
to be aware that the settings for one axis will not transfer to the other axis when you change the bar orientation. You
will need to return to this page and re-enter the settings.
13.8 Slices Page
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 379
13.8 Slices Page
The Slices page allows you to customize the appearance of the slices in the plot. This page is available only when you
are working with a pie chart.
Pie Settings
Rank if selected, you can specify the ranking of the slices that you want to view. For example, entering 5 will
cause only the five largest slices to be shown in the plot.
Threshold if selected, you can specify a minimum size (in percentage of the whole) for the slices that you
want to view. For example, entering 0.1 will cause only slices accounting for ten percent or more of the whole
to be shown in the plot.
Show Remaining Slices as Other if selected, all remaining slices that do not meet the rank or threshold
criterion specified will be shown in the plot as other. This option is available only if you have specified a
rank, a threshold or both.
Other Slice Color allows you to choose the color used to represent other slices. This option is available
only if you have selected the Show Remaining Slices as Other option.
Slice Border Lines allows you to hide or show the border line for the slices, as well as to select a color, a
thickness and a style for the border.
Chart Type allows you to select how you want the plot laid out. You can choose to use an area chart (blocks),
cake chart (layers) or pie chart (wedges).
Numbers in Slice Labels allows you to set the number of decimal places to be displayed in slice labels.
13 Plot Setup
380 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
13.9 Plot Items Page
The Plot Items page allows you to specify details of the appearance of the points, lines, bars and/or slices on the plot.
The options available on this page will vary depending on the plot style that you are currently working with. The
image above shows the options for a line plot.
The following options are available for all plot styles:
Choose an Item to Configure allows you to choose which plot element the settings on this page apply to.
Show allows you to select whether or not the plot element you currently chose to configure will be shown on the
plot. Depending on the plot style that you are currently working with, you may select to show the bars, slice, line
and/or points. This option is not available for all plots.
For bar charts and pie charts, the following option applies.
Area Fill Color and Style allows you to specify the appearance of the bar or slice representing the selected item.
To change the color of the bar or slice, click the Color box. You can select a fill style from the drop-down list.
For line plots, the following options apply:
Line Settings allows you to specify the appearance of the line representing the selected item. To change the color
of the line, click the Color box. You can adjust the thickness of a grid line by entering a positive integer in the
input box. Adjust the thickness of the line by entering a positive integer in the input box. Change the style of each
line such as solid, dashed, etc., by clicking the Line Style box.
Point Settings
Color, Shape, Size and Fill allows you to specify the appearance of the point body. To change the color of the
point, click the Color box. You can select a point shape from the drop-down list, select the size of the point
(with 1 being the smallest point) and select a fill style from the drop-down list.
Border Color, Thickness and Style allows you to modify the appearance of the border of the points. To
change the color of the border, click the Color box. Adjust the thickness of the border by entering a positive
13.10 Offsets Page
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 381
integer in the input box. Change the style of each line such as solid, dashed, etc., by clicking the Line Style
box.
Certain point shapes are drawn using only the border color. These include minus, pike, plus and x-cross.
13.10 Offsets Page
The Offsets page allows you to specify the distance of various components from the edge of the plot area.
Automatically calculate positions from edges of plot sheet if selected, automatically calculates the offsets for
maximum plot display and readability. If not selected, you can manually specify the offsets of the plots left, right, top
and bottom edges; the offset of the legend from the right edge of the plot area; and the offset of the main, x-axis, y-
axis, header and footer titles. The offset values are set as a percentage of the canvas area.
13 Plot Setup
382 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The following picture shows which plot elements are affected by each of the offset settings:
13.11 Plot Defaults Window
Each time you open the Plot Setup window, the changes that you make will apply only to the current plot unless you
specify otherwise. To specify settings to be used as defaults for all subsequent plots or to re-apply default settings to
the current plot, click the Defaults button to open the Plot Defaults window.
The Plot Defaults window gives you the flexibility to set the default settings for the three main areas of a plot: the plot
titles, the plot item settings and the general display areas. You can choose to separately save, load or restore the
default settings of each main area or you can set the default settings for all areas at once.
The Plot Defaults window consists of nine pages:
All Defaults page. This page controls the settings for all the other plot setup pages. When you click a button on
this page, the effects apply to all pages. This allows you to quickly make changes without having to individually
change each of the other pages.
Titles Text page. This page allows you to customize default plot titles for each plot type without having to view a
plot of that type. For example, you can display a Failure Rate vs. Time plot while changing the titles for a System
Failures plot. See Section 13.11.1 on page 384.
Plot Items Display page. This page allows you to customize the details of the default appearance of the lines,
points, bars and/or slices of every plot type without having to individually change each plot. See Section 13.11.2
on page 385.
General page. This page controls the settings for the five section pages below it. When you click a button on this
page, the effects apply to the Titles Display, Labels, Legend, Canvas and Grid and Offsets pages.
The Titles Display, Labels, Legend, Canvas and Grid and Offsets pages control the settings of their individual
sections. When you click a button on one of these pages, the effects apply only to that specific section.
13.11 Plot Defaults Window
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 383
Three Defaults buttons appear on every page of the Plot Defaults window. The scope of their effects differs slightly
depending on the page you are working with.
Save Defaults saves settings for use as the default settings for all subsequent plots. This will overwrite the
previous default settings.
Load Defaults enters the saved default values for the settings. You can then click OK in the Plot Setup window to
apply the default settings to the current plot. This is an easy way to undo changes you have made in the Plot Setup
window and re-apply default settings.
Restore Defaults clears the saved default settings and restores the default values that are shipped with the
application.
The scope of the Defaults buttons effects changes as follows:
For the Titles and Plot Item Display pages, these buttons save/load/restore the settings specified on the current
page.
For the Titles Display, Labels, Legend, Canvas and Grid and Offsets pages, these buttons save/load/restore all
current settings on the corresponding page(s) of the Plot Setup window (e.g., clicking Save Defaults on the
Canvas and grid page of the Plot Defaults window will save the settings from the Canvas, Grid, Bars and Slices
pages).
For the All Defaults and General pages, clicking these buttons is equivalent to clicking them on all of the
subordinate pages.
Note: The settings affected by the Defaults buttons on the Titles Display, Labels, Legend, Canvas and Grid and
Offsets pages include all settings relevant to the section, regardless of whether they are currently available or not. For
example, if you have previously specified settings for a pie chart and are now specifying settings for a bar chart, the
settings that you created for the pie chart will be saved as defaults when you click Save Defaults and will be applied to
subsequent pie charts.
13 Plot Setup
384 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
13.11.1 Plot Defaults: Titles Page
The Titles Text page of the Plot Defaults window allows you to customize default plot titles for each plot type.
Titles allows you to select the plot type that you are changing the default titles for.
Main allows you to type the default main title for the plot.
X-Axis allows you to type the default title for the x-axis for the plot.
Y-Axis allows you to type the default title for the y-axis for the plot.
13.11 Plot Defaults Window
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 385
13.11.2 Plot Defaults: Plot Item Display Page
The Plot Item Display page of the Plot Defaults window allows you to customize details of the default appearance of
the lines, points, bars and/or slices on the plot.
Plot Item Type allows you to select the style of plot that you want to specify default settings for. The settings you
specify are retained in the background when you choose a new item in this list, so you can specify settings for each
type and save all of them, if desired.
The options on this page are identical to those on the Plot Items page of the Plot Setup window for the corresponding
plot style.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 387
ReliaSoft Draw (RS Draw) is a full graphics metafile editor that allows you to annotate and customize your
plots. With RS Draw, you can insert text, draw an object, mark a particular point or paste another picture into
your plot. You can also re-arrange your objects by selecting and moving them to the position you desire. The
figure below shows the RS Draw interface and its components.
14.1 Linking RS Draw
RS Draw is available by clicking the Send to RS Draw icon on the Plot Control Panel.
The plot will be linked to RS Draw and will appear in the canvas area for editing. You will then be able to save any
changes made to the plot in RS Draw to the current plot sheet by selecting File > Apply Changes and Close by
clicking the Apply Changes and Close icon on the toolbar.
ReliaSoft Draw
14
14 ReliaSoft Draw
388 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
14.2 RS Draw Menu Bar
The menus in the RS Draw menu bar belong exclusively to the RS Draw utility. Each menu item and its subitems are
discussed next.
14.2.1 File Menu
The RS Draw File menu contains the following commands.
New creates a new, blank RS Draw plot area.
Open opens a previously saved RSDrawCanvas (*.rdc) graphic.
Save saves the current image in one of five formats: JPEG graphic (*.jpg), CompuServe Graphics Interface
(*.gif), Portable Network Graphics (*.png), Windows Meta File (*.wmf) or RSDrawCanvas (*.rdc) graphic. If the
graphic has never been saved, you will be prompted for a filename.
Apply Changes and Close exports the current annotated graph to the current Plot Sheet.
Print opens the Print window, which allows you to send the image to the printer.
Exit closes RS Draw.
14.2.2 Edit Menu
The RS Draw Edit menu contains the following commands.
Undo cancels the previous action. You can cancel multiple actions by choosing Undo as many times as necessary.
Redo reapplies the previously canceled action. You can redo multiple actions by choosing Redo again.
Cut cuts the selected object(s) and puts them on the Clipboard.
Copy copies the selected object(s) to the Clipboard. Objects stored in the Clipboard can be pasted into this and
other applications.
Paste pastes the contents of the Clipboard onto the canvas area.
Delete Selected deletes the selected object(s).
Select All selects all objects in the plot area.
Preferences opens the Preferences window where you can set various options about the RS Draw interface. See
Section 14.2.2.1 on page 388.
14.2.2.1 Preferences Window
The Preferences window allows you to set various options about the RS Draw interface. You can access it by
choosing Edit > Preferences.
14.2 RS Draw Menu Bar
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 389
Hot Spots
Point allows you to choose the color of the point handles that appears when a line, free-form line or polygon
is selected. These handles represent the end points of the line segments that are used to draw the object, and
can be moved independently of each other to reconfigure the object.
Object allows you to choose the color of the object handles that appear when an object is selected. They are
used to move or resize the entire object.
View
Instructions if selected, turns on the help text that displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the RS Draw
interface when you click an option on the Draw Toolbar.
Grid Spacing sets the grid's width. The grid spacing is a percentage of the grid's width. For example, if you want
the canvas to show 20 points, the grid spacing must be set to 0.05.
OK saves your changes and applies them to the canvas.
Cancel cancels any changes made and closes the window.
14.2.3 Canvas Menu
The RS Draw Canvas menu contains the following commands.
Background Color opens the Color Palette, which allows you to choose the canvas color.
Show Grid toggles the display of the dotted-line grid on and off.
Snap To Grid sets the movement and placement of the selected object to be in accordance with the spacing of the
grid points. In other words, each object moved or placed in the graphic will be automatically moved to align with
the nearest grid lines. Note that this command is available only when the grid is displayed.
Zoom sets the degree of magnification on the RS Draw canvas.
Reset Zoom sets the degree of magnification to 100%.
Zoom 25 sets the degree of magnification to 25%.
Zoom 50 sets the degree of magnification to 50%.
Zoom 75 sets the degree of magnification to 75%.
Zoom 150 sets the degree of magnification to 150%.
Zoom 200 sets the degree of magnification to 200%.
Zoom 400 sets the degree of magnification to 400%.
14.2.4 Shape Menu
The RS Draw Shape menu contains the following commands.
Move to Front moves the selected object(s) to the front (i.e., displayed over the other layers).
Move to Back moves the selected object(s) to the back (i.e., displayed behind the other layers).
Bind Group groups the selected objects together as one.
Unbind Group ungroups the selected objects.
Clone creates a duplicate of each currently selected object and places it next to the original.
Align Vertically allows you to vertically align the selected object(s). When aligning objects within the graphic,
the first selected object selected is used as the reference point.
14 ReliaSoft Draw
390 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Left aligns the left edges of the selected objects to the left edge of the first object selected.
Center aligns the horizontal centers of the selected objects to the horizontal center of the first object selected.
Right aligns the right edges of the selected objects to the right edge of the first object selected.
Align Horizontally allows you to horizontally align the selected object(s). When aligning objects within the
graphic, the first selected object selected is used as the reference point.
Top aligns the top edges of the selected objects to the top of the first object selected.
Center aligns the vertical centers of all selected objects to the vertical center of the first object selected.
Bottom aligns the bottom edges of all selected objects to the bottom of the first object selected.
Rotate Right rotates the selected object(s) 90 clockwise.
Rotate Left rotates the selected object(s) 90 counterclockwise.
Rotate 180 rotates the selected object(s) 180.
14.2.5 Help Menu
The RS Draw Help menu contains the following commands.
Contents displays RS Draw's online help contents.
Visit ReliaSoft on the web allows you to have direct access to ReliaSoft's Web site at http://www.ReliaSoft.com.
14.3 RS Draw Toolbars
Four toolbars are available on the RS Draw window. Each toolbar contains quick access icons that activate different
parts of the application. Depending on the current active window or type of data, certain icons may be unavailable
and will appear dimmed. You can choose which toolbars you want to appear in the interface by customizing the
toolbars. See Section 14.3.5 on page 394. The toolbars and their icons are shown and explained next.
14.3 RS Draw Toolbars
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 391
14.3.1 Standard Toolbar
New
Creates a new, blank canvas in RS Draw. Only one canvas can be open in RS Draw at a time.
Open
Opens a previously saved RSDrawCanvas (*.rdc) graphic.
Save
Saves the current graphic. If no name is currently selected, you will be prompted for a filename.
Apply Changes and Close
Applies the changes in the annotated graph to the current Plot Sheet and closes the RS Draw window.
Print
Opens the Print window, which gives you printing options and allows you to send the current graphic to the
printer.
14.3.2 Edit Toolbar
Undo
Cancels the previous actions. You can cancel multiple actions by choosing Undo again.
Redo
Reapplies the previously canceled action. You can redo multiple actions by choosing Redo again.
Delete
Deletes the selected object(s).
Copy
Copies the selected object to the Clipboard. Objects stored in the Clipboard can be pasted into this and other
applications.
Paste
Pastes the contents of the Clipboard onto the canvas area.
14 ReliaSoft Draw
392 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
14.3.3 Zoom Toolbar
Normal
Sets the degree of magnification, the zoom, to 100%.
Zoom In
Increases the degree of magnification.
Zoom Out
Decreases the degree of magnification.
14.3.4 Draw Toolbar
Select Object
Allows you to select an object. When an object is selected, you can move it to a new position, change its
properties or delete the object. (To select multiple objects, hold down the CTRL key while you click the
other objects you want to select.)
Point
Allows you to place a point on the canvas. With the tool selected, click the desired location on the canvas.
The point displays at that location.
Arc
Allows you to draw an arc. With the tool selected, click the desired location on the canvas and drag the arc to
the appropriate size.
14.3 RS Draw Toolbars
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 393
Line
Allows you to draw a line. With the tool selected, click the desired start point for the line and drag to the
desired length.
Rectangle
Allows you to draw a rectangle. With the tool selected, click the desired location on the canvas and drag the
rectangle to the appropriate size.
Ellipse
Allows you to draw an ellipse. With the tool selected, click the desired location on the canvas and drag the
ellipse to the appropriate size.
Free
Allows you to draw a free-form line. With the tool selected, click the desired start point for the line and draw
the line. You can continue to draw until you release the mouse button.
Pie
Allows you to draw a pie segment. With the tool selected, click the desired location on the canvas and drag
the pie segment to the appropriate size.
Image
Allows you to insert an image onto the canvas. You can import files of the following types: JPG, GIF, PNG,
BMP, WMF or EMF. With the tool selected, click the desired location on the canvas. The Open window
displays. Navigate to the appropriate folder, then choose the image and click Open. The image appears at the
desired location.
Polygon
Allows you to draw a polygon. With the tool selected, click the start location on the canvas, and then click
each additional end point of a line segment. As soon as you have three points an additional line is
automatically drawn, closing the shape, but you can continue to add points and the polygon will be redrawn
accordingly. To stop adding points, right-click the canvas area.
Arrow
Allows you to insert an arrow into the plot. With the tool selected, click the desired start point for the arrow
line and drag to the desired length. The arrow head is automatically added at the end point of the arrow line.
Text
Allows you to insert a single line of text into the plot. With the tool selected, click the start point and type the
text.
For all objects, you can change and set the object's properties using the Tool Options area. See Section 14.5 on page
394. Note that you can use the Tool Options area in two ways:
If an existing object on the canvas is selected, changing the settings in the Tool Options area will alter that object's
properties only.
If no object on the canvas is selected, the settings in the Tool Options area will be applied to all subsequent
objects created using the selected tool.
14 ReliaSoft Draw
394 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
14.3.5 Customizing Bars in the RS Draw Interface
RS Draw's interface provides you with the flexibility to customize the workspace to meet your needs. You can hide or
display any of the toolbars. You can also change the location and shape of any of the toolbars.
14.3.5.1 Moving Toolbars
You can move any of the toolbars by clicking the handle at the top or left side of each toolbar and dragging the bar
into the position you prefer. When you move a bar, the shape may change to fit the new location.
14.3.5.2 Hiding and Showing Toolbars
You can choose to display or hide any of RS Draw's toolbars by right-clicking inside the grey toolbar area. A Toolbar
shortcut menu like the one shown next will appear.
Click a toolbar name to select or deselect it. If selected, the toolbar will appear in the RS Draw Interface. If not
selected, the toolbar will not appear.
14.4 Additional Tools
Two additional tools are located on the bottom of the RS Draw window.
Position Indicator indicates the exact position of the mouse pointer within the plot area. The Position Indicator is
available only if RS Draw is linked to a data set.
Place Coordinates if selected, allows you to mark a point on the plot area by right-clicking at the spot you would
like to mark. This option is available only if RS Draw is linked to a data set.
14.5 Object Properties The Tool Options Area
You can set the properties of objects in RS Draw using the Tool Options area.
The Tool Options area includes:
Lines Properties. See Section 14.5.1 on page 395.
Fill Properties. See Section 14.5.2 on page 395.
Points Properties. See Section 14.5.3 on page 395.
Angles Properties. See Section 14.5.4 on page 396.
Text Properties. See Section 14.5.5 on page 396.
14.5 Object Properties The Tool Options Area
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 395
Color Properties. See Section 14.5.6 on page 397.
The properties that will be available will vary depending on the selected object (text, line or a shape).
The functionality of this area changes depending on what is selected on the Draw toolbar. If the Select tool is active,
any changes you make are applied to the currently selected object. If any other tool is active, then any changes you
make will be used as the properties of that tool the next time you use that tool to draw something.
For example, to set the default options for all rectangles, you would first click the Rectangle icon and, in the Tool
Options area, set the property values that will be applied to all further instances of the items of that type.
To change the properties of an existing object, first click the Select icon, then select the object and change the desired
properties in the Tool Options area. The changes are applied to the selected object immediately after you make them.
To undo the change, choose Edit > Undo.
14.5.1 Lines Properties
The Lines properties area of the Tool Options area is available when a point, arc, line, rectangle, ellipse, free-form
line, pie, polygon or arrow is the selected object. Note that when working with an object other than a line or a free-
form line, these properties apply to the object's outline.
Thickness allows you to set the line thickness, in pixels, for the selected line. The line thickness can range from 1
to 9, with 1 being the thinnest and 9 being the thickest.
Style allows you to choose a style for the selected line from the drop-down menu.
14.5.2 Fill Properties
The Fill properties area of the Tool Options area is available when a point, rectangle, ellipse, pie, polygon or arrow is
the selected object.
Style allows you to choose a fill style from the drop-down menu. The setting determines how the Fill and Back
colors interact on the display. Note that if you choose Transparent then neither color displays.
14.5.3 Points Properties
The Points properties area of the Tool Options area is available when a point is the selected object.
Style allows you to set the style for the point from the drop-down menu.
Size allows you to set the point size from the drop-down menu.
14 ReliaSoft Draw
396 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
14.5.4 Angles Properties
The Angles properties area of the Tool Options area is available when an arc or pie is the selected object.
Start allows you to set the starting point for the object, where 0 is a horizontal line. The Start value determines the
orientation of the object. For example, a Start value of 0 indicates that the object will start at the 3 o'clock
position, while a Start value of 270 indicates that the object will start at the 12 o'clock position.
Sweep allows you to set the angle of the object. The Sweep value determines how big the pie slice or arc angle is.
For example, a Sweep value of 45 indicates that the object is one-eighth of a circle, while a Sweep value of 270
indicates that the object is three-quarters of a circle.
14.5.5 Text Properties
The Text properties area of the Tool Options area is available when text is the selected object.
Font allows you to choose the specific font.
Font Size allows you to set the text point size.
Font Orientation allows you to set the angle at which the text is displayed. For example, a value of 0 indicates
that the text will start at the 3 o'clock position, while a value of 90 indicates that the text will start at the 12 o'clock
position.
Bold if selected, bolds the text.
Italics if selected, italicizes the text.
Underline if selected, underlines the text.
Vertical Alignment allows you to set the text's vertical alignment relative to the insertion point. The options are:
Left
Center
Right
Horizontal Alignment allows you to set the text's horizontal alignment relative to the insertion point. The options
are:
Top
Center
Bottom
14.6 Working with Objects: Examples
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 397
14.5.6 Color Properties
The Color properties area of the Tool Options area is available when a point, arc, line, rectangle, ellipse, free-form
line, pie, polygon, arrow or text is the selected object.
Line Color opens the Color Palette, which allows you to choose a color for the selected line.
Fill Color opens the Color Palette, which allows you to choose the fill color of the selected object from the drop-
down menu. Transparent indicates that there is no fill color.
Back Color opens the Color Palette, which allows you to choose the background color for the selected object
from the drop-down menu. Transparent indicates that there is no background color.
14.6 Working with Objects: Examples
14.6.1 Drawing a Line
To draw a line on a graphic that is being edited in RS Draw, click the Line icon on the Draw toolbar. (The other RS
Draw tools are used in a similar fashion.)
On the canvas, click the desired start point for the line and drag to the desired orientation and length. A line will
appear, as shown next.
14.6.2 Editing an Object
To edit an object in RS Draw, click the Select icon on the Draw toolbar and then click the object. Handles appear on
the object. These handles allow you to move and/or resize the object. The number and type of handles depends on the
selected object. For more information about the handle types and how to set the handle colors, refer to the Preferences
Note: If the selected object is text, the Fill Color sets the font's color. The Line Color and Back Color settings are not used
with text.
14 ReliaSoft Draw
398 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Window. See Section 14.2.2.1 on page 388.
14.6.2.1 Example: Editing a Line
When you click a line, three handles will appear on the line: one point handle at each end of the line and one object
handle in the middle of the line.
Drag one of the point handles to edit the line's direction and length with respect to the other end handle. You can
move the cursor around to get a feel for what you can do. When you are satisfied with the new line, release the button.
To move the line, drag the object handle to the appropriate place.
14.6.2.2 Example: Resizing a Rectangle
When you click a rectangle, five object handles will appear on the rectangle: one at each corner and one at the
rectangle's center. To resize the rectangle, click one of the corner handles and move the cursor. When you are satisfied
with the new size, release the button.
To move the rectangle, drag the central handle to the appropriate place.
14.7 Saving an Image
You can save an image for future use either in RS Draw or in another application.
To save an image, do the following:
Choose File > Save. The Save As window displays.
In the File name field, type the image's name.
In the Save as type field, choose the image type.
Click Save.
Note: If you want to edit the image in RS Draw again, you must save the image as an RSDrawCanvas (*.rdc) graphic
image. Otherwise, you will not be able to open the graphic file in RS Draw.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 399
You can customize and annotate some of the application's charts using the Chart Wizard and the Chart Designer:
Using the Chart Wizard - Section 15.1 (p. 399)
Using the Chart Designer - Section 15.2 (p. 405)
15.1 Chart Wizard
The Chart Wizard contains a series of steps that guide you through the process required to create a new chart or to
modify an existing chart in the spreadsheet.
1
Select a range of spreadsheet cells for which you would like to create a
chart and choose Sheet Options > Sheet Actions > Chart Wizard to activate the Chart Wizard.
Move the cursor, which now appears in the form of a small cross-hair, over the spreadsheet. Click the spreadsheet
and, while holding down the left mouse button, drag the cursor to define the area in which the chart graphic will be
placed. When you are satisfied with the selected area, release the left mouse button.
A window like the one shown next will appear.
The Chart Wizard consists of four pages that control various chart design aspects such as choosing a chart type,
setting chart options, controlling chart layout and specifying chart and axis titles. You can navigate through these
pages by clicking the buttons at the bottom of the window.
Chart Wizard and Chart
Designer
15
1.
The Chart Wizard is also available in the 3D Plot. This section presents Chart Wizard for the spreadsheet; however, the
functionality is the same for that tool.
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer
400 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Each page of the Chart Wizard is presented next.
15.1.1 Gallery Page
The first page of the Chart Wizard, the Gallery page, allows you to select the type of chart you wish to design. Click
2D to display the two-dimensional chart types and click 3D to display the three-dimensional chart types. The 3D
Gallery is displayed next.
Click a chart type to select it and click Next> to move to the Style page.
15.1.2 Style Page
The second page of the Chart Wizard, the Style page, allows you to set the style for the chart type you have selected.
By using the Style page, you can easily set chart display options such as series labels, stacking and bar gap.
Click a style to select it and click Next> to move to the Layout page.
15.1 Chart Wizard
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 401
15.1.3 Layout Page
The third page of the Chart Wizard, the Layout page, provides methods for determining the displayed elements and
layout of the chart plot. The preview box displays the options you have selected.
Chart Title allows you to type the title you wish to display above the chart.
Chart Footnote allows you to type a footnote to display beneath the chart.
Chart Legend provides options for displaying the chart legend. The options are:
None does not display a legend.
Left displays the legend to the left of the chart.
Right displays the legend to the right of the chart.
Top displays the legend above the chart.
Bottom displays the legend beneath the chart.
Series Data along determine how series data is read from the data grid. The two choices for reading series data
are:
Rows if selected, series data is read from rows of the data grid.
Cols if selected, series data is read from columns of the data grid.
When you are satisfied with the layout selections, click Next> to move to the Axes page.
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer
402 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
15.1.4 Axes Page
The last page of the Chart Wizard, the Axes page, allows you to label chart axes. The preview box displays the
options you have selected.
Category (X) allows you to label the x-axis (horizontal) for the chart.
Value (Y) allows you to label the y-axis (vertical) for the chart.
Depth (Z) when applicable in 3D charts, allows you to label the z-axis for the chart.
Secondary (Y2) when applicable in 3D charts, allows you to label the secondary y-axis for the chart.
When you are satisfied with the Chart Wizard selections for the chart, click Finish to create or update the chart in the
designated area of the spreadsheet.
15.1.5 Chart Types
The 2D and 3D chart types available in the Chart Wizard are discussed next. Chart types are presented in alphabetical
order.
15.1.5.1 Area Charts
Use area charts to emphasize the relative importance of values over a period of time. An area chart focuses on the
magnitude of change rather than the rate of change. Each filled area on the chart represents a series and is identified
by a different color or pattern. Values are plotted on the vertical (Y) axis and categories are plotted on the horizontal
(X) axis. You can also chart one or more series against the secondary y-axis instead of the primary axis.
15.1.5.2 Bar Charts
Use bar charts to compare one item to another, or to compare a number of items over a period of time. These charts
are particularly effective at showing large changes from one category to another. Each 2D or 3D bar represents a
value in the data grid. Bars representing a series are located at the same position in each category and have the same
color and pattern. In 2D charts, values are grouped on the vertical (Y) axis, and bars are grouped by category along
the horizontal (X) axis. On 3D charts, values are plotted on the vertical (Y) axis, categories are grouped along the
horizontal (X) axis and the depth (Z) axis shows series.
15.1.5.3 Bubble Charts
Use bubble charts to show a visual comparison using three coordinates. Each bubble requires three columns of data in
the data grid. The first column holds the X coordinate, the second the Y coordinate and the third the bubble size. All
coordinates in a bubble chart measure values; therefore, the vertical (Y) axis and the horizontal (X) axis both show
values. The column label on the first column in each series identifies the series in the legend. Additionally, any
15.1 Chart Wizard
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 403
formatting applied to the first column is used to display the series on the chart. Any formatting applied to the second
and third columns is ignored.
15.1.5.4 Clustered Bars
Series and data points in a clustered bar chart are displayed as they are in a 2D bar chart, however the chart and all the
chart elements are displayed in 3D.
15.1.5.5 Combination Charts
Use combination charts to visually highlight the differences between multiple series of data. A different method can
be used to draw each data series.
15.1.5.6 Elevation Charts: Surface and Contour
Elevation charts are commonly used to display topographic data. There are two types of elevation charts: contour
charts and 3D surface charts.
A contour chart is drawn as a two-dimensional area. Changes in the data plotted on this chart are demonstrated
through variations in color known as contours. Contours are drawn on the chart as either colored bands or lines.
Contour bands can be represented on the chart in dramatic contrast or as a subtle transition in hue known as gradient.
Contour charts do not have a value axis; the variation in color is represented in the legend instead.
A surface chart is drawn as a rectangular grid with a surface base or floor. The value axis is drawn perpendicular to
the chart base giving the chart its three-dimensional quality. Data variations are plotted on this chart at raised
elevations from the surface. The data points themselves are plotted on grid intersections at the corresponding value
axis elevation, thus giving the chart depth. Contours can be applied to surface charts to display additional
information. These variations in color bands or lines are projected on the charts three-dimensional surface and can
demonstrate a separate collection of data independent of elevation.
15.1.5.7 Gantt Charts
Use Gantt charts to display a range of bars that indicate the relative time required for various activities within a
project. The horizontal axis (Y) shows dates and the vertical axis (X) shows categories. This chart type requires two
columns of data for each series. The first column holds the start date and the second column holds the duration.
15.1.5.8 Hi-Lo Charts
Hi-lo charts are most commonly used to show stock market information. However, these chart types can also be used
for scientific data such as indicating changes in readings over a period of time. The vertical (Y) axis shows values and
the horizontal (X) axis shows categories or dates.
The application supports a number of variations to the hi-lo charts. These include: hi-lo-close with the close marker
crossing the data point or extending to the right of the data point, open-hi-lo-close and open-hi-lo-close bar.
The data in the data grid must be organized appropriately for each variation of the hi-lo chart.
A hi-lo chart requires two columns for each data series: the first column is used for the high point and the second
is used for the low point.
A hi-lo-close chart requires three columns for each data series: the first column is used for the high point, the
second for the low point and the third for the closing point.
An open-hi-lo-close or a open-hi-lo-close bar chart (sometimes called candlestick charts) requires four columns of
data for each data series: the first column is used for the open point, the second for the high point, the third for the
low point and the fourth for the closing point.
The column label on the first column in each series identifies the series in the legend. Additionally, any formatting
applied to the first column is used to display the series on the chart. Any formatting applied to the remaining columns
that make up the series is ignored.
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer
404 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
15.1.5.9 Horizontal Bars
Horizontal bars are similar to standard bar charts except that the categories are organized on a vertical (X) axis and
the values are plotted on a horizontal (Y) axis.
15.1.5.10 Line Charts
Use line charts to show trends or changes in data over a period of time. These charts emphasize time flow and rate of
change rather than amount of change. In 2D line charts, values are plotted along the vertical (Y) axis and categories
are displayed on the horizontal (X) axis. In 3D charts, values are plotted on the vertical (Y) axis, categories are
grouped along the horizontal (X) axis and the depth (Z) axis shows series.
15.1.5.11 Pie and Doughnut Charts
Use pie or doughnut charts to show the relationship of parts to the whole. Each pie or doughnut represents a category.
Each slice of the pie or doughnut represents a value in that category. You can separate or explode slices in a chart by
clicking a slice and dragging it away from the rest of the pie or doughnut.
15.1.5.12 Polar Charts
Use polar charts to show cyclical trends. The polar chart requires two columns in the data grid for each chart series:
the first column holds the distance from the center of the chart (the radius) and the second column contains the angle
on the perimeter of the chart. The column label on the first column in each series identifies the series in the legend.
Additionally, any formatting applied to the first column is used to display the series on the chart. Any formatting
applied to the second column is ignored.
15.1.5.13 Radar Charts
Use radar charts to show changes or frequencies of each series relative to a center point and to one another. Lines
connect all the data markers in the same series. You can choose to fill the lines, thereby creating a radar area chart.
15.1.5.14 Step Charts
Use step charts to compare items that do not show trends. Step charts display distinct points along the value (Y) axis,
with vertical lines showing the difference between each point. The horizontal (X) axis shows categories.
15.1.5.15 3D Scatter Charts
This chart is drawn as a three-dimensional grid with a base and walls. It plots data points created by the intersection
of three different coordinate values. Each of the three values that make up a point corresponds to a particular axis in a
3D grid. Each series on the chart requires three columns of data in the data grid. The first column holds the X
coordinates, the second column holds the Y coordinates and the third column holds the z coordinates.
15.1.5.16 3D XYZ Charts
This chart shows variation and relationships over three sets of values plotted on a three-dimensional grid. Each data
point represents the intersection of the X, Y and Z axes. Each series on the chart requires three columns of data in the
data grid. The first column holds the X coordinates, the second column holds the Y coordinates and the third column
holds the Z coordinates.
15.1.5.17 XY Charts
Use XY charts to plot two groups of numbers as one series of XY coordinates. Each series on the chart requires two
columns of data in the data grid. The first column holds the X coordinate and the second column the Y coordinate.
The column label on the first column in each series is used to identify the series in the legend. Additionally, any
formatting applied to the first column is used to display the series on the chart. Any formatting applied to the second
column is ignored. You can use markers, lines, or both to draw the XY points.
15.1.6 Modifying Charts with the Chart Wizard
When you use the Chart Wizard to modify existing charts, the Chart Wizard will initialize the chart back to its default
settings and then restore only those features controlled in the Gallery, Style, Layout and Axes pages. You will want to
exercise care when modifying existing charts that might have originally been created without the Chart Wizard, such
15.2 Chart Designer
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 405
as the 3D Plot. See page 364 in Chapter 12. You might need to manually adjust some chart settings after using the
Chart Wizard.
15.1.7 Format Chart Shortcut Menu
To access the Format Chart shortcut menu, double-click inside any chart created in the spreadsheet to select it. Right-
click inside the selected chart to display a shortcut menu with the following options:
Chart Designer opens the Chart Designer, which allows you to select either a specific chart element or multiple
chart elements in order to set properties associated with the current chart. Section 15.2 on page 405
Edit Chart Data displays the Edit Chart Data window. The Edit Chart Data window allows you to modify the
data, rows, columns and labels in the data grid of the selected chart. See Section 15.2.4.2 on page 444.
Wizard displays the Chart Wizard. The Chart Wizard will guide you through the chart design process. See
Section 15.1 on page 399.
Open allows you to open a previously saved chart file (*.vtc).
Save As saves the current file as a chart file (*.vtc), a bitmap (*.bmp), a JPEG bitmap (*.jpg) or a Windows
metafile (*.wmf).
Print displays the Print window, which allows you to print the selected chart.
Copy copies the current chart to the Clipboard as a Windows metafile (*.wmf).
Paste pastes the contents of the Clipboard, in bitmap (*.bmp) or Windows metafile (*.wmf) format, onto the
backdrop of the selected chart.
15.2 Chart Designer
The Chart Designer allows you to set a multitude of properties associated with various elements within a chart created
in the software. You can access the Chart Designer from General Spreadsheets or Analysis Workbook by double-
clicking inside a chart to select it then right-clicking and selecting Chart Designer from the Format Chart shortcut
menu that appears.
2
Reports are presented in detail in Chapter 27. You can access the Chart Designer from a 3-D Plot
by choosing Actions > Chart Designer. 3-D Plot is presented in detail in page 364 in Chapter 12. The Chart
2.
To access the Format Chart shortcut menu, double-click inside any chart created in the General Spreadsheet to select it and then
right-click inside the selected chart.
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer
406 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Designer window will appear, as shown next.
The appearance of the Chart Designer window will vary depending on the Chart Element (e.g., Chart, Title, Footnote,
etc.) selected for customization. Each component of the Chart Designer will be discussed in the sections that follow.
15.2.1 Command Buttons
Three command buttons apply to every page of the Chart Designer:
OK accepts any changes made and closes the window.
Cancel cancels any changes made and closes the window.
Apply applies the selections you have made in the Chart Designer and the window remains open to allow you to
make further changes.
15.2.2 Element Tree
The Element Tree, located on the left side of the Chart Designer, displays a tree structure that allows you to select the
part of the chart you want to modify. For example, you can make changes to the entire chart by selecting Chart from
the Element Tree. You can make changes to the Title by selecting Title from the Element Tree. Note that you can
click the plus (+) or minus (-) to the left of some elements in order to open or close additional branches.
15.2 Chart Designer
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 407
When you select an element from the Element Tree for modification, pages with index tabs appear on the right side of
the Chart Designer. The page index tabs apply to the aspects that can be customized for a particular tree element so
the tabs displayed will vary depending on the element(s) selected. The available page index tabs are presented in
detail and in alphabetical order in Section 15.2.3.
To select a single chart element, click once on the element in the tree. To select multiple chart elements, hold down
the CTRL key while clicking once on each element you wish to select. The page index tabs that are common to all
selected elements will be displayed. If there are no common pages among the selections, the No Pages in Common
page will be displayed. The No Pages in Common page is presented in detail in Section 15.2.3.22.
15.2.3 Chart Designer Pages
In this section, the page index tabs available in the Chart Designer are presented in alphabetical order and each tab is
discussed in detail. Remember that the tab(s) displayed in the Chart Designer will vary depending on the element(s)
selected from the Element Tree to the left. The selections made within each page index tab will be applied to the
element(s) currently selected from the Element Tree.
15.2.3.1 Appearance
The Appearance tab allows you to customize the appearance of selected datapoint label element(s). This tab applies
to the following chart elements: Datapoint Labels.
Text Location allows you to choose one of nine preset locations to position data point labels.
None does not display a label.
Above Point displays the label above the data point. This location is valid only for bar, line, area, step, XY,
polar, radar and bubble charts.
Below Point displays the label below the data point. This location is valid only for bar, line, area, step, XY,
polar, radar and bubble charts.
Center displays the label centered on the data point. This location is valid only for bar, line, area and step
charts.
Base displays the label along the category axis, directly beneath the data point. This location is valid only for
bar, line, area and step charts.
Inside displays the label inside a pie or doughnut slice. This location is valid only for pie or doughnut charts.
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer
408 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Outside displays the label outside a pie or doughnut slice. This location is valid only for pie or doughnut
charts.
Left displays the label to the left of the data point. This location is valid only for XY, polar, radar and bubble
charts.
Right displays the label to the right of the data point. This location is valid only for XY, polar, radar and
bubble charts.
Datapoint Label
Automatic if selected, allows you to select a label from the available label types. If you select more than one
type, the labels are stacked on top of each other.
Value positions the value of the data point in the label.
Percent positions the value of the data point as a percentage according to the axis percent basis in the label.
Series Name uses the series name to label the data point.
Point Name uses the category name to label the data point.
Label Line Style allows you to choose one of the available line styles.
15.2.3.2 Backdrop
The Backdrop tab allows you to specify the background properties of the selected element(s). This tab applies to the
following chart elements: Chart, Axis Label, Axis Title, Datapoint Label, Footnote, Legend, Plot, Series Label, Title.
Fill
No Fill specifies that the chart element(s) have no fill, so any formatting applied to the surface behind them
shows through. A picture can still be applied to an element with no fill.
Gradient if selected, allows you to select a gradient type from the menu.
Brush if selected, displays the Pattern Palette. Click one of the patterns, None to have no fill on the
object, or Solid to use only the fill color to fill the object.
Fill/From Color displays the Color Palette. Choose a predefined color or click Custom to create your own
color. The fill color is used to create a solid pattern. For a pattern fill, the pattern color is drawn on top of the
fill color. For a gradient fill, use the Fill/From Color pop-up to specify the color used as the top color in a
horizontal gradient, the left color in a vertical gradient and the center color in a rectangle or oval gradient.
15.2 Chart Designer
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 409
Pattern/To Color specifies the color to be used as the bottom color in a horizontal gradient, the right color in
a vertical gradient and the outer color in a rectangle or oval gradient.
Frame
Style allows you to select a frame style.
Color allows you to select a color for the frame lines from the Color Palette.
Width allows you to determine the number of points to be used as the width for the frame lines. A point is 1/
72 of an inch. For the thick inner and thick outer frames, the width sets the thick line.
Shadow
Style if selected, allows you to specify the shadow style. None indicates that no shadow will be displayed.
Drop indicates that a drop shadow will be displayed.
Offset allows you to specify the number of points the shadow is offset from the frame if Drop is selected for
Style.
15.2.3.3 Base
The Base tab allows you to customize the base line of the selected element(s). This tab applies to the following chart
elements: Plot.
Base Height allows you to determine the number of points for the base height. This control only affects 3D
charts.
Pen allows you to format the lines used to draw the base. The Base Pen is not used on 2D charts.
Style allows you to select a line style for the lines that frame the walls or base.
Width allows you to select a width for the lines that frame the walls or base or select Custom to specify your
own line width.
Color allows you to display the color palette. Select one of the predefined colors to draw the lines that make
up the base or walls or select Custom to display the custom color palette.
Fill allows you to specify the colors and patterns used to draw the base of a chart. This control only affects 3D
charts.
Pattern allows you to select a pattern, select None to have no pattern on the object or select Solid to use only
the fill color to fill the object.
Fill Color allows you to select a fill color for the pattern selected.
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer
410 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Pattern Color allows you to select a pattern color for the selected pattern. The pattern color is used to draw
the pattern over the fill color if any pattern other than solid is selected.
15.2.3.4 Bubble
The Bubble tab allows you to customize the bubbles in bubble charts. This tab applies to the following chart
elements: Plot.
Series Size Basis allows you to specify how series data determines the relative size of bubbles drawn on a bubble
chart. Bubble charts require three columns of data, with the third column determining relative bubble size.
Bubble Area if selected, uses the series value as the relative bubble area.
Bubble Diameter if selected, uses the series value as the relative diameter of each bubble.
Largest Bubble Ratio allows you to set the largest bubble ratio. When bubbles are drawn on the chart, each of
the series values are used to draw bubbles in relation to one another depending on the value of Largest Bubble
Ratio. If the largest bubble ratio is set to 50, then 50 percent of the shortest chart axis length is used as the
diameter or area of the largest bubble. With Bubble Area selected, a value of 7 would produce a bubble with
approximately half the area of a bubble with a value of 14.
15.2 Chart Designer
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 411
15.2.3.5 Category Scale
The Category Scale tab allows you to customize scale, ticks, divisions and intersections for selected X and/or Y Axis
element(s). This tab applies to the following chart elements: Category Axes.
Scale
Show if selected, displays the axis scale, line, ticks and title on the axis. Click to clear the check box to hide
the axis elements.
Automatic if selected, automatically scales the axis based on the minimum and maximum values in the data
being charted. Click to clear this check box to manually scale the axis based on values you provide.
Labels on Ticks if selected, causes the axis labels to be centered on each tick mark, otherwise the labels will
be centered between tick marks.
Divisions become enabled if the Automatic check box under Scale is not selected.
Per Label indicates how divisions are labeled. A value of 1 labels every division. A value greater than 1 labels
the first division and skips the labels for extra divisions.
Per Tick indicates where tick marks are placed in relation to divisions. A value of 1 places a tick mark at
every division. A value greater than 1 places a tick mark at the first division, skips the number of divisions
(including the previous division) indicated by the value and places a tick mark at the next division after that.
For example, a value of 2 would place a tick mark at the first division, skip the second division and place
another tick mark at the third division.
Ticks
None if selected, displays no tick marks.
Center if selected, centers the tick marks across the axis.
Inside if selected, displays the tick marks inside the axis.
Outside if selected, displays the tick marks outside the axis.
Length is the length of the major tick marks in points. Minor tick marks are drawn at half this length.
Intersection
Automatic if selected, causes the axes to intersect at their usual position. Click to clear this check box to
enable the Cross At and Labels Inside Plot options to specify where you want the current axis to cross an
intersecting axis.
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer
412 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Cross At allows you to determine the position at which you want the current axis to cross an intersecting axis.
If the intersecting axis is a value axis, type the value at which you want to place the current axis. If the
intersecting axis is a date or category axis, type the division number at which you want to place the current
axis.
Labels Inside Plot if selected, moves the axis labels with the axis to the new intersection point. This might
cause labels to display on top of the chart plot. Click to clear this check box to leave the labels in their original
positions.
15.2.3.6 Contour
The Contour tab allows you to customize contour details within selected element(s). This tab applies to the following
chart elements: Plot.
Contour Style allows you to specify how contours are displayed. Select one of the following options:
Bands if selected, displays contours as bands of color.
Lines if selected, displays contours as colored lines.
Contour List
Add adds a new contour to the list. Type the value and label in the Contour Value and Contour Label input
boxes before clicking the Add button otherwise it will duplicate the selected value in the list.
Delete deletes the selected contour value from the list.
Set sets the contour.
Contour Value List displays the values representing each contour. Select a value from the list to modify,
label, or delete a contour.
Value allows you to type a new contour value.
Label allows you to type a new label for the selected contour value here. The Contour label appears in the
legend.
Automatic Values refers to the values used to display chart contours. Select this check box if you wish to
have each major axis division represent a separate contour. Click to clear this check box if you want to design
your own custom contours.
Colors controls how color is displayed on the chart. This option is only available when the Automatic Values
check box is not selected. Choose from the following color types:
Automatic if selected, displays the contour colors as the default series colors.
15.2 Chart Designer
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 413
Gradient if selected, displays the contours in an even transition of color.
Manual if selected, allows the user to specify and modify custom contour colors.
Smoothing allows you to determine a valid smoothing factor from 0-32 on which to base the B Spline formula.
0 indicates that the raw grid data is used with no smoothing.
1 indicates that the spline data only will be sampled at the original data grid locations.
2-32 indicates that the row and column locations will be broken into the specified number of subdivisions.
Bands
Style allows you to select a contour band style.
Color allows you to select a contour band color from the palette or select Custom to display the custom color
palette.
Lines
Width allows you to select a contour line width.
Color allows you to select a contour line color from the palette or select Custom to display the custom color
palette.
15.2.3.7 Date Formats
The Date Formats tab allows you to specify the format for date displays in selected element(s). This tab applies to the
following chart elements: Category Axes.
Major Format allows you to select a date format to display the first level of axis labels. You can add additional
levels of labels to indicate month and year changes on the date axis.
Extra Interval 1 allows you to select a format to be used to indicate a change of month. This format will display
in the second level of axis labels.
Extra Interval 2 allows you to select a format to be used to indicate a change of year. This format will display in
the third level of axis labels.
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer
414 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
15.2.3.8 Date Scale
The Date Scale tab allows you to customize the date scale for selected element(s). This tab applies to the following
chart elements: Category Axes.
Scale
Show if selected, displays the date scale on an axis.
Automatic if selected, will automatically create the scale of the axis based on the minimum and maximum
values in the data being charted. Click to clear this check box to manually scale the axis based on values you
provide.
Minimum allows you to determine the lowest or beginning date for the axis scale.
Maximum allows you to determine the highest or ending date for the axis scale.
Major and Minor Interval for each interval, allows you to enter a number to specify how many intervals pass
before a tick mark is placed on the axis. Then select an interval type from the drop-down menu.
None indicates no interval.
Yearly indicates that a tick mark occurs on January 1 of each year.
Monthly indicates that a tick mark occurs on the 1st of each month.
Semi-monthly indicates that a tick mark occurs on the 1st and 15th day of each month.
Weekly indicates that a tick mark occurs Monday of each week.
Daily indicates that a tick mark occurs each day.
Hour indicates that a tick mark occurs at the beginning of each hour.
Minute indicates that a tick mark occurs at the beginning of each minute.
Second indicates that a tick mark occurs at the beginning of each second.
Millisecond indicates that a tick mark occurs at the beginning of each millisecond.
Skip Weekends if selected, will not include weekends in the scale.
Ticks allows you to select a style to specify the position of the tick on the axis.
None indicates that no tick marks are displayed on the axis.
Center indicates that tick marks are centered across the axis.
Inside indicates that tick marks are displayed inside the axis.
Outside indicates that tick marks are displayed outside the axis.
15.2 Chart Designer
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 415
Length is the length of the major tick marks in points. Minor tick marks are drawn at half this length.
Intersection
Automatic if selected, allows the axes to intersect at their usual position. Click to clear this check box to
enable the Cross At and Labels Inside Plot options, which allow you to specify where you want the current
axis to intersect a perpendicular axis.
Cross At allows you to determine the position at which you want the current axis to cross its intersecting axis.
If the intersecting axis is a value axis, enter the value where you want to place the current axis. If the
intersecting axis is a date or category axis, enter the division number at which you want to place the current
axis.
Labels Inside Plot if selected, moves the axis labels with the axis to the new intersection point. This might
cause labels to display on top of the chart plot. Click to clear this check box to leave the labels in their original
positions. Only the axis line and tick marks are drawn at the new intersection point.
15.2.3.9 Defaults
The Defaults tab allows you to restore default options to the selected datapoint element(s). This tab applies to the
following chart elements: Datapoints.
Reset to Default Datapoint allows you to reset the datapoint to its default settings.
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer
416 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
15.2.3.10 Display
The Display tab allows you to define the display options for selected element(s). This tab applies to the following
chart elements: Axis Labels.
Automatic Rotation if selected, automatically rotates the labels, if necessary, to optimize the chart layout. Click
to clear this check box to set a specific horizontal and vertical alignment and orientation for the label text.
Standing Labels if selected, for 3D charts, rotates the labels up on the text baseline to stand in the Y plane.
Standing text can make the labels more legible if you are viewing the chart at very low elevations. This option
applies only to labels on an X or Z axis on most charts and the Y axis on horizontal charts. Click to clear this
check box to return labels to their standard position in the X or Z plane.
15.2.3.11 Elevation
The Elevation tab allows you to define the elevation characteristics of the selected element(s). This tab applies to the
following chart elements: Plot.
Surface
Style allows you control how the surface itself is represented on a 3D surface chart. Select one of the
following options:
None if selected, represents the surface data exclusively as a wireframe.
Bands if selected, displays changes in data on the surface with contour bands.
15.2 Chart Designer
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 417
Lines if selected, represents the surface as a wireframe and displays changes in data with contour lines.
Solid if selected, draws the surface as a solid color.
Solid with Lines if selected, draws the surface as a solid color. Changes in data are indicated by contour
lines superimposed on the solid color.
Color applies to both surface and contour charts and controls the color used to draw solid chart surfaces.
Select the color from the color palette or select Custom to display the custom color palette.
Wireframe
Style controls the appearance of the wireframe drawn upon a surface chart. Select one of the following
options:
None if selected, represents the surface by the surface color only.
Major if selected, indicates the original data grid values on the wireframe.
Major and Minor if selected, draws the wireframe on the surface along the original data grid values and
any additional rows or columns generated by the smoothing process.
Width controls the width of the line used to draw the wireframe for 3D surface charts.
Color controls the color used to draw the wireframe for 3D surface charts. Select the color from the color
palette or select Custom to display the custom color palette.
Base controls how the base of a surface chart is represented. Select one of the following options:
Pedestal if selected, displays the base as a solid area that rises up to meet the surface.
Standard if selected, displays the base as a flat area beneath the chart surface.
Bands if selected, causes the base to reflect the charts contours as a series of contour bands.
Lines if selected, causes the base to reflect the charts contours as a series of contour lines.
Projection displays a planar contour chart projected above a surface chart. Select one of the following
projection methods:
None if selected, displays no projection above the chart.
Bands if selected, causes the planar chart to reflect the charts contours in contour bands.
Lines if selected, causes the planar chart to reflect the charts contours in contour lines.
Separate Contour Data if selected, divides the data grid vertically between columns into two equal subranges of
data. The left subrange contains elevation data and the right subrange contains contouring data. When Separate
Contour Data is enabled, a surface chart will display surface contours that do not necessarily conform to the shape
of the surface.
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer
418 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
15.2.3.12 Extra Intervals
The Extra Intervals tab allows you to add more intervals that just the major and minor intervals to the date scale axis.
This tab applies to the following chart elements: Date Axis.
Extra Interval 1 and Extra Interval 2 for each interval, allows you to enter a number to specify how many
intervals pass before a tick mark is placed on the axis. Then select an interval type from the drop-down menu.
None indicates no interval.
Yearly indicates that a tick mark occurs on January 1 of each year.
Monthly indicates that a tick mark occurs on the 1st of each month.
Semi-monthly indicates that a tick mark occurs on the 1st and 15th day of each month.
Weekly indicates that a tick mark occurs Monday of each week.
Daily indicates that a tick mark occurs each day.
Hour indicates that a tick mark occurs at the beginning of each hour.
Minute indicates that a tick mark occurs at the beginning of each minute.
Second indicates that a tick mark occurs at the beginning of each second.
Millisecond indicates that a tick mark occurs at the beginning of each millisecond.
15.2 Chart Designer
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 419
15.2.3.13 Fill
The Fill tab allows you to define the fill properties for selected element(s). This tab applies to the following chart
elements: Datapoints.
Fill
Pattern displays the Pattern Palette. Select the pattern or hatch you want to use to fill the chart element.
Fill Color is used as the color for solid patterns. It is used as the background color for any other type of
pattern. By default, the line color for an element matches this fill color.
Pattern Color is used to draw the pattern over the fill color if any pattern other than solid is selected. For both
color controls, click the control to display the Color Palette. Select the color you want to use. You can choose
Custom to display a color mixer and create your own color.
Edge
Style displays the Line Palette. The Line Palette displays the available line styles. Select the style you want to
use to outline objects.
Width displays the available line widths. Select a width from the list or click Custom to specify your own
width.
Color displays the Color Palette. Select a predefined color or select Automatic to have the outline drawn in
the same color as the objects fill color. You can also click Custom to mix a new color.
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer
420 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
15.2.3.14 Font
The Font tab allows you to specify the font properties associated with the selected element(s). This tab applies to the
following chart elements: Axis Title, Datapoint Label, Footnote, Axis Label, Series Label, Title, Legend.
Font allows you to select a font from those installed on your system to apply to the selected element(s).
Font Style allows you to select a font style from the list of supported styles for the font you selected.
Size allows you to select a valid font size from the list or to type a valid size into the box.
Effects allows you to apply effects to the text in the selected element(s). Select or click to clear the check boxes
you prefer.
Strikeout if selected, applies the strikeout effect to the text.
Underline if selected, applies the underline effect to the text.
Color allows you to choose a color for the text in the selected element(s). Choose one of the predefined colors
from the color palette or select Custom to display the custom color palette and create your own.
Sample displays an example of the text selections you have chosen for the text in the selected element(s).
15.2 Chart Designer
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 421
15.2.3.15 Format
The Format tab allows you to define the number format for the selected element(s). This tab applies to the following
chart elements: Axis Labels.
Category allows you to select a category to display a list of preset format strings appropriate for that type of data
in the Format Code list box.
Format Codes displays the predefined format strings appropriate for the category selected.
Custom Format allows you to enter valid format symbols in this field to create your own custom format.
15.2.3.16 Guidelines
The Guidelines tab allows you to customize the guidelines for selected element(s). This tab applies to the following
chart elements: Series.
Show Guidelines if selected, displays guidelines for the series. Click to clear this check box to remove
guidelines.
Style allows you to select a guideline style from the list of predefined styles.
Width allows you to select a width for the guideline or click Custom and set a new width.
Color allows you to select the color for the guideline.
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer
422 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Caps allows you to select a type to specify how the ends of guidelines are displayed.
Butt squares off the line at the endpoint.
Round draws a semi-circle with a diameter of the line thickness at the end of the line.
Square continues the line beyond the endpoint for a distance equal to half the line thickness and is squared
off.
15.2.3.17 Layout
The Layout tab allows you to customize the layout properties of the selected element(s). This tab applies to the
following chart elements: Axis Label, Axis Title, Datapoint Label, Footnote, Series Label, Title.
Alignment allows you to set the horizontal and vertical alignment of the selected element(s).
Orientation allows you to specify the orientation of the selected element(s).
Word Wrap if selected, wraps any text that is too long to fit on one line of the bounding box. You can also
control where text breaks by pressing CTRL + ENTER to place a soft carriage return in the text.
15.2.3.18 Lines
The Lines tab allows you to customize the line properties of the selected element(s). This tab applies to the following
chart elements: Series.
15.2 Chart Designer
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 423
Show Series Line if selected, displays the series lines.
Style allows you to select a style for the selected line.
Width displays the preset line widths. Pick a width or select Custom to assign your own width.
Color displays the Color Palette. Select one of the predefined colors or click Custom to mix your own color.
Join allows you to select a method of joining line segments in the series. Join styles are particularly important
when using thick lines.
Mitered extends the outer edges of the two lines until they meet.
Round draws a circular arc around the point where the two line meet.
Beveled fills in the notch between the ends of the two joining lines.
Caps allows you to select a type to specify how the ends of lines are displayed.
Butt squares off the line at the endpoint.
Round draws a semi-circle with a diameter of the line thickness at the end of the line.
Square continues the line beyond the endpoint for a distance equal to half the line thickness and squares it off.
15.2.3.19 Location
The Location tab allows you to specify the location of the specified element(s) within the chart. This tab applies to the
following chart elements: Footnote, Legend, Title.
Visible if selected, displays the selected chart element(s).
Location allow you to position the selected element(s).
Custom Location if selected, allows you to determine a custom location for the selected element(s), then type the
appropriate value for the following location settings:
Top is the distance from the top of the title.
Left is the distance from the left edge of the title.
Height is the height of the title.
Width is the width of the title.
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer
424 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
15.2.3.20 Markers
The Markers tab allows you to customize the marker properties of the selected element(s). This tab applies to the
following chart elements: Datapoints.
Show Markers if selected, displays the markers on a series. Click to clear this check box to remove markers from
a series.
Style allows you to select a marker type to identify the data points in the current series.
Color displays the Color Palette. Select a color for the marker or click Custom to mix your own color.
Size allows you to determine the number of points for the marker diameter.
Pen Width allows you to select a width for the lines that form the marker or click Custom to set your own width.
15.2.3.21 Multiple Y
The Multiple Y tab allows you to choose to hide one or more X axes when you have multiple Y axes in your plot.
This tab applies to the following chart elements: Category Axis.
This tab will appear only if a number larger than 1 was entered in the Y Axis Count field of the Other tab of the Plot
node.
15.2 Chart Designer
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 425
Hide X Axis At allows you to choose to hide one or more of the X axes. The subcharts will appear stacked in
ascending numerical order of their Y axis numbers, so the Y1 axis is on the bottom, Y2 above it, Y3 above that,
and so on.
15.2.3.22 No Pages in Common
The No Pages in Common tab appears when the Chart Designer is unable to display tabs for the selected chart
elements in the tree view.
The No Pages in Common Tab could appear for any of the following reasons:
One or more of the selected chart elements do not share common tabs. For example, if you select unrelated chart
elements such as footnote and series, the Chart Designer cannot display common tabs.
The Chart Designer cannot display a single tab for the selected chart element. For example, Series Labels has no
designer pages.
The selected chart element does not apply to the current chart type. For example, if the current chart type does not
have a secondary Y or Z axis, this tab will display when either axis is selected in the tree view.
Try making your selection again or limiting the number of elements selected in the Element Tree on the left side of
the Chart Designer.
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer
426 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
15.2.3.23 Options
The Options tab allows you to customize display options for selected element(s). This tab applies to the following
chart elements: Series.
Hide Series if selected, turns off the display of the selected series. The space occupied by the series is still shown
on the chart, but the data is not displayed. Click to clear this check box to re-display a hidden series. In pie and
doughnut charts, room is still reserved for hidden series pie slices, even though they are not displayed.
Exclude Series if selected, removes a series from a chart. The data is not displayed and the space occupied by the
series is removed from the chart. Click to clear this check box to return an excluded series to the chart.
Plot On 2nd Y Axis if selected, plots the current series on the secondary Y axis instead of the primary axis. You
can then change the scale, type, or format of the secondary axis to best display the series data. Click to clear this
check box to plot the data on the primary axis.
Show Markers displays the markers on the currently selected series. Click to clear this check box to remove
markers from the selected series. This option is synchronized with the Show Markers check box in the Markers
tab and can later be reversed at the datapoint level. The Markers tab is presented in detail in Section 15.2.3.20.
Automatic Markers if selected, automatically assigns a marker to all non-custom data points in a series. A non-
custom data point is any data point that has no custom attributes. Click to clear this check box to select your own
choice of marker. Specifying a custom data point marker for your series at a later time will also click to clear this
check box in the tab.
Y Axis Index if your chart has more than one Y axis, use this list box to choose which axis to plot the selected
series on. The Y axes appear as subcharts stacked in ascending numerical order of their Y axis numbers, so the Y1
axis is on the bottom, Y2 above it, Y3 above that, etc. Note that the Y Axis Index list does not affect the secondary
Y axis, which is the Y axis that appears on the right side of the chart.
Smoothing allows you to select the smoothing function and factor.
Function allows you to select a smoothing type.
None indicates no smoothing is applied to the data.
Quadratic B-Spline indicates quadratic B-spline is used for smoothing the data. This form results in a less
smooth curve that stays closer to the data points.
Cubic B-Spline indicates cubic B-spline is used for smoothing the data. This form results in a smoother
curve, but varies further from the data point than the quadratic B-spline curve.
Factor allows you to specify the number of facets or points sampled between the chart data points to create
the smoothing effect. The higher the number, the more smoothing occurs.
15.2 Chart Designer
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 427
Bars
Sides allows you to enter a value between 1 and 360 to indicate the number of sides for the bars.
Top Ratio allows you to enter a number between 0 and 10,000 to indicate the percent of the bottom diameter
used to draw the top of the chart. Values less than 100 result in a top smaller than the bottom. Values greater
than 100 result in the top wider than the bottom.
Hi Lo Close
Gain Color displays the Color Palette and allows you to select the color used to indicate a gain in value.
Select a predefined color or click Custom to mix your own color. Select Automatic to cause all elements that
reflect a gain in value to use the fill color defined for the series.
Loss Color displays the Color Palette and allows you to select the color used to indicate a loss in value. Select
a predefined color or click Custom to mix your own color. Select Automatic to cause all elements that reflect
a loss in value to use the fill color defined for the series.
15.2.3.24 Order
The Order tab allows you to specify the order in selected series element. This tab applies to the following selected
chart elements: Series.
Up moves the selected series up one position in order.
Down moves the selected series down one position in order.
Stack stacks the selected series with the preceding series.
Unstack unstacks the selected stack associated with the series.
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer
428 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
15.2.3.25 Other
The Other tab allows you to customize aspects of selected element(s) including gap ratios and angles. This tab applies
to the following chart elements: Plot.
Radar/Polar/Pie
Clockwise if selected, draws the pie, doughnut, polar and radar charts in a clockwise direction. Clear the
check box to draw the charts in a counterclockwise direction.
Start Angle allows you to type a value between 0 and 360 degrees to indicate the point on a circle at which
drawing starts for pie, doughnut, polar and radar charts. A starting angle of 0 degrees indicates the 3 oclock
position. A starting angle of 90 degrees moves the starting position to 12 oclock if the direction is set to
counterclockwise, or to 6 oclock if the direction is set to clockwise. The value is displayed in degrees,
radians, or grads, depending on the setting in the Angle Units option.
Scale Angle allows you to specify where you would like to display the scale on the chart. Angles are
measured in the direction specified by the Clockwise check box. A value of 0 starts at the 3 oclock position.
Angle Units allows you to choose the unit of measure for all angles in the chart. This affects the unit of
measure used for: drawing the angle (Y coordinate) in a polar chart; the starting angle for polar, pie and
doughnut charts; scale angle for radar and polar charts; and the rotation and elevation of 3D charts. Choose
degrees, radians, or grads.
Bars
Bar Gap Ratio allows you to determine a bar gap value between 10,000 and -100. The default bar gap of 50
percent places a space between each bar that is half as wide as the bars.
X Gap Ratio allows you to determine an X gap ratio to any value between 0 and 10,000.
Z Gap Ratio allows you to determine a Z gap value between 0 and 10,000.
Uniform Axes if selected, specifies that the unit scale for all value axes in the current chart is uniform.
Y Axis Count allows you to enter the number of stacked Y axes you want on your chart. Multiple Y axes apply
only to 2D charts that have conventional, perpendicular X and Y axes. They will not appear on 3D charts or on
Pie, Polar, Radar or Contour 2D charts. You can indicate which series to plot on which Y axis by selecting the
series node, clicking the Options tab and entering a Y Axis Index number.
15.2 Chart Designer
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 429
15.2.3.26 Pens
The Pens tab allows you to customize the pen style for the Axes and Grids on selected element(s). This tab applies to
the following chart elements: X Axes, Y Axes, 2nd Y Axes, Z Axes.
Axis Pen
Width allows you to select a predefined width from the list or click Custom to assign your own width.
Color displays the Color Palette. Select a predefined color or click Custom to mix your own color.
Minor Grid Pen
Style allows you to select a minor grid line style from the list.
Width allows you to select a predefined width from the list or click Custom to design your own width.
Color displays the Color Palette. Select a predefined color or click Custom to mix your own color.
Major Grid Pen
Style allows you to select a minor grid line style from the list.
Width allows you to select a predefined width from the list or click Custom to design your own width.
Color displays the Color Palette. Select a predefined color or click Custom to mix your own color.
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer
430 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
15.2.3.27 Percent Format
The Percent Format tab allows you to specify the percentage format for selected element(s). This tab applies to the
following chart elements: Datapoint Labels.
Category allows you to select a category to display a list of preset format strings appropriate for that type of data
in the Format Codes list box.
Format Codes displays the predefined strings and allows you to select one.
Custom Format allows you to enter valid format symbols in this field to create your own custom format.
15.2.3.28 Picture
The Picture tab allows you to set options for pictures in the selected element(s). This tab applies to the following chart
elements: Axis Title, Datapoint, Datapoint Label, Footnote, Axis Label, Legend, Plot, Title, Chart, Series Label.
Picture Display Box displays a preview of the graphic. Only bitmap (*.bmp) and metafile (*.wmf) graphic
formats are supported.
Picture Size determines how to fit the graphic into the backdrop space.
Actual Size displays the graphic at the original size it was created. If the original size of the graphic is too
large, the graphic is cropped. If the original size of the graphic is too small, it is centered.
Best Fit scales the graphic proportionally to fit entirely within the backdrop.
15.2 Chart Designer
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 431
Stretch to Fit scales the graphic to fit the backdrop regardless of its original proportions.
Tiled duplicates the graphic repeatedly to fill the backdrop.
Crop Fitted centers the graphic and scales it proportionally to fill the backdrop. Any part of the image that
falls outside the backdrop is cropped.
Clear clears an existing picture from the backdrop. Some graphics files can be very large. In order to minimize
performance problems, it is recommended that you always clear one picture from the backdrop before specifying
a new one. This prevents the system from having to deal with two large graphics files simultaneously.
Paste pastes a Windows metafile (*.wmf) or bitmap (*.bmp) file from the Clipboard into the current backdrop.
You can also paste a graphic into an existing backdrop by selecting the backdrop on the screen and selecting the
Paste command from the shortcut menu. Select the graphic file you want to paste into the backdrop and click OK.
Browse displays a standard Open dialog box. Select the file to display and click OK. The path and file will then
appear in the File field and a preview of the graphic appears in the Picture Display Box.
Embed picture if selected, saves the picture file with the chart. In order to save space, it is better not to embed
pictures in charts unless they will be unavailable later.
File allows you to add a picture to the backdrop. Type the full path to the graphic file in the File field or click the
Browse button to display the Open dialog box. When you specify a valid path, a preview of the graphic appears in
the dialog box.
15.2.3.29 Pie
The Pie tab allows you to customize elements in selected Pie charts. This tab applies to the following chart elements:
Plot.
Weighting
Area if selected, weights pies and doughnuts by the area of the chart elements.
Diameter if selected, weights pies and doughnuts by the diameter of each chart element.
Basis allows you to control the size of each pie or doughnut in relation to the other pies or doughnuts in the
same chart. Choose from the following options:
None indicates that all pies and doughnuts are drawn the same size.
Pie Total indicates that the slice values in each pie are totaled and the pie with the highest total identified.
The size of each pie in the chart is determined by the ratio of its total value compared to the largest pie.
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer
432 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
First Series indicates that the size of a pie is determined by the relationship of values in the first series of
each pie. The larger the value in the first series, the bigger the pie. It is most common to exclude this first
series so that the values are not drawn as pie slices.
Label Position allows you to control where the labels for each pie or doughnut are placed on the chart. These
labels are actually category labels. They use the font and backdrops defined for the X axis labels. Choose from the
following options:
None indicates that no label is displayed.
Above indicates that the label is displayed above the pie or doughnut.
Below indicates that the label is displayed below the pie or doughnut.
Center indicates that the label is centered on the pie or doughnut.
Sorting allows you to control the order in which the slices of pie and doughnut charts are drawn. Choose from the
following options:
None indicates that pie slices are drawn in the order the data appears in the data grid.
Ascending indicates that pie slices are drawn from the smallest to the largest slice, starting at the defined
starting angle.
Descending indicates that pie slices are drawn from the largest to the smallest slice, starting at the defined
starting angle.
3D
Thickness Ratio specifies the percentage of the pie or doughnut radius that determines the height of a 3D pie
or doughnut. The higher the percentage, the taller the pie or doughnut. You can type a value between 0 and
100 percent.
Top Radius Ratio specifies the percentage of the pie radius that is used to draw the top of a 3D pie. A ratio of
100 draws a cylinder; values less than 100 result in a tapering of the top of the pie. A value of 0 results in a
cone.
Interior Ratio describes the ratio of the entire doughnut size that is used to display the interior hole of the
doughnut. You can type any number between 0 percent and 100 percent for this setting.
Sides controls the number of sides used to draw a doughnut. More sides give the doughnut a rounder,
smoother appearance. If you type a value of 1 in this option, the number of sides needed to draw a round
doughnut will be determined based on the size of the doughnut. The maximum value for this option is 360. A
very large number of sides could impact performance.
15.2 Chart Designer
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 433
15.2.3.30 Position
The Position tab allows you to select the position of the selected element(s). This tab applies to the following chart
elements: Plot.
Automatic Location if selected, automatically positions the plot within the spreadsheet. If Automatic Location is
not selected, you specify the position of the plot using the input boxes located under Custom Location.
Custom Location allows you to type an appropriate value for each of the following location settings in order to
specify the position of the plot within the spreadsheet. This option is only available if Automatic Location is not
selected.
Top allows you to determine the location for the top of the chart element.
Left allows you to determine the location for the left edge of the chart element.
Height allows you to determine the height of the chart element.
Width allows you to determine the width of the chart element.
15.2.3.31 Scale Type
The Scale Type tab allows you to customize the scale type to be used on selected Axis element(s). This tab applies to
the following chart elements: Category Axes.
Scale Type
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer
434 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Linear plots the data points on a linear scale with values ranging from the minimum to the maximum chart
value. This is the default scale type.
Logarithmic plots the data points on a logarithmic scale with the values based on a specific log scale.
Logarithmic axes are not appropriate for zero or negative data.
Log Base is enabled if Logarithmic is selected. This allows you to specify the base to be used for a
logarithmic scale axis. The default base is 10.
Percent plots the data points in a linear scale as a percentage of the chart values. Changing the percent basis of
a chart is useful for determining overall trends in data rather than specific values.
Percent Basis is enabled if you select Percent as the axis type.
Chart Maximum is the largest value in the chart and is considered 100 percent. All other values are
displayed as a percentage of this value.
Category Maximum is the largest value in each category and is considered 100 percent. All other values
in the category are displayed as a percentage of this value.
Series Maximum is the largest value in each series and is considered 100 percent. All other values in the
series are displayed as a percentage of this value.
Chart Total is all of the values in the chart added together and is considered 100 percent. All values in the
chart are displayed as a percentage of this value.
Category Total is all of the values in each category added together to give a total for each category. All
values are displayed as a percentage of their category total.
Series Total is all of the values in each series added together to give a total for each series. All values are
displayed as a percentage of their series total.
15.2.3.32 Series Type
The Series Type tab allows you to specify the series type for the selected series element(s). This tab applies to the
following chart elements: Series.
Series allows you to select a series from the list for which to define the display type.
Display As allows you to select the series type you would like to use to display the data in the selected series.
15.2 Chart Designer
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 435
15.2.3.33 Statistics
The Statistics tab allows you to customize statistics options for selected element(s). This tab applies to the following
chart elements: Series.
Show allows you to specify the statistical lines to show on the chart. For each type of statistic, select the check
box to display the line or clear the check box to remove the line.
Minimum if selected, shows the minimum Y value in the series. Then choose a line style from the drop-down
menu.
Maximum if selected, shows the maximum Y value in the series. Then choose a line style from the drop-
down menu.
Mean if selected, shows the mathematical mean of the Y values in the series. Then choose a line style from
the drop-down menu.
Standard Deviation if selected, shows the standard deviation of the Y values in the series. Then choose a line
style from the drop-down menu.
Regression if selected, shows a trend line indicated by the Y values in a series. Then choose a line style from
the drop-down menu.
Width allows you to select a width for the statistics lines or click Custom and set a new width.
Color allows you to select the color from the palette for the statistics lines that represent the current series or
select Custom to display the custom color palette. If you select Automatic, the statistics line adopts the series line
color.
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer
436 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
15.2.3.34 Style
The Style tab allows you to define the style for selected element(s). This tab applies to the following chart elements:
Series Labels.
Text Location determines the location for series data labels.
None hides the series data label.
Left displays the series data label above the first data point in the series.
Center displays the series data label above the middle data point in the series.
Right displays the series data label above the last data point in the series.
Label Line Style defines the line connecting a series data label to the series it represents.
None displays no line connecting the label and series.
Straight displays a straight line connecting the label and series.
Angled displays an angled line connecting the label and series.
15.2.3.35 Text
The Text tab allows you to type text into selected element(s). This tab applies to the following chart elements: Axis
Title, Datapoint Label, Footnote, Series Label, Title.
15.2 Chart Designer
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 437
Text allows you to type the text to be displayed by the chart element(s) you are formatting. Use CTRL + ENTER
to manually insert line breaks. If you wish to wrap text that exceeds the width of the bounding box, you will need
to set the word wrap option on the Layout tab. The Layout tab is presented in detail in Section 15.2.3.17.
15.2.3.36 3D Lighting
The 3D Lighting tab allows you to customize the lighting in 3D plots. This tab applies to the following chart
elements: Plot.
Ambient Light allows you to specify a number between 0 and 100 percent to specify the amount of ambient
lighting to apply to the chart. If ambient light is set to 100 percent, all sides of the chart elements are illuminated
equally no matter what light sources you turn on. If Ambient Light is set to 0, only the sides of chart elements
facing the active light sources are illuminated. The default setting for ambient light is 15 percent.
Edge Intensity if selected, activates the edge intensity. You can specify a number between 0 and 100 percent to
specify the amount of lighting applied to the edges of 3D objects such as bars, lines, pies or doughnuts. An edge
light intensity of 0 draws the edges as black lines. An edge light intensity of 100 percent fully illuminates the
edges using the edge pens color. The default edge pen color is the same as the series fill color.
Light Source Intensities allows you to specify a value between 0 and 100 percent for each of the light sources.
At an intensity of 100 percent, chart surfaces perpendicular to the light source are fully illuminated. At an
intensity of 50 percent, these surfaces receive 50 percent illumination from this light. A setting of 0 turns off the
light source.
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer
438 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
15.2.3.37 3D View
The 3D View tab allows you to modify the view and perspective in 3D plots. This tab applies to the following chart
elements: Plot.
View
Elevation allows you to specify a number between 0 and 90 degrees to describe the relative height from which
a chart is viewed. If you set the elevation to 90, you look directly down on the top of the chart. If you set the
elevation to 0, you look directly at the side of the chart. If you are using an angle measurement other than
degrees, use the proper equivalents. The default elevation is 30 degrees.
Rotation allows you to specify a number between 0 and 360 degrees to specify the angle that the chart is
turned from the viewer. If you are using an angle measurement other than degrees, use the proper equivalents.
Rotation does not apply to 3D pie or doughnut charts.
Viewing Distance allows you to specify a positive number that represents the distance from which the chart is
viewed as a percentage of the depth of the chart.
Width to Height allows you to determine the number representing the percentage of the chart's height used to
draw the chart's width.
Depth to Height allows you to determine the number representing the percentage of the chart's height used to
draw the chart's depth.
15.2 Chart Designer
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 439
Projection allows you to select a projection type from the list box.
Oblique is sometimes referred to as 2.5 dimensional. The chart has depth, but the XY plane does not change
when the chart is rotated or elevated.
Orthogonal indicates that perspective is not applied to the chart. The advantage of using this type of
projection is that vertical lines remain vertical, making some charts easier to read.
Perspective provides the most realistic 3D appearance. Objects farther away from you converge toward a
vanishing point.
15.2.3.38 Type
The Type page index tab allows you to specify the chart type. This tab applies to the following chart elements: Chart.
Chart
2D allows you to select a chart type from the available 2D chart types. Scroll through the list to select a chart
type.
3D allows you to select a chart type from the available 3D chart types. Scroll through the list to select a chart
type.
Reset Chart to Defaults resets all chart options to their defaults settings.
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer
440 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Layout Text
For Printing optimizes the text layout for printing by using TrueType virtual font metrics. TrueType virtual
font metrics might not be very accurate for text displayed on the screen. Text displayed on the screen could be
larger or smaller than the virtual metrics requested. Larger text might not fit where it is supposed to and part of
a character, a whole character, or in some cases, words could be clipped.
For Display optimizes the text layout for the screen. Text in charts laid out for screen display always fits
correctly within its chart area. The printed text is generally a bit smaller and so the text might appear in
slightly different places.
Data in Rows if selected, reads the series data from the data grid rows rather than from the columns.
15.2.3.39 Value Format
The Value Format tab allows you to customize the value format for selected element(s). This tab applies to the
following chart elements: Datapoint Labels.
Category allows you to select a format category in this list to display a list of preset format strings in the Format
Codes list box at right.
Format Codes displays the predefined format strings and allows you to select one.
Custom Format allows you to enter valid format symbols in this field to create your own custom format.
15.2 Chart Designer
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 441
15.2.3.40 Value Scale
The Value Scale tab allows you to customize the value scale for the selected element(s). This tab applies to the
following chart elements: Category Axes.
Scale
Show if selected, displays the axis scale, line, ticks and title on the axis. Clear this check box to hide the axis
elements.
Automatic if selected, automatically scales the axis based on the minimum and maximum values in the data
being charted. Clear this check box to manually scale the axis based on values you provide.
Minimum is the lowest or beginning value for the scale.
Maximum is the highest or ending value for the scale.
Ticks
None displays no tick marks.
Center centers the tick marks across the axis.
Inside displays the tick marks inside the axis.
Outside displays the tick marks outside the axis.
Length is the length of the major tick marks in points. Minor tick marks are drawn at half this length.
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer
442 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Divisions
Major is the number of major intervals that pass before a tick mark is placed on the axis.
Minor is the number of minor intervals that pass before a tick mark is placed on the axis.
Intersection
Automatic if selected, causes the axes to intersect at their usual position. Clear this check box to enable the
Cross At and Labels Inside Plot options to specify where you want the current axis to cross an intersecting
axis.
Cross At allows you to determine the position at which you want the current axis to cross an intersecting axis.
If the intersecting axis is a value axis, type the value at which you want to place the current axis. If the
intersecting axis is a date or category axis, type the division number at which you want to place the current
axis.
Labels Inside Plot if selected, moves the axis labels with the axis to the new intersection point. This could
cause labels to display on top of the chart plot. Clear this check box to leave the labels in their original
positions.
15.2.3.41 Walls
The Walls tab allows you to customize the characteristics of plot walls. This tab applies to the following chart
elements: Plot.
Wall Width allows you to specify the point width of the walls. This affects only 3D charts.
15.2 Chart Designer
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 443
Pen
Style allows you to select a line style for the lines that frame the walls or base.
Width allows you to select a width for the lines that frame the walls or base; or select Custom to specify your
own line width.
Color displays the Color Palette. Select one of the predefined colors to draw the lines that make up the base or
walls or click Custom to mix your own color.
Fill
Pattern displays the Pattern Palette. Select one of the patterns, click None to have no pattern on the object or
click Solid to use only the fill color to fill the object.
Fill Color displays the Color Palette. Select one of the predefined colors or click Custom to mix your own
color.
Pattern Color displays the Color Palette. Select one of the predefined colors or click Custom to mix your
own color.
15.2.4 Editing Chart Data
When using the Chart Designer in the General Spreadsheet or 3-D Plot, you can edit the data that supports the charts.
The next sections describe the chart data grid that underlies each chart and the Edit Chart Data window with which
you can edit that data.
15.2.4.1 Chart Data Grid
Each chart in the General Spreadsheet or 3-D Plot is associated with a data grid. This data grid is a table that holds the
data being charted. Each column in the data grid represents one series and each value in the column is a separate data
point in the chart. The data grid can also include labels used to identify series and categories on the chart. The
following illustration shows the relationship between a data grid and a chart.
15 Chart Wizard and Chart Designer
444 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
In most cases, each column in the data grid translates to one series on the chart. However, a number of chart types
require two or more columns of data to chart a series. These chart types include XY Charts, Polar, Bubble, Hi-Lo and
Gantt charts. Chart types are presented in detail in Section 15.1.5 on page 402.
15.2.4.2 Edit Chart Data Window
In each chart in the General Spreadsheet or 3-D Plot, you can easily modify the data in the chart data grid and change
the size of the chart data grid by using the Edit Chart Data window. To access the Edit Chart Data window, right-click
the chart control to display the Format Chart shortcut menu and select Edit Chart Data.
A window will appear like the one shown next.
In the Edit Chart Data window, you can make changes to the column and row headings and to the data by selecting
any cell in the data grid.
Grid Sizes allows you to modify the numbers of rows, columns and labels in the data grid. To modify grid size,
type a new value into the appropriate input box.
Rows allows you to modify the number of rows in the data grid.
Columns allows you to modify the number of columns in the data grid.
Row Labels allows you to modify the number of row labels in the data grid.
Column Labels allows you to modify the number of column labels in the data grid.
OK accepts any changes made in the window and applies them to the selected chart.
Cancel cancels any changes made and returns you to the current chart.
Apply applies any changes made to the chart and keeps the window open for further changes.
Help activates the Chart Designers on-line help.
15.2 Chart Designer
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 445
15.2.4.3 Edit Chart Data Shortcut Menu
The Edit Chart Data shortcut menu appears when you right-click within the Edit Chart Data window directly on the
chart.
Cut cuts the selected range to the Clipboard. Data stored in the Clipboard can be pasted into this and other
applications.
Copy copies the selected range to the Clipboard. Data stored in the Clipboard can be pasted into this and other
applications.
Paste pastes the contents of the Clipboard into the current control.
Delete deletes the contents of the selected cell(s).
Add Row allows you to insert a row at the current cursor location. You have the option to insert the row before or
after the current cursor location.
Add Column allows you to insert another column. You have the option to add the label before or after the current
cursor location.
Delete Row deletes the selected row.
Delete Column deletes the selected column.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 447
In life data analysis and accelerated life testing analysis, the reliability engineer will typically select a model to fit
data obtained from testing or usage in the field. However, in some situations, it is useful to generate simulated data
sets containing values that are distributed according to a specified life distribution or model. For example, simulated
data could be used to:
Test different warranty and maintenance strategies.
Perform risk analysis.
Obtain simulation-based confidence bounds.
Analyze probabilistic design models.
Design reliability tests.
Compare different parameter estimation methods.
Evaluate the impact of different censoring schemes.
With Weibull++ and ALTA, you can use Monte Carlo simulation to produce data sets based on various user inputs,
such as distribution type, distribution parameters and sample size. To create a data set, the software uses the cdf
(cumulative distribution function) of the relevant distribution or model to solve for time given an unreliability value
chosen from a uniform random distribution. The process is repeated with new random unreliability values until the
desired number of data points is obtained.
Two utilities are available for producing simulated data. The Monte Carlo utility (which comes in a Weibull++
version and an ALTA version) uses Monte Carlo simulation to generate a single data set containing values that are
distributed according to a specified life distribution or user-defined model. The data set is then automatically placed
in a standard folio, where it can be analyzed like any other data set. SimuMatic (which also comes in a Weibull++
version and an ALTA version) generates a large number of data sets using Monte Carlo simulation. It then analyzes
the group of data sets as a whole. For example, you can use SimuMatic to find the average reliability at a given time
for a thousand simulated data sets.
This chapter describes how to use these utilities, including:
Using the Weibull++ version of the Monte Carlo tool:
Generating data based on a user-defined equation - Section 16.1.1 (p. 450).
A user-defined equation example - Section 16.1.2 (p. 451).
Using the ALTA version of the Monte Carlo tool - Section 16.2 (p. 454).
Using SimuMatic, including:
Generating data with Weibull++ SimuMatic - Section 16.3.1 (p. 457).
Generating data with ALTA SimuMatic - Section 16.3.2 (p. 458).
Monte Carlo and SimuMatic
16
16 Monte Carlo and SimuMatic
448 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Using the SimuMatic folio - Section 16.3.3 (p. 458).
Transferring data to a Weibull++ standard folio - Section 16.3.4 (p. 461).
Designing reliability tests - Section 16.3.5 (p. 463).
An example of using the Weibull++ SimuMatic utility - Section 16.3.6 (p. 465).
An example of using the ALTA SimuMatic utility - Section 16.3.7 (p. 467)
16.1 Weibull++ Monte Carlo Utility
The Weibull++ Monte Carlo utility uses Monte Carlo simulation to generate a single
data set containing values that are distributed according to a specified life distribution or
user-defined model. The software uses the cdf (cumulative distribution function) of the relevant distribution to solve
for time given an unreliability value chosen from a uniform random distribution. The process is repeated with new
random unreliability values until the desired number of data points is obtained. The data set is then automatically
placed in a Weibull++ standard folio, where it can be analyzed like any other data set. See Chapter 4.
To access the Weibull++ Monte Carlo utility, choose Home > Weibull++ Monte Carlo. The setup window will
appear. Follow the steps outlined below to generate the data set:
1. On the Main tab of the window, select a lifetime distribution, enter its required parameter values and select the
time units (e.g., hours) for the failures/suspensions in the data set. In addition, please note the following:
If the estimated values of the distribution parameters are not available, you can use the Quick Parameter
Estimator button to solve for them.
With the User-Defined option, you can manually enter an equation that relates different random variables. In
the Equation area, use R to insert a uniform random variable. If desired, you can also click the Insert Data
Source button to generate simulated values based on distributions calculated in standard folios from your
current project. See Section 16.1.1 on page 450.
If you select the normal, logistic or generalized gamma distributions, an additional option to allow the
generation of negative time values will become available. When generating data to simulate a test, negative
failure times can be used to simulate failures that occur before a unit's testing period begins, such as failures
due to manufacturing defects or damage that is incurred during shipping.
For all other predefined distributions (e.g., Weibull, lognormal, etc.), the utility will generate only positive
values.
16.1 Weibull++ Monte Carlo Utility
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 449
If you select a mixed Weibull distribution, you will need to specify parameters for each subpopulation.
To specify the parameters for a subpopulation, select the subpopulation in the Subpop drop-down list, then
enter the parameter values. Each input field will have a number in brackets to indicate which
subpopulation that field is applicable to.
The Portion field is for the portion (or percentage, entered as a decimal) of the total data set represented
by the selected subpopulation. Thus, the sum of the portion values for all subpopulations must be equal to
1.
1
2. Select the appropriate option on the Censoring tab:
No censoring: The generated data set will contain only exact failure times (i.e., it will contain no right
censored, interval or left censored data).
Right censoring after specific number of failures: You specify the number of failures, n, that the generated
data set will contain in the Number of Failures field. After the data are generated, the data is sorted. The first
n data points will be marked as failures while the remaining data points will be marked as suspensions at a
time equal to the time of the nth failure.. When used with SimuMatic, this option allows you to simulate a
failure-terminated test (i.e., a test that ends after a specified number of failures occur).
Right censoring after a specific time: You specify a duration in the Time field. All simulated values that do
not exceed this time will be marked as failure times. Values that exceed this time will be considered
suspensions at the specified time (i.e., units that had not failed by the end of the test). When used with
SimuMatic, this option allows you to simulate a time-terminated test (i.e., a test that ends after a specified
time).
Random censoring: You provide percentages to specify what proportions of your total data points will consist
of right censored, interval and left censored data. The remaining data points will be exact failure times. Thus,
the sum of the three percentages entered cannot exceed 100%. This option can be useful for exploring how
different kinds of uncertainty in your data can influence the results of an analysis.
For example, with the settings shown in the following picture, the software will generate a set of data points,
where 20% of the data are right censored, 20% are interval censored, 20% are left censored and the remaining
40% are complete data (i.e., exact failure times).
1.
The ReliWiki resource portal has more information on the mixed Weibull distribution at: http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/
The_Mixed_Weibull_Distribution.
Note: With random censoring, the software will censor your data using a uniform distribution. If this option is used
to generate multiple data sets in SimuMatic, the percentages you enter will apply to the total number of generated
data points, not the number of data points within each data set. Thus, if you select to have 50% of your generated
data consist of suspensions (right censored data), half of all your data points will be suspensions, though some
data sets may still contain more suspensions than others.
16 Monte Carlo and SimuMatic
450 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
3. On the Settings tab, specify how you want to generate the data set and where you want the data to be stored.
Select the Use Seed check box if you would like to set a consistent starting point from which the random
numbers will be generated. Using the same seed value and keeping all other settings the same will allow you
to replicate your results.
In the Math Precision field, enter the number of decimal places you wish to use for each simulated data point.
In the Number of data points field, enter the number of data points you wish to generate.
In the Folio and the Sheet drop-down lists, choose where to put the simulated data.
If you choose <New Folio> the software will create a new folio to place the data into. If you choose <New
Sheet> the software will create a new sheet in a new or existing folio, depending on what you chose in the
Folio drop-down list.
Click the Active button to select the folio and data sheet that were active when the utility was opened. If
you would like the utility to always select the active folio and data sheet, select the check box labeled
Select active folio/sheet when loading this window.
After the simulation is set up, click Generate to create a data set according to your specifications. A Weibull++
standard folio containing the data will appear.
16.1.1 User-Defined Equations
The Weibull++ Monte Carlo utility includes the option to generate simulated values based on equations you enter.
When you select User-Defined in the Distribution area on the Main tab of the Monte Carlo utility, the Parameters
area will be replaced with an Equation field. Note that any uniform random variable in the equation must be
indicated by the variable R.
For example, consider the following equation:
Substituting the value of b = 0.5 and using the variable R to represent x, you could enter the following in the
Equation field:
(1/0.5) * exp(-(R/0.5))
You can also generate data based on distributions calculated in standard folios (data sources) from your current
project. To do this, click the Insert Data Source button to select a standard folio. The software will enter a variable
based on that folio's distribution into the Equation area on the Main tab. (If desired, you can also combine equations
based on folios with equations that use the uniform random variable R.)
As an example, if you wanted to generate a data set that contains a range of possible area measurements, where each
data point is obtained by multiplying a length value obtained from one Weibull++ standard folio data sheet and a
Note: A new uniform random variable is chosen for each time R appears in the user-defined equation. For example, if you
enter R^2, the software will compute the square of one uniform random number. But if you entering R*R, the software will
compute the product of two different uniform random numbers. Thus, these two equations will generate different data sets.
16.1 Weibull++ Monte Carlo Utility
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 451
height value obtained from another data sheet, your user-defined equation might look like this after you insert the
data sources and edit the equation:
'Folio!Length' * 'Folio!Height'
where:
Folio is the name of the standard folio that was used to fit a distribution to the available information for length
and height.
Length is the name of the data sheet containing the length data set.
Height is the name of the data sheet containing the height data set.
You could then send the simulated data set for possible area values to a Weibull++ folio and analyze it as you would
any other data set.
This functionality gives you the flexibility to generate data sets for a wide variety of applications. For example, you
can perform probabilistic design analysis by analyzing the variability of the parts of a product (e.g., computing the
distributions for each parts size) and then creating a user-defined equation that is defined in terms of the distributions
associated with each part. Then data can be generated to, for example, analyze the probability that the product will
meet certain size specifications.
16.1.2 User-Defined Equation Example
This example demonstrates how to use a user-defined equation in order to perform probabilistic design analysis using
the Monte Carlo utility.
A company manufactures hinges that are made up of four components A, B, C and D. The next figure shows a
schematic of the hinge's assembly.
The manufacturer wants to determine the percentage of hinges that would fall out of specifications. Specifically, the
manufacturer wants to estimate the probability that (A+B+C) will be greater than D. For that purpose, data sets were
16 Monte Carlo and SimuMatic
452 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
collected for the dimensions of each of the manufactured components. Of each of the components A, B, C and D,
seven units were taken from the assembly line and the following measurements were recorded.
The first step in this analysis is to model the dimensions of each of the parts using the recorded data. To do this, create
a Weibull++ standard folio configured for times-to-failure. Name this folio Components. Then enter the dimension
measurements into the new folio with a separate data sheet for each component. Next, analyze each data set assuming
a normal distribution and RRX as the analysis method. Below is the Components folio with the analysis results for
component D displayed.
After the parameters for each data set are calculated, Monte Carlo simulation can be performed to estimate the
probability that (A+B+C) will be greater than D. Choose Home > Weibull++ Monte Carlo. The Weibull++ Monte
Carlo tool will appear.
Dimensions
for A (cm)
Dimensions
for B (cm)
Dimensions
for C (cm)
Dimensions
for D (cm)
2.0187 1.9795 30.4216 33.6573
1.9996 2.0288 29.9818 34.5432
2.0329 2.0327 30.192 34.7538
2.0273 2.0354 30.1343 35.2666
1.984 1.9908 30.0423 35.7111
16.1 Weibull++ Monte Carlo Utility
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 453
In the Distribution area on the Main tab, choose User-Defined for the distribution and click the Insert Data Source
button to insert the first data sheet from the Components folio. Click the button again to insert the second data
sheet, and repeat until all four data sheets are entered. Edit the user-defined equation so it appears as shown next.
'Components!A' + 'Components!B' + 'Components!C' - 'Components!D'
In the Data Points area on the Settings tab, enter 1000 for the number of data points. Choose <New Folio> and <New
Sheet> from the drop-down lists in the Put the data points in area. Then click Generate to create the simulated data.
In the new data sheet that contains the simulated data, calculate the parameters, assuming a normal distribution and
RRX as the analysis method.
The following is a pdf plot of the simulated data for (A+B+C-D).
The probability that (A+B+C) > D is equal to the probability that (A+B+C-D) > 0. Thus, the area under the curve of
the above pdf from time = 0 to infinitywhere time is actually the value of (A+B+C-D)will tell us how likely it
is that the product will fall out of specifications (i.e., the likelihood that A+B+C will be greater than D).
16 Monte Carlo and SimuMatic
454 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Use the QCP to calculate the probability, as shown next. (Note that we will use the Results as Reliability option in
the QCP, even though we are finding the likelihood of falling out of specifications, since the calculation we wish to
perform is equivalent to finding the reliability of a randomly generated data set at time = 0.)
The results show that the probability that (A+B+C) will be greater than D is 26.37%. Note that your results might
vary because the data were obtained through simulation.
16.2 ALTA Monte Carlo Utility
The ALTA Monte Carlo utility uses Monte Carlo simulation to generate a single data set
containing values that are distributed according to a specified model. The software uses the
cdf (cumulative distribution function) of the relevant model to solve for time given an unreliability value chosen from
a uniform random distribution. The process is repeated with new random unreliability values until the desired number
of data points is obtained. The data set is then automatically placed in a ALTA standard folio, where it can be
analyzed like any other data set.
To access ALTAs Monte Carlo utility choose Home > ALTA Monte Carlo. The setup window will appear. Follow
the steps outlined below to set up the simulation:
1. On the Main tab of the window, select a model, enter its required parameter values and select the time units (e.g.,
hours) for the failures/suspensions in the data set. In addition, please note the following:
If the estimated values of the distribution parameters are not available, you can use the Quick Parameter
Estimator button to solve for them.
If you select a proportional hazards (PPH), general log-linear (GLL) or cumulative damage (CD) model, you
will have the option to change the number of stress columns in the data sheet. When this option is available,
the Number of Stress Columns area, shown next, will be enabled.
16.2 ALTA Monte Carlo Utility
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 455
Every additional stress column represents an additional stress type. So, for example, a data sheet with two
stress columns would be used to simulate data obtained from a two-stress test. The different rows would then
be used to represent different stress value combinations for the two stresses.
If you select a cumulative damage (CD) model, then you will have the option to create a new time-varying
stress profile or open an existing one from this window. You can create a new profile by choosing <Add New>
from the Stress Profiles drop-down list and then clicking the Create/View Profile icon next to the list. You
can open an existing profile by choosing it from the drop-down list (as shown next) and then clicking the icon.
2. On the Stress tab, enter the appropriate Use Level stress value for each stress type. This is the stress level that the
product is expected to operate under during normal use conditions. If you have selected to generate a data set with
more than one stress type, multiple input fields will be available, where the first input field corresponds to Stress
1, the second to Stress 2, and so forth.
If you select a general log-linear (GLL) or cumulative damage (CD) model, you must also select an
appropriate option from the Transformation drop-down list for each stress.
Use the None X=V transformation for stress types associated with the exponential life-stress relationship
(LSR). This transformation is commonly used for indicator variables (e.g., 0 = on/off and 1 = continuous
operation).
Use the Reciprocal X=1/V transformation for stress types associated with the Arrhenius LSR. This
transformation is commonly used for thermal stresses.
Use the Logarithmic X=ln[V] transformation for stress types associated with the inverse power law LSR.
This transformation is commonly used for non-thermal stresses.
3. In the data sheet on the right side of the window, specify how many data points you want generated for each stress
level, and specify the values for each stress level.
For example, if you wanted to generate 30 data points, 10 at 3 different stress levels, you could enter the
following.
Each row in the data sheet represents a stress level, and every stress column represents a stress type. For a
multi-stress model, the stress level is the combination of stress values that will be applied to each group of
tested units. Thus, the first row of the above table would configure the utility to generate 10 data points from 2
stresses, one with a value of 348 and another with a value of 3. The second row would generate an additional
10 data points from a different combination of stress values, and so on.
If you select a cumulative damage (CD) model, you will be able to assign time-varying stress profiles to the
stress columns of the data sheet. Click a cell in a stress column and a drop-down list will appear. This list will
include all validated stress profiles in your current project.
16 Monte Carlo and SimuMatic
456 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
4. Select the appropriate option on the Censoring tab:
No censoring: The generated data set will contain only exact failure times (i.e., it will contain no right
censored, interval or left censored data).
Right censoring after specific number of failures: You specify the number of failures, n, that the generated
data set will contain in the Number of Failures field. After the data are generated, the data is sorted. The first
n data points will be marked as failures while the remaining data points will be marked as suspensions at a
time equal to the time of the nth failure. When used with SimuMatic, this option allows you to simulate a
failure-terminated test (i.e., a test that ends after a specified number of failures occur).
Right censoring after a specific time: You specify a duration in the Time field. All simulated values that do
not exceed this time will be marked as failure times. Values that exceed this time will be considered
suspensions at the specified time (i.e., units that had not failed by the end of the test). When used with
SimuMatic, this option allows you to simulate a time-terminated test (i.e., a test that ends after a specified
time).
5. On the Settings tab, specify how you want to generate the data set and where you want the data to be stored.
Select the Use Seed check box if you would like to set a consistent starting point from which the random
numbers will be generated. Using the same seed value and keeping all other settings the same will allow you
to replicate your results.
In the Math Precision field, enter the number of decimal places you wish to use for each simulated data point.
In the Data Points field, enter the number of data points you wish to generate.
In the Folio and the Sheet drop-down lists, choose where to put the simulated data.
If you choose <New Folio> the software will create a new folio to place the data into. If you choose <New
Sheet> the software will create a new sheet in a new or existing folio, depending on what you chose in the
Folio drop-down list.
Click the Active button to select the folio and data sheet that were active when the utility was opened. If
you would like the utility to always select the active folio and data sheet, select the check box labeled
Select active folio/sheet when loading this window.
After the simulation is set up, click Generate to create a data set according to your specifications. An ALTA standard
folio containing the data will appear.
16.3 SimuMatic
SimuMatic (which comes in a Weibull++ version and an ALTA version) generates a large number of data sets using
Monte Carlo simulation. It then analyzes the group of data sets as a whole. For example, you can use SimuMatic to
find the average reliability at a given time for a thousand simulated data sets. This section includes information on
how to generate and analyze data using SimuMatic.
Note: To illustrate how this censoring is performed, suppose you chose to generate 20 data points (e.g., 10 at one
stress level and 10 at another) and entered 10 in the Number of Failures field. The software would first generate
20 time values. Then the lowest 10 values across all the stress levels would be marked as failure times. The
remaining 10 values would be marked as suspensions.
16.3 SimuMatic
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 457
16.3.1 Generating Data with Weibull++ SimuMatic
Weibull++ SimuMatic generates multiple data sets using Monte Carlo simulation (the
same method used by the Monte Carlo utility discussed above). It then analyzes each
data set individually (e.g., to find the reliability at a specified time) and the group of data sets as a whole (e.g., to find
the average reliability at a specified time across the data sets).
To access Weibull++ SimuMatic, choose Insert > Tools > Weibull++ SimuMatic. The setup window will appear.
Follow the steps outlined below to generate and analyze the simulated data sets.
Configure the Main, Censoring and Settings tabs of the SimuMatic setup window in the same way you would for
the Monte Carlo utility (see steps 1 through 3 described in Section 16.1 on page 448). This will determine how
each data set is generated.
On the Settings tab, enter the number of data sets you wish to generate in the Number of data sets field. In most
cases, you will want this number to be reasonably large (e.g., 1000).
On the Analysis tab, select how you want to calculate the parameters of the simulated data sets.
Choose the appropriate option from the Analysis Method drop-down list. There are three options to select
from: rank regression on X (RRX), rank regression on Y (RRY) and maximum likelihood estimation (MLE).
Choose the appropriate option from the Rank Method drop-down list. The available options are median ranks
(MED) and Kaplan-Meier (K-M).
Select the Use RS Regression Method check box to use ReliaSofts rank regression method (RRM). If
this check box is cleared, the software will use the default standard regression method (SRM).
Enter a confidence level percentage in the Confidence Bounds on Plot area. If you choose to create a plot of
the data points after you create them, the software will use this value to display confidence bounds on the plot.
For example, if you enter 80, the software will display the 80% two-sided confidence bounds on time,
reliability or both, depending on which option you select on the control panel of the Weibull++ SimuMatic
folio's plot sheet.
On the Test Design tab, select the Calculate test plan results check box if you wish to use SimuMatic to design
or evaluate a reliability test. The software will then analyze the data sets in order to estimate the time at which the
product would have a specified reliability (i.e., the demonstrated life). This value can help you determine the
combination of test time and sample size that will be adequate to demonstrate a required reliability target at a
specified confidence level.
On the Reliabilities and Times tab, enter up to 10 reliability values (as decimals less than 1) and up to 10 time
values. SimuMatic will calculate the time for every given reliability, and it will calculate the reliability for every
given time.
For example, if you enter 0.5 in the Reliabilities area of this tab, the data sheets in the SimuMatic folio will
display the estimated time when the reliability will be equal to 50%. If you enter 100 in the Times area of this
page, the reliability at time 100 will be displayed.
Click Generate to create and analyze the data. You can view the analysis results in the SimuMatic folio. See
Section 16.3.3 on page 458.
Note: Assuming that all the generated data sets have calculated parameters, the software will calculate the
demonstrated life by taking each data set and solving for the time at which a product with that data set's distribution
would have the specified reliability. It will then order these time values to find the time value that corresponds to the
specified confidence level. For example, if you enter 85 for the target reliability and 90 for the confidence level, the
software will, for each data set, solve for the time at which a product with that data set's distribution would have a
reliability of 85%. It would then order the calculated time values and locate the value in the 10th percentile, which is
reported as the 90% lower one-sided confidence bound for the demonstrated time.
16 Monte Carlo and SimuMatic
458 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
16.3.2 Generating Data with ALTA SimuMatic
ALTA SimuMatic generates multiple data sets using Monte Carlo simulation (the same
method used by the Monte Carlo utility discussed above). It then analyzes each data set
individually (e.g., to find the reliability at a specified time) and the group of data sets as a whole (e.g., to find the
average reliability at a specified time across the data sets).
To access ALTA SimuMatic, choose Insert > Tools > ALTA SimuMatic. The setup window will appear. Follow the
steps outlined below to generate and analyze the simulated data sets.
Configure the Main, Censoring and Settings tabs of the SimuMatic setup window in the same way you would for
the Monte Carlo utility (see steps 1 through 5 described in Section 16.2 on page 454). This will determine how
each data set is generated.
On the Settings tab, enter the number of data sets you wish to generate in the Number of data sets field. In most
cases, you will want this number to be reasonably large (e.g., 1000).
On the Analysis tab, enter a confidence level percentage in the Confidence Bounds on Plot area. If you choose to
create a plot of the data points after you create them, the software will use this value to display confidence bounds
on the plot. For example, if you enter 80, the software will display the 80% two-sided confidence bounds on time,
reliability or both, depending on which option you select on the control panel of the ALTA SimuMatic folio's plot
sheet.
On the Test Design tab, select the Calculate test plan results check box if you wish to use SimuMatic to design
or evaluate a reliability test. The software will then analyze the data sets in order to estimate the time at which the
product would have a specified reliability (i.e., the demonstrated life). This value can help you determine the
combination of test time and sample size that will be adequate to demonstrate a required reliability target at a
specified confidence level.
On the Reliabilities and Times tab, enter up to 10 reliability values (as decimals less than 1) and up to 10 time
values. SimuMatic will calculate the time for every given reliability, and it will calculate the reliability for every
given time.
For example, if you enter 0.5 in the Reliabilities area of this tab, the data sheets in the SimuMatic folio will
display the estimated time when the reliability will be equal to 50%. If you enter 100 in the Times area of this
page, the reliability at time 100 will be displayed.
Click Generate to create and analyze the data. You can view the analysis results in the SimuMatic folio.
16.3.3 SimuMatic Folio
The SimuMatic folio gives you access to the data sets generated by the SimuMatic utility and to the results of
analyses on those data sets. This section includes information on various elements of this folio, including:
The Simulation sheet
The Sorted sheet
The control panel
Note: The software calculates the demonstrated time by taking each data set and solving for the time at which a
product described by that data set's model would have your specified reliability. It then orders these time values to
find the time value that corresponds to your specified confidence level. For example, if you enter 85 for the target
reliability and 90 for the confidence level, the software will, for each data set, solve for the time at which a product
described by that data set's model would have a reliability of 85%. It would then order the calculated time values and
locate the value in the 10th percentile, which is reported as the 90% lower one-sided confidence bound for the
demonstrated time.
16.3 SimuMatic
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 459
The Plot sheet
16.3.3.1 Simulation Sheet
The Simulation sheet shows the parameters calculated for each data set. It also contains a separate column for each of
the calculations that you specified on the Reliabilities and Times tab of the setup window. The following example
shows the results for the first ten data sets created with SimuMatic.
The sheet contains the following columns:
Beta and Eta (Hr) are parameter columns. Parameter columns show the estimated parameters for each data set
based on your selected distribution and analysis method. For parameters with an associated unit of measurement
(e.g., the Weibull shape parameter eta), the unit will be indicated in the column header.
T(0.9) is a time value column. It displays the time value calculations based on the calculated parameters and a
reliability value you entered in the Reliabilities and Times tab of the setup window. In this example, it shows the
time at which the products reliability is expected to be 0.9, or 90%.
R(100) is a reliability value column. It displays the reliability calculations based on the calculated parameters and
a time value you entered in the Reliabilities and Times tab of the setup window. In this example, it shows the
reliability value at time = 100.
16.3.3.2 Sorted Sheet
In the Sorted sheet, the calculated values from the Simulation sheet are sorted from least to greatest in order to show
the confidence bounds. Assuming all the simulated data sets have calculated parameters, the Percentage column will
display the percentage of data sets that are equal to or less than a given data set. So, for example, if you wished to
Note: N/A will appear in the parameter columns if there was an error in calculating a particular data set. This is usually
an indication that there were not enough failure times in the data set to calculate the parameters.
16 Monte Carlo and SimuMatic
460 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
obtain the 90% lower one-sided confidence bound of R(100), you would look up the value of R(100) that corresponds
to 10% (i.e., 100% - 90%).
If you wished to obtain the 90% two-sided confidence bounds of R(100), you would look up the values that
correspond to 5% (for the lower bound) and 95% (for the upper bound).
This concept is summarized in the figure shown below.
16.3.3.3 Control Panel
The control panel and its components are described next.
The SimuMatic Setup icon allows you to change your simulation settings and replace your current simulated
data sets with new ones.
The Plot icon generates a probability plot of all the data sets.
Transfer Parameters to Selected Folio
This icon allows you to transfer the calculated parameter values for each simulated data set to an existing
Weibull++ standard folio, with one data sheet for each parameter of the model that was used to generate the data.
When you click this icon, a window will appear asking whether you want the data sheets to be configured for free-
form or times-to-failure data. Then the Transfer Life Data window will appear, where you can select the existing
folio that you wish to transfer the calculated parameters to.
Transfer Parameters to New Folio
This icon creates a new Weibull++ standard folio and transfers the calculated parameter values for each simulated
data set to that folio, with one data sheet for each parameter of the model that was used to generate the data. After
16.3 SimuMatic
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 461
you click this icon, a window will appear asking whether you want to transfer the data to a data sheet configured
for free-form or times-to-failure data.
The Distribution area displays the type of distribution that was used to generate each data set.
The Settings area displays what analysis settings were used to analyze the simulated data. Only the Weibull++
version of SimuMatic allows you to change these settings. See page 167 in Chapter 4.
The Analysis Summary area displays the parameters that were used to generate each data set.
In the Additional Results area of the control panel:
The T(i) (...) button opens a report that displays each data set in its own column or group of columns. Each
calculated data set is separated from the others with an empty data sheet column. This report will contain
multiple sheets when there are too many data points to fit onto one sheet.
The Summary (...) button opens a report that displays the settings used to generate the data. It also displays
information about the variation of the parameter values and, if you entered a target reliability on the Test
Design tab of the setup window, it will display the results as well.
16.3.3.4 Plot Sheet
The following options on the plot sheet are unique to SimuMatic plots. They allow you to control which elements
will be displayed on the plot. For more general information on plot sheets, see Chapter 12.
Simulation Lines plots the time vs. unreliability line for every simulated data set.
True Parameter Line plots the time vs. unreliability line defined by the parameters of the distribution that
was used to generated the simulated data. (These parameters are visible on the control panel of the Simulation
sheet.)
Median Line plots the time vs. unreliability line defined by the median parameters of all generated data sets.
Average Line plots the time vs. unreliability line defined by the average parameters of all generated data sets.
CB on Reliability and CB on Time plot two-sided confidence bounds on the unreliability vs. time plots. The
percentile of the confidence bounds is determined by what you entered for Confidence Bounds on Plot on the
Analysis tab of the setup window.
For example, if you entered 90% in the setup window and selected CB on Time, then the displayed
confidence bounds would mark the simulated time values at the 5th and 95th percentile for every given
reliability value. If you entered 90% in the setup window and selected CB on Reliability, then the displayed
confidence bounds would mark the simulated reliability values at the 5th and 95th percentile for every given
time value.
Target plots the target reliability as a point at the intersection of a horizontal line drawn at the target
unreliability and a vertical line drawn at the target time. This option is available only if you have specified a
target reliability on the Test Design tab of the setup window.
16.3.4 Transferring Simulated Data to a Weibull++ Standard Folio
The Weibull++ version of SimuMatic allows you to transfer the calculated parameter
values for each simulated data set to a new or existing Weibull++ standard folio, with
one data sheet for each parameter of the model that was used to generate the data.
Note: Data sets without enough data points to fit to a model (i.e., those with an N/A in the parameter columns of
the SimuMatic's data sheet) will not be shown in this report.
16 Monte Carlo and SimuMatic
462 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
16.3.4.1 Transferring Data to a New Folio
To transfer data to a new folio, choose SimuMatic(W) > SimuMatic > Transfer Life Data to New Folio or click the
icon on the control panel.
The window shown next will appear.
Select whether the data will be transferred to a free-form or times-to-failure data sheet. See page 157 in Chapter 4.
After you click OK, a new standard folio will be created containing the simulated data in the selected format.
16.3.4.2 Transferring Data to an Existing Folio
To transfer data to an existing folio, choose SimuMatic(W) > SimuMatic > Transfer Life Data to Selected Folio or
click the icon on the control panel.
After you select whether the data will be transferred to a free-form or times-to-failure data sheet, the Transfer Life
Data window will appear, as shown next.
Select the folio that the data will be transferred to.
16.3 SimuMatic
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 463
If the Replace sheets with same names option is selected, then the software will replace any data sheets that
have the same name as the data to be transferred. For example, if a selected folio already has a Beta sheet and you
will be transferring beta values calculated in SimuMatic, then the software will replace the data in the current Beta
sheet with the new beta values. If this option not selected, then the software will always create a new sheet in the
selected folio.
Click the Add Folio button to automatically generate a blank Weibull++ standard folio and display it in the
window.
16.3.5 Designing Reliability Tests with SimuMatic
One of the applications of SimuMatic is simulating the outcome from a particular test design that is intended to
demonstrate a target reliability. You can specify various factors of the design, such as the test duration (for a time-
terminated test), number of failures (for a failure-terminated test) and sample size. By running the simulations you
can assess whether the planned test design can achieve the reliability target. Depending on the results, you can modify
the design by adjusting these factors and repeating the simulation processin effect, simulating a modified test
designuntil you arrive at a modified design that is capable of demonstrating the target reliability within the
available time and sample size constraints.
Follow the steps outlined below to use SimuMatics test planning results to design a reliability life test. The
calculations described here can also be used for other types of what-if analyses designed to explore the life estimates
that can be obtained from different types of data sets.
You must be able to provide reasonable assumptions concerning your product's underlying life distribution.
Specify these assumptions on the Main tab of the SimuMatic setup window.
Enter a sample size in the Number of points field on the Settings tab. If you are solving for the sample size, start
with a large value. You can later repeat the simulation with smaller values until you arrive at an acceptable test
plan.
In the Weibull++ version, this will be entered on the Settings tab.
In ALTA, you will use the data sheet to enter a separate sample size for each stress level that will be applied
during the test.
On the Censoring tab, select an appropriate censoring scheme.
If you are designing a test that will end only after all units fail, select No censoring. All simulated time values
will be considered failure times.
If you are designing a time-terminated test (i.e., a test that will end at a specified time), select Right censoring
after a specific time and enter an estimated test duration in the Time field. All simulated time values that
exceed this limit will be considered suspensions at the specified time (i.e., units that had not failed by the end
of the test). If you are solving for the required test duration, enter a large estimate, and then you can repeat the
simulation with smaller values until you arrive at an acceptable test plan.
Tip: SimuMatic is useful for designing tests where there will be enough failure times observed during the test to analyze
the data and fit a life distribution (e.g., two or more observed failures are required for most 2-parameter distributions). To
design a test that demonstrates the target reliability with minimal allowable failures (e.g., a zero-failure test), use the
Reliability Demonstration Test Design tool. See page 493 in Chapter 18.
Note: A short censoring time may create many data sets with too few failures to estimate an underlying life
distribution. These data sets will display N/A for the parameters on the SimuMatic folio's data sheet. This can be
due to an insufficient sample size or a test termination time that is too short. As a rule of thumb (and for 2-
parameter distributions) the combined sample size and test duration should be sufficient to observe three or more
failures. In other words, if you have a sample size of 10 then the test duration should be greater than the product's
B30 life (i.e., the time at which unreliability = 30%).
16 Monte Carlo and SimuMatic
464 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
If you are designing a failure-terminated test (i.e., a test that will end after a specified number of failures
occur), select Right censoring after a specific number of failures and enter a value in the Number of
Failures field. The tool will simulate a test that ends after this number of failures, with the surviving units
marked as suspensions. If you are solving for the number of failures needed, enter a large estimate, and then
you can repeat the simulation with smaller values until you arrive at an acceptable test plan.
On the Settings tab, make sure an appropriate number of data sets (e.g., 1,000) has been specified in the Number
of Data Sets field. Lower numbers may lead to less accurate results.
Select the appropriate analysis settings on the Analysis tab.
On the Test Design tab, select to Calculate test plan results and enter the Target Reliability you wish to
demonstrate along with the Lower 1-Sided Confidence Level at which you want to demonstrate it.
Click Generate to create and analyze the simulated data.
On the control panel, click the Summary (...) icon inside the Additional Results area to open the Results
window. The Test Planning Results area of the report displays your test design inputs (reliability requirement,
confidence level and sample size) along with the following results:
Expected Life (T1) is the lower one-sided confidence bound on the reliable life (i.e., the time for a given
reliability) calculated based on the specified distribution/parameters. This value represents the intrinsic
reliability of a product with the specified distribution/parameters. So if this value does not meet your
reliability goal, then it is not possible to demonstrate the desired reliability for a product with your assumed
life distribution, regardless of the test time or sample size that is employed.
Demonstrated Life at Given Confidence (T2) is the lower one-sided confidence bound on the reliable life
calculated based on the simulated data sets. Specifically, SimuMatic calculates the time given reliability for
each data set and then sorts the results to obtain the value associated with the specified confidence level
percentile. You can then compare this value to the time for which you want to demonstrate the reliability (e.g.,
you might want to demonstrate that the product will have a reliability of 95% at 1,000 hours, at the 90%
confidence level).
If the demonstrated value is greater than your reliability goal, then SimuMatic predicts that the specified
test plan would demonstrate the target. For example, if you wish to demonstrate that the product has a
reliability of 95% at 1,000 hours and T2 = 1,200, then SimuMatic predicts that the test plan would
demonstrate the target.
If the demonstrated value is less than your reliability goal, then SimuMatic does not predict that your test
plan would demonstrate the target. For example, if you wish to demonstrate that the product has a
reliability of 95% at 1,000 hours and T2 = 800, then SimuMatic does not predict that the test plan would
demonstrate the target.
Ratio of Expected Life/Demonstrated Life (DELTA) is a measure of the difference between the intrinsic
reliability of your product (T1) and the life demonstrated by analyzing the simulated data (T2). This value is
calculated by dividing the expected life by the demonstrated life. For example, if your test design would
demonstrate a reliability of 90% at 50 hours (demonstrated life), and your product has an intrinsic reliability of
90% at 100 hours (expected life), then DELTA = 2.
Expected Test Duration (T3) is the average of the last failure time from each of the simulated data sets. In
most contexts, this value provides an indication of how long you would need to run a test in order to
demonstrate the reliable life calculated in T2. In the case of a time-terminated test, you can compare this value
against the specified censoring time. If the censoring time (i.e., planned test time) is greater than T3, you may
Tip: You can also choose the Random censoring option if you wish to explore the results that can be obtained
from data sets that contain certain types of uncertainty. In this type of analysis, you can use the T1, T2 and DELTA
values to estimate whether you'll be able to use the data set to demonstrate a required reliability target and
evaluate how much the demonstrated life varies from the intrinsic reliability.
16.3 SimuMatic
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 465
choose to repeat the simulation with smaller test times to see if its feasible to demonstrate the target with a
less costly test plan. In addition, please note the following:
T3 is an average of all the test runs.
T3 is calculated based on the simulated data sets, and therefore it can never be greater than the specified
censoring (test) time. If you set a test time that is too small, T3 may be identical to the censoring time but
the test plan is still not adequate unless the demonstrated life (T2) also meets the requirement.
If the results indicate that you will not be able to demonstrate the target reliability, or if they indicate that the
current test plan uses more samples or more test time than necessary to demonstrate the target, you can keep
repeating the simulation with gradual adjustments until you arrive at an optimum plan.
Note that because the results are obtained through Monte Carlo simulation, you may arrive at slightly different
answers each time you run the analysis.
16.3.6 Weibull++ SimuMatic Example
This example uses Weibull++ SimuMatic to compare different parameter estimation
methods for a sample of 10 units following a Weibull distribution where beta = 2 and eta
= 100, with all units tested to failure.
Follow the steps outlined below to see the results of an analysis that uses the rank regression on X (RRX) parameter
estimation method.
Add a new Weibull++ SimuMatic window to the project by choosing Insert > Tools > Weibull++ SimuMatic.
On the Main tab, select the 2P-Weibull distribution from the Distribution drop-down list, and select Hour (Hr)
for the time unit. Enter 2 in the Beta field and 100 in the Eta field.
On the Censoring tab, select No censoring.
On the Settings tab, enter 1000 in the Number of data sets field and enter 10 in the Number of points field.
On the Analysis tab, choose Maximum Likelihood (MLE) from the Analysis Method drop-down list. This
method will be used to estimate the parameters of the generated data sets.
Also on the Analysis tab, choose Median Ranks from the Rank Method drop-down list, select Use RS
Regression Method and enter 90 in the Confidence Level field.
Click Generate to create and analyze the data. A SimuMatic folio will appear.
Click Plot on the control panel. You will be taken to the Plot page of the folio. In the Show area of the control
panel, make sure the following options are selected.
Simulation Lines
True Parameter Line
Median Line
CB on Reliability
Click Plot again to refresh the plot display all the selected lines.
To compare RRX to the rank regression on Y (RRY) and maximum likelihood estimation (MLE) methods, repeat the
steps above, but choose a different option in the Analysis Method drop-down list on the Analysis tab. Then compare
the three plots.
16 Monte Carlo and SimuMatic
466 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The plots for the three methods are shown below:
RRX Method
RRY Method
MLE Method
The thick line running through the middle of the plot shows the time vs. unreliability defined by the parameters of the
distribution that was used to generated the simulated data. The thinner median line shows the time vs. unreliability
16.3 SimuMatic
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 467
defined by the median parameters of all generated data sets. By comparing these two lines, you can estimate how
close the estimated parameters would be to product's assumed parameters (which you provided in the setup). The
plots above show that RRX would provide the least deviation (i.e., bias) from the truth for this sample size and data
type.
The lines marking the lower and upper confidence bounds on reliability allow you to determine how closely grouped
together the parameter estimation results are. The plots above show that MLE would provide results with less
variation than any of the other analysis methods for this sample size and data type.
Thus given our relatively small sample size and uncensored data, RRX is shown to be best in terms of bias, while
MLE is shown to be best in terms of variation (the median line and true parameter line overlap almost perfectly).
16.3.7 ALTA SimuMatic Example
This example uses ALTA SimuMatic to verify whether a proposed test plan could be used to
demonstrate, with 95% confidence, that a product has a reliability of at least 90% at 650 hours
at the use stress level of 300 K.
The engineers have prior experience with a similar design, and as a result they expect the product to have an
unreliability of 40% at 7,000 hours under normal conditions. At 340 K, they expect the product to follow a Weibull
distribution, where eta = 500 hours. The life-stress relationship is assumed to be Arrhenius, and for all stress levels
the life distribution is assumed to be Weibull, where beta = 1.5.
The proposed plan is to test 20 units at 325 K and 15 units at 340 K. All units will be tested to failure. Follow the
steps outlined below to determine whether this test plan will meet the reliability goal:
Add a new ALTA SimuMatic window to the project by choosing Insert > Tools > ALTA SimuMatic. Then, on
the Main page of the ALTA SimuMatic Setup window that appears, select the Arrhenius-Weibull model and
enter 1.5 for the beta parameter and Hour (Hr) for the time unit.
Because we do not have the values of B and C available, we will use the Quick Parameter Estimator to solve for
those parameters and transfer them to the setup window. Click the Quick Parameter Estimator button to open
the utility. The Arrhenius-Weibull model and Hour units should be automatically selected in the Model area.
In the Quantification Method area, choose Unreliability and a Parameter. Enter the life-stress values from
the assumptions given above.
In the Point #1 area, enter 7000 for the time and 0.4 for the unreliability.
In the Solve for Parameter area, select Eta and then enter 1.5 in the Beta field.
In the Use Stress Level area, enter 300 for the use stress level.
Click the Next> button to enter the accelerated life estimate.
On the second page, enter 340 for the stress level and 500 for the characteristic life (i.e., eta).
Click Next> to see the calculated the B and C parameters, which are shown to be 7871.5321 and 4.4903E-08,
respectively. Then click the Update button to transfer the parameters to the SimuMatic Setup window.
On the Stress tab of the SimuMatic window, enter the use stress level of 300 K.
On the Censoring tab, select No censoring.
On the Settings tab, set the Number of data sets to 1000. Use the default values in the other fields.
On the Test Design tab, enter 90 in the Target Reliability field and 95 in the Lower 1-Sided Confidence Level
field.
16 Monte Carlo and SimuMatic
468 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
In the data sheet on the right side of the window, enter the number of units that will be tested for each stress level,
as shown next.
Click Generate to create and analyze the simulated data sets.
In the SimuMatic folio, click Summary in the Additional Results area of the control panel to open the Results
window. T1 confirms that the product's intrinsic reliability is high enough to meet the target reliability. Also,
because T2 in the Test Planning Results area is greater than the time at which the engineers want to demonstrate
the target reliability, SimuMatic predicts that the given test plan is acceptable. The engineers may then choose to
decrease the number of points and repeat the simulation to determine whether a more efficient plan is possible.
Note that your results may vary because the data were obtained through Monte Carlo simulation.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 469
If you have ReliaSofts BlockSim software installed on your computer, the shared Synthesis Platform makes it
possible to use a model (i.e., a shared Synthesis resource) that is based on a Weibull++ or ALTA standard folio to
define any of the probabilities in BlockSims reliability block diagrams (RBDs) and fault trees. For convenience, a
simplified version of BlockSims analytical RBD tool is also directly integrated within the Weibull++/ALTA
interface.
To create a diagram directly within Weibull++/ALTA, choose Insert > Tools > Diagram or right-click the RBDs
folder in the current project explorer and choose Add Diagram on the shortcut menu.
For every standard block that you add to this type of diagram, you will be prompted to select a calculated data sheet
from a Weibull++ or ALTA standard folio that the block will represent. You can then use connectors, node blocks
and/or junction blocks to build an RBD, calculate the exact system reliability equation for the system, and obtain
plots and results based on that equation.
One typical application for this tool is for performing complex failure modes analysis. As explained on page 192 in
Chapter 4, the CFM analysis method that is built-in to the Weibull++ standard folio assumes a series reliability model
and uses only one type of distribution to analyze all the modes. If the situation is more complex, an RBD analysis
method must be used instead. This applies to any or all of the following circumstances:
The analysis involves more than four failure modes.
The failure modes are described by different life distributions (e.g., Modes A and B follow a Weibull distribution
but Mode C follows a lognormal).
The relationship between the failure modes does not follow a series configuration. For example, if more than one
failure mode must occur together in order for the component to fail, a parallel configuration must be used for the
analysis and this is referred to as complex failure modes analysis rather than competing failure modes
analysis.
This chapter explains how to build and analyze diagrams in Weibull++/ALTA, including:
Building a diagram - Section 17.1 (p. 470).
Using the diagram control panel - Section 17.2 (p. 477).
Using the Equation Viewer - Section 17.3 (p. 479).
Using the diagram plot sheet - Section 17.4 (p. 481).
Changing the appearance of a diagram - Section 17.5 (p. 482).
Diagrams
17
Note: If the analysis in the data sheet changes, the reliability characteristics of the block will be updated automatically, and
you can double-click the block to open the associated data folio.
17 Diagrams
470 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
17.1 Building a Diagram
The diagram sheet is where you will build the reliability block diagram that represents the reliability-wise
configuration of your system. There are three types of items available for use in diagrams: standard blocks, node
blocks, and junction blocks. These are presented in the following sections.
17.1.1 Standard Blocks
Standard blocks represent data sheets in Weibull++ and ALTA standard folios within the project. These blocks enable
you to represent each data set individually in the diagram.
You can add standard blocks to the diagram by choosing Diagrams > Diagram Tool > Add Block. This will open a
window that allows you to select the standard folio and data sheet that you want the block to represent. You can also
add a standard block by dragging the data sheet of interest from the Data Sheets page of the control panel into the
diagram. In both cases, the list of available data sheets includes any data sheet in any Weibull++ or ALTA standard
folio, as long as it has been calculated and is not using one of the competing failure modes distributions.
Double-clicking a standard block or choosing Diagrams > Format & Style > Edit Block > Block Properties opens
the standard folio and data sheet represented by the block.
Standard blocks are named with the name of the data sheet they represent.
If a block represents a data sheet that has been changed and has not been calculated or a data sheet that has since been
deleted, the block is marked with a red flag.
Using only standard blocks, you can define series configurations, parallel configurations and combinations of the
two.
In a series configuration, all items must work for the system to work. In the RBD shown next, the system fails if
either Block A, Block B or Block C fails.
In a parallel configuration, items are considered to be redundant. In the RBDs shown next, the system will continue to
function if either Block B or Block C fails.
17.1 Building a Diagram
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 471
You can combine series and parallel configurations in a single RBD, as shown next.
You can also use the software to create complex block diagrams. Complex configurations cannot be expressed as a
simple combination of series and/or parallel configurations and thus require a more advanced analytical treatment. A
complex reliability block diagram is shown next.
17.1.2 Node Blocks
Node blocks are like switches that diagram paths move through. A node allows you to model an alternative form of
redundancy known as k-out-of-n redundancy. A k-out-of-n node block can have n paths leading into it and requires
that k out of n paths must function for the system to function. There must be at least one path leading into a node;
therefore, a node block cannot be placed as the starting block for a diagram.
17 Diagrams
472 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The configuration in the figure shown next displays a k-out-of-n node block where either Block B, Block C or Block
D can fail without causing system failure, but if two of the blocks fail, the system will fail.
The figure shown next displays another k-out-of-n node block, this time used in a complex configuration. If more
than three of the five blocks leading to the node block fail, the system will fail.
You can add node blocks to the diagram by choosing Diagrams > Diagram Tools > Add Node.
17.1 Building a Diagram
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 473
Double-clicking the node block or selecting Diagrams > Format & Style > Edit Block > Block Properties opens
the properties window for the node block, which allows you to specify the number of paths that must reach the node
block in order for the system to succeed.
17.1.3 Junction Blocks
Junction blocks are non-failing blocks. Because diagrams must flow from a single starting point to a single ending
point, you may need to use junction blocks as starting and/or ending blocks. For information on diagram analysis
constraints, see Section 17.1.6 on page 475. They can also be used anywhere within the diagram that you need a
block that does not fail (i.e., does not affect the system reliability).
You can add junction blocks to the diagram by choosing Diagrams > Diagram Tools > Add Junction.
Junction blocks do not have properties, so double-clicking the junction block or selecting it and choosing Diagrams >
Format & Style > Edit Block > Block Properties will cause a message to be displayed indicating that the block
does not have properties.
17.1.4 Annotations
Annotations are blocks that can be added to a diagram and can contain notes, comments or any other information that
you want to appear with your diagram. Annotations are not taken into consideration when the diagram is analyzed but
will be saved with the project.
17 Diagrams
474 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
To add an annotation to a diagram, choose Diagrams > Diagram Tools > Add Annotation. The annotation will
appear in the diagram, as shown next.
By default, the text Annotation will appear in the block. You can change this text in the Edit Annotation window,
accessed by double-clicking the annotation block or by choosing Diagrams > Format & Style > Edit Block > Block
Properties.
17.1.5 Connecting Blocks in Diagrams
Connectors in diagrams represent the flow of the process or system being diagrammed, and the lines contain
information about the relationship between the specific source and destination blocks that they connect.
To create a connector between blocks, you can:
Choose Diagrams > Diagram Tools > Connect Blocks.
Hold down the ALT key while selecting the source block and then drag a line to the destination block.
17.1 Building a Diagram
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 475
In all methods, the cursor will change to display small crosshairs. Click the source block, hold down the left mouse
button and drag a line from the source block to the destination block. When the crosshairs are located above the
destination block, release the mouse button to create a connector.
The location where the connector attaches to each block is determined by your selection in the Automatic
Connection Preference field on the Connector Handles and Indicators page of the Diagram Style window. If the
field is set to Left-Right, the connector will attach to the sides of the blocks; if it is set to Top-Bottom, the connector
will attach to the top and bottom of the blocks. If No Preference is chosen, the connector will attach to the closest
edges.
If you have selected Custom in the Bend Style field on the Connector page of the Diagram Style window, then when
you are connecting blocks, five boxes will appear on each block that you point to. These boxes are connection points.
You can click a connection point to use it as the location where the connector connects to the block. This allows you
to draw connectors to and from any side of a block. The center connection point places the line using the default
routing scheme, as defined in the Automatic Connection Preference field on the Connector Handles and Indicators
page of the Diagram Style window.
To stop adding relationships and return the cursor to its normal mode, right-click the diagram or clear the Connect
Blocks option (i.e., by choosing the command again).
Note that existing connectors can be dragged to different destination blocks, if needed.
17.1.6 Diagram Analysis Constraints
In order to permit analysis, all RBDs created in the software must conform to the following constraints:
A diagram must contain at least one block.
If a diagram contains more than one block, all blocks in the diagram must be connected.
Tip: If you do not right-click the diagram or clear the Connect Blocks option to return the cursor to its normal mode, you
will not be able to perform certain other activities in the software, such as moving or deleting blocks. If you are
experiencing difficulties with the program, make sure that the cursor is in its normal mode.
17 Diagrams
476 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Diagrams must contain a single starting block and a single ending block, as shown next.
If a diagram consists of only one block, that block represents both the starting and ending block. Junction blocks
can be used as starting and/or ending blocks that possess no reliability characteristics.
Circular references, as shown below, are not allowed. That is, there must be a clear path towards the end of the
RBD and the RBD cannot loop back on itself.
17.2 Diagram Control Panel
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 477
17.2 Diagram Control Panel
The diagram control panel is arranged into groups of related tasks. Each group has its own page in the control panel.
Along the bottom of the control panel are icons you can use to navigate to each page, as shown below.
A description of the settings in the control panel follows.
The Main page, which is shown above, allows you to analyze and plot the diagram and also displays the status and
information about the diagram and its blocks. It consists of the following sections:
The Analytical area displays the status and results of the analysis.
The Information area displays information for the diagram or for the selected block in the diagram. If a block
is not selected in the diagram, the Information area will display the number of blocks (i.e., standard blocks,
node blocks and/or connector blocks) and/or annotations in the current diagram, as well as the user name, date
Tip: There is a horizontal splitter bar directly above the Main button. If you drag it as far up as it will go, all of the pages of
the panel will be accessed by large buttons. If you drag it all the way down, all of the pages will be accessed by small
icons. Positions in between allow you to use some large buttons and some small icons. See page 78 in Chapter 2.
17 Diagrams
478 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
and time for the diagrams creation and last modification. You can also click the Comments title to add
comments on the diagram that will be displayed here.
If a block is selected in the diagram, information for the selected item will appear in this area. This
information will vary depending on the type of item that is selected. The Information area for a standard block
is shown next.
Data Sheet displays the folio and data sheet that the block represents.
Failure Distribution displays the distribution used to calculate the data sheet.
Distribution displays the distribution used to calculated the data sheet.
For a junction block, no information is displayed.
For a node block, the Paths In field displays the number of required paths.
The Tools area gives you quick access to the tools you will need to analyze the diagram and generate additional
results.
The Data Sheets page contains a list of all of the data sheets in the project that are available for use in the diagram.
This includes any data sheet in any Weibull++ or ALTA standard folio, as long as it has been calculated and is not
using one of the competing failure modes distributions.
Analytical Area
The Analytical area of the control panel displays the status and results of the analysis.
Status: If the light is green, then the diagram has been analyzed. If the light is red, then the diagram has not been
analyzed. An analyzed diagram will remain in the analyzed state unless a change is made to the structure of the
diagram (e.g., a block is added or changed, a connector is removed, etc.).
Show Algebraic Solution (...) displays the algebraic solution for the diagram in the Equation Viewer. See Section
17.3 on page 479.
The folio tools are arranged on the left side of the panel. Use these tools to manage data and experiment with the
results of your analysis. Each tool is described below.
17.3 Equation Viewer
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 479
Analyze
Analyzes the relationships of the components in the diagram and puts the reliability-wise configuration into a
mathematical formula.
Plot
Creates a plot based on the analysis results. Clicking the Plot icon before the diagram has been analyzed will
automatically perform the analysis and then plot the data.
QCP
Opens the Quick Calculation Pad (QCP), which allows you to obtain reliability results based on the algebraic
solution for the diagram. Clicking the QCP icon before the diagram has been analyzed will automatically
perform the analysis and then open the QCP.
17.3 Equation Viewer
When you analyze a diagram, the software analyzes the relationships of the components and puts the reliability-wise
configuration into a mathematical formula. The result of this system analysis is used to obtain reliability calculations
and plots. The Equation Viewer displays the mathematical formulation of the system relationships in addition to a
legend with the failure distribution for each block in the diagram.
To open the Equation Viewer, click the Show Algebraic Solution (...) icon on the control panel.
In the Equation Viewer, there are two ways to view the system reliability equation: as a symbolic equation or as the
complete equation. When you are using the symbolic equation view, you can choose to view the reliability equation,
the pdf equation or the failure rate equation for the system. The symbolic equation uses tokens to represent portions
of the equation. If you use the symbolic equation view, you should read the solution from the bottom up, replacing
any occurrences of a particular token with its definition. For example, consider the RBD shown next.
17 Diagrams
480 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
When this diagram is analyzed, the symbolic reliability equation is:
This would be read as follows:
We begin with Eqn. (3). This equation contains the token D1, which is defined in Eqn. (2). This is then substituted
into Eqn. (3), yielding:
Now Eqn. (4) contains the token ID, which is defined in Eqn. (1). Substituting this into Eqn. (4) yields:
When you use the complete equation view, the software automatically performs all token substitutions. In this view,
you can view only the system reliability equation; the pdf equation and the failure rate equation are not available. You
should be aware that in some cases, the software may not be able to render the complete equation in the Equation
Viewer even though it has internally computed it. This could happen if the memory available on your computer is
insufficient and is therefore unable to construct the equation algebraically. This usually does not happen unless there
are over one million terms.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
17.4 Diagram Plot Sheet and Control Panel
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 481
Select Show Legend to display the reliability characteristics for each block within the analyzed diagram. Select
Show Colors to use color-coding in the window to make the equations easier to view.
The following icons are available in the Equation Viewers toolbar:
Cut
Cuts the selected text to the Clipboard. Data stored on the Clipboard can be pasted into this and other
applications.
Copy
Copies the selected text to the Clipboard. Data stored on the Clipboard can be pasted into this and other
applications.
Past
Pastes the contents of the Clipboard to the current control.
Copy
Copies the selected text to the Clipboard. Data stored on the Clipboard can be pasted into this and other
applications.
Print
Sends the current document to the printer. See Chapter 28.
Save
Copies the selected text to the Clipboard. Data stored on the Clipboard can be pasted into this and other
applications.
If you have made any changes to the Equation Viewers display settings (i.e., the type of equation to be displayed, the
display of the legend and/or whether to use color-coding in the window), click the Refresh button to update the
contents of the window.
17.4 Diagram Plot Sheet and Control Panel
You can plot the data of the analysis by choosing Diagrams > Analysis > Plot or clicking the Plot icon on the Main
page of the control panel. Note that clicking the Plot icon before the parameters have been calculated will
automatically calculate the parameters and then plot the data. The scaling, setup, exporting and confidence bounds
settings are similar to the options available for all other software plot sheets.
The following plot types are available for diagrams:
Reliability vs. Time plot shows the reliability values over time, capturing trends in the products failure behavior.
Unreliability vs. Time plot shows the probability of failure of the product over time.
pdf Plot shows a histogram of the probability density function of the data over time, allowing you to visualize the
distribution of the data set.
17 Diagrams
482 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Failure Rate vs. Time plot shows the failure rate function of the product over time.
17.5 Diagram Appearance
This section describes how to modify the arrangement and appearance of your diagram, including:
Arranging blocks in the diagram, including alignment, size and spacing.
Using the Diagram Style window is customize the properties of the diagram and to specify default settings for the
blocks and connectors within the diagram. These default settings are used for all new blocks added to the
diagram; in addition, if you change the block and/or connector settings in the Diagram Style window, the changes
will be applied to all blocks and/or connectors that are using the diagram defaults (i.e., all blocks and/or
connectors that do not have customized settings).
Saving the settings in the Diagram Style window as a reusable skin.
For selected blocks (either singly or multiply selected), using the Block Style window to customize one or more
properties.
For selected connectors, using the Connector Style window to customize one or more properties.
Using various keyboard and mouse combinations while working with diagrams.
17.5.1 Arranging Blocks
Align
To align blocks in a diagram, first select a block and then hold down the CTRL key while clicking each of the other
blocks. Choose Diagrams > Format and Style > Align Blocks > [Alignment Style]. The selected blocks will be
aligned with the first block selected, according to the specified alignment style. For example, if you choose
Diagrams > Format and Style > Align Blocks > Align Middles, the blocks will be aligned to the vertical center of
the first selected block, as shown next.
Resize
To resize blocks in a diagram, select the block that has the desired dimension(s) and then hold down the CTRL key
while clicking each of the blocks that you want to resize. Choose Diagrams > Format and Style > Make Same Size
> [Dimension]. The selected blocks will be resized to match the width and/or height of the first block selected. For
example, if you select choose Diagrams > Format and Style > Make Same Size > Height, the blocks will be
resized to the same height as the first selected block.
Note: Confidence bounds will not be available if any block in the diagram represents an ALTA data sheet calculated using
the cumulative damage model.
17.5 Diagram Appearance
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 483
Adjust Spacing
To adjust the spacing of blocks in a diagram, select the blocks that will be affected. Choose Diagrams > Format and
Style > Make Spacing Equal > [Direction]. The selected blocks will be moved so that they are equally spaced over
the original amount of horizontal and/or vertical area.
17.5.2 Diagram Style Window
The Diagram Style window allows you to customize the appearance of the current diagram and all components within
it and to set the default properties for new items added to the diagram. To access the Diagram Style window, choose
Diagrams > Format & Style > Edit Diagram > Diagram Style.
The Diagram Style window consists of multiple pages that are accessible by clicking the page names in the
navigation panel on the left side of the window.
You can save your settings in the Diagram Style window as a skin so that you can reuse them quickly and easily. See
Section 17.5.3 on page 486.
Diagram Style Window Diagram Pages
The Diagram pages allow you to customize the appearance of:
The diagram sheet (i.e., the background upon which blocks and other elements are placed).
Aspects of the appearance of diagram components (i.e., blocks and connectors) that cannot be configured at the
individual component level.
Background and Grid Page
This page allows you to customize the appearance of the diagram. You can specify:
Whether to display grid lines and, if so, the style of the lines (e.g., solid, dash, etc.).
The size of the grid squares, in inches.
The size and color of the shadow cast by blocks in the diagram. Note that this applies to all block types, but the
shadow will be shown only if the Show Shadow option is selected on the Defaults > General page for that block
type.
The colors used for:
The background.
The grid line.
The page separator lines, which appear in the Print Layout view and indicate the boundaries of each printed
page. You can display this view by choosing Home > Print > Print Layout.
17 Diagrams
484 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Whether to display the block ID, which is an internal ID number assigned to each block when it is created. You
can choose not to display the ID or to display it in decimal or hexadecimal format. If it is displayed, it will appear
directly below the block name (i.e., its location, alignment and font will be dictated by the properties that are
specified for the block caption).
Connector Handles and Indicators Page
This page allows you to customize the following properties of the connectors in the diagram:
Show Connectors Over Blocks if selected, any connectors that cross blocks will be shown over (i.e., in front of)
those blocks. If not selected, the blocks will be displayed on top.
Where connectors attach to blocks if the blocks are not in direct horizontal or vertical alignment. If the Automatic
Connection Preference field is set to Left-Right, the connector will attach to the sides of the blocks; if it is set to
Top-Bottom, the connector will attach to the top and bottom of the blocks. If No Preference is chosen, the
connector will attach to the closest edges.
The colors used for:
All connector handles.
Selected connectors.
Connectors to/from highlighted blocks (i.e., blocks that are part of a multiple selection).
Connectors leading to or from a selected block. This can be helpful in visualizing how a block is connected
within a complex diagram.
The size of the arrow head, in inches.
Block Handles and General Indicators Page
This page allows you to customize the following properties of the blocks in the diagram:
The colors used for the handles that appear when you are:
Resizing a block.
Connecting blocks.
The size of block flags. Block flags are used to mark blocks that represent a data sheet that has been changed and
has not been calculated or a data sheet that has since been deleted. These flags are not used by the software for
analyses or simulations.
The style (e.g., solid, dash, etc.), color and thickness of the border for block flags.
The properties for a highlighted block, including:
The colors used for the caption, border and fill (i.e., the area background).
The fill style (i.e., how the color is applied to the area).
Diagram Style Window Defaults Pages
The Defaults pages allow you to customize the default appearance settings for diagram components (i.e., connectors,
blocks and annotations). These settings are used for all new components added to the diagram and for all existing
components that are set to use default settings in the Block Style window or the Connector Style window. There is a
single page of default settings for connectors. For each block type, including annotations, there is a General page and
an Image page.
17.5 Diagram Appearance
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 485
Connector Page
This page allows you to specify the following default settings for the connectors in the diagram:
Line style (e.g., solid, dash, etc.), thickness and color.
The kind of bend in the lines. If you select Angle or Right Angle, the Line Bend % field will be enabled. This
field allows you to specify the point, in percent, at which the line will bend. For example, if you enter 50%, an
angle (bend) will appear in the line at the horizontal halfway point. The available styles are shown next.
If you select Custom, you can click the connector and drag the selected point to create a bend in the line.
The location, text color and font used for captions on connectors. Captions are entered for each connector in the
Connector Style window, which is accessed by selecting the connector and choosing Diagrams > Format &
Style > Edit Connector > Connector Style or by double-clicking the connector. Possible locations include:
Auto: The software will place the caption where it fits best.
Middle: The caption will be as close to the middle of the connector as possible, depending on bends in the
line.
Source: The caption will be displayed where the connector meets the source block.
Destination: The caption will be displayed where the connector meets the destination block.
Hidden: The caption will not be displayed.
Whether or not the arrow head is displayed.
General Page
This page allows you to customize the following properties for the block type:
The shape, background color, fill color and fill style used for the block type. The background color is the
underlying color applied to the block; the fill color is applied over the background color in the pattern specified by
the fill style. The options available in the Shape drop-down list depend on the block type. You can change the
shape of standard blocks; node blocks, junction blocks and annotations have permanently assigned shapes.
The style (e.g., solid, dash, etc.), color and thickness of the block border.
How the block caption appears, including:
17 Diagrams
486 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Location and Horizontal Alignment allow you to specify where the caption will be displayed (e.g., under the
block, inside the block, etc.) and whether it will be left aligned, center aligned or right aligned. If you choose
to place the caption to the left, right or inside the block, you can also specify the Vertical Alignment (i.e., at
the top, center or bottom of the block). If you choose to hide the caption, the Alignment fields will not be
available.
The color and font used for the text.
Whether or not a shadow is shown for the block.
The size of new blocks. Unlike the other options on this page, changes to this setting will apply only to blocks
subsequently added to the diagram.
Image Page
This page allows you to specify the image that is displayed on the block, if any.
Click the Load button to browse for the desired image file. Use the Position drop-down list to specify how the image
will be placed on the block (e.g., stretched to fit inside the blocks current dimensions, aligned from the top left
corner, etc.). Selecting the Transparency Mask Color option allows you to choose a color that will be shown as
transparent when the image is displayed on the block.
Click the Clear button to remove the loaded image and use no image at all.
17.5.3 Diagram Skins
You can save your settings in the Diagram Style window as a skin so that you can reuse them quickly and easily.
To save a skin, once you have specified the desired settings on all pages of the window, click the Save Skin As icon
in the Skin field at the bottom of the window. Enter a name for the skin and click OK.
To apply a skin to a diagram, click the Apply Skin icon, choose the skin from the list in the Select Skin window and
click OK. The name of the selected skin will be displayed in the lower left corner of the Diagram Style window.
When you click OK to close the Diagram Style window, the skin will be applied to the diagram.
To reset the diagram to use the default settings shipped with the software, click the Remove Skin icon.
17.5 Diagram Appearance
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 487
Click the Skin Manager icon to open the Skin Manager.
You can select a skin in this window and rename or delete it. In addition, you can click the Set Defaults button to
specify skins that will be used as the default settings for new diagrams.
Click inside the Default Skin column and choose a skin from the drop-down list. When you set a skin as the default, a
diagram icon will appear in the Default column for the skin in the Skin Manager.
17.5.4 Block Style Window
You can customize the appearance of a block or annotation using the Block Style window. Changes made in this
window will apply only to the current block; the Diagram Style window allows you to make changes to all new
blocks added to the diagram as well as to all current blocks in the diagram that are using default settings.
To open the Block Style window, select a block or annotation and choose Diagrams > Format & Style > Edit Block
> Block Style.
The Block Style window consists of two tabs, which are presented next.
Block Style Window Block Tab
17 Diagrams
488 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The Block tab of the Block Style window allows you to specify the appearance of the block itself and of the caption
associated with the block. You can customize the following:
The shape and size of the block, as well as whether or not a shadow is shown for the block. The options available
in the Shape drop-down list depend on the block type. You can change the shape of standard blocks; node blocks,
junction blocks and annotations have permanently assigned shapes.
The background color, fill color and fill style used for the block as well as the style (e.g., solid, dash, etc.), color
and thickness of the block border. (The background color is the underlying color applied to the block; the fill color
is applied over the background color in the pattern specified by the fill style.) To modify these properties, you
must clear the Use Default Interior and Border Settings option. If this option is selected, these properties use
the settings defined in the Diagram Style window on the Defaults > General page for the current block type.
How the block caption appears, including:
Location and Horizontal Alignment allow you to specify where the caption will be displayed (e.g., under the
block, inside the block, etc.) and whether it will be left aligned, center aligned or right aligned. If you choose
to place the caption to the left, right or inside the block, you can also specify the Vertical Alignment (i.e., at
the top, center or bottom of the block). If you choose to hide the caption, the Alignment fields will not be
available.
To use the default settings for the Location and Alignment properties, as specified in the Diagram Style
window on the Defaults > General page for the current block type, choose the Diagram Default option.
The color and font used for the text. To modify these properties, you must clear the Use Default Color and
Font option. If this option is selected, these properties use the settings defined in the Diagram Style window on
the Defaults > General page for the current block type.
Block Style Window Image Tab
The Image tab of the Block Style window allows you to specify the image that is displayed on the block, if any.
To change the image used, clear the Use Default Image option. You can then click the Load button to browse for the
desired image file. Use the Position drop-down list to specify how the image will be placed on the block. Selecting
the Transparency Mask Color option allows you to choose a color that will be shown as transparent when the image
is displayed on the block.
Click the Clear button to remove the loaded image and use no image at all.
17.5.5 Connector Style Window
You can customize the appearance of a connector using the Connector Style window. Changes made in this window
will apply only to the current connector; the Diagram Style window allows you to make changes to all new
connectors added to the diagram as well as to all current connectors in the diagram that are using default settings.
To open the Connector Style window, select a connector and choose Diagrams > Format & Style > Edit Connector
> Connector Style or double-click the connector.
For all properties on this page, the default settings, if any, are specified in the Diagram Style window on the Defaults
> Connector page. You can:
Enter a caption for the connector and specify the location, text color and font used for the caption. Possible
locations include:
Auto: The software will place the caption where it fits best.
17.5 Diagram Appearance
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 489
Middle: The caption will be as close to the middle of the connector as possible, depending on bends in the
line.
Source: The caption will be displayed where the connector meets the source block.
Destination: The caption will be displayed where the connector meets the destination block.
Hidden: The caption will not be displayed.
To use the default location, choose the Diagram Default option. To modify the text color and font, you must
clear the Use Default Color and Font option. If this option is selected, these properties use the default settings.
Specify the connectors line style (e.g., solid, dash, etc.), thickness and color. To modify these properties, you
must clear the Use Default Line Settings option. If this option is selected, these properties use the default
settings.
Specify the kind of bend in the lines. If you select Angle or Right Angle, the Line Bend % field will be enabled.
This field allows you to specify the point, in percent, at which the line will bend. You can choose from the same
options that are available in the Diagram Style window Connector page.
If you select Custom, you can click the connector and drag the selected point to create a bend in the line. To use
the default setting, choose the Diagram Default option.
Specify whether or not the arrow head is displayed. To use the default setting, choose the Diagram Default
option.
17.5.6 Keyboard and Mouse Combinations
This topic describes the various keyboard and mouse key combinations that you can use while working with
diagrams.
Note the following:
A unit is equal to either 1 millimeter or 0.1 inches, depending on the system setting.
When selecting multiple objects, you can select either blocks or connectors. A selection cannot include both
blocks and connectors
Selecting Objects
If you want to do this... Do this...
Select a block or connector Click the block or connector.
Select multiple blocks or connectors Press CTRL and click the blocks or connectors.
Select a group of blocks Click within the diagram and drag the selection to
include the desired blocks.
Add additional blocks or connectors to the
currently selected group
With a group of blocks or connectors selected,
press CTRL and then make another selection. The
new selection will be merged with the existing
selection.
Select all blocks in the diagram Press CTRL+A.
Clear all selections in the diagram Press ESC.
Switch the status of a block or connector from
selected to not selected or from not selected to
selected.
Press SHIFT and click the block or connector.
17 Diagrams
490 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Moving Objects
Resizing Objects
If you want to do this... Do this...
Move a block Click the block and drag to the desired location.
Move multiple blocks Select the blocks then click any block within the
selection and drag the selection to the desired
location.
Move block(s) by 1-unit increments Select the block(s) then press the desired arrow
key.
Move block(s) the distance of 1 grid line Select the block(s) then press CTRL + the desired
arrow key. If only one block is selected, this
shortcut will first align the block to the grid and
then each subsequent use of the shortcut will move
the block by one grid line.
If you want to do this... Do this...
Resize a block Select the block
then click one of the
sizing handles and
drag it to the
desired size.
Resize block(s) by 1-unit increments Select the block(s) then press SHIFT and the
desired arrow key. The up and down arrow keys
move the bottom edge of each selected block by a
single unit; the right and left arrow keys move the
right edge of each selected block by a single unit.
Resize block(s) by 5-unit increments Select the block(s) then press CTRL + SHIFT +
the desired arrow key. The up and down arrow
keys move the bottom edge of each selected block
by 5 units; the right and left arrow keys move the
right edge of each selected block by 5 units.
17.5 Diagram Appearance
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 491
Connectors
Scrolling
If you want to do this... Do this...
Add a new connector Press ALT and drag the connector from the source
block to the destination block.
Change a connectors source or destination Select the
connector then drag
the appropriate
connection handle
to the new source
or destination
block.
Add a bending point to a connector.
Note that the connector must use the Custom style.
To set the style, use Diagram Style window. See
Section 17.5.2 on page 483.
Click the
connector and
drag the
bending point
to the desired
location.
If you want to do this... Do this...
Scroll vertically Rotate the mouse wheel.
Scroll horizontally Press SHIFT and rotate the mouse wheel.
Scroll in any direction With nothing selected, press the desired arrow key.
Scroll horizontally to the far left Press HOME.
Scroll horizontally to the far right Press END.
Scroll to the upper left corner of the diagram Press CTRL+HOME or CTRL+PAGE UP.
Scroll to the lower right corner of the diagram Press CTRL+END or CTRL+PAGE DOWN.
Scroll by the size of the visible area of the diagram With nothing selected, press CTRL + the desired
arrow key. For vertical scrolling, you can also
press PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN.
Move the diagram in any direction Press SHIFT, click the diagram and drag. This is
like dragging the diagram sheet itself (e.g. to see
objects lower in the diagram, you would drag the
diagram upward).
17 Diagrams
492 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Other
If you want to do this... Do this...
Zoom in or out Press CTRL and rotate the mouse wheel.
Exit the Format Painter or Connect Blocks modes Press ESC.
Create a copy of a block and move the copy to the
desired location
Press CTRL+ALT and click the block then drag to
the desired location.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 493
Weibull++ and ALTA include test design tools that provide ways to design reliability tests as well as evaluate and
compare proposed test designs. Three of these tools can be accessed via the Test Design Assistant by choosing Insert
> Add New Project Items > Add Test Design.
This chapter describes how to use the three tools available via the Test Design Assistant:
The Reliability Demonstration Test tool solves for values associated with a specified test design, such as
required test time, required sample size, demonstrated reliability and confidence level - Section 18.1 (p. 493).
The Expected Failure Time plot determines what failure times you can expect in a test with a given sample size.
Because you can display actual failure times on the plot, it is especially useful for determining whether a test is
proceeding as expected - Section 18.2 (p. 499).
The Difference Detection Matrix shows how much test time is needed to detect a statistically significant
difference in life between two product designs when the data are obtained from reliability life tests and then
analyzed with a Weibull++ or ALTA standard folio - Section 18.3 (p. 503).
Please note that in addition to the tools that are discussed in these sections, the software includes two other tools that
can assist you in designing reliability life tests.
The ALTA Test Plan utility recommends a test plan for accelerated life testing data analysis. The recommended
plan will include information about what stress levels to use in the test, as well as what sample sizes to use for
each stress level. See Chapter 22.
SimuMatic, which comes in a Weibull++ version and an ALTA version, allows you to use simulation-based
methods to experiment with various testing scenarios. For example, you could try to improve a given test plan by
running a simulation of the test with a smaller sample size and seeing whether the more conservative plan would
still allow you to meet your test goals. See page 463 in Chapter 16.
18.1 Reliability Demonstration Test Design
In a zero-failure reliability demonstration test (RDT), the engineer aims to demonstrate a specified target metric (e.g.,
reliability at a specific time with a given confidence level) by testing a specified number of units for a predetermined
time. If no failures occur, then the target metric is demonstrated. This method has been adapted for scenarios where
the target metric can be demonstrated even if some failures occur, so long as a specified number of allowable failures
is not exceeded. For example, in a demonstration test where the number of allowable failures is 2, the target metric is
demonstrated if no more than 2 failures occur during the test.
1
Design of Reliability Tests
18
18 Design of Reliability Tests
494 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
ReliaSoft's RDT tool can assist the user in designing a demonstration test by solving for various values related to the
test, such as sample size, required test time, the demonstrated reliability and the confidence level at which the target
reliability will be demonstrated.
18.1.1 Using the RDT Tool
To use the RDT tool, follow the steps outlined below:
Select the appropriate test design option from the Test Design Method drop-down list on the control panel and
enter all the required inputs. When you change the test design option, the required inputs on the RDT sheet will
change. The four options are the following:
The Parametric Binomial option determines what test duration or sample size will be required to
demonstrate either reliability at a specific time or a specified mean time to failure. To use this option, you
must provide an estimate of the underlying life distribution's shape parameter.
If you are demonstrating the reliability at a specified time, enter the time in the At this Time field. If you
used the Get Failure Distribution from Folio option, this value will initially be set to the time at which a
product with the calculated life distribution would have the reliability that you specified.
If you are demonstrating the mean time to failure, enter the mean time in the Demonstrate this MTTF
field. If you used the Get Failure Distribution from Folio option, this value will initially be set to the
MTTF that a product with the calculated life distribution would have.
You can also create a table that displays a range of test duration values as a function of sample size and
number of allowable failures. The table can also display a range of required sample size values as a
function of test time and number of allowable failures. After you create this table, you can also create a
plot displaying the same information. This provides a quick way to consider many possible test plan
scenarios without having to perform each calculation individually. See Section 18.1.4 on page 498.
The Non-Parametric Binomial option does not require a life distribution. It solves for the demonstrated
reliability, confidence level or sample size that is associated with a specified test design.
The use of this option assumes that the time at which the reliability is demonstrated is equal to the
specified test time multiplied by the specified acceleration factor. For example, if the acceleration factor is
1, then the time at which reliability is demonstrated equals the test duration. If the acceleration factor is 2,
then the time at which the reliability is demonstrated is double the test duration, and so on.
The Exponential Chi-Squared option determines the total accumulated test time that will be required to
demonstrate a specified metric.
1.
If more than the number of allowable failures occurs, then the reliability demonstration test failed and the target metric was not
demonstrated. The engineers may choose to continue the test as a reliability life test, recording the exact failure/suspension times
and then analyzing the data with standard life data analysis methods. Note that although mathematically it is possible to design a
new test with more allowable failures and a longer duration to demonstrate the same target metric, it is unlikely that the metric will
be demonstrated by the new test if the original demonstration test failed.
Tip: This tool could determine, for example, that if you assume your units follow a Weibull distribution with a shape
parameter of 2 and you tested 10 units for 150 hours and none failed during the test, then you would demonstrate a 90%
reliability at 100 hours with 90% confidence. It does not, however, calculate the probability that one or more units might
actually fail during the test. If you wish to estimate whether a failure is likely to occur, one option is to use the Expected
Failure Time Plot to estimate the first failure time based on the assumed distribution and parameters.
Note: You can get the parameters and time units from a calculated data sheet in the current project by clicking the
Get Failure Distribution from Folio icon on the control panel.
18.1 Reliability Demonstration Test Design
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 495
The total accumulated test time is equal to the total amount of time experienced by all of the units on test.
For example, if the total accumulated time is 100 hours, then you could test 1 unit for 100 hours, or you
could test 2 units for 50 hours each, or you could test 5 units for 1 hour each and 1 unit for 95 hours.
This option is based on the chi-squared distribution, and it is only for products that have an assumed
exponential life distribution (i.e., products with a constant failure rate).
The Non-Parametric Bayesian option solves for the demonstrated reliability or confidence level that can be
expected from a specified test design. It can also solve for the sample size needed to demonstrate a target
reliability at a specified confidence level. To use this option, you must have some prior information with
which you can estimate the products reliability.
With this option, you will need to specify whether the source of prior information is expert opinion (i.e.,
engineering experience) about the reliability of the entire system or prior testing at the subsystem level.
This is done in the Prior information about the failure rate behavior area of the RDT sheet.
If you have experience regarding the system as a whole, choose Expert opinion on reliability. Then,
enter worst case, expected and best case estimates of the product's reliability.
If you have prior test data for subsystems that compose your system, then choose Prior tests at the
subsystem level. In the Number of subsystems drop-down list, choose the number of different
subsystems that you will enter data for. After you select the number of subsystems, click the Edit
Bayesian Subsystems icon on the control panel to open a window you can use to enter the prior test
data.
Alternatively, you can click the appropriate cell on the RDT sheet to enter the information directly into
the sheet, as shown next.
Like the non-parametric binomial option, the use of the non-parametric Bayesian option assumes that the
time at which the reliability is demonstrated is equal to the specified test time multiplied by the specified
acceleration factor.
18 Design of Reliability Tests
496 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The following chart shows the information that each method can provide
2
In the Units field of the control panel, define the units of time that will be used in the test.
If you selected to solve for sample size, select whether sample sizes will be displayed as integers in the Display
Options area.
In the Acceleration Factor field of the control panel, enter the acceleration factor associated with the stress level
that will be used in the test, if applicable.
The acceleration factor is obtained by dividing the products life at the use stress level by its life at the
accelerated stress level to be used in the test, if applicable. For example, if the product has a life of 100 hours
at the use stress level, and it is being tested at an accelerated stress level which reduces its life to 50 hours, then
you would enter 2 in the Acceleration Factor field. If you are testing units under normal operating conditions,
then the acceleration factor is 1.
Click Calculate to solve for your selected value.
18.1.2 Edit Bayesian Subsystems
The Edit Bayesian Subsystems window is used to enter prior test data for subsystems that compose your system.
When you select to use the non-parametric Bayesian test design method with the Reliability Demonstration Test
(RDT) tool, this prior data is used to estimate the demonstrated reliability or confidence level that you can expect
from a test's results, or the sample size that must be used in a test.
Metric to demonstrate: Can solve for:
Parametric
Binomial
The reliability at a specific time
or
Mean time to failure (MTTF)
The test time for a specified sample size
or
The sample size for a specified test time
Non-
Parametric
Binomial
Reliability at test time
(if acceleration factor = 1)
The demonstrated reliability
or
The associated confidence level
or
The necessary sample size
Exponential
Chi-Squared
The reliability at a specific time
or
Mean time to failure (MTTF)
The total accumulated test time
Non-
Parametric
Bayesian
Reliability at test time
(if acceleration factor = 1)
The demonstrated reliability
or
The associated confidence level
or
The necessary sample size
2.
The ReliaWiki resource portal has more information on these methods at: http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/
Reliability_Test_Design.
18.1 Reliability Demonstration Test Design
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 497
To open the window from the RDT tool, select Non-Parametric Bayesian from the Test Design Method drop-down
list on the control panel. Then click the Edit Bayesian Subsystems icon. The window will appear as shown next.
The Subsystem Name column is for the name or description of the subsystem that was tested.
The Sample Size column indicates how many units were used in the subsystem's test.
The Number of Failures column indicates how many units failed during the test.
The Import from Excel icon allows you to import the first three columns of an Excel sheet into the table.
The software assumes a series configuration of these subsystems (i.e., the failure of any one subsystem is sufficient
for the whole system to fail) and uses this subsystem-level information to estimate the expected value and variance of
the reliability of the entire system.
18.1.3 Reliability Demonstration Test Design Example
This section presents an example of how to use the Reliability Demonstration Test (RDT) tool to calculate the test
time needed to show a specified reliability at a specified confidence level in a zero-failure demonstration test.
A reliability engineer is asked to plan a test for a component whose failure behavior is governed by a Weibull
distribution, where beta = 1.5. The goal of the test is to show, with 90% confidence, that the component has a
reliability of at least 90% at 100 hours. The component will be tested at normal use conditions. 10 units are available
for testing. Due to resource constraints, it is decided that the target metric will be demonstrated in a zero-failure test.
The engineers task is to determine the minimum test time needed to demonstrate this reliability in such a test.
Follow the steps outlined below to determine the required test time.
Open the tool by choosing Insert > Tools > Test Design. In the Test Design Assistant, select Reliability
Demonstration Test Design and click OK.
Select Parametric Binomial from the Test Design Method area of the control panel.
In the Input area of the control panel, select Hour (Hr) for the units to be used for all time inputs and results
(e.g., hours, days, miles, etc.). Since the component will be tested at the use stress level, enter 1 for the
acceleration factor.
18 Design of Reliability Tests
498 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Provide the required inputs for the RDT sheet, as shown next.
Click the Calculate icon to solve for the required test time. A Results area will appear at the bottom of the data
sheet.
The results show a test time of at least 168.4064 hours is required for the specified test plan. In other words, if 10
units are tested for 168.4064 hours at normal use conditions and none fail, then the test will demonstrate, with 90%
confidence, that the component has a reliability of at least 90% at 100 hours.
18.1.4 Parametric Binomial Table and Plot
When you use the parametric binomial option of the RDT tool, you can also create a table and plot based on the target
metric and life distribution that you specified on the RDT sheet. Depending on what you select to solve for, the table
will display a range of test duration values as a function of sample size and number of allowable failures, or it will
display a range of required sample size values as a function of test time and number of allowable failures. The table
and plot provide quick ways to consider many possible test plan scenarios without having to perform each calculation
individually.
Follow the steps outlined below to create the table.
Open the RDT tool and solve for required test time or sample size using the parametric binomial test design
option. The table will use the target reliability and life distribution that you specified to produce its results.
Click the Create Table of Results icon (shown next) on the control panel.
The Test Design Table page will appear with an empty data sheet. In the Solve for area, select which value you
wish to solve for.
Test time for given sample size solves for the test time given a range of sample sizes. When you select this
option, the Sample Size Range area will require that you enter a starting sample size, an ending sample size
and an increment value by which the sample will increase in the table.
Sample size for given test time solves for sample size given a range of test times. When you select this
option, the Test Time Range area will require that you enter a starting test time, an ending test time and an
increment value by which the test time will increase.
18.2 Expected Failure Time Plot
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 499
For either option, you must enter starting, ending and increment values for the number of allowable failures in
the Number of Failures Range area. A demonstration test will fail to demonstrate the target reliability if the
number of failures exceeds this number. Thus, if you are designing a zero-failure test, then the test will
demonstrate the target reliability only if no failures occur.
Click Calculate to create the table.
The data sheet shown next displays a parametric binomial table. For example, the second cell in the table tells us that
if you used a test time of about 621 hours and no more than one failure occurred during the test, then you would need
a sample size of 3 to demonstrate the target metric.
To view a plot of the table results, click Redrew Plot. Each colored line in the plot corresponds to a specific number
of failures; this depicts how the allowed number of failures influences the test time and the required sample size.
18.2 Expected Failure Time Plot
The Expected Failure Time plot provides a visual depiction of what failure times you can expect to observe when you
implement a particular test plan. If you perform the test and enter the actual failures as theyre observed, you can use
the plot to monitor whether the test is proceeding as planned, which could provide an early warning that adjustments
may be needed.
3
Tip: You can also use this plot to determine whether a specified reliability demonstration test will exceed the allowable
number of failures. For example, if you have designed a zero-failure test and wish to determine whether zero failures will
occur during the test, you could examine the lower confidence bound of the first predicted failure for that test. This
information will help you determine whether a failure is likely to occur before the end of the test.
18 Design of Reliability Tests
500 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
18.2.1 Using the Expected Failure Time Plot
Generating an Expected Failure Time Plot
Follow the steps outlined below to generate a plot.
Enter the sample size, two-sided confidence level and acceleration factor in the Plot Setup area of the control
panel.
The acceleration factor is obtained by dividing the products life at the use stress level by its life at the
accelerated stress level to be used in the test, if applicable. For example, if the product has a life of 100 hours
at the use stress level, and it is being tested at an accelerated stress level which reduces its life to 50 hours, then
you would enter 2 in the Acceleration Factor field. If you are testing units under normal operating conditions,
then the acceleration factor is 1.
Define the expected life distribution for your product and then choose the time units to be used in the calculations.
To enter the parameters, click the arrow in the Expected Failure Model area.
A window will appear where you can select a life distribution and enter its parameters. If the estimated values
of the distribution parameters are not available, you can use the Quick Parameter Estimator (QPE) to solve for
them. See page 172 in Chapter 4.
In the same window, select the time units (e.g., hours) that will be used in the test. Then click OK to close the
window and generate the plot.
3.
The ReliaWiki resource portal has more information on the Expected Failure Time Plot at: http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/
Reliability_Test_Design.
Note: You can also get the parameters and time units from a calculated data sheet in the current project by clicking
the Get Failure Model from Folio icon on the control panel. After you select the data sheet, click the Redraw Plot
icon to generate the plot.
18.2 Expected Failure Time Plot
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 501
The plot will show the predicted failures times for each test unit with a margin of error corresponding to the
confidence level you entered in the Plot Setup area.
The three vertical tick marks on each line display the lower confidence bound, median value and upper
confidence bound for the expected failure time of a tested unit.
To display actual failure times as points that can be compared against the estimated intervals, click the arrow in
the Actual Failures box. A table will appear where you can enter the recorded failure times, as shown next. The
entered times will be automatically sorted from least to greatest.
You can view a calculated value by pointing to the relevant vertical tick mark on the plot. Alternatively, click Results
(...) in the Expected Failure Time area of the control panel to view all calculated values at once.
Tip: If you have a column of data copied to the Clipboard (e.g., from a data sheet), you can click the Clipboard icon
at the top of the Time column to paste the data into the table.
18 Design of Reliability Tests
502 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Additional Control Panel Options
The control panel also includes the following options:
In the Plot Options area:
Keep Aspect Ratio maintains the ratio of the horizontal size of the plot graphic to the vertical size when you
resize the plot.
Automatically Refresh will automatically update the plot whenever any of the inputs change. If this option is
cleared, you will have to click the Redraw Plot icon to update the plot.
In the X-Axis Scaling area, select the Linear check box to use a linear scale for time. Select the Logarithmic
check box to use a logarithmic scale.
In the Scaling area:
The X and Y boxes show the minimum and maximum values for the x- and y-axes. To change these values,
clear the check box beside the value range. If it is selected, the application will automatically choose
appropriate values for the range.
The Plot Setup icon opens the Plot Setup window, which allows you to customize most aspects of the plot
including the titles, line styles and point styles. See Chapter 13.
The RS Draw icon launches ReliaSoft Draw, which allows you to annotate your plot and view your plot in greater
detail. See Chapter 14.
The Export Plot icon opens the Save As window, which allows you to save the current plot graphic in one of the
following formats: *.jpg, *.gif, *.png or *.wmf.
18.2.2 Expected Failure Time Plot Example
This section presents an example of how to use the Expected Failure Time plot to monitor an in-progress test.
A reliability engineer is asked to perform a reliability life test for a component whose underlying life distribution is
estimated to be a Weibull distribution, where beta = 2.5 and eta = 500 hours. This estimation is uncertain, however,
and the engineer has been asked to monitor the test and report to management if the failure times suggest that the
estimated life distribution is incorrect. Ten units will be tested under normal operating conditions.
Follow the steps outlined below to view two-sided 80% confidence bounds for the failure times of each unit in the
test.
Open the Test Design Assistant by choosing Insert > Tools > Test Design.
In the Test Design Assistant, select Expected Failure Times Plot and click OK. The Expected Failure Time
window will appear.
In the Plot Setup area of the control panel, enter 10 for the sample size. Then enter 80 for the two-sided
confidence level. Because the units will be tested under normal operating conditions, enter 1 for the acceleration
factor.
Next, enter the life distribution of the product by clicking the arrow in the Expected Failure Model area of the
control panel. In the window that appears, select 2P-Weibull for the distribution. Then enter the distributions
parameters and select Hour for the time unit.
Then click the Plot icon to calculate the expected failure times. A plot will show the predicted failure times for the
ten units with 80% two-sided confidence bounds on each prediction.
18.3 Difference Detection Matrix
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 503
To add actual failure times to the plot, click the arrow in the Actual Failures field to enter the failure times
(shown next) as they are observed during the test. The entered times will be automatically sorted from least to
greatest, and they will be displayed as points on top of the lines that represent the expected failure times.
The following plot shows the first five actual failures displayed with the ten expected failure times.
At this point, the engineer would inform management that the observed failure times indicate that the estimated
life distribution may be inaccurate.
18.3 Difference Detection Matrix
The Difference Detection Matrix calculates how much test time is required before it is possible to detect a statistically
significant difference in the mean life or BX% life of two product designs by analyzing the data from a reliability life
test. You can use this tool to evaluate different test plans in order to choose the one that will be most efficient to
compare the reliability of the two designs. To use the matrix, you must provide various inputsincluding the sample
sizes that will be used to test each design and the life distributions that describe each designs life behavior.
18 Design of Reliability Tests
504 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
18.3.1 Using the Difference Detection Matrix
Reading the Detection Matrix
In this section, we will look at an example detection matrix and discuss how to read it. The next section explains how
to set up the matrix. We will assume that a sample size of 10 will be used to test both product designs.
Because the column title in the above matrix is Design 1 Mean Life, we know that the metric being compared is
mean life (rather than BX% life). The column headers represent possible mean life values for Design 1, and the row
headers represent possible mean life values for Design 2. Well begin by examining the cell in the second column and
the first row of the matrix, which corresponds to a Design 1 mean life of 1,000 hours and a Design 2 mean life of 500
hours.
The number inside this cell is 4, and the legend below the matrix tells us that a 4 means a difference between the two
designs can be detected, but only after at least 1,500 hours of testing. In other words, one thing the matrix tells us is
that if Design 1 has a mean life of 1,000 hours and Design 2 has a mean life of 500 hours, then the tests we use to
compare these designs will need a duration of at least 2,000 hours in order for the analysis of collected data to show
that there is, at the specified confidence level, a statistically significant difference in mean life between the two
designs.
Setting Up the Detection Matrix
Follow the steps outlined below to set up the detection matrix. All the settings are located on the control panel.
In the Metric to Compare area, select whether you want to compare Mean Life or BX% Life. If you select to
compare the BX% life, you must enter a value in the associated input field (e.g., a BX% life of 10 indicates that
the software will compare the time when 10% of units will have failed). Also, specify the confidence level that
will define when a difference between the specified designs is statistically significant. Then specify the time units
(e.g., hours) that will be used for the inputs and results.
The software calculates two-sided confidence intervals (at the level you specified in the Confidence (%)
field) on the specified life metric for both designs, when possible. A difference is considered detected at a
given test time when the two calculated confidence intervals do not overlap, or when only one of the designs
produces enough failures to fit to a distribution.
Tip: You can click a cell in the matrix to see the difference in the compared metric that was calculated for both designs
based on the associated test time. For example, if a cell in the matrix shows that a difference in mean life can be detected
with 2,000 hours of testing, clicking the cell will show the mean life calculations (including two-sided confidence intervals)
that would be obtained for each design if you analyzed the test data after 2,000 hours of testing. (If only one of the designs
would produce enough failures to fit to a distribution during the given test time, no intervals will be shown.)
18.3 Difference Detection Matrix
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 505
In the Design 1 and Design 2 areas, enter the sample sizes of the tests that will be used to compare the designs and
define the distributions for each designs failure behavior.
In the Reliability Metric Setup area, configure the rows and columns in the table by first entering the Max
Metric Time value, which is the highest metric value (mean life or BX% life, depending on your selected metric)
that the software will consider in the comparison. Then enter a Metric Increment to specify the difference
between the displayed metric values in each column and each row. This value is also used as the minimum metric
value that will be considered in the comparison.
For example, if you entered 1000 in the Max Metric Value field and 200 in the Metric Increment field, then
your matrix would have five columns and five rows, each starting with a value of 200 and moving up in
increments of 200 until reaching the maximum value of 1000.
The matrix indicates whether a difference in the selected reliability metric will be detected after various test times.
These are the test times shown in the legend under the matrix. In the Test Times Matrix Setup area, specify the
test times that will be evaluated.
To specify how many test times to evaluate, enter a value in the Number of Test Times field. For example, if
you enter 4 in this field, then the software will evaluate will evaluate 4 different test times. The software
cannot evaluate more than 10 test times.
If the Calculate Test Times check box is cleared, you will be able to click the arrow inside the Test Time
field to open a table where you can enter the specific times. For example, if you enter 500 as one of the test
times, then the matrix will determine whether 500 hours (assuming your selected time unit is hours) is
sufficient to detect a difference in the selected life characteristic. The number of rows available in this table is
determined by what you entered in the Number of Test Times field. Note that upon exiting the table, the
times in the table will be sorted in descending order.
If the Calculate Test Times check box is selected, the software will automatically enter test times from 1,500
to 6,000 in the Test Time field.
Click the Calculate icon to validate your settings and generate the matrix.
If you wish to export the matrix as a Microsoft Excel file, click the Send to Excel icon.
You can also change the color used in the matrix by clicking the Set Matrix Color icon.
Your selected color will be used to indicate when the shortest test time provided in the Test Time Matrix Setup area
is sufficient to detect a difference in the specified life characteristic. Darker versions of that color will be used to
indicate when longer test times are required.
18.3.2 Difference Detection Matrix Example
This section presents an example of how to use the Difference Detection Matrix to estimate the test time required in a
reliability life test to demonstrate that a new product design will have a higher mean life than an older design.
18 Design of Reliability Tests
506 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
A manufacturer plans to implement a new product design that is expected to improve the products mean life. The
current design is expected to have a mean life of 200 hours, and the new design is expected to have a mean life of 300
hours. A reliability engineer is asked to determine, with 90% confidence, the minimum amount of test time that
would be required to determine that there has been an improvement in mean life with the new design. No more than
400 hours will be available for testing, and only 10 units of each design will be available for testing.
The engineer also has some information about the life distributions for both designs. They each have a Weibull life
distribution, and the beta parameter for the original design is 4.2, while the beta parameter for the new design is 3.
Follow the steps outlined below to estimate the test time required to detect a difference in mean life.
Open the detection matrix by choosing Insert > Tools > Test Design. In the Test Design Assistant, select
Difference Detection Matrix and click OK.
In the Metric to Compare area of the control panel, select Mean Life and enter 90 for the confidence level.
Choose Hour for the units that will be used for all time inputs and results.
In the Design 1 area, enter 10 for the sample size. Design 1 is the original design, so select 2P-Weibull for the
distribution and enter 4.2 for the beta value.
In the Design 2 area, enter 10 for the sample size. Design 2 is the new design, so select 2P-Weibull for the
distribution and enter 3 for the beta value.
The matrix will display a range of possible mean life values for both designs. The range begins with 0 and
increases by an increment of your choice. In the Reliability Metric Setup area, enter 500 for the maximum
metric time. Then enter 100 for the metric increment. The range of mean life values displayed for both designs
will thus be 100, 200, 300, 400 and 500.
In the Test Time Matrix Setup area, enter 4 for the number of test times that will be evaluated. The software will
automatically enter these test times. To view them, clear the Calculate Test Times check box, then click the
arrow in the Test Time (Hr) box. A table will appear where you can view and modify the test times that will be
evaluated. In the table, enter 400 for Test Number 1, 350 for Test Number 2, 300 for Test Number 3 and 250 for
Test Number 4.
Click the Calculate icon to generate the matrix, which will appear as shown next.
According to the above matrix, if Design 1 has a mean life of 200 and Design 2 has a mean life of 300, then a
statistically significant improvement in mean life can be detected between the two after analyzing the data of a 300-
hour reliability life test.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 507
Deciding on a reliability goal/target involves trade-offs. This is because higher reliability typically correlates with
higher production costs, lower warranty costs and higher market share. With Weibull++'s Target Reliability tool, you
can generate plots that help you visualize and estimate a target reliability that will minimize cost, maximize profit
and/or maximize your return on an investment in improving the products reliability.
1
The Target Reliability tool is divided into a target estimation sheet and control panel. The top part of the sheet is the
Target Estimation Inputs area, where you provide the best, most likely and worst case estimates for various factors
involved in the production and sale of the product. The bottom part of the sheet contains the plot that you select to
generate from your inputs.
Target Reliability Tool
19
1.
The ReliaWiki resource portal has more information on the Target Reliability tool at: http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/
Target_Reliability_Tool.
19 Target Reliability Tool
508 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The control panel contains settings for the type of plot that will be displayed, as well as other plot settings and icons.
It also contains an input field for the product's maximum market potential and, when the R30I vs. reliability plot is
selected, an input field for the expected initial investment.
19.1 Generating a Plot
Follow the steps outlined below to generate a plot.
Open the tool by choosing Insert > Tools > Add Target Reliability.
In the Target Estimation Inputs area, enter the estimated best, worst and most likely scenarios. Each scenario
includes all of the following factors.
Expected failures/returns per year (as % of sales)
The number of failures or returns that are expected each year, given as a percentage of sales. For example, if
the best case scenario is one where 1% of the sold units are expected to fail or be returned within a year, then
you would enter 1 under the Best heading for this factor.
% of market share that you expect to capture
The percentage of the market share that you expect to capture with your product. For example, if the worst
case scenario is one where you expect to capture 40% of the market, then you would enter 40 under the Worst
heading for this factor.
Average unit sales price
The average sales price per unit. For example, if the most likely scenario is one where the average sales price
per unit is $20, then you would enter 20 under the Most Likely heading for this factor.
Average cost per unit to produce
The average cost of producing a single unit. For example, if the best case scenario is one where it costs, on
average, $2 to produce a single unit, then you would enter 2 under the Best heading for this factor.
Other costs per failure (in addition to replacement cost)
The average failure cost per unit, ignoring the cost of replacing a returned unit. For example, if the worst case
scenario involves a cost of $5 per failed unit, $3 of which are due to the cost of replacing the failed unit, then
you would enter 2 (the remaining cost) under the Worst heading for this factor.
Select the kind of plot you want to generate in the Plot Settings area of the control panel. The following four plots
are available:
The Cost vs. Reliability plot displays total cost as a function of target reliability. The total cost is the sum of
the production cost, which is the cost involved in manufacturing the product to achieve a target reliability, and
the unreliability cost, which is the cost incurred as a result of failures/returns and lost sales. By default, the
plot displays curves for the production and unreliability costs and displays a vertical line marking the lowest
point of the total cost curve.
The Profit vs. Reliability plot displays profit as a function of target reliability. Profit is calculated by
subtracting the production cost, warranty cost and other failure-related costs from the estimated total sales
revenue. By default, the plot displays a vertical line marking the highest point of the profit curve.
The R3OI vs. Reliability plot uses ReliaSoft's Reliability Return on Investment (R3OI) equation to calculate
expected returns on an initial investment that will affect reliability. The R3OI is calculated by subtracting the
Note: A better scenario involves an improvement in both reliability and ROI. Thus the production costs in the best
case scenario must be higher than that of the worst case scenario. This is because improving reliability requires
increasing spending on factors such as facilities, higher quality materials, etc.
19.2 The Control Panel
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 509
initial investment from the expected increase in sales revenue and dividing the result by the initial investment.
This plot displays the return on investment as a function of the reliability achieved through that investment.
By default, the plot displays a vertical line marking the highest point of the R3OI curve.
If you choose R3OI vs. Reliability, then you must enter your expected initial investment in the Initial
Investment field at the bottom of the control panel.
Near the bottom of the control panel, enter the maximum number of units that could be sold in a year in the Max.
Market Potential (Units) field.
The Show Plot Items area will display a list of curves and vertical lines that can be displayed for the plot you
selected in the Plot Settings area. To remove a line/curve from the current plot display, clear the associated check
box.
Click the Plot icon on the control panel to generate the plot.
19.2 The Control Panel
The control panel also includes the following options:
The Results button displays the equations that are used to generate the plots. The values of A and B for each
equation are calculated from the inputs provided in the Target Estimation Inputs area of the target estimation
sheet.
In the Plot Settings area:
Keep Aspect Ratio maintains the ratio of the horizontal size of the plot graphic to the vertical size when you
resize the plot.
Only Show Positive Values will include only positive values for the y-axis when that axis has a minimum
value of at least zero.
In the Scaling area:
The X and Y boxes show the minimum and maximum values for the x- and y-axes. To change these values,
clear the check box beside the value range. If it is selected, the application will automatically choose
appropriate values for the range.
The Plot Setup icon opens the Plot Setup window, which allows you to customize most aspects of the plot
including the titles, line styles and point styles. See Chapter 13.
The RS Draw icon launches ReliaSoft Draw, which allows you to annotate your plot and view your plot in greater
detail. See Chapter 14.
The Export Plot icon opens the Save As window, which allows you to save the current plot graphic in one of the
following formats: *.jpg, *.gif, *.png or *.wmf.
Tip: You can hide the Target Estimation Inputs area and expand the plot to fill the entire sheet by double-clicking the
plot. To show the area and shrink the plot to its original size, simply double-click the plot again. See the descriptions below
for other plot commands that are available in this control panel. For other general tips, see Chapter 12 on page 362.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 511
Weibull++ and ALTA provide two tools designed for statistical comparison of data sets:
The Life Comparison tool calculates the probability that the times-to-failure of one population will be better or
worse than the times-to-failure of the second. This allows you to compare life distributions from two alternate
designs, manufacturers, lots, assembly lines, etc. in order determine whether the units in the first group will
outlast the units in the second.
The Stress-Strength comparison tool allows you to determine the probability of failure based on the probability
of stress exceeding strength. The strength data set could be actual data that represents the strength of the material
(i.e., minimum applied stress to cause failure) and the stress data set could be the actual stress levels that the
material will experience under use conditions.
This chapter explains how to use these tools, including:
Performing tests of comparison - Section 20.1 (p. 511).
An example of a life comparison test - Section 20.2 (p. 517).
An example of a stress-strength test - Section 20.3 (p. 519).
Using the Target Reliability Parameter Estimator - Section 20.4 (p. 525).
20.1 Performing Tests of Comparison
Both tools are based on the same underlying probability equation, and both folios function in a similar way. This
section describes them both.
20.1.1 Folio Setup
To add a life comparison folio to a project, choose Insert > Tools > Life Comparison or right-click the Tools folder
in the current project explorer and choose Add Life Comparison on the shortcut menu.
To add a stress-strength folio to a project, choose Insert > Tools > Stress-Strength or right-click the Tools folder in
the current project explorer and choose Add Stress-Strength on the shortcut menu.
Tests of Comparison
20
Whats Changed? In previous versions of Weibull++ and ALTA, the results of the tests were not saved to a folio. In Version
8, the software now creates a folio for saving your results and also provides a plot for visualizing the resulting probability
function. The folio is saved under the Tools heading in the current project explorer. See page 75 in Chapter 2.
20 Tests of Comparison
512 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
When you add the folio to a project, you will be asked to select two data sheets to compare. Note that the data sheets
must have already been analyzed (i.e., the parameters of the distribution have been calculated) in order for you to
select them.
After you select the data sheets, the software will automatically plot the distributions of the data sets and estimate the
probability value. You can then use the control panel settings in the folio to perform additional analyses or change
how you want the probability value to be calculated.
20.1.2 Control Panel Settings
The life comparison and stress-strength folios share the same control panel settings. The following picture shows the
Analysis page of the stress-strength folios control panel. The icons arranged vertically on the left side of the panel
allow you to perform a variety of tasks related to the comparison (e.g., calculate the folio, select different data sheets,
etc.), while the icons arranged horizontally perform tasks for each data set. All the control panel options are described
below the picture.
The Analysis page, which is currently shown, includes the following settings:
The Results area shows the calculated probability value.
In the life comparison folio, the value represents the probability that the life of the second data set exceeds the
life of the first data set (Probability X1<X2).
20.1 Performing Tests of Comparison
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 513
In stress-strength folio, the value represents the Reliability of the product (i.e., the probability that the product
can withstand the applied stress). This can also be displayed as the Probability of Failure if you select the
check box on the Setup page.
To display a report of the results, click the Show Results (...) button. The Results window allows you to edit,
copy or print the results.
Select the Calculate Confidence check box if you want to compute the two-sided confidence bounds of the
probability value. Enter a decimal in the Level field. The values will be displayed in the Upper Bound and
Lower Bound fields after you recalculate the folio.
The following settings affect how the plot is displayed:
Select the Auto Refresh check box to automatically refresh the plot if any of the data sets, inputs or settings
are modified
Select the Keep Aspect Ratio check box to maintain the ratio of the horizontal size to the vertical size of the
plot graphic when you resize the plot sheet.
The Scaling area shows the minimum and maximum values for the X and Y axes. You can change these
values if the Auto Scale check box beside the value range is cleared. If it is selected, the application will
automatically choose appropriate values for the range based on the current data.
The control panel also displays the values of the parameters of the distribution for each data set. For the stress-
strength comparison test (as shown in the picture), the first data set represents the Stress and the second data set
represents the Strength. For the life comparison test, these are displayed as Set 1 and Set 2.
To see a summary report of the analysis for a data set, click anywhere within the parameters table.
To open the standard folio, click the blue link that displays the name of the folio and data sheet.
The folio tools are arranged on the left side of the panel and in the areas dedicated to the selected data sheets (e.g.,
the Stress area in the panel shown above). Use these tools to manage data and experiment with the results of your
analysis. Each tool is described in detail below.
Calculate
For the life comparison folio, this icon calculates the probability that the life of the second data set exceeds
the life of the first data set (Probability X1<X2). For the stress-strength folio, it calculates the Reliability of
the product (i.e., the probability that the product can withstand the applied stress). This can also be displayed
as the Probability of Failure if you select the check box on the Setup page.
Plot
Updates the plot to reflect any changes that have been made.
Plot Setup
Opens the Plot Setup window, which allows you to customize most aspects of the plot including the titles, line
styles and point styles. See Chapter 13.
RS Draw
Launches ReliaSoft Draw, which allows you to annotate your plot and view your plot in greater detail. See
Chapter 14.
20 Tests of Comparison
514 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Export Plot Graphic
Opens the Save As window, which allows you to save the current plot graphic in one of the following formats:
*.jpg, *.gif, *.png or *.wmf.
Select Data Sheet
Opens the Select Data Sheets window, which allows you to select the data sheets to compare.
Target Reliability Parameter Estimator
Opens the Target Reliability Parameter Estimator window, which allows you to explore how you could
attempt to change one of the distribution parameters in order to meet a specified target reliability. The plot and
probability value will be based on the altered distributions and therefore may be appropriate only within the
context of your specific scenario. See Section 20.4 on page 525.
Reliability Demonstration Test
Opens the Reliability Demonstration Test window, which allows you to solve for values associated with a
specified test design, such as required test time, required sample size, demonstrated reliability and confidence
level. See page 493 in Chapter 18.
Alter Parameters
Allows you to alter the values of the calculated parameters, assuming that the ranks, the likelihood function
and the Fisher Matrix (evaluated at the original parameter estimates) remain the same. The plot and
probability value will be based on the modified parameters, and therefore may be appropriate only within the
context of your specific scenario.
Refresh
If you have manually modified the parameters of the data set, this option allows you to revert to the
parameters calculated from the original data source.
Transfer Parameters
If you have manually modified the parameters of the data set, the Transfer Parameters feature allows you to
transfer those modified parameters to the original data source. All subsequent analysis made on the data
source, such as calculations made via the QCP and other tools, are based on the modified parameter values.
Therefore, the analysis may be appropriate only within the context of your specific scenario.
20.1 Performing Tests of Comparison
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 515
Setup Page
The Setup page contains options for setting how you want the probability value to be computed. The following
picture shows the Setup page of a stress-strength folio.
The default limits of the integral are from zero to infinity. You can change the limits by selecting the Override auto-
calculated limits check box. The ability to change the upper and lower limits of the integral gives you the option to
limit your analysis to specific areas of interest.
When you use a finite upper limit, the test excludes the outcomes where both products are expected to operate
longer than the time specified by the upper limit.
When you specify a lower limit, the test excludes the outcomes where both products are expected to fail before
the time specified by the lower limit.
For example, you might wish to set the lower limit to a time other than zero in order to exclude the burn-in period
from the comparison. Likewise, you could set a specific time for the upper limit if you want to consider only the
behavior that occurs while the product is under warranty.
The Quadrature Points field allows you to set the number of intervals (evaluation points) that the integral is divided
into. Increasing the quadrature points increases the accuracy of the approximation but at the expense of increased
calculation time.
Additional options are also available:
Confidence Bounds Based On: The comparison tools provide two methods for calculating the confidence
bounds, depending on the information available for the distributions that are being compared. (Note that
confidence bounds calculations are not possible when one or both data sheets is an ALTA standard folio that uses
stress profiles.)
20 Tests of Comparison
516 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Variation in Model Parameters: If the parameters of both distributions are estimated from data, the software
can estimate the uncertainties associated with these parameters. Therefore, the default method to calculate the
variance and confidence bounds for a life comparison or stress-strength folio is based on the variation in the
model parameters for both distributions. The calculated confidence bounds are for the expected probability.
Note that the Variation in Model Parameters option is not supported if one or both of the data sets meets any
of the following conditions. In these cases, use the Variation in Probability Values option.
Has no data set.
Has parameters that were modified via the Alter Parameters tool or Target Reliability Parameter Estimator.
Is a free-form data sheet.
Does not use Fisher Matrix confidence bounds.
Is an ALTA standard folio that uses the cumulative damage model.
Variation in Probability Values: If the parameters of either distribution are fixed values, the uncertainties
associated with the parameters are not known so an alternative method must be used to calculate the variance
and confidence bounds. The alternative method is based on the variation in the probability values that would
be calculated using the distribution for the first data set. The calculated confidence bounds are for the
probability.
Result as probability of failure: This setting is available only in stress-strength folios. It allows you to display
the probability of failure instead of the reliability.
20.1.3 Probability Equation
The life comparison test uses the following equation to evaluate the probability of failure based on the probability that
the life of the second product is greater than or equal to the life of the first product:
1
where f(t) is the pdf of product 1 and R(t) is the reliability function of product 2. The evaluation is based on whether
this probability is less than or greater than 0.5. The result is interpreted as follows:
If P = 0.5, then the lives of both products are equal.
If P > 0.5, then the life of product 2 exceeds the life of product 1. For example, if P = 0.8, then product 2 is better
than product 1 with an 80% probability.
If P < 0.5, then the life of product 1 exceeds the life of product 2. For example, if P = 0.10, then product 1 is better
than product 2 with a 90% probability (1 - 0.10 = 0.9).
(1)
1.
Brown, Gerald G. and Rutemiller, Herbert C. Evaluation of P[X>=Y] When Both X and Y are from Three-Parameter Weibull
Distributions. IEEE Transactions in Reliability, R-22, no. 2 (1973).
20.2 Life Comparison Example
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 517
For the stress-strength test, Eqn. (1) may be expressed as:
For data sets that are calculated in an ALTA standard folio, the comparison is performed at the given use stress levels
of both data sets; therefore, Eqn. (1) can also be expressed as:
20.2 Life Comparison Example
A product is being redesigned to improve its reliability. The following tables show the times-to-failure data of each
design.
The objective is to determine whether the redesign improved the product's reliability.
The first step in the analysis is to enter the data in two separate Weibull++ standard folio data sheets. Calculate the
parameters for both data sheets by using the 2P-Weibull distribution and the RRX analysis method.
Next, add a life comparison folio to the project by choosing Insert > Tools > Life Comparison.
(2)
(3)
Failure Times for the Old Product Design (Hr)
2 2 3 4 6 9
9 11 17 17 19 21
23 28 33 34 34 37
38 40 45 55 56 57
67 76 90 115 126 197
Failure Times for the New Product Design (Hr)
15 32 61 67 75
116 148 178 181 183
20 Tests of Comparison
518 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Select the data sheets for the two designs, as shown next. Click OK.
The result shows the following plot (with an area shaded to show the region where the life of the new design
exceeds the life of the old design).
20.3 Stress-Strength Test Example
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 519
The result on the control panel indicates that the new design will last longer with a probability of 79.4675%, as
shown next.
20.3 Stress-Strength Test Example
Steel rods with a diameter of 0.5 +/- 0.015 inches are to be used in an application where the load is purely tensile.
Investigations of the application reveal that the load is not constant in magnitude. The following table shows the
typical load values.
Table I:
Typical Load Values (lbs)
10455 12372 16559 19703
16961 10595 10898 5814
17279 12849 11661 6795
7821 13017 11263 17934
6821 15426 14656 17703
20 Tests of Comparison
520 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Table II:
The objective is to estimate the reliability of the steel rods against fractures.
Obtain the Stress Distribution
In this example, stress is defined as:
where F is the tensile load on the rod and d is the rods diameter. These variables are distributed. In order to obtain the
stress data set, the distributions for these two variables need to be obtained first.
Let us assume that the diameters of the rods are normally distributed. The parameters of the distribution can then
be determined from the given base dimension and tolerance value of the rods. Therefore, the mean of the assumed
normal distribution, which is taken to be the base dimension, is 0.5 inches. The standard deviation, which is taken
to be a sixth of the total tolerance value, is 0.005 inches.
To use this information, create a new Weibull++ standard folio in the project. Rename the data sheet to
Diameter. On the control panel, choose the Normal distribution and the RRX parameter estimation method.
Ultimate Tensile Strength Data of 50 specimens (psi)
103779 103633 103779 103633 103799
102906 102616 101162 107848 103488
104796 106831 102470 99563 102906
103197 102325 105232 105813 101017
100872 104651 103924 108430 104651
97383 105087 102325 106540 103197
101162 106399 105377 101744 105337
98110 100872 104796 101598 101744
104651 104360 106831 103799 106104
102906 101453 105087 100145 100726
Note: The data sets in this example use units that are not shipped with the software (inches, pounds, and pounds per
square inch). If you have the necessary permissions, you could add these units to the repository, define their conversion
factors and have them available for use for any analysis performed within the database. For the purpose of this example,
it is not necessary for the software to able to convert these units to some other units, so we will use the simpler approach
of setting up all the units to be in hours.
(S.1)
20.3 Stress-Strength Test Example
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 521
Click the Calculate icon on the Main page of the control panel. In the input window, enter 0.5 for the mean and
0.005 for the standard deviation, as shown next.
Click OK. The data sheet will be empty but the parameters of the distribution will be visible in the Analysis
Summary area of the control panel.
For the distribution of the tensile load, we can use the data from Table I. Create a new data sheet in the same folio
by right clicking the data sheet tab area (the area at the bottom of the window that shows the name of the data
sheets) and choosing Insert Data Sheet on the shortcut menu. Rename the data sheet to Load.
Enter the data from Table I and calculate the parameters using the 2P-Weibull distribution and the RRX
parameter estimation method. The results show that the parameters of the distribution for the tensile load F are
beta = 3.3435 and eta = 14278.1579 lbs, as shown next.
20 Tests of Comparison
522 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Now that the distributions of the variables governing Eqn. (S.1) are available, we can now obtain the stress data
set. There are several conventional methods for synthesizing distributions. For this example, we will use a Monte
Carlo simulation:
Open the Monte Carlo utility by choosing Home > Tools > Weibull++ Monte Carlo.
In the distribution drop-down list, choose User-Defined. Enter Eqn. (S.1) in the Equation field and click the
Insert Data Source button to insert the distributions of the variables in the equation, as shown next.
Click the Settings tab. In the Data Points area, enter 1,000 and then click OK to generate the stress data set.
This creates a new folio in the project. Rename the new folio to Stress Values.
Finally, fit a distribution to the data set in the Stress Values folio. For this example, the distribution that best
fits the stress data is a generalized gamma distribution with a mu = 11.2127 psi, sigma = 0.2856 psi and
lambda = 1.0632 psi. Note that your results may vary because the data were obtained through simulation.
Obtain the Strength Distribution
To obtain the strength distribution, use the tensile strength data from Table II. Create a new Weibull++ standard
folio and rename it to Tensile Strength.
20.3 Stress-Strength Test Example
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 523
Enter the data from the table in the data sheet and calculate the parameters using the Normal distribution and the
RRX parameter estimation method, as shown next (showing only the first 19 rows of data).
The parameters for the normal distribution of the tensile strength are mean = 103421.0800 psi and standard
deviation = 2395.1061psi.
Calculate the Reliability
Finally, use the stress-strength folio to calculate the reliability of the steel rods. Add the folio to the project by
choosing Insert > Tools > Stress-Strength.
20 Tests of Comparison
524 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Select the data sheets containing the stress and strength data, as shown next. Click OK.
The stress-strength test shows the following plot (with the scaling adjusted and an area of the plot shaded to show the
region where the strength exceeds the stress).
20.4 Target Reliability Parameter Estimator
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 525
The result on the control panel indicates that the reliability of the steel rods against fractures is estimated to be
96.2171%, as shown next.
20.4 Target Reliability Parameter Estimator
The life comparison and stress-strength tools include the Target Reliability Parameter Estimator, which allows you to
explore how you could attempt to change one of the parameters in order to meet a specified target reliability. The plot
and reliability estimate will be based on the altered distributions, and therefore may be appropriate only within the
context of your specific what-if analysis.
To open the Target Reliability Parameter Estimator window, choose [Life Comparison/Stress-Strength] > Analysis
> Parameter Estimator or click the icon on the control panel.
You can use the Target Reliability Parameter Estimator with any combination of distributions. The Weibull++ and
ALTA versions of the tool are similar, except for one setting:
The Solve Parameters based on Coefficient of Variation (CV) check box is available only in the Weibull++
version of the tool and when the distributions are either both normal or both lognormal. Select the parameters to
20 Tests of Comparison
526 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
estimate and then enter the CV value. The tool will then estimate the parameters that would result in the target
reliability.
The example shown next displays the Weibull++ version of the tool. In this example, the first data set shows the
parameters of a Weibull distribution, while the second data set shows the parameters of a lognormal distribution. If
we are trying to achieve a target reliability of 90% and select to estimate the beta of the first data set, then the tool will
hold the rest of the parameters constant and estimate a beta value that would result in the 90% target reliability. For
this example, the result is a beta estimate of 1.5200.
To see how the change in the parameter value affects the plot, click Update. The Target Reliability Parameter
Estimator window will close and the plot will refresh. The control panel will display the new probability value or
reliability estimate, as well as a status that indicates that the parameters have been altered.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 527
The Equation Fit Solver is a tool that allows you to estimate the parameters of any user-
defined non-linear equation. This gives you the flexibility to perform simple parameter
estimation on statistical models other than the life distributions and life-stress relationship models available in
Weibull++ and ALTA.
21.1 Using the Equation Fit Solver
To add an Equation Fit Solver folio to a project, choose Insert > Tools > Equation Fit Solver or right-click the
Tools folder in the current project explorer and choose Add Equation Fit Solver on the shortcut menu.
Example
Consider a product that has the following mean life for each stress level:
Table 1: Stress vs. Mean Life
The relationship between the stress level and mean life can be described by the Eyring acceleration model:
where:
m is the mean life.
T is the operating temperature (i.e., use stress level).
A and B are the parameters of the equation.
Equation Fit Solver
21
Stress Level
Temperature (K)
Mean Life (Hr)
393 6685.111904
408 5730.096004
423 4775.08002
21 Equation Fit Solver
528 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
In order to estimate the mean life at any given temperature, parameters A and B must be determined. To solve for
these parameters, follow the steps outlined below:
The first step is to write the Eyring acceleration model in the form y = F(x), where x is the random variable. For
this example, let T = x and m = y. This results to:
Next, enter the equation in the Formula field of the control panel, as shown next.
Next, use the Function Parameters area of the folio to provide a starting point for estimating the parameters
In the Is greater than and Is less than columns, set an estimate for the minimum and maximum values for
each parameter in the equation. If the iteration does not converge at the specified range, you will need to edit
the range values until a solution can be obtained.
In the Initial Guess column, set a value from which the approximation for the corresponding parameter will
start. If the iteration cannot arrive at a solution, you will need to edit the initial guess values until a solution
can be obtained.
For this example, use the following values:
A is estimated to be greater than -100 and less than 1000. The initial guess is 0.01.
B is estimated to be greater than -100 and less than 5000. The initial guess is 0.2.
In the Data area, enter the information from Table 1. Enter the stress level values in the X column and enter the
mean life values in the Y column.
21.1 Using the Equation Fit Solver
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 529
To solve for the parameters of the equation, click the Calculate icon on the control panel.
The parameter values are found to be A = -11.1465 and B = 1430.2558, as shown next. By obtaining the
parameters, we can now estimate the mean life (y) for any given stress level (x) by using the Calculate Y given X
tool. For example, in the figure shown next, the estimated mean life for a temperature of 430 K is 4486.81 hours.
The following columns allow you to evaluate the results of the parameter estimation:
The SDEV column shows the standard deviation of the values of the parameters, which helps you to evaluate
the amount of variability in the data set.
The F(x) column shows the calculated mean life (y) at each stress level (x) when the estimated values of the
parameters are substituted in the user defined equation.
The Error [Y-F(x)] column shows the calculated distance (the error) of the known value in the Y column to
its corresponding value in the F(x) function. This helps you to evaluate the fit of the F(x) function to the data
set.
21 Equation Fit Solver
530 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
To visually assess how well the function fits the known data points of the equation, click the Plot icon on the
control panel. The Data and Function Fit plot is shown next with the scaling adjusted.
21.2 Control Panel Settings
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 531
21.2 Control Panel Settings
The control panel contains the tools frequently used with the Equation Fit Solver. The main page of the control panel
is shown next.
The Add to Templates command on the control panel gives you the option to save user-defined equations as
templates for future use. To use this feature, enter the equation in the Formula field, type a name for the equation
and then click Add to Templates. You can also choose Equation Fit Solver > Solver Templates > Add to
Templates.
To use a saved template, choose Equation Fit Solver > Solver Templates > Select from Templates or click the
icon on the control panel.
This opens the Existing Equation Templates window, which shows a list of all the saved templates. The buttons at
the lower left side of the window allow you to add, edit or delete templates.
Tip: There is a horizontal splitter bar directly above the Main button. If you drag it as far up as it will go, all of the pages of
the panel will be accessed by large buttons. If you drag it all the way down, all of the pages will be accessed by small
icons. Positions in between allow you to use some large buttons and some small icons. See page 78 in Chapter 2.
21 Equation Fit Solver
532 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The Calculate Y given X tool uses the user-defined equation and the fitted parameters to calculate the value of y
given the value of x. This tool is available only when you have calculated the parameters. Enter a value for x and
click the Analyze button to compute the results.
Additional folio tools are arranged on the left side of the panel. Use these tools to manage data and experiment
with the results of your analysis. Each tool is described in detail below.
Calculate
Estimates the parameters of the user-defined equation and calculates other results you could use to evaluate
how well the function fits the data. This tool is also available by choosing Equation Fit Solver > Analysis >
Calculate.
Plot
Creates a plot demonstrating the fit of the function for each known data point that you defined in the Data
area. The scaling, setup, exporting and other features of the plot are similar to the options available for other
Weibull++ plot sheets. Features that are not applicable to this plot will be hidden or disabled. This tool is also
available by choosing Equation Fit Solver > Analysis > Plot.
Initialize Parameters
Automatically copies all the unknown variables in the user-defined equation (except the random variable x) to
the Function Parameters area. This also resets the minimum, maximum and initial guess values to their
default values. This tool is also available by choosing Equation Fit Solver > Analysis > Initialize
Parameters.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 533
The ALTA Test Plan utility is a planning tool that helps you design a one-stress or two-stress
accelerated life test that will yield the closest possible estimate of product life under normal
operating conditions. It generates a test plan with recommendations for what stress levels should be used in the test
and how many units should be tested at each stress level.
This chapter describes how to use the ALTA Test Plan utility, including:
Generating a test plan - Section 22.1 (p. 533).
An overview of the available types of test plans - Section 22.2 (p. 534).
Test Plan Results sheet - Section 22.3 (p. 535).
The control panel - Section 22.4 (p. 536).
Example of using the Test Plan utility - Section 22.5 (p. 537).
22.1 Generating a Test Plan
Follow the steps outlined below to generate a recommended test plan.
Create a new Test Plan folio by choosing Insert > Tools > ALTA Test Plan.
From the Number of Simultaneous Stresses drop-down list, choose whether you will be designing a test that
applies only one type of stress during the test, or a combination of two stresses applied simultaneously (e.g.,
temperature and humidity).
From the Test Plan Type drop-down list, choose an appropriate test plan. See Section 22.2 on page 534. The test
plan level is the number of stress levels that the plan recommends (e.g., a 3 level plan will recommend subjecting
some units to a low stress level, some to a mid level and the rest to a high level). Test plans may also differ
according to how they allocate the units to stress levels. Your specified test plan will minimize the variance on the
value you enter in the BX Life Estimate Sought field.
In the BX% Life Estimate Sought field, enter (as a percentage) the BX% life that you intend to estimate from the
test (e.g., for the B10 life, you would enter 10).
In the Available Test Time field, enter the duration of the accelerated life test you are planning. (The duration can
be entered in any unit of time, but you must use the same time unit throughout the utility.)
From the Unit Allocation drop-down list, choose Show Allocations as % if you do not want to specify the total
number of units that will be available for testing. In this case, the test plan will only display the percentage of the
available units that should be allocated to each stress level.
ALTA Test Plan Utility
22
22 ALTA Test Plan Utility
534 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
If you want the test plan to display both the percentage and the quantity of test units allocated to each stress level,
choose Show Allocations as Qty and then enter the total number of units that will be available in the Number of
Units Available field.
From the Lifetime Distribution drop-down list, select the distribution that describes your product's life behavior.
You can select Weibull and enter the shape parameter in the Beta field, or select Lognormal and enter the shape
parameter in the Std field.
Next, in the Stress 1 area, choose the appropriate Life-Stress Relationship from the drop-down list. Then enter
the stress level at normal use conditions in the Use Stress Value field. In the Maximum Stress Value field, enter
the maximum stress level that could be applied during the test without introducing failure modes that would not
occur under normal use conditions. Repeat these steps for Stress 2 if you selected to design a two-stress test.
In order to provide reasonable recommendations for the stress levels to be used in the test, the software must
estimate a life-stress relationship for your product. The utility will estimate a life-stress relationship using the
values you enter in the Probabilities of Failure (%) area. Each probability of failure is for the time you entered in
the Available Test Time field and at the stress level described.
For example, if you specified a test time of 100 and one of the fields in this area is P(Time, Use Stress 1,
Maximum Stress 2), then you should enter the estimated probability of failure for the product at time = 100,
where the product experiences Stress 1 at the specified use stress value and Stress 2 at the specified maximum
stress value.
Click Calculate to generate the recommended test plan. The Test Plan Results sheet will appear. See Section 22.3
on page 535. You can further evaluate the recommended plan by using the utility's control panel.
22.2 Test Plan Types
The ALTA Test Plan utility allows you to choose a test plan type that will best fit your test goals and resource
constraints. Which test plans are available will depend on whether you chose to design a one-stress or two-stress test
in the Number of Simultaneous Stresses drop-down list. Each test plan will attempt to minimize the variance on the
BX% life you specified in the BX% Life Estimate Sought field.
If you selected to design a single-stress test, the following test plans will be available:
2 Level Statistically Optimum Plan
Recommends two stress levels: a high stress level, which is the maximum allowable stress value that you
specified during setup, and a low stress level. The low stress level and the proportion of units allocated to each
stress level are calculated in order to minimize the variance on the BX% life.
3 Level Best Standard Plan
Recommends three stress levels: a high stress level, which is the maximum allowable stress value that you
specified during setup, a low stress level and a mid stress level. The low and mid levels are calculated in order to
minimize the variance on the BX% life. The test units are allocated equally to each stress level.
3 Level Best Compromise Plan
Recommends three stress levels using the same approach described above for the 3 Level Best Standard Plan. You
define the proportion of test units to allocate to the mid stress level during setup in the Proportion of Units at
Mid Stress field. The other proportions are calculated in order to minimize the variance on the BX% life.
3 Level Best Equal Expected Number Failing Plan
Recommends three stress levels using the same approach described above for the 3 Level Best Standard Plan. The
proportion of units allocated to each stress level is calculated such that the number of units expected to fail at each
stress level is equal.
Tip: If your product's underlying life distribution is exponential, select Weibull from the Life Distribution drop-down
list and enter 1 in the Beta field. This is equivalent to using an exponential distribution.
22.3 Test Plan Results Sheet
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 535
3 Level 4:2:1 Allocation Plan
Recommends three stress levels using the same approach described above for the 3 Level Best Standard Plan. The
proportion of test units tested at the high, mid and low stress levels will be calculated to be as close as 4:2:1 as
possible (e.g., if you specified that 7 units are available in the Total Number of Units field, then this plan will
recommend testing 4 units at the high level, 2 at the mid level and 1 at the low level).
When you select this plan, you must also enter a value in the Low Stress Adjustment Factor field. The
reduction factor must be a decimal between 0 and 1. The lower the value, the closer the recommended low
stress level will be to the product's specified use stress level. Thus, if the reduction factor is 0, then the low
stress level will be equal to the use stress level. If the reduction factor is 1, then the low stress level will equal
the stress value that minimizes the variance on the BX% life.
If you selected to design a two-stress test, the following test plans are available:
3 Level Optimum Plan
Recommends three stress levels, each consisting of a combination of stress values for the two stress types. The
combinations are structured such that:
The 1st combination has both Stress 1 and Stress 2 at the maximum allowable stress values that you specified
during setup.
The 2nd combination will have Stress 1 at a calculated mid stress level and Stress 2 at the use stress level.
The 3rd combination will have Stress 1 at the use stress level and Stress 2 at a calculated mid stress level.
The mid stress level is calculated such that the units tested at the 2nd and 3rd stress combinations will have the
same probability of failure at the end of the test. The proportion of units allocated to each stress level is computed
in order to minimize the variance on the BX% life.
5 Level Best Compromise Plan
Recommends five stress levels, each consisting of a combination of stress values for the two stress types. The
combinations are structured such that:
The 1st combination will have both Stress 1 and Stress 2 at the maximum stress values that you specified
during setup.
The 2nd combination will have Stress 1 at a calculated mid stress value A and Stress 2 at the use stress level.
The 3rd combination will have Stress 1 at the use stress level and Stress 2 at a calculated mid stress value B.
The 4th combination will have Stress 1 at the specified maximum stress value and Stress 2 at a calculated mid
stress value C.
The 5th combination will have Stress 1 at a calculated mid stress value D and Stress 2 at the specified
maximum stress value.
The mid stress values A and B are calculated such that the units tested at the 2nd and 3rd stress combinations will
have the same probability of failure at the end of the test. The mid stress values C and D are calculated such that
the units tested at the 4th and 5th stress combinations will have the same probability of failure at the end of the
test. The proportion of units allocated to each stress level is computed in order to minimize the variance on the
BX% life.
22.3 Test Plan Results Sheet
The Test Plan Results sheet displays a summary of your inputs, the utility's recommended test plan and the time at
which unreliability equals the value you entered in BX% Life Estimate Sought field (i.e., Tp). If you entered a
number of available test units, it also displays the standard deviation of Tp.
The results sheet is divided into the following areas:
22 ALTA Test Plan Utility
536 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The Test Plan Inputs area displays a summary of all the inputs that were used to generate the test plan. This
includes information for each specified stress type and probabilities of failure at various stress levels.
The Recommended Test Plan area displays the recommended stress levels to be used in the test and the
recommended allocation of units to each stress level. Each row describes a stress level (which, for two-stress
tests, will be a combination of stress values) and the number of units to be tested at that stress level. For example,
consider the following plan.
The row labeled First Stress Level recommends that 25.2% of the available units be tested at a level of 400 for
Stress 1 and 25 for Stress 2. The Unit Allocation (Qty) column is visible when the Show Allocations as Qty
option was chosen from the Unit Allocation drop-down list on the Test Plan Inputs sheet. In this example, it
shows that 25.2% of the number of available units is 12.6.
Time at Which Unreliability (Tp) = 5% is the time at which unreliability equals the value you entered for
BX Life Estimate Sought. This value is calculated based on the life distribution and probabilities of failure
you entered in the Test Plan Inputs sheet.
Standard Deviation of Tp is calculated only if you choose Show Allocations as Qty on the Inputs sheet. The
smaller the standard deviation of Tp, the less variation in Tp you can expect in repeated samplings. Thus,
smaller values indicate a more robust test plan.
22.4 Test Plan Control Panel
The Main page of the Test Plan's control panel gives you options to further evaluate the recommended test plan by
solving for any one of the criteria in the Solve for drop-down list.
The Confidence Level measures the likelihood that the BX% life obtained from the test data is accurate. The
confidence level can be increased by increasing the bounds ratio or sample size.
The Bounds Ratio is defined as the ratio of the upper confidence bound to the lower confidence bound. It
indicates the relative size of the variance on the BX% life estimate at a given confidence level. The narrower the
confidence bounds, the closer the ratio is to 1, indicating less uncertainty at the associated confidence level. The
calculated bounds ratio can be decreased by decreasing the confidence level or increasing the sample size.
The Sample Size is the number of units that are used in the test. The sample size can be decreased by decreasing
the confidence level or increasing the bounds ratio.
22.5 Test Plan Utility Example
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 537
To solve for one of these three criteria, you must provide values for the other two. By using the Main page of control
panel, you can determine whether your goals with respect to these criteria are realistic (given factors such as sample
size constraints), and you can explore various possible trade-offs between the three criteria.
To solve for one of these criteria, follow the steps outlined below:
From the Solve for drop-down list in the Input area of the control panel, choose the value you wish to solve for.
The two input fields immediately below the drop-down list will change depending on what you choose. For
example, if you choose Sample Size, the two input fields will be Confidence Level and Bounds Ratio.
Enter the appropriate values in the two input fields in the Input area.
Click the Calculate Result icon inside the Result area of the control panel to solve for your selected value.
The control panel also includes a Comments page that allows you to enter notes or other text that will be saved with
the folio.
22.5 Test Plan Utility Example
This topic presents an example of how to use the ALTA Test Plan utility to generate a test plan. The test plan will
recommend the stress levels that should be used in a test and the number of units that should be tested at each stress
level.
A reliability group in a semiconductor company is planning an accelerated life test for an electronic device. 150 test
units will be employed for the test, and the test is planned to last for 600 hours. Temperature and voltage have been
determined to be the main factors affecting the reliability of the device, and three chambers are available for testing
the units. The goal of the test is to estimate the B10 life (i.e., the time at which unreliability = 10%) of the device
under the normal use conditions of 300 K for temperature and 4 V for voltage.
The engineers have determined that the maximum stress values that could be applied during the accelerated life test
are temperature = 360 K and maximum voltage = 10 V. Stresses beyond this level would introduce failure modes that
do not occur under normal conditions. The product follows a Weibull distribution with beta = 3. Based on their
knowledge of the life-stress relationship, the engineers estimate the following probabilities of failure after the product
is tested for 600 hours at the different combinations of use level and maximum level stress values:
2% at 300 K and 4 V.
40% at 360 K and 4 V.
90% at 300 K and 10 V.
Generating a Test Plan
Follow the steps outlined below to generate a test plan:
Open the Test Plan utility by choosing Insert > Tools > ALTA Test Plan.
Select to design a two-stress test by choosing 2 from the Number of Simultaneous Stresses drop-down list.
Because only three testing chambers are available, three different stress levels will be used for each of the two
stress types. Choose 3 Level Optimum Plan from the Test Plan Type drop-down list.
Tip: ALTA also includes a simulation tool called SimuMatic that you can use to visualize the confidence bounds associated
with the bounds ratio presented in the test plans utility. The Test Plan utility uses an analytical solution that is based on the
assumption of a large sample size; SimuMatic does not make any assumptions about the sample size and thus may be
preferred in the case of small sample sizes.
22 ALTA Test Plan Utility
538 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Enter 10 in the BX% Life Estimate Sought field to specify that the test will be used to estimate the B10 life.
Enter 600 in the Available Test Time field.
From the Unit Allocation drop-down list, choose Show Allocations as Qty. Then enter 150 in the Number of
Units Available field.
Choose Weibull from the Lifetime Distribution drop-down list. Then enter 3 in the Beta field.
In the Stress 1 area, enter the information for the first stress type (i.e., temperature).
Choose Arrhenius from the Life-Stress Relationship drop-down list. This is the life-stress relationship that is
typically used for temperature.
Enter 300 in the Use Stress Value field.
Enter 360 in the Maximum Stress Value field.
In the Stress 2 area, enter the information for the second stress type (voltage).
Choose Power from the Life-Stress Relationship drop-down list. This is the life-stress relationship that is
typically used for voltage.
Enter 4 in the Use Stress Value field.
Enter 10 in the Maximum Stress Value field.
Enter the estimated probabilities of failure at the end of the test, as shown next.
Each probability of failure is a function to time and two stress levels. For example, the value entered in the
P(Time, Use Stress 1, Maximum Stress 2) field is the probability of failure at 600 hours (specified in the
Available Test Time field), assuming the product experiences the specified use stress level for the first stress (300
K) and the specified maximum stress level for the second stress (10 V). The stress values were entered in the
Stress 1 and Stress 2 areas.
Click the Generate Test Plan button. The Test Plan Results sheet will appear.
The recommended stress levels and unit allocations are displayed under the Recommended Test Plan heading
near the bottom of the results sheet. This area of the sheet is shown below.
For example, according to this recommendation, the first stress level of the test should be combination of 360 K
and 10 V, and about 29 units (or 19.4% of the total number of available units) should be tested at that level.
Evaluating the Plan
22.5 Test Plan Utility Example
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 539
The reliability group may also wish to evaluate the test plan in relationship to other test goals. For example, the
company may desire a test that will estimate the B10 life with 90% confidence and a bounds ratio of 2 or less. The
control panel can help you decide whether this can be achieved with the given test plan and with the specified sample
size. To use the control panel, follow the steps outlined below.
From the Solve for drop-down list in the Input area of the control panel, select Bounds Ratio.
In the Confidence Level input field, enter 0.90.
In the Sample Size input field, enter 150, which is the total number of units that will be tested, according to the
current test plan.
Click the Calculate Result icon inside the Result area of the control panel to solve for the bounds ratio.
In this example, the bounds ratio is calculated to be 1.3575, which is better than the company's desired ratio of 2. As
a result, the engineers may consider using a smaller sample size in order to plan a more efficient test. For example, if
they entered 40 in the Sample Size field and then clicked Calculate Result again, the calculated bounds ratio would
be 1.8073, which suggests that 40 units may be sufficient for the purposes of the test.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 541
The results of a calculation from any folio, the Quick Calculation Pad, the Goodness of Fit Results window, Life
Comparison tool, Stress-Strength Calculator and SimuMatic can be displayed in the Results window. From the
Results window, you can edit the results, copy the results to the Clipboard or print the results.
There are two ways that you can use to open the Results window:
On a folio sheet or from SimuMatic, click the Analysis Summary Area or click the Show Analysis Summary (...)
button after the parameters have been calculated.
On the Quick Calculation Pad or the Goodness of Fit Results window, click the Report button.
The appearance of the window varies depending on how it was called. For example, the Results window for a
Weibull++ standard folio can look something like this..
Results Window
23
23 Results Window
542 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The icons at the top of the window are described next:
Cut
Cuts the selected text to the Clipboard. Data stored in the Clipboard can be pasted into this and other
applications.
Copy
Copies the selected text to the Clipboard. Data stored in the Clipboard can be pasted into this and other
applications.
Paste
Pastes the contents of the Clipboard into the current control.
Page Setup
Allows you to specify printing options.
Print
Sends the current document to the printer.
Send to Excel
Allows you to save the current selection as a Microsoft Excel (*.xls) file and then opens that file in Excel, if it
is installed on your computer.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 543
Many engineering math problems result in a need to solve non-linear equations. Solving these equations can be
complex, tedious and in some situations, no solution may exist at all. The Non-Linear Equation Root Finder is a
utility that allows you to quickly solve for the root of any user-defined non-linear equation. This helps you eliminate
some of the guesswork of solving for the value of the unknown variable that brings the function as close to zero as
possible.
You can access the utility by choosing Home > Tools > Non-Linear Equation Root Finder.
The following is an example of a calculation for the root of an equation.
To use the utility, follow the steps below:
Enter the user-defined equation in the Function box. Use the variable x for the unknown variable.
In the Root Minimum and Root Maximum fields, enter the initial guess estimates of the root.
In the Algorithm Order field, enter the variable order which is to be improved in every iteration. Note that the
algorithm order must be greater than or equal to 2.
In the Convergence field, set a tolerance value at which the root of the equation should converge (i.e., f(x) = 0).
Non-Linear Equation Root
Finder
24
24 Non-Linear Equation Root Finder
544 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
In the Max Iterations field, set the maximum number of iterations the algorithm will perform in order to solve for
the root of the equation.
Click Calculate to solve for the root of the equation. You may need to edit the inputs in order to obtain the best
possible solution for the equation. The Results area will return the following:
Real Root returns the root of the equation. If the root is not within the initial specified range, you will need to edit
the values in the Root Minimum and Root Maximum fields until the root is within range of these values.
Function Value shows the value of the user-defined equation at the root value. You may need to edit the
tolerance value in the Convergence field in order to obtain a solution that is as close as possible to zero.
Iterations returns the number of iterations that were performed in order to obtain the solution.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 545
The Quick Statistical Reference (QSR) tool allows you to quickly and easily calculate many common statistical
values (e.g., median ranks and chi-squared values) and interpolate (or extrapolate) values using the polynomial
interpolation function.
To open the QSR, choose Home > Tools > Quick Statistical Reference.
The Function Option page of the QSR is for calculating statistical values. The Interpolation page is for interpolating
(or extrapolating) values using the polynomial interpolation function. Both pages are described in the sections below.
25.1 QSR Function Option Page
To calculate a statistical value, select the appropriate function option on left side of the Function Option page. Then
enter the required inputs and click Calculate.
Quick Statistical Reference
(QSR)
25
25 Quick Statistical Reference (QSR)
546 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The following options are available.
25.1.1 Median Ranks
The Median Ranks option returns the probability of failure based on the sample size and order number of the failure.
The probability estimates are at a 50% confidence level.
The median rank is obtained by solving the following equation for Z:
where:
N is the sample size.
j is the order number.
Z is the median rank.
25.1.2 Other Ranks
The Other Ranks option returns the probability of failure based on the sample size and order number of the failure.
The probability estimates are at a confidence level percentage point that is specified by the user.
The rank is obtained by solving the following equation for Z:
where:
N is the sample size.
j is the order number.
P is the confidence level.
Z is the rank.
25.1.3 Standard Nominal Values
The Standard Normal Tables option returns the probability of observing a value less than or equal to x on the standard
normal curve, given a value for x. To find the value of x given the probability, use the Inverse Standard Normal
Values option.
The probability is obtained by solving the following equation for Z(x):
25.1 QSR Function Option Page
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 547
where Z(x) is the probability of observing a value less than or equal to x.
25.1.4 Inverse Standard Normal Values
The Inverse Standard Normal Tables option returns a value for x on the standard normal curve, given the probability
of observing a value less than or equal to x. To find the probability given x, use the Standard Normal Tables option.
The output is obtained by solving the following equation for x:
where Z(x) is the probability of observing a value less than or equal to x.
25.1.5 Cumulative Poisson
The Cumulative Poisson option returns the probability of an event occurring n times during a specified interval. The
required inputs are n and the average rate of occurrence for the event, , where > 0.
The probability is obtained by solving for P(n, ) in the following equation:
where:
n is the maximum number of occurrences (and the upper limit of the summation).
is the average rate of occurrence for the event.
25.1.6 Cumulative Binomial Probability
The Cumulative Binomial Probability option returns the probability of an event occurring k or more times in N trials.
The required inputs are k, N and the probability (entered as a decimal number) of the event occurring per trial.
The probability is obtained by solving for P in the following equation:
where:
P is the probability of the event occurring k or more times in N trials.
p is the probability of the event occurring per trial.
N is the minimum number of trials (and the end of the summation).
k is the minimum number of occurrences (and the starting point of the summation).
25 Quick Statistical Reference (QSR)
548 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
25.1.7 F-Distribution Values
The F-Distribution option returns Q(F|n
1
, n
2
), the significance level at which we can reject the hypothesis that one
sample has a smaller variance than another. The three inputs required are the degrees of freedom for both samples and
the ratio of the observed dispersion of the first sample to that of the second. To find the ratio of the observed
dispersion, use the Inverse F-Distribution Values option.
The output is obtained by solving for Q(F|n
1
, n
2
) in the following equation:
where:
n
1
is the degrees of freedom for the first sample.
n
2
is the degrees of freedom for the second sample.
F is the ratio of the observed dispersion of the first sample to that of the second.
B is the beta function.
25.1.8 Inverse F-Distribution Values
The Inverse F-Distribution option returns F, the ratio of the observed dispersion of one sample to that of another. The
three inputs required are the degrees of freedom for both samples and the significance level at which we can reject the
hypothesis that the first sample has a smaller variance than the second. To find the significance level at which we can
reject the hypothesis, use the F-Distribution Values option.
The output is obtained by solving for F in the following equation:
where:
n
1
is the degrees of freedom for the first sample.
n
2
is the degrees of freedom for the second sample.
Q(F|n
1
, n
2
) is the significance level at which we can reject the hypothesis that the first sample has a smaller
variance than the second.
B is the beta function.
25.1 QSR Function Option Page
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 549
25.1.9 Chi-Squared Values
The Chi-Squared Probability returns the chi-squared value. The required inputs are the area to the right of the critical
value, d, and degrees of freedom, v.
The output is obtained by solving for _
2
in the following equation:
where:
d is the area to the right of the critical value.
v is the degrees of freedom.
_
2
is the chi-squared value.
25.1.10 Incomplete Beta Function
The Incomplete Beta Function option returns the value of I
x
(a,b). The required inputs are the values of x, a and b.
The output is obtained by solving for I
x
(a,b) in the following equation:
where 0 < x < 1.
25.1.11 Gamma Function
The Gamma Function option returns the value of I(n). The only required input is n.
The output is obtained by solving for I(n) in the following equation:
where n > 0.
25.1.12 Student's t Values
The Students t Values option returns the t-value of the Student's t-distribution, given the probability of observing a
value equal or less than the t-value and the number of degrees of freedom.
25 Quick Statistical Reference (QSR)
550 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The output is obtains by solving for t in the following equation:
where:
a is the probability of observing a value equal to or less than t.
v is the degrees of freedom.
25.2 QSR Interpolation Page
The Interpolation page uses the polynomial interpolation function to interpolate (or extrapolate) values given a set of
known data points that you provide.
The QSR attempts to fit a polynomial to the given data points. The polynomial is of the (i - 1) order, where i is the
number of data points. You must enter at least 2 data points, and you cannot enter more than 10.
Note that if the given data points are far from the point of interest, the resulting polynomial can oscillate between
values, thus yielding erroneous results. Moreover, interpolation based on only data points, with no background
information on the actual function, can also yield erroneous results. For these reasons, an approximate error value is
returned with each interpolation.
Follow the steps outlined below to obtain values with the QSR:
In the Input area of the Interpolation page, specify the number of data points you wish to enter in the Number of
x-y Values field. Then click the Update button to create a table on the left of the page where you can enter the
known data points that you wish to interpolate from.
In the table on the left side of the page, enter the x- and y-values data points that you wish to interpolate from.
In the Input area, enter the x-value for which the corresponding y-value will be obtained.
25.2 QSR Interpolation Page
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 551
Click the Calculate button to obtain the corresponding y-value of the x-value you entered in the Input area. The
y-value and an approximate error value are displayed in the Output area.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 553
The Quick Parameter Estimator (QPE) allows you to estimate the parameters of a distribution based on information
you have about the reliability of a product, the probability of an event occurring or the typical duration of a task.
There are two versions of the QPE, one for Weibull++ and one for ALTA.
This chapter describes how to use the QPE, including:
Using the Weibull++ version of the QPE, including:
The Wizard view - Section 26.1.1 (p. 554).
The Expert view - Section 26.1.2 (p. 555).
Using the ALTA version of the QPE - Section 26.2 (p. 556).
26.1 Weibull++ Version of the QPE
You can open the Weibull++ version of the QPE from the Ribbon by choosing Home >
Tools > Quick Parameter Estimator (W++).
When the QPE is opened from the Ribbon, you will have the option to copy the results to the Windows clipboard.
You can also open the QPE from the Weibull++ standard folio (by leaving the folio's data sheet empty and clicking
Calculate), the Weibull++ Monte Carlo and SimuMatic utilities and the Expected Failure Times plot. When the QPE
is opened from another folio or utility, you will have the option to update that window using the calculated parameters
and selected time units.
The QPE includes a Wizard view and an Expert view, described below. You can toggle between the different views by
clicking the Use Expert or Use Wizard button at the bottom-left corner of the window.
The Wizard view automatically selects a distribution and estimates that distribution's parameters based on your
responses to a series of questions. The first page of the Wizard view asks you to choose among three different
types of models that you can build with the QPE. Subsequent pages will ask more specific questions related to
your selected model.
The Expert view allows you to estimate the parameters of a distribution using either two unreliability values at
specified times or one unreliability value and the other parameter(s) of the distribution. Unlike the Wizard view,
you must select a distribution to solve the parameter(s) for.
Quick Parameter
Experimenter (QPE)
26
Whats Changed? In previous versions of Weibull++, the Expert view of the Quick Parameter Estimator was known
as the Parameter Experimenter.
26 Quick Parameter Experimenter (QPE)
554 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
26.1.1 Wizard View
To use the Wizard view of the Quick Parameter Estimator (QPE), simply follow the prompts on each page. The first
page will present and describe three different types of models that you can build with the QPE.
Below are the three models and the kind of information you'll need to provide in subsequent pages.
To build a Reliability model you need to provide information about:
How age affects the product's reliability
The product's intended design life and the estimated warranty time
Best-case, worst-case and most likely unreliability estimates for the product at the end of the design life and
warranty time
To build an Event occurrence model you need to provide information about:
Whether age affects the probability of the event's occurrence
Best-case, worst-case and most likely estimates for how often the event will occur
To build a Task duration model you need to provide information about:
Best-case, worst-case and most likely estimates for how long it will take to complete the task
The last window will display the tool's selected distribution and the calculated parameters. It will also provide one of
the two options described below.
If you opened the QPE from an analysis folio or utility, the Update button will be available in case you wish to
update that window using the selected distribution, calculated parameters and selected time units.
If you opened the QPE from the Ribbon, the Finish & Copy button will be available in case you wish to copy the
parameters results to the Windows clipboard.
26.1 Weibull++ Version of the QPE
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 555
26.1.2 Expert View
To use the Expert view of the Quick Parameter Estimator, click the Use Expert button at the bottom-left corner of the
window. The window will appear as shown next.
Follow the steps below to use the Expert view:
Choose a distribution from the Distribution drop-down list. This is the distribution that you will solve the
parameter(s) for. Then choose the appropriate time units from the Units drop-down list.
If you are not sure which distribution to select, considering using the Wizard view of the QPE instead.
Your choice of time units applies to all time inputs and applicable parameters of the distribution (such as the
eta parameter when the Weibull distribution is used).
Select an appropriate option in the Quantification Method area. The following two methods are available:
The Unreliability and a Parameter method solves for one parameter of the distribution. It requires one
unreliability point (i.e., an unreliability value at a specified time) and the values of all the parameters of the
selected distribution except the parameter you will solve for.
If you select this method, you must then enter one unreliability point in the Point #1 area. For example, if
you believe that your product has an unreliability of 10% at 100 hours, then you would enter 100 in the
Time field and 0.10 in the Unreliability field.
In the Solve for Parameter area, select the parameter that you wish to solve for. The remaining
parameters in this area will have input fields enabled. Enter the known values of these parameters.
26 Quick Parameter Experimenter (QPE)
556 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The Two Unreliability Points method solves for all the parameters of the distribution. It requires two
unreliability points that you will provide in the Point #1 and Point #2 areas.
Click Calculate to solve for the unknown parameter(s).
If you opened the QPE from an analysis folio or utility, you may click the Update button if you wish to update
that window using the selected distribution, calculated parameters and selected time units.
Click Calculate to solve for the unknown parameter(s).
If you opened the QPE from the Ribbon, you may click the Finish & Copy button if you wish to copy the
results to the Windows Clipboard.
26.2 ALTA Version of the QPE
You can open the ALTA version of the QPE from the Ribbon by choosing Home > Tools >
Quick Parameter Estimator (ALTA).
The window will appear as shown next.
When the QPE is opened from the Ribbon, you will have the option to copy the results to the Windows clipboard.
You can also open the QPE from the ALTA standard folio (by leaving the folio's data sheet empty and clicking
Calculate), ALTA Monte Carlo and SimuMatic utilities. When the QPE is opened from these utilities, you will have
the option to update the window using the calculated parameters and selected time units.
Tip: If you are building an event occurrence or task duration model, you can treat an unreliability point as the
probability that an event will occur or that a task will be completed by a specified time. For example, if you are
modeling the probability of an event's occurrence and you believe that there is a probability of 30% that the event
will occur before 150 hours, then you would enter 0.3 in the Unreliability field and 150 in the Time field.
26.2 ALTA Version of the QPE
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 557
Follow the steps below to use the QPE:
The first page of the window will be used to estimate the product's mean life under normal stress conditions.
Choose a model from the Model drop-down list. This is the model that you will solve the parameter(s) for.
Then choose the appropriate time units from the Units drop-down list.
Your choice of time units applies to all time inputs and applicable parameters of the model (such as the eta
parameter when the Weibull distribution is used).
Select an appropriate option in the Quantification Method area. The following two methods are available:
The Unreliability and a Parameter method solves for one parameter of the model. It requires one
unreliability point (i.e., an unreliability value at a specified time) and the values of all the parameters of the
selected model except the parameter you will solve for.
If you select this method, you must then enter one unreliability point for normal use conditions in the
Point #1 area. For example, if you believe that your product has an unreliability of 10% at 100 hours
under normal use conditions, then you would enter 100 in the Time field and 0.10 in the Unreliability
field.
In the Solve for Parameter area, select the parameter that you wish to solve for. The remaining
parameters in this area will have input fields enabled. Enter the known values of these parameters.
The Two Unreliability Points method solves for all the parameters of the model. It requires two
unreliability points under normal use conditions that you will provide in the Point #1 and Point #2 areas.
In the Use Stress Level area, you must enter the stress level that the product will experience under normal
conditions. In multi-stress situations, this stress level will be a combination of stress values for each stress
type.
If the Number of Stresses field is enabled, enter the number of stresses that will be used in your model.
(Note that different models have different requirements for the number of stresses that can be used.)
Click the arrow inside the Use Stress Value(s) field. In the table that appears, enter a stress value for each
stress type. If there are multiple stress values, they will appear in the field separated by semicolons.
Click Next > to go to the Life at Each Stress Level page. The Use Stress Level area of the page will display the
product's mean life at the specified use stress level based on your previous inputs. In the Accelerated Level 1
area, you must enter the estimated mean life for the product at an accelerated stress level.
26 Quick Parameter Experimenter (QPE)
558 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
To enter the accelerated stress level, double-click inside the Stress Value(s) field. In the table that appears,
enter the stress value for each stress.
In the Characteristic Life field, enter the product's characteristic life at the associated accelerated stress level.
For the Weibull distribution, the characteristic life is equal to the value of the eta parameter (i.e., the time
at which unreliability = 63.2%).
For the lognormal distribution, it is equal to Exp(Log-mean) (i.e., the time at which unreliability = 50%).
For the exponential distribution, it is equal to the mean life.
Click Next > again to see the calculated parameters.
If you opened the QPE from the Monte Carlo or SimuMatic utility, you may click the Update button if you
wish to update that window using the selected model, calculated parameters and selected time units.
If you opened the QPE from the Ribbon, you may click the Finish & Copy button if you wish to copy the
results to the Windows Clipboard.
Note: The number of accelerated stress levels you must provide life estimates for will equal the number of stresses
that will be used in the selected model. For example, if the model uses two stress types, as shown above, then there
will be an Accelerated Life 2 area in which you must provide a characteristic life estimate for a second accelerated
stress level.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 559
ReliaSofts Synthesis-enabled applications provide several options for performing customized analysis and
generating reports that meet your specific presentation requirements.
Analysis Workbooks give you the ability to generate data and results, and to create customized plots and graphs
to display these results. See Section 27.2 on page 560. Each analysis workbook has over 140 built-in functions,
including complete in-cell formula support and cell references. You can automatically link results from different
analyses into one analysis workbook.
You may prefer to use this reporting tool if you want to have a spreadsheet-type report that includes absolute
references to specific analyses. You may also prefer to use this reporting tool if you will be performing complex
mathematical calculations.
Word Report Templates give you the ability to generate data and results and to create customized reports that
use functionality that is similar to a Microsoft Word document. See Section 27.4 on page 573. This includes
paragraph formatting, customized headers and footers, and imported images while incorporating the ability to
insert functions and tables from the Function Wizard and plots that are created on-the-fly from the Plot Wizard.
You may prefer to use this reporting tool if you want to have a more polished, professional looking report that can
easily be reused just by changing the referenced data sources.
General Spreadsheets can be inserted into any of the standard folios in Weibull++/ALTA. These provide the
same spreadsheet capabilities that are available in the analysis workbook, but they are stored together with an
analysis folio. See page 87 in Chapter 2.
You may prefer to use this reporting tool if you are performing custom calculations based on the data sheets in the
same folio and you wish to keep the analyses together with their source data.
Some of the tools related to this custom reporting functionality are accessible in several different ways. This chapter
describes the following:
Multiple Data Sources in One Report - Section 27.1 (p. 560)
Analysis Workbooks - Section 27.2 (p. 560)
Tools for Working with Spreadsheets - Section 27.3 (p. 563)
Setting up and using Word Report Templates - Section 27.4 (p. 573)
Using the Function Wizard - Section 27.5 (p. 584)
Using the Plot Wizard - Section 27.6 (p. 588)
An example of performing a custom analysis and report - Section 27.7 (p. 589)
Reports
27
27 Reports
560 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
27.1 Multiple Data Sources in One Report
If you are linking to multiple data sources in a report, and those data sources use different time units, you must be
aware that the software displays each result in the units by its data source. If you wish to compare the results from
multiple data sources that use different units, there are two possible scenarios:
Convert the data in the original data source. For example, if you are using two data sources, one that uses week
as the units and one that uses workweek as the units, you can use the Change Units feature to automatically
convert the data in one data source from week to workweek. See page 89 in Chapter 2.
Manually adjust the functions so they return results in the same units. For example, if you are using two data
sources, one that uses week as the units and one that uses workweek as the units, and you want the results of
both sets of calculations to display the B10 life in workweek units, you can adjust the function that returns the
B10 life for the week data sheet by the ratio of the week/workweek System Base Unit (SBU) values. For
example, if 168 is the SBU value for week and 120 is the SBU value for workweek, you could add *(168/
120) to the calculations that are based on the week data set in order to return the results in workweeks instead
of weeks as shown next: =(TIMEATPF(Weibull!Week!Data1,0.1))*(168/120).
27.2 Analysis Workbooks
You can add a new analysis workbook to a project by choosing Insert > Reports and Plots > Analysis Workbook.
27.2.1 Analysis Workbook Wizard
When you create a new analysis workbook in an existing project, the Analysis Workbook Wizard will appear.
Use the Default Data Source field to specify an analysis that will serve as the default data source for functions in
the analysis workbook. Click Select to open a window that will allow you to select an analysis. In Weibull++ or
ALTA, you can select any data sheet in a standard folio, a degradation folio or a non-parametric LDA folio. (Note
that if you select a data sheet in a degradation folio or a non-parametric LDA folio, the results will be based on the
Weibull++ or ALTA standard folio that would be created if you transferred the data to that folio type and not on
the base folio.) In BlockSim note that the results model used for the data source is specified in the Report Folio
Model field on the Analysis Settings page of the diagram control panel. For analytical diagrams, you can base
Tip: If you want to keep the original data source as-is, you could create a copy of the data sheet, then convert the
duplicate data sheet to use the new units.
27.2 Analysis Workbooks
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 561
report results on either the analytical results or the fitted model; for simulation and phase diagrams, you can base
report results on either the simulation results or the fitted model.
Selecting a default data source allows you to create a custom report that can be applied to other analyses as it
populates the Data Source Index drop-down list in the Function Wizard that you can use when building functions.
Note that you always have the option to choose any other analysis in the current project, but the reference will be
specifically to that analysis.
Choose Based on Existing Template if you want to choose a predefined template to base the analysis workbook
on instead of starting with a blank analysis workbook.
Choose Standard if you want to use one of the standard templates that are shipped with the software.
Choose User if you want to use one of the analysis workbooks that you have previously defined. You can save
any report that you create as a template by choosing Workbook > Worksheet > Save Workbook as
Template.
27.2.2 Analysis Workbook Control Panel
The analysis workbook uses the functionality of a spreadsheet, including formatting, calculation options, cell
protection, defined variable names and the ability to create customized plots and graphs using the Chart Wizard. In
addition, you can use the options in the control panel to control how the analysis workbook is displayed and printed.
The analysis workbook control panel is shown next.
Function Wizard
Opens the Function Wizard, which helps you to build functions in analysis workbook sheets. These functions
can return results ranging from mathematical values (e.g., sine, pi or averages) to reliability values based on
associated data sheets (e.g., reliability for a given time, MTTF, etc.). See Section 27.5 on page 584.
Spreadsheet View
Sets the analysis workbook to Spreadsheet View, which displays the grid and the column/row headings.
27 Reports
562 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Report View
Sets the analysis workbook to Report View, which hides the grid and the column/row headings, and displays
the analysis workbook in the format in which it will be printed.
Refresh
Updates the analysis workbook to reflect any changes that have been made to the sheets.
Edit Defined Names
Opens the Define Names window which allows you to define a variable name for a particular cell, analysis, or
function, or to edit existing defined names for the analysis workbook. See Section 27.3.4 on page 566.
Select Data Sheets
Allows you to define or change the default data sources for the analysis workbook. When you click this button
a window will appear, which allows you to select up to four analyses in the project.
Settings
By default, the individual cells display the results of any formulas or calculations. To display the cell formulas
instead of the results, select View formulas. Note that this option is also available from the Sheet Options
window. See Section 27.3.10 on page 571.
To display color-coded borders around the cells, select Color-code cell types. The cells are coded using the
following scheme:
Red: the cell contains a formula.
Green: the cell contains a value (i.e., number or text).
Blue: the cell is blank but formatted.
No color: the cell is blank and unformatted.
Note that this option is also available from the Sheet Options window.
Associated Data Sources displays the list of data sources that are currently associated with the analysis
workbook. You can click the Select Data Sheets icon at any time to change these data sources. While you can
define only four default data sources, you can reference any analysis when working in the spreadsheet. Note that
if you add a function that references a specific data source, the reference is fixed to that data source and does not
change.
Displayed math precision sets the number of decimal places shown in results and plots. Please note that the
tolerance on the precision is limited by Windows to 15 digits.
Tip: By only using default data sources in the analysis workbook, you can quickly display the results from different
analyses simply by changing the associated data sources.
Note: In BlockSim, the results model used for each data source is specified in the Report Folio Model field on the
Analysis Settings page of the diagram control panel. For analytical diagrams, you can base report results on either
the analytical results or the fitted model; for simulation and phase diagrams, you can base report results on either the
simulation results or the fitted model.
27.3 Tools for Working with Spreadsheets
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 563
27.3 Tools for Working with Spreadsheets
This section presents tools available for working with data and navigating within a spreadsheet. It includes the
following sections:
Spreadsheet Components - Section 27.3.1 (p. 563)
Referencing Cells in the Spreadsheet - Section 27.3.2 (p. 564)
Check Spelling - Section 27.3.3 (p. 565)
Defining a Name - Section 27.3.4 (p. 566)
Goto - Section 27.3.5 (p. 567)
Format Cells - Number window - Section 27.3.6 (p. 568)
Calculation Options - Section 27.3.7 (p. 568)
Sort - Section 27.3.8 (p. 569)
Find - Section 27.3.9 (p. 570)
Sheet Options window - Section 27.3.10 (p. 571)
Protecting Cells - Section 27.3.11 (p. 572)
Exporting the Spreadsheet - Section 27.3.12 (p. 572)
27.3.1 Spreadsheet Components
The spreadsheet and its components are shown next.
Caption
For analysis workbooks, this displays the analysis workbook name and the name of the current sheet.
For general spreadsheets, this displays the folio name and the name of the current sheet.
Data entry bar is where you enter the data. Pressing an arrow key or ENTER enters the current contents of the
data entry bar into the current cell in the spreadsheet. The focus is then given to the cell in the direction of the
arrow, if arrows are used, or down, if ENTER is used. You can also type data directly into individual cells by
27 Reports
564 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
pressing F2 or double-clicking the selected cell. Note that you can also enter formulas manually in the data entry
bar.
Name box contains the column and row indicators that describe the currently selected cell.
Row headings displays the sequential row number for each entry, where each row is identified by this number.
Column headings displays the title for the entries in each column. Each heading type also allow you to perform
the following functions:
Enlarge and reduce the height/width of an individual row/column by dragging the borders of the row/column
heading cell.
Select an entire row/column by clicking the row/column heading cell.
Change the name of a row/column heading by double-clicking the heading. Type a new name for the row/
column in the window that appears.
Individual cells display each piece of information that you enter into the spreadsheet. The contents of the cell
currently selected are automatically displayed in the data entry bar. To edit the contents of a cell in the data entry
bar, double-click the cell or press F2.
Sheet tabs represent the different sheets (pages) within the spreadsheet. To switch between sheets, click the
appropriate sheet. You can change the name of the sheet by double-clicking it and typing a new name.
27.3.2 Referencing Cells in the Spreadsheet
Two types of cell references are possible when entering a formula: absolute and relative. A relative reference points
to a cell based on its relative position to the current cell. When the cell containing the reference is copied, the
reference is adjusted to point to a new cell with the same relative offset as the original cell. An absolute reference
points to a cell at an exact location. When the cell containing the formula is copied, the reference does not change.
Absolute references are designated by placing a dollar sign ($) in front of the row and/or column that is to be
absolute. For instance, $A$1 is an absolute reference that points to the cell located in Column A, Row 1 regardless of
the position of the cell containing the reference.
To reference a cell in a different sheet from the one in which the formula is entered, use an exclamation mark (!), after
the sheet name. For instance, =Sheet1!$A$1 is a reference to the cell located in Column A, Row 1 in Sheet 1 of the
spreadsheet. When referencing a cell in a different sheet from the one in which the formula is entered, the reference
must be absolute. If the reference is not absolute, the calculations will not be carried out properly.
Tip: If your regional settings use a comma as the decimal separator, a semicolon will be used to separate function
arguments (e.g., =RELIABILITY(Folio1!Data 1;A4)). Using the Function Wizard instead of manual entry ensures
correct syntax.
Note: You can only reference sheets in the same analysis workbook or in the same Weibull++ or ALTA standard folio.
Note: The DATAENTRY, DATARANK and FMATRIX functions include the Row and Column parameters that refer to the
sheet in the data source and not to the current workbook sheet. In these cases, you must use numbers to identify both the
row and column (e.g., for cell A2 in the source data sheet, enter 2 for the row and 1 for the column).
27.3 Tools for Working with Spreadsheets
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 565
27.3.3 Check Spelling
The Check Spelling feature is available for spreadsheets and Word report templates within the software. The
dictionary is installed into the ReliaSoft folder under My Documents on your computer (e.g., C:\Documents and
Settings\username\My Documents\ReliaSoft\Dictionaries).
To open the Spelling window from a spreadsheet, choose Home > Edit > Spelling. To open the Spelling window
from a Word report template, choose Home > Edit> Spelling.
The Spelling Window displays.
The top portion of the window displays the text from the field that is being checked and highlights the word that is not
in the dictionary. The bottom portion of the window provides suggestions for similar words that are in the dictionary.
Use the buttons to decide what to do with the highlighted text. To:
Ignore the current instance of the highlighted word but continue to highlight it if the same word appears again,
click Ignore Once.
Ignore all instances of the word in the current form, click Ignore All.
Add the highlighted word to the dictionary on your computer, click Add to Dictionary.
Replace the current instance of the highlighted word with the word that is currently selected in the Suggestions
area, click Change. If no word is selected, the first one will be used. Double-clicking a word in the Suggestions
area is another way to change the highlighted text.
Replace all instances of the highlighted word with the word that is currently selected in the Suggestions area,
click Change All. If no word is selected, the first one will be used.
Open the Spelling Options window, which provides additional settings to determine how the spell checker
functions, click Options.
Undo the last change that was made, click Undo Last. This button will be enabled if the field contains more than
one word that is not in the dictionary. If you change one word, the spell checker will remain open so you can
decide what to do with the next one and the Undo Last button becomes enabled.
27 Reports
566 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
27.3.3.1 Spelling Options Window
When you click the Options button in the Check Spelling window, the Spelling Options window will be displayed.
The General options area provides a list of the types of text that can be ignored by the spell checker (e.g.,
numbers, e-mail addresses, etc.). Select or clear each check box to specify how the spell checker will work on
your computer.
In the Edit custom dictionary area, click Edit to open a window that displays all of the words that you have
added to the custom dictionary on your computer. You can edit the custom dictionary by adding or removing
words in the list and then clicking OK.
International dictionaries allows you to choose the language of the dictionary that will be used on your
computer.
27.3.4 Defining a Name
You can define a variable name for a cell, for a function, for a sheet in any standard folio in the Weibull++ or ALTA
project or for a BlockSim diagram. These variable names will be available for use in any sheet within the current
analysis workbook or for any a general spreadsheet within the current Weibull++ or ALTA standard folio. To define
a name, choose Sheet Options > Format and View > More Settings > Define Name. (In analysis workbooks, you
can click the Define Name icon on the control panel.)
27.3 Tools for Working with Spreadsheets
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 567
The Defined Names window will appear as shown next.
The Defined Names window displays a table of all defined variable names for the current analysis workbook or
standard folio. You can type the definition manually or you can choose to set it automatically. Clicking Active Cell(s)
defines the variable name to the currently selected cell(s) in the sheet. Clicking Data Source opens a window where
you can select a sheet in any available analysis as the definition of the variable name.
To refer to a cell or sheet with a variable name, you can type the name into the cell as a formula, (e.g., if the name is
Test then type =Test into the cell). Variable names can also be used as input for functions. For example, if Cell is
a variable name representing a cell, =COS(Cell) returns the cosine of the value of that cell. If Sheet is a variable
name representing a sheet, =DISTR(Sheet) returns the distribution used by that sheet.
Note that a defined variable name cannot contain special symbols (e.g., ! < > = ; / \ ~ @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) + - [ ] or
quotes or commas). Additionally, if your regional settings use a comma as the decimal separator, a semicolon must be
used to separate function arguments (e.g., =RELIABILITY(Folio1!Data 1;A4)).
27.3.5 Goto
You can automatically move the cursor to a particular cell location in a spreadsheet by choosing Sheet Options >
Format and View > More Settings > Goto to open the Goto window.
The Goto window will appear.
Type the cell location in the Goto input box. You can use upper or lowercase letters (e.g., A20 or a20). Click OK and
the cursor will go to that cell location.
27 Reports
568 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
27.3.6 Format Cells - Number Window
You can set the number format within the selected cells in the current spreadsheet by choosing Sheet Options >
Format and View > Custom Number.
The Format Cells - Number window will appear.
After you have made your selection, click OK.
27.3.7 Calculation Options
You can set the options for performing calculations in the spreadsheet by choosing Sheet Options > Format and
View > More Settings > Calculation Options to open the Calculation Options window.
The Calculation Options window will appear.
If you select Automatic Recalculation the spreadsheet will automatically recalculate formulas when relevant
values change. If you clear this option you must choose Sheet Options > Format and View > More Settings >
Recalculate Formulas to recalculate the formulas and display the new results.
If you select Minimal Recalculation the spreadsheet will recalculate only the formulas containing references to a
changed cell. This will prevent other cells from changing and displaying new results.
If you select Enable Iteration the spreadsheet will calculate until it iterates the number of times specified in the
Maximum Iterations field or until all cells change by less than the amount specified in the Maximum Change
field. This can be used to solve circular references.
27.3 Tools for Working with Spreadsheets
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 569
If you select Precision as Displayed all cell values will be rounded to the displayed precision, which is set in the
Format Cells window. See Section 27.3.6 on page 568. For example, assume that the Precision as Displayed
option is selected and the displayed precision has been set to two decimal places. If you enter a value with more
than two decimal places, such as 0.236, the value will be rounded to two decimal places or 0.24. As shown below,
when the Precision as Displayed option is not selected the spreadsheet will display only the specified number of
decimal places but the cell itself will still contain the full number as you can see that when you look in the data
entry bar.
Click OK to accept your selections. You can then choose Sheet Options > Format and View > More Settings >
Recalculate Formulas to recalculate the formulas within the spreadsheet based on the changes that have been made
in the Calculation Options window.
27.3.8 Sort
You can sort a selected range of cells in the spreadsheet by choosing Sheet Options > Sheet Actions > Sort.
If you select Sort Ascending or Sort Descending, then the selected cells will automatically be sorted in the
appropriate order. If you select Custom Sort, the Sort window will appear.
In the Sort By area you can choose how you want to sort the data: either by rows or by columns.
In the Keys area choose a key from the drop-down list, then use the Key Reference field to specify the row or
column to sort by. You can select any cell in the selected columns and the sort will return the same results (i.e., if
you have selected cells A1 - A20, you could use cell A13 as the Key Reference and the sorted results would be the
same as if you had used cell A1). Depending on how many columns or rows you have selected, you can set up to
10 sorting levels.
27 Reports
570 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
For example, consider the case of sorting names and addresses. The first names are in the first column, last names
are in the second column and the addresses are in the third column. In this case, you would set Key 1 to use Key
Reference A1, the First Name column, and set Key 2 to use Key Reference B1, the Last Name column. If
there are two of the same first names (Key 1) then the last names (Key 2) would be checked to sort between the
two individuals with the same first name. If the last names are the same then the addresses would be checked, and
so on.
27.3.9 Find
You can find text and numbers in a value or a formula in the current spreadsheet by choosing Home > Edit > Find to
open the Find window.
The Find window will appear.
Use the Find What field to type the text and/or number you want to find in the current sheet.
Use the Search drop-down list to select the order in which to search. If you select By Rows, each row will be
searched all the way across before the next row is searched. If you select By Columns, each column will be
searched all the way down before the next column is searched.
Use the Look In drop-down list to select where to look. If you want to find text or find a number that is the result
of an equation, select to look in Values. If you want to find a number that is within an equation, select to look in
Formulas.
Select Match Case to find only the text in the current sheet with the same case. For example, the search term
teXt will not find Text because the case does not match.
Select Find Entire Cells Only to find only cells where the entire cell matches the text and/or number you
specified. If your search term makes up only part of a cell, that cell will not be found.
Click Find Next to find the next matching text and/or number. When the text and/or numbers are found, the cursor
will go to that particular cell location.
To replace text and/or numbers, click Replace. The Replace With field will become visible so that you can type the
text or numbers that will replace any text or number that matches your search. The Look in option is not available
because the Replace feature automatically searches all of the sheet contents.
To replace all instances without review, click Replace All.
To review the instances before replacing the material, click Find Next to locate the first place the material occurs,
then either click Find Next to leave the current match as-is and find the next occurrence or click Replace to
replace the current match and find the next occurrence.
Tip: To ensure that all instances of searched for text are replaced (including multiple instances within the same cell),
you may need to click Replace All several times.
27.3 Tools for Working with Spreadsheets
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 571
27.3.10 Sheet Options Window
You can determine the appearance of the spreadsheet and which options are allowed within it by choosing Sheet
Options > Format and View > More Settings > Sheet Options to open the Sheet Options window.
The Sheet Options window will appear.
Allow
Clear the Selections option to prevent users from selecting cells in the spreadsheet.
Clear the Fill Range option to prevent users from filling a range of cells using the cross-hair that appears on
the bottom right corner of the selected cell(s).
Clear the Move Range option to prevent users from moving a selected range of cells.
Clear the Resize Rows and Columns option to prevent users from resizing the rows and columns.
Clear the Formula Editing option to prevent users from entering or altering any of the formulas in the
spreadsheet.
Clear the In Cell Editing option to force users to only edit the contents of cell using the data entry bar. If you
select In Cell Editing, users will also be able to edit the cell contents within the cell itself.
Show
To hide the gridlines on the spreadsheet, clear the Gridlines option.
To hide the column headings or the row headings, clear the Column Headings option or the Row Headings
option.
By default, the individual cells display the results of any formulas or calculations. To display the cell formulas
instead of the results, select Formulas.
Choose Cell Types to color the borders of the cells depending on the contents of the cell using the following
scheme:
Red: the cell contains a formula.
Green: the cell contains a value (i.e., number or text).
Blue: the cell is blank but formatted.
No color: the cell is blank and unformatted.
Tip: When working with an analysis workbook, the last two options can also be turned on and off using the.
control panel.
27 Reports
572 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Other
Number of Rows sets the number of rows in the spreadsheet.
Number of Columns sets the number of columns in the spreadsheet.
27.3.11 Protecting Cells
You can protect the contents of a cell in three ways: prohibiting the cell from being changed by other users; hiding the
cell formulas (i.e., the formula is not displayed in the data entry bar when the cell is selected); or both.
To enable the protection status for selected cells, choose Sheet Options > Format and View > More Settings > Cell
Protection to open the Format Cells window.
The Format Cells window will appear.
Select Locked to prevent the cells contents from being edited while cell protection is enabled.
Select Hidden to hide cell formulas from being viewed while the formula results will be shown in the
spreadsheet.
Once you have set the type of protection for the selected cells, you can toggle cell protection on and off in the
spreadsheet by choosing or clearing Sheet Options > Format and View > More Settings > Enable Protection.
If selected, cell protection will be activated for any cells that have been defined for protection using the settings
specified for each cell. To turn off cell protection, select the option again.
27.3.12 Exporting the Spreadsheet
You can export the spreadsheet in either of two formats:
To export all sheets to an Excel file, choose Sheet Options > Transfer Data > Send to Excel.
The Save As window will appear. Provide a name for the export file, then click Save.
Note: By default, every cell has a default setting of Locked applied when the software creates the sheet. This means that
as soon as you enable protection, all cells will be locked unless you have specifically unlocked them.
Note: If cell protection is already enabled and you try to change a cells protection settings, you will get an error
message. You must first turn off cell protection and then make your changes.
27.4 Word Report Templates
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 573
To export the current sheet to a Word file, choose Sheet Options > Transfer Data > Send to Word. A Word
document opens with the data from the current sheet displayed as a Word table.
27.4 Word Report Templates
The software provides Word report templates, which give you the ability to generate data and results and to create
customized Word reports to display these results. You can use the Word report template to create a professional
looking report, complete with a customized header and footer and plots and analyzed data that are created on-the-fly
based on the latest analysis of the associated data sources. Once you have created a template, you can change the
associated data sources and create a different report. This allows you to create one template, then quickly generate
different reports simply by changing which analyses the report gets its data from.
You can add a new Word report template to a project by choosing Insert > Reports and Plots > Word Report
Template.
27.4.1 Report Templates Wizard
When you create a new Word report template in an existing project, the Report Templates Wizard will appear.
Use the Default Data Source field to specify an analysis that will serve as the default data source for functions in
the Word report template. Click Select to open a window that will allow you to select an analysis. In BlockSim
note that the results model used for the data source is specified in the Report Folio Model field on the Analysis
Settings page of the diagram control panel. For analytical diagrams, you can base report results on either the
analytical results or the fitted model; for simulation and phase diagrams, you can base report results on either the
simulation results or the fitted model.
Selecting a default data source allows you to create a custom report that can be applied to other analyses as it
populates the Data Source Index drop-down list in the Function Wizard that you can use when building functions.
Choose Based on Existing Template if you want to choose a predefined template to base the Word report
template on instead of starting with a blank Word report template.
Choose Standard if you want to use one of the standard templates that are shipped with the software.
27 Reports
574 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Choose User if you want to use one of the Word report templates that you have previously defined. You can
save any report that you create as a template by choosing Document > Template > Save Template.
27.4.2 Word Report Template Control Panel
The Word report template control panel is shown next.
Function Wizard
Opens the Function Wizard, which inserts functions in the Word report template. These functions can return
results ranging from model calculations (e.g., the failure rate at a given time) to tables (e.g., showing
reliability for a specified time range).
Plot Wizard
Opens the Plot Wizard, which inserts plots that are created on-the-fly based on the latest analysis in the
associated analysis (as opposed to inserting a plot graphic that you created in a plot sheet and then copied/
pasted into the template). See Section 27.6 on page 588.
Associate Data Sources
Allows you to define or change the default data sources for the Word report template. When you click this
button, a window will appear which allows you to select up to four analyses in the project.
If you select an ALTA data sheet, you can click Use Stress to open the Use Stress Level window
and define the normal stress levels for every stress that was selected to be used in the analysis.
Create Report
Generates the report in Microsoft Word.
Note: Unlike spreadsheets, where you can type a function directly into spreadsheet cells, you must use the
Function Wizard to initially add a function to a report as the functions are inserted as fields. After doing so, you may
copy the function and change its settings.
27.4 Word Report Templates
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 575
Associated Data Sources displays the list of data sources that are currently associated with the Word report
template. You can click the Associate Data Sources icon at any time to change these data sources. You can also
double-click a data source to open the analysis.
Displayed Math Precision sets the number of decimal places shown in results and plots. Please note that the
tolerance on the precision is limited by Windows to 15 digits.
27.4.3 Word Report Template Tools
This section presents tools available for working with data and navigating within word report template. It includes the
following sections:
Formatting Paragraphs - Section 27.4.3.1 (p. 575)
Find and Replace Window - Word Report Templates - Section 27.4.3.2 (p. 576)
Symbols - Section 27.4.3.3 (p. 577)
Bookmarks - Section 27.4.3.4 (p. 577)
Hyperlinks - Section 27.4.3.5 (p. 578)
Tables - Section 27.4.3.6 (p. 578)
Table Properties - Word Report Templates - Section 27.4.3.7 (p. 579)
27.4.3.1 Formatting Paragraphs
You can change a paragraphs formatting options by choosing Home > Paragraph > Paragraph to open the
Paragraph window.
On the Indents and Spacing tab, do the following:
In the General area, set the paragraphs alignment and outline level.
In the Indentation area, set the amount of space you want to indent from the left and/or right margins.
In the Spacing area, set the amount of space before and after each paragraph and the amount of vertical
spacing between lines of text.
Note: In BlockSim, the results model used for each data source is specified in the Report Folio Model field on the
Analysis Settings page of the diagram control panel. For analytical diagrams, you can base report results on either
the analytical results or the fitted model; for simulation and phase diagrams, you can base report results on either the
simulation results or the fitted model.
27 Reports
576 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
On the Line and Page Breaks tab, do the following:
Select Keep lines together to prevent the paragraph lines from being on different pages.
Select Page break before to force a page break before the paragraph.
To define the tab stops, click Tabs to open the Tabs window.
For each tab stop define the settings, which include the position, alignment and the character pattern that will
fill the space between the tab and the character following it. (The MiddleDots option adds a line of dots
vertically centered in the space between the tab and the character following it.)
Click Set to create the tab stop. You can add additional tab stops, or click OK to add the tab stops to the
paragraph.
27.4.3.2 Find and Replace Window - Word Report Templates
You can find text and/or numbers in the Word report template by choosing Home > Edit > [Find]/[Replace] to open
the Find and Replace window.
Use the Find field to type the text and/or number that you want to find in the current Word report template.
Use the replace with field to type the text or numbers that will replace any text or number that matches your
search.
Use the Search field to select the order in which to search. If you select All, the search will look through the entire
Word report template. If you select Down, the search will start from the cursor location and move down through
the Word report template. If you select Up, the search will start from the cursor location and move up through the
Word report template.
Select Match case if you want to find only the text in the current Word report template with the same case. For
example, the search term teXt will not find Text because the case does not match.
27.4 Word Report Templates
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 577
Select Find whole words only if you want to find only the text where the entire word matches the text and/or
number you specified in the Find field. If your search term makes up only part of a word, that word will not be
found.
To search for special characters, such as a tab stop or a paragraph marker, or to limit the search in special ways,
such as using a wildcard character, select Regular expression. Then click in the Find and/or replace with
fields to display a drop-down list of options. Using the available options, build the desired expression.
After making your selections, do the following:
To replace all instances without review, click Replace All.
To review the instances before replacing the material, click Find Next to locate the first place the material occurs,
then either click Find Next to leave the text as-is and find the next occurrence or click Replace to replace the text
and find the next occurrence.
27.4.3.3 Symbols
You can add a symbol character to the Word report template by choosing Insert > Items > Symbol to open the
Symbol window.
Select the character and click OK to insert into the current cursor location. Note that different symbols may be
available depending on the font you selected.
27.4.3.4 Bookmarks
You can add a bookmark to the Word report template by choosing Insert > Items > Bookmark to open the
Bookmark window.
27 Reports
578 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
In the Bookmark Name field, type the bookmarks name, which must begin with a letter and can contain
numbers. While you cannot include spaces in a bookmark name, you can use the underscore character to separate
words (e.g., Analysis_section).
To go an existing bookmark, under Bookmark Name, click the bookmark and then click Go To.
27.4.3.5 Hyperlinks
You can insert hyperlinks in the Word report template by choosing Insert > Items > Hyperlink to open the Insert
Hyperlink window.
In the Text to display field, enter the anchor text for the link.
To customize the ScreenTip that displays when you hold the mouse over the anchor text, in the ScreenTip field
type the desired text. If you do not specify a ScreenTip, the Word report template uses the path or address of the
file as the tip. (This is similar to using the ALT or Title tags in HTML.)
In the Target frame field, specify how you want the destination of the hyperlink to appear. You can open a page
in the same frame, in the parent frame's page, in a new window or as a whole page.
In the Link to area, do one of the following:
For a hyperlink, type the URL (e.g., http://www.ReliaSoft.com) in the Address field.
For a bookmark, select the bookmark in the Bookmark field.
27.4.3.6 Tables
The software provides a choice of several predefined tables that you can insert using the Function Wizard, Section
27.5 on page 584. If you want to create your own custom table choose Table > Design > Insert Table to open the
Insert Table window.
In the Number of columns and Number of rows fields, enter the desired values, then click OK.
27.4 Word Report Templates
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 579
27.4.3.7 Table Properties - Word Report Templates
You can set the properties of a user-created table in the Word report template by choosing Table > Design >
Properties to open the Table Properties window.
On the Table tab, do the following:
By default, the table width varies depending on its contents. To force a particular size, select the Preferred width
check box, then specify the width in either Inches, if you want to use a fixed measurement, or choose Percent if
you want to use a specific percentage of the available area.
In the Alignment area, select how you want the table aligned on the page. Use the Indent from left field to enter
the distance that you want to indent the table from the left margin.
On the Row tab, do the following:
To fix the height of a row, select the Specify height check box, then enter a value. Use the Row height is field to
set whether the value is absolute, the Exactly option, or a minimum value, the At least option.
To allow the row to split across a page break, select the Allow row to break across pages check box.
To have the row repeat at the top of each page, select the Repeat as header row at the top of each page check
box.
On the Column tab, do the following:
To fix the width of a column, select the Preferred width check box, then enter a value. Use the Measure in field
specify the width in either Inches, if you want to use a fixed measurement, or choose Percent if you want to use a
specific percentage of the available area.
On the Cell tab, do the following:
To fix the width of a cell, select the Preferred width check box, then enter a value. Use the Measure in field
specify the width in either Inches, if you want to use a fixed measurement, or choose Percent if you want to use a
specific percentage of the available area.
Use the Vertical alignment area to specify how you want the text to be align vertically in the cell.
27 Reports
580 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Click Options to open the Cell Options window, where you can set the default cell margins and specify how the
text fits in the cell.
27.4.4 Word Report Template Ribbon
The Word report template Ribbon displays the commands for creating customized reports. The Ribbon is divided into
tabs that relate to a task or activity, such as formatting text or organizing the layout of the report. Each tab contains the
related commands, which are intuitively organized into groups. Depending on the activity you are in, some
commands may appear dimmed. This topic is intended to serve as a comprehensive reference to the commands found
on the Word report template Ribbon. Note that many features in the Word report template also have a shortcut menu
(accessed by right-clicking) that gives access to commands that are commonly used for that feature. All commands
available in the shortcut menus are also available on the Ribbon.
The following is a list of all the tabs on the Word report template Ribbon:
Home tab contains commands related to using the Clipboard and using the Function Wizard and Plot Wizard. See
Section 27.4.4.1 on page 580.
Document tab contains commands related to printing the report and laying out the page elements, such as column
size, line spacing, text alignment and the like. See Section 27.4.4.2 on page 581.
Insert tab contains commands related to inserting items (e.g., symbol characters, hyperlinks), and working with
page headers and footers. See Section 27.4.4.3 on page 582.
View tab contains commands related to how the Word report template pages are displayed. See Section 27.4.4.4
on page 583.
Table tab contains commands related to inserting and using Word report template tables. See Section 27.4.4.5 on
page 583.
27.4.4.1 Home Tab
The Home tab of the Word report templates contains commands related to creating the report, using the Clipboard
and using the Function Wizard and Plot Wizard.
27.4.4.1.1 Report
Create Report generates the report in Microsoft Word.
Function Wizard opens the Function Wizard, which allows you to build functions in the report that return results
(e.g., reliability values, failure rate, etc.), tables and other information from the associated data sources. See
Section 27.5 on page 584.
Plot Wizard opens the Plot Wizard, which allows you to insert a plot that is generated on-the-fly based on
information in the associated data source.See Section 27.6 on page 588.
Associate Data Sources opens a window where you can define or change the default data sources for the Word
report template.
27.4 Word Report Templates
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 581
27.4.4.1.2 Clipboard
Paste Special opens a window where you can choose to paste the copied text as either RTF format, XAML format
or as unformatted text.
Cut cuts the selected objects. You can then paste the objects into another location within the same Word report
template.
Copy copies the selected objects to the Clipboard. You can then paste the objects into another location within the
same Word report template.
Paste pastes the contents of the Clipboard onto the report area.
27.4.4.1.3 Edit
Spelling activates the Spell Check utility, which allows you to check the spelling within the template. See Section
27.3.3 on page 565.
Find and Replace open the Find and Replace window, which allows you to search through the current template
for text and/or numbers and replace the matching text or numbers with other values. See Section 27.4.3.2 on page
576.
Undo cancels the last editing change you made to the document. You can cancel multiple actions by choosing
Undo as many times as necessary.
Redo reapplies the previously canceled action. You can redo multiple actions by choosing Redo again.
27.4.4.1.4 Font
Use the options in this area to format text. You can specify the font used, the font size, any special formatting
options (e.g., underlined or italicized text), and specify the font color and text highlight color, if any.
Click Clear Formatting to remove all formatting from the selected items and reset the formatting to the default
values.
27.4.4.1.5 Paragraph
Paragraph opens the Paragraph window, which allows you to specify the paragraph settings. See Section 27.4.3.1
on page 575.
Use the Line Spacing options to change the spacing between lines or the spacing before or after each paragraph.
Show/Hide displays paragraph markers and dots in place of the spaces between words.
Use the alignment options, , to set how the paragraph should be aligned.
Use the list options, , to change the paragraph into a list.
To increase the paragraph indent, click Increase Indent.
To decrease the paragraph indent, click Decrease Indent.
27.4.4.2 Document Tab
The Document tab of the Word report templates contains commands related to printing the report and laying out the
page elements, such as column size, line spacing, text alignment and the like.
27.4.4.2.1 Template
Open Template opens a saved Word report template (*.rtt) file.
Save Template opens the Save As window where you can save the current Word report template as a *.rtt file.
27.4.4.2.2 Print
Print sends the current report to the printer.
27 Reports
582 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Print Preview allows you to preview the current page before it is sent to the printer.
Quick Print prints the page.
27.4.4.2.3 Page Setup
Margins displays a submenu where you can select the page margins either for the entire document or just the
current selection.
Orientations allows you to switch the report pages between landscape and portrait mode.
Size allows you to select the paper size for the current selection.
Columns allows you to split the text into two or more columns.
Breaks
Page adds a page break.
Column adds a column break.
Section (Next Page) inserts a section break and forces the next section to start at the top of the next page.
Section (Even Page) inserts a section break and starts the next section on the next even-numbered page.
Section (Odd Page) inserts a section break and starts the next section on the next odd-numbered page.
Line Numbers
You can include line numbers that will appear in the margin alongside each line of the generated Word document
by choosing one of the following options:
None indicates that no line numbers will appear in the document.
Continuous indicates that the line numbers will be continuous across the entire document.
Restart Each Page indicates that the line numbers will restart at the top of each page.
Restart Each Section indicates that the line numbers will restart at the beginning of each section.
Suppress Line Numbers for Current Paragraph indicates that no line numbers will appear with the current
paragraph.
Line Numbering Options opens a window where you can specify the numbering options.
27.4.4.2.4 Protect
Protect Document opens a window which allows you to prevent the Word report template from being modified.
Range Editing Permissions opens a window which allows you to specify which users and/or groups can make
changes to a template.
Unprotect Document opens a window which removes the protection from a protected document and allows
changes to be made to that document.
27.4.4.3 Insert Tab
The Insert tab of the Word report templates contains commands related to inserting items (e.g., symbol characters,
hyperlinks) and working with page headers and footers.
27.4.4.3.1 Items
Page Break inserts a page break at the cursor location.
Picture inserts a picture at the cursor location. The available formats are *.bmp, *.dib, *.jpg, *.jpeg, *.png, *.gif,
*.tif, *.tiff, *.emf and *.wmf.
Symbol inserts a symbol character at the cursor location. See Section 27.4.3.3 on page 577.
27.4 Word Report Templates
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 583
Hyperlink inserts a hyperlink at the cursor location. See Section 27.4.3.5 on page 578.
Bookmark inserts a bookmark at the cursor location. See Section 27.4.3.4 on page 577.
27.4.4.3.2 Header/Footer
Header and Footer enable either the page header area or the page footer area.
To switch to a header while working in a footer, click Go to Header.
To switch to a footer while working in a header, click Go to Footer.
Click Go to Next Header/Footer to display the next section's header or footer.
Click Go to Previous Header/Footer to display the previous section's header or footer.
Click Link to Previous to link the current section's header and footer to the previous section's header and footer.
Page Number inserts the page number at the cursor location.
Page Count inserts the number of pages in the document at the cursor location.
To exit the header or footer and return to the main body of the text, click Close Header and Footer.
27.4.4.4 View Tab
The View tab of the Word report templates contains commands related to how the Word report template pages are
displayed.
27.4.4.4.1 Document Views
Simple View displays the Word report template with all page layout features disabled.
Draft View displays the Word report template with certain page layout elements disabled, including the page
headers and footers.
Print Layout displays the Word report template as it will be printed with all of the page layout elements enabled.
27.4.4.4.2 Zoom
Zoom In increases the degree of magnification.
Zoom Out decreases the degree of magnification.
27.4.4.4.3 Show
Horizontal Ruler displays a horizontal ruler at the top of the document area.
Vertical Ruler displays a vertical ruler along the left edge of the document area.
27.4.4.4.4 Options
Click Different First Page to specify that the first page of the document will have different header and footer
than the rest of the document.
Click Different Odd Even Pages to specify that even pages will have different headers and footers than odd
pages.
27.4.4.5 Table Tab
The Table tab of the Word report templates contains commands related to working with tables.
27.4.4.5.1 Design
Insert Table opens the Insert Table window. See Section 27.4.3.6 on page 578.
Select
Select Cell selects the cell the cursor is currently located in.
27 Reports
584 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Select Column selects the column the cursor is currently located in.
Select Row selects the row the cursor is currently located in.
Select Table selects the entire table.
Properties opens the Table Properties window where you can set the properties of a user-created table. See
Section 27.4.3.7 on page 579.
View Gridlines displays gridlines on the page.
Merge Cells merges the currently selected cells.
Split Cells splits the currently selected cells into multiple cells.
Split Table divides the table into two pieces at the current location of the cursor. The currently select row
becomes the first row of the new table.
Shading opens a window where you can pick a background color for the selected cells.
Borders displays a submenu where you can select which table and cell borders to enable/disable.
27.4.4.5.2 Borders
Line Style sets the style of the border lines.
Line Weight sets the thickness of the border lines.
Pen Color sets the color of the border lines.
27.4.4.5.3 Alignment
Use the options in this area to specify how the selected table cells will be aligned.
27.4.4.5.4 Rows/Columns
Insert Rows Above adds a row above the currently selected row.
Insert Rows Below adds a row below the currently selected row.
Insert Columns to the Left adds a column to the left of the currently selected column.
Insert Columns to the Right adds a column to the right of the currently selected column.
Insert Cells opens the Insert Cells window, where you choose the direction in which you want to shift the
surrounding cells after inserting the new cell(s).
Delete
Delete Cells removes the currently selected cells from the table.
Delete Columns deletes the currently selected columns.
Delete Rows deletes the currently selected rows.
Delete Table removes the table from the template.
27.5 Using the Function Wizard in Any of the Reporting Tools
The Function Wizard generates a variety of results based on your inputs and, when applicable, a referenced analysis.
To open the Function Wizard from an analysis workbook or a general spreadsheet, choose Sheet Options > Sheet
Actions > Function Wizard. To open the Function Wizard from a Word report template, choose Home > Report >
Function Wizard. You can also click the Function Wizard icon on a control panel.
27.5 Using the Function Wizard in Any of the Reporting Tools
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 585
The Function Wizard window with its components is shown next. Note that the appearance of the window will vary
depending on where you called the Function Wizard from. The following picture shows the full functionality, which
is available from analysis workbooks and general spreadsheets.
27.5.1 Selecting a Function and Making the Other Required Inputs
To use the Function Wizard, follow these steps:
Select the function. - Section 27.5.1.1 (p. 585)
Select the data source, if applicable. - Section 27.5.1.2 (p. 586)
Make the other required inputs. - Section 27.5.1.3 (p. 587)
Insert the function. - Section 27.5.1.4 (p. 587)
27.5.1.1 Select the Function
The Function Category drop-down list displays the functions that can be used.
If you are using the Function Wizard with a general spreadsheet or analysis workbook, you will be able to insert Data
Source Functions (which return values based on the analysis in a specified data source), Mathematical Functions
(which are independent of the data source and provide functionality similar to Microsoft Excel) and Simulation
Functions (which return values based on the analysis of a specified simulation diagram; these functions are available
only in BlockSim).
If you are using the Function Wizard with a Word report template, the following function types are available:
Data Source Functions return values based on the analysis in a specified data source. These functions are
available only in Weibull++ and ALTA.
General Functions return basic information about the repository and project, such as the project name or the
current date.
Model Calculations return information based on the model used with the specified data source, such as the
acceleration factor or the reliability at given time.
Confidence Bounds return the confidence bounds on several calculations, such as failure rate and reliability.
These functions are available only in Weibull++ and ALTA.
27 Reports
586 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Tables return a table of values for the values that you specify (e.g., you can include a table that displays the
reliability values for a range of times).
Simulation Functions return information about the simulation results and settings. These functions are available
only in BlockSim.
You can select to either display only one kind of function in the function list or display all functions in the function
list.
The Function List displays the available functions in alphabetical order based on your selection in the function
category drop-down list. Each function that is available in the Function Wizard is described in Appendix A.
Click a function to select it. The area on the right side of the Function Wizard displays a description of the selected
function. This description includes a model of the syntax required to use the function and information about what the
function returns. In spreadsheets optional parameters are denoted by brackets.
27.5.1.2 Select the Data Source
For data source functions in analysis workbooks and general spreadsheets, and for most of the functions in Word
report templates, you will need to select which of the available data sources you want to link to for any particular
function. For Weibull++ and ALTA, the available data sources include the data sheets in all standard folios,
degradation folios and non-parametric LDA folios in the current project; for BlockSim, the available data sources
include the diagrams in the current project. In BlockSim note that the results model used for the data source is
specified in the Report Folio Model field on the Analysis Settings page of the diagram control panel. For analytical
diagrams, you can base report results on either the analytical results or the fitted model; for simulation and phase
diagrams, you can base report results on either the simulation results or the fitted model.
The following image shows the available options for spreadsheets.
To select a data source, do one of the following:
To use an associated data source, in the Data Source Index list select an option with the numbers corresponding
to the order of the data sources as selected in the Associate Data Sources window. Note that for analysis
workbooks and general spreadsheets, you must first select the Use Default check box.
For spreadsheets, you can also select any available analysis in the project, by clearing the Use Default checkbox
and then clicking the Select button. A window will appear, where you choose the analysis to be used as the data
source. Note that if you select an analysis that has not been calculated, the function will return an error (N/C)
when it is inserted in the spreadsheet.
Functions can also take defined variable names associated with the current folio or report as inputs. Variable
names representing data sources can be used in the Data Source field by entering the name preceded by a
Tip: Before selecting a data source, you should first think about how you want to use the data source. If you want to
ensure that the report always returns the result from a specific data source, you should explicitly use that data source. If
you anticipate that you will be reusing the data source, such as in a template, you should use one of the default data
sources which can be changed on-the-fly.
Note: This is the only option that is available for Word report templates.
27.5 Using the Function Wizard in Any of the Reporting Tools
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 587
caret (e.g., ^sheetname). Variable names representing cells can be used in other input fields. Defined names
are presented in Section 27.3.4 on page 566.
27.5.1.3 Make the Other Required Inputs
Some of the functions available in the Function Wizard do not require input and some do. If you select a function
from the Function List that does require input, then the appropriate input boxes will become available in the Input
area, as shown next.
In this example, reliability is a required input and confidence level is an optional input, which is denoted by enclosing
the input in brackets. You can enter values in these fields or click the Insert Workbook Reference icon to insert a
reference to the cell currently selected in the sheet. Note that you can move the cursor in the sheet while the Function
Wizard is open, which enables you to select any desired cell.
27.5.1.3.1 Setting the Stress Level with ALTA Data
For some ALTA data source functions in spreadsheets you must enter one or more stress levels in
the Input area. The number of stresses to be entered in such cases depends on the number of stresses used in
calculating the data sheet. The functions that require stress level inputs are those where the results can change
depending on the given stress value (i.e., the result returned by the ACT_ENERGY function does not change based
on the stress values while the result returned by the RELIABILITY_S function does depend on the stress values).
In ALTA PRO, if cumulative damage was used to calculate the parameters in the selected data sheet, then
independent check boxes will appear beside each stress level input, as shown next.
Select the check box if you want to use the stress level as defined in the stress profile. The input field will become a
drop-down list, allowing you to select any stress profile in the project to use as the input value.
27.5.1.4 Insert the Function
You can add the function to the spreadsheet or Word report template by clicking Insert.
IMPORTANT: While you can select any data source to use with any function that requires a data source, you will not
get a result if the data source is the wrong type. For example, if you use the ACCELERATIONFACTOR function,
which is an ALTA function, with a Weibull++ data source in a spreadsheet, the spreadsheet will return This function is
not available for Weibull++ data sources. while in Word report templates, the generated Word document will return
N/A as the function result.
Note: Pressing CTRL while clicking the Insert Workbook Reference icon inserts an absolute reference to the currently
selected cell, as shown here.
Tip: For information on the accepted text formats for dates and times, as well as other guidelines, refer to Section A.1 on
page 615.
27 Reports
588 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
27.5.2 A Note About Confidence Bounds
In Weibull++ and ALTA, when using the Function Wizard to determine confidence bounds, it is important to
remember that the Function Wizard only inserts one-sided bounds. If you want to show two-sided bounds, you have
to insert the function twice - once at the lower confidence bound and once at the upper confidence bound. For
example, for a 90% confidence level, you would set the lower confidence bound at 5% and the upper confidence
bound at 95%, as shown next.
If you want cell A2 to display reliability at a particular time and you want cells A1 and A3 to display lower and upper
confidence bounds respectively with a confidence level of 90%, you would use the RELIABILITY function for all
three cells. Cell A2 would be calculated leaving the Confidence Level field blank. Cell A1 would be calculated with
a value of 0.05 in the Confidence Level field and Cell A3 would be calculated with a value of 0.95 in the Confidence
Level field. All other inputs would remain the same for all three cells.
1
27.6 Using the Plot Wizard in Word Report Templates
The Plot Wizard is used in conjunction with Word report templates and generates a variety of plots based on your
inputs and, when applicable, a referenced analysis. To open the Plot Wizard, choose Home > Report > Plot Wizard.
You can also click the Plot Wizard icon on the Word report templates control panel.
The Plot Wizard window with its components is shown next.
1.
The ReliaWiki resource portal has more information about confidence bounds at: http://www.ReliaWiki.org/index.php/
Confidence_Bounds.
27.7 An Example of Performing a Custom Analysis and Report
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 589
To add a plot using the Plot Wizard, follow the steps below:
1. In the Plot Category drop-down list, select to either display plots of a specific category only or display all plots in
the plot list. The types of plots available in the Plot Wizard are:
Weibull++ and ALTA plots:
Common plots, which can be used with any applicable folio (e.g., the Failure Rate vs. Time plot and the
Reliability vs. Time plot).
Weibull++ plots, which can be used with any applicable Weibull++ folio (e.g., the Contour plot and the F/
S Pie plot).
ALTA plots, which can be used with any applicable ALTA folio (e.g., the Cox-Snell Residuals plot and
the Use Level Probability plot).
Degradation plots, which can be used with any degradation folio, are the Degradation vs. Time (Linear)
plot and the Degradation vs. Time (Log) plot.
BlockSim plots:
Analytical System plots, which can be used with any analytical diagram (e.g., the Failure Rate vs. Time
plot and the Pdf vs. Time plot).
Analytical Metrics plots, which is the Static RI plot that can be used with any analytical diagram.
Simulation System plots, which can be used with any simulation diagram (e.g., the Mean Availability
plot and the System Failures plot).
Simulation Metrics plots, which can be used with any simulation diagram (e.g., the RS DECI plot and the
RS FCI Tableau plot).
The Plot List displays the available plots in alphabetical order based on your selection in the plot category drop-
down list.
2. Click a plot to select it. The area on the right side of the Plot Wizard displays a description of the selected plot and
information about what the plot returns.
3. Select which data source to use. In the Data Source Index list select an option with the numbers corresponding to
the order of the data sources as selected in the Associate Data Sources window.
4. For ALTA stress-dependent plots, use the Stress Column field to select which stress
column will be varied while the other stress columns are held constant.
5. Click Insert to add the plot to the report.
27.7 An Example of Performing a Custom Analysis and Report
Using ReliaSofts analysis workbook and Function Wizard, you can generate many different types of results.
For example, suppose that you have the reliability data for two components from different suppliers. You can create a
table that shows the reliability for each at a given time.
First create the folios (in Weibull++ or ALTA) or diagrams (in BlockSim), add some data and calculate them.
Add an Analysis Workbook to your project and do not select a default data source.
Associate the two analyses to the spreadsheet.
Update the column headings in the report (i.e., Time in column A, Reliability Data Source 1 in column B and
Reliability Data Source 2 in column C).
Note: The sample data shown is for demonstration purposes. This information is not intended to be realistic.
27 Reports
590 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
In cell A1 enter the first time value and in cell A2 use a formula like =A1+100 to increment the time value used in
that cell. Fill in cells A3 through A12 in a similar manner. When finished, your window would look like this:
Click in cell B1 and open the Function Wizard. Select the RELIABILITY function (in Weibull++ or BlockSim)
or the RELIABILITY_S function (in ALTA), use cell A1 for the time value and select the first associated data
source. Then drag the column down to cell B12.
Starting in cell C1, repeat for the second associated data source. When finished, your window would look like
this:
By looking at the data in the table you can see which design has the better reliability at a given time.
Tip: In Weibull++ you can use the RELIABILITY function to generate both standard and conditional calculations. For
standard calculations, you would enter a value in the Age field and leave the Add Time field empty. For conditional
calculations, you would enter the starting time in the Age field and the additional time in the Add Time field. In ALTA
and BlockSim you can use the CONDRELIABILITY_S function to generate conditional calculations in a similar
manner.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 591
This chapter describes the four printing options that are available in Weibull++ and ALTA: Page Setup, Print Preview
and Print. Page Setup and Print are available for data sheets in all types of folios and for general spreadsheets, reports,
other tools (i.e., non-linear equation fit solver and SimuMatic), plot sheets and diagrams. Print Preview or Print
Layout will be available depending on the type of item that currently has focus.
28.1 Page Setup
Page Setup allows you to make selections for how the page(s) will be printed. You can access the Page Setup window
by choosing Home > Print > Page Setup.
The Page Setup window is made up of three tabs. The appearance of this window will vary depending on the type of
sheet that currently has focus (e.g., diagram sheet, spreadsheet, plot/overlay plot, etc.). Each of the tabs in the Page
Setup window and its components are presented next.
The Properties button is always available. It opens the Windows Page Setup window, which allows you to set
printing properties for the selected printer.
28.1.1 Page Tab
The Page tab of the Page Setup window allows you to set the layout, scaling and options of the page for the printed
sheet.
Printing
28
28 Printing
592 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The following option is available for all sheets:
Orientation displays how the sheet will be printed on the page. (The orientation can also be specified in the
Windows Page Setup window, accessed by clicking Properties.)
For data sheets and general spreadsheets the following options apply:
Options
Print Row Headings prints the row headings at the left side of the rows.
Print Gridlines the grid lines of the sheet will be visible on the printed page.
Print Column Headings prints the column headings above the columns.
For diagrams the following options apply:
Scaling
No Fit (100%) prints the item at its actual size.
Fit to __ page(s) wide by __ tall allows you to specify the number of pages you want the sheet printed on.
Options allows you to specify the details of the printing process.
Stick Pages prints the pages without margins.
Print Empty Pages prints any blank pages in the item. If not selected, blank pages will not be printed.
For plot sheets the following option applies:
Options
Keep Aspect Ratio allows you to keep the ratio of the plot height to width when the plot is printed. If your
printed plot goes off the page, checking this option can help.
28.1.2 Margins Tab
The Margins tab of the Page Setup window allows you to set the margins for the printed page. You can specify the
top, bottom, left and right margins, as well as the margins for the header and footer. You can also center the printed
page horizontally, vertically or both, except when working with plot sheets and diagrams.
28.1 Page Setup
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 593
Units allows you to specify the units in which the margins will be printed.
System's defaults uses the units used by your computer as the measurement unit by which the margins
will be printed. (You can change what the default means by opening the Windows Control Panel and then
opening the Language Options window. Click the Customize button next to your selected language to
open the Customize Regional Options window. In the Regional Options field select either Metric or U.S.
Then close all windows.)
Inches uses inches as the measurement unit by which the margins will be printed.
Centimeters uses centimeters as the measurement unit by which the margins will be printed.
28.1.3 Header/Footer Tab
The Header/Footer tab of the Page Setup window allows you to edit the header and footer for the printed page.
The Header and Footer sections of this window have similar customization options, as explained next.
Print Header prints the header information.
Print Footer prints the footer information.
Header/Footer Preview Display Boxes displays the header/footer format codes and their alignment.
Upper Left allows you to input the text that you want left aligned on the header of the printed page.
Upper Center allows you to input the text that you want centered on the header of the printed page.
Upper Right allows you to input the text that you want right aligned on the header of the printed page.
Lower Left allows you to input the text that you want left aligned on the footer of the printed page.
Lower Center allows you to input the text that you want centered on the footer of the printed page.
Lower Right allows you to input the text that you want right aligned on the footer of the printed page.
Header/Footer Format allows you to select a predefined header/footer format from the drop-down lists. With
the exception of the Custom option, the available header/footer format options are different for headers and
footers.
Custom allows you to create a custom header/footer format.
Set Font opens the Select Font window, which allows you to specify the font properties to be used in the header
or footer.
28 Printing
594 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The toolbar on the Header/Footer page allows you to edit the text and insert fields into a section of the header or
footer.
Cut
Cuts the selected text to the Clipboard. Data stored in the Clipboard can be pasted into this and other
applications.
Copy
Copies the selected text to the Clipboard. Data stored in the Clipboard can be pasted into this and other
applications.
Paste
Pastes the contents of the Clipboard into the current control.
Date
Inserts the date.
Time
Inserts the time.
Page Number
Inserts the page number.
Number of Pages
Inserts the total number of pages.
Project Name
Inserts the project name.
Sheet Name
Inserts the sheet name.
Item Name
Inserts the name of the active sheet, or the folio with which the active plot sheet is associated.
Application Name
Inserts the program name (i.e., Weibull++ or ALTA).
28.2 Print Preview
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 595
Company Name
Inserts the company name specified in the User Login and Contact Information window.
User Name
Inserts the user name specified in the User Login and Contact Information window.
28.1.4 Header/Footer Format Codes
The format codes that can be used for printing headers and footers are presented next.
By default, text will be centered in the headers/footers unless otherwise specified. Please note that the alignment
codes (e.g., &L, &C, &R) restart each format code section. For example, in the format code &L&P &R&ZI, the page
number will be left aligned and the sheet name will be right aligned.
28.2 Print Preview
Print preview is available for data sheets in all folio types and in the non-linear equation fit solver, the Results
window, SimuMatic, general spreadsheets, side-by-side plots, 3D plots and reports. It can be accessed can be
accessed by choosing Home > Print > Print Preview or by clicking Preview in the Print window.
Format Code Description
&L Left aligns the item.
&C Center aligns the item.
&R Right aligns the item.
&A Prints the sheet name.
&D Prints the current date.
&T Prints the current time.
&P Prints the page number.
&P+number
(e.g., &P+2)
Prints the page number plus the specified number.
&P-number
(e.g., &P-2)
Prints the page number minus the specified number.
&& Prints an ampersand.
&N Prints the total number of pages.
&ZA Prints the name of the application (i.e., Weibull++ or ALTA).
&ZC Prints the company name.
&ZU Prints the user name.
&ZP Prints the project name.
&ZF Prints the project file name and location.
&ZI Prints the name of the item (Folio, Plot, Diagram, etc.).
28 Printing
596 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The Print Preview window appears.
Depending on your screen resolution and screen size, the print preview of the spreadsheet or plot may be missing
some lines. However, the lines will appear on the printout.
The toolbar in the Print Preview window contains quick access icons that activate different commands. It also allows
you to enter the number of the page that you want to appear in the Preview Area in the Current Page input box. For
example, if you enter 2, then the second page of the spreadsheet/plot will appear in the Preview area.
Page Setup
Allows you to specify printing options. See Section 28.1 on page 591.
Print
Sends the current document to the printer.
Single Page Layout
Displays one page in the Preview area.
Double Page Layout
Displays two pages in the Preview area.
Four Page Layout
Displays four pages in the Preview area.
28.3 Print Window
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 597
Nine Page Layout
Displays nine pages in the Preview area.
Depending on your screen resolution and screen size, the print preview of data sheets, general spreadsheets or reports
may be missing some lines. However, the lines will appear on the printout. The print preview will display the correct
positioning and location of the data on the preview, as well as any objects. Please note that objects such as charts on a
general spreadsheet will not be shown in full detail on the preview, but they will print correctly. The page orientation
of the print preview depends upon the orientation selected on the first page of the Page Setup window, (i.e., portrait or
landscape).
28.3 Print Window
The Print window allows you to specify the printer to send the data sheets for all types of folios, general spreadsheets,
reports, other tools (i.e., non-linear equation fit solver and SimuMatic), plot sheets and diagrams, as well as printing
options for the sheet.
Printer
Name allows you to use a drop-down menu to select the printer you want to send the item to. Once you select
a printer, the Status, Driver, Where and Comments information will automatically be updated to reflect the
corresponding information about the selected printer.
Print to File opens the Print to file window when you click OK in the Print window. This option allows you
to specify a file name and extension for the printed item, which will then be printed to the file instead of sent
to the specified printer. If not selected, the item will be sent to the specified printer.
Properties opens the printers Document Properties window, which allows you to set printing properties for the
selected printer.
Orientation displays how the sheet will be printed on the page. The orientation can also be specified in the
Document Properties window, accessed by clicking Properties.
Portrait sets the page orientation to portrait (tall and narrow).
Landscape sets the page orientation to landscape (short and wide).
28 Printing
598 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Copies allows you to specify the number of copies of the item you want to print.
Collate collates sheets sent to the printer if more than one copy was printed. If not selected, the printer will
print multiple copies of each sheet in their original print order.
If a data sheet or a spreadsheet is in focus, the Print window will have additional options.
Page Range
All Pages prints all the pages in the item.
From __ to __ prints only the specified page range for the item. For example, if an item is 10 pages long and
you enter From 5 to 10, only the last 5 pages will be printed.
Print What
Active Sheet prints only the currently active sheet in the spreadsheet.
Entire Book prints all the sheets in the spreadsheet.
Selection prints only the selected cell range in the currently active sheet in the spreadsheet. To select a cell
range, place the cursor in the cell that you want to be the uppermost left cell of the range. While holding down
the left mouse button, drag the cursor to the cell that you want to be the lowermost right cell of the range.
When you release the mouse, the selected cells will be highlighted with a black background. It is this selected
range that will be displayed on the printed page.
Preview opens the Print Preview window, which allows you to preview the pages before sending to the printer.
Please note that closing the Print Preview window will return you to the current data sheet or spreadsheets
window, not the Print window. See Section 28.2 on page 595.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 599
The Synthesis Setup and Application Setup windows allow you to customize your workspace to fit the way you work.
Your preferences are stored on your computer and only when you are logged into your Windows user account.
This chapter describes how to customize your workspace, including:
Using the Synthesis Setup window to set your preferences for all Synthesis-enabled applications - Section 29.1 (p.
599).
Using the Application Setup window to set your preferences for Weibull++/ALTA - Section 29.2 (p. 601).
29.1 Synthesis Setup
The preferences set in the Synthesis Setup window are stored on your computer, and they apply to every Synthesis-
enabled application on your computer and can be changed in any application at any time. The preferences set by one
user have no effect on the preferences set by another user. In other words, two users can have different Synthesis
Setup preferences and work on the same database without impacting each other's workspace preferences.
To open the Synthesis Setup window, choose File > Synthesis Setup.
Application Setup
29
29 Application Setup
600 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The Synthesis Setup window will appear, as shown next.
Check-Out Options
Default Path allows you to specify the default location for projects that you check out from a database.
Standard Repository Maintenance
Automatically compact and repair database upon close will automatically compact and repair databases
upon closing.
Automatically back up database upon close will automatically save a backup of the standard database when
you close the program. The backup file will be saved as a repository (*.rsrp) file in the location specified. You
can also create a backup of a database manually by choosing File > Save As.
Backup path and quantity allows you to specify the location for saving your databases and the number of
backups that can be saved. Note that only one backup will be saved per day (e.g., if you open and close the
same database 3 times in one day, only the final closing of the database will be saved in the backup folder).
The backup file name will be the name of the database file with the date appended to it in year-month-date
format (e.g., *_2011-08-15.rsrp). The Number to display drop-down list indicates how many days of
backups can be automatically saved (up to 10).
Use the Skin drop-down list to change the color scheme of the software interface. Selecting a scheme allows you
to preview the changes in the Synthesis Setup window, but the selection will not be applied to the application until
you click OK to close the Synthesis Setup window.
In the Recent Repositories List area, use the Number to display option to set the maximum number of recently
saved database files to be displayed in the Recent Repositories list in the Backstage view. See page 92 in Chapter
2.
Display
If you would like to hide the ReliaSoft Online pane in the Backstage view and the Reliability Web Notes page
in My Portal (e.g., because you do not have an Internet connection or you simply want to save the space
allocated to these features), clear the Display Internet information panels check box.
Maximum number of lines to display in hierarchical trees allows you to set the maximum number of lines
that will display for items in the System panel and in the Analysis panel.
29.2 Application Setup
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 601
Use the Default Application to Open Repositories drop-down list to select which application will open when
you double-click a database in the Windows Explorer.
Use the Language drop-down list to select which language the Synthesis-enabled applications will use for the
software interface.
Use the Plot Copy Type drop-down list to select which method to use when copying images to the clipboard.
For settings specific to the current application, rather than common to all Synthesis-enabled applications, see the
following section.
29.2 Application Setup
The preferences set in the Application Setup window are stored on your computer, and they apply to every repository
and/or project opened on your computer and can be changed at any time. The preferences set by one user have no
effect on the preferences set by another user. In other words, two users can have different Application Setup
preferences and work on the same project in a repository without impacting the repository.
The Application Setup can be opened by choosing File > Application Setup.
The Application Setup consists of nine pages. Each page and its components are presented next. To access each page,
click the name in the navigation panel on the left side of the window.
For settings common to Synthesis-enabled applications, rather than specific to the current application, see the
previous section.
This section describes all the pages available in the Application Setup, including:
User Page - Section 29.2.1 (p. 602).
Weibull++ Folios Page - Section 29.2.2 (p. 603).
ALTA Folios Page - Section 29.2.3 (p. 604).
Calculations Page - Section 29.2.4 (p. 605).
Plot Page - Section 29.2.5 (p. 607).
Display Page - Section 29.2.6 (p. 610).
Other Page - Section 29.2.7 (p. 611).
Customize Folio Tools Page - Section 29.2.8 (p. 612).
Reset Settings Page - Section 29.2.9 (p. 613).
Whats Changed? In previous versions of the software, the Application Setup was known as the User Setup.
29 Application Setup
602 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
29.2.1 User Page
The User page of the Application Setup displays the product registration information of the current registered user of
the software.
User Name displays the name of the registered user of the software.
Company displays the company name of the registered user of the software.
E-mail displays the e-mail address of registered user of the software.
License displays the software license.
To change the information displayed, see page 4 in Chapter 1.
Whats Changed? In previous versions of the software, the information in User Name and Company fields were
displayed in plots. That information now comes from the User Login and Contact Information window. See page 40 in
Chapter 2.
Note: Notification e-mails are added and changed using the E-mail Settings window. See page 50 in Chapter 2.
29.2 Application Setup
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 603
29.2.2 Weibull++ Folios Page
The Weibull++ Folios page of the Application Setup is where you set the options that
apply only to Weibull++ folios. Options that apply to both Weibull++ and ALTA appear
on other pages.
Use the Default Analysis Method area to set the default analysis method for data sheets. Note that the options are
different for time-to-failure data sheets and free-form data sheets as free-from data sheets do not support the MLE
method.
Use the Default Ranking Method area to select the default ranking method for rank regression analysis.
Use the Default Confidence Bounds Method area to select the default method used to calculate the confidence
bounds.
Use the settings in the Default Grouped Data Settings area to set how Weibull++ assigns an individual median
rank value to each data point (observation) within each group. When you select an option and plot the data, the
points in each group will appear vertically aligned. If you do not select an option then the observations in each
group will be represented by a single point at the highest median rank value within each group.
Select Ungroup on regression to fit the regression line to all data points in each group. If not selected, only
the points with the highest median rank value within each group will be considered when fitting a line to the
points.
Select Ungroup on MLE plot to plot all of the data points in each group on the MLE probability plot. If not
selected, only the points with the highest median rank value within each group will be plotted. The line is
independent of whether data points are treated as grouped or ungrouped.
Analysis Summary Options
To display the theta parameter in the control panel analysis summary area when using the Weibull distribution,
select the Show Theta option. Theta is defined as the sum of the scale and location parameters (Eta and
Gamma):
29 Application Setup
604 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
To display the correlation coefficient in the control panel analysis summary area, select the Show correlation
coefficient option. Note that the correlation coefficient is only applicable when using rank regression as the
analysis method.
To display the likelihood function value in the control panel analysis summary area, select the Show
likelihood value (LK) option.
29.2.3 ALTA Folios Page
The ALTA Folios page of the Application Setup is where you set the options that apply only to
ALTA folios. Options that apply to both Weibull++ and ALTA appear on other pages.
Data Sheet Options for ALTA
To display the likelihood function value in the control panel Analysis Summary area, select the Show
likelihood value (LK) option.
To display the activation energy (Ea) in the control panel Analysis Summary area, select the Show activation
energy option. Note that this option does not apply to the inverse power law, proportional hazards or general
log-linear life-stress models.
In the Units drop-down list choose either Kelvin or Rankine for the time units in which to display the
activation energy.
To display the selected stress columns in the data sheet with a colored border, select the Indicate stress
columns used option, then click the Color box to open the palette and select a border color.
Default Grouped Data Settings
If you select Ungroup points on plot, ALTA assigns an individual median rank value to each data point
(observation) within a group. When plotted, the points in each group will appear vertically aligned. If not
selected, the observations in each group will be represented by a single point at the highest median rank value
within the group. The line is independent of whether data points are treated as grouped or ungrouped.
29.2 Application Setup
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 605
Other Options
To open other ALTA standard folios while the Use Stress Level window remains open, select the While the
Use Stress window is open, have access to all folios option. The Use Stress Level window will be linked to
the currently active data sheet. If not selected, you must close the Use Stress Level window in order to return
to the folios.
In the Default Life Distribution area select whether the Weibull, Lognormal or Exponential distribution will be
selected by default for ALTA standard folios. If lognormal is selected as the default and you select a model for
which the lognormal distribution is not available (i.e., Proportional Hazards or Cumulative Damage in ALTA 8
PRO), the life distribution will automatically reset to Weibull.
For time-varying stress profiles, in the Calculations Options area select the option that specifies when ALTA will
apply the stress to a time-to-failure data point that occurs at the both the End time of one segment and the Start
time of another segment:
Select Implement stress at end of step to apply the stress from the later segment.
Select Implement stress at beginning of step to apply the stress from the earlier segment.
For example, suppose that the selected stress profile applies a stress of 300K to failure times between 0 and 100
hours and a stress of 350K to failure times between 100 and 200 hours. If the observed failure time is 100 hours,
you must determine whether to apply the 300K or 350K stress to that data point. These settings are available only
in ALTA 8 PRO and apply only when Cumulative Damage is selected as the life-stress model.
Select Allow large Beta values (Cumulative Damage model) to display beta values up to 250 when using the
cumulative damage model. If not selected, the default maximum beta value is 50. This option is available only in
ALTA 8 PRO and applies only when Cumulative Damage is selected as the life-stress model.
29.2.4 Calculations Page
The Calculations page of the Application Setup is where you set various calculation options, such as the numerical
precision used in the software and whether to sort a data sheet before or after calculations.
29 Application Setup
606 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Iteration Convergence Tolerance
Use Displayed math precision to set the number of decimal places shown in results and plots. Please note
that the tolerance on the precision is limited by Windows to 15 digits.
Use Scientific notation tolerance (10^?) to set the point at which the software will switch to scientific
notation. For example, if the scientific notation tolerance is set to 5, then any number that is larger than 105
will be displayed using scientific notation.
Special Options on Location Parameter
Use this area to set the options regarding the location parameter (Gamma).
If you want to be notified if the location parameter contains a negative value, select Warn if location
parameter is negative.
If you select Discard if location parameter is negative the software behaves as follows:
If you are using RRX or RRY to calculate the parameters:
For the 2-parameter exponential distribution, the negative location parameter is discarded and the data
set is recalculated using the 1-parameter exponential distribution. The location parameter is displayed
as zero.
For the 3-parameter Weibull distribution, the negative location parameter is discarded and the data set
is recalculated using the 2-parameter Weibull distribution. The location parameter is displayed as zero.
If you are using MLE to calculate the parameters:
For the 2-parameter exponential distribution, the negative location parameter is discarded and the data
set is recalculated using the 2-parameter exponential distribution with the location parameter
constrained between zero and the first failure time.
If you have not selected the Use true 3-P MLE on Weibull option on this page of the Application
Setup, the negative location parameter is discarded and the data set is recalculated using the 2-
parameter Weibull distribution. The location parameter is displayed as zero.
If you have selected the Use true 3-P MLE on Weibull option, the negative location parameter is
discarded and the data set is recalculated using the 3-parameter Weibull distribution with the location
parameter constrained between zero and the first time-to-failure.
Select Reset if location parameter > T1 on Exponential to reset the value of the location parameter equal to
the first time-to-failure if the location parameter is greater than the first failure time. The parameters will then
be recalculated based on the new value of the location parameter. This option pertains to the exponential
distribution for both rank regression on X (RRX) and rank regression on Y (RRY).
Select Use true 3-P MLE on Weibull to use a true 3-parameter MLE solution. The 3-parameter solution is
inherently problematic for some Beta values and can fail to converge for some data sets. When not selected,
Weibull++ uses non-linear regression to compute Gamma, and then computes the MLE of Beta and Eta using
a transformed . See page 198 in Chapter 4.
Select Use Theta parameter scheme on Weibull to replace the Weibull scale parameter Eta in all results with
Theta, where Theta = Eta + Gamma.
Select Use extended Generalized Gamma to allow the Lambda parameter of the generalized gamma
distribution to take negative values.
Other Options
By default, Lambda is used as the scale parameter of the exponential distribution. Select Use mean time for
the exponential distribution if you prefer to use MTTF (1/Lambda) instead.
Select Sort before calculation to sort the times in ascending order before calculating the data sheet. Note that
this will not affect the results of the calculation.
T' T ( ) =
29.2 Application Setup
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 607
Use unbiased Std on Normal data
Use this check box to correct the MLE standard deviation (sigma) value for biasedness. Note that this setting
applies only to the normal distribution with complete data.
Use special sort (place F before S)
The software always sorts entries based on failure times. In special cases where two or more failure times are
identical to suspension times, the sort algorithm does not distinguish between them and sorts them based on
the way they were entered. For example, if given a suspension time of 100 hours and a failure time of 100
hours, the results will vary depending on the order in which the data were entered and whether you are using
rank regression. When the Use special sort (place F before S) option is selected and two identical times are
encountered, the software will always put failures before suspensions. This involves a double sort routine and
might be slightly slower than the standard sort.
Use plotted Y points for K-S test
Select this check box to use the plotted points (using median ranks or Kaplan-Meier) to calculate the
difference between observed and model estimated probability for the Kolmogorov-Smirnov test, which is used
by the Goodness of Fit Results window and the Distribution Wizard. If not selected, the non-parametric
(empirical) values of the probability of failure are used as the observed value for the Kolmogorov-Smirnov
test.
Use the Precision for Convergence Criteria slider to set the tolerance that will be used as the convergence limit
(degree of accuracy) for mathematical iterations (e.g., a value of 4 indicates 1E-4 tolerance).
29.2.5 Plot Page
The Plot page of the Application Setup is where you set the default startup configuration for each plot sheet and other
plot preferences.
Use the Default Settings for Numbers in Axis Labels area to set the precision displayed on the plots. High
precision values can cause numbers to print on top of other numbers in the plots.
X-axis/Y-axis math precision sets the number of decimal places shown for each axis on the plot. Please note
that the tolerance on the precision is limited by Windows to 15 digits.
29 Application Setup
608 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
X-axis/Y-axis scientific tolerance sets the point at which the software will switch to scientific notation for
axis labels.
Use the Default Settings for New Plot Sheets area to set the options for new plots. Note that changing an option
does not apply to existing plots.
Select Enable auto refresh to activate the Auto Refresh option every time you open a new plot sheet.
Select Show legends on plots to display the legends on the plot.
Select Show user, date and time to display the user name, date and time on plots. The user information comes
from the User Login and Contact Information window and is displayed in the User Information area of the
plot.
Select Show program ID on plots to display the software name and URL in the Header Title part of the plot.
Select Show outline on plots to display the canvas border on the plot.
Select Show lines around interval points to show lines around the points for interval censored data. The lines
represent the starting and ending time for each interval. For example:
Select Show number in group to show the number of data elements represented by each point on the plot
when plotting grouped data.
Select Show parameter scales to show the parameter scales on a probability plot. The probability scales
allow you to read the parameters directly from the plot.
29.2 Application Setup
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 609
Select Show parameter bars to place a box around the parameter scales on a probability plot. (To see the
parameter scales and the box, open a probability plot, choose Plot > Plot Actions > Show/Hide Plot Items
and then select both Scales and Bars.) For example:
Select Show left censored points to display the left censored points as triangles on the bottom of the plot
when plotting interval or left censored data.
Select Show suspensions to display the suspension (right-censored) data points as triangles on the bottom of
the plot when plotting suspended data.
Other Options
Select Enable interactive plot to highlight each point, line, slice or bar on the plot when you move the cursor
over it. Point coordinates/values will be displayed on highlighted objects.
Adjust MLE points on plot line: In the probability plot for an MLE analysis, adjust the points to the MLE
line (i.e., the y-axis plotting position will be determined based on the MLE line rather than the unreliability
calculated for rank regression).
Select Straighten Gamma line to straighten the parameter line on the probability plot for data sheets that use
the gamma or generalized gamma distributions. Note that if you change this setting, you must refresh an
affected plot to see the change.
29 Application Setup
610 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
29.2.6 Display Page
The Display page of the Application Setup is where you select the MDI background image and customize the fonts
used in the software.
In the Background Graphic on Main Form area, do one of the following:
Click Set Picture to import a graphic for the background on the MDI. A preview of the selected graphic will
be displayed to the right of the buttons.
Click No Picture to display the MDI background without a picture.
Click Default Picture to display the default ReliaSoft background graphic that was shipped with the software.
Other Options
Select Show list of distributions on hovering to display the distribution/model drop-down list in control
panels when you hover over the bar. If not selected, you must click the bar in order to display the list.
Select Highlight Active category in Ribbon to apply the highlight color to the label that shows which tabs
in the Ribbon are currently active.
Use the Default folio font drop-down list to select the default font for data sheets in new folios.
29.2 Application Setup
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 611
29.2.7 Other Page
The Other page of the Application Setup is where you customize other features in the software.
Preferences
Select Show the Project Wizard when creating new projects to display a wizard that helps you select the
first new folio to create in a project. If not selected, the new project will be blank.
Select the While QCP is open, have access to all folios option to lock the QCP in a top window position (i.e.,
non-modal) so it can remain open while you have access to all diagrams. The calculations performed in the
QCP will be based on the currently active data sheet. If not selected, you must close the QCP in order to return
to the folios. This setting can also be changed from within the QCP by selecting or clearing the Non-Modal
QCP option in the Options drop-down list.
Select Show warning when deleting columns with data to display a warning message when using the Add
or Remove Columns window to delete a column that has data. See page 233 in Chapter 5.
Diagram
Use the Truncate block names when the number of characters exceeds area to set the maximum number of
characters displayed for block names.
By default, when you have multiple blocks selected in a diagram and you add a connector to one of the
selected blocks, the connection goes only to the block you place the connector on. To be prompted to add
connections to all of the selected blocks, select the Ask for confirmation when connecting multiple blocks
option.
Select Ask to apply changes when using the Format Painter to display a window with the Format Painter
that allows you to specify which settings will be applied to another block.
Use the Weibull++/ALTA View Mode drop-down list to select which product view mode to use when opening a
database.
Note: These setting apply only to the diagrams that are created using the Diagrams feature in Weibull++ or ALTA.
29 Application Setup
612 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
29.2.8 Customize Folio Tools Page
The Customize Folio Tools page of the Application Setup is where you specify which tools you want available on the
standard folio control panels along with the standard tools that are always displayed (Calculate, Plot, QCP and
Distribution Wizard).
In the Customize Weibull++ Folio Tools and Customize ALTA Folio Tools areas select or clear the options that you
want displayed in the control panel. Note that these options will still be accessible from the applicable Ribbons.
29.2 Application Setup
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 613
29.2.9 Reset Settings Page
The Reset Settings page of the Application Setup is where you reset particular items to their original configuration.
Reset Common Synthesis Settings resets only the common settings for all Synthesis repositories, such as the last
repository information and others.
Reset Application Setup Settings resets all the options on the Application Setup window to their original
configurations.
Reset Plot Settings resets all plot settings to the original configuration.
Reset Application Settings resets only the application-specific form settings, including the size, location and last
state of the application windows.
Reset All Settings resets all settings in the software to the original configuration.
Note: When selecting Reset All Settings, the default settings are not immediately applied to an open project. To see
the changes, you must close and then reopen the project.
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 615
This appendix presents detailed descriptions of the functions available within Weibull++s and ALTAs Function
Wizard. The spreadsheet functions are presented in the first section, followed by the Word report template functions.
A.1 Data Entry Tips for Functions
When entering text as an input to a function, you must enclose it in quotation marks. This includes situations
where you need to specify the data source DISTR(Folio1!Data 1) and situations where you need enter a time
or date value in one of the accepted text formats - DAY(22-Aug-2011).
For the data source functions, you must specify which of the available data sources you want to link to for any
particular function. You can use either of the following formats:
The source name, enclosed in quotation marks (e.g., Weibull!Folio1!Data1). This provides an absolute
reference to the data source that will not change. You can use this format in spreadsheets and analysis
workbooks.
The associated data source index number (e.g., Default1). This provides a reference that you can easily change
on-the-fly. This is useful when creating templates that can be used with any data source. You can use this
format only in analysis workbooks and only with one of the data sources that are currently associated with the
analysis workbook.
If your regional settings use a comma as the decimal separator, you must use a semicolon to separate function
arguments (e.g., =RELIABILITY(Folio1!Data 1;A4)).
If you want to use another cell in the spreadsheet/analysis workbook to provide the input for a function, enter the
cell reference with a letter to identify the column and a number to identify the row. The cell references can be
relative (e.g., A2) or absolute (e.g. $A$2). For example, if you want to obtain the base-10 logarithm of whatever
value is entered into cell B10 of the spreadsheet, the function would be =LOG10(B10). Note that clicking the
Function Wizards Insert Workbook Reference icon will insert the reference of the cell that is currently selected
in the spreadsheet. If you want to insert an absolute reference, press CTRL while you click the icon.
If the function requires you to specify a cell in the data source, you must use numbers to identify both the row and
column (e.g., for cell A2 in the source data sheet, enter 2 for the row and 1 for the column). For example:
=DATAENTRY(Default1,2,1) returns the value that was entered into cell A2 in the Weibull++ or ALTA
standard folio that is the data source for this function.
=FMATRIX(Default1,2,1) returns the value from the second row in the first column of the Fisher variance/
covariance matrix that was calculated for that data sheet.
When using one of the spreadsheet date functions (DAY, DAYS360, MONTH, WEEKDAY and YEAR) to enter a
date, you can use one of the following accepted text formats:
Month/Day/Year (8/22/2011). For example, DAY(8/22/2011) returns 22 (the day of the date).
Function Wizard Functions
A
Function Wizard Functions A
616 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Month-Day-Year (22-Aug-2011). For example, MONTH(22-Aug-2011) returns 8 (the month of the date).
For dates in the current year, you can use the Day-Month format (22-AUG). For example, in 2011
WEEKDAY(22-AUG) returns 2 (the day of the week of Monday, August 22, 2011).
You can also enter the serial number directly. For example, YEAR(40828) returns 2011 (the serial date using
the 1900 date system).
You can also use the results of other formulas or functions. In particular, you can use the NOW or TODAY
functions to generate values on-the-fly. For example, if the current date is 10/24/2011, then
MONTH(TODAY()) returns 10.
You can calculate a date's serial number using either of the following two functions:
The DATE function use the inputs of other cells to calculate a serial number that can be used in other
functions. For example, if you have three columns, Year, Month and Date, and you want to use the
WEEKDAY function, you could use the DATE function to calculate the serial number and then use the
WEEKDAY function, e.g., WEEKDAY(DATE(D1,D2,D3)).
The DATEVALUE function is helpful in cases where a worksheet contains dates in an accepted text format
that you want to filter, sort, or format as dates, or use in date calculations, e.g., DATEVALUE(D2
&/&D3&/&D1).
When using one of the spreadsheet time functions (HOUR, MINUTE and SECOND) to enter a time, you can use
one of the following valid text formats:
Hour:Minute[:Second] [AM/PM]. For example, HOUR(3:30:30 PM) returns 15 (the hour using the twenty-
four hour system).
Month/Day/Year Hour:Minute[:Second] [AM/PM]. For example, MINUTE(8/22/2011 3:25:33 AM) returns
25.
You can also enter the serial number directly. For example, MINUTE(0.78125) returns 45 (as the specified
serial number represents 6:45 PM).
You can also use the results of other formulas or functions. In particular, you can use the NOW function to
generate values on-the-fly. For example, if the current time is 9:42 AM, then HOUR(NOW()) returns 9.
In cases where you need to perform calculations on times, such as using the MINUTE function to obtain the
number of minutes between two events, you must first generate the serial number using either of the following
two functions:
The TIME function requires you to enter the Hour, Minute and Second in separate fields. For example,
TIME(16,48,10) returns 0.700115741 (this is the serial number that is equivalent to 4:48:10 PM).
The TIMEVALUE function requires you to enter the time as text in one of the accepted text formats given
above. For example, TIMEVALUE(5:15:30 PM) returns 0.7190972222.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
This section provides the functions that are used with Analysis Workbooks and General spreadsheets within
Weibull++s and ALTAs Function Wizard. The data source functions are presented first, followed by the
mathematical functions.
Note throughout that text strings must be entered within quotation marks and that inputs shown here enclosed within
brackets are optional. Also note that although arguments or inputs are shown here separated by a comma and a space
for ease of reading, no space should follow the comma in actual use. If your regional settings use a comma as the
decimal separator, a semicolon will be used to separate function arguments (e.g., =RELIABILITY(Folio1!Data
1;A4)).
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 617
A.2.1 Spreadsheet Data Source Functions
This section presents the data source functions that are available for spreadsheets within Weibull++ and ALTA.
A.2.1.1 Common Functions
This section presents the data source functions that are available for spreadsheets within Weibull++ and ALTA.
ATYPE
Description: Returns the analysis method used for fitting the model.
Syntax: ATYPE(Data_Src)
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the analysis method is taken.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Example:
ATYPE(Folio1!Data 1) = RRX
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
DATARANK
Description: Returns the rank value (i.e., the unreliability estimate from rank regression) for the specified cell. Use
numbers to identify both the row and column (e.g., for cell A2 in the data sheet, enter 2 for the row and 1 for the
column).
Syntax: DATARANK(Data_Src, Row, Column)
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the data is selected.
Row is the row number in the data sheet.
Column is the column number in the data sheet.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
The Row and Column values must be greater than 0.
Example:
DATARANK(Folio1!Data 1, 1, 1) = 0.001742214906
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Function Wizard Functions A
618 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
DCOUNT
Description: Returns the total number of units (failures and suspensions) of the specified data sheet.
Syntax: DCOUNT(Data_Src)
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the unit count is taken.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Example:
DCOUNT(Folio1!Data 1) = 963
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
DISTR
Description: Returns the name of the distribution that was fitted to the data.
Syntax: DISTR(Data_Src)
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the distribution is selected.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Example:
DISTR(Folio1!Data 1) = Weibull 2P
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
DTYPE
Description: Returns the life data type (e.g., Individual Time-to-Failure with Suspensions).
Syntax: DTYPE(Data_Src)
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the data type is taken.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 619
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Example:
DTYPE(Folio1!Data 1) = Grouped Time-to-Failure with Suspensions
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
FCOUNT
Description: Returns the total number of failures in the specified data source (or the total number of entries in the
data sheet that are marked with an F).
Syntax: FCOUNT(Data_Src)
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the number of failures is taken.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Example:
FCOUNT(Folio1!Data 1) = 305
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
FMATRIX
Description: Returns a value from the Fisher variance/covariance matrix for the selected data source. Enter numbers
to identify the row and column in the matrix table. The full table is displayed in the 'Quick Results Report' for the
calculated data sheet.
Syntax: FMATRIX(Data_Src, Row, Column)
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the Fisher variance/covariance matrix value is taken.
Row is the row number of the data sheet.
Column is the column number of the data sheet.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
The Row and Column values must be greater than 0.
Example:
FMATRIX(Folio1!Data 1, 1, 1) = 0.0145057558
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Function Wizard Functions A
620 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
LKVALUE
Description: Returns the calculated log-likelihood function of the fitted model.
Syntax: LKVALUE(Data_Src)
Data_Src is the source data sheet for which the log-likelihood function is calculated.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Example:
LKVALUE(Folio1!Data 1) = -1629.507799
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
NFCOUNT
Description: Returns the total number of suspensions in the specified data source (or the total number of entries in
the data sheet that are marked with an S).
Syntax: NFCOUNT(Data_Src)
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the number of suspensions is taken.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Example:
NFCOUNT(Folio1!Data 1) = 963
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 621
PARAMNAME
Description: Returns the name of the specified parameter.
Syntax: PARAMNAME(Data_Src, Param_Index)
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the distribution is selected.
Weibull++ Values
Param_Index is the index specifying the parameter name to be returned. The parameter index corresponds to the
order that the parameters appear in the calculated results in the folio, as shown in the next table.
ALTA Values
Param_Index is the index specifying the parameter name to be returned. The parameter index corresponds to the
order that the parameters appear in the calculated results in the folio, as shown in the next table. Note the
following in this table:
The Shape parameter varies based on distribution:
Weibull = Beta
Lognormal = Std
Exponential = None, so every other parameter is shifted down one index
The number of Alpha parameters beyond Alpha(0) depends on the number of stress types (e.g., for 2 stress types,
Alpha(0)-Alpha(2) will be present).
Index 1 Index 2 Index 3 Index 4
Weibull Beta Eta Gamma
Normal Mean Std
Lognormal LogMean LogStd
Exponential Lambda Gamma
G-Gamma Mu Sigma Lambda
Gamma Mu K
Logistic Mu Sigma
Loglogistic Mu Sigma
Gumbel Mu Sigma
Weibull-
Bayesian
Prior Distribution
(see table below)
Parameter1 (see
table below)
Parameter2 (see
table below)
PstMed /
PstMean
Normal (0) Lognormal (1) Exponential (2) Uniform (3)
Parameter1 Mean LogMean Lambda Min Beta
Parameter2 Std LogStd Max Beta
Model
Index
1
Index
2
Index
3
Index
4
Index
5
Index
6
Index
7
Index
8
Index
9
Index
10
Arrhenius Shape B C
Function Wizard Functions A
622 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Example:
PARAMNAME(Folio1!Data 1, 2) = Eta
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
USERCOMPANY
Description: Returns the company name specified in the User Login and Contact Information window.
Syntax: USERCOMPANY()
Example:
USERCOMPANY() = Company
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
USERNAME
Description: Returns the user name specified in the User Login and Contact Information window.
Syntax: USERNAME()
Example:
USERNAME() = Dave User
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Eyring Shape A B
Inverse Power
Law
Shape K N
Temperature-
Humidity
Shape A B Phi
Temperature-
NonThermal
Shape B C n
Generalized
Eyring
Shape A B C D
Proportional
Hazards
Shape Alpha
(0)
Alpha
(1)
Alpha
(2)
Alpha
(3)
Alpha
(4)
Alpha
(5)
Alpha
(6)
Alpha
(7)
Alpha
(8)
General Log-
Linear
Shape Alpha
(0)
Alpha
(1)
Alpha
(2)
Alpha
(3)
Alpha
(4)
Alpha
(5)
Alpha
(6)
Alpha
(7)
Alpha
(8)
Cumulative
Damage
Shape Alpha
(0)
Alpha
(1)
Alpha
(2)
Alpha
(3)
Alpha
(4)
Alpha
(5)
Alpha
(6)
Alpha
(7)
Alpha
(8)
Model
Index
1
Index
2
Index
3
Index
4
Index
5
Index
6
Index
7
Index
8
Index
9
Index
10
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 623
A.2.1.2 Weibull++ Functions
This section presents the spreadsheet data source functions that are available only within
Weibull++.
AMEAN
Description: Returns the value of the MTTF (Mean Time to Failure).
Syntax: AMEAN(Data_Src, [Confidence Level])
Data_Src is the source data sheet for which the mean value is calculated.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Remarks:
Confidence Level is an optional value and, if specified, must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Example:
AMEAN(Folio1!Data 1, 0.1) = 100.7358778
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
ASTDEV
Description: Returns the standard deviation of the fitted model, which provides a measure
of the spread of the failure times. The standard deviation is the square root of the variance.
Syntax: ASTDEV(Data_Src)
Data_Src is the source data sheet for which the standard deviation is calculated.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
The variance of the life provides a measure of the spread of the failure times and is given by:
The larger the variance, the wider the spread of the failure times.
Function Wizard Functions A
624 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The standard deviation is the square root of the variance:
Example:
ASTDEV(Folio1!Data 1) = 37.53284511
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
AVAR
Description: Returns the variance of the fitted model, which provides a measure of the
spread of the failure times.
Syntax: AVAR(Data_Src)
Data_Src is the source data sheet for which the variance is calculated.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Remarks:
The variance of the life provides a measure of the spread of the failure times and is given by:
The larger the variance, the wider the spread of the failure times.
Example:
AVAR(Folio1!Data 1) = 1408.714462
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
CBMETHOD
Description: Returns the confidence bounds method used when fitting the model.
Syntax: CBMETHOD(Data_Src)
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the confidence bounds method is taken.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 625
Example:
CBMETHOD(Folio1!Data 1) = Fisher Matrix
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
CCOEF
Description: Returns the correlation coefficient of the fitted model. Not available for
stress-dependent models.
Syntax: CCOEF(Data_Src)
Data_Src is the source data sheet for which the correlation coefficient is calculated.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Example:
CCOEF(Folio1!Data 1) = 0.9919851757
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
CHIGOF
Description: Returns the chi-squared goodness of fit of the fitted model. Not available for
stress-dependent models.
Syntax: CHIGOF(Data_Src)
Data_Src is the source data sheet for which the chi-squared goodness of fit is calculated.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Example:
CHIGOF(Folio1!Data 1) = 1
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
COSTPERUNITTIME
Description: Returns the cost per unit time of performing a preventive maintenance action
(planned replacement) at a given time interval. Not available for stress-dependent models.
Syntax: COSTPERUNITTIME(Data_Src, Time, Planned, Unplanned)
Data_Src is the source data sheet for which the cost per unit time is calculated.
Function Wizard Functions A
626 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Time is the time interval at which the preventive maintenance action will be performed.
Planned is the cost of performing a planned replacement of the component.
Unplanned is the cost of performing an unplanned replacement of the component.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
The Time, Planned and Unplanned values must be greater than 0.
Example:
COSTPERUNITTIME(Folio1!Data 1, 5, 5, 3) = 0.999992796
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
DATAENTRY
Description: Returns the value from the specified cell in the selected data source. Use
numbers to identify both the row and column (e.g., for cell A2 in the data sheet, enter 2 for the row and 1 for the
column).
Syntax: DATAENTRY(Data_Src, Row, Column)
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the data is taken.
Row is the row number in the data sheet.
Column is the column number in the data sheet.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
The Row and Column values must be greater than 0.
Example:
DATAENTRY(Folio1!Data 1, 1, 2) = F
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
EFAILURES
Description: Returns the expected number of failures for the specified period of time for
one unit. If the data source contains failure times for non-repairable systems, the result is accurate when the start time
is close to 0 and the end time is less than the MTTF value. If the data source contains the times to the first failure of a
repairable system, the result is valid for any start and end time values.
Syntax: EFAILURES(Data_Src, Start Time, End Time)
Data_Src is the source data sheet for which the expected number of failures is calculated.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 627
Start Time and End Time are the start age and additional operating time duration, respectively, of the period for
which the number of failures are calculated.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
The Start Time and End Time values must be greater than 0.
Example:
EFAILURES(Folio1!Data 1, 5, 10) = 0.0005748748162
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
EFAILURESS
Description: Returns the expected number of failures if all of the suspensions in the
current data source operate for a specified additional amount of time. For example, if the data sheet contains 20 units
suspended at 100 hour and you enter 100 for Time, the function returns the expected number of failures (repairs)
when those 20 units continue operating from 100 to 200 hours. Not available for stress-dependent models.
Syntax: EFAILURESS(Data_Src, Time)
Data_Src is the source data sheet for which the number of predicted failures is calculated.
Time is the additional time of operation of the suspensions (in addition to the current age of each suspension).
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
The Time value must be greater than 0.
Example:
EFAILURESS(Folio1!Data 1,100) = 490
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
FAILURERATE
Description: Returns the value of the failure rate at the specified time.
Syntax: FAILURERATE(Data_Src, Time, [Confidence Level])
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the failure rate is calculated.
Time is the time at which the failure rate is calculated.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
Function Wizard Functions A
628 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
The Time value must be greater than 0.
Confidence Level is an optional value and, if specified, must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Example:
FAILURERATE(Folio1!Data 1, 5) = 4.938801301E-005
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
KSGOF
Description: Returns the Kolmogorov-Smirnov (K-S) goodness of fit of the fitted model.
Not available for stress-dependent models.
Syntax: KSGOF(Data_Src)
Data_Src is the source data sheet for which the KS goodness of fit test is performed.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Example:
KSGOF(Folio1!Data 1) = 9.999778783E-013
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
NPOPULATIONS
Description: Returns the number of subpopulations/competing failure modes.
Syntax: NPOPULATIONS(Data_Src)
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the number of subpopulations/competing failure modes is taken.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Available only if the specified data sheet was calculated with a mixed Weibull distribution or competing failure
modes.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 629
Example:
NPOPULATIONS(Folio1!Data 1) = 2
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
PARAMETER
Description: Returns a specified parameter value.
Syntax: PARAMETER(Data_Src, Param_index, [Subpop_index], [Confidence Level])
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the distribution is selected.
Param_index is the index specifying the parameter to be returned. The parameter index corresponds to the order
that the parameters appear in the calculated results in the Folio, as shown in the next table.
Subpop_index is the index specifying the subpopulation to be used by the function. Use this if the specified data
sheet was calculated with a mixed Weibull distribution or competing failure modes.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Subpop_index is an optional value and must be a positive integer value between 1 and 4.
Confidence Level is an optional value and, if specified, must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Index 1 Index 2 Index 3 Index 4
Weibull Beta Eta Gamma
Normal Mean Std
Lognormal LogMean LogStd
Exponential Lambda Gamma
G-Gamma Mu Sigma Lambda
Gamma Mu K
Logistic Mu Sigma
Loglogistic Mu Sigma
Gumbel Mu Sigma
Weibull-
Bayesian
Prior Distribution
(see table below)
Parameter1 (see
table below)
Parameter2 (see
table below)
PstMed /
PstMean
Normal (0)
Lognormal
(1)
Exponential
(2)
Uniform (3)
Parameter1 Mean LogMean Lambda Min Beta
Parameter2 Std LogStd Max Beta
Function Wizard Functions A
630 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Example:
PARAMETER(Folio1!Data 1, 1, 1, 2) = 2.35
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
PDF
Description: Returns the pdf value at the specified time.
Syntax: PDF(Data_Src, Time)
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the pdf value is calculated.
Time is the time at which the pdf value is calculated.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
The Time value must be greater than 0.
Example:
PDF(Folio1!Data 1, 5) = 4.938394111E-005
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
PROBFAIL
Description: Returns the probability of failure or conditional probability of failure at the
specified time. For standard probability, enter the end time in the Time field. For conditional probability of failure,
enter the start time in the Time field and the additional mission time in the Add Time field.
Syntax: PROBFAIL(Data_Src, Time, [Add Time], [Confidence Level])
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the probability of failure is calculated. Time is either the mission
end time for a standard probability calculation, or the start time for a conditional probability calculation.
Add Time is the additional operating time duration. It is only used for conditional calculations.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Add Time is an optional value and is only used for conditional calculations. When Add Time is not specified, the
probability of failure is calculated for Time. When Add Time is specified, Time is the current age of the item and
Add Time is the additional time (or mission time) for which the probability of failure is to be calculated.
Confidence Level is an optional value and, if specified, must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 631
Example:
PROBFAIL(Folio1!Data 1, 5, 1, 0.1) = 0.3421
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
RANKMETHOD
Description: Returns the ranking method used when fitting the model.
Syntax: RANKMETHOD(Data_Src)
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the ranking method is taken.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Example:
RANKMETHOD(Folio1!Data 1) = Median
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
RDT_WB1_B
Description: Returns the value of beta for a data sheet without any failures that was
calculated using the 1-parameter Weibull distribution.
Syntax: RDT_WB1_B(Data_Src, Confidence Level, [Eta])
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the value is calculated from.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
Eta is a parameter value.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
The Confidence Level value must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Eta is an optional value and, if specified, must be a positive value greater than 0.
Example:
RDT_WB1_B(Folio1!Data 1, 0.7, 21000) = 2.9749551
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Function Wizard Functions A
632 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
RDT_WB1_C
Description: Returns the confidence level value for a data sheet without any failures that
was calculated using the 1-parameter Weibull distribution.
Syntax: RDT_WB1_C(Data_Src, Eta, [Beta])
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the value is calculated from.
Eta is a parameter value.
Beta is an optional parameter value.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
The Eta and Beta values must be greater than 0.
Example:
RDT_WB1_C(Folio1!Data 1, 20000, 3.3) = 0.05414937
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
RDT_WB1_E
Description: Returns the value of eta for a data sheet without any failures that was
calculated using the 1-parameter Weibull distribution.
Syntax: RDT_WB1_E(Data_Src, Confidence Level, [Beta])
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the value is calculated from.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
Beta is a parameter value.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
The Confidence Level value must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Beta is an optional value and, if specified, must be a positive value greater than 0.
Example:
RDT_WB1_E(Folio1!Data 1, 0.7, 4.17) = 1212.135481
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 633
RELIABILITY
Description: Returns the reliability or conditional reliability at the specified time. For
standard reliability, enter the end time in the Time field. For conditional reliability, enter the start time in the Time
field and the additional mission time in the Add Time field.
Syntax: RELIABILITY(Data_Src, Time, [Add Time], [Confidence Level])
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the reliability is calculated.
Time is either the mission end time for a standard probability calculation, or the start time for a conditional
probability calculation.
Add Time is the additional operating time duration. It is only used for conditional calculations.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Add Time is an optional value and is only used for conditional calculations. When Add Time is not specified, the
reliability is calculated for Time. When Add Time is specified, Time is the current age of the item and Add Time
is the additional time (or mission time) for which the reliability is to be calculated.
Confidence Level is an optional value and, if specified, must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Example:
RELIABILITY(Folio1!Data 1, 5, 1, 0.1) = 0.9344
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
TIMEATPF
Description: Returns the time corresponding to the specified probability of failure.
Syntax: TIMEATPF(Data_Src, Unreliability, [Confidence Level])
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the time is calculated.
Unreliability is the unreliability or probability of failure.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
The Unreliability value must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Confidence Level is an optional value and, if specified, must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Function Wizard Functions A
634 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Example:
TIMEATPF(Folio1!Data 1, 0.15, 0.1) = 1422
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
TIMEATR
Description: Returns the time corresponding to the specified reliability.
Syntax: TIMEATR(Data_Src, Reliability, [Confidence Level])
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the time is calculated.
Reliability is the reliability.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
The Reliability value must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Confidence Level is an optional value and, if specified, must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Example:
TIMEATR(Folio1!Data 1, 0.5, 0.1) = 155.52
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
TOTALOPERATINGTIME
Description: Returns the total operating time for the specified data source.
Syntax: TOTALOPERATINGTIME(Data_Src)
Data_Src is the source data sheet for which the total operating time is calculated.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Example:
TOTALOPERATINGTIME(Folio1!Data 1) = 59400
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 635
ZEROCOUNT
Description: Returns the number of zero times-to-failure for the specified data source.
Syntax: ZEROCOUNT(Data_Src)
Data_Src is the source data sheet for which the number of zero times-to-failure is calculated.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Example:
ZEROCOUNT(Folio1!Data 1) = 5
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
A.2.1.3 ALTA Functions
This section presents the spreadsheet data source functions that are available only within ALTA.
ACCELERATIONFACTOR
Description: Returns the value of the acceleration factor. Only available for stress-dependent
models. Time required only for a Cumulative Damage model with time-varying stresses.
Syntax: ACCELERATIONFACTOR(Data_Src, [Time], [Confidence Level], [US_1], [AS_1])
Data_Src is the source data sheet for which the acceleration factor is calculated.
Time determines the operation duration under the time-dependent stress profile. For example, if the selected stress
profile uses 100 degrees from 0 to 100 hours and 200 degrees from 100 to 200 hours, then if you enter 150 for the
time, you will get the acceleration factor for the operation duration of 150 hours. (This field is required only when
the source data sheet uses the Cumulative Damage model with time-varying stresses.)
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
US_1 is the use stress level for each stress type. The number of use stress inputs is determined by the number of
stress types in the specified data sheet.
AS_1 is the acceleration stress level for each stress type. The number of stress inputs is determined by the number
of stress types in the specified data sheet.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Function Wizard Functions A
636 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Time is a required value if the data sheet uses the cumulative damage life-stress model and any use stress (US_1)
and/or acceleration stress (AS_1) value is set to a time-varying stress. In all other cases, this input is not used.
Confidence Level is an optional value and, if specified, must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
US_1 is an optional value. The default value is the value specified in the Use Stress Level window, but you can
change the value to any desired number. If the data sheet uses the Cumulative Damage model, you can also use a
stress profile for this value.
AS_1 is an optional value. The default value is US_1*1.1 (110% of US_1). If the data sheet uses the Cumulative
Damage model, you can also use a stress profile for this value.
Example:
ACCELERATIONFACTOR(Folio1!Data 1,,0.9,300,330) = 0.4129
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
ACT_ENERGY
Description: Returns the value of activation energy. Available only for the Generalized Eyring,
Arrhenius, Eyring, Temperature-Humidity, Temperature-Nonthermal and Cumulative Damage models.
Syntax: ACT_ENERGY(Data_Src)
Data_Src is the source data sheet for which the activation energy is calculated.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Example:
ACT_ENERGY(Folio1!Data 1) = 0.0252
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
AMEAN_S
Description: Returns the value of MTTF (Mean Time to Failure).
Syntax: AMEAN_S(Data_Src, [Confidence Level], [SL_1])
Data_Src is the source data sheet for which the MTTF is calculated.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
Note: If you are using the Function Wizard to enter this function, the Time field will be visible only if a) the data source is
an ALTA standard folio with a time-dependent stress profile used to assign at least one stress level and b) you have
selected a stress profile for at least one of the fields in the Stress Levels area.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 637
SL_1 is the stress level, for each stress type, at which the MTTF is calculated. The number of stress level inputs is
determined by the number of stress types in the specified data sheet.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Confidence Level is an optional value and, if specified, must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
SL_1 is an optional value. The default value is the use stress specified in the Use Stress Level window, but you
can change the value to any desired number. If the data sheet uses the Cumulative Damage model, you can also
use a stress profile for this value.
Example:
AMEAN_S(Folio1!Data 1,0.9,300) = 28.7635
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
ASTDEV_S
Description: Returns the standard deviation of the fitted model, which provides a measure of the
spread of the failure times. The standard deviation is the square root of the variance.
Syntax: ASTDEV_S(Data_Src, [SL_1])
Data_Src is the source data sheet for which the standard deviation is calculated.
SL_1 is the stress level, for each stress type, at which the standard deviation is calculated. The number of stress
level inputs is determined by the number of stress types in the specified data sheet.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
SL_1 is an optional value. The default value is the use stress specified in the Use Stress Level window, but you
can change the value to any desired number. If the data sheet uses the Cumulative Damage model, you can also
use a stress profile for this value.
The variance of the life provides a measure of the spread of the failure times and is given by:
The larger the variance, the wider the spread of the failure times.
Function Wizard Functions A
638 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The standard deviation is the square root of the variance:
Example:
ASTDEV_S(Folio1!Data 1,300) = 6.1077
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
CONDPROBFAIL_S
Description: Returns the conditional probability of failure given the specified start and
additional times.
Syntax: CONDPROBFAIL_S(Data_Src, Start Time, Add Time, [Confidence Level], [SL_1])
Data_Src is the source data sheet for which the conditional probability of failure is calculated.
Start Time and Add Time are the mission start time and the mission duration, respectively, of the period for which
the conditional probability of failure is calculated.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
SL_1 is the stress level, for each stress type, at which the conditional probability of failure is calculated. The
number of stress level inputs is determined by the number of stress types in the specified data sheet.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
The Start Time and Add Time values must be greater than 0.
Confidence Level is an optional value and, if specified, must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
SL_1 is an optional value. The default value is the use stress specified in the Use Stress Level window, but you
can change the value to any desired number. If the data sheet uses the Cumulative Damage model, you can also
use a stress profile for this value.
Example:
CONDPROBFAIL_S(Folio1!Data 1,1000,1100,0.9,356) = 0.0163
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
CONDRELIABILITY_S
Description: Returns the conditional reliability given the specified start and additional times.
Syntax: CONDRELIABILITY_S(Data_Src, Start Time, Add Time, [Confidence Level], [SL_1])
Data_Src is the source data sheet for which the conditional reliability is calculated.
Start Time and Add Time are the mission start time and the mission duration, respectively, of the period for which
the conditional reliability is calculated. Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-
sided confidence bounds.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 639
SL_1 is the stress level, for each stress type, at which the conditional reliability is calculated. The number of stress
level inputs is determined by the number of stress types in the specified data sheet.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
The Start Time and Add Time values must be greater than 0.
Confidence Level is an optional value and, if specified, must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
SL_1 is an optional value. The default value is the use stress specified in the Use Stress Level window, but you
can change the value to any desired number. If the data sheet uses the Cumulative Damage model, you can also
use a stress profile for this value.
Example:
CONDRELIABILITY_S(Folio1!Data 1,2000,2500,0.9,356) = 0.9998
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
FAILURERATE_S
Description: Returns the value of the failure rate at the specified time.
Syntax: FAILURERATE_S(Data_Src, Time, [Confidence Level], [SL_1])
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the failure rate is calculated.
Time is the time at which the failure rate is calculated.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
SL_1 is the stress level, for each stress type, at which the failure rate is calculated. The number of stress level
inputs is determined by the number of stress types in the specified data sheet.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
The Time value must be greater than 0.
Confidence Level is an optional value and, if specified, must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
SL_1 is an optional value. The default value is the use stress specified in the Use Stress Level window, but you
can change the value to any desired number. If the data sheet uses the Cumulative Damage model, you can also
use a stress profile for this value.
Example:
FAILURERATE_S(Folio1!Data 1,20000,0.9,356) = 0.0102
Function Wizard Functions A
640 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
MODEL
Description: Returns the name of the distribution that was fitted to the data.
Syntax: MODEL(Data_Src)
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the model is selected.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Example:
MODEL(Folio1!Data 1) = Arrhenius
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
PARAMETER_S
Description: Returns a specified parameter value.
Syntax: PARAMETER_S(Data_Src, Param_index, [Confidence Level])
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the distribution is selected.
Param_index is the index specifying the parameter to be returned. The parameter index corresponds to the order
that the parameters appear in the calculated results in the folio, as shown in the next table. Note the following in
this table:
The Shape parameter varies based on distribution
Weibull = Beta
Lognormal = Std
Exponential = None, so every other parameter is shifted down one index
The number of Alpha parameters beyond Alpha(0) depends on the number of stress types (e.g., for 2 stress
types, Alpha(0)-Alpha(2) will be present).
Model
Index
1
Index
2
Index
3
Index
4
Index
5
Index
6
Index
7
Index
8
Index
9
Index
10
Arrhenius Shape B C
Eyring Shape A B
Inverse Power
Law
Shape K N
Temperature-
Humidity
Shape A B Phi
Temperature-
NonThermal
Shape B C n
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 641
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Confidence Level is an optional value and, if specified, must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Example:
PARAMETER_S(Folio1!Data 1,1,0.9) = 5.1332
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
PDF_S
Description: Returns the pdf value at the specified time.
Syntax: PDF_S(Data_Src, Time, [SL_1])
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the pdf value is calculated.
Time is the time at which the pdf value is calculated.
SL_1 is the stress level, for each stress type, at which the pdf value is calculated. The number of stress level inputs
is determined by the number of stress types in the specified data sheet.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
The Time value must be greater than 0.
SL_1 is an optional value. The default value is the use stress specified in the Use
Generalized
Eyring
Shape A B C D
Proportional
Hazards
Shape Alpha
(0)
Alpha
(1)
Alpha
(2)
Alpha
(3)
Alpha
(4)
Alpha
(5)
Alpha
(6)
Alpha
(7)
Alpha
(8)
General
LogLinear
Shape Alpha
(0)
Alpha
(1)
Alpha
(2)
Alpha
(3)
Alpha
(4)
Alpha
(5)
Alpha
(6)
Alpha
(7)
Alpha
(8)
Cumulative
Damage
Shape Alpha
(0)
Alpha
(1)
Alpha
(2)
Alpha
(3)
Alpha
(4)
Alpha
(5)
Alpha
(6)
Alpha
(7)
Alpha
(8)
Model
Index
1
Index
2
Index
3
Index
4
Index
5
Index
6
Index
7
Index
8
Index
9
Index
10
Function Wizard Functions A
642 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Stress Level window, but you can change the value to any desired number. If the data sheet uses the Cumulative
Damage model, you can also use a stress profile for this value.
Example:
PDF_S(Folio1!Data 1,1000,356) = 1.4512E-7
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
PROBFAIL_S
Description: Returns the probability of failure for the specified time and stress level. If you do
not enter the stress, the software assumes the use stress level conditions specified in the data sheet.
Syntax: PROBFAIL_S(Data_Src, End Time, [Confidence Level], [SL_1])
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the probability of failure is calculated.
End Time is the time at which the probability of failure is calculated.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
SL_1 is the stress level, for each stress type, at which the probability of failure is calculated. The number of stress
level inputs is determined by the number of stress types in the specified data sheet.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
The End Time value must be greater than 0.
Confidence Level is an optional value and, if specified, must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
SL_1 is an optional value. The default value is the use stress specified in the Use Stress Level window, but you
can change the value to any desired number. If the data sheet uses the Cumulative Damage model, you can also
use a stress profile for this value.
Example:
PROBFAIL_S(Folio1!Data 1,5000,0.9,356) = 0.1231
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
RELIABILITY_S
Description: Returns the reliability at the specified time. If you do not enter the stress, the
software assumes the use stress level conditions specified in the data sheet.
Syntax: RELIABILITY_S(Data_Src, End Time, [Confidence Level], [SL_1])
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the reliability is calculated.
End Time is the time at which the reliability is calculated.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
SL_1 is the stress level, for each stress type, at which the reliability is calculated. The number of stress level
inputs is determined by the number of stress types in the specified data sheet.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 643
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
The End Time value must be greater than 0.
Confidence Level is an optional value and, if specified, must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
SL_1 is an optional value. The default value is the use stress specified in the Use Stress Level window, but you
can change the value to any desired number. If the data sheet uses the Cumulative Damage model, you can also
use a stress profile for this value.
Example:
RELIABILITY_S(Folio1!Data 1,5000,0.9,356) = 0.9913
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
SCALEPARAMETER
Description: Returns the value of the scale parameter of the fitted model. Only available for
stress-dependent models. Time required only for Cumulative Damage model with time-varying stresses.
Syntax: SCALEPARAMETER(Data_Src, [Time], [Confidence Level], [SL_1])
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the distribution is selected.
Time determines the operation duration under the time-dependent stress profile. For example, if the selected stress
profile uses 100 degrees from 0 to 100 hours and 200 degrees from 100 to 200 hours, then if you enter 150 for the
time, you will get the scale factor for the operation duration of 150 hours. (This field is required only when the
source data sheet uses the Cumulative Damage model with time-varying stresses.)
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
SL_1 is the stress level, for each stress type, at which the scale parameter is calculated. The number of stress level
inputs is determined by the number of stress types in the specified data sheet.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
Function Wizard Functions A
644 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Time is a required value if the data sheet uses the cumulative damage life-stress model and any stress level (SL_1)
value is set to a time-varying stress. In all other cases, this input is not used.
Confidence Level is an optional value and, if specified, must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
SL_1 is an optional value. The default value is the use stress specified in the Use Stress Level window, but you
can change the value to any desired number. If the data sheet uses the Cumulative Damage model, you can also
use a stress profile for this value.
The returned parameter varies based on the distribution:
Weibull: Eta
Lognormal: Mean
Exponential: Lambda
Example:
SCALEPARAMETER(Folio1!Data 1,,0.9,356) = 1.4470E+4
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
TIMEATPF_S
Description: Returns the time corresponding to the specified probability of failure.
Syntax: TIMEATPF_S(Data_Src, Unreliability, [Confidence Level], [SL_1])
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the time is calculated.
Unreliability is the probability of failure or unreliability.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
SL_1 is the stress level, for each stress type, at which the time is calculated. The number of stress level inputs is
determined by the number of stress types in the specified data sheet.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
The Unreliability value must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Confidence Level is an optional value and, if specified, must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Note: If you are using the Function Wizard to enter this function, the Time field will be visible only if a) the data source is
an ALTA standard folio with a time-dependent stress profile used to assign at least one stress level and b) you have
selected a stress profile for at least one of the fields in the Stress Levels area.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 645
SL_1 is an optional value. The default value is the use stress specified in the Use Stress Level window, but you
can change the value to any desired number. If the data sheet uses the Cumulative Damage model, you can also
use a stress profile for this value.
Example:
TIMEATPF_S(Folio1!Data 1,0.1,0.9,356) = 8754.85
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
TIMEATR_S
Description: Returns the time corresponding to the specified reliability.
Syntax: TIMEATR_S(Data_Src, Reliability, [Confidence Level], [SL_1])
Data_Src is the source data sheet from which the time is calculated.
Reliability is the reliability for which the time will be calculated.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
SL_1 is the stress level, for each stress type, at which the time is calculated. The number of stress level inputs is
determined by the number of stress types in the specified data sheet.
Remarks:
The Data_Src can be one of the following values:
If using a default data source, it must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4, as selected from the Data Source Index drop-down
list.
It can take a data sheet name (e.g., Folio1!Data 1).
It can take a variable name defined in via the Defined Names window (e.g., datasource).
The Reliability value must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Confidence Level is an optional value and, if specified, must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
SL_1 is an optional value. The default value is the use stress specified in the Use Stress Level window, but you
can change the value to any desired number. If the data sheet uses the Cumulative Damage model, you can also
use a stress profile for this value.
Example:
TIMEATR_S(Folio1!Data 1,0.85,0.9,356) = 9623.07
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
A.2.2 Spreadsheet Mathematical Functions
This section presents the mathematical functions that are available for spreadsheets within the Function Wizard in
Weibull++ and ALTA.
ABS
Description: Returns the absolute value of a number. The absolute value of a number is the number without its sign.
Syntax: ABS(Number)
Example:
ABS(-2) = 2
Function Wizard Functions A
646 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
ACOS
Description: Returns the arccosine, or inverse cosine, of a number. The arccosine is the angle whose cosine is
Number. The returned angle is given in radians in the range 0 (zero) to pi.
Syntax: ACOS(Number)
Number is the cosine of the angle you want and must be from -1 to 1.
Remarks:
If you want to convert the result from radians to degrees, multiply it by 180/PI or use the DEGREES function.
Example:
ACOS(-0.5) = 2.094395 [the arccosine of -0.5 in radians]
ACOS(-0.5)*180/PI() = 120 [the arccosine of -0.5 in degrees]
DEGREES(ACOS(-0.5)) = 120 [the arccosine of -0.5 in degrees]
ACOSH
Description: Returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number. Number must be greater than or equal to 1. The
inverse hyperbolic cosine is the value whose hyperbolic cosine is Number, so ACOSH(COSH(Number)) equals
Number.
Syntax: ACOSH(Number)
Number is any real number equal to or greater than 1.
Example:
ACOSH(1) = 0 [the inverse hyperbolic cosine of 1]
ACOSH(10) = 2.993223 [the inverse hyperbolic cosine of 10]
AND
Description: Returns TRUE if all its arguments are TRUE; returns FALSE if one or more arguments is FALSE.
Syntax: AND(Logical1, Logical2, ...)
Logical1, Logical2, ... are 1 to 30 conditions you want to test that must evaluate to either TRUE or FALSE.
Remarks:
The arguments must evaluate to either be the logical values TRUE or FALSE, or the arguments must be arrays or
references that contain logical values.
If an array or reference argument contains text or empty cells, those values are ignored.
The specified range must contain logical values.
Example:
AND(TRUE, TRUE) = TRUE [all arguments are TRUE]
AND(TRUE, FALSE) = FALSE [one argument is FALSE]
AND(2 + 2 = 4, 2 + 3 = 5) = TRUE [all arguments evaluate to TRUE]
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 647
ASIN
Description: Returns the arcsine, or inverse sine, of a number. The arcsine is the angle whose sine is number. The
returned angle is given in radians in the range -pi/2 to pi/2.
Syntax: ASIN(Number)
Number is the sine of the angle you want and must be from -1 to 1.
Remarks:
To express the arcsine in degrees, multiply the result by 180/PI or use the DEGREES function.
Example:
ASIN(-0.5) = -0.5236 [the arcsine of -0.5 in radians, -pi/6]
ASIN(-0.5)*180/PI() = -30 [the arcsine of -0.5 in degrees]
DEGREES(ASIN(-0.5)) = -30 [the arcsine of -0.5 in degrees]
ASINH
Description: Returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of a number. The inverse hyperbolic sine is the value whose
hyperbolic sine is Number, so ASINH(SINH(Number)) equals Number.
Syntax: ASINH(Number)
Number is any real number.
Example:
ASINH(-2.5) = -1.64723 [the inverse hyperbolic sine of -2.5]
ASINH(10) = 2.998223 [the inverse hyperbolic sine of 10]
ATAN
Description: Returns the arctangent, or inverse tangent, of a number. The arctangent is the angle whose tangent is
Number. The returned angle is given in radians in the range -pi/2 to pi/2.
Syntax: ATAN(Number)
Number is the tangent of the angle you want.
Example:
ATAN(1) = 0.785398 [the arctangent of 1 in radians, pi/4]
ATAN(1)*180/PI() = 45 [the arctangent of 1 in degrees]
ATAN2
Description: Returns the arctangent, or inverse tangent, of the specified x- and y-coordinates. The arctangent is the
angle from the x-axis to a line containing the origin (0, 0) and a point with coordinates (x_Number, y_Number). The
angle is given in radians between -pi and pi, excluding -pi.
Syntax: ATAN2(x_Number, y_Number)
x_Number is the x-coordinate of the point.
y_Number is the y-coordinate of the point.
Function Wizard Functions A
648 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Remarks:
A positive result represents a counterclockwise angle from the x-axis; a negative result represents a clockwise
angle.
ATAN2(a,b) equals ATAN(b/a), except that a can equal 0 in ATAN2.
Both x_Number and y_Number cannot be 0.
To express the arctangent in degrees, multiply the result by 180/PI or use the DEGREES function.
Example:
ATAN2(1, 1) = 0.785398 [the arctangent of the point (1,1) in radians, pi/4]
ATANH
Description: Returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number. Number must be between -1 and 1 (excluding -1
and 1). The inverse hyperbolic tangent is the value whose hyperbolic tangent is Number, so
ATANH(TANH(Number)) equals Number.
Syntax: ATANH(Number)
Number is any real number between 1 and -1.
Example:
ATANH(-0.1) = -0.10034 [the inverse hyperbolic tangent of -0.1]
AVERAGE
Description: Returns the average (arithmetic mean) of the arguments.
Syntax: AVERAGE(Number1, Number2,...)
Number1, Number2, ... are 1 to 30 numeric arguments for which you want the average.
Remarks:
The arguments must either be numbers or be names, arrays, or cell references that contain numbers.
If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however,
cells with the value zero are included.
Example:
AVERAGE(10, 7, 9, 27, 2) = 11
AVERAGE(A1:A6) returns an average of the values in the cells A1 through A6.
BESSELI
Description: Returns the modified Bessel function ln(x), which is equivalent to the Bessel function evaluated for
purely imaginary arguments.
Syntax: BESSELI(Number, Order)
Number is the value at which to evaluate the function.
Order is the order of the Bessel function.
Remarks:
Number must be numeric.
Order must be numeric.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 649
Order must be >= 0 and an integer.
The n-th order modified Bessel function of the variable x is:
Example:
Compute the modified Bessel function at x = 1.5 with an order of n = 1.
BESSELI(1.5, 1) = 0.981666
BESSELJ
Description: Returns the Bessel function Jn(x).
Syntax: BESSELJ(Number, Order)
Number is the value at which to evaluate the function.
Order is the order of the Bessel function.
Remarks:
Number must be numeric.
Order must be numeric.
Order must be >= 0 and an integer.
The n-th order modified Bessel function of the variable x is:
where:
Example:
Compute the Bessel function at x = 1.9 with an order of n = 2.
BESSELJ(1.9, 2) = 0.329926.
BESSELK
Description: Returns the modified Bessel function Kn(x), which is equivalent to the Bessel function evaluated for
purely imaginary arguments.
Syntax: BESSELK(Number, Order)
Number is the value at which to evaluate the function.
Function Wizard Functions A
650 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Order is the order of the function.
Remarks:
Number must be numeric.
Order must be numeric.
Order must be >= 0 and an integer.
The n-th order modified Bessel function of the variable x is:
where Jn and Yn are the J and Y Bessel functions, respectively.
Example:
Compute the Modified Bessel function at x = 1.5 with an order of n = 1.
BESSELK(1.5, 1) = (0.277388)
BESSELY
Description: Returns the Bessel function Yn(x), which is also called the Weber function or the Neumann function.
Syntax: BESSELY(Number, Order)
Number is the value at which to evaluate the function.
Order is the order of the function.
Remarks:
Number must be numeric.
Order must be numeric.
Order must be >= 0 and an integer.
The n-th order modified Bessel function of the variable x is:
where
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 651
Example:
Compute the Bessel function at x = 2.5 and an order of n = 1.
BESSELY(2.5, 1) = 0.145918
BETADIST
Description: Returns the cumulative beta probability distribution function.
Syntax: BETADIST(Number, Alpha, Beta)
Number is the value at which to evaluate the function.
Alpha is a parameter of the distribution.
Beta is a parameter of the distribution.
Remarks:
All arguments must be numeric.
Alpha and Beta must be > 0.
Example:
BETADIST(0.3, 8, 10) = 0.1046400948
BETAINV
Description: Returns the inverse of the cumulative beta probability distribution function for a specified beta
distribution. That is, if probability = BETADIST(x,...), then BETAINV(probability,...) = x.
Syntax: BETAINV(Probability, Alpha, Beta)
Probability is a probability associated with the beta distribution.
Alpha is a parameter of the distribution.
Beta is a parameter the distribution.
Remarks:
All arguments must be numeric.
Alpha and Beta must be > 0.
Probability must be > 0 and < 1.
BETAINV uses an iterative search technique. If the search has not converged after 100 iterations, the function
returns an error.
Example:
BETAINV(0.685470581, 5, 10) = 0.3867687477
BINOMDIST
Description: Returns the individual term binomial distribution probability. Use BINOMDIST in problems with a
fixed number of tests or trials, when the outcomes of any trial are only success or failure, when trials are independent,
and when the probability of success is constant throughout the experiment. For example, BINOMDIST can calculate
the probability that two of the next three babies born are male.
Syntax: BINOMDIST(Number_S, Trials, Probability_S, Cumulative)
Number_S is the number of successes in trials.
Function Wizard Functions A
652 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Trials is the number of independent trials.
Probability_S is the probability of success on each trial.
Cumulative is a logical value (True = 1; False = 0) that determines the form of the function. If Cumulative is
TRUE, then BINOMDIST returns the cumulative distribution function, which is the probability that there are at
most Number_S successes; if FALSE, it returns the probability mass function, which is the probability that there
are Number_S successes.
Remarks:
Number_S and Trials must be an integer.
Number_S, Trials and Probability_S must be numeric.
Number_S must be >= 0 and <= Trials.
Probability must be > 0 and < 1.
Example:
BINOMDIST(6, 10, 0.5, FALSE) = 0.205078
CEILING
Description: Rounds a number to the nearest integer or to the nearest multiple of significance.. For example, if you
want to avoid using pennies in your prices and your product is priced at $4.42, use the formula =CEILING(4.42,0.05)
to round prices up to the nearest nickel.
Syntax: CEILING(Number, Significance)
Number is the value you want to round.
Significance is the multiple to which you want to round.
Remarks:
Both arguments must be numeric.
Regardless of the sign of Number, a value is rounded up when adjusted away from zero. If Number is an exact
multiple of Significance, no rounding occurs.
Number and Significance must have the same signs.
Example:
CEILING(2.5, 1) = 3 [rounds 2.5 up to nearest multiple of 1]
CEILING(-2.5, -2) = -4 [rounds -2.5 up to nearest multiple of -2]
CEILING(-2.5, 2) returns an error, because -2.5 and 2 have different signs!
CHAR
Description: Returns the character specified by the code number from the character set of your computer. Use CHAR
to translate code page numbers you might get from files on other types of computers into characters.
Syntax: CHAR(Number)
Number is a number between 1 and 255 specifying which character you want. The character is from the character
set used by your computer.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 653
Example:
CHAR(65) = A [the 65th character in the set]
CHAR(33) = ! [the 33rd character in the set]
CHIDIST
Description: Returns the one-tailed probability of the chi-squared distribution.
Syntax: CHIDIST(Number, Degr_Freedom)
Number is the value at which you want to evaluate the distribution.
Degr_Freedom is the number of degrees of freedom.
Remarks:
Both arguments must be numeric.
Number cannot be negative.
Degr_Freedom must be an integer.
Degr_Freedom must be >= 1 and <= 10^10.
Example:
CHIDIST(18.307, 10) = 0.050001
CHIINV
Description: Returns the inverse of the one-tailed probability of the chi-squared distribution. If Probability =
CHIDIST(x,...), then CHIINV(Probability,...) = x.
Syntax: CHIINV(Probability, Degr_Freedom)
Probability is a probability associated with the chi-squared distribution.
Degr_Freedom is the number of degrees of freedom.
Remarks:
Both arguments must be numeric.
Probability must be > 0 and < 1.
Degr_Freedom must be an integer.
Degr_Freedom must be >= 1 and <= 10^10.
Example:
CHIINV(0.050001,10) = 18.3069735
CHOOSE
Description: Chooses a value or action to perform from a list of values, based on an index number. For example, if
Value1 through Value7 are the days of the week, CHOOSE returns one of the days when a number between 1 and 7
is used as Index_num.
Function Wizard Functions A
654 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Syntax: CHOOSE(Index_num, Value1, Value2, ...)
Index_num specifies which value argument is selected. Index_num must be a number between 1 and 29, or a
formula or reference to a cell containing a number between 1 and 29.
If Index_num is 1, CHOOSE returns Value1; if it is 2, CHOOSE returns Value2; and so on.
If Index_num is a fraction, it is truncated to the lowest integer before being used.
Value1, Value2,... are 1 to 29 value arguments from which CHOOSE selects a value or an action to perform based
on Index_num. The arguments can be numbers, cell references, defined names, formulas, functions, or text.
Remarks:
If Index_num is an array, every value is evaluated when CHOOSE is evaluated.
The value arguments to CHOOSE can be range references as well as single values. For example, the formula:
SUM(CHOOSE(2,A1:A10,B1:B10,C1:C10))
evaluates to:
SUM(B1:B10)
which then returns a value based on the values in the range B1:B10.
The CHOOSE function is evaluated first, returning the reference B1:B10. The SUM function is then evaluated
using B1:B10, the result of the CHOOSE function, as its argument.
Example:
CHOOSE(2, 1st, 2nd, 3rd, Finished) = 2nd
SUM(A1:CHOOSE(3, A10, A20, A30)) = SUM(A1:A30)
If A10 contains 4, then:
CHOOSE(A10, Nails, Screws, Nuts, Bolts) = Bolts
If SalesOld is a name defined to refer to the value 10,000, then:
CHOOSE(2, SalesNew, SalesOld, SalesBudget) = 10,000
CLEAN
Description: Removes all nonprintable characters from text. Use CLEAN on text imported from other applications
that contains characters that may not print with your operating system. For example, you can use CLEAN to remove
some low-level computer code that is frequently at the beginning and end of data files and cannot be printed.
Syntax: CLEAN(Text)
Text is any worksheet information from which you want to remove nonprintable characters.
Example:
Because CHAR(7) returns a nonprintable character:
CLEAN(CHAR(7)&text&CHAR(7)) = text
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 655
CODE
Description: Returns a numeric code for the first character in a text string. The returned code corresponds to the
ANSI character set.
Syntax: CODE(Text)
Text is the text for which you want the code of the first character.
Example:
CODE(A) = 65
CODE(!) = 33
COLUMN
Description: Based on a given reference, returns the column number.
Syntax: COLUMN(Reference)
Reference is the cell or range of cells for which you want the column number.
If Reference is a range of cells, and if COLUMN is entered as a horizontal array, COLUMN returns the
column numbers of Reference as a horizontal array.
Reference cannot refer to multiple areas.
Example:
COLUMN() = 1 [the column in which the formula appears]
COLUMN(A10) = 1 [the column of the reference]
COLUMNS
Description: Based on an array or reference, returns the number of columns.
Syntax: COLUMNS(Array)
Array is an array or array formula, or a reference to a range of cells for which you want the number of columns.
Example:
COLUMNS(C1:E4) = 3 [the number of columns in the reference]
COLUMNS({1, 2, 3; 4, 5, 6}) = 3 [the number of columns in the array constant]
COMBIN
Description: Returns the number of combinations for a given number of objects. Use COMBIN to determine the total
possible number of groups for a given number of items.
Syntax: COMBIN(Number, Number_chosen)
Number is the number is the number of items.
Number_chosen is the number of items in each combination.
Remarks:
Both arguments must be numeric integers >= 0 and Number >= Number_chosen.
A combination is any set or subset of items, regardless of their internal order. Combinations are distinct from
permutations, for which the internal order is significant.
Function Wizard Functions A
656 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The number of combinations is calculated as follows:
where:
Example:
Determine the possible two-person teams that can be formed from 8 candidates.
COMBIN(8,2) = 28
CONCATENATE
Description: Joins several text strings into one text string.
Syntax: CONCATENATE (Text1, Text2, ...)
Text1, Text2, ... are 1 to 30 text items to be joined into a single text item. The text items can be text strings,
numbers, or single-cell references.
Remarks:
The & operator can be used instead of CONCATENATE to join text items.
Example:
CONCATENATE(Total, , Value) = Total Value. This is equivalent to typing Total& &Value.
CONFIDENCE
Description: Returns the confidence bound for a population mean. The confidence interval is a range of values. Your
sample mean, , is at the center of this range and the range is CONFIDENCE. For example, if is the sample
mean of delivery times for products ordered through the mail, CONFIDENCE is a range of population means.
For any population mean, 0, in this range, the probability of obtaining a sample mean further from 0 than is
greater than alpha; for any population mean, 0, not in this range, the probability of obtaining a sample mean further
from 0 than is less than alpha. In other words, assume that we use , Standard_dev, and size to construct a two-
tailed test at significance level alpha of the hypothesis that the population mean is 0. Then we will not reject that
hypothesis if 0 is in the confidence interval and will reject that hypothesis if 0 is not in the confidence interval. The
confidence interval does not allow us to infer that there is probability 1 - alpha that our next package will take a
delivery time that is in the confidence interval.
Syntax: CONFIDENCE(Alpha, Standard_dev, Size)
Alpha is the significance level used to compute the confidence level. The confidence level equals 100*(1 -
Alpha)%, or in other words, an Alpha of 0.05 indicates a 95 percent confidence level.
Standard_dev is the population standard deviation for the data range and is assumed to be known.
x x x
x
x
x x
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 657
Size is the sample size.
Remarks:
All arguments must be numeric.
Alpha must be > 0 and < 1.
Standard_dev must be > 0.
Size must be an integer.
Size must be >= 1.
If we assume Alpha equals 0.05, we need to calculate the area under the standard normal curve that equals (1 -
Alpha), or 95 percent. This value is 1.96. The confidence interval is therefore:
Example:
CONFIDENCE(.05, 2.5, 50) = 0.692952
COS
Description: Returns the cosine of a number.
Syntax: COS(Number)
Number is the angle in radians for which you want the cosine.
Remarks:
If the angle is in degrees, multiply it by PI/180.
Example:
COS(1.047) = 0.500171 [the cosine of 1.047 radians]
COSH
Description: Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a number.
Syntax: COSH(Number)
Number is any real number for which you want to find the hyperbolic cosine.
Remarks:
The formula for the hyperbolic cosine is:
Function Wizard Functions A
658 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Example:
COSH(4) = 27.30823 [the hyperbolic cosine of 4]
COUNT
Description: Counts the number of cells that contain numbers within the list of arguments. Use COUNT to get the
number of entries in a number field in a range or array of numbers.
Syntax: COUNT(Value1, Value2, ...)
Value1, Value2, ... are 1 to 30 arguments that can contain or refer to a variety of different types of data, but only
numbers are counted.
Remarks:
Arguments that are numbers, dates or text representation of numbers are counted.
Logical values and text representations of numbers that you type directly into the list of arguments are counted.
Arguments that are error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers are ignored.
If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in that array or reference are counted. Empty cells, logical
values, text or error values in the array or reference are ignored.
If you want to count logical values, text or error values, use the COUNTA function.
Example:
In the following example,
COUNT(A1:A7) = 3 [the number of cells that contain numbers in the list above]
COUNT(A4:A7) = 2 [the number of cells that contain numbers in the last 4 rows of the list]
COUNT(A1:A7, 2) = 4 [the number of cells that contain numbers in the list, and the value 2]
COUNTA
Description: Counts the number of cells that are not empty within the list of arguments. Use COUNTA to count the
number of cells that contain data in a range or array.
Syntax: COUNTA(Value1, Value2, ...)
Value1, Value2, ... are 1 to 30 arguments representing the values you want to count.
A
1 Data
2 Sales
3 12/8/2010
4
5 19
6 22.24
7 TRUE
8 #DIV/0!
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 659
Remarks:
A value is any type of information, including error values and empty text (). A value does not include empty
cells.
If an argument is an array or reference, only values in that array or reference are used. Empty cells and text values
in the array or reference are ignored.
If you do not need to count logical values, text, or error values, use the COUNT function.
Example:
In the following example
COUNTA(A1:A7) = 6 [the number of nonblank cells in the list above]
COUNTA(A5:A8) = 4 [the number of nonblank cells in the last 4 rows of the list]
COUNTA(A1:A7, 2) = 7 [the number of nonblank cells in the list above and the value 2]
COUNTA(A1:A7, Two) = 7 [the number of nonblank cells in the list above and the value Two]
COUNTIF
Description: Counts the number of cells within a specified range that meet the criteria you specify.
Syntax: COUNTIF(Range, Criteria)
Range is the range of cells from which you want to count cells.
Criteria is the criteria in the form of a number, expression, cell reference, or text that defines which cells will be
counted. For example, Criteria can be expressed as 32, 32, >32, apples, or B4.
Remarks:
The software provides additional functions that can be used to analyze your data based on a condition. For
example, to calculate a sum based on a string of text or a number within a range, use the SUMIF function. To have
a formula return one of two values based on a condition, such as a sales bonus based on a specified sales amount,
use the IF function.
Example:
Suppose A2:A5 contain apples, oranges, peaches, apples, respectively:
COUNTIF(A2:A5, apples) = 2 [number of cells with apples]
A
1 Data
2 Sales
3 12/8/2010
4
5 19
6 22.24
7 TRUE
8 #DIV/0!
Function Wizard Functions A
660 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Suppose B2:B5 contain 32, 54, 75, 86, respectively:
COUNTIF(B2:B5, >55) = 2 [number of cells with a value greater than 55]
CRITBINOM
Description: Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is greater than or equal to a
criterion value.
Syntax: CRITBINOM(Trials, Probability_S, Alpha)
Trials is the number of Bernoulli trials.
Probability_S is the probability of a success on each trial.
Alpha is the criterion value.
Remarks:
All arguments must be numeric.
Trials must be an integer.
Trials must be >= 0.
Probability_S must be >= 0 and <= 1.
Alpha must be > 0 and < 1.
Example:
CRITBINOM(6,0.5,.75) = 4 [the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is greater than or
equal to a criterion value]
CUMIPMT
Description: Returns the cumulative interest paid between two periods.
Syntax: CUMIPMT(Rate, Nper, PV, Start_Period, End_Period, Type)
Rate is the interest rate.
Nper is the total number of payment periods.
PV is the present value.
Start_Period is the first period in the calculation. Payment periods are numbered beginning with 1.
End_Period is the last period in the calculation.
Type is the timing of the payment.
Remarks:
Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying Rate and Nper. If you make monthly
payments (12 per year) on a four-year loan at an annual interest rate of 10 percent, use (0.1/12) for Rate and
(4*12) for Nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 0.1 for Rate and 4 for Nper.
Nper, Start_Period, End_Period, must be integers.
Type Timing
0 (zero) Payment at the end of the period
1 Payment at the beginning of the period
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 661
Rate, Nper and PV must be >= 0.
Start_Period and End_Period must be >= 1 and Start_Period <= End_Period.
Type must be either 0 or 1.
Example:
Total interest paid in the second year of payments, periods 13 through 24 assuming a 9% annual interest rate:
CUMIPMT(0.09/12, 30*12, 125000, 13, 24, 0) = -11135.23
CUMPRINC
Description: Returns the cumulative principal paid on a loan between two periods.
Syntax: CUMPRINC(Rate, Nper, PV, Start_Period, End_Period, Type)
Rate is the interest rate in decimals.
Nper is the total number of payment periods.
PV is the present value.
Start_Period is the first period in the calculation. Payment periods are numbered beginning with 1.
End_Period is the last period in the calculation.
Type is the timing of the payment.
Remarks:
Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying Rate and Nper. If you make monthly
payments on a four-year loan at an annual interest rate of 12 percent, use 0.12/12 for Rate and 4*12 for Nper. If
you make annual payments on the same loan, use 0.12 for Rate and 4 for Nper.
Nper, Start_Period and End_Period must be integers.
Rate, Nper and PV must be >= 0.
Start_Period and End_Period must be >= 1 and Start_Period <= End_Period.
Type must be either 0 or 1.
Example:
The total principal paid in the second year of payments, periods 13 through 24.
CUMPRINC(.09/12, 30*12, 125000, 13, 24, 0) = -934.1071
DATE
Description: Returns the serial number for a specified date, where the YEAR, MONTH and DAY are separated by
commas. For example, =DATE(2011,4,15) returns 40648, which is the serial number that is equivalent to April 15,
2011.
Type Timing
0 (zero) Payment at the end of the period
1 Payment at the beginning of the period
Function Wizard Functions A
662 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Syntax: DATE(Year, Month, Day)
Year can be one to four digits. The software interprets the Year argument according to the 1900 date system.
If Year is between 0 (zero) and 1899 (inclusive), the software adds that value to 1900 to calculate the year. For
example, DATE(108,1,2) returns the serial number representing January 2, 2008 (1900 + 108).
If Year is between 1900 and 9999 (inclusive), the software uses that value as the year. For example,
DATE(2011,1,2) the serial number representing January 2, 2011.
Year must be greater than 0 and less than 10000.
Month is a positive or negative integer representing the month of the year from 1 to 12 (January to December).
If Month is greater than 12, Month adds that number of months to the first month in the year specified. For
example, DATE(2011,14,2) returns the serial number representing February 2, 2012.
If Month is less than 1, Month subtracts that number of months plus 1 from the first month in the year
specified. For example, DATE(2011,-3,2) returns the serial number representing September 2, 2010.
Day is a positive or negative integer representing the day of the month from 1 to 31.
If Dy is greater than the number of days in the month specified, Day adds that number of days to the first day
in the month. For example, DATE(2011,1,35) returns the serial number representing February 4, 2011.
If Day is less than 1, Day subtracts that number of days plus one from the first day in the month. For example,
DATE(2011,1,-15) returns the serial number representing December 16, 2010.
Remarks:
The software stores dates as sequential serial numbers so they can be used in calculations. January 1, 1900 is
serial number 1, and January 1, 2011 is serial number 40544 because it is 40,544 days after January 1, 1900.
The DATE function is most useful in formulas where Year, Month, and Day are formulas, not constants.
Example:
DATE(2011, 1, 1) = 1/1/2011 or 40544 [the serial date using the 1900 date system]
DATEVALUE
Description: Converts the specified date to a serial number. For example, the function returns 40777 if you enter
8/22/2011 or 22-AUG-2011.
Syntax: DATEVALUE(Date_text)
Date_text is text that represents a date in a date format. For example, 1/30/2011 or 30-Jan-2011 are text
strings within quotation marks that represent dates. Date_text must represent a date from January 1, 1900, to
December 31, 9999. Note that the Date_text must be in quotation marks.
If the year portion of Date_text is omitted, DATEVALUE uses the current year from your computer's built-in
clock. Time information in Date_text is ignored.
Remarks:
The software stores dates as sequential serial numbers so they can be used in calculations. January 1, 1900 is
serial number 1, and January 1, 2011 is serial number 40544 because it is 40,544 days after January 1, 1900. For
more information, see the NOW function.
Most functions automatically convert date values to serial numbers.
Example:
DATEVALUE(8/22/2011) = 40777 [the serial number of the text date]
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 663
DATEVALUE(22-AUG-2011) = 40777 [the serial number of the text date]
DATEVALUE(2008/02/23) = 39501 [the serial number of the text date]
Assuming your computer's built-in clock is set to 2011:
DATEVALUE(5-JUL) = 40729 [the serial number of the text date]
DAY
Description: Returns the number of the day from a specified date. For example, =DAY(15-Apr-2011) returns 15.
Syntax: DAY(Serial_number)
Serial_number is the date of the day you are trying to find. Dates should be entered by using the DATE function,
or as results of other formulas or functions. For example, use DATE(2011,5,23) for the 23rd day of May, 2011.
Problems can occur if dates are entered as text. For more information, see the NOW function.
Remarks:
The software stores dates as sequential serial numbers so they can be used in calculations. January 1, 1900 is
serial number 1, and January 1, 2011 is serial number 40544 because it is 40,544 days after January 1, 1900. For
more information, see the NOW function.
Values returned by the YEAR, MONTH and DAY functions will be Gregorian values regardless of the display
format for the supplied date value. For example, if the display format of the supplied date is Hijri (Hijri calendar:
The lunar calendar that is used in Islamic regions.), the returned values for the YEAR, MONTH and DAY
functions will be values associated with the equivalent Gregorian date.
Example:
DAY(15-Apr-2011) = 15 [the day of the date]
DAYS360
Description: Returns the number of days between dates that you specify, based on a 360-day year (twelve 30-day
months), which is used in some accounting calculations. Use this function to help compute payments if your
accounting system is based on twelve 30-day months.
Syntax: DAYS360(Start_date, End_date, [Method])
Start_date and End_date are the two dates between which you want to know the number of days. If Start_date
occurs after End_date, DAYS360 returns a negative number. Dates should be entered by using the DATE
function, or as results of other formulas or functions. For example, use DATE(2011,5,23) for the 23rd day of May,
2011. Problems can occur if dates are entered as text. For more information, see the NOW function.
Method is a logical value that specifies whether to use the U.S. or European method in the calculation.
Method Defined
FALSE
or
omitted
U.S. (NASD) method. If the starting date is the 31st of a month, it becomes
equal to the 30th of the same month. If the ending date is the 31st of a month
and the starting date is earlier than the 30th of a month, the ending date
becomes equal to the 1st of the next month; otherwise the ending date becomes
equal to the 30th of the same month.
TRUE European method. Starting dates and ending dates that occur on the 31st of a
month become equal to the 30th of the same month.
Function Wizard Functions A
664 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Remarks:
The software stores dates as sequential serial numbers so they can be used in calculations. January 1, 1900 is
serial number 1, and January 1, 2011 is serial number 40544 because it is 40,544 days after January 1, 1900.
For more information, see the NOW function.
Example:
DAYS360(1/30/2011, 2/1/2011) = 1 [the number of days between the two dates, based on a 360-day year]
DB
Description: Returns the asset depreciation for a period using the fixed declining balance method.
Syntax: DB(Cost, Salvage, Life, Period, [Month])
Cost is the initial cost of the asset.
Salvage is the value at the end of the depreciation (sometimes called the salvage value of the asset).
Life is the number of periods over which the asset is being depreciated (sometimes called the useful life of the
asset).
Period is the period for which you want to calculate the depreciation. Period must use the same units as life.
Month is the number of months in the first year. If Month is omitted, it is assumed to be 12.
Remarks:
The fixed-declining balance method computes depreciation at a fixed rate. DB uses the following formulas to
calculate depreciation for a period:
(cost - total depreciation from prior periods) * rate
where:
rate = 1 - ((salvage / cost) ^ (1 / life)), rounded to three decimal places
Depreciation for the first and last periods is a special case. For the first period, DB uses this formula:
cost * rate * month / 12
For the last period, DB uses this formula:
((cost - total depreciation from prior periods) * rate * (12 - month)) / 12
Example:
Suppose a factory purchases a new machine. The machine costs $1,000,000 and has a lifetime of six years. The
salvage value of the machine is $100,000. The following examples show depreciation over the life of the machine.
The results are rounded to whole numbers.
DB(1000000, 100000, 6, 1, 7) = $186,083 [the depreciation in first year, with only 7 months calculated]
DB(1000000, 100000, 6, 2, 7) = $259,639 [the depreciation in second year]
DB(1000000, 100000, 6, 7, 7) = $15,845 [the depreciation in seventh year, with only 5 months calculated]
DDB
Description: Returns the asset depreciation for a specified period using the double-declining balance method, or
another method you specify.
Syntax: DDB(Cost, Salvage, Life, Period, [Factor])
Cost is the initial cost of the asset.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 665
Salvage is the value at the end of the depreciation (sometimes called the salvage value of the asset). This value
can be 0.
Life is the number of periods over which the asset is being depreciated (sometimes called the useful life of the
asset).
Period is the period for which you want to calculate the depreciation. Period must use the same units as life.
Factor is the rate at which the balance declines. If factor is omitted, it is assumed to be 2 (the double-declining
balance method).
All five arguments must be positive numbers.
Remarks:
The double-declining balance method computes depreciation at an accelerated rate. Depreciation is highest in the
first period and decreases in successive periods. DDB uses the following formula to calculate depreciation for a
period:
Min((cost - total depreciation from prior periods) * (factor/life), (cost - salvage - total depreciation from prior
periods))
Change the Factor if you do not want to use the double-declining balance method.
Use the VDB function if you want to switch to the straight-line depreciation method when depreciation is greater
than the declining balance calculation.
Example:
Suppose a factory purchases a new machine. The machine costs $2,400 and has a lifetime of 10 years. The salvage
value of the machine is $300. The following examples show depreciation over several periods. The results are
rounded to two decimal places.
DDB(2400, 300, 3650, 1) = $1.32 [the first day's depreciation. The software automatically assumes that factor is
2.]
DDB(2400, 300, 120, 1, 2) = $40.00 [the first month's depreciation]
DDB(2400, 300, 10, 1, 2) = $480.00 [the first year's depreciation]
DDB(2400, 300, 10, 2, 1.5) = $306.00 [the second year's depreciation using a factor of 1.5 instead of the double-
declining balance method]
DDB(2400, 300, 10, 10) = $22.12 [the 10th year's depreciation. The software automatically assumes that factor is
2.]
DEGREES
Description: Converts radians to degrees.
Syntax: DEGREES(Angle)
Angle is the angle in radians that you want to convert.
Example:
DEGREES(PI()) = 180 [the degrees of pi in radians]
Function Wizard Functions A
666 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
DELTA
Description: Tests whether two values are equal. Returns 1 if Number1 = Number2; returns 0 otherwise. Use this
function to filter a set of values. For example, by summing several DELTA functions you calculate the count of equal
pairs. This function is also known as the Kronecker Delta function.
Syntax: DELTA(Number1, Number2)
Number1 is the first number.
Number2 is the second number.
Remarks:
Both inputs must be numeric.
Example:
Check whether 5 equals 4, DELTA(5, 4) = 0 [False]
Check whether 5 equals 5, DELTA(5, 5) = 1 [True]
DOLLAR
Description: Converts a number to text using currency format, with the decimals rounded to the specified place. The
format used is $#,##0.00_);($#,##0.00).
Syntax: DOLLAR(Number, Decimals)
Number is a number, a reference to a cell containing a number, or a formula that evaluates to a number.
Decimals is the number of digits to the right of the decimal point. If Decimals is negative, number is rounded to
the left of the decimal point. If you omit Decimals, it is assumed to be 2.
Remarks:
The major difference between formatting a cell that contains a number with the Custom Number command (Sheet
Options > Format and View > Custom Number) and formatting a number directly with the DOLLAR function is
that DOLLAR converts its result to text. A number formatted with the Custom Number command is still a
number. You can continue to use numbers formatted with DOLLAR in formulas, because the software converts
numbers entered as text values to numbers when it calculates.
Example:
DOLLAR(1234.567, 2) = $1,234.57 [the first in a currency format, 2 digits to the right of the decimal point]
DOLLAR(1234.567, -2) = $1,200 [the first in a currency format, 2 digits to the left of the decimal point]
DOLLAR(-1234.567, -2) = ($1,200) [the second number in a currency format, 2 digits to the left of the decimal
point]
ERF
Description: Returns the error function.
Syntax: ERF(Lower_limit, Upper_limit)
Lower_limit is the lower bound for integrating ERF.
Upper_limit is the upper bound for integrating ERF.
Remarks:
Both inputs must be numeric and nonnegative.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 667
Example:
Get the error function integrated between 0 and 0.74500, ERF(0, 0.74500) = 0.707929
ERFC
Description: Returns the complementary ERF function integrated between x and infinity.
Syntax: ERFC(Lower_limit)
Lower_limit is the lower bound for integrating ERF.
Remarks:
Lower_imit must be numeric and nonnegative.
Where Lower_limit = x:
Example:
Get the complementary ERF function of 1, ERFC(1) = 0.1573
ERROR.TYPE
Description: Returns the corresponding number value associated with an error type. Retruns #N/A if no error exists.
You can use ERROR.TYPE in an IF function to test for an error value and return a text string, such as a message,
instead of the error value.
Syntax: ERROR.TYPE(Error_val)
Error_val is the error value whose identifying number you want to find. Although Error_val can be the actual
error value, it will usually be a reference to a cell containing a formula that you want to test.
Example:
ERROR.TYPE(#NULL!) = 1 [the number of the #NULL! error]
IF(ERROR.TYPE(=1/0)<3, CHOOSE(ERROR.TYPE(=1/0), Ranges do not intersect, The divisor is zero)) =
The divisor is zero
If Error_val is ERROR.TYPE returns
#NULL! 1
#DIV/0! 2
#VALUE! 3
#REF! 4
#NAME? 5
#NUM! 6
#N/A 7
Anything else #N/A
Function Wizard Functions A
668 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
EVEN
Description: Returns number rounded up to the nearest even integer. You can use this function for processing items
that come in twos. For example, a packing crate accepts rows of one or two items. The crate is full when the number
of items, rounded up to the nearest two, matches the crate's capacity.
Syntax: EVEN(Number)
Number is the value to round.
Remarks:
Number must be numeric.
Regardless of the sign of Number, a value is rounded up when adjusted away from zero. If Number is an even
integer, no rounding occurs.
Example:
EVEN(1.5) = 2 [rounds 1.5 up to the nearest even integer]
EVEN(-1) = -2 [rounds -1 up to the nearest even integer]
EXACT
Description: Compares two text strings and returns TRUE if they are exactly the same, FALSE otherwise. EXACT is
case-sensitive but ignores formatting differences. Use EXACT to test text being entered into a document.
Syntax: EXACT(Text1,Text2)
Text1 is the first text string.
Text2 is the second text string.
Example:
EXACT(word,word) = TRUE
EXACT(Word,word) = FALSE
EXACT(w ord,word) = FALSE
EXP
Description: Returns e raised to the power of a given number. The constant e equals 2.71828182845904, the base of
the natural logarithm.
Syntax: EXP(Number)
Number is the exponent applied to the base e.
Remarks:
EXP is the inverse of LN, the natural logarithm of Number.
Example:
EXP(1) = 2.718282, the approximate value of e.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 669
EXPONDIST
Description: Returns the exponential distribution.
Syntax: EXPONDIST(Number, Lambda, Cumulative)
Number is the value of the function.
Lambda is the parameter value.
Cumulative is a logical value that indicates which form of the exponential function to provide. If Cumulative is
TRUE, EXPONDIST returns the cumulative distribution function; if FALSE, it returns the probability density
function.
Remarks:
Number and lambda must be numeric.
Number must be >= 0.
Lambda must be > 0.
The equation for the probability density function is:
The equation for the cumulative distribution function is:
Example:
EXPONDIST(0.2,10,TRUE) = 0.864665
EXPONDIST(0.2,10,FALSE) = 1.353353
FACT
Description: Returns the factorial of a number. The factorial of a number is equal to 1*2*3*...* number.
Syntax: FACT(Number)
Number is the nonnegative integer number you want the factorial of.
Example:
FACT(5) = 120 [Factorial of 5, or 1*2*3*4*5]
FACT(-1) = #VALUE! [negative numbers cause an error!]
FACTDOUBLE
Description: Returns the double factorial of a number.
Syntax: FACTDOUBLE(Number)
Number is the value for which to return the double factorial. If Number is not an integer, it is truncated.
Remarks:
Number must be numeric.
Function Wizard Functions A
670 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Number must be nonnegative.
If Number is even:
If number is odd:
Example:
FACTDOUBLE(6) = 48 [double factorial of 6]
FALSE
Description: Returns the value FALSE.
Syntax: FALSE()
Remarks:
The software interprets the word False as 0.
Example:
FALSE() = FALSE [interpreted as 0]
FDIST
Description: Returns the F probability distribution.
Syntax: FDIST(Number, Deg_Freedom1, Deg_Freedom2)
Number is the value at which to evaluate the function.
Deg_Freedom1 is the numerator degrees of freedom.
Deg_Freedom2 is the denominator degrees of freedom.
Remarks:
All arguments must be numeric.
Number cannot be negative.
If Deg_Freedom1 or Deg_Freedom2 is not an integer, it is truncated.
Deg_Freedom1 and Deg_Freedom2 must be >= 1 and < 10^10.
FDIST is calculated as FDIST=P(F>x), where Number = x and where F is a random variable that has an F
distribution with Deg_Freedom1 and Deg_Freedom2 degrees of freedom.
Example:
FDIST(15.20686468, 6, 4) = 0.01
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 671
FIND
Description: Finds one text string within another text string, and returns the number of the starting position of
Find_text, from the leftmost character of Within_text. FIND is case sensitive and cannot include wildcard characters.
FIND is intended for use with languages that use the single-byte character set (SBCS). FIND always counts each
character, whether single-byte or double-byte, as 1, no matter what the default language setting is.
Syntax: FIND(Find_text, Within_text, [Start_num])
Find_text is the text you want to find.
Within_text is the text containing the text you want to find.
Start_num specifies the character at which to start the search. The first character in Within_text is character
number 1. If you omit Start_num, it is assumed to be 1.
Remarks:
FIND is case sensitive and doesn't allow wildcard characters. If you don't want to do a case sensitive search or use
wildcard characters, you can use the SEARCH function.
If Find_text is (empty text), FIND matches the first character in the search string (that is, the character
numbered Start_num or 1).
If Find_text does not appear in Within_text, FIND returns the #VALUE! error value.
Start_num must be greater than 0.
Start_num must be less than or equal to the length of Within_text.
Use Start_num to skip a specified number of characters. Using FIND as an example, suppose you are working
with the text string AYF0093.YoungMensApparel. To find the number of the first Y in the descriptive part of
the text string, set Start_num equal to 8 so that the serial-number portion of the text is not searched. FIND begins
with character 8, finds Find_text at the next character, and returns the number 9. FIND always returns the number
of characters from the start of Within_text, counting the characters you skip if Start_num is greater than 1.
Example:
FIND(M, Miriam McGovern) = 1 [the position of the first M in the string]
FIND(m, Miriam McGovern) = 6 [the position of the first m in the string above]
FIND(M, Miriam McGovern, 3) = 8 [the position of the first M in the string above, starting with the third
character]
FINDB
Description: Finds one text string within another text string, and returns the number of the starting position of
Find_text, from the leftmost character of Within_text. FINDB is case sensitive and cannot include wildcard
characters. This function is for use with double-byte characters.
FINDB is intended for use with languages that use the double-byte character set (DBCS). FINDB counts each
double-byte character as 2 when you have enabled the editing of a language that supports DBCS and then set it as
the default language. Otherwise, FINDB counts each character as 1.
Syntax: FINDB(Find_text, Within_text, [Start_num])
Find_text is the text you want to find.
Within_text is the text containing the text you want to find.
Function Wizard Functions A
672 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Start_num specifies the character at which to start the search. The first character in Within_text is character
number 1. If you omit Start_num, it is assumed to be 1.
Remarks:
FINDB is case sensitive and doesn't allow wildcard characters. If you don't want to do a case sensitive search or
use wildcard characters, you can use the SEARCHB function.
If Find_text does not appear in Within_text, FINDB returns the #VALUE! error value.
Start_num must be greater than 0.
Start_num must be less than or equal to the length of Within_text.
Example:
In the following example, FINDB returns 3 because each character is counted by its bytes; the first character has 2
bytes, so the second character begins at byte 3.
FINDB( , ) = 3
FINV
Description: Returns the inverse of the F probability distribution. If p = FDIST(x,...), then FINV(p,...) = x.
Syntax: FINV(Probability, Deg_Freedom1, Deg_Freedom2)
Probability is a probability associated with the F cumulative distribution.
Deg_Freedom1 is the numerator degrees of freedom.
Deg_Freedom2 is the denominator degrees of freedom.
Remarks:
All arguments must be numeric.
Probability must be >= 0 and <= 1.
Both Deg_Freedom1 and Deg_Freedom2 must be an integer.
Deg_Freedom1and Deg_Freedom2 must be >= 1 and < 10^10.
Example:
FINV(0.01,6,4) = 15.20686486.
FISHER
Description: Returns the Fisher transformation at x. This transformation produces a function that is normally
distributed rather than skewed.
Syntax: FISHER(x)
x is the value for which you want to perform the transformation.
Remarks:
x must be numeric.
x must be > -1 and < 1.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 673
The equation for the Fisher transformation is:
Example:
FISHER(0.75) = 0.972955
FISHERINV
Description: Returns the inverse of the Fisher transformation. If y = FISHER(x), then FISHERINV(y) = x.
Syntax: FISHERINV(y)
y is the value for which you want to perform the inverse of the transformation.
Remarks:
y must be numeric.
The equation for the inverse of the Fisher transformation is:
Example:
FISHERINV(0.972955) = 0.75
FIXED
Description: Rounds a number to the specified number of decimals, formats the number in decimal format using a
period and commas, and returns the result as text.
Syntax: FIXED(Number, [Decimals], [No_commas])
Number is the number you want to round and convert to text.
Decimals is the number of digits to the right of the decimal point.
No_commas is a logical value that, if TRUE, prevents FIXED from including commas in the returned text.
Remarks:
Numbers in the software can never have more than 15 significant digits, but Decimals can be as large as 127
digits. If a number has more than 15 significant digits then the function only considers the first 15 of them.
If Decimals is negative, number is rounded to the left of the decimal point.
If you omit Decimals, it is assumed to be 2.
If No_commas is FALSE or omitted, then the returned text includes commas as usual.
The major difference between formatting a cell containing a number with the Custom Number command (Sheet
Options > Format and View > Custom Number) and formatting a number directly with the FIXED function is
that FIXED converts its result to text. A number formatted with the Custom Number command is still a number.
Function Wizard Functions A
674 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Example:
FIXED(1234.567, 1) = 1,234.6 [rounds the first number 1 digit to the right of the decimal point]
FIXED(1234.567, -1) = 1,230 [rounds the first number 1 digit to the left of the decimal point]
FIXED(1234.567, 1, TRUE) = 1234.6 [rounds the first number 1 digit to the right of the decimal point, without
commas]
FLOOR
Description: Rounds number down, toward zero, to the nearest multiple of significance.
Syntax: FLOOR(Number, Significance)
Number is the numeric value you want to round.
Significance is the multiple to which you want to round.
Remarks:
Both arguments must be numeric.
Both Number and Significance must have the same sign.
Regardless of the sign of Number, a value is rounded down when adjusted away from zero. If Number is an exact
multiple of Significance, no rounding occurs.
Example:
FLOOR(2.5, 1) = 2 [rounds 2.5 down to nearest multiple of 1]
FLOOR(-2.5, -2) = -2 [rounds -2.5 down to nearest multiple of -2]
FLOOR(-2.5, 2) = #NUM! [returns an error, because -2.5 and 2 have different signs]
FV
Description: Returns the future value based on periodic, constant payments and constant interest rate.
Syntax: FV(Rate, Nper, Pmt, [PV], [Type])
For a more complete description of the arguments in FV and for more information on annuity functions, see the
PV function.
Rate is the interest rate per period.
Nper is the total number of payment periods in an annuity.
Pmt is the payment made each period; it cannot change over the life of the annuity. Typically, Pmt contains
principal and interest but no other fees or taxes.
PV is the present value, or the lump-sum amount that a series of future payments is worth right now. If PV is
omitted, it is assumed to be 0 (zero), and you must include the Pmt argument.
Type is the number 0 or 1 and indicates when payments are due.
Set Type equal to If payments are due
0 or omitted At the end of the period
1 At the beginning of the period
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 675
Remarks:
Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying Rate and Nper. If you make monthly
payments on a four-year loan at 12 percent annual interest, use 0.12/12 for Rate and 4*12 for Nper. If you make
annual payments on the same loan, use 0.12 for Rate and 4 for Nper.
For all the arguments, cash you pay out, such as deposits to savings, is represented by negative numbers; cash you
receive, such as dividend checks, is represented by positive numbers.
Example:
Future value of an investment with the above terms:
FV(.06/12, 10, -200, -500, 1) = 2581.40
GAMMADIST
Description: Returns the gamma distribution. You can use this function to study variables that may have a skewed
distribution.
Syntax: GAMMADIST(x, Alpha, Beta, Cumulative)
x is the value at which you want to evaluate the distribution.
Alpha is a parameter to the distribution.
Beta is a parameter to the distribution. If Beta = 1, GAMMADIST returns the standard gamma distribution.
Cumulative is a logical value that determines the form of the function. If Cumulative is TRUE, GAMMADIST
returns the cumulative distribution function; if FALSE, it returns the probability mass function.
Remarks:
x, alpha and beta must be numeric.
x must be >= 0.
Alpha and Beta must be > 0.
The equation for the gamma distribution is:
The standard gamma distribution is:
When Alpha = 1, GAMMADIST returns the exponential distribution with:
Function Wizard Functions A
676 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
For a positive integer n, when Alpha = n/2, Beta = 2, and Cumulative = TRUE, GAMMADIST returns (1 -
CHIDIST(x)) with n degrees of freedom.
When Alpha is a positive integer, GAMMADIST is also known as the Erlang distribution.
Example:
GAMMADIST(10,9,2,FALSE) = 0.032639
GAMMADIST(10,9,2,TRUE) = 0.068094
GAMMAINV
Description: Returns the inverse of the gamma cumulative distribution. If p = GAMMADIST(x,...), then
GAMMAINV(p,...) = x. You can use this function to study a variable whose distribution may be skewed.
Syntax: GAMMAINV(Probability, Alpha, Beta)
Probability is the probability associated with the gamma distribution.
Alpha is a parameter to the distribution.
Beta is a parameter to the distribution. If Beta = 1, GAMMAINV returns the standard gamma distribution.
Remarks:
Arguments must be numeric.
Probability must be => 0 and <= 1.
Alpha and Beta must be greater than 1.
Example:
GAMMAINV(0.068094,9,2) = 10
GAMMALN
Description: Returns the natural logarithm of the gamma function, G(x).
Syntax: GAMMALN(x)
x is the value for which you want to calculate GAMMALN.
Remarks:
x must be numeric.
x must be greater than 0.
The number e^GAMMALN(i), where i is an integer, returns the same result as (i - 1)!
GAMMALN is calculated as follows:
where:
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 677
Example:
GAMMALN(4) = 1.791759
HLOOKUP
Description: Searches for a specified value in an array or table, based on the value found in the first row. Use
HLOOKUP when your comparison values are located in a row across the top of a table of data and you want to look
down a specified number of rows. Use VLOOKUP when your comparison values are located in a column to the left
of the data you want to find.
Syntax: HLOOKUP(Lookup_value, Table_array, Row_index_number, [Range_lookup])
Lookup_value is the value to be found in the first row of the table. Lookup_value can be a value, a reference, or a
text string.
Table_array is a table of information in which data is looked up. Use a reference to a range or a range name.
The values in the first row of Table_array can be text, numbers, or logical values.
If Range_lookup is TRUE, the values in the first row of Table_array must be placed in ascending order: ...-2, -1,
0, 1, 2,... , A-Z, FALSE, TRUE; otherwise, HLOOKUP may not give the correct value. If Range_lookup is
FALSE, Table_array does not need to be sorted.
Uppercase and lowercase text are equivalent.
You can put values in ascending order, left to right, by selecting the values and then choosing Sheet Options >
Sheet Actions > Sort > Custom Sort. In the Sort window, select Columns and then Ascending.
Row_index_number is the row number in Table_array from which the matching value will be returned. A
Row_index_number of 1 returns the first row value in Table_array, a Row_index_number of 2 returns the second
row value in Table_array, and so on. Row_index_number must be greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal
to the number of rows on Table_array.
Range_lookup is a logical value that specifies whether you want HLOOKUP to find an exact match or an
approximate match. If Range_lookup is TRUE or omitted, an approximate match is returned. In other words, if an
exact match is not found, the next largest value that is less than Lookup_value is returned. If FALSE, HLOOKUP
will find an exact match. If one is not found, the error value #N/A is returned.
Remarks:
If HLOOKUP can't find Lookup_value, and Range_lookup is TRUE, it uses the largest value that is less than
Lookup_value.
If Lookup_value is smaller than the smallest value in the first row of Table_array, HLOOKUP returns the #N/A
error value.
If Range_lookup is FALSE and Lookup_value is text, you can use the wildcard characters, question mark (?) and
asterisk (*), in Lookup_value. A question mark matches any single character; an asterisk matches any sequence of
characters. If you want to find an actual question mark or asterisk, type a tilde (~) before the character.
Example:
Suppose you have an inventory worksheet of auto parts. A1:A4 contains the following data, respectively: Axles, 4, 5,
6. B1:B4 contains the following data, respectively: Bearings, 4, 7, 8. C1:C4 contains the following data, respectively:
Bolts, 9, 10, 11.
HLOOKUP(Axles, A1:C4, 2, TRUE) = 4
HLOOKUP(Bearings, A1:C4, 3, FALSE) = 7
HLOOKUP(Bearings, A1:C4, 3, TRUE) = 7
HLOOKUP(Bolts, A1:C4, 4,) = 11
Function Wizard Functions A
678 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
HLOOKUP(3,{1, 2, 3; a, b, c; d, e, f}, 2, TRUE) = c
HOUR
Description: Returns the hour as a number between 0 (12:00 A.M.) and 23 (11:00 P.M.).
Syntax: HOUR(Serial_number)
Serial_number is the time that contains the hour you want to find. Times may be entered as text strings within
quotation marks (for example, 6:45 PM), as decimal numbers (for example, 0.78125, which represents 6:45
PM), or as results of other formulas or functions (for example, TIMEVALUE(6:45 PM)).
Remarks:
Time values are a portion of a date value and represented by a decimal number (for example, 12:00 PM is
represented as 0.5 because it is half of a day).
Example:
HOUR(3:30:30 AM) = 3
HOUR(3:30:30 PM) = 15 [the hour using the twenty-four hour system]
HOUR(15:30) = 15 [the hour using the twenty-four hour system]
HYPGEOMDIST
Description: Returns the hypergeometric distribution. HYPGEOMDIST returns the probability of a given number of
sample successes, given the sample size, population successes and population size.
Syntax: HYPGEOMDIST(Sample_S,Number_Sample,Population_S,Number_Population)
Sample_S is the number of successes in the sample.
Number_Sample is the size of the sample.
Population_S is the number of successes in the population.
Number_Population is the population size.
Remarks:
All arguments are truncated to integers.
Arguments must be numeric.
Sample_S must be => 0 and <= the lesser of Number_Sample or Population_S.
Sample_S must be => the larger of 0 or (Number_Sample - Number_Population + Population_S).
Number_Sample must be => 0 and <= Number_Population.
Population_S must be => 0 and <= Number_Population.
Number_Population must be => 0.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 679
The equation for the hypergeometric distribution is:
where:
x = Sample_S
n = Number_Sample
M = Population_S
N = Number_Population
HYPGEOMDIST is used in sampling without replacement from a finite population.
Example:
A sampler of chocolates contains 20 pieces. Eight pieces are caramels, and the remaining 12 are nuts. If a person
selects 4 pieces at random, the following function returns the probability that exactly 1 piece is a caramel.
HYPGEOMDIST(1,4,8,20) = 0.363261
IF
Description: Returns a value if one condition is true, and returns another value of the condition is false. Use IF to
conduct conditional tests on values and formulas.
Syntax: IF(Logical_test, [Value_if_true], [Value_if_false])
Logical_test is any value or expression that can be evaluated to TRUE or FALSE.
Value_if_true is the value that is returned if Logical_test is TRUE. If Logical_test is TRUE and Value_if_true is
blank, this argument returns 0 (zero). To display the word TRUE, use the logical value TRUE for this argument.
Value_if_false is the value that is returned if Logical_test is FALSE. If Logical_test is FALSE and Value_if_false
is omitted, (that is, after Value_if_true, there is no comma), then the logical value FALSE is returned. If
Logical_test is FALSE and Value_if_false is blank (that is, after Value_if_true, there is a comma followed by the
closing parenthesis), then the value 0 (zero) is returned.
Remarks:
You must include at least one of the Value_if_true and Value_if_false arguments.
After evaluating the arguments, IF returns either the Value_if_true argument or the Value_if_false argument, if
provided.
Example:
IF(50 <= 100,1,0) = 1
Function Wizard Functions A
680 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
INT
Description: Rounds a number down to the nearest integer.
Syntax: INT(Number)
Number is the real number you want to round down to an integer.
Example:
INT(8.9) = 8
IPMT
Description: Returns the interest payment for a period of time based on an investment with periodic constant
payments and a constant interest rate. For a more complete description of the arguments in IPMT and for more
information about annuity functions, see the PV function.
Syntax: IPMT(Rate, Per, Nper, PV, [FV], [Type])
Rate is the interest rate per period.
Per is the period for which you want to find the interest and must be in the range 1 to Nper.
Nper is the total number of payment periods in an annuity.
PV is the present value, or the lump-sum amount that a series of future payments is worth right now.
FV is the future value, or a cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made. If FV is omitted, it is
assumed to be 0 (the future value of a loan, for example, is 0).
Type is the number 0 or 1 and indicates when payments are due. If Type is omitted, it is assumed to be 0.
Remarks:
Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying Rate and Nper. If you make monthly
payments on a four-year loan at 12 percent annual interest, use 12%/12 for Rate and 4*12 for Nper. If you make
annual payments on the same loan, use 12% for Rate and 4 for Nper.
For all the arguments, cash you pay out, such as deposits to savings, is represented by negative numbers; cash you
receive, such as dividend checks, is represented by positive numbers.
Example:
Interest due in the first month for a loan with the terms above
IPMT(.10/12, 1*3, 3, 8000,0,0) = -22.41
Interest due in the last year for a loan with the terms above, where payments are made yearly
IPMT(.10, 3, 3, 8000,0,0) = -292.45
Set Type equal to If payments are due
0 or omitted At the end of the period
1 At the beginning of the period
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 681
IRR
Description: Returns the interest rate of return for a series of cash flows represented by numbers in the form of
values. These cash flows do not have to be even, as they would be for an annuity. However, the cash flows must occur
at regular intervals, such as monthly or annually. The internal rate of return is the interest rate received for an
investment consisting of payments (negative values) and income (positive values) that occur at regular periods.
Syntax: IRR(Values, [Guess])
Values is an array or a reference to cells that contain numbers for which you want to calculate the internal rate of
return.
Values must contain at least one positive value and one negative value to calculate the internal rate of return.
IRR uses the order of Values to interpret the order of cash flows. Be sure to enter your payment and income
values in the sequence you want.
If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored.
Guess is a number that you guess is close to the result of IRR.
The software uses an iterative technique for calculating IRR. Starting with Guess, IRR cycles through the
calculation until the result is accurate within 0.00001 percent. If IRR can't find a result that works after 100 tries,
the #NUM! error value is returned.
In most cases you do not need to provide Guess for the IRR calculation. If Guess is omitted, it is assumed to be
0.1 (10 percent).
If IRR gives the #NUM! error value, or if the result is not close to what you expected, try again with a different
value for Guess.
Remarks:
IRR is closely related to NPV, the net present value function. The rate of return calculated by IRR is the interest
rate corresponding to a 0 (zero) net present value. The following formula demonstrates how NPV and IRR are
related:
NPV(IRR(B1:B6),B1:B6) = 3.60E-08
[Within the accuracy of the IRR calculation, the value 3.60E-08 is effectively 0 (zero).]
Example:
Suppose you want to start a restaurant business. You estimate it will cost $70,000 to start the business and expect to
net the following income in the first five years: $12,000, $15,000, $18,000, $21,000, and $26,000. A1:A6 contain the
following values: $-70,000, $12,000, $15,000, $18,000, $21,000 and $26,000, respectively.
IRR(A1:A5) = -2% (investment's internal rate of return after four years)
IRR(A1:A6) = 9% (internal rate of return after five years)
IRR(A1:A3, -10%) = -44% (to calculate the internal rate of return after two years, you need to include a guess)
IS Functions
Description: This section describes the eight functions used for testing the type of a value or reference.
ISBLANK
ISERR
ISERROR
ISLOGICAL
Function Wizard Functions A
682 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
ISNONTEXT
ISNUMBER
ISREF
ISTEXT
Each of these functions, referred to collectively as the IS functions, checks the type of value and returns TRUE or
FALSE depending on the outcome. For example, the ISBLANK function returns the logical value TRUE if the tested
value is a reference to an empty cell; otherwise it returns FALSE.
Syntax: ISxxxx(Value)
Value is the value you want tested. Value can be a blank (empty cell), error, logical, text, number or reference
value, or a name referring to any of these.
Remarks:
The Value arguments to the IS functions are not converted. For example, in most other functions where a number
is required, the text value 19 is converted to the number 19. However, in the formula ISNUMBER(19), 19
is not converted from a text value, and the ISNUMBER function returns FALSE.
The IS functions are useful in formulas for testing the outcome of a calculation. When combined with the IF
function, they provide a method for locating errors in formulas (see the following examples).
Example:
ISLOGICAL(TRUE) = TRUE
ISLOGICAL(TRUE) = FALSE
ISNUMBER(4) = TRUE
Suppose C1:C5 on a worksheet of gold prices in different regions shows the following text values, number values,
and error values: Gold, Region1, #REF!, $330.92, #N/A, respectively.
ISBLANK(C1) = FALSE
ISERROR(C3) = TRUE
ISERR(C5) = FALSE
ISNUMBER(C4) = TRUE [if the $330.92 was entered as a number and not as text]
ISREF(Region1) = TRUE [if Region1 is defined as a range name]
Function Returns TRUE if
ISBLANK Value refers to an empty cell.
ISERR Value refers to any error value except #N/A.
ISERROR Value refers to any error value (#N/A, #VALUE!, #REF!, #DIV/0!,
#NUM!, #NAME? or #NULL!).
ISLOGICAL Value refers to a logical value.
ISNONTEXT Value refers to any item that is not text. (Note that this function returns
TRUE if value refers to a blank cell.)
ISNUMBER Value refers to a number.
ISREF Value refers to a reference.
ISTEXT Value refers to text.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 683
LEFT
Description: Returns the first character or characters in a text string.
Syntax: LEFT(Text, [Num_char])
Text is the text string that contains the characters you want to extract.
Num_char specifies the number of characters you want LEFT to extract.
Remarks:
Num_char must be greater than or equal to 0.
If Num_char is greater than the length of text, LEFT returns all of text.
If Num_char is omitted, it is assumed to be 1.
Example:
LEFT(Sale Price, 4) = Sale [the first four characters in the first string]
If A1 contains Sweden, then:
LEFT(A1) = S
LEN
Description: Returns the number of characters in a text string.
Syntax: LEN(Text)
Text is the text whose length you want to find. Spaces count as characters.
Example:
Suppose A1:A3 contain Phoenix, AZ and .
LEN(A1) = 11 [the length of the first string]
LEN(A2) = 0 [the length of the second string]
LEN( One ) = 8 [the length of the string, which includes 5 spaces]
LN
Description: Returns the natural logarithm of a number.
Syntax: LN(Number)
Number is the positive real number for which you want the natural logarithm.
Remarks:
LN is the inverse of the EXP function.
Example:
LN(86) = 4.454347
Function Wizard Functions A
684 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
LOG
Description: Returns the logarithm of a number to a specified base.
Syntax: LOG(Number, [Base])
Number is the positive real number for which you want the logarithm.
Base is the base of the logarithm. If Base is omitted, it is assumed to be 10.
Example:
LOG(8, 2) = 3 [the logarithm of 8 with base 2]
LOG10
Description: Returns the base-10 logarithm of a number.
Syntax: LOG10(Number)
Number is the positive real number for which you want the base-10 logarithm.
Example:
LOG10(10) = 1
LOGINV
Description: Returns the inverse of the lognormal cumulative distribution function of x, where ln(x) is normally
distributed with a specified mean and standard deviation. If p = LOGNORMDIST(x,...) then LOGINV(p,...) = x.
Use the lognormal distribution to analyze logarithmically transformed data.
Syntax: LOGINV(Probability, Mean, Standard_dev)
Probability is a probability associated with the lognormal distribution.
Mean is the mean of ln(x).
Standard_dev is the standard deviation of ln(x).
Remarks:
All arguments must be numeric.
Probability must be greater than or equal to 0 and less than or equal to 1.
Standard_dev must be greater than 0.
The inverse of the lognormal distribution function is:
Example:
LOGINV(0.039084, 3.5, 1.2) = 4.000014
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 685
LOGNORMDIST
Description: Returns the cumulative lognormal distribution of x, where ln(x) is normally distributed with a specified
mean and standard deviation. Use this function to analyze data that has been logarithmically transformed.
Syntax: LOGNORMDIST(x, Mean, Standard_dev)
x is the value at which to evaluate the function.
Mean is the mean of ln(x).
Standard_dev is the standard deviation of ln(x).
Remarks:
Arguments must be numeric.
x and Standard_dev must be > 0.
The equation for the lognormal cumulative distribution function is:
Example:
LOGNORMDIST(4,3.5,1.2) = 0.039084
LOOKUP
Description: Based on a range of one row or one column, returns the value from the same position in a second row or
column OR looks in the first row or column of an array, and returns the specified value from the same position in the
last row or column of the array. The LOOKUP function has two syntax forms: vector and array.
A vector is a range of only one row or one column. The vector form of LOOKUP looks in a one-row or one-
column range (known as a vector) for a value and returns a value from the same position in a second one-row or
one-column range. Use this form of the LOOKUP function when you want to specify the range that contains the
values you want to match.
The array form of LOOKUP looks in the first row or column of an array for the specified value and returns a value
from the same position in the last row or column of the array. Use this form of LOOKUP when the values you
want to match are in the first row or column of the array.
Syntax (vector): LOOKUP(Lookup_value, L_vector, [Result_vector])
Lookup_value is a value that LOOKUP searches for in the first vector. Lookup_value can be a number, text, a
logical value or a name or reference that refers to a value.
L_vector is a range that contains only one row or one column. The values in L_vector can be text, numbers or
logical values.
Result_vector is a range that contains only one row or column. It must be the same size as L_vector.
Tip: In general, it's best to use the HLOOKUP or VLOOKUP function instead of the array form of LOOKUP. This form
of LOOKUP is provided for compatibility with other spreadsheet programs.
Important: The values in L_vector must be placed in ascending order: ...,-2, -1, 0, 1, 2, ..., A-Z, FALSE, TRUE;
otherwise, LOOKUP may not give the correct value. Uppercase and lowercase text are equivalent.
ln( )
( , , )
x
LOGNORMDIST x NORMSDIST
m
m s
s
-

=

Function Wizard Functions A
686 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Remarks (vector):
If LOOKUP can't find the Lookup_value, it matches the largest value in L_vector that is less than or equal to
Lookup_value.
Lookup_value must be greater than or equal to the smallest value in L_vector.
Example (vector):
LOOKUP(4.19, A2:A6, B2:B6) = orange (looks up 4.19 in column A, and returns the value from column B that's
in the same row)
LOOKUP(5.00, A2:A6, B2:B6) = orange (looks up 5.00 in column A, matches the next smallest value (4.19), and
returns the value from column B that's in the same row)
Syntax (array): LOOKUP(Lookup_value, Array)
Lookup_value is a value that LOOKUP searches for in an array. Lookup_value can be a number, text, a logical
value or a name or reference that refers to a value.
Array is a range of cells that contains text, numbers or logical values that you want to compare with
Lookup_value.
Remarks (array):
If LOOKUP can't find the Lookup_value, it uses the largest value in the array that is less than or equal to
Lookup_value.
Lookup_value must be greater than or equal to the smallest value in the first row or column (depending on the
array dimensions).
The array form of LOOKUP is very similar to the HLOOKUP and VLOOKUP functions. The difference is that
HLOOKUP searches for Lookup_value in the first row, VLOOKUP searches in the first column, and LOOKUP
searches according to the dimensions of array.
If Array covers an area that is wider than it is tall (more columns than rows), LOOKUP searches for
Lookup_value in the first row.
If Array is square or is taller than it is wide (more rows than columns), LOOKUP searches in the first column.
With HLOOKUP and VLOOKUP, you can index down or across, but LOOKUP always selects the last value in
the row or column.
Example (array):
LOOKUP(C,{a,b,c,d;1,2,3,4}) = 3 [looks up C in first row of the array and returns the value in the
last row that's in the same column]
A B
1 Frequency Color
2 4.14 red
3 4.19 orange
4 5.17 yellow
5 5.77 green
6 6.39 blue
Important: The values must be placed in ascending order: ...,-2, -1, 0, 1, 2, ..., A-Z, FALSE, TRUE; otherwise,
LOOKUP may not give the correct value. Uppercase and lowercase text are equivalent.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 687
LOWER
Description: Converts all uppercase letters in a text string to lowercase.
Syntax: LOWER(Text)
Text is the text you want to convert to lowercase. LOWER does not change characters in text that are not letters.
Example:
LOWER(E. E. Cummings) = e. e. cummings
LOWER(Apt. 2B) = apt. 2b
MATCH
Description: Returns the relative position of an item in an array that matches a specified value and order. Use
MATCH instead of one of the LOOKUP functions when you need the position of an item in a range instead of the
item itself.
Syntax: MATCH(Lookup_value, Lookup_array, [Match_type])
Lookup_value is the value you use to find the value you want in a table.
Lookup_value is the value you want to match in Lookup_array. For example, when you look up someone's
number in a telephone book, you are using the person's name as the lookup value, but the telephone number is the
value you want.
Lookup_value can be a value (number, text, or logical value) or a cell reference to a number, text or logical value.
Lookup_array is a contiguous range of cells containing possible lookup values. Lookup_array can be an array or
an array reference.
Match_type is the number -1, 0, or 1. Match_type specifies how the software matches Lookup_value with values
in Lookup_array.
If Match_type is 1, MATCH finds the largest value that is less than or equal to Lookup_value. Lookup_array must
be placed in ascending order: ...-2, -1, 0, 1, 2, ..., A-Z, FALSE, TRUE.
If Match_type is 0, MATCH finds the first value that is exactly equal to Lookup_value. Lookup_array can be in
any order.
If Match_type is -1, MATCH finds the smallest value that is greater than or equal to Lookup_value. Lookup_array
must be placed in descending order: TRUE, FALSE, Z-A,...2, 1, 0, -1, -2,..., and so on.
If Match_type is omitted, it is assumed to be 1.
Remarks:
MATCH returns the position of the matched value within Lookup_array, not the value itself. For example,
MATCH(b, {a, b, c},0) returns 2, the relative position of b within the array {a, b, c}.
MATCH does not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase letters when matching text values.
If MATCH is unsuccessful in finding a match, it returns the #N/A error value.
If Match_type is 0 and Lookup_value is text, Lookup_value can contain the wildcard characters, asterisk (*) and
question mark (?). An asterisk matches any sequence of characters; a question mark matches any single character.
Function Wizard Functions A
688 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Example:
Suppose A2:A5 contain Bananas, Oranges, Apples, Pears, respectively. B2:B5 contain 25, 38, 40,
41 respectively.
MTCH(39, B2:B5, 1) = 2 [because there is not an exact match, the position of the next lowest value (38) in the
range B2:B5 is returned]
MATCH(41, B2:B5, 0) = 4 [the position of 41 in the range B2:B5]
MATCH(40, B2:B5, -1) = #N/A [returns an error because the range B2:B5 is not in descending order]
MAX
Description: Returns the largest number in a set of values. The set can be defined by entering the values separated by
commas, or by entering the references for a range of cells. For example, =MAX(1,2,3,4) returns 4 while
=MAX(A1:A4) returns the largest value in rows 1 through 4 of column A.
Syntax: MAX(Number1, Number2, ...)
Number1, Number2, ... are 1 to 30 numbers for which you want to find the maximum value.
Remarks:
Arguments can either be numbers or names, arrays or references that contain numbers.
Logical values and text representations of numbers that you type directly into the list of arguments are considered.
If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in that array or reference are used. Empty cells, logical
values or text in the array or reference are ignored.
If the arguments contain no numbers, MAX returns 0 (zero).
Arguments that are error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers cause errors.
Example:
If A1:A5 contains the numbers 10, 7, 9, 27 and 2, then:
MAX(A1:A5) = 27 [the largest of the numbers in the reference]
MAX(A1:A5, 30, 19) = 30 [the largest of the numbers including those in the reference]
MID
Description: Returns a specific number of characters from a text string, starting at the position you specify.
Syntax: MID(Text, Start_num, Num_char)
Text is the text string containing the characters you want to extract.
Start_num is the position of the first character you want to extract in Text. The first character in Text has
Start_num 1, and so on.
Num_char specifies the number of characters you want MID to return from Text.
Remarks:
If Start_num is greater than the length of Text, MID returns (empty text).
If Start_num is less than the length of Text, but Start_num plus Num_char exceeds the length of Text, MID
returns the characters up to the end of Text.
Start_num must be greater than 1.
Num_char must not be negative.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 689
Example:
MID(Fluid Flow, 1, 5) = Fluid [five characters from the string, starting at the first character]
MID(Fluid Flow, 7, 20) = Flow [twenty characters from the string, starting at the seventh character]
MIN
Description: Returns the smallest number in a set of values. The set can be defined by entering the values separated
by commas, or by entering the references for a range of cells. For example, =MIN(1,2,3,4) returns 1 while
=MIN(A1:A4) returns the smallest value in rows 1 through 4 of column A.
Syntax: MIN(Number1, Number2, ...)
Number1, Number2, ... are 1 to 30 numbers for which you want to find the minimum value.
Remarks:
Arguments can either be numbers or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.
Logical values and text representations of numbers that you type directly into the list of arguments are counted.
If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in that array or reference are used. Empty cells, logical
values, or text in the array or reference are ignored.
If the arguments contain no numbers, MIN returns 0.
Arguments that are error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers cause errors.
Example:
If A1:A5 contains the numbers 10, 7, 9, 27, and 2, then:
MIN(A1:A5) = 2 [the smallest of the numbers in the reference]
MIN(A1:A5, 0) = 0 [the smallest of the numbers including those in the reference]
MINUTE
Description: Returns the number of minutes (0 to 59) from the specified time value. The time can be entered in a
valid text format (in quotes) or as a serial number. For example, =MINUTE(8:48:00 AM) and
=MINUTE(0.366666666666667) both return 48.
Syntax: MINUTE(Serial_number)
Serial_number is the time that contains the minute you want to find. Times may be entered as text strings within
quotation marks (for example, 6:45 PM), as decimal numbers (for example, 0.78125, which represents 6:45
PM), or as results of other formulas or functions (for example, TIMEVALUE(6:45 PM)).
Remarks:
Time values are a portion of a date value and represented by a decimal number (for example, 12:00 PM is
represented as 0.5, since it is half of a day).
Example:
MINUTE(4:48:00 PM) = 48
Function Wizard Functions A
690 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
MIRR
Description: Returns a modified internal rate for several periodic cash flows. MIRR considers both the cost of the
investment and the interest received on reinvestment of cash.
Syntax: MIRR(Values, Finance_rate, Reinvest_rate)
Values is an array or a reference to cells that contain numbers. These numbers represent a series of payments
(negative values) and income (positive values) occurring at regular periods.
Values must contain at least one positive value and one negative value to calculate the modified internal rate of
return.
If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values or empty cells, those values are ignored; however,
cells with the value zero are included.
Finance_rate is the interest rate you pay on the money used in the cash flows.
Reinvest_rate is the interest rate you receive on the cash flows as you reinvest them.
Remarks:
MIRR uses the order of values to interpret the order of cash flows. Be sure to enter your payment and income
values in the sequence you want and with the correct signs (positive values for cash received, negative values for
cash paid).
If n is the number of cash flows in values, frate is the Finance_rate, and rrate is the Reinvest_rate, then the
formula for MIRR is:
Example:
Suppose you're a commercial fisherman just completing your fifth year of operation. Five years ago, you borrowed
$120,000 at 10 percent annual interest to purchase a boat. Your catches have yielded $39,000, $30,000, $21,000,
$37,000 and $46,000. During these years you reinvested your profits, earning 12 percent annually. On a worksheet,
your loan amount is entered as -$120,000 in B1, and your five annual profits are entered in B2:B6.
To calculate the investment's modified rate of return after five years:
MIRR(B1:B6, 10%, 12%) = 12.61 percent
To calculate the modified rate of return after three years:
MIRR(B1:B4, 10%, 12%) = -4.80 percent
To calculate the five-year modified rate of return based on a Reinvest_rate of 14 percent
MIRR(B1:B6, 10%, 14%) = 13.48 percent
MOD
Description: Returns the remainder from division. The result has the same sign as the divisor.
Syntax: MOD(Number, Divisor)
Number is the number for which you want to find the remainder.
Divisor is the number by which you want to divide Number.
NPV rrate values positive | | , ( )
-
1 rrate + ( )
n

NPV frate values negative | | , ( )

-
1 frate + ( )
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\ .
| |
1
n 1
----------- -
1
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 691
Remarks:
Divisor cannot be 0.
The MOD function can be expressed in terms of the INT function:
MOD(n, d) = n - d*INT(n/d)
Example:
MOD(3, 2) = 1 [remainder of 1]
MONTH
Description: Returns the number of the month from the specified date, where January = 1 and December = 12. For
example, =MONTH(15-Apr-2011) returns 4.
Syntax: MONTH(Serial_number)
Serial_number is the date of the month you are trying to find. Dates should be entered by using the DATE
function, or as results of other formulas or functions. For example, use DATE(2011,5,23) for the 23rd day of May,
2011. Problems can occur if dates are entered as text. For more information, see the NOW function.
Remarks:
The software stores dates as sequential serial numbers so they can be used in calculations. January 1, 1900 is
serial number 1, and January 1, 2011 is serial number 40544 because it is 40,544 days after January 1, 1900. For
more information, see the NOW function.
Values returned by the YEAR, MONTH and DAY functions will be Gregorian values regardless of the display
format for the supplied date value. For example, if the display format of the supplied date is Hijri (Hijri calendar:
The lunar calendar that is used in Islamic regions.), the returned values for the YEAR, MONTH and DAY
functions will be values associated with the equivalent Gregorian date.
Example:
MONTH(15-Apr-2011) = 4
MROUND
Description: Returns a number rounded to the desired multiple.
Syntax: MROUND(Number, Multiple)
Number is the value to round.
Multiple is the multiple to which you want to round Number.
Remarks:
MROUND rounds up, away from zero, if the remainder of dividing Number by Multiple is greater than or equal
to half the value of Multiple.
Example:
MROUND(10, 3) = 9 [rounds 10 to a nearest multiple of 3]
Function Wizard Functions A
692 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
N
Description: Converts the specified value to a number. For example, if the value is a date, returns the serial number;
if the value is TRUE, returns 1; if the value if FALSE, returns 0.
Syntax: N(Value)
Value is the value you want converted. N converts values as listed in the following table.
Remarks:
It is not generally necessary to use the N function in a formula, because the software automatically converts values as
necessary. This function is provided for compatibility with other spreadsheet programs.
The software stores dates as sequential serial numbers so they can be used in calculations. January 1, 1900 is serial
number 1, and January 1, 2011 is serial number 40544 because it is 40,544 days after January 1, 1900. For more
information, see the NOW function.
Example:
Suppose A1 contains 7, A2 contains Even, A3 contains TRUE, and A4 contains 4/17/2011.
N(A1) = 7 [because A2 contains a number, 7 is returned]
N(A2) = 0 [because A3 contains text, 0 is returned]
N(A3) = 1 [because A4 is the logical value TRUE, 1 is returned]
N(A4) = 40650 [because A5 is a date, the serial number is returned]
N(7) = 0 [because 7 is text, 0 is returned]
NA
Description: Returns the error value associated with #N/A. #N/A is the error value that means no value is
available. Use NA to mark empty cells. By entering #N/A in cells where you are missing information, you can avoid
the problem of unintentionally including empty cells in your calculations. (When a formula refers to a cell containing
#N/A, the formula returns the #N/A error value.)
Syntax: NA( )
Remarks:
You can also type the value #N/A directly into a cell. The NA function is provided for compatibility with other
spreadsheet programs.
If Value is or refers to N returns
A number Value
A date, in one of the built-in date formats available
in the software
The serial number of that date
TRUE 1
FALSE 0
An error value, such as #DIV/0! The error value
Anything else 0
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 693
NEGBINOMDIST
Description: Returns the negative binomial distribution. NEGBINOMDIST returns the probability that there will be
Number_F failures before the Number_S-th success, when the constant probability of a success is Probability_S. This
function is similar to the binomial distribution, except that the number of successes is fixed, and the number of trials
is variable. Like the binomial, trials are assumed to be independent.
Syntax: NEGBINOMDIST(Number_F, Number_S, Probability_S)
Number_F is the number of failures.
Number_S is the threshold number of successes.
Probability_S is the probability of a success.
Remarks:
Number_F and Number_S must be integers.
Arguments must be numeric.
Probability_S must be => 0 and <= 1.
(Number_F + Number_S - 1) must be > 0.
The equation for the negative binomial distribution is:
where x is Number_F, r is Number_S, and p is Probability_S.
Example:
NEGBINOMDIST(10,5,0.25) = 0.055049
NORMDIST
Description: Returns the normal cumulative distribution.
Syntax: NORMDIST(x, Mean, Standard_dev, Cumulative)
x is the value for which you want the distribution.
Mean is the arithmetic mean of the distribution.
Standard_dev is the standard deviation of the distribution.
Cumulative is a logical value that determines the form of the function. If Cumulative is TRUE, NORMDIST
returns the cumulative distribution function; if FALSE, it returns the probability mass function.
Remarks:
Mean and Standard_dev must be numeric.
Standard_dev must be > 0.
Example:
Function Wizard Functions A
694 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
NORMDIST(42, 40, 1.5, TRUE) = 0.908789
NORMDIST(42, 40, 1.5, FALSE) = 0.10934005
NORMINV
Description: Returns the inverse of the normal cumulative distribution.
Syntax: NORMINV(Probability, Mean, Standard_dev)
Probability is a probability corresponding to the normal distribution.
Mean is the arithmetic mean of the distribution.
Standard_dev is the standard deviation of the distribution.
Remarks:
Arguments must be numeric.
Probability must be =>0 and <= 1.
Standard_dev must be > 0.
If Mean = 0 and Standard_dev = 1, NORMINV uses the standard normal distribution (see NORMSINV).
Example:
NORMINV(0.908789, 40, 1.5) = 42
NORMSDIST
Description: Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution. The distribution has a mean of 0 (zero) and a
standard deviation of one. Use this function in place of a table of standard normal curve areas.
Syntax: NORMSDIST(Z)
Z is the value for which you want the distribution.
Remarks:
Z must be numeric.
The equation for the standard normal density function is:
Example:
NORMSDIST(1.333333333) = 0.908789
NORMSINV
Description: Returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution. The distribution has a mean of zero
and a standard deviation of one.
Syntax: NORMSINV(Probability)
Probability is a probability corresponding to the normal distribution.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 695
Remarks:
Probability must be numeric.
Probability must be => 0 and <= 1.
Example:
NORMSINV(0.908789) = 1.3333
NOT
Description: Reverses the value of its arguments. Use NOT when you want to make sure a value is not equal to one
particular value.
Syntax: NOT(Logical)
Logical is a value or expression that can be evaluated to TRUE or FALSE.
Remarks:
If Logical is FALSE, NOT returns TRUE; if Logical is TRUE, NOT returns FALSE.
Example:
NOT(FALSE) = TRUE [reverses FALSE]
NOT(1 + 1 = 2) = FALSE [evaluates statement to TRUE and reverses value to FALSE]
NOW
Description: Returns the current date and time in the form of a serial number.
Syntax: NOW( )
Remarks:
The software stores dates as sequential serial numbers so they can be used in calculations. January 1, 1900 is
serial number 1, and January 1, 2011 is serial number 40544 because it is 40,544 days after January 1, 1900.
The software stores times as decimal fractions because time is considered a portion of a day.
Because dates and times are values, they can be added, subtracted and included in other calculations. You can
view a date as a serial value and a time as a decimal fraction by changing the format of the cell that contains the
date or time to General format.
Because the rules that govern the way that any calculation program interprets dates are complex, you should be as
specific as possible about dates whenever you enter them. This will produce the highest level of accuracy in your
date calculations.
Numbers to the right of the decimal point in the serial number represent the time; numbers to the left represent the
date. For example, the serial number .5 represents the time 12:00 noon.
The NOW function changes only when the worksheet is calculated or when a macro that contains the function is
run. It is not updated continuously.
Example:
If your computer's built-in clock is set to 12:30:00 P.M., 1-Jan-1987, then:
NOW() = 31778.52083
Ten minutes later:
NOW() = 31778.52778
Function Wizard Functions A
696 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
NPER
Description: Returns the number of periods for an investment based on periodic, constant payments and a constant
interest rate.
Syntax: NPER(Rate, Pmt, PV [FV], [Type])
For a more complete description of the arguments in Nper and for more information about annuity functions, see
the PV function.
Rate is the interest rate per period.
Pmt is the payment made each period; it cannot change over the life of the annuity. Typically, Pmt contains
principal and interest but no other fees or taxes.
PV is the present value, or the lump-sum amount that a series of future payments is worth right now.
FV is the future value, or a cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made. If FV is omitted, it is
assumed to be 0 (the future value of a loan, for example, is 0).
Type is the number 0 or 1 and indicates when payments are due.
Example:
NPER(12%/12, -100, -1000, 10000, 1) = 60
NPER(12%/12, -100, -1000, 10000) = 60
NPER(12%/12, -100, -1000) = -9.578
NPV
Description: Calculates the net present value of an investment with the discount rate and several future payments and
income.
Syntax: NPV(Rate, Value1, Value2, ...)
Rate is the rate of discount over the length of one period.
Value1, Value2, ... are 1 to 29 arguments representing the payments and income.
Value1, Value2, ... must be equally spaced in time and occur at the end of each period.
NPV uses the order of Value1, Value2, ... to interpret the order of cash flows. Be sure to enter your payment and
income values in the correct sequence.
Arguments that are numbers, empty cells, logical values or text representations of numbers are counted;
arguments that are error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers are ignored.
If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in that array or reference are counted. Empty cells, logical
values, text or error values in the array or reference are ignored.
Remarks:
The NPV investment begins one period before the date of the Value1 cash flow and ends with the last cash flow in
the list. The NPV calculation is based on future cash flows. If your first cash flow occurs at the beginning of the
Set Type equal to If payments are due
0 or omitted At the end of the period
1 At the beginning of the period
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 697
first period, the first value must be added to the NPV result, not included in the values arguments. For more
information, see the examples below.
If n is the number of cash flows in the list of values, the formula for NPV is:
NPV is similar to the PV function (present value). The primary difference between PV and NPV is that PV allows
cash flows to begin either at the end or at the beginning of the period. Unlike the variable NPV cash flow values,
PV cash flows must be constant throughout the investment. For information about annuities and financial
functions, see the PV function.
NPV is also related to the IRR function (internal rate of return). IRR is the rate for which NPV equals zero:
NPV(IRR(...), ...) = 0.
Example:
Suppose you're considering an investment in which you pay $10,000 one year from today and receive an annual
income of $3,000, $4,200 and $6,800 in the three years that follow. Assuming an annual discount rate of 10 percent,
the net present value of this investment is:
NPV(10%, -10000, 3000, 4200, 6800) = $1,188.44
In the preceding example, you include the initial $10,000 cost as one of the values, because the payment occurs at the
end of the first period.
ODD
Description: Returns a number rounded up to the nearest odd integer.
Syntax: ODD(Number)
Number is the value to round.
Remarks:
Number must be numeric.
Regardless of the sign of Number, a value is rounded up when adjusted away from zero. If Number is an odd
integer, no rounding occurs.
Example:
ODD(1.5) = 3 [rounds 1.5 up to the nearest odd integer]
OFFSET
Description: Returns a reference to a range that is a specific number of rows and columns from a cell or range of
cells.
Syntax: OFFSET(Reference, Rows, Columns, [Height], [Width])
Reference is the reference from which you want to base the offset. Reference must be a reference to a cell or range
of adjacent cells.
Function Wizard Functions A
698 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Rows is the number of rows, up or down, that you want the upper-left cell to refer to. Using 5 as the Rows
argument specifies that the upper-left cell in the reference is five rows below reference. Rows can be positive
(which means below the starting reference) or negative (which means above the starting reference).
Columns is the number of columns, to the left or right, that you want the upper-left cell of the result to refer to.
Using 5 as the Columns argument specifies that the upper-left cell in the reference is five columns to the right of
reference. Columns can be positive (which means to the right of the starting reference) or negative (which means
to the left of the starting reference).
Height is the height, in number of rows, that you want the returned reference to be. Height must be a positive
number.
Width is the width, in number of columns, that you want the returned reference to be. Width must be a positive
number.
Remarks:
If Rows and Columns offset Reference over the edge of the worksheet, OFFSET returns the #REF! error value.
If Height or Width is omitted, it is assumed to be the same height or width as Reference.
OFFSET doesn't actually move any cells or change the selection; it just returns a reference. OFFSET can be used
with any function expecting a reference argument. For example, the formula SUM(OFFSET(C2, 1, 2, 3, 1))
calculates the total value of a 3-row by 1-column range that is 1 row below and 2 columns to the right of cell C2.
Example:
OFFSET(C3, 2, 3, 1, 1) = F5. If you enter this formula on a worksheet, the software displays the value contained
in cell F5.
OFFSET(C3:E5, -1, 0, 3, 3) = C2:E4
OFFSET(C3:E5, 0, -3, 3, 3) = #REF!
OR
Description: Returns TRUE if any one argument is true. Returns FALSE if all arguments are false.
Syntax: OR(Logical1, Logical2, ...)
Logical1, Logical2, ... are 1 to 30 conditions you want to test that can be either TRUE or FALSE.
Remarks:
The arguments must either be the logical values TRUE or FALSE, or the arguments must be arrays or references
that contain logical values.
If an array or reference argument contains text or empty cells, those values are ignored.
If the specified range contains no logical values, OR returns the #VALUE! error value.
Example:
OR(TRUE) = TRUE [all arguments are TRUE]
OR(1 + 1 = 1, 2 + 2 = 5) = FALSE [all arguments evaluate to FALSE]
OR(TRUE, FALSE, TRUE) = TRUE [at least one argument is TRUE]
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 699
PERMUT
Description: Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects that can be selected from a number of
objects. A permutation is any set or subset of objects or events where internal order is significant. Permutations are
different from combinations, for which the internal order is not significant. Use this function for lottery-style
probability calculations.
Syntax: PERMUT(Number, Number_chosen)
Number is an integer that describes the number of objects.
Number_chosen is an integer that describes the number of objects in each permutation.
Remarks:
Both arguments must be integers.
Number must be > 0 and Number_chosen must be => 0.
Number must be => Number_chosen.
The equation for the number of permutations is:
Example:
Suppose you want to calculate the odds of selecting a winning lottery number. Each lottery number contains three
numbers, each of which can be between 0 (zero) and 99, inclusive. The following function calculates the number
of possible permutations:
PERMUT(100,3) = 970200
PI
Description: Returns the value of pi.
Syntax: PI()
Example:
PI() = 3.14159265358979
PMT
Description: Calculates the loan payment for a loan based on constant payments and constant interest rates.
Syntax: PMT(Rate, Nper, PV, [Fv], [Type])
For a more complete description of the arguments in PMT, see the PV function.
Rate is the interest rate for the loan.
Nper is the total number of payments for the loan.
PV is the present value, or the total amount that a series of future payments is worth now; also known as the
principal.
Fv is the future value, or a cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made. If Fv is omitted, it is
assumed to be 0 (zero), that is, the future value of a loan is 0.
Function Wizard Functions A
700 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Type is the number 0 (zero) or 1 and indicates when payments are due.
Remarks:
The payment returned by PMT includes principal and interest but no taxes, reserve payments or fees sometimes
associated with loans.
Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying Rate and Nper. If you make monthly
payments on a four-year loan at an annual interest rate of 12 percent, use 0.12/12 for Rate and 4*12 for Nper. If
you make annual payments on the same loan, use 0.12 percent for Rate and 4 for Nper.
Examples:
Monthly payment for a loan with the above terms.
PMT(.08/12, 10, 10000, 0, 0) = -1,037.03
Monthly payment for a loan with the above terms, except payments are due at the beginning of the period.
PMT(.08/12, 10, 10000, 0, 1) = -1,030.16
Amount to save each month to have 50,000 at the end of 18 years.
PMT(.06/12, 18*12, 0, 50000, 0) = -129.08
POISSON
Description: Returns the Poisson distribution. A common application of the Poisson distribution is predicting the
number of events over a specific time, such as the number of cars arriving at a toll plaza in 1 minute.
Syntax: POISSON(x, Lambda, Cumulative)
x is the number of events.
Lambda is the expected numeric value.
Cumulative is a logical value that determines the form of the probability distribution returned. If Cumulative is
TRUE, POISSON returns the cumulative Poisson probability that the number of random events occurring will be
between 0 and x inclusive; if FALSE, it returns the Poisson probability mass function that the number of events
occurring will be exactly x.
Remarks:
x must be an integer.
x and Lambda must be numeric.
x and Lambda must be > 0.
POISSON is calculated as follows.
For Cumulative = FALSE:
Set Type equal to If payments are due
0 or omitted At the end of the period
1 At the beginning of the period
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 701
For Cumulative = TRUE:
Example:
POISSON(2,5,TRUE) = 0.124652
POISSON(2,5,FALSE) = 0.084224
PPMT
Description: Returns the principal payment for a specific period of an investment based on periodic constant
payments and a constant interest rate.
Syntax: PPMT(Rate, Per, Nper, PV, Fv, Type])
For a more complete description of the arguments in PPMT, see the PV function.
Rate is the interest rate per period.
Per specifies the period and must be in the range 1 to Nper.
Nper is the total number of payment periods in an annuity.
PV is the present value - the total amount that a series of future payments is worth now.
Fv is the future value, or a cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made.
Type is the number 0 or 1 and indicates when payments are due.
Remarks:
Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying Rate and Nper. If you make monthly
payments on a four-year loan at 12 percent annual interest, use 0.12/12 for Rate and 4*12 for Nper. If you make
annual payments on the same loan, use 0.12 for Rate and 4 for Nper.
Examples:
Payment on principle for the first month of loan.
PPMT(.10/12, 1, 2*12, 2000,0,0) = -75.62
Principal payment for the last year of the loan with the above terms.
PPMT(.08, 10, 10, 200000,0,0) = -27,598.05
Set Type equal to If payments are due
0 or omitted At the end of the period
1 At the beginning of the period
Function Wizard Functions A
702 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
PRODUCT
Description: Multiplies all the numbers given as arguments and returns the product.
Syntax: PRODUCT(Number1, Number2, ...)
Number1, Number2, ... are 1 to 30 numbers that you want to multiply.
Remarks:
Arguments that are numbers, logical values or text representations of numbers are counted; arguments that are
error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers cause errors.
If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in the array or reference are counted. Empty cells, logical
values, text or error values in the array or reference are ignored.
Example:
If cells A2:C2 contain 5, 15, and 30:
PRODUCT(A2:C2) = 2,250
PRODUCT(A2:C2, 2) = 4,500
PRODUCT
Description: Multiplies all the numbers given as arguments and returns the product.
Syntax: PRODUCT(Number1, Number2, ...)
Number1, Number2, ... are 1 to 30 numbers that you want to multiply.
Remarks:
Arguments that are numbers, logical values or text representations of numbers are counted; arguments that are
error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers cause errors.
If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in the array or reference are counted. Empty cells, logical
values, text or error values in the array or reference are ignored.
Example:
If cells A2:C2 contain 5, 15, and 30:
PRODUCT(A2:C2) = 2,250
PRODUCT(A2:C2, 2) = 4,500
PROPER
Description: Capitalizes the first letter in a text string and any other letters in text that follow any character other than
a letter. Converts all other letters to lowercase letters.
Syntax: PROPER(Text)
Text is text enclosed in quotation marks, a formula that returns text or a reference to a cell containing the text you
want to partially capitalize.
Example:
PROPER(this is a TITLE) = This Is A Title
PROPER(2-cent's worth) = 2-Cent'S Worth
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 703
PROPER(76BudGet) = 76Budget
PV
Description: Based on an investment, returns the present value. The present value is the total amount that a series of
future payments is worth now. For example, when you borrow money, the loan amount is the present value to the
lender.
Syntax: PV(Rate, Nper, Pmt, [Fv], [Type])
Rate is the interest rate per period. For example, if you obtain an automobile loan at a 10 percent annual interest
rate and make monthly payments, your interest rate per month is 0.10/12, or 0.0083.
Nper is the total number of payment periods in an annuity. For example, if you get a four-year car loan and make
monthly payments, your loan has 4*12 (or 48) periods. You would enter 48 into the formula for Nper.
Pmt is the payment made each period and cannot change over the life of the annuity. Typically, Pmt includes
principal and interest but no other fees or taxes. For example, the monthly payments on a $10,000, four-year car
loan at 12 percent are $263.33. You would enter -263.33 into the formula as the Pmt.
Fv is the future value, or a cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made. For example, if you
want to save $50,000 to pay for a special project in 18 years, then $50,000 is the future value. You could then
make a conservative guess at an interest rate and determine how much you must save each month. If Fv is
omitted, you must include the Pmt argument.
Type is the number 0 or 1 and indicates when payments are due.
Remarks:
Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying Rate and Nper. If you make monthly
payments on a four-year loan at 12 percent annual interest, use 0.12/12 for Rate and 4*12 for Nper. If you make
annual payments on the same loan, use 0.12 for Rate and 4 for Nper.
Example:
Present value of an annuity with an annual interest of 8% over 20 years with a monthly payment of 500 with a
zero lump sum at the end, and payments made at the end of the period.
PV(.08/12, 12*20, 500, 0, 0) = -59,777.15
The result is negative because it represents money that you would pay, an outgoing cash flow. If you are asked to
pay (60,000) for the annuity, you would determine this would not be a good investment because the present value
of the annuity (59,777.15) is less than what you are asked to pay.
QUOTIENT
Description: Returns the integer portion of a division. Use this function when you want to discard the remainder of a
division.
Syntax: QUOTIENT(Numerator, Denominator)
Numerator is the dividend.
Denominator is the divisor.
Set Type equal to If payments are due
0 or omitted At the end of the period
1 At the beginning of the period
Function Wizard Functions A
704 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Remarks:
Both arguments must be numeric.
Example:
QUOTIENT(5, 2) = 2 [integer portion of 5/2]
QUOTIENT(4.5, 3.1) = 1 [integer portion of (4.5/3.1)]
QUOTIENT(-10, 3) = -3 [integer portion of -10/3]
RADIANS
Description: Converts degrees to radians.
Syntax: RADIANS(Angle)
Angle is an angle in degrees that you want to convert.
Example:
RADIANS(270) = 4.712389 [270 degrees as radians or 3p/2 radians]
RAND
Description: Returns an evenly distributed number greater than or equal to 0 and less than 1. There are no arguments
associated with this function. A new random real number is returned every time the worksheet is calculated.
Syntax: RAND()
Remarks:
To generate a random real number between a and b, use:
RAND()*(b-a)+a
Example:
RAND()= 0.301044 [a random number between 0 and 1 (varies)]
RANK
Description: Returns the rank based on the binomial distribution. The rank can be found by solving the following
equation for Z:
Syntax: RANK(Sample Size, Rank Position, Point)
Sample Size is the total number of independent trials in the binomial equation.
Rank Position is the trial number, or order number.
Point is the cumulative probability.
Example:
RANK(10, 5, 0.5) = 0.4516939211
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 705
RATE
Description: Returns per period the interest rate of an annuity. RATE is calculated by iteration and can have zero or
more solutions. If the successive results of RATE do not converge to within 0.0000001 after 100 iterations, RATE
returns the #NUM! error value.
Syntax: RATE(Nper, Pmt, PV, [FV], [Type], [Guess])
For a complete description of the arguments Nper, Pmt, PV, FV, and Type, see the PV function.
Nper is the total number of payment periods in an annuity.
Pmt is the payment made each period and cannot change over the life of the annuity. Typically, Pmt includes
principal and interest but no other fees or taxes. If Pmt is omitted, you must include the FV argument.
PV is the present value - the total amount that a series of future payments is worth now.
FV is the future value, or a cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made. If FV is omitted, it is
assumed to be 0 (the future value of a loan, for example, is 0).
Type is the number 0 or 1 and indicates when payments are due.
Guess is your guess for what the rate will be.
If you omit Guess, it is assumed to be 10 percent.
If RATE does not converge, try different values for Guess. RATE usually converges if Guess is between 0 and 1.
Remarks:
Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying Guess and Nper. If you make monthly
payments on a four-year loan at 12 percent annual interest, use 12%/12 for Guess and 4*12 for Nper. If you make
annual payments on the same loan, use 12% for Guess and 4 for Nper.
Example:
Suppose you have a four-year $8,000 loan with monthly payments of $200.
RATE(4 * 12, -200, 8000) = 1% (monthly rate of the loan)
RATE(4 * 12, -200, 8000) * 12 = 0.09241767 or 9.24% (annual rate of the loan)
RDT_NPB_C
Description: Uses the non-parametric binomial test planning method to return the demonstrated confidence level for
a given sample size, number of failures and reliability.
Syntax: RDT_NPB_C(Sample Size, Failures, Reliability)
Sample Size is the number of units in the test.
Failures is the number of failures during the test.
Reliability is the reliability achieved during the test.
Set Type equal to If payments are due
0 or omitted At the end of the period
1 At the beginning of the period
Function Wizard Functions A
706 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Remarks:
Reliability must be a value greater than 0 and less than 1.
Example:
RDT_NPB_C(100,5,0.95) = 0.3840008737
RDT_NPB_N
Description: Uses the non-parametric binomial test planning method to return the required sample size for a given
reliability, number of failures and confidence level.
Syntax: RDT_NPB_N(Reliability, Failures, Confidence Level)
Reliability is the reliability achieved during the test.
Failures is the number of failures during the test.
Confidence Level is the confidence level of the results achieved during the test.
Remarks:
Reliability must be a value greater than 0 and less than 1.
Confidence Level must be a value greater than 0 and less than 1.
Example:
RDT_NPB_N(0.85,10,0.81) = 89.97267072
RDT_NPB_R
Description: Uses the non-parametric binomial test planning method to return the demonstrated reliability for a given
sample size, number of failures and confidence level.
Syntax: RDT_NPB_R(Sample Size, Failures, Reliability)
Sample Size is the number of units in the test.
Failures is the number of failures during the test.
Confidence Level is the confidence level of the results achieved during the test.
Remarks:
Confidence Level must be a value greater than 0 and less than 1.
Example:
RDT_NPB_R(100,5,0.95) = 0.8977708346
REPLACE
Description: Replaces part of a text string with a different text string based on the number of characters you specify.
Syntax: REPLACE(Old_text, Start_num, Num_chars, New_text)
Old_text is text in which you want to replace some characters.
Start_num is the position of the character in Old_text that you want to replace with New_text.
Num_chars is the number of characters in Old_text that you want REPLACE to replace with New_text.
New_text is the text that will replace characters in Old_text.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 707
Example:
REPLACE(abcdefghijk, 6, 5, *) = abcde*k [replaces five characters, starting with the sixth character]
REPLACE(2010, 3, 2, 11) = 2011 [replaces the last two digits of 2010 with 11]
REPLACE(123456, 1, 3, @) = @456 [replaces the first three characters with @]
REPLACEB
Description: Replaces part of a text string with a different text string based on the number of bytes you specify. This
function is for use with double-byte characters.
Syntax: REPLACEB(Old_text, Start_num, Num_bytes, New_text)
Old_text is text in which you want to replace some characters.
Start_num is the position of the character in Old_text that you want to replace with New_text.
Num_bytes is the number of bytes in Old_text that you want REPLACEB to replace with New_text.
New_text is the text that will replace characters in Old_text.
Example:
In the following example, the first three double-byte characters in cell C4 are replaced with :
REPLACEB(C4, 1, 6, )
REPT
Description: Repeats text a given number of times. Use REPT to fill a cell with a number of instances of a text string.
Syntax: REPT(Text, Number_times)
Text is the text you want to repeat.
Number_times is a positive number specifying the number of times to repeat Text. If Number_times is 0 (zero),
REPT returns (empty text). If Number_times is not an integer, it is truncated. The result of the REPT function
cannot be longer than 32,767 characters.
Remarks:
If Number_times is 0 (zero), REPT returns (empty text).
If Number_times is not an integer, it is truncated.
The result of the REPT function cannot be longer than 32,767 characters, or REPT returns #VALUE!.
Example:
REPT(*-, 3) = *-*-*-
REPT(-, 10) = ----------
RIGHT
Description: Replaces part of a text string with a different text string based on the number of bytes you specify.
Syntax: RIGHT(Text, [Num_chars])
Text is the text string containing the characters you want to extract.
Num_chars specifies the number of characters you want RIGHT to extract.
Function Wizard Functions A
708 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Remarks:
Num_chars must be greater than or equal to 0.
If Num_chars is greater than the length of Text, RIGHT returns all of Text.
If Num_chars is omitted, it is assumed to be 1.
Example:
RIGHT(Sale Price, 5) = Price [the last 5 characters of the string]
RIGHT(Stock Number) = r [the last character of the string]
ROUND
Description: Rounds a number to a specified number of digits.
Syntax: ROUND(Number, Num_Digits)
Number is the number you want to round.
Num_Digits specifies the number of digits to which you want to round Number.
Remarks:
If Num_Digits is greater than 0 (zero), then Number is rounded to the specified number of decimal places.
Example:
ROUND(2.15, 1) = 2.2 [rounds 2.15 to one decimal place]
ROUNDDOWN
Description: Rounds a number down, toward zero.
Syntax: ROUNDDOWN(Number, Num_Digits)
Number is any real number that you want rounded down.
Num_Digits is the number of digits to which you want to round Number.
Remarks:
ROUNDDOWN behaves like ROUND, except that it always rounds a number down.
If Num_Digits is greater than 0 (zero), then Number is rounded down to the specified number of decimal places.
Example:
ROUNDDOWN(3.2, 0) = 3 [rounds 3.2 down to zero decimal places]
ROUNDUP
Description: Rounds a number up, away from zero.
Syntax: ROUNDUP(Number, Num_Digits)
Number is any real number that you want rounded up.
Num_Digits is the number of digits to which you want to round Number.
Remarks:
ROUNDUP behaves like ROUND, except that it always rounds a number up.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 709
Example:
ROUNDUP(3.2,0) = 4 [rounds 3.2 up to zero decimal places]
ROW
Description: Based on a reference, returns the row number.
Syntax: ROW(Reference)
Reference is the cell or range of cells for which you want the row number.
If Reference is omitted, it is assumed to be the reference of the cell in which the ROW function appears.
If Reference is a range of cells, and if ROW is entered as a vertical array, ROW returns the row numbers of
Reference as a vertical array.
Reference cannot refer to multiple areas.
Example:
If ROW is entered in A2, then:
ROW() = 2 [the row in which the formula appears]
ROW(C10) = 10 [the row of the reference]
ROWS
Description: Based on a reference or array, returns the number of rows.
Syntax: ROWS(Array)
Array is an array, an array formula or a reference to a range of cells for which you want the number of rows.
Example:
ROWS(A1:C4) = 4
ROWS({1, 2, 3; 4, 5, 6}) = 2
SEARCH
Description: Returns the number of the character at which a specific character or text string is first found, reading
from left to right. SEARCH is not case sensitive and can include wildcard characters.
SEARCH is intended for use with languages that use the single-byte character set (SBCS). SEARCH always
counts each character, whether single-byte or double-byte, as 1, no matter what the default language setting is.
Syntax: SEARCH(Find_text, Within_text, [Start_num])
Find_text is the text you want to find.
Within_text is the text in which you want to search for Find_text.
Start_num is the character number in Within_text at which you want to start searching.
Remarks:
Use SEARCH to determine the location of a character or text string within another text string so that you can use
the MID or REPLACE functions to change the text.
SEARCH is not case sensitive. If you want to do a case sensitive search, you can use FIND.
Function Wizard Functions A
710 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
You can use the wildcard characters, question mark (?) and asterisk (*), in Find_text. A question mark matches
any single character; an asterisk matches any sequence of characters. If you want to find an actual question mark
or asterisk, type a tilde (~) before the character.
If Find_text is not found, the #VALUE! error value is returned.
If Start_num is omitted, it is assumed to be 1.
Start_num must be greater than 0 (zero) and less than or equal to the length of Within_text.
Use Start_num to skip a specified number of characters. Using SEARCH as an example, suppose you are working
with the text string AYF0093.YoungMensApparel. To find the number of the first Y in the descriptive part of
the text string, set Start_num equal to 8 so that the serial-number portion of the text is not searched. SEARCH
begins with character 8, finds Find_text at the next character and returns the number 9. SEARCH always returns
the number of characters from the start of Within_text, counting the characters you skip if Start_num is greater
than 1.
Example:
SEARCH(e, Statements, 6) = 7 (position of the first e in the first string above, starting at the sixth position)
SEARCH(margin, Profit Margin) = 8 (position of margin in Profit Margin)
REPLACE(Profit Margin, SEARCH(margin, Profit Margin), 6, Amount) = Profit Amount (replaces
Margin with Amount)
In the following example, SEARCH returns 2 because is in the second position within the string.
SEARCH( , ) = 2
SEARCHB
Description: Returns the number of the double-byte character at which a specific character or text string is first
found, reading from left to right. SEARCHB is not case sensitive and can include wildcard characters.
SEARCHB is intended for use with languages that use the double-byte character set (DBCS). SEARCHB counts
each double-byte character as 2 when you have enabled the editing of a language that supports DBCS and then set
it as the default language. Otherwise, SEARCHB counts each character as 1.
Syntax: SEARCHB(Find_text, Within_text, [Start_num])
Find_text is the text you want to find.
Within_text is the text in which you want to search for Find_text.
Start_num is the character number in Within_text at which you want to start searching.
Remarks:
Use SEARCHB to determine the location of a character or text string within another text string so that you can use
the REPLACEB function to change the text.
SEARCHB is not case sensitive. If you want to do a case sensitive search, you can use FINDB.
You can use the wildcard characters, question mark (?) and asterisk (*), in Find_text. A question mark matches
any single character; an asterisk matches any sequence of characters. If you want to find an actual question mark
or asterisk, type a tilde (~) before the character.
If Find_text is not found, the #VALUE! error value is returned.
If Start_num is omitted, it is assumed to be 1.
Start_num must be greater than 0 (zero) and less than or equal to the length of Within_text.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 711
Use Start_num to skip a specified number of characters. Using SEARCH as an example, suppose you are working
with the text string AYF0093.YoungMensApparel. To find the number of the first Y in the descriptive part of
the text string, set Start_num equal to 8 so that the serial-number portion of the text is not searched. SEARCH
begins with character 8, finds Find_text at the next character, and returns the number 9. SEARCH always returns
the number of characters from the start of Within_text, counting the characters you skip if Start_num is greater
than 1.
Example:
In the following example, SEARCHB returns 3 because each character is counted by its bytes; the first character has
2 bytes, so the second character begins at byte 3.
SEARCHB( , ) = 3
SECOND
Description: Returns the number of seconds (0 to 59) from the specified time value. The time can be entered in a
valid text format (in quotes) or as a serial number. For example, =SECOND(8:48:30 AM) and
=SECOND(0.3670138889) both return 30.
Syntax: SECOND(Serial_number)
Serial_number is the time that contains the seconds you want to find. Times may be entered as text strings within
quotation marks (for example, 6:45 PM), as decimal numbers (for example, 0.78125, which represents 6:45
PM), or as results of other formulas or functions (for example, TIMEVALUE(6:45 PM)). Note that the
Serial_number must be in quotation marks.
Remarks:
Time values are a portion of a date value and represented by a decimal number (for example, 12:00 PM is
represented as 0.5 because it is half of a day).
Example:
SECOND(4:48:18 PM) = 18
SECOND(4:48 PM) = 0
SIGN
Description: Returns the sign of a number: 1 if the number is positive, zero if the number is zero, or -1 if the number
is negative.
Syntax: SIGN(Number)
Number is any real number.
Example:
SIGN(10) = 1
SIGN(4-4) = 0
SIGN(-0.00001) = -1
SIN
Description: Returns the sine of the given angle.
Syntax: SIN(Number)
Number is the angle in radians for which you want the sine.
Function Wizard Functions A
712 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Remarks:
If your argument is in degrees, multiply it by PI/180 or use the RADIANS function to convert it to radians.
Example:
SIN(PI()/2) = 1 [sine of pi/2 radians]
SINH
Description: Returns the hyperbolic sine of a number.
Syntax: SINH(Number)
Number is any real number.
Remarks:
The formula for the hyperbolic sine is:
Example:
SINH(1) = 1.175201194 [the hyperbolic sine of 1]
SLN
Description: Based on one period, returns the straight-line depreciation on an asset.
Syntax: SLN(Cost, Salvage, Life)
Cost is the initial cost of the asset.
Salvage is the value at the end of the depreciation (sometimes called the salvage value of the asset).
Life is the number of periods over which the asset is being depreciated (sometimes called the useful life of the
asset).
Example:
Suppose you've bought a truck for $30,000 that has a useful life of 10 years and a salvage value of $7,500. The
depreciation allowance for each year is:
SLN(30000, 7500, 10) = $2,250
SQRT
Description: Returns the positive square root.
Syntax: SQRT(Number)
Number is the number for which you want the square root.
Remarks:
Number cannot be negative.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 713
Example:
SQRT(16) = 4
STANDARDIZE
Description: Returns a normalized value.
Syntax: STANDARDIZE(x, Mean, Standard_dev)
x is the value you want to normalize.
Mean is the arithmetic mean of the distribution.
Standard_dev is the standard deviation of the distribution.
Remarks:
Standard_dev must be > 0.
The equation for the normalized value is:
Example:
STANDARDIZE(42,40,1.5) = 1.333333
STDEV
Description: Estimates standard deviation based on a sample. Non-numeric values are ignored. The standard
deviation is a measure of how widely values are dispersed from the average value (the mean).
Syntax: STDEV(Number1, Number2, ...)
Number1, Number2, ... are 1 to 30 number arguments corresponding to a sample of a population. You can also
use a single array or a reference to an array instead of arguments separated by commas.
Remarks:
STDEV assumes that its arguments are a sample of the population. If your data represents the entire population,
then compute the standard deviation using STDEVP.
The standard deviation is calculated using the unbiased or n-1 method.
Arguments can either be numbers or names, arrays or references that contain numbers.
Logical values and text representations of numbers that you type directly into the list of arguments are counted.
If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in that array or reference are counted. Empty cells, logical
values, text or error values in the array or reference are ignored.
Arguments that are error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers cause errors.
Function Wizard Functions A
714 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
STDEV uses the following formula:
where x is the sample mean AVERAGE(Number1, Number2,) and n is the sample size.
Example:
Suppose 10 tools stamped from the same machine during a production run are collected as a random sample and
measured for breaking strength. The sample values (1345, 1301, 1368, 1322, 1310, 1370, 1318, 1350, 1303, 1299)
are stored in A2:E3, respectively. STDEV estimates the standard deviation of breaking strengths for all the tools.
STDEV(A2:E3) = 27.46
STDEVP
Description: Calculates standard deviation based on the entire population given as arguments. Non-numeric values
are ignored. The standard deviation is a measure of how widely values are dispersed from the average value (the
mean).
Syntax: STDEVP(Number1, Number2, ...)
Number1, Number2, ... are 1 to 30 number arguments corresponding to a population. You can also use a single
array or a reference to an array instead of arguments separated by commas.
Remarks:
STDEVP assumes that its arguments are the entire population. If your data represents a sample of the population,
then compute the standard deviation using STDEV.
For large sample sizes, STDEV and STDEVP return approximately equal values.
The standard deviation is calculated using the biased or n method.
Arguments can either be numbers or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.
Logical values, and text representations of numbers that you type directly into the list of arguments are counted.
If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in that array or reference are counted. Empty cells, logical
values, text, or error values in the array or reference are ignored.
Arguments that are error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers cause errors.
STDEVP uses the following formula:
where x is the sample mean AVERAGE(Number1, Number2, ) and n is the sample size.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 715
Example:
Using the same data from the STDEV example and assuming that only 10 tools are produced during the production
run, STDEVP measures the standard deviation of breaking strengths for all the tools.
STDEVP(A2:E3) = 26.05
SUBSTITUTE
Description: Substitutes New_text for Old_text in a text string. Use SUBSTITUTE when you want to replace
specific text in a text string; use REPLACE when you want to replace any text that occurs in a specific location in a
text string.
Syntax: SUBSTITUTE(Text, Old_text, New_text, [Instance_num])
Text is the text or the reference to a cell containing text for which you want to substitute characters.
Old_text is the text you want to replace.
New_text is the text you want to replace Old_text with.
Instance_num specifies which occurrence of Old_text you want to replace with New_text. If you specify
Instance_num, only that instance of Old_text is replaced. Otherwise, every occurrence of Old_text in text is
changed to New_text.
Example:
SUBSTITUTE(Sales Data, Sales, Cost) = Cost Data [substitutes Cost for Sales]
SUBSTITUTE(Quarter 1, 2011, 1, 2, 3) =Quarter 1, 2012 [substitutes third instance of 1 with 2]
SUM
Description: Adds all the numbers in a range of cells.
Syntax: SUM(Number1, Number2, ...)
Number1, Number2, ... are 1 to 30 arguments for which you want the total value or sum.
Remarks:
Numbers, logical values and text representations of numbers that you type directly into the list of arguments are
counted. See the first and second examples following.
If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in that array or reference are counted. Empty cells, logical
values or text in the array or reference are ignored. See the third example following.
Arguments that are error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers cause errors.
Example:
SUM(3, 2) = 5 [adds 3 and 2]
SUM(5, 15, TRUE) = 21 [adds 5, 15 and 1, because the text values are translated into numbers, and the logical
value TRUE is translated into the number 1]
If cells A2:A6 contain -5, 15, 30, '5 and TRUE:
SUM(A2:A4) = 40 [adds the first three numbers in the column]
SUM(A2:A4, 15) = 55 [adds the first three numbers in the column, and 15]
SUM(A5, A6, 2) = 2 [adds the values in the last two rows, and 2. Because nonnumeric values in references are not
translated, the values in the column are ignored]
Function Wizard Functions A
716 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
SUMIF
Description: Adds the cells specified by the criteria.
Syntax: SUMIF(Range, Criteria, [Sum_range])
Range is the range of cells you want evaluated.
Criteria is the criteria in the form of a number, expression, or text that defines which cells will be added. For
example, Criteria can be expressed as 32, 32, >32, apples.
Sum_range are the actual cells to sum.
Remarks:
The cells in Sum_range are summed only if their corresponding cells in Range match the criteria.
If Sum_range is omitted, the cells in Range are summed.
You can use the wildcard characters, question mark (?) and asterisk (*), in criteria. A question mark matches any
single character; an asterisk matches any sequence of characters. If you want to find an actual question mark or
asterisk, type a tilde (~) before the character.
The software provides additional functions that can be used to analyze your data based on a condition. For
example, to count the number of occurrences of a string of text or a number within a range of cells, use the
COUNTIF function. To have a formula return one of two values based on a condition, such as a sales bonus based
on a specified sales amount, use the IF function.
Example:
Suppose A1:A4 contain the following property values for four homes: $100,000, $200,000, $300,000, $400,000,
respectively. B1:B4 contain the following sales commissions on each of the corresponding property values: $7,000,
$14,000, $21,000, $28,000.
SUMIF(A1:A4, >160000, B1:B4) = $63,000 [sum of the commissions for property values over 160000]
SUMSQ
Description: Returns the sum of the squares of the arguments.
Syntax: SUMSQ(Number1, Number2, ...)
Number1, Number2, ... are 1 to 30 arguments for which you want the sum of the squares. You can also use a
single array or a reference to an array instead of arguments separated by commas.
Remarks:
Arguments can either be numbers or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.
Numbers, logical values, and text representations of numbers that you type directly into the list of arguments are
counted.
If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in that array or reference are counted. Empty cells, logical
values, text, or error values in the array or reference are ignored.
Arguments that are error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers cause errors.
Example:
SUMSQ(3, 4) = 25 [the sum of the squares of 3 and 4]
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 717
SYD
Description: Based on a specified period, returns the sum-of-years-digits depreciation of an asset.
Syntax: SYD(Cost, Salvage, Life, Per)
Cost is the initial cost of the asset.
Salvage is the value at the end of the depreciation (sometimes called the salvage value of the asset).
Life is the number of periods over which the asset is being depreciated (sometimes called the useful life of the
asset).
Per is the period and must use the same units as life.
Remarks:
SYD is calculated as follows:
Example:
If you've bought a truck for $30,000 that has a useful life of 10 years and a salvage value of $7,500, the yearly
depreciation allowance for the first year is:
SYD(30000,7500,10,1) = $4,090.91
The yearly depreciation allowance for the tenth year is:
SYD(30000,7500,10,10) = $409.09
T
Description: Returns the text referred to by value.
Syntax: T(Value)
Value is the value you want to test.
Remarks:
If Value is or refers to text, T returns value. If Value does not refer to text, T returns (empty text).
You do not generally need to use the T function in a formula because the software automatically converts values
as necessary. This function is provided for compatibility with other spreadsheet programs.
Example:
If cells A2:A4 contain Rainfall, 19 and TRUE:
T(A2) = Rainfall [because the cell value is text, the text is returned]
T(A3) = () [because the cell value is a number, empty text is returned]
T(A4) = () [because the third value is a logical value, empty text is returned]
Function Wizard Functions A
718 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
TAN
Description: Returns the tangent of a number.
Syntax: TAN(Number)
Number is the angle in radians for which you want the tangent.
Remarks:
If your argument is in degrees, multiply it by PI/180 or use the RADIANS function to convert it to radians.
Example:
TAN(0.785) = 0.99920 [the tangent of 0.785 radians]
TANH
Description: Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a number.
Syntax: TANH(Number)
Number is any real number.
Remarks:
The formula for the hyperbolic tangent is:
Example:
TANH(0.5) = 0.462117 [the hyperbolic tangent of 0.5]
TEXT
Description: Converts a value to text in a specific format.
Syntax: TEXT(Value, Format_text)
Value is a numeric value, a formula that evaluates to a numeric value or a reference to a cell containing a numeric
value.
Format_text is a number format in text form from in the Category box on the Number tab in the Format Cells
dialog box. Format_text cannot contain an asterisk (*) and cannot be the General number format.
Remarks:
You can continue to use numbers formatted with TEXT in formulas, because the software converts numbers
entered as text values to numbers when it calculates.
Example:
If cells A2:A3 contain Buchanan and Dodsworth, respectively, and cells B2:B3 contain 2800 and 40%, respectively:
A2& sold &TEXT(B2, $0.00)& worth of units. = Buchanan sold $2800.00 worth of units. [combines
contents into a phrase]
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 719
A3& sold &TEXT(B3,0%)& of the total sales. = Dodsworth sold 40% of the total sales. [combines
contents into a phrase]
TIME
Description: Returns the serial number for a specified time, where the HOUR, MINUTES and SECONDS are
separated by commas. For example, =TIME(16,48,10) returns 0.700115741, which is the serial number that is
equivalent to 4:48:10 PM.
The decimal number returned by TIME is a value ranging from 0 (zero) to 0.99999999, representing the times
from 0:00:00 (12:00:00 AM) to 23:59:59 (11:59:59 PM.).
Syntax: TIME(Hour, Minute, Second)
Hour is a number from 0 (zero) to 32767 representing the hour. Any value greater than 23 will be divided by 24
and the remainder will be treated as the Hour value. For example, TIME(27, 0, 0) = TIME(3, 0, 0) = .125 or 3:00
AM.
Minute is a number from 0 to 32767 representing the minute. Any value greater than 59 will be converted to hours
and minutes. For example, TIME(0, 750, 0) = TIME(12, 30, 0) = .520833 or 12:30 PM.
Second is a number from 0 to 32767 representing the second. Any value greater than 59 will be converted to
hours, minutes, and seconds. For example, TIME(0, 0, 2000) = TIME(0, 33, 22) = .023148 or 12:33:20 AM.
Remarks:
Time values are a portion of a date value and represented by a decimal number (for example, 12:00 PM is
represented as 0.5 because it is half of a day).
Example:
TIME(12, 0, 0) = 0.5 [this is the serial number that is equivalent to 12:00:00 PM.]
TIME(16, 48,10) = 0.700115741 [this is the serial number that is equivalent to 4:48:10 PM.]
TIMEVALUE
Description: Returns the serial number of a time that has been entered as a text string, where 12:00:00 AM is 0 (zero)
and 11:59:59 P.M. is 0.9999884259. Note that the Time_text must be in quotation marks.
Syntax: TIMEVALUE(Time_text)
Time_text is a text string that represents a time in any one of the softwares time formats. For example, 6:45 PM
and 18:45 text strings within quotation marks that represent time.
Remarks:
Date information in Time_text is ignored.
Time values are a portion of a date value and represented by a decimal number (for example, 12:00 PM is
represented as 0.5 because it is half of a day).
Example:
TIMEVALUE(2:24 AM) = 0.1
TIMEVALUE(22-Aug-1955 6:35 AM) = 0.274305556
Function Wizard Functions A
720 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
TODAY
Description: Returns the current date as a serial number. The serial number is the date-time code used by the
software for date and time calculations.
Syntax: TODAY( )
Remarks:
The software stores dates as sequential serial numbers so they can be used in calculations. January 1, 1900 is
serial number 1, and January 1, 2011 is serial number 40544 because it is 40,544 days after January 1, 1900. For
more information, see the NOW function.
TRIM
Description: Removes all spaces from text except for single spaces between words. Use TRIM on text that you have
received from another application that may have irregular spacing.
Syntax: TRIM(Text)
Text is the text from which you want spaces removed.
Example:
TRIM( First Quarter Earnings ) = First Quarter Earnings [removes leading and trailing spaces from the text
in the formula]
TRUE
Description: Returns the value TRUE. There are no arguments associated with this function.
Syntax: TRUE( )
Remarks:
The software interprets the word TRUE as 1.
Example:
TRUE() = TRUE
TRUNC
Description: Truncates a number to an integer by removing the fractional part of the number.
Syntax: TRUNC(Number)
Number is the number you want to truncate.
Remarks:
TRUNC and INT are similar in that both return integers. TRUNC removes the fractional part of the number. INT
rounds numbers down to the nearest integer based on the value of the fractional part of the number. INT and
TRUNC are different only when using negative numbers: TRUNC (-4.3) returns -4, but INT (-4.3) returns -5
because -5 is the lower number.
Example:
TRUNC(8.9) = 8 [the integer part of 8.9]
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 721
TYPE
Description: Returns the type of value, for example, number = 1, text = 2, logical value = 4, error value = 16, and
array = 64. Use TYPE when the behavior of another function depends on the type of value in a particular cell.
Syntax: TYPE(Value)
Value can be any software value, such as a number, text, logical value, and so on.
Remarks:
TYPE is most useful when you are using functions that can accept different types of data, such as ARGUMENT
and INPUT. Use TYPE to find out what type of data is returned by a function or formula.
You cannot use TYPE to determine whether a cell contains a formula. TYPE only determines the type of the
resulting, or displayed, value. If value is a cell reference to a cell that contains a formula, TYPE returns the type of
the formula's resulting value.
Example:
If A1 contains the text Smith, then:
TYPE(A1) = 2 [checks the type of the value]
TYPE(MR. &A1) = 2 [checks the type of Mr. Smith]
TYPE(2 + A1) = 16 [checks the type of the formula, which returns the error #VALUE!]
TYPE({1, 2; 3, 4}) = 64 [checks the type of an array constant]
UPPER
Description: Converts text to uppercase.
Syntax: UPPER(Text)
Text is the text you want converted to uppercase. Text can be a reference or text string.
Example:
UPPER(total) = TOTAL
If E5 contains yield, then:
UPPER(E5) = YIELD
If Value is TYPE returns
Number 1
Text 2
Logical value 4
Error value 16
Array 64
Function Wizard Functions A
722 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
VALUE
Description: Converts a text string that represents a number to a number. For example, if the value is a date, returns
the serial number; if the value is TRUE, returns 1; if the value is FALSE, returns 0.
Syntax: VALUE(Text)
Text is the text enclosed in quotation marks or a reference to a cell containing the text you want to convert.
Remarks:
Text can be in any of the constant number, date or time formats recognized by the software. If Text is not in one of
these formats, VALUE returns the #VALUE! error value.
You do not generally need to use the VALUE function in a formula because the software automatically converts
text to numbers as necessary. This function is provided for compatibility with other spreadsheet programs.
Example:
VALUE($1,000) = 1,000 [the number equivalent of the string]
VALUE(16:48:00) - VALUE(12:00:00) = 0.2 or 4:48 [the serial number equivalent to 4 hours and 48
minutes, which is 16:48:00-12:00:00]
VAR
Description: Estimates variance based on a sample (ignores logical values and text in the sample).
Syntax: VAR(Number1, Number2, ...)
Number1, Number2, ... are 1 to 30 number arguments corresponding to a sample of a population.
Remarks:
VAR assumes that its arguments are a sample of the population. If your data represents the entire population, then
compute the variance by using VARP.
Arguments can either be numbers or names, arrays or references that contain numbers.
Logical values, and text representations of numbers that you type directly into the list of arguments are counted.
If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in that array or reference are counted. Empty cells, logical
values, text or error values in the array or reference are ignored.
Arguments that are error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers cause errors.
VAR uses the following formula:
where x is the sample mean AVERAGE(Number1, Number2,) and n is the sample size.
Example:
Suppose 10 tools stamped from the same machine during a production run are collected as a random sample and
measured for breaking strength. The sample values (1345, 1301, 1368, 1322, 1310, 1370, 1318, 1350, 1303, 1299)
are stored in A2:A11, respectively. VAR estimates the variance for the breaking strength of the tools.
VAR(A2:A11) = 754.2666667 [the variance for the breaking strength of the tools]
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 723
VARP
Description: Calculates variance based on the entire population (ignores logical values and text in the population).
Syntax: VARP(Number1, Number2, ...)
Number1, Number2, ... are 1 to 30 number arguments corresponding to a population.
Remarks:
VARP assumes that its arguments are the entire population. If your data represents a sample of the population,
then compute the variance by using VAR.
Arguments can either be numbers or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.
Logical values, and text representations of numbers that you type directly into the list of arguments are
counted.
If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in that array or reference are counted. Empty cells,
logical values, text or error values in the array or reference are ignored.
Arguments that are error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers cause errors.
The equation for VARP is:
where x is the sample mean AVERAGE(Number1, Number2, ) and n is the sample size.
Example:
Using the data from the VAR example and assuming that only 10 tools are produced during the production run,
VARP measures the variance of breaking strengths for all the tools.
VARP(A2:A11) = 678.84 [the variance of breaking strengths for all the tools, assuming that only 10 tools are
produced]
VDB
Description: For a period you specify, returns the depreciation of an asset, using the double-declining balance
method. VDB stands for variable declining balance.
Syntax: VDB(Cost, Salvage, Life, Start_Period, End_Period)
Cost is the initial cost of the asset.
Salvage is the value at the end of the depreciation (sometimes called the salvage value of the asset).
Life is the number of periods over which the asset is being depreciated (sometimes called the useful life of the
asset).
Start_Period is the starting period for which you want to calculate the depreciation. Start_Period must use the
same units as life.
End_Period is the ending period for which you want to calculate the depreciation. End_Period must use the same
units as life.
Function Wizard Functions A
724 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Remarks:
All arguments must be positive numbers.
Example:
Suppose a factory purchases a new machine. The machine costs $2,400 and has a lifetime of 10 years. The salvage
value of the machine is $300. The following examples show depreciation over several periods. The results are
rounded to two decimal places.
VDB(2400, 300, 3650, 0, 1) = $1.32 [the first day's depreciation]
VDB(2400, 300, 120, 0, 1) = $40.00 [the first month's depreciation]
VDB(2400, 300, 10, 0, 1) = $480.00 [the first year's depreciation]
VDB(2400, 300, 120, 6, 18) = $396.31 [the depreciation between the sixth month and the eighteenth month]
VLOOKUP
Description: Looks for a value in the leftmost column of a table and returns a value from the column number you
specify.
The V in VLOOKUP stands for vertical. Use VLOOKUP instead of HLOOKUP when your comparison values
are located in a column to the left of the data that you want to find.
Syntax: VLOOKUP(Lookup_value, Table_array, Col_index_num, [Range_lookup])
Lookup_value is the value to search in the first column of the table array. Lookup_value can be a value or a
reference. If Lookup_value is smaller than the smallest value in the first column of Table_array, VLOOKUP
returns the #N/A error value.
Table_array is two or more columns of data. Use a reference to a range or a range name. The values in the first
column of Table_array are the values searched by Lookup_value. These values can be text, numbers or logical
values. Uppercase and lowercase text are equivalent.
Col_index_num is the column number in Table_array from which the matching value must be returned. A
Col_index_num of 1 returns the value in the first column in Table_array; a Col_index_num of 2 returns the value
in the second column in Table_array, and so on. Range_lookup is a logical value that specifies whether you want
VLOOKUP to find an exact match or an approximate match:
If TRUE or omitted, an exact or approximate match is returned. If an exact match is not found, the next largest
value that is less than Lookup_value is returned.
The values in the first column of Table_array must be placed in ascending sort order; otherwise, VLOOKUP
may not give the correct value. You can put the values in ascending order by choosing Sheet Options > Sheet
Actions > Sort > Sort Ascending.
If FALSE, VLOOKUP will only find an exact match. In this case, the values in the first column of Table_array
do not need to be sorted. If there are two or more values in the first column of Table_array that match the
Lookup_value, the first value found is used. If an exact match is not found, the error value #N/A is returned.
Range_lookup is a logical value that specifies whether you want VLOOKUP to find an exact match or an
approximate match. If TRUE or omitted, an approximate match is returned. In other words, if an exact match is
not found, the next largest value that is less than Lookup_value is returned. If FALSE, VLOOKUP will find an
exact match. If one is not found, the error value #N/A is returned.
Remarks:
Col_index_num must be greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to the number of columns in Table_array.
A.2 Spreadsheet Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 725
When searching text values in the first column of Table_array, ensure that the data in the first column of
Table_array does not have leading spaces, trailing spaces, inconsistent use of straight and curly quotation marks,
or nonprinting characters. In these cases, VLOOKUP may give an incorrect or unexpected value.
When searching number or date values, ensure that the data in the first column of Table_array is not stored as text
values. In this case, VLOOKUP may give an incorrect or unexpected value.
If Range_lookup is FALSE and Lookup_value is text, then you can use the wildcard characters, question mark (?)
and asterisk (*), in Lookup_value. A question mark matches any single character; an asterisk matches any
sequence of characters. If you want to find an actual question mark or asterisk, type a tilde (~) preceding the
character.
Example:
On the preceding worksheet, where the range A4:C12 is named Range:
VLOOKUP(1, Range, 1, TRUE) = 0.946
VLOOKUP(1, Range, 2) = 2.17
VLOOKUP(1, Range, 3, TRUE) = 100
VLOOKUP(.746, Range, 3, FALSE) = 200
VLOOKUP(0.1, Range, 2, TRUE) = #N/A, because 0.1 is less than the smallest value in column A
VLOOKUP(2, Range, 2, TRUE) = 1.71
WEEKDAY
Description: Returns the day of the week corresponding to a specified date.
Syntax: WEEKDAY(Serial_number, Return_type)
Serial_number is a sequential number that represents the date of the day you are trying to find. Dates should be
entered by using the DATE function, or as results of other formulas or functions. For example, use
DATE(2011,5,23) for the 23rd day of May, 2011. Problems can occur if dates are entered as text. For more
information, see the NOW function. Note that the Serial_number must be in quotation marks; the date can be
entered a text string in a valid date format or as a serial number.
Return_type is a number that determines the type of return value. If Return_type is 1, Sunday = 1 and Saturday =
7; if Return_type is 2, Monday = 1 and Sunday = 7; if Return_type is 3, Monday = 0 and Sunday = 6.
Function Wizard Functions A
726 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Remarks:
The software stores dates as sequential serial numbers so they can be used in calculations. January 1, 1900 is
serial number 1, and January 1, 2011 is serial number 40544 because it is 40,544 days after January 1, 1900. For
more information, see the NOW function.
Example:
If your computer's built-in clock is set to 12:30:00 P.M., 1-Jan-1987, then:
NOW() = 31778.52083
Ten minutes later:
NOW() = 31778.52778
WEIBULL
Description: Returns the Weibull distribution. Use this distribution in reliability analysis, such as calculating a
device's mean time to failure.
Syntax: WEIBULL(Number, Beta, Eta, Cumulative)
Number is the value at which to evaluate the function.
Beta is a parameter to the distribution.
Eta is a parameter to the distribution.
Cumulative determines the form of the function.
Remarks:
Number, Beta and Eta must be numeric.
Number must be greater than or equal to 0.
Beta and Eta must be greater than 0.
The equation for the Weibull cumulative distribution function is:
The equation for the Weibull probability density function is:
When Beta = 1, WEIBULL returns the exponential distribution with:
A.3 Word Report Template Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 727
Example:
WEIBULL(105, 20, 100, TRUE) = 0.929581
WEIBULL(105, 20, 100, FALSE) = 0.035589
YEAR
Description: Returns the year from the specified date value. The date can be entered as text in a valid date format or
as a serial number. For example, the function returns 2011 if you enter 12/11/2011 or 40888.
Syntax: YEAR(Serial_number)
Serial_number is the date of the year you want to find. Dates should be entered by using the DATE function, or as
results of other formulas or functions. For example, use DATE(2011,5,23) for the 23rd day of May, 2011.
Problems can occur if dates are entered as text. For more information, see the NOW function. Note that the
Serial_number must be in quotation marks.
Remarks:
The software stores dates as sequential serial numbers so they can be used in calculations. January 1, 1900 is
serial number 1, and January 1, 2011 is serial number 40544 because it is 40,544 days after January 1, 1900. For
more information, see the NOW function.
Values returned by the YEAR, MONTH and DAY functions will be Gregorian values regardless of the display
format for the supplied date value. For example, if the display format of the supplied date is Hijri (Hijri calendar:
The lunar calendar that is used in Islamic regions.), the returned values for the YEAR, MONTH and DAY
functions will be values associated with the equivalent Gregorian date.
Example:
YEAR(7/5/2011) = 2011
YEAR(2005/05/01) = 2005
YEAR(0.007) = 1900
YEAR(35981.007) = 1998
A.3 Word Report Template Functions
This section provides the functions that are used with Word report templates within Weibull++s and ALTAs
Function Wizard. The general functions are presented in the first section, followed by the data source functions,
model calculation functions, confidence bounds functions and table functions.
A.3.1 Word Report Template General Functions
This section presents the general functions that are available within Weibull++ and ALTA Word report templates.
Current Date
Description: Returns the current date.
Field Format: [CurDate]
Example:
[CurDate]
Returns:
2/8/2012
Function Wizard Functions A
728 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Current Time
Description: Returns the current time.
Field Format: [CurTime]
Example:
[CurTime]
Returns:
2:52 PM
Project Name
Description: Returns the project name.
Field Format: [Project]
Example:
[Project]
Returns:
Project 1
Repository Location
Description: Returns the path/filename of the Synthesis repository.
Field Format: [REPNAME]
Example:
[REPNAME]
Returns:
C:\Documents and Settings\username\My Documents\ReliaSoft\Files\RSRepository.rsrp
User Company
Description: Returns the company name specified in the User Login and Contact Information window.
Field Format: [Company]
Example:
[Company]
Returns:
ReliaSoft Corporation
User Name
Description: Returns the user name specified in the User Login and Contact Information window.
Field Format: [User]
A.3 Word Report Template Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 729
Example:
[User]
Returns:
John User
A.3.2 Word Report Template Data Source Functions
This section presents the data source functions that are available within Weibull++ and ALTA Word report templates.
Activation Energy
Description: Returns the value of activation energy. Available only for the Generalized Eyring,
Arrhenius, Eyring, Temperature-Humidity, Temperature-Nonthermal and Cumulative Damage models.
Field Format: [ACT_ENERGY(Source Number)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
Example:
[ACT_ENERGY(1)]
Returns:
0.0252
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Conditional Probability of Failure
Description: Returns the conditional probability of failure given the specified start and additional times.
Field Format: [CONDPROBFAIL_S(Source Number)(Time; Additional Time)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Time and Additional Time are the mission start time and the mission duration, respectively, of the period for
which the conditional probability of failure is calculated.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Time and Additional Time values must be greater than 0.
Example:
[CONDPROBFAIL_S(1)(100;200)]
Returns:
0.0163
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Function Wizard Functions A
730 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Conditional Reliability
Description: Returns the conditional reliability given the specified start and additional times.
Field Format: [CONDRELIABILITY_S(Source Number)(Time; Additional Time)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Time and Additional Time are the mission start time and the mission duration, respectively, of the period for
which the conditional reliability is calculated.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Time and Additional Time values must be greater than 0.
Example:
[CONDRELIABILITY_S(1)(100;200)]
Returns:
0.9998
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Cost per Unit Time
Description: Returns the cost per unit time of performing a preventive maintenance action
(planned replacement) at a given time interval.
Field Format: [COSTPERUNITTIME(Source Number)(Time; Planned; Unplanned)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Time is the time interval at which the preventive maintenance action will be performed.
Planned is the cost of performing a planned replacement of the component.
Unplanned is the cost of performing an unplanned replacement of the component.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Time, Planned and Unplanned values must be greater than 0.
Example:
[COSTPERUNITTIME(1)](100;5;3)
Returns:
0.999992796
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
A.3 Word Report Template Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 731
Data Entry
Description: Returns the value from the specified cell in the selected data source. Use
numbers to identify both the row and column (e.g., for cell A2 in the data sheet, enter 2 for the row and 1 for the
column).
Field Format: [DATAENTRY(Source Number)(Row; Column)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Row is the row number in the data sheet.
Column is the column number in the data sheet.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Row and Column values must be greater than 0.
Example:
[DATAENTRY(1)(1;2)]
Returns:
F
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Data Type
Description: Returns the life data type (e.g., Individual Time-to-Failure with Suspensions).
Field Format: [DTYPE(Source Number)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
Example:
[DTYPE(1)]
Returns:
Grouped Time-to-Failure with Suspensions
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Expected Failures
Description: Returns the expected number of failures for the specified period of time for
one unit. If the data source contains failure times for non-repairable systems, the result is accurate when the start time
is close to 0 and the end time is less than the MTTF value. If the data source contains the times to the first failure of a
repairable system, the result is valid for any start and end time values.
Field Format: [EFAILURES(Source Number)(Start Time; End Time)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Start Time and End Time are the start age and additional operating time duration, respectively, of the period for
which the number of failures are calculated.
Function Wizard Functions A
732 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Start Time and End Time values must be greater than 0.
Example:
[EFAILURES(1)(500,200)]
Returns:
0.2920
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Failure Rate
Description: Returns the value of the failure rate at the specified time.
Field Format: [FAILURERATE(Source Number)(Time)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Time is the time at which the failure rate is calculated.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Time value must be greater than 0.
Example:
[FAILURERATE(1)(100)]
Returns:
0.0003
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Fisher Matrix
Description: Returns a value from the Fisher variance/covariance matrix. Enter numbers to identify the row and
column in the matrix table. Note that the full table is displayed in the 'Quick Results Report' for the calculated data
sheet.
Field Format: [FMATRIX(Source Number)(Row; Column)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Row is the row number of the data sheet.
Column is the column number of the data sheet.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Row and Column values must be greater than 0.
Example:
[FMATRIX(1)(1;1)]
A.3 Word Report Template Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 733
Returns:
0.0145057558
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Mean
Description: Returns the value of MTTF (Mean Time to Failure).
Field Format: [AMEAN(Source Number)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
Example:
[AMEAN(1)]
Returns:
100.7358778
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
PDF
Description: Returns the pdf value at the specified time.
Field Format: [PDF(Source Number)(Time)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Time is the time at which the pdf value is calculated.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Time value must be greater than 0.
Example:
[PDF(1)]
Returns:
0.0067
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Predicted Failures
Description: Returns the expected number of failures if all of the suspensions in the
current data source operate for a specified additional amount of time. For example, if the data sheet contains 20 units
suspended at 100 hour and you enter 100 for Time, the function returns the expected number of failures (repairs)
when those 20 units continue operating from 100 to 200 hours. Not available for stress-dependent models.
Field Format: [EFAILURESS(Source Number)(Time)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Time is the additional time of operation of the suspensions (in addition to the current age of each suspension).
Function Wizard Functions A
734 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Time value must be greater than 0.
Example:
[EFAILURESS(1)(100)]
Returns:
490
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Probability of Failure
Description: Returns the probability of failure at the specified time.
Field Format: [PROBFAIL(Source Number)(Time)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Time is the mission end time.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Time value must be greater than 0.
Example:
[PROBFAIL(1)(100)]
Returns:
0.5211
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Reliability
Description: Returns the reliability at the specified time.
Field Format: [RELIABILITY(Source Number)(Time)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Time is the mission end time.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Time value must be greater than 0.
Example:
[RELIABILITY(1)(100)]
Returns:
0.4789
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
A.3 Word Report Template Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 735
Scale Parameter
Description: Returns the value of the scale parameter of the fitted model. Only available for
stress-dependent models. Time required only for Cumulative Damage model with time-varying stresses.
Field Format: [SCALEPARMETER(Source Number)(Time)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Time is the time at which the scale parameter is calculated. This is required only when the source data sheet uses
the Cumulative Damage model with time-varying stresses.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Time value must be greater than 0.
Example:
[SCALEPARMETER(1)(100)]
Returns:
1.4470E+4
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Standard Deviation
Description: Returns the standard deviation of the fitted model, which provides a measure of the spread of the failure
times. The standard deviation is the square root of the variance.
Field Format: [ASTDEV(Source Number)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
Example:
[ASTDEV(1)]
Returns:
37.53284511
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Time at Probability of Failure
Description: Returns the time corresponding to the specified probability of failure.
Field Format: [TIMEATPF(Source Number)(Probability of Failure)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Probability of Failure is the unreliability.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Probability of Failure value must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Function Wizard Functions A
736 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Example:
[TIMEATPF(1)(0.9)]
Returns:
1422
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Time at Reliability
Description: Returns the time corresponding to the specified reliability.
Field Format: [TIMEATR(Source Number)(Reliability)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Reliability is the reliability.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Reliability value must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Example:
[TIMEATR(1)(0.9)]
Returns:
155.52
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Variance
Description: Returns the variance of the fitted model, which provides a measure of the
spread of the failure times.
Field Format: [AVAR(Source Number)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
Example:
[AVAR(1)]
Returns:
1408.714462
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
A.3 Word Report Template Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 737
A.3.3 Word Report Template Confidence Bounds Functions
This section presents the confidence bounds functions that are available within Weibull++ and ALTA Word report
templates.
Bound on Conditional Probability of Failure
Description: Returns the 1-sided bound at the specified confidence level on the conditional probability of failure
given the specified start and additional times.
Field Format: [BOUNDCONDPROB(Source Number)(Time; Additional Time; Confidence Level)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Time and Additional Time are the mission start time and the mission duration, respectively, of the period for
which the conditional probability of failure is calculated.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Time and Additional Time values must be greater than 0
The Confidence Level value must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Example:
[BOUNDCONDPROB(1)(5;1;0.1)]
Returns:
0.3421
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Bound on Conditional Reliability
Description: Returns the 1-sided bound at the specified confidence level on the conditional reliability given the
specified start and additional times.
Field Format: [BOUNDCONDREL(Source Number)(Time; Additional Time; Confidence Level)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Time and Additional Time are the mission start time and the mission duration, respectively, of the period for
which the conditional reliability is calculated.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Time and Additional Time values must be greater than 0.
The Confidence Level value must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Example:
[BOUNDCONDREL(1)(100;200;0.9)]
Function Wizard Functions A
738 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Returns:
0447
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Bound on Failure Rate
Description: Returns the 1-sided bound at the specified confidence level on the failure rate at the specified time.
Field Format: [BOUNDFRATE(Source Number)(Time; Confidence Level)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Time is the time at which the failure rate is calculated.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Time value must be greater than 0.
The Confidence Level value must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Example:
[BOUNDFRATE(1)(100;0.9)]
Returns:
0.0190
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Bound on Mean
Description: Returns the 1-sided bound at the specified confidence level on the value of MTTF (Mean Time to
Failure).
Field Format: [BOUNDMEAN(Source Number)(Confidence Level)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Confidence Level value must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Example:
[BOUNDMEAN(1)(0.9)]
Returns:
123.4661
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
A.3 Word Report Template Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 739
Bound on Probability of Failure
Description: Returns the 1-sided bound at the specified confidence level on the probability of failure at the specified
time.
Field Format: [BOUNDPROB(Source Number)(Time; Confidence Level)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Time is the time at which the probability of failure is calculated.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Time value must be greater than 0.
The Confidence Level value must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Example:
[BOUNDPROB(1)(100;0.9)]
Returns:
0.6398
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Bound on Reliability
Description: Returns the 1-sided bound at the specified confidence level on the reliability at the specified time.
Field Format: [BOUNDREL(Source Number)(Time; Confidence Level)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Time is the time at which the reliability is calculated.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Confidence Level value must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Example:
[BOUNDREL(1)(100;0.9)]
Returns:
0.5880
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Function Wizard Functions A
740 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Bound on Time at Probability of Failure
Description: Returns the 1-sided bound at the specified confidence level on the time corresponding to the specified
probability of failure.
Field Format: [BOUNDTIMEATPROB(Source Number)(Probability of Failure; Confidence Level)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Probability of Failure is the unreliability value in question.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Probability of Failure and Confidence Level values must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Example:
[BOUNDTIMEATPROB(1)(0.25;0.9)]
Returns:
77.8488
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
Bound on Time at Reliability
Description: Returns the 1-sided bound at the specified confidence level on the time corresponding to the specified
reliability.
Field Format: [BOUNDTIMEATREL(Source Number)(Reliability; Confidence Level)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Reliability is the reliability value in question.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Reliability and Confidence Level values must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Example:
[BOUNDTIMEATREL(1)(0.9;0.9)]
Returns:
50.8550
Note that this value will vary depending on the source data set.
A.3 Word Report Template Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 741
A.3.4 Word Report Template Table Functions
This section presents the table functions that are available within Weibull++ and ALTA Word report templates.
Data Entries Table
Description: Returns a table containing all the entries on the associated data sheet.
Field Format: [TBLDATAENTRIES(Source Number)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
Example:
[TBLDATAENTRIES(1)]
Returns:
Note that these values will vary depending on the source data set.
Parameter Bounds Table
Description: Returns a table containing the parameter name and the 1-sided bound at the specified confidence level
for each parameter of the fitted model.
Field Format: [TBLPARAMBOUNDS(Source Number)(Confidence Level)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Confidence Level is the confidence level.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
Note: If the data sheet contains more than 500 rows, the software will not return a result.
Number
in State
Last
Inspected
State F
or S
State End
Time
Subset ID
5 0 F 6.12 Left Censored
16 6.12 F 19.92 Interval Censored
12 19.92 F 29.64 Interval Censored
18 29.64 F 35.4 Interval Censored
18 35.4 F 39.72 Interval Censored
2 39.72 F 45.24 Interval Censored
6 45.24 F 52.32 Interval Censored
17 52.32 F 63.48 Interval Censored
73 63.48 S 63.48 Right Censored
Function Wizard Functions A
742 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The Confidence Level value must be a positive value greater than 0 and less than 1.
Example:
[TBLPARAMBOUNDS(1)(0.9)]
Returns:
Note that these values will vary depending on the source data set.
Parameters Table
Description: Returns a table containing the parameter name and its value for each parameter of the fitted model.
Field Format: [TBLPARAMS(Source Number)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
Example:
[TBLPARAMS(1)]
Returns:
Note that these values will vary depending on the source data set.
Probability of Failure Bounds Table
Description: Returns a table containing the 1-sided probability of failure bounds based on a range of mission end
times.
Field Format: [TBLBOUNDSPROB(Source Number)(Start Time; End Time; Time Increment; Confidence Level)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Start time is the first mission time for which a probability of failure value will be returned.
End time is the last mission time for which a probability of failure value will be returned.
Time Increment is the value by which the time will increase.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
Parameter Lower Bound Upper Bound
Beta 1.8939 3.1768
Eta 786.8339 1031.4954
Parameter Value
Beta 1.9315
Eta 923.6791
Pnz 1.0000
A.3 Word Report Template Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 743
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Start Time and End Time values must be greater than 0.
The Time Increment value determines how many rows the table will contain between the start time and end time
values and it must be greater than or equal to 0. For example, if the Start Time value is 10, the End Time value is
100 and the Increment value is 10, then the table will have rows for each 10 hour increment from 10 and 100.
The Confidence Level value must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Example:
[TBLBOUNDSPROB(1)(100;1000;100;0.9)]
Returns:
Note that these values will vary depending on the source data set.
Probability of Failure Table
Description: Returns a table containing the probability of failure values based on a range of mission end times.
Field Format: [TBLPROB(Source Number)(Start Time; End Time; Time Increment)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Start time is the first mission time for which a probability of failure value will be returned.
End time is the last mission time for which a probability of failure value will be returned.
Time Increment is the value by which the time will increase.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Start Time and End Time values must be greater than 0.
Time
Lower Bound
(10%)
Probability of
Failure
Upper Bound
(10%)
100.0000 0.039856 0.013557 0.000212
200.0000 0.114048 0.050735 0.002722
300.0000 0.206997 0.107689 0.012003
400.0000 0.310495 0.180126 0.033824
500.0000 0.418470 0.263326 0.073841
600.0000 0.526066 0.352485 0.135580
700.0000 0.629199 0.443083 0.218190
800.0000 0.724263 0.531191 0.315206
900.0000 0.807927 0.613675 0.416352
1000.0000 0.877148 0.688302 0.512302
Function Wizard Functions A
744 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
The Time Increment value determines how many rows the table will contain between the start time and end time
values and it must be greater than or equal to 0. For example, if the Start Time value is 10, the End Time value is
100 and the Increment value is 10, then the table will have rows for each 10 hour increment from 10 and 100.
Example:
[TBLPROB(1)(100;1000;100)]
Returns:
Note that these values will vary depending on the source data set.
Reliability Bounds Table
Description: Returns a table containing the 1-sided reliability bounds based on a range of mission end times.
Field Format: [TBLBOUNDSREL(Source Number)(Start Time; End Time; Time Increment; Confidence Level)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Start time is the first mission time for which a reliability value will be returned.
End time is the last mission time for which a reliability value will be returned.
Time Increment is the value by which the time will increase.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Start Time value must be greater than or equal to 0.
The End Time value should be greater than or equal to the Start Time value.
The Time Increment value determines how many rows the table will contain between the start time and end time
values and it must be greater than or equal to 0. For example, if the Start Time value is 10, the End Time value is
100 and the Increment value is 10, then the table will have rows for each 10 hour increment from 10 and 100.
The Confidence Level value must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Time Probability of Failure
100.0000 0.013557
200.0000 0.050735
300.0000 0.107689
400.0000 0.180126
500.0000 0.263326
600.0000 0.352485
700.0000 0.443083
800.0000 0.531191
900.0000 0.613675
1000.0000 0.688302
A.3 Word Report Template Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 745
Example:
[TBLBOUNDSREL(1)(100;1000;100;0.9)]
Returns:
Note that these values will vary depending on the source data set.
Reliability Table
Description: Returns a table containing reliability values based on a range of mission end times.
Field Format: [TBLREL(Source Number)(Start Time; End Time; Time Increment)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Start time is the first mission time for which a reliability value will be returned.
End time is the last mission time for which a reliability value will be returned.
Time Increment is the value by which the time will increase.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Start Time value must be greater than or equal to 0.
The End Time value should be greater than or equal to the Start Time value.
The Time Increment value determines how many rows the table will contain between the start time and end time
values and it must be greater than or equal to 0. For example, if the Start Time value is 10, the End Time value is
100 and the Increment value is 10, then the table will have rows for each 10 hour increment from 10 and 100.
Example:
[TBLREL(1)(100;1000;100)]
Time
Lower Bound
(10%)
Reliability
Upper Bound
(10%)
100.0000 0.960144 0.986443 0.999788
200.0000 0.885952 0.949265 0.997278
300.0000 0.793003 0.892311 0.987997
400.0000 0.689505 0.819874 0.966176
500.0000 0.581530 0.736674 0.926159
600.0000 0.473934 0.647515 0.864420
700.0000 0.370801 0.556917 0.781810
800.0000 0.275737 0.468809 0.684794
900.0000 0.192073 0.386325 0.583648
1000.0000 0.122852 0.311698 0.487698
Function Wizard Functions A
746 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Returns:
Note that these values will vary depending on the source data set.
Time at Probability of Failure Table
Description: Returns a table containing the values for time based on a range of probabilities of failure.
Field Format: [TBLTIMEATPROB(Source Number)(Start PF; End PF; Increment)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Start PF is the lowest probability of failure for which a time will be calculated.
End PF is the highest probability of failure for which a time will be calculated.
Increment is the value by which the probability of failure will increase.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Start PF, End PF and Increment values must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
The Increment value determines how many rows the table will contain between the Start PF and End PF values.
For example, if the Start PF value is 0.1, the End PF value is 0.9 and the Increment value is 0.1, the table will have
rows for each 0.1 time increment from 0.1 and 0.9.
Example:
[TBLTIMEATPROB(1)(0.1;0.9;0.1)]
Returns:
Time Reliability
100.0000 0.986443
200.0000 0.949265
300.0000 0.892311
400.0000 0.819874
500.0000 0.736674
600.0000 0.647515
700.0000 0.556917
800.0000 0.468809
900.0000 0.386325
1000.0000 0.311698
Probability of Failure Time
0.1000 288.083581
0.2000 424.868563
A.3 Word Report Template Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 747
Note that these values will vary depending on the source data set.
Time at Reliability Table
Description: Returns a table containing the values for time based on a range of reliabilities.
Field Format: [TBLTIMEATREL(Source Number)(Start Reliability; End Reliability; Increment)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Start Reliability is the lowest reliability for which a time will be calculated.
End Reliability is the highest reliability for which a time will be calculated.
Increment is the value by which the reliability will increase.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Start Reliability, End Reliability and Increment values must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
The Increment value determines how many rows the table will contain between the Start Reliability and End
Reliability. For example, if the Start Reliability value is 0.1, the End Reliability value is 0.9 and the Increment
value is 0.1, the table will have rows for each 0.1 time increment from 0.1 and 0.
Example:
[TBLTIMEATREL(1)(0.1;0.9;0.1)]
Returns:
0.3000 541.642782
0.4000 652.350579
0.5000 764.028315
0.6000 882.803557
0.7000 1016.857046
0.8000 1181.749521
0.9000 1422.512474
Reliability Time
0.1000 1422.512474
0.2000 1181.749521
0.3000 1016.857046
0.4000 882.803557
0.5000 764.028315
Probability of Failure Time
Function Wizard Functions A
748 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Note that these values will vary depending on the source data set.
Time Bounds at Probability Table
Description: Returns a table containing the 1-sided time bounds based on a range of probabilities of failure.
Field Format: [TBLBOUNDSTIMEATPROB(Source Number)(Start PF; End PF; Increment; Confidence Level)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Start PF is the lowest probability of failure for which a time will be calculated.
End PF is the highest probability of failure for which a time will be calculated.
Increment is the value by which the probability of failure will increase.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Start PF, End PF and Increment values must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
The Increment value determines how many rows the table will contain between the Start PF and End PF values.
For example, if the Start PF value is 0.1, the End PF value is 0.9 and the Increment value is 0.1, the table will have
rows for each 0.1 time increment from 0.1 and 0.9.
The Confidence Level value must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Example:
[TBLBOUNDSTIMEATPROB(1)(0.1;0.9;0.1;0.9)]
Returns:
0.6000 652.350579
0.7000 541.642782
0.8000 424.868563
0.9000 288.083581
Probability of
Failure
Lower Bound
(10%)
Time
Upper Bound
(10%)
0.1000 1039.555711 288.083581 1719.343392
0.2000 889.788586 424.868563 1427.354638
0.3000 773.446222 541.642782 1242.391134
0.4000 671.032606 652.350579 1102.486070
0.5000 575.528081 764.028315 986.627836
0.6000 482.980800 882.803557 883.680163
Reliability Time
A.3 Word Report Template Functions
Weibull++ 8 Users Guide 749
Note that these values will vary depending on the source data set.
Time Bounds at Reliability Table
Description: Returns a table containing the 1-sided time bounds based on a based on a range of reliabilities.
Field Format: [TBLBOUNDSTIMEATREL(Source Number)(Start Reliability; End Reliability; Increment;
Confidence Level)]
Source Number is the associated data source number.
Start Reliability is the lowest reliability for which a time will be calculated.
End Reliability is the highest reliability for which a time will be calculated.
Increment is the value by which the reliability will increase.
Confidence Level is the percentage (entered as a decimal value) for the 1-sided confidence bounds.
Remarks:
The Source Number must be either 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The Start Reliability, End Reliability and Increment values must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
The Increment value determines how many rows the table will contain between the Start Reliability and End
Reliability. For example, if the Start Reliability value is 0.1, the End Reliability value is 0.9 and the Increment
value is 0.1, the table will have rows for each 0.1 time increment from 0.1 and 0.
The Confidence Level value must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Example:
[TBLBOUNDSTIMEATREL(1)(0.1;0.9;0.1;0.9)]
Returns:
0.7000 390.136227 1016.857046 784.875315
0.8000 292.931795 1181.749521 679.740487
0.9000 183.198038 1422.512474 546.870221
Reliability
Lower Bound
(10%)
Time
Upper Bound
(10%)
0.1000 183.198038 1422.512474 546.870221
0.2000 292.931795 1181.749521 679.740487
0.3000 390.136227 1016.857046 784.875315
0.4000 482.980800 882.803557 883.680163
0.5000 575.528081 764.028315 986.627836
0.6000 671.032606 652.350579 1102.486070
Probability of
Failure
Lower Bound
(10%)
Time
Upper Bound
(10%)
Function Wizard Functions A
750 http://Weibull.ReliaSoft.com
Note that these values will vary depending on the source data set.
0.7000 773.446222 541.642782 1242.391134
0.8000 889.788586 424.868563 1427.354638
0.9000 1039.555711 288.083581 1719.343392
Reliability
Lower Bound
(10%)
Time
Upper Bound
(10%)
RELIASOFT CORPORATION END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

This ReliaSoft Corporation End-User License Agreement is a legal agreement between You and ReliaSoft Corporation for ReliaSoft
Corporation's software products, which includes computer software and associated media and printed materials as well as on-line or
electronic documentation and any software updates or upgrades, henceforth collectively called the Application.
By installing, copying or otherwise using the Application, You agree to be bound by the terms of this End-User License Agreement and
represent and warrant that You are authorized to do so. If You do not agree to the terms of this End-User License Agreement, do not install
or use the Application and promptly return the Application to the vendor from which you obtained it within fourteen (14) calendar days from
the date of purchase for a full refund.
This Agreement is effective from the earlier of the date You open the sealed software package, if applicable, or install the Application, or
fourteen (14) calendar days from the date the Application was purchased or otherwise obtained from ReliaSoft Corporation, and continues
until expressly terminated by ReliaSoft Corporation.
This Application is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties, as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties.
This Application is licensed, not sold.

1 DEFINITIONS
1.1 Access. Means connected to or using the Application in any manner, either directly or indirectly through any middle tier
application or system.
1.2 Activate. Means the act of enabling the Application to operate on a specific computer by registering the Application
license with the ReliaSoft License Server and activating the Application for operation.
1.3 Location. Means the postal address of the site where the Application shall be installed. Location shall mean a single
physical location.
1.4 Named User(s). Means the individual(s) permitted to Access the Application, and it refers to specific individuals.
1.5 ReliaSoft License Server. Means the ReliaSoft server(s) that provides license activation, registered end-user
management, license management and license compliance enforcement services for the Application.
1.6 You. Means the licensee or the individual acquiring the license of this Application and, in either case, the affiliates,
employees, contractors and agents of said licensee or individual.
2 LICENSE GRANT
2.1 Grant. Subject to the license types defined in Section 3 hereof, You are granted a personal, non-exclusive and limited
license to install, Activate and Access the Application under the license type and in the quantities for which You have
obtained a license. You may install and Activate the Application onto designated equipment at the specified Location(s),
solely as necessary to use the Application in accordance with this Agreement. You may not distribute, sublicense, copy
(except as expressly permitted in this Agreement), transfer (except as expressly permitted in this Agreement), nor give
the Application to any third party.
2.2 Ownership. The Application and the information it contains, including any updates, upgrades, modifications and
derivative works, and all copies of them, are the property of ReliaSoft Corporation (or its licensors), and title remains with
ReliaSoft Corporation (or ReliaSoft Corporation's licensors). All applicable rights in patents, copyrights and trade secrets
in the Application are and will remain with ReliaSoft Corporation (or ReliaSoft Corporations licensors). No title to, or
ownership of, the Application or the information contained therein is transferred to You. ReliaSoft Corporation reserves
all rights not explicitly granted in this Agreement.
2.3 Rights to Developments. This Agreement also governs your use of any enhancements, data, or information provided
by ReliaSoft Corporation while performing any technical, training or consulting services. Any ideas, know-how,
techniques and software developed by ReliaSoft Corporation, including any enhancements or modifications made to the
Application by any person, are the property of ReliaSoft Corporation.
3 INSTALLATION AND USE
ReliaSoft Corporation licenses any Application under this Agreement on a per user basis. In other words, ReliaSoft Corporation
licenses an Application to each user and not to a particular computer. This Agreement grants You the following rights, depending
on the license You have obtained from ReliaSoft Corporation:
3.1 Single User License. The Single User License is licensed to one individual Named User. This is a perpetual license.
Each software package includes the installation media and one copy of the Application documentation per license, either
in physical/hard copy format and/or electronic format. The Named User may install, Activate and Access the Application
on up to three computers (i.e., multiple Locations), such as a work computer, a home computer and a portable computer,
provided that the Named User is the only person who uses this Application, at any time, in any of these Locations. In the
event that installation and activation of the Application is performed on three computers, the Named User will be required
to deactivate at least one installation before being allowed to Activate the Application again. There is a limit of 6
activations allowed per calendar year. The Single User License cannot be installed on multi-user capable environments
such as Windows, Terminal or Citrix servers.
Use of the Application on any of the computers by any user other than the Named User who has licensed the Application
is strictly prohibited. Such other users must obtain a separate license of the Application from ReliaSoft before any use.
3.2 Standard Network License. The Standard Network License is licensed to Named Users in an organization on a single
network of computers at a specified Location. This is a perpetual license. The software package includes the installation
media and one copy of the Application documentation per license, either in physical/hard copy format and/or electronic
format. Note: This is not a Concurrent Network License.
This license provides for a limited number of Named Users, dependent on the quantity of seats licensed, to install,
Activate and Access the Application, with a single activation allowed for each Named User. For example, if You purchase
a ten (10) seat Standard Network License, only ten (10) specific Named Users are allowed Access. If an eleventh (11
th
)
user wishes to have Access to the Application, an additional seat must be licensed. In the event that installation and
activation of the Application is required on a new computer for a Named User, the Named User will be required to
deactivate the active installation before being allowed to install and Activate the Application on the new computer. The
Standard Network License allows for installation on multi-user capable environments such as Windows, Terminal or
Citrix servers.
Under this license, no other copies can be installed on non-network computers, such as portable computers, home
computers, etc.
3.3 Concurrent Network License. The Concurrent Network License is licensed to an organization with multiple regular and
occasional Named Users on a single network of computers at a specified Location. This is a perpetual license. The
software package includes the installation media and one copy of the Application documentation per license, either in
physical/hard copy format and/or electronic format. Concurrent Network Licenses are specified by two attributes:
(i) Number of Named User Activations, which is the maximum number of computers on which a Named User can
Activate the Application (i.e., make it available for operation). More than one activation is allowed for each Named
User (e.g., to install the Application on both a work computer and a portable computer), but each activation is
counted toward the maximum available under the license.
(ii) Number of Concurrent Access Licenses (or CALs), which is the maximum number of computers that can Access the
Application at any given time.
For example, for a Concurrent Network License with thirty (30) Named User Activations and ten (10) CALs, the
Application can be installed and activated on up to 30 computers (e.g., by 30 Named Users each activating the
Application on only one computer, by 15 Named Users each activating the Application on two computers, etc.), and only
ten (10) of those computers will be able to Access the Application at the same time. If a user attempts to Access the
Application from an eleventh (11th) computer, the user must wait until one of the other ten users ends their session and
releases the CAL. The Concurrent Network License allows for installation on multi-user capable environments such as
Windows, Terminal or Citrix servers.
Under this license, Named Users are allowed to check out a CAL from the ReliaSoft License Server for a specified period
of time, effectively being guaranteed Access to the Application while simultaneously reducing the number of available
CALs for the rest of the user pool until the CAL is checked back into the ReliaSoft License Server or otherwise released.
This ability to check out a CAL from the ReliaSoft License Server is only available for Applications designated as Major
Version 8 and above (e.g., 8.0.1, 8.0.2, etc).
This type of license requires that you provide/allow internet access from the Application to the ReliaSoft License Server
at https://Validate.ReliaSoft.org. Concurrency authorization and control is managed and provided by this server. You
may need to modify and adjust your internet and/or firewall settings and/or set the aforementioned server as a trusted
location in order to use the Application. This requirement for connectivity to the ReliaSoft License Server for concurrency
authorization and control only applies for Applications designated as Major Version 8 and above (e.g., 8.0.1, 8.0.2, etc).
3.4 Asset-based License (only applies to Orion eAPI software). The Asset-based License is licensed to all direct
employees of a corporate entity within one or more specified Sites, depending on the license obtained. This license
excludes subcontractors, suppliers or temporary employees, unless they are using the Application inside an eligible Site
on a computer owned by that Site. This is a perpetual license.
Under this license, an unlimited number of Named Users from the licensing Site or Sites is allowed to Access the
Application; however, the license restricts the number of physical assets (commonly referred to as Asset TAGs) that can
be configured and managed within the Application. For this license, a Site is defined as a distinct physical address/site of
a corporate entity, where the physical assets being managed reside (e.g., a refinery or a mine or a power station). The
license specifically excludes broader geographical areas, such as cities or states/provinces (where multiple Sites might
exist).
3.5 Unlimited User License. The Unlimited User License is licensed to all direct employees of a corporate entity within a
specified Site, Division, or Corporation, depending on the type of license obtained. This license excludes subcontractors,
suppliers or temporary employees, unless they are using the Application inside an eligible facility on a computer owned
by that facility. This is a perpetual license.
Site-Wide License: Covers all direct employees working at a distinct physical address/site of a corporate entity. A Site-
Wide License specifically excludes broader geographical areas, such as cities or states/provinces (where multiple sites
might exist).
Division-Wide License: Covers all direct employees affiliated with a unique business unit of a corporate entity organized
in multiple divisions/business units. Examples of divisions are the Aerospace Division of a large conglomerate or the
Brakes Division of an automotive corporation. A Division-Wide license might additionally be restricted to a specific
geographical area to facilitate licensee requirements (for example, the Aerospace Division of a conglomerate in North
America).
Corporate-Wide License: Covers all direct employees of a corporate entity.
This license entitles the specified corporate entity at the specified Site/Division/Corporation to make and distribute copies
of the Application in executable code in its entirety, as supplied by ReliaSoft Corporation, OR install and distribute the
Application over a network. The software package includes the installation media and one copy of the Application
documentation per license, either in physical/hard copy format and/or electronic format. The Unlimited User License
allows for installation on multi-user capable environments such as Windows, Terminal or Citrix servers.
3.6 Rental License. Rental licenses are available for the Single User, Standard Network and Concurrent Network licenses.
The license terms are the same as the corresponding license type being rented except that the license expires according
to the term purchased. The rental fee will not be prorated or refunded if license rental is cancelled or not used in full. A
standard non-expiring license may be purchased at any time at the current Application list price.
3.7 Evaluation, Demo, No Save Demo, Beta, or Otherwise Expiring or Non-Expiring Licenses of any Type Provided
for Evaluation Purposes. These are Evaluation/Not for Sale licenses and, notwithstanding any other section of this
Agreement, You may not use the Application for commercial purposes, nor sell or otherwise transfer it for value.
Commercial purposes include the use of the Application in creation of publicly distributed computer software. You are
acquiring only the limited right to use a single copy of the Application solely for evaluation purposes and for a limited
time. ReliaSoft Corporation can terminate this Agreement at any time. You have no rights under any sections of this
Agreement other than those specifically allowed for within this section (Section 3.7). THE APPLICATION IS LICENSED
AS IS with no representations or warranties of any kind. Note: As the section title implies, users of any license provided
by ReliaSoft Corporation for evaluation purposes (even if it is, for example, a Single User or Network License), shall
abide by the rules set forth in this section.
3.8 Complimentary License. Complimentary Licenses have the same installation and use rights as their corresponding
purchased licenses (e.g., a Complimentary Single User License provides the same installation and use rights as the
Single User License). However, You have no rights under any other sections of this Agreement other than those
specifically allowed for within this section (Section 3.8). THE APPLICATION IS LICENSED AS IS with no
representations or warranties of any kind and license transfers are NOT allowed.
Regardless of the license type You have obtained from ReliaSoft Corporation, You may access shared data storage files or
databases relating to the Application across a wide area network (WAN) or a virtual private network (VPN), instead of a local area
network (LAN), as long as such access is permitted by your policies and authorized by You via appropriate Application and
network configuration settings. Although such access is not prohibited by ReliaSoft Corporation, you acknowledge that WAN and
VPN data transfer rates vary widely and could lead to decreased and unpredictable performance (as compared to a LAN) and
therefore disclaim any expectation of Application performance should you choose to a) configure any part of the Application, b) use
the Application, or c) access shared data storage files in a distributed environment over a WAN or VPN. Such disclaimer does not
apply to any Application designated and licensed as a native Web-based Application by ReliaSoft Corporation.
4 SOFTWARE TRANSFERS
4.1 Single User License. You may permanently transfer all of your rights related to a Single User License under this
Agreement, provided that You retain no copies, You transfer all of the Application (including all component parts, media,
printed or electronic materials, any upgrades and this Agreement) and the transferee agrees to the terms of this
Agreement. If the Application is an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the Application. Single User
License transfers are only allowed between Named Users of the same organization (i.e., transfers are not allowed across
different organizations). The Named User transferring the Application must deactivate any and all active installations of
the Application before the transferee can Activate the Application. A Single User License may not be transferred more
than two times in a calendar year. This section also applies to Single User License Rentals.
4.2 Standard Network, Concurrent Network, Asset-based and Unlimited User Licenses. Standard Network, Concurrent
Network, Asset-based and Unlimited User licenses are NOT transferable across organizations, and licensing rights
CANNOT be split or transferred between multiple organizations in cases of corporate acquisitions or divestitures, except
as allowed in items (a) and (b) of this section (Section 4.2), and with ReliaSoft Corporations written consent.
In the case of Standard and Concurrent Network Licenses, Named User Activations can be deactivated and replaced by
new users on a permanent basis. In other words, replacement of users is allowed to accommodate attrition and
reassignment of user responsibilities in the ordinary course of doing business. However, replacing users on a daily,
weekly, monthly or even quarterly basis and frequently reactivating users that were previously replaced is an indication
that the number of Named Users (for Standard Network Licenses) or Named User Activations (for Concurrent Network
Licenses) obtained by You is not adequate to serve the pool of users intending to Access the Application and is therefore
prohibited. Each Standard Network License seat or Concurrent Network Named User Activation can be reassigned to a
different Named User no more than two times in a calendar year.
In cases of corporate acquisitions or divestitures: (a) Standard Network and Concurrent Network licenses remain with the
organization that originally obtained the licenses, (e.g., if the organization that holds the license is acquired by another
entity, the licensing rights will be transferred to the acquiring entity); (b) Unlimited Site-Wide licenses remain with the
original licensing site and therefore pass on to the owner of the specific licensing site as long as the site continues to
exist; (c) Unlimited Division-Wide licenses remain with the organization that originally obtained the licenses in cases
where the Division is being partially divested, and are terminated when the Division is fully divested. As an example, in a
partial divestiture, the portions of the Division divested will not have access to the Division-Wide license whereas the
portions of the Division that remain will continue to have access to the Division-Wide license; and (d) Unlimited
Corporate-Wide licenses remain with the organization that originally obtained the licenses as long as said organization
divested a portion of its business or acquired other organizations, and are terminated in cases where said organization
was acquired by another organization. As an example, in a partial divestiture, the portions of the corporation divested will
not have access to the Corporate-Wide license whereas the portions of the corporation that remain will continue to have
access to the Corporate-Wide license. As a further example, an organization with a Corporate-Wide license having
acquired other entities (either in part or in whole) will continue to have the same licensing rights as before the acquisition
and can therefore deploy the same licensing rights to the newly acquired entities.
This section also applies to Standard Network and Concurrent Network License Rentals.
5 DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS, LIMITATIONS AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
5.1 Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly. You may not reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the Application. You shall not provide, disclose or otherwise make available the Application, in any form, to
any person other than your employees and under your direction and control for purposes specifically related to your
permitted use of the Application. You will not: (a) alter, modify or prepare derivative works of the Application; (b) transmit
the Application electronically by any means; or (c) cause or permit the translation, reverse engineering, disassembly, or
decompilation of the Application to determine any design structure, source code, concepts and methodology behind the
Application, whether to incorporate it within any product of your own creation, create a derivative work, create any
product that is competitive with the Application or other ReliaSoft Corporation products, or for any other purpose.
5.2 Copyright. All title and copyrights to the Application are owned by ReliaSoft Corporation (or its suppliers or licensors).
The Application is protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore, You must treat the
Application like any other copyrighted material except that You may make one copy of the media solely for backup or
archival purposes.
5.3 Proprietary Notices. All title, trademarks, copyrights and intellectual property rights in and pertaining to the Application
(including but not limited to any copies thereof, software structure and organization, source code, images and new
releases) are valuable property of ReliaSoft Corporation and are owned or licensed by ReliaSoft Corporation. You may
not intentionally remove, alter or destroy any form of copyright and trademark notices, proprietary markings or
confidential legends placed upon or contained within the Application, including but not limited to any such notices
contained in physical and/or electronic media or documentation, in the Application interface boxes, or in any of the
runtime resources, code or other embodiments originally contained in or dynamically or otherwise created by the
Application.
5.4 Use of ReliaSoft Corporations Marks. You may not use the name, logos, trade names or trademarks of ReliaSoft
Corporation or any of its affiliates in any manner including, without limitation, in your advertising, promotional literature or
any other material, whether in written, electronic, or other form distributed to any third party, except in the form provided
by ReliaSoft Corporation and then solely for the purposes of identifying your use of the ReliaSoft Corporation Application.
5.5 Verification. You will provide, on ReliaSoft Corporations reasonable written request, written verification that the
Application is being used according to the terms of this Agreement. Upon thirty days prior written notice, if ReliaSoft
Corporation has reasonable grounds to believe that this Agreement has been breached, ReliaSoft may audit your use of
the Application provided such audit is: (a) limited to records relating solely to the Application necessary to verify
compliance with the terms of this Agreement; (b) performed by a reputable independent third party auditor acceptable to
You (acting reasonably); (c) the third party auditor shall comply with your standard security policies; (d) the third party
auditor shall execute your standard protective non-disclosure agreement; and (d) the cost of any requested audit will be
solely borne by ReliaSoft Corporation if no breach is found as a result of the audit or will be solely borne by You if a
breach is found. Such audit shall occur no more than once every twelve months and shall not unreasonably interfere with
your normal business operations.
5.6 Modification. ReliaSoft Corporation reserves the right to modify or enhance the Application without obligation to notify
You of such changes or to furnish them to You, unless otherwise agreed upon with a separate agreement (such as an
annual maintenance agreement).
5.7 Copying. You may not, under any circumstances, copy the Application, in whole or in part, except as expressly provided
under the Copyright section above.
5.8 Separation of Components. The Application is licensed as a single product. Its component parts may not be separated
for use on more than one computer.
5.9 Rental or Other Exploitation. You may not publish, sub-license, re-license, assign, sell, distribute, license, transfer,
rent, lease or lend the Application to any party, except transfer the Application as expressly provided under the Transfer
section above. If you received any revenues from the unlawful distribution of the Application, such revenues will be
forfeited to ReliaSoft Corporation.
5.10 Fees. You will pay ReliaSoft Corporation all fees or other amounts due under this Agreement, plus any and all applicable
taxes, within the payment term due date specified on the respective invoice. In the event that the respective invoice is not
paid on time, or at all, ReliaSoft Corporation reserves the right to terminate this Agreement and revoke the corresponding
licenses issued to You within the scope of this Agreement.
5.11 Termination. Without prejudice to any other rights, ReliaSoft Corporation may terminate this Agreement if You fail to
comply with the terms and conditions of this Agreement and such breach is not cured within thirty days of notice of such
breach. In such event, You must destroy all copies of the Application and all of its component parts. Additionally, You
may be held liable for any damage or loss of profit caused to ReliaSoft Corporation arising from unauthorized use or
duplication of this Application.
5.12 Supplemental Licenses. If, after the effective date of this Agreement, You subsequently purchase additional licenses of
the Application, these supplemental licenses will be included under this Agreement.
5.13 Press Releases. As part of this Agreement, You acknowledge that ReliaSoft Corporation may make reference to You as
a customer of ReliaSoft Corporation in press releases, advertising and promotional materials, and You consent to any
such reference. ReliaSoft Corporation will NOT disclose any further details beyond referring to You as a customer
without prior written consent, not to be unreasonably withheld.
5.14 Relationship. You and ReliaSoft Corporation are independent contractors and neither is an agent, joint venture partner,
partner or employee of the other, and ReliaSoft Corporation will not be obligated by any agreements or representations
made by You to any person, nor with respect to any other action by You, nor will ReliaSoft Corporation be obligated for
any damages to any person, whether caused by your actions, failure to act, negligence or willful conduct.
5.15 Upgrades. If the Application is an upgrade from another product, whether from ReliaSoft Corporation or another
supplier, You may use or transfer the Application only in conjunction with that upgraded product, unless You destroy the
upgraded product. If the Application is an upgrade of a ReliaSoft Corporation product, You may use the upgraded
product only in accordance with this Agreement. If the Application is an upgrade of a component of a package of
software programs that You licensed as a single product, the Application may be used and transferred only as part of
that single product package and may not be separated for use on more than one computer.
5.16 U.S. Government Restricted Rights. The Application was developed at private expense. No portion of the Application
was developed with government funds and the Application is a trade secret of ReliaSoft Corporation for all purposes of
the Freedom of Information Act. The Application and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use,
duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights
in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (or its successor) or subparagraphs (c)(1)
and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19 (or its successor), as applicable.
Manufacturer is ReliaSoft Corporation, 1450 S. Eastside Loop, Tucson, Arizona 85710, USA.
5.17 Limited Warranty. ReliaSoft Corporation warrants that: (a) the Application will perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials, and on machines meeting the published minimum requirements, for a period of sixty
(60) days from the date of receipt; and (b) any media on which the Application is furnished will be free from defects for a
period of sixty (60) days from the date of receipt. Some states and jurisdictions do not allow limitations on duration of an
implied warranty, so the above limitation may not apply to You; in such states and jurisdictions the liability of ReliaSoft
Corporation shall be limited to the minimum extent permitted by law. To the extent allowed by applicable law, implied
warranties on the Application and media, if any, are limited to sixty (60) days; and (c) at the time of installation, the
Application will be free from any mechanism, feature or any other codes or instructions that: (i) cause the Application to
remotely transmit information to ReliaSoft or any third party, except to communicate with one of ReliaSofts servers to
facilitate specific functions of the Application (such as to communicate with the ReliaSoft License Server, access the
online help files, etc.); or (ii) may be used to permit Access to, or use of, the Application or computer system on which the
Application is loaded, or to which the Application is linked, by ReliaSoft or any third party.
5.18 Customer Remedies. ReliaSoft Corporation's and its suppliers' or licensors entire liability and Your exclusive remedy
shall be, at ReliaSoft Corporation's option, either (a) return of the fee paid for the Application, or (b) repair or replacement
of the Application or media that does not meet ReliaSoft Corporation's Limited Warranty and which is returned to
ReliaSoft Corporation with a copy of your receipt or invoice. Any replacement Application or media will be warranted for
the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. None of these remedies nor any
product support services offered by ReliaSoft Corporation are available without a valid License Certificate issued by
ReliaSoft Corporation.
5.19 Warranty Exclusions. The Limited Warranty is void if the damage or defect has resulted from accident, abuse or
misapplication. Any modification of the Application by any person other than ReliaSoft Corporation shall void this
warranty. Any manipulation of the Applications data storage infrastructure or direct storage of data into the Applications
data storage from outside the Application by any person other than ReliaSoft Corporation or ReliaSoft Corporations
authorized representative shall void this warranty. The warranties in this section extend only to You and are contingent
upon proper use of the Application. The warranties will not apply to any failure caused by (a) accident, (b) unusual
physical, electrical or electro-magnetic stress, (c) negligence, (d) misuse, (e) failure of electrical power, air conditioning or
humidity control, (f) use of the Application with any equipment or software not reflected in ReliaSoft Corporations
specifications, (g) installation, alteration or repair of the Application by anyone other than ReliaSoft Corporation or
ReliaSoft Corporations authorized representative, or (h) or installation on equipment on which the original identification
marks have been removed or altered.
5.20 No Other Warranties. No oral or written information or advice given by ReliaSoft Corporation, its suppliers, dealers,
distributors or agents shall create a warranty or in any way increase the scope of the Limited Warranty, and You may not
rely on any such information or advice as a warranty.
5.21 Use of Results Provided By the Application Disclaimer. You understand that the results provided by the Application
cannot replace judgment required for important decisions. Use of the results provided is done completely at your own
risk. ReliaSoft Corporation does not warrant that the functions of this Application will meet your requirements or be error
free. You assume all risk of the use, quality and performance of the Application, and You are advised to use your own
discretion and judgment regarding the use of the Application.
5.22 RELIASOFT CORPORATION, ON BEHALF OF ITSELF AND ITS LICENSORS, DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH REGARD TO THE APPLICATION. IN NO
EVENT SHALL RELIASOFT CORPORATION OR ITS SUPPLIERS OR LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION
OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE APPLICATION,
EVEN IF RELIASOFT CORPORATION HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. USE OF
THIS APPLICATION IS DONE COMPLETELY AT YOUR OWN RISK, INCLUDING THE USE OF RESULTS PROVIDED
BY THIS APPLICATION. RELIASOFT CORPORATIONS LIABILITY HEREUNDER SHALL BE LIMITED TO PHYSICAL
DAMAGE DIRECTLY CAUSED BY THE SOLE NEGLIGENCE OF RELIASOFT CORPORATION AND SHALL NOT
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING HEREIN TO THE
CONTRARY, THE FOREGOING DISCLAIMER AND LIMITATION OF LIABLITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO RELIASOFT
CORPORATIONS OBLIGATIONS UNDER ANY CLAIM OF INFRINGEMENT AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 5.28 OF
THIS AGREEMENT.
5.23 Venue. Venue for any proceedings arising out of or relating to this Agreement shall be in Tucson, Pima County, Arizona.
The parties disclaim the application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods.
This Agreement is governed by the laws of the State of Arizona, USA, without reference to conflict to law principles. Each
party to this Agreement submits to the exclusive jurisdiction of the state and federal courts in the State of Arizona for the
purpose of resolving any disputes arising under or relating to this Agreement. Each party waives any jurisdictional, venue
or inconvenient forum objections to such courts.
5.24 Legal Expenses. If legal action is taken by either party to enforce this Agreement, all costs and expenses (including
reasonable attorney fees) incurred by the prevailing party in exercising any of its rights or remedies or in enforcing any of
the terms, conditions, or provisions of this Agreement will be paid by the other party.
5.25 Force Majeure. ReliaSoft Corporation will not be responsible for delays or failures in its performance due, in whole or in
part, to any cause beyond its reasonable control.
5.26 Export Control. Regardless of any disclosure made by You to ReliaSoft Corporation of an ultimate destination of the
Application, You will not export, either directly or indirectly any Application without first obtaining all licenses required,
from the U.S. Department of Commerce or any other agency or department of the United States Government, and
complying with the applicable laws. Neither the Application nor any direct product thereof may be exported, directly or
indirectly, in violation of applicable export laws, or may be used for any purpose prohibited by these laws including,
without limitation, nuclear, chemical or biological weapons proliferation. ReliaSoft Corporation will provide You with all
reasonable information requested by You in connection to exporting the Application, including providing You with the
U.S. Export Controls Classification Number (ECCN) for the Application.
5.27 Waiver. The waiver by either party of any breach of this Agreement shall be in writing and shall not constitute a waiver of
any other or subsequent breach. No waiver of any of the provisions of this Agreement will be deemed, or will constitute, a
waiver of any other provision, whether or not similar, nor will any waiver constitute a continuing waiver. The failure by a
party to enforce any provision of this Agreement will not be deemed a waiver of future enforcement of that or any other
provision.
5.28 Indemnification. You will indemnify and hold ReliaSoft Corporation harmless against any and all claims, damages,
losses, costs or other expenses (including reasonable attorney fees) that arise directly or indirectly from your breach of
this Agreement. ReliaSoft Corporation shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless, at its own expense, You and your
assigns, successors, directors, officers and employees (each an Indemnified Party) against any and all claims incurred
by or made against an Indemnified Party by a third party in connection with a claim, suit or action which is based on an
allegation that the Application when used by You as authorized under this Agreement, misappropriates or infringes any
third party patent, copyright, trade secret or other intellectual property right (each, a Claim) provided that ReliaSoft
Corporation shall have received from the Indemnified Party: (i) notice of such Claim as soon as possible after You
receive notice of the Claim; given that a failure to provide notice shall only relieve ReliaSoft Corporation of its indemnity
obligation to the extent ReliaSoft Corporation was prejudiced by such failure; (ii) the exclusive right to control and direct
the investigation, defense or settlement of such claim; and (iii) all reasonable necessary cooperation by You. If your use
of any of the Application is, or in ReliaSoft Corporations opinion is likely to be, enjoined due to a Claim, ReliaSoft
Corporation may, at its sole discretion: (a) modify the Application so that it becomes non-infringing, provided such
modifications result in software with substantially similar functionality and performance; (b) procure for You the right to
continue using the Application under substantially the same terms and conditions as provided for hereunder; or (c) if (a)
and (b) are commercially impracticable, terminate the Agreement and refund to You the license fee paid by You for the
Application which is the subject of the Claim as reduced to reflect a three-year straight-line depreciation from the
applicable license purchase date. The foregoing indemnification obligation of ReliaSoft Corporation shall not apply: (1) if
the Application is modified by any party other than ReliaSoft Corporation and such modification was not authorized in
writing by ReliaSoft Corporation, but solely to the extent the alleged infringement is caused by such modification; or (2) to
any release of the Application other than the most current release, provided that: (I) the most current release was either
made available at no cost to You and (II) You had a commercially reasonable period of time (not to exceed 60 days) after
availability of the current release to implement the current release so as to avoid the infringement claim. This section
(Section 5.28) sets forth ReliaSoft Corporations sole liability and your sole and exclusive remedy with respect to any
claim of infringement.
5.29 Equitable Relief. You acknowledge and agree that, due to the unique nature of the Application, there can be no
adequate remedy at law for any breach of your obligations under this Agreement, that any such breach may allow You or
third parties to unfairly compete with ReliaSoft Corporation resulting in irreparable harm and therefore that, upon any
such breach or threat thereof, ReliaSoft Corporation shall be entitled to injunctive and other appropriate equitable relief in
addition to whatever remedies it may have at law.
5.30 Entire Agreement; Amendments. This Agreement is the complete and exclusive statement of the agreement between
the parties and supersedes all prior agreements and communications with respect to the subject matter, and there are no
oral representations, understandings or agreements that are not fully expressed herein. Any terms appearing on any
order or other form used by You which modify or conflict with the terms and conditions set forth herein are expressly
rejected. Except for the purpose of negating implied warranties, no course of prior dealings between the parties and no
usage of the trade shall be relevant to supplement or explain any term used in this Agreement. No ReliaSoft Corporation
employee other than an officer of ReliaSoft Corporation (Vice President and above) shall have any actual or apparent
authority to modify the terms of this Agreement in any way. All amendments shall be in writing and signed by the
authorized representative of ReliaSoft Corporation.
5.31 Severability. If any one or more of the provisions of this Agreement shall for any reason be held to be invalid, illegal or
unenforceable in any respect, any such provision shall be severable from this Agreement, in which event this Agreement
shall be construed as if such provision had never been contained herein.
5.32 Electronic Signatures. ReliaSoft Corporation and You agree that this Agreement may be executed electronically and
that electronic copies of this Agreement shall be binding upon the parties to the same extent as manually-executed
copies.